This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
^ ESP A k i
1 ^ EficaJa d£? ií6.ooo.oíH
-"^ r Til
Digitized by
Google
i
METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.
AMERICAN ORIGINAL EDITION.
SPANISH
CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR
BY
CHARLES MARQÜARD SAÜER.
THOROUGHLY REVISED AND ENLARGED
BY
FERNANDO DE ARTEABA, HON. M. A..
TAYLORIAN TEACHER OF SPANISH IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD
SEVENTH EDITION
1904.
JULIUS GROOS SCHOENHOP BOOK COMPANY
HEIDELBERG. BOSTON.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
7
/ HaRVARü '
JNlVERSnv
LISRAkY
y
The method of Gaspey-Otto-Sauer is my own private property,
having been acquired by parchase from the authors. The text-books made
after this method are incessantly improved. All rights, especially the
right of making new editions, and the right of translation for all languages,
are reserved. Imitations and fraudulent impressions will be prosecuted
according to law. I am thankful for any communications relating to these
matters.
Heidelberg.
«Trillus Oro OS*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Preface to the First Edition.
The so-called Conversation method, uniting at once
theory and practice, has met with the greatest success
in Germany as well as in England, America, and France.
Hitherto, more than twelve grammars, based on this
method, have been published, and some of them, m>. —
the ^^Englische Conversations-GrammatiJc" by Dr. Gaspey,
the ^'Franeosische Conversations-GrammatiJc," and the
^^German Conversation-Grammar" by Dr. Emil Otto —
have passed through 14 double editions, a result which
plainly shows the value of the new method. My Italian
Grammars, for English, French, and German pupils,
have likewise been successful, and my new Spanish
Grammar for Germans was so well received both by
the critic and the public, that I have ventured to
produce a Spanish Grammar for the use of English
students.
Without entering into particulars as to the method,
which is sufficiently known in England and America,
I beg leave to state, that this book is no translation of
my Spanish Grammar for Germans, but a work adapted
to the genius of the English language. The gramma-
tical part is based on the best German works hitherto
published on the ^^Grammaire espagnole" by Gildo, the
"Gramática castellana" by D. Giró y Boma, Valencia
1852, and on the 12th edition of the excellent Grammar
by D. Andres Bello, Madrid 1878. Besides these works.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
IV Preface.
Salva has been carefully consulted. The Reading Exer-
cises of the Second Part were selected from specimens
of' the best Spanish authors given in the collection of
FigueraSy Barcelona 1857.
The arrangement of the grammatical materials is
the same as in the other Conversation-Grammars. The
alphabetical register of the irregular verbs has been
placed at the end of the Second Part, as the pupil might
easily be misled were it to follow the First Part, which
is succeeded by an alphabetical hst of the verbs with
double participles.
Finally, I have to return my best thanks to
Dr. Gaspey, who kindly revised the English text, and
to Dr. von Frantzius, who attended to the Spanish.
Toeplitz-Schoenau.
C. M. Sauer.
Preface to the Present Edition.
The publication of the present volume is due to
the wish of the well-known firm Jalins Groos to pro-
vide a Spanish Grammar which should satisfy the
growing requirements of the student of modern lan-
guages.
It is a revised Edition of the excellent Spanish
Oonyersation-Grammar by Charles Marquard Sauer,
into which many alterations and modifications have
been introduced. The principal changes which may be
noted are as follows:
In Part I: Lesson 6th. Classification and Tabu-
lation of the Augmentatives and Diminutives.
Lesson 15th. Distinction between Possessive Ad-
jectives and Possessive Pronouns.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Preface. V
Lessons 19 th. Fuller treatment of the theory go-
verning the Position of the Adjective.
Lesson 22 nd. Detailed explanation of the Euphonic
basis of the apparent irregularities in certain verbs.
Lesson 27 th. Discussion of the proper application
of the Spanish Passive Voice, and of the restrictions
to be observed in employing it.
Lessons 35 th to 40 th. Recasting of the classification
of the Irregular Verbs.
Lesson 41st. A new section upon the Present
Participle.
In Part II: Introductory chapter. Insertion of
the grammatical rules on accentuation laid down by
the Spanish Academy.
Lesson 3rd. Treatment of ^^o'' and of the Article
in idiomatic phrases.
Lesson 5 th. The use of the degrees of comparison
in association with Verbs and Adverbs.
These are the most important innovations, but it
should be pointed out that the entire scheme of the
explanatory exposition has been co-ordinated and revised,
and that the Exercises and Translations have been
correspondingly altered and enlarged.
Further, a large amount of new material has been
introduced into the Reading Exercises in order to give
the student a glimpse into the geography, the history,
and the manners and customs of Spain and South
America.
Some characteristic specimens of poetry and prose
illustrative of the literature of the country, especially
in its modern phases, are given both in the body of
the work and in the two special chapters with which
it concludes.
It has seemed unnecessary in the present Edition
to add a Vocabulary to the second as well as to the
Digitized by VaOOQlC
VI Preface.
first Part. The student who has mastered the contents
of the Grammar ought to be in a position to reap the
advantages which may be obtained by consulting a
complete dictionary. With regard to the use of the
Vocabularies of Part I., inserted at the end of the
volume, it should be observed that each irregular verb
is accompanied by a reference to the page on which it
is conjugated, and that the interpretation assigned to
each word has been necessarily limited to the meaning
or meanings in which it is found in the Beading
Exercises or Traducciones.
Taylor Institution, Oxford, Sept. 30th, 1903.
Fernando de Arteaga y Pereira.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
VII
Contents.
First Part.
Page
Phonology. — The Alphabet 1
The Alphabet 1
Pronunciation 2
General Remarks on the Accent 5
Capital Letters 5
Separation of Words 6
On the Signs of Punctuation 7
1. Lesson. Lección primera. The Article 8
2. » Lección segunda. The Plural of Substantives . 11
3. » Lección tercera. The Substantives in connection
with the Prepositions 14
4. » Lección cuarta. Prepositions 19
5. » Lección quinta. The Substantive without the
Article 23
6. » Lección sexta. Augmentatives and Diminutives 26
7. » Lección séptima. Proper Names 28
8. » Lección octava. The Auxiliary Verb Jffaber,
to have • 32
9. » Lección novena. Tener^ to have^ to hold . . 35
10. » Lección diez. Exercises 37
11. » Lección once. The Auxiliary Verb Ser, to be 40
12. » Lección doce. Estar ^ to be 43
13. » Lección trece. Exercises 45
14. » Lección catorce. Determinative Adjectives . . 48
1. Demonstrative Adjectives 48
2. Interrogative Adjectives 49
15. » Lección quince. Possessives 51
1. Possessive Adjectives 52
2. Possessive Pronouns 55
16. » Lección dieciséis. Numerals 56
1. Cardinal Numbers 56
17. » Lección diecisiete. Numerals 62
2. Ordinal Numbers. — Fractionals. — Mul-
tiplicatives 62
18. » Lección dieciocho. Numerals 67
3. Indefinite Numerals 67
19. » Lección diecinueve. The Adjective 71
Digitized by VjOOQIC
VIII Contents.
Page
20. Lesson* Lección veinte. Degrees of Comparison ... 77
21. » Lección veintiuna. The Regular Verb .... 82
Reading Exercise: — Geografia de España . 90
22. » Lección veintidós. Euphonic Changes in Certain
Verbs 91
Reading Exercise:— Cantares 94
23. » Lección veintitrés. Personal Pronouns .... 94
Reading Exercise : — (rco^ra/ta de España
(Continuación) 97
24. » Lección veinticuatro. Conjunctive Personal
Pronouns 98
Reading Exercise:— Cantare» 104
25. » Lección veinticinco. Demonstrative and Inter-
rogative Pronouns 104
Reading Exercise: — Geografia de España
(Continuación) 107
26. » Lección veintiséis. Possessive and Relative Pro-
nouns 108
Reading Exercise : — Cantares 112
27. » Lección veintisiete. The Passive Voice .... 112
Neuter Verbs 116
Reading Exercise:— (reo^ra/ía de España
(Continuación) 119
28. » Lección veintiocho. Pronominal or Reflective
Verbs 119
Reading Exercise:— ios Padres y los Hijos 124
29. » Lección veintinueve. Impersonal Verbs .... 125
Reading Exercise: — G^eo^rra/ta de España
(Conclusión) 128
30. » Lección treinta. Adverbs 129
Reading Exercise:— Xos Hijos y los Padres 133
31. » Lección treinta y una. The Adverbs continued 133
Reading Exercise: — La Opinion 139
32. » Lección treinta y dos. Prepositions 139
Reading Exercise: — El traidor despreciado . 142
33. » Lección treinta y tres. Conjunctions 142
Reading Exercise:- Canción de la Primavera 145
34. » Lección treinta y cuatro. Interjections .... 146
Reading Exercise:— í^sjoa^a. — Diversidad
de lenguas 146
35. » Lección treinta y cinco, The Irregular Verbs . 147
First Class. Models: alentar, encender ,
adquirir 148
Reading Exercise: — España. — Diversidad
de costumbres 153
36. » Lección treinta y seis. The Irregular Verbs
continued 1^3
Second Class. Models: acordar, morder,
Jugar 1-53
Reading Exercise: — Al caer de la tarde . . 158
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Contents. IX
Page
37. Lesson. Lección treinta y siete. The Irregular Verbs
continued 159
Third Class. Models: nacer ^ crecer, co-
nocer, lucir 159
conducir 160
Fourth Class. Model: pedir 163
Heading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro-
vincias de España 166
38. » Lección treinta y ocho. The Irregular Verbs
continued 166
Fifth Class. Model: sentir 167
Sixth Class. Models: huir, argüir , . . 168
Reading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro-
vincias de España (Continuación) ... 171
39. » Ljccción treinta y nueve. Verbs entirely irregu-
lar or with irregularities otherwise not
classified 172
Models: andar j asir, caber 172
caer, oir, dar, decir 173
Reading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro-
vincias de España (Continuación) . . . 176
40. » Lección cuarenta. The entirely irregular Verbs
continued 176
Models: dormir 176
hacer, ir, morir, poder .... 177
poner, podrir, querer . . . . 178
saber, salir, valer, traer ... 179
venir, ver 180
Reading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro-
vincias de España (Continuación) ... 182
41. » Lección cuarenta y una. The Participle ... 183
Present Participle 183
Past Participle 187
Alphabetical List of the Verbs with Double
Participles 188
Alphabetical List of the Defective Verbs . 192
Reading Exercise:— Diversidad de las Pro-
vincias de Es paña XConclusión) 193
Second Part.
Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation 195
Orthography 195
Accentuation 199
The Signs of Punctuation 202
1. Lesson* The Gender of Substantives 204
Reading Exercise: — Descubrimiento de América 214
2. » The Plural of Substantives 215
Reading Exercise:— Descripción del Pais wie-
jicano . . . • 219
Digitized by VaOOQlC
X Contents.
Page
3. Lesson* Use of the Article 220
Reading Exercise:— Descripción de la Ciudad
de Méjico 232
4. » Possessives 232
Heading Exercise:— Descripción de la Plaza
del Mercado de Méjico 236
5. » Degrees of Comparison with Verbs and Adverbs 237
Heading Exercise : — De las Biquezas del Perú 243
6. » Numerals 243
Indefinite Numerals 245
Heading Exercise: — De algunas Costumbres
de los Incas 251
7. » Pronouns. — Personal Pronouns * 252
Heading Exercise: — De algunas Costumbres
de los Incas (Continuación) 255
8. » Demonstratives. — Interrogative Pronouns . . 256
Demonstratives 256
Interrogative Pronouns 259
Heading Exercise :—^ranííe;?a y Decadencia
de España 261
9. » Possessive and Helative Pronouns 262
Heading Exercise: — Grandeza y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 268
10. » Adverbs. — Their Position. — Affirmations
and Negations 269
Peculiarities of certain adverbs 269
Position of the Adverbs 271
Affirmations and Negations 271
Heading Exercise: — Grandeza y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 274
11. » Prepositions. — Proper Prepositions (á, de,
en, con) 275
Heading Exercise:— C?raw(íc;2:a y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 282
12. » The Prepositions continued (por, para) . . 282
Heading EyLetcise:— Grandeza y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 288
13. » Prepositions. — Conclusion (ante, contra^
desde, entre, Jiácia, hasta, según,
sin, só, sobre, tra^) 289
Improper Prepositions 291
Heading Exercise:— Grandeza y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 294
14. » Use of Conjunctions 295
Connective Conjunctions 295
Disjunctive Coni unctions 296
Adversative Conjunctions 296
Conditional Conjunctions 298
Causal and Final Conjunctions 300
Subordinative Conjunctions 302
Heading Exercise:— 6r ran cierra y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 304
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Contents.
XI
Page
15. Lesson. The Object of the Verb. — The Direct Object 305
Readmg Exerciae :— Grandeza y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 310
16. » Remarks on the Spanish Passive Voice and
on some Spanish and English Verbs . . 311
Reading Exerci&Q:— Grandeza y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 317
17. » Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs 317
Reading Exercise:— GVande^ra y Decadencia
de España (Continuación) 324
18. » The Moods 325
The Indicative Mood 325
The Subjunctive Mood 325
The Imperative Mood 828
Reading Exercise:— G'rand^áf a y Decadencia
de España (Conclusión) 329
19. » The Use of the Tenses. — Sequence of Tenses 330
Use of the Tenses of the Indicative . . . 330
Reading Exercise: La Farsa de Avila . . . 336
20. » The Use of the Tenses. — Sequence of Tenses 337
The Tenses of the Indicative 337
The Tenses of the Subjunctive 338
Sequence of Tenses ^ 338
Reading Exercise: — A Don Pedro Fernandez
de Castro 344
21. » The Infinitive Mood 345
The Absolute Infinitive 345
The Dependent Infinitive 346
Reading Exercise : —Lope Félix de Vega Carpió 350
22. » The Infinitive (Conclusión) 351
The Infinitive taking the place of an accessory
sentence 351
Reading Exercise:— Bcíraí o del Duque de
Wellington. ... • 353
23. » The Gerund 354
Reading Exercise: — Facia 359
24. » The Past Participle . . . . ' 360
Reading Exercise:— (Jarías de mi Sobrino . 367
JPúes€€í8. Oda Moral (Fray Luis de León) 368
Epístola Moral (Francisco de Bioja) 370
El Silencio (Ventura Buiz Aguilera) 375
La Duda (Gaspar Nuñez de Arce) 878
Consuelo Celestial (Argensola) 384
^osa* Armas y Letras (Miguel de Cervantes) .... 385
El Castellano Viejo (Mariano José de Jjarra) . 389
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs 398
Spanish-English Vocabulary 408
English-Spanish Vocabulary 417
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Digitized
by Google
FIRST PART.
Phonology. — The Alphabet.
(Fonología. — El alfabeto.)
§ 1. The Alphabet.
The Spanish Alphabet consists of 28 letters (rr
not included), which are as follows:
ChaiacteT.
Name. Pronunciation.
A, a,
áh as
a
in
áh.
B, b,
béh
b
bay.
C, c,
theh »
th
thanks.
Ch, ch,
tcheh »
ch
chain.
D, d,
déh »
d
day.
E, e,
éh
e
yellow.
F, f,
éffeh >
f
fellow.
G, g,
héh (guttural >
sound, see § 2)
ch
loch.
H, h,
áhtchéh (is si-
lent).
I, i,
ee »
i
fln.
J, j,
hohtah (gut- »
tural sound).
ch
loch.
K, k,
káh
k
king.
L, 1,
elleh
1
lemon.
LI, 11,
ellieh »
li
punctilio.
M, m,
emmeh »
m
memory.
N, n,
énneh »
n
noble.
% ñ.
ennieh »
gn
mignonette.
Spanish Cony.-Qrammar.
^1
Digitized
by Google
Character.
0.
0,
P.
P.
Q.
q.
R,
r,
s,
8,
T.
t,
u,
u,
V,
V,
X,
X.
Y,
y.
PronundatioD.
in
lost.
P
past.
C
cool.
r
red.
8
s^il.
t
tender,
cool.
b
bay.
X
six.
i
index.
Phonology. — The Alphabet.
Name.
oh as
peh
coo
éhrreh
ebsseb
teb
00
béb
ébkeece
ee greeébgab
[Greek ee]
Z, z, tbébta » tb > thanks.
N.B, — Of these letters a, e, i (y), o, u, are vowels, the
others are consonants. K as well as W (doble v) occur only
in a few foreign words, as Franklin , kilogramo, kilogram,
Mámetro, kilometre, Westminster.
§ 2. Pronunciation, — Pronunciación.
The pronunciation of the Spanish letters, as given
above, is the nearest possible to the true Castilian one»
but should be acquired viva voce from a native.
The following are some remarks in connection
with the special pronunciation of certain letters — i.e. :
Towels. — Vocales,
a is silent in the combinations gt^e, gui, que, qui;
g in such cases losing its harsh, guttural sound:
guerra^ war. queso, cheese.
guitarra, guitar. química, chemistry.
a after g, if not silent, requires a diaeresis:
zaragüelles (Valentian) breeches.
argüir, to argue.
y by itself sounds like Spanish i (EngUsh e) ; before a
vowel it is pronounced as y in year, año, you,
usted; and at the end of a syllable forms a
diphthong and sounds as y in hay, heno; boy,
muchacho.
y, and. ya, already. hay, there is.
^y^^j yesterday, hoy, to- day.
.^. J?.— Though in no case is any diflFerence implied in
regard to the quality of the vowel, Spanish vowels are short
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Phonology. — The Alphabet. 3
and passed over slightly, when not receiving any special
stress or accent, such as o in hablo, I speak; long and pro-
nounced with a pause and a depression of the voice when
receiving — anywhere but at the end of a word — either
the tonic or the written accent, as ó in hahldleSy he spoke
to them; and acute and pronounced with a long pause and
a raising of the voice when receiving either the tonic or the
written accent at the end of a word, as ó in habló, he
spoke.
Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — Diptongos y
triptongos.
* Diphthongs are formed by the juxtaposition of two
vowels {ae, ao, oa excepted). They are sounded as
one syllable, and are indivisible in writing. Strong
diphthongs (a) begin by a, e, o; weak diphthongs
(b) with i, u; final i becomes y:
(a) aire, air. seis, six. oigo, I hear.
hay, there is. ley^ law. doy, I give.
causa, cause. Ceuta, Ceuta.
(b) gloria, glory. yegua, mare.
cielo, sky. fuerm, strength.
accionar, to act. muy, very.
^.jB.— Weak diphthongs may have their last vowel
accented, which strong diphthongs may not:
dio, he gave. cai fno diphthong), I fell.
pié, foot. rei ^ » I laughed.
fui, I went. oí > » I heard.
Triphthongs are formed by the juxtaposition of
three vowels i,e,, i, u of the weak diphthongs pre-
ceding strong diphthongs ai, ei, which may then be
accented.
despreciáis, you despised. averigüéis, you may ascertain.
agraviéis, you may ofFend. buey, ox.
averiguáis, you ascertain.
General Remark. The above combinations of
vowels, however, do not always form a diphthong or
triphthong, as may be seen by the following examples:
pais, country. lei, I read.
aunar, to unity. oí, I heard.
tia, aunt. hiiir, to fly away.
tio, uncle. acentúe, that I accentuate.
fié, I confided.
1*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
4 Phonology. — The Alphabet.
averiguaríais, that you would ascertain.
confiéis, that you may confide.
continuéis, that you may continue.
Consonants. — Consonantes.
c acquires the hard sound of h before a, o, w, or
a consonant, or at the end of a word:
casa, house. actor, actor.
cosa, thing. criado, servant.
cuerda, rope. frac, evening-dress coat.
N,B.—c is only doubled in such words as acción, action,
lección, lesson (i.e., in the Latin combinations -dio),
d is omitted in conversation in endings ado:
un soldao (i.e., soldado), a soldier.
están casaos (i.e., casados), they are married.
g acquires the English sound of g in gall, gulf,
guide before Oj o, u, ue, uij He, Hi, or a consonant,
or at the end of a word:
gato, cat. zaragüelles, breeches.
digo, I say. argüir, to argue.
gusano, worm. grano, grain.
guerra, war. digno, worthy.
águila, eagle. tagalog, Tagalog.
q is only found in the combinations que, qui:
buque, ship. quilla, keel.
r is pronounced smoothly between two vowels,
stronger in the combinations br, pr, cr, gr, dr, tr^
and at the end of words. At the beginning of words,
as well as before consonants and after I9 n, 8, it has
a trilling sound:
héroe, hero. brazo, arm. retó, watch.
hora, hour. prisa, hurry. razón, reason.
crisis, crisis. hierba, grass.
grano, grain. carta, letter.
cuadro, picture. Ulrico, Ulric.
otra, other. honradez, honesty.
leer, to read. Israel, Israel.
N.JB.—r is only doubled (rr) between two vowels when-
ever not the smooth, but the trilling sound is to be produced:
perro, dog. guerra, war.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Phonology. — The Alphabet. 5
§ 3. General Remarks on the Accent. — Obser-
vaciones generales sobre el acento.
(See Second Part, § 3.)
Preliminary Remark. — The accentuation of Spanish
words is always a pronotmced one; whilst, e.g. y in French
the various syllables of the same word have almost a
uniform accentuation, Spanish has (like English and
German) one syllable which is the principal bearer of
the accent.
EuJe 1. Words terminating in vowels, also in w, 5,
have the stress on the penultimate syllable, as: alguno^
accented: alguno; Granada, accented: Granada; continuo,
accented: continuo.
Bule 2. Words ending in consmants — n and $
excepted — or in j/ have the stress on the last syllable,
as: reloj, accented: reloj; señor, accented: señor; ley,
accented: ley.
Bule S. Diphthongs ia, ie, to, also endings gua,
güe, guo; cua, cue, cuo are always supposed to form one
syllable; the stress, therefore, is \^A on \he penultimate^
thus: India, accented: india; nadie, accented: nadie;
imperio, accented: imperio.
An exception to Rule 3 is presented when the
diphthong disappears, as in the verlal terminations in
ia, as: tenia, tendría, and in other cases — i.e,:
alegría, joy. frio, cold.
continúo, I continue.
Bule 4. Any deviation from the above general rules
is indicated by the wHtten accent. Thus: Sócrates,
Jesús, según, amé, etc. This accent is a sure guide to
pronunciation. See further Part II., The Accent.
§ 4. Capital Letters. — Letras mayúsculas.
In general these are used as in EngUsh; but the
names of the months and days of the weeks, substan-
tives and adjectives denoting nationality, etc., and the
personal pronoun 1, yo, are written in small letters:
el domingo, Sunday. tm inglés, an Englishman.
julio, July. él y yo, he and I.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
6 Phonology. — The Alphabet.
§ 5. The Separation of Words. — División de
sílabas.
1. A simple consonant between two vowels always
begins a syllable. Thus:
a-legre; a-nU-go, etc.
Note, — Ch, II, ñ are considered to be simple consonants,
and are thus subject to the preceding rule. Thus:
pU'Chero; mti-ñeca; o-Ua; ca-Uar,
2. If two consonants (rr excepted) come between
two vowels, the first of these consonants closes the
preceding syllable, and the second begins the following.
Thus:
pe^rro ; en^nohlecer ; ac-cidente ; aletar-gar ; adrhcrir, etc.*
On the contrary, I and r, if preceded by another
consonant (i.e., combinations like hi, br, cl, cr, pi, pr),
are always given to the following syllable. Hence the
separations are as follows:
a-prieto; Jia-blar; a-clamación; enno-blecer, etc.
N,B, —Exceptions :
(a) Those combinations where 8 precedes Z or r, as:
Í9~la; Is^aelj etc.
(b) The combination tl in words beginning with at, as:
at-leta; at-lante, etc.
3. Compound substantives do not follow the above
rules. They should always be separated conformably to
their components. Thus, desacordar is not separated desa-
cordar but des-acordar, because acordar is the main
component, whereas des is only a prefix, like the Eng-
lish mis in misconception or dis in distrust. Further
examples: ab-rogar (from rogar); a-delante (from delante);
sub-arriendo (fr. arrendar).
As, however, no word nor syllable may begin with
s followed by another consonant, we are obliged to
separate, in spite of etymology: ins-pirar; cos-tar;
inS'tituir.**
* H, though mute, is in such a case considered as a con-
sonant.
** The Spanish language avoids so carefully at the beginning
<of a word or a syllable combinations of s followed by another
•consonant, that an e is invariably prefixed to st, sp, etc., in order
to render the pronunciation feasible. Thus: espíritu (from the
Latin spiritus), especie (from species), esfera (from sphara), etc.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Phonology. — The Alphabet. 7
NoU, — With a great many words, that were originally
compounds, this fact has in course of time been lost sight
of. These words now follow the general rules. Thus, sHát
is not separated etymologically sfiHy-ir, but SfUrbir\ peregrino
is separated pe-^egrino; inicml = i-nicial; abtmdar = «-
hundar, etc.
4. If three consonants meet, the last of them, I and
r excepted, belongs to the following syllable. Thus:
inspirar; pers-^icaz; cons-tar.
§ 6. On the Signs of Punctuation. — De los
signos de puntuación.
1. The accent ('). The Spanish language has only
the acute accent, which is used if the stress is laid on
any other syllable than the general rules of prosody
would lead one to expect; thus: búscamelo, últimamente,
óptimo, pésimo, etc. ; or to distinguish words having the
same sound, as el (the) and él (he), tu (thy) and tú
(thou), etc.
2. The so-called tilde (~). This sign, peculiar to
the Spanish language, is placed over the n in order to
indicate that its pronunciation is not enne, but ennyey.
(See the pronunciation of n and ñ)
3. The crema () denotes that the vowel u above
which it is placed is not mute, according to the rule
stated in § 2, but must be sounded; thus: averigüéis,
pron. avéree-goo ey-is; argüir, pron. ar-goo-ir; vergüenza,
pron. ver-gooen-tha.
4. The signs of punctuation (los signos de puntua-
ción) are: the comma (,) (la cofna), semi-colon (;) (punto
y coma), colon (:) (dos puntos), period (.) (d punto final),
hyphen (-) (él guión), sign of interrogation (él interro-
gante, signo de interrogación) (¿) which is placed first
and (?) which is placed last; sign of exclamation (la ad-
miración, el signo de admiración) written (i) at the be^
ginning and (!) at the end.
The apostrophe is unknown in Spanish.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
First Lesson. — Lección primera.
The Article. — El artículo.
The Article indicates the gender of substantives.
The Spanish language has two genders— i;e>., the mas-
online and the feminine.
There are two articles in Spanish as in English:
the definite and the indefinite.
The definite article for masculine substantives is elj
for feminine substantives la.
Examples: el padre, the father; la madre, the
mother; el hijo, the son; la hija, the daughter; el sol-
etado, the soldier; la abeja, the bee.
Note,— A neuter gender, as, in German or Latin, does not
exist in Spanish. If, however, an adjective, pronoun, or
numeral is used as a substantive in a general sense, as: the
good, the evil, (the) mine and thine, etc., where neither a per-
son nor a thing, but the abstract idea is meant, the neuter
article lo is used. This article has, of course, no plural.
Examples: lo malo, the evil; lo hermoso, the beautiful j
lo mio, mine (i.e., my property); lo tuyo, thine, etc.
But: el mio, mine (i.e., brother, friend, etc.); el tuyo,
thine {i.e., dog, etc.).
Yet we must observe that whenever the meaning is not
quite abstract, the article el should be used. Thus, el mal
means a bad thing, while lo malo means the evil, in the ab-
stract sense ; el bien is a good thing, something good, whereas
lo bueno means the good in general.
The indefinite article for masculine substantives is
nn^ for feminine una. Their plurals unos^ unas^ mean
several, any, some, a few, etc.
Examples: \m padre, a father; una, madre, a mother;
unos animales, some animals; anas iglesias, some
churches.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Article. 9
Note,— Ab we stated in § 6, there is no apostrophe in
Spanish. Therefore the final vowel of the article is never
apostrophised as in French or Italian. The only change which
the article undergoes for the sake of euphony is the following:
JÍMÍe.— Before feminine substantives in the singular,
beginning with a or ha, accented on the first syllable,
la is replaced by el, and una by un. Thus; el are,
the bird (for la ave); el agua, the water (for la agua);
el alma^ the soul (for la alma); un águila, an eagle;
un harpa, a harp. This rule holds good only in the
singular, or when the word is not preceded by an ad-
jective. Thus, las águilas, the eagles; una Mmida ave,
a timid bird.
If, however, the stress is laid on any other syllable
than the first, the feminine article is used, as: la abeja,
the bee; una amiga, a friend (f.).
j In the following list of words the genders are indicated
by I», (mase.) and /*. (fem.).
Words.
Padre, father. ave f., \ b" d
madre, mother. pájaro m., / ^^ '
niño m., child. amigo m., friend.
libro m., book. hermano, brother.
balcón m., balcony. tía, aunt.
caballo m., horse. puerta f., door.
espejo m., looking-glass. pan m., bread.
sombrero m., hat. pluma f., pen.
árbol m., tree. portero m., porter.
cetro m., sceptre. rey, king.
perro m., dog. mwa, queen.
rejilla f., \ ^ ^¿^^ ¿qué? what?
ventanillo m., / ^ °* ¿quien? who?
vestido m., dress. no, no.
huerto m., orchard. si, yes.
jardín m., garden. mi, my.
casa {., house. en, in.
flor f., flower. y, and.
fusil m., gun. en España, in Spain.
8. yo tengo, I have.* P. noso/ros(^-as>¿cwei»os, we have.
tú tienes, thou hast. vosotros (-as) tenéis, you have.
él tiene, he has. ellos tienen, they have (m.).
ella tiene, she has. eZZas tienen, they have (f.).
* If the verb **to have" is not an auxiliary— i.e., used with
a past part., as : I have loved, we shall have found— but a prin-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
4
10 Lesson 1.
Beadlngr Exercise. 1.
La casa tiene un balcón, y la puerta tiene un ven-
tanillo. La casa tiene portero, pero no tiene jardín. Tiene*
una casa. En España una casa tiene portero. — ¿Quién
tiene el libro? Yo tengo el libro. Tú tienes un libro. ¿Tienes
tú un libro**? Él tiene un espejo. Mi padre tiene una casa.
Mi madre tiene el pan. El nifio tiene el espejo. El nifto
tiene un espejo. Mi tía tiene una casa. Mi hermano tiene
un perro. El rey tiene un cetro. Nosotros tenemos una flor
en el jardín. ¿ Tenéis vosotros huerto ? Si, tenemos un huerto
y un árbol en el huerto. ¿Tenéis vosotros una flor? Yo
tengo el vestido. ¿ Tiene ella un vestido ? Ella tiene un perro.
El nifio tiene un hermano y una tía. El rey tiene un águila.
Traducción, 2.
I have the book. I have a book. Thou*** hast the
dress. Hast thou a dog? Hast thou a looking-glass? He has
the hat. My father has the bird. Has she a house? Has he
the bread ? We have a hat. Have we a gun ? You have the
book. They (m,) have a garden. Have they (f.) a horse?
Have they (m.) a gun? The child has a book. The queen
has a brother. My aunt has a bird. My brother has a dog.
My mother has a pen.
Conversación,
¿Qué tiene la casa? La casa tiene balcón y portero.
¿Qué tiene la puerta? La puerta tiene un ventanillp.
¿Tenéis (vosotros) un libro? Sí, (nosotros) tenemos un libro.
¿Quién tiene el libro? El niño tiene el libro.
¿Tiene el hermano un fusil? Sí, el hermano tiene un fusil.
¿Tenéis (vosotros) el vestido? No, (nosotros) tenemos el som-
brero.
¿Tiene V. una casa? Sí, tengo una casa; tiene jar-
din.
¿Tiene (él) el pan? Sí, (él) tiene el pan.
¿Tiene ella jardín ó huerto? Tiene huerto, y en el huerto
un árbol.
¿Tiene el hermano un amigo? Sí, el hermano tiene un amigo.
cipal verb, as: I have (i.e., possess) a book; he had {i.e., he
possessed) a friend, the Spaniards do not use haber, which is
only an auxiliary, but tener; properly "to hold." Thus: "I have
a book" should not be translated ^'he un libro," but: tengo un
libro—i.e., I "hold" a book (in my possession).
* The personal pronouns are usually omitted before the verb.
We give them here in order to acquaint the pupil with these forms.
** See § 6, 1.
*** Although the 2nd pers. sing, is rarely used in English,
we give it here in order that the pupil may become accustomed
to its use in Spanish. ^^^^
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Plural of Substantives. 11
Second Lesson. — Lección segunda.
The Plural of Sabstantires. — Plural de los
sustantivos.
The following are the general rules for the for-
mation of the plural in Spanish:
1. All nouns ending in a single unaccented vowel
add s; thus:
El padre (father) Fl, los padres,
la madre (mother) las madres,
la carta (letter) las cartas,
el libro (book) los libros,
la mano (hand) las manos,
la metrópoli (capital) las metrópolis.
JYbfe.— Nouns ending in é follow the same rule, as: el
pié, the foot, los pies; el café, coffee; los cafés, coffee-houses.
2. Nouns ending in a consonant, in a*, i, or in
«^j ^1 oy, form the plural by adding es:
La flor (flower) PL las flores.
el pan (bread) los panes.
el mar (sea) los mares.
el mes (month) Iqs meses,
la civdad (town) las ciudades,
el amor (love) los amores,
el bote (boat) los botes,
el bajá (pasha) los bajaes.
el aleli (gillyflower) los álelies.
él ay (only used as an los ayes, wailings.
exclamation)
el rey (king) los reyes,
la ley (law) las leyes,
el buey (ox) los bueyes,
el convoy (convoy) los convoyes.
N.B,—Los padres, the parents.
Los reyes, the king and queen.
Remarks.
§ 1. With nouns ending in z the a is changed into c
in the plural, as:
La voz (voice) PI. las voces.
la paz (peace) las paces.
* Except: el papá, la mamá, el sofá', pi. los papás^ las ma'
más, los sofas.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
12 Lesson 2.
§ 2. A great many words have no singular. We give
those most in use:
Las afueras, the outskirts. ¡os modales, the manners.
los alrededores, the surround- las nupcias, the wedding,
ings. las patillas, the whiskers.
las andas, the];bier. los pertrechos, implements of
los caleonciUos, the pants. war.
las cercanías, the neighbour- las sobras, the refuse,
hood. las tenazas, the tongs.
las cosquillas, tickling. las tijeras, the scissors.
las entrañas, the entrails. las tinieblas, darkness.
las exequias, the funeral. los víveres, the victuals.
§ 3. Some words have a meaning in the singular, and
an additional peculiar meaning in the plural:
el agtui, the water PL las aguas, floods, medicinal
waters.
d anteojo, the telescope los anteojos, the spectacles.
él bien, goodness los bienes, the property.
la cadena, the chain las cadenas, the oppression.
el celo, the zeal los celos, jealousy.
el dia, the day los dias, the Saint's day.
la expresión, the expression las expresiones, "kind re-
gards."
la gracia, the grace, favour las gracias, the thanks.
la memoria, the memory ia^ wemonas, "kind regards."
el valor, the valour, value los valores, the securities,
funds.
§ 4. Some others, masculine in the singular, may include
the feminine in the plural, as:
El hijo (son) PL los hijos, children (but also sons).
el hermano (brother) los hermanos, brother and sister
(but also brothers).
el padre (father) los padres, the parents (but also
fathers).
el rey (king) los reyes, kings (but also king
and queen).
(See Second Part: On the PlnraL)
Note,—ThQ expressions: Good morning, good afternoon, good
evening, good night, are always plural in Spanish; thus:
Buenos dias, good morning 1
Buenos tardes, good afternoon I, good evening 1
Buenas noches, good night!
Words.
El cuchillo, the knife. la pluma, the pen.
el médico, the physician. la ventana, the window.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Plural of Substantives. 13
el azúcar, the sugar. la tinta, the ink.
d barquero, the boatman. el tintero, the inkstand.
el castillo, the castle. el palacio, the palace.
ei cuadro, the picture. rico, rich.
caballero, gentleman, Mr., Sir. oiro,-rt, another (see 18th Less.).
Señora, lady, Mrs., Madam. mucho, -a, mviah; sus, his, her.
Señorita, Miss. its, their.
la vela, the sail. dos, two; ¿re^, three; cuatro,
el lápiz, the pencil. four; cinco, five.
eZ reloj, the watch.
Verb.
To tenia, I had. g Tenia (yo) ? had I?
<i* tenias, thou hadst. g ¿ewias (tú) ? hadst thou ?
él tenia, he had. ¿ tenia (él) ? had he ?
nosotros teníamos, we had. ¿teníamos (nosotros) ?h2iáyre^
vosotros teníais, you had. ¿teníais (vosotros)? had you?
eZ?05 tenían, they had. ¿tenían (ellos)? had they?
Beading Exercise. 8.
Nosotros teníamos un cuchillo. Vosotras* teníais dos
cuchillos. Mi hermano tiene las tenazas. El rey tenía cuatro
caballos. ¿ Tenia (yo) los anteojos ? Él tenía los valores. Te-
nían víveres? Nosotros tenemos las cartas. Sus (f,) padres
tenían muchas casas. Los jardines tenían muchos alelíes y
otras flores. El nifio tenía un lápiz. Las niñas tenían los
lápices. El barquero tenía tres botes. El bote tiene una vela.
Mi hermano tiene un reloj. Los hermanos tenían muchos re-
lojes. ¿Tiene ella un cuadro? Ella tenía cinco cuadros en
la casa. El hombre rico tiene muchas casas. La hermana
tiene las tijeras.
( Traducción. 4.
Houses in Spain have a porter. The house had many
balconies. Houses in Spain have balconies, and the doors have
gratings. The sister had the scissors. Had you the spectacles?
Had we the victuals? The kings had many castles. The aunts
had the letters. Had the physician a pencil? The boatman
had a sail. Had you (f. pi.) the pictures? We (f, pi.) had
the pictures. Had the king many castles? The queen had
many horses. Hadst thou the pencils and the flowers? The
children had the bread. The sisters had the bread (i.e., loaves).
Had they (f.) the scissors ? Had the kings the castles and the
palaces ? Hadst thou my watch ? I had three watches. Good
evening, sir! Good night, Miss(N.)** Good morning, Mrs.!**
* In Spanish, ive (mase.) is nosotros; we (fern.) nosotras; you
(mase) is vosotros; you (fern.) vosotras.
** In English, Mr., Mrs., Miss are invariably followed by a
Digitized by VaOOQlC
14 Lesson 8.
ConTenaclón.
¿Tienen portero las casas? Si, tienen portero.
¿Tienen ventanas ó balcones Tienen muchos balcones.
las casas?
¿Qaión tenia los lápices? Las niñas tenian los lápices.
¿ Tiene el hermano un caballo? Si, el hermano tiene un caballo.
¿Tiene la hermana las tijeras? No, la hermana no tiene las
tijeras.
¿Tenia él su (his) sombrero? Si, tenia su sombrero.
¿Tenian flores los jardines? Tenian alelíes y otras ñores.
¿ Tienen los bajaes castillos ? No tienen castillos, pero tienen
palacios.
¿ Tenia el rey muchos caballos ? El rey tenia cien (100) caballos,
¿Tuvisteis (vosotras) las car- Nosotras tuvimos (had) las car-
tas? tas y los libros.
¿Tiene el médico una pluma? El médico tiene un lápiz, un
tintero y una pluma.
¿Tuvo el barquero un bote? El barquero tuvo tres botes.
¿ Tiene mi hermano un libro ? Tiene muchos libros.
! Buenos dias, señorita! ¡Buenos dias, caballero!
! Buenas tardes, señora! i Buenas noches, señorita!
Third Lesson. — Lección tercera.
The Substantives in Connection with the Pre-
positions. — Los sustantivos en relación con las
preposiciones.
Spanish substantives have no cases, though they
may in a way replace them by means of prepositions.
These prepositions, however, are not always simply
placed before the article, as in English, but sometimes
undergo a contraction with the article so as to form
one word, as will be seen hereafter.
1. The Nominative and Accttsative are always alike,
as in English.
2. The Genitive, answering the question whose?
or of which? is formed by putting de (of) before the
article. Thus: la reina, the queen; Gen. de la reina, of
the queen; la pluma, the pen; Gen. de la pluma, of
the pen.
person's name; in Spanish, however, cahallerOj señora, señorita
may stand by themselves.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Substantives in Connection with the Prepositions. 15
Only the masculine article el is, for euphony, con-
tracted with de into one word. Thus instead of de el rey,
of the king: del rey; of the son, del hijo, for de el hijo.
In the plural no contraction takes place. Thus :
de los médicos, of the physicians; de las cartas, of the
letters; de las plumas, of the pens.
3. The Dative is formed by putting á (to) before the
article. Thus: á la reina j to the queen; á la carta, to
the letter; á la hermana, to the sister.
The masculine article el is likewise contracted into
one word with the preposition á (of course, without the
accent). Thus: al hijo, to the son; al hermano, to the
brother (for á el hijo; á el hermano).
Observation.— (^mi^ peculiar to the Spanish language is
the use of the preposition á with the Accusative, in certain
cases when referring to living beings. That is to say, if the
direct object is a person or a personified thing, it should be
introduced as in the Dative case, and not in the Accusative.
Thus the sentence, "The mother loves the daughter," is not
translated : La madre ama la hija, but : La madre ama á la
hija, — "I see the man" is not: Yo veo él hombre, but: Yo
veo al hombre. "The sons love the mother" is not: Los hijos
aman la madre, but: Los hijos aman á la madre.
On the other hand, Mi hermano ha visto el palacio, las
casas, "My brother has seen the palace, the houses," and not
al palacio, á las casas, because here the Accusative denotes
things, and not persods.
The Declensions. — Las declinaciones.
(a) With the Definite Article.
Masculine.
Singular.
Norn, el amigo, the friend.
Gen. del amigo, of the friend.
Dat. al amigo, to the friend (the friend).
Ac. el amigo, al amigo, the friend.
Plural.
Norn. lo8 amigos, the friends.
Gen. de los amigos, of the friends.
Dat. á los amigos, to the friends.
Ac. lo8 amigos^ á loa amigos, the friends.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
16 Lesson 3.
Feminine.
Singular,
Nom. la madre, the mother.
Gen. de la madre, of the mother.
Dat. á la madre, to the mother (t?ie mother).
Ac. la madre, á la madre, the mother.
Plural
Norn, las madres, the mothers.
Gen. de las madres, of the mothers.
Dat. á las madres, to the mothers (t)ie mothers).
Ac. l€is madres, á Uis madres, the mothers.
Feminine with the Masculine Article.
Singular.
Nom. el ave, the bird (for la ave).
Gen. del ave, of the bird.
Dat. al ave, to the bird.
Ac. el ave, al ave, the bird.
Flural,
Nom. las aves, the birds.
Gen. de las aves, of the birds.
Dat. á las aves, to the birds.
Ac. las aves, á las aves, the birds.
Abstract Notions.
Nom. lo malo, the evil.
Gen. de lo malo, of the evil.
Dat. á lo malo, to the evil.
Ac. lo malo, á lo malo, the evil.
(b) With the Indefinite Article.
Masculine.
Nom. un hombre, a man.
Gen. de un hombre, of a man.
Dat. á un hombre, to a man.
Ac. tin hombre, á un hombre, a man.
Feminine.
Nom. una mujer, a woman.
Gen. de una mujer, of a woman.
Dat. á una mujer, to a woman.
Ac. una mujer, á una mujer, a woman.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Substantives in Connection with the Prepositions. 17
(c) With a Demonstrative Adjective.
Masculine.
Singtilar.
Nona, este hombre, this man.
Gen. de este hombre^ of this man.
Dat. á este hombrCy to this man.
Ac. este hombre, á este hombre, this man.
Plural.
Nom. estos hombres, these men.
Gen. de estos hombres, of these men.
Dat. á estos hombres, to these men.
Ac. estos hombres, á estos hombres, these men.
Feminine.
Singular.
Nom. esta mujer, this woman.
Gen. de esta mujer, oí this woman.
Dat. á esta mujer, to this woman.
Ac. esta mujer, á esta mujer, this woman.
Flurál.
Nom. estas mujeres, these women.
Gen. de estas mujeres, of these women.
Dat. á estas mujeres, to these women.
Ac. estas mujeres, á estas mujeres, these women.
Masculine.
Singular.
Nom. aquél hombre, that man.
Gen. de aquel hombre, of that man.
Dat. á aquél hombre, to that man.
Ac. aquel hombre, á aquel hombre, that man.
Plural.
Nom. a^queUos hombres, those men.
Gen. de aquellos hombres, oí those men.
Dat. á aquéllos hombres, to those men.
Ac. aquéllos hombres, á aquéllos hombres, those men.
Feminine.
Singular.
Nom. a^quélla mujer, that woman.
Gen. de a^ueUa mujer, oí that woman.
Dat. á aquella mujer, to that woman.
Ac. aquella mujer, á acuella mujer, that woman.
Spanish Ck>ny.-Grammar. 8
Digitized by VaOOQlC
18 Lesson 3.
Plural
Nom. €íquélUi8 mujeres, those women.
Gen. de aquéllas mujeres^ of those women«
Dat. á aqueUas mujeres, to those women.
Ac. arguellas mujeres, á arguellas mujeres, those
women.
Words.
Bios, God. el pais, the country, land.
Ü Criador, the Creator. la criatura, the creature.
Ü mundo, the world. el criado, the footman, servant.
el primo, the cousin (m.). el caballero, the gentleman.
la prima, the cousin (f.). grande, great.
él amigo, the friend (m.). pequeño, little, small, short.
la ciudad, the town. hermoso, beautiful.
él vecino, the neighbour. viejo, old.
él niño, the child, boy. ama, (he, she) loves.
él sueño, the sleep, dream. aman, (they) love.
la muerte, (the) death. llama, calls.
d árbol, the tree. ve, sees.
e2 cwario, the room. pero, but.
7a chimenea, the fireplace. ¿cómo? how?
Za reina, the queen. 5(m, are.
quiere, he (she) likes. no, no, not.
quieren, (they) like. e^, II . son, \
doce, twelve. está, f ' están, f ^^'
Beading Exercise. 5.
El Criador ama á las criaturas. El sueño es el hermano
de la muerte. La prima es la amiga del primo. El vecino
llama al criado. El rey es el padre del país. La reina ama
al rey. Dios es el Criador del mundo. La casa tiene doce
ventanas. [Yo] no veo (see) á los hombres. ¿Tenias tú los
relojes? Inglaterra es pequefía, pero las ciudades del país
son grandes. España es grande, pero las ciudades del país son
pequeñas. En España los cuartos de las casas son pequeños
y no tienen chimeneas. El caballero llama á los criados. Las
mujeres aman á los niños. Estas casas pequeñas son her-
mosas. El amigo del primo llama al miado del caballero.
Los árboles del castillo son viejos. Las casas de la ciudad
no son viejas.
Traducción. 6.
Those men love the friends of the cousin. The death of
the king. The houses of the towns are large and old. The
small country has large towns. The cousin (f.) loves the cousin
(m.), but the cousin (m,) does not love (no — ) the cousin (f,).
The gentleman calls the footman. The king loves the knights.
Digitized
by Google
Prepositions.
19
and the knights love the king. The child of the neighbour
is snaall. The windows of the house are large. The king is
the founder of the small town. The knight had two cousins
(f,) and three cousins (m,), Man is small, and the world is
large. The woman loves the child. The children love the
woman. The kings are the fathers of the countries. The foot-
man calls the neighbours of the knight. The castles of the
queen are old. The house of the footman is small. That
man does not see* the child of this woman. Does he see**
those women? The neighbour loves these men and those men.
Conversacióu.
¿Es pequeño el pais?
¿Cómo son los cuartos?
¿Ve el primo á la prima?
¿Tuvieron los reyes el país?
¿Llama el vecino al niño?
¿ J. quién (whom) llama el ca-
ballero?
¿Es pequeña la ciudad?
¿Tiene la reina dos castillos ?
¿Cuántas (how many) ven-
tanas tiene la casa?
¿Tiene el vecino una casa?
¿Ve el caballero á este hom-
bre?
¿Es grande el palacio?
¿No son hermosas estas flo-
res?
¿Á quién ama la prima?
No, es grande; pero las ciu-
dades del pais son pequeñas.
Son pequeños y no tienen
chimenea.
No, el primo no ve á la prima.
Los reyes tuvieron la ciudad
y el pais.
No, el vecino llama al caballero.
El caballero llama el criado.
No, señor, la ciudad es grande.
No, la reina tiene tres castillos
y dos palacios.
La casa tiene veinte (20) ven-
tanas.
El vecino tiene dos casas.
El caballero ve á estas mu-
jeres.
El palacio es mvij(very) grande.
Estos alelíes son muy hermosos.
La prima quiere al primo y
al hermano.
Fourth Lesson. — Lección cuarta.
Prepositions. — Preposiciones.
Some prepositions appear almost in every sentence,
and should therefore be learned at once. The Spanish
prepositions govern no particular case— e.e.^ they are
* Transí, not sees, ** Transí, sees he?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
20 Lesson 4.
simply placed before the nouu. — Full particulars of
adverbial phrases formed with prepositions will be given
in Lesson 32: On Prepositions.
The prepositions most in use are the following:
at at, to, in. liacia, towards.
ante, before. h<ista, till.
con, with, para, for.
contra, against. por, by, from, for.
de, of, from. según, according to.
desde, since. sin, without.
durante, during. sobre, on, over.
en, in. tras, after, behind. |
entre, between, among.
A few general hints on the use of the above
prepositions are:
1. Contra means against^ taken in a sense of oppo-
sition^ whereas hacia indicates a direction^ as: Contra los
enemigos^ against the enemies; hacia el poniente^ towards
the west, westward.
2. Fara corresponds generally to the French pour,
means for, and implies purpose, as: Este dinero será
para los pobres, this money will be for the poor. Used
with an infinitive mood, it corresponds to the English
in order to, as: Fara trabajar, in order to work. Para
also denotes direction, as: Salgo (infin. salir, to set out)
para España, I set out for Spain.
3. Por corresponds generally to the French par,
is by and from (denoting origin, motive, or cause), as:
Por temor, through fear; por vanidad, through vanity.
It likewise means for, denoting an equivalent, as: Doy
mi capa por la tuya, I give my cloak for yours, or "in
exchange for thine." It also means in favour, as: Hablar
por alguno, to speak in favour of somebody. Again, it
vaguely indicates time and space, as: Por la mañana,
in the morning; por la tarde, in the afternoon; por la
calle, somewhere in the street, por el jardín, somewhere
in the garden. Finally, por denotes the author of some-
thing, as: Este libro está continuado por N,, this book
is continued by N.
4. Sobre is on or upon, and also over, on the other
side of, as: Sobre las rodillas^ on (upon) the knees;
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Prepositions.
21
sohre los montes^ over (also "on the other side of)
the mountains.
Words.
El comerciantey the merchant.
la región, the country.
Inglaterra, England.
la madera, the wood.
la mesa, the table.
el rio, the river.
(el) vino, (the) wine.
(7a) cerveza, (the) beer.
la vida, .the life.
la diferencia, the difference.
el temor, the fear.
el pudor, the shame, [change.
la bolsa, the purse, the Ex-
la gente, (the) people.
la paciencia, (the) patience.
la necesidad, the necessity.
la fruta, (the) fruit.
d año, the year.
el mediodía, the noon.
destinado, -a, destined.
delicioso, -a, delicious.
eserito, written.
Estoy, I am.
estás, thou art.
está, he (she, it) is.
KB.
justo, -a, just.
todo, -a, all.
soportar, to bear.
quieres, thou wilt.
debemos, we must.
vive, lives.
vivir, to live.
siempre, always.
flotar, to float.
hablan, they speak.
&e5e, drinks.
corre, runs.
ijosa, spends (time).
vuelve, returns, comes back.
dar, to give; dado, given.
wj, my.
ayer, yesterday; hoy, to-day.
mañana, to-morrow.
casi, almost.
todo el, toda la, the whole.
usted, you.
su . . , de usted, your . . .
estamos, we are.
estáis, you are.
"V está, he (she, it) is. están, they are.
There is, there are, hay.
there was, there were, habia.
Note,— To be is translated by estar and ser, J^he proper
nse of these verbs is rather difficult. For the present we, only
state that estar denotes an accidental and transitory condition
or state, whereas ser expresses a characteristic quality, thus:
Está bueno means: he feels Es bueno means: he is good,
well, he is (now) well.
(See the Auxiliary Verbs.)
Beading Exercise. 7.
El caballero está en el cafó. ¿Hay cafés en España?
Si, hay muchos cafés. En España los hombres pasan la noche
en el café. Mucha gente pasa toda la noche en el café. ¿Qué
líebe la gente en España, vino, ó cerveza? ' La gente bebe
^no. ¿Qué bebe V, vino, ó cerveza? Bebo (1 drink) vino
y cerveza. Estoy bueno cuando estoy en el campo. ¿ Á quién
Digitized by VaOOQlC
22 Lesson 4.
quieres dar este libro? Á mi hermano. Debemos soportar
con paciencia los males de la vida. La Bolsa es para los
comerciantes. No debes hablar por vanidad. Esta región es
deliciosa por sas (its) frutos. He dado á mi primo mi diccio-
nario por su gramática. Mi hermano vive casi siempre en
Inglaterra. La madera flota en el a^na. El libro está sobre
la mesa. Los malos (wicked) hablan siempre contra los buenos.
Mi padre vuelve hacia el mediodía. No ^uáe(Icould ~) dor-
mir durante toda la noche. Desde la mañana hasta la noche.
Desde ayer hasta mañana. El vino no es una necesidad de
la vida; el hombre puede vivir sin vino. Es un hombre sin
pudor. Este libro trata (treats) de la agricultura.
Tradacción. 8.
This book is (está) written by Mr. N. He is (está) well
when he is at (en su) home (casa). Wilt thou* give this
book to my cousin (m.)? This book is for thy brother. I
have given (to) Mr. Verguero my grammar for his dictionary.
The merchant lived two years in England. Man can (puede)
live without wine, but (pero) not without bread. Does**
thy brother come back at (á) noon? (The) merchants sal-
ways (talk about) i speak of (the) Exchange. Towards (the)
west there is (hay) a beautiful country. I give my book for
thine (el tuyo). He sleeps (duerme) from (the) evening till
(to the) morning. The fruit is on the table. The father took
(tomó) the son on his knee. This river runs (corre) through
many countries. We must not act (obrar) through fear.
This wine is for the father and this bread is for the child.
There is a great difference between these two men. I have
been (Estoy) here since yesterday. He is a man without fear
and without shame. My brother comes (viene) in the morning
and in the afternoon.
ConTersación.
¿Dónde (Where) está su amigo En el cafó ; pasa toda la noche
de usted? en el cafó.
¿Dónde está el hijo de ese Está en el colegio (at school),
(that) hombre?
¿Vive en Inglaterra el her- No, vive casi siempre en Es-
mano ? paña.
* The 2nd person sing, is more frequently used in Spanish
than in English. See footnote ***, pag. 10.
** Interrogative forms with the verb to do are not admissible
in Spanish. In this language, as in German, the interrogative
form is expressed by placing the verb before the nominative, as:
Does the woman speak? ¿Habla la mujerl Do I think? ¿Pienso
yo? — or merely by the verb itself, as: ¿Pienso? in any case,
the signs of interrogation are written both at the beginning and
at the end.
Digitized
by Google
The Sabstantive without the Article. 28
¿Cómo (How) debemos sopor- Sin temor y con paciencia,
tar los males de la vida?
¿ Para quién (whom) está des- Está destinada para los comer-
tinada la Bolsa? ciantes.
¿Cuándo vuelve el padre? Vuelve hacia mediodía.
¿Hablan los comerciantes de No, sefior, hablan casi siempre
la agricultura? del comercio.
¿ Tiene mi hermano el dinero No lo só* (I donH know), se-
para los pobres? flora.
¿Está el vino sobre la mesa? No, sefior; la fruta y el pan
están sobre la mesa.
¿Por qué es deliciosa esta Es deliciosa por sus frutas,
región ?
¿Hay mucho vino en Ingla- En Inglaterra no hay vino,
tierra?
Fifth Lesson. — Lección quinta.
The Substantive without the Article. — El
sastantiYO sin el articulo.
§ 1. In English, the word some (or any) often pre-
cedes a substantive when taken in an indefinite sense,
no particular kind, measure, or quality being meant,
as: some wine; some bread; any ink, etc.
In Spanish, the noun without the article is used in
this case, thus: Give me some bread, déme V. pan. I
have some cheese, tengo queso, etc.
§ 2. If one of these words is governed by a pre-
position, this preposition simply precedes the noun, as
in English. Ex.: We speak of money, hablamos de
dinero; mth cheese, con queso, etc.
§ 3. In the plural, some or any may be expressed
by the plural of uno or alguno, if the sense appears
somewhat hmited, as:
Tengo flores, libros, perros, etc. I have flowers, books,
dogs, etc. (i.e., in quite a general sense).
But:
Tengo uncís flores, unos libros (or alffunas flores, fúr
gunos libros), I have some flowers, a few books, etc.
(in a limited sense).
* Lit. (7> not it know.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
24 Lesson 5.
§ 4. The above rules hold good in the nomina-
tive and accusative cases only. If, however, the noun
is governed by another word (substantive, verb, or ad-
jective), de comes before it (as in English o/*, etc.). Ex.:
A piece of bread, un pedazo de pan.
A bottle of wine, una botella de vino.
Full of sugar, lleno de azúcar.
Laden with booty, cargado de presa.
Worthy of confidence, digno de confianza.
By this phrase with de, English compound substan-
tives are rendered, as: The fencing-master, el maestro
de esgrima; the slave-trade, el tráfico de esclavos. Ad-
jectives denoting materials are expressed in the same
way, as: a gold watch, un reloj de oro.
§ 5. Words denoting quantity require no pre-
position after them ; thus : little cheese, poco queso; Uttle
hope, poca esperanza; fewer books, mmos lihros; many
times, muchas veces. (And not as in French, peu de
livres; moins de fromage, etc.)
§ 6. If, however, quantity is expressed by a word
preceded by the article, as: a little of this wine, etc.,
the preposition de should follow. Thus:
Little bread, poco pan, but :
A little of this bread, un poco de este pan.
Words.
La naranja, the orange. la tía, the aunt.
el limdny the lemon, citron. el dinero, the money.
la aceituna, the olive. vergonzoso, -a, shameful.
el género, the kind, species. todo, -a, all, whole.
el aceite, the oil. todos, -as, all (plural).
el papel, the paper. visto, seen.
el barco, the ship. produce, produces.
el trigo, the corn. déme V., give me.
la plata, the silver. me falta (or necesito), I want.
el cobre, the copper. he, (I) have ; ha, he (she) has.
el lino, the flax, linen. conoce V., you know.
la carne, the meat. piensa, thinks.
el jabón, the soap. estar pensando, to be thinking.
el tio, the uncle. pero, but; que, than.
Verb.
Yo soy, I am. nosotros (-as) somos, we are.
tú eres, thou art. vosotros (-as) sois, you are.
él es, he is. ellos \ „^ ..^^ ^^^
ella es, she is. ellas f '^' ^^"^ ^^^'
Digitized by V^OOQIC
The Substantive 'without the Article. 25
N.B,—ThQ auxiliary do, does, etc., in questions is never
translated into Spanish ; the corresponding verbal form of the
principal verb being given instead— i.e. :
What does Spain produce?
¿ Qué produce España ?
Heading Exercise. 9.
España produce vino, naranjas, limones, aceitunas y todo
género de frutas. Déme V. papel, pluma y tinta. El pais
tiene trigo, aceite, plata, cobre y lino. Me falta (I want, lit.
it fails me) carne y agua. Este hombre no tiene pan. ¿ Tiene
el primo unos libros? El hermano tiene agua y jabón. Las
naranjas y limones son hermosas frutas. El niño no quiere
las aceitunas. He visto árboles y flores, jardines y palacios.
¿Conoces al maestro de esgrima? Déme V. un pedazo de
pan y una botella de vino. Tengo poca esperanza. El tío
tiene menos dinero que la tía. He visto á mi fio muchas
veces en casa de aquel hombre. Déme V. un poco de tinta
y unas plumas. El primo tiene poca tinta, pero tiene muchas
plumas. Este hombre no es digno de confianza. Me falta
papel y tinta.
Traducción. 10.
I want some paper and ink, pens and pencils. Do you
know the fencing-master? Slave-trade is shameful. We have
little cheese, but we have much bread. Give me a little
bread and a little cheese. This country has copper and silver,
oranges, citrons, and olives. I have seen flowers and fruits.
The uncle has no sugar, and the aunt has no coffee. I have
not seen the king and the queen. This man has less cour-
age than that man. What does Spain produce? Spain pro-
duces all kinds of fruits. Do you know my uncle and my
aunt? Give me a piece of meat and a bottle of beer. This
ship is laden with sugar and coffee. This man always thinks
(is always thinking) of (en) wine and beer, and this woman
always thinks of dresses and flowers. Has the uncle fine
pictures ? The aunt has some fine pictures, but the uncle has
no pictures.
ConTersación.
¿Qué Cw;Aa¿) produce España? España produce vino, naran-
jas, limones y aceitunas.
¿Qué produce Alemania (Ger- Alemania produce vino, trigo
many)^ y todo género de frutas.
I Déme V. algunas plumas! No tengo plumas.
¿Qué tiene el país? El país tiene cobre y plata.
¿Tiene el primo unos libros? El primo tiene muchos libros
y mucho papel.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
26 Lesson 6.
¿ Quiere el nifio las aceitunas ? El nifio no quiere las aceitunas.
¿Qué ha visto el tío? Ha visto árboles y flores, jar-
dines j palacios.
¿ Conoce V. al maestro de es- No conozco (I know) al maestro
grima? de esgrima.
I Déme V. un pedazo de pan! No tengo pan.
¿ Tiene el tío muchos cua- No tiene muchos cuadros, pero
dros? tiene algunos.
¿Es digno de confianza ese No, señor, no lo es.
hombre?
¿Qaó le falta al hermano? Le (him) falta (== he wants)
tinta y papel.
Sixth Lesson. — Lección sexta.
Angmentatives and Dlminntives. — Ánmentativos y
diminativos.
The Spanish language, like the Italian, abounds in
endings modifying the original meaning of the substan-
tives as well as the adjectives, adverbs, etc., to which
they are applied. Besides the idea of augmentation and
diminution, these endings very often convey an accessory
idea of tenderness or ugliness, love or contempt, praise
or derision, etc. The shades which the original signifi-
cation may thus acquire are so manifold that they
are often utterly inexpressible in other languages, even
by two or more adjectives. Thus the proper use of
these endings offers great difficulties to the foreigner,
and can only be properly learned in daily intercourse
with Spaniards; the more so as they may not be
used indifferently with every substantive or adjective.
The most important of these endings are:
For the Aagmentatives:
1. on, azo^ and ote for the masculine; ona, aza, and
ota for the feminine. These endings express augmen-
tation in general.
Examples: Hombre, man; homhrón, tall man; mu¿er,
woman; mujerona; perro, dog; perrazo, a big dog; libro,
book; libróte, old book.
Notes, — 1. Endings in on may be combined with azo.
— 2. By the addition of ote the noun becomes masculine.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Augmentatives and Diminutives. 27
Examples : Hombrón, hombronazo ; mtijerona, mujer&nor
za; capa (i.)» (Spanish) cloak; capote (m.), large cloak.
O&servaiio».— Frequently the termination azo does not
imply augmentation, but simply the effect of the instrument
denoted by the noun. Thus: el canon means the gun, can-
non; el cañonazo^ the detonation of a cannon; el fusil, the
gun; el fusilazo, the shot of a gun.
2. acho, acMn, and arrón. Over and above the
idea of augmentation, these suggest an accessory idea
of disproportion, clumsiness, and disdain.
Examples: Término, word; terminacho, vulgar word;
hombre, man; hombrachdn, a fat, big fellow; bobo, a silly
man; bobarron, a stupid fool.
For the Diminntives:
'ito,
'ico,
'illo.
'uelo,
'CitO,
'CiCO,
'Cillo,
'^uelo,
-ecito,
-ecico.
'CCillo,
-e^uelo,
'Cedto,
'cecico,
'Cecilio,
'Cemuelo
with their feminines.
Notes. — Ico (tea) and their derivatives are not truly
Castilian, but local terminations used mostly in Aragón.
Ito (ita) and their derivatives are the genuine Castilian
endings, implying not so much diminution as youth, loveliness,
fondness y etc. Thus: sewora, lady, Mrs. ; señorita, ííiss; señor,
Mr., Sir ; señorito, young gentleman, Master, etc. ; mujer, wo-
man; mujercita, nice young woman.
Illo (ilia) expresses diminution and disdain, thus:
hombre, man ; hombrecillo, little man (of no significance) : cosa,
thing; cosiUa, a trifle.
Uelo (uela) expresses the same in a very strong degree,
as: mujerziiela, a vulgar little woman; aldehuela, insigni-
ficant little village.
The terminations acho and etón for augmentation, ete
(eta), ejo, in (ino) for diminution, are less frequent and best
learned by practice.
Beadingr Exercise, 11..
Aquel hombrón que vá con aquel porrazo es un ri-
cachón \ Es una mujerona con unos ojazos^ muy grandes y
una vocecilla chillona*. La pobretona* no tiene dineros
^e dado mi capote* á aquel mocetón'^. Hemos oído® fusi-
1 very wealthy man. ^ large eyes. » little squeaky voice.
* pobre, poor. » dinero, money. « capa, cloak. ^ mozo, boy.
* oído, heard.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
28 Lesson 7.
lazos y cafionazos. La sefiorita. está con su perrito^ en la
casa de Juanita. La pobrecita^*^ habla al sefiorito. Los pa-
jarillos están en el nido^^. Ese torazo^^ come^^ heno^*
y yerba ^*. En esa aldehuela^^ hay algunos gitanos^''. ¡Qué
hermoso peceznelo!^^ El hidalgote^^ tuvo que vender (to
sell) sus palacios y jardines. Las florecillas*® brotan (spring
up) y las avecillas'^ cantan (sing) *^. Mi hermana tiene una
saÚta** muy pequefiita^*, pero muy bon¡ta*^ El caballerito
no quiere estudiar. Comió (He eats) un pedacito^* de un
huevecillo^'^. Las manguitas^® del vestidillo son preciosas
(beautiful). Las ovejitas^^ y los conejuelos*^ juegan*^ en
el campo^^. El pobrecito nifio se cayó (fell)^ y se hizo dafio
en las manecitas^^.
» perro, dog. i® pobre, poor. " nido, nest. »« toro, bull.
" come, eats, i* heno, hay. " yerba, grass. ** aldea, village.
" gitano, gipsy. ^^ pez, fish. ^^ hidalgo, nobleman, knight.
20 flor, ñower. ^i ave, bird. 22 animal, animal. *« sala, drawing-
room. 24 pequeño, little, small. 26 bonita, pretty. 2* pedazo,
piece. 27 Jiuevo, egg. 28 manga, sleeve. 29 oveja, sheep, ^o conejo,
rabbit. ** juegan, play (3rd pers. pi.). ^' campo, field. »3 la
mano, hand.
Seventh Lesson. — Lección séptima. ^
Proper Names. — Nombres propios.
§ 1. As in English, proper names of persons,
towns, and coww^ne^ take no article, as: Car?05, Charles;
Elvira, Madrid, etc. They are varied as in English:
Carlos, Charles. Madrid, Madrid.
de Carlos, of Charles. de Madrid, of Madrid.
á Carlos, to Charles. á Madrid, to Madrid.
España, Spain.
de España, from Spain.
d España, to Spain.
Exceptions are:
(a) Proper names quahfied by an adjective, as: el
pobre Luís, poor Lewis ; la desdichada Elvira, (the) un-
fortunate Elvira; la América meridional, South America.
Frequently the proper name is followed by the adjective,
as: Alejandro el Grande, Alexander the Great.
The adjective Santo (San), saint, holy, before proper
names never admits of the article, thus: San Pablo,
St. Paul; Santa Teresa, St. Theresa.
Also, a proper name takes the article when used
as a common noun, thus: el Apolo de Belvedere, the
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Proper Names. 29
Apollo (statue) of Belvedere; el César de su siglo, the
Csesar (i.e., the foremost general) of his century. In
this signification, proper names may be used in the
plural; as: los Césares son raros, men Uke CsBsar are rare,
(b) The names of certain countries, provinces, towns,
etc., as:
El Brasil, Brazil. ZaJIfanc^a (a Spanish region).
El Canadá, Canada. La Patagonia, Patagonia.
El Cabo, The Cape. La Carolina (a Spanish town).
El Perú, Peru. La Coruña, Corunna.
El Havre, Havre. La Granja (a Spanish royal
El Ferrol, Ferrol. residence).
La Florida, Florida.
Indifferent are:
China, and la China, China.
Persia, and la Persia, Persia.
Africa, and el Africa, Africa.
§ 2. Names of mountains, volcanoes, rivers^ capes,
and seas take the article, as:
Los Pirineos, The Pyrenees.
La Sierra Nevada, Nevada Ridge (Spain).
El Ebro, The Ebro.
El Duero, The Douro.
El Vesubio, Mt. Vesuvius.
El Machichaco, a cape (N. of Spain).
El Cantábrico, The Bay of Biscay.
El Mediterráneo, The Mediterranean.
Indifferent are:
Sierra Morena, and la Sierra Morena \ (^^^^^tains).
Moncayo, and el Moncayo /
Remarks.
(a) The Saxon genitive — as: FredencT^s brother, etc. —
cannot be imitated in Spanish, but must be rendered by
means of the preposition de: Charleses hat, el sombrero de
Carlos,
(b) With proper names of countries and towns the pre-
position in or at is rendered by en, and to by á; thus: in
Spain, en España; in England, en Inglaterra; at (in) Paris,
en Paris ; at Berlin, en Berlin, — To go to Paris, to France,
to Spain: ir á Paris, á Francia, á España,
Note. — After the verb salir, to set out, to depart, the pre-
position para is required, thus: Salgo para Italia, I set out for
Italy. — The verb entrar, to enter, takes en; thus: entrar en
casa, en Italia, etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
80
Lesson 7.
(c) The preposition on in such cases as Stratford on Avon
is translated by de; as:
Aranda de Duero. Miranda de Ebro.
Words.
La provincia, the province.
Cataluña, Catalonia.
la seda, the silk. [very.
la valentía, the valour, bra-
numeroso, -a, numerous.
Enrique, Henry.
Guillermo, William.
Viena, Vienna.
Austria, Austria.
Ñapóles, Naples.
la capital, the capital, me-
tropolis.
la iglesia, the church.
la capa, the (Spanish) cloak.
(él) invierno, (the) winter.
la navegación, the navigation.
menos, less.
He, I have.
has, thou hast.
ha, he (she, it) has.
Don, Mr.
Doña, Mrs., Miss.
el siglo, the century.
aqui está, here is.
aqui están, here are.
hoy, to-day.
dedicado, -a, dedicated.
célebre, \
famoso, -a, > famous.
afamado, -a, J
estimado, -a, esteemed.
lleva, wears (said of gar-
ments).
se lleva, is worn.
quiero, I want, I will.
ir, to go.
fueron, were (3rd pers. plur.).
hemos, we have.
habéis, you have.
han, they have.
Beading Exercise. 12.
Aquí está la capa de Don Luis. En invierno la gente
lleva capa en España. La capa se lleva mucho en Madrid.
Madrid es la capital de España. Aqui están los guantes de
Sofía. He visto el castillo del rey de Sajonia. Alejandro el
Grande fué rey de Macedonia. Viena es la capital de Austria.
¿Dónde está el Señor Herrero? ¿Dónde están los niños del
señor Herrero? París es una gran capital. María es la her-
mana de Enrique. Guillermo es el primo de Carlos. Esta
iglesia está dedicada á San Pablo y á Santa Teresa. He visto
el Apolo de Belvedere y la Venus de Médicis. Don Pedro
es el hermano de Doña Elvira. El Don Carlos es una célebre
tragedia de Schiller. Aquí están los jardines y los palacios del
rey. Napoleon fué el César de su siglo. Andalucía es una
región de España. Los vinos de España y la seda de Italia
son estimados. Quiero ir á España y á Italia. Los ejércitos
españoles fueron siempre famosos por su (their) valentía. El
ejército de Italia es menos numeroso que el ejército de Rusia.
Salgo para América.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Proper Names.
Traducción. 13.
Where is Lewis's hat? Here are Elvira's gloves. Have
yon seen the castles of the Qaeen of Spain? Paris is the
capital of France, and Madrid is the capital of Spain. Henry
is William's brother, and Elvira is Mary's cousin. Hast thou
seen William and Charles ? To whom (Á quiénes) are these
churches dedicated? They are dedicated to St. Paul and to
St. Ann (Ana). The King of Saxony and the Queen of Eng-
land are in Paris. French wool and Spanish wines are cele-
brated. Wilt thou go to France or te Italy? I will go to
Spain, and te-morrow I set out for Madrid. The Spanish
army is less numerous than the Italian army. Barcelona is
a province of Catalonia. Have you read (leído) the tragedies of
Schiller and the comedies (comedias) of Moliere? Italian silk
is famous. The situation of England is very favourable to
navigation. To-day we have seen William and Henry, Mary
and Theresa. Here are Charles's books. (Mount) Vesuvius
is near (cerca de) Naples. Spanish wool (lana) is much es-
teemed.
Conversación.
¿Dónde está el sombrero de
D. (Don) Luis?
¿Qué ha viste el extranjero
(foreiffner)^
¿ Cómo se llama (is called) la
capital de España?
¿Y cómo se llama la capital
de Inglaterra?
¿Don Carlos es el hermano
de Doña Ana?
¿Á quién está dedicada esa
iglesia?
¿Cómo se llama aquella fa-
mosa tragedia de Schiller?
¿Adonde (Whither^ where)
quieres ir?
¿Dónde está el rey de Ingla-
terra?
¡Mariana, trae (bring) la en-
salada (salad)\
¿Qué se dice del ejército es-
pañol?
Está sobre la mesa.
Ha visto el palacio del rey y
los jardines de la reina.
La capital de España se llama
Madrid.
La capital de Inglaterra es
Londres.
No, señor, es su (her) primo.
Está dedicada á San Pablo y
á Santa María.
Se titula Don Carlos, infante
de España.
Quiero ir á Italia y á Ingla-
terra.
Está en Windsor.
¡Aquí está, señor!
Que fué siempre famoso por
su valentía.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
82 Lesson 8.
Eighth Lesson. — Lección octava.
The Auxiliary Verb Haber, to haye. — El yerbo
auxiliar haber.
Indicative Mood.
Simple Tenses.
Present
(To) he, I have. (nosotros, nosotras) hemos
(habernos)* we have.
(tú) has, thou hast. (vosotros, vosotras) habéis, you
have.
(él, ella; V,) ha, he, she, has; (ellos, ellas; Y Y.) han, they
you have. have; you (pi.) have.
Imperfect.
Había, I had. habíamos, we had.
habías, thou hadst. habíais, you had.
había, he had. habían, they had.
Definite.
Hube, I had. hubimos, we had.
hubiste, thou hadst. hubisteis, you had.
hubo, he had. hubieron, they had.
Future.
Habré, I shall have. habremos, we shall have.
habrás, thou wilt have. habréis, you will have.
habrá, he will have. habrán, they will have.
Conditional Mood.
Habría, I should have. habríamos, we should have.
habrías, thou wouldst have. habríais, you would have.
habría, he would have. habrían, they would have.
Imperative Mood.
Hé (tú), have (thou). Habed (vosotros), have (you).
Past Participle.
Habido, had.
Compound Tenses.
Compound Perfect.
He \ I have j hemos\ we have \
has ¡habido, thou hast > had. habéis)habido, jou ha.Ye \hdLa.
ha j he has j han | they have»
* Almost obsolete.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Auxiliary Verb Haber, to have. 33
Pluperfect.
HaUa \ g I had | habíamos] |* we had \
habías > g thou hadst ; had. habíais \ g you had > had.
habia js^ be had ) habían ) o they had )
2nd Pluperfect
Hube \ ^ I had | hubimos \ g we had \
hubiste)^, thou hadst) had. ^w6¿s¿cis>g you had > had.
hubo ]^ he had ) hubieron) S" they had)
Compound Future,
Habré \ f I shall ) , habremos \ ^ we shall ) ,
habrás >|t thou wilt } ?^T® habréis }^. you will } ^*T®
habrá }F be will J ^^^' habrán }P they will! *^*^-
Compound Conditional.
Habría] I" I should \ , habríamos) ^ we should K
habrías) |í thou wouldst) , , habríais ) |í you would >, ^T®
^&na js' be would ]^^^' habrían ) §^ theywouldj^^^-
Gerund (Present Participle).
Habiendo, having.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present
Haya, I have. hayamos, we have.
hayas, thou have. hayáis, you have.
haya, he have. hayan, they have.
Imperfect.
Hubiese, that I had. hubiésemos, that we had.
hubieses, that thou hadst. hubieseis, that you had.
hubiese, that he had. hubiesen, that they had.
Future.
(Si) hubiere, *(if) I shall have. (Si) hubiéremos, we shall have.
» hubieres, thou wilt have. » hubiereis, you will have.
> hubiere, he will have. » Aw&^erew, they will have.
Conditional.
Hubiera, (that) I should have, hubiéramos, we should have.
hubieras, thou wouldst have. hubierais, you would have.
hubiera, he would have. hubieran, they would have.
Compound Tenses.
These are formed like those of the Indicative, by adding
habido to the respective form of the simple tense, thus:
Haya habido, that I have had.
hubiese habido, that I bad bad.
hubiere habido, that I shall have had.
hubiera habido, that I should have had.
Spanish CJonv.-Grammar. 3
Digitized by VaOOQlC
84 Lesson 8.
Remarks.
1. The tenses of the Indicative Mood are the same as in
the other Romance* languages; the Subjunctive Mood, how-
ever, has two tenses peculiar to the Spanish language. Of their
employment we shall speak when treating of the regular verb,
and again in Less. 20, Part. IL These tenses are the Fu-
ture and the CondUianal. For the present we merely state
that the Conditional of the Indicative and that of the Sub-
junctive differ but little in their signification, so that they
may be used indiscriminately. Thus the sentence: He would
have had friends, is either: Habria tenido amigos or hubiera
tenido amigos.
2. In Conditional clauses the verb stands in the Imper-
fect of the Subjunctive, whereas the verb of the principal
sentence is put in the Conditional of the Indicative or of the
Subjunctive; thus:
If I had had money (conditional clause), I should have
had friends (principal clause).
Si huMese** tenido dinero habria tenido amigos, or
» » » » hubiera » »
3. For the Future of the Subjunctive see Part IL, On
the Use of Tenses.
4. Like ser (to be) the verb haber is a true auxiliary —
i.e., it only forms the compound tenses of other verbs, as:
ha sido, he has been; hubo amado, he had loved. If, on the
contrary, "to have" is a principal verb— i.e., if it governs
an direct and signifies to possess, as : I have a house =
I possess a house— it must always be rendered by tener (pro-
perly "to hold"), thus:
I have money, is not transí, he dinero, but luengo dinero.
B.eh&á friends, is » » hubo amigos, » Tuvo amigos.
For this reason, the Imperative of haber is no longer
used in conversation.
5. In the signification of the English "there is," "there
are" (and the French il y a), haber is still a principal verb^
but only in the 3rd person of the singular; hay in some
cases is replaced by ha, as ha mucho que no le he visto, it is
a long time since I have seen him.
* i.e., of Latin (Roman) origin— wx?., French, Italian, Spanish,
Portuguese, Provencal, etc.
** We may also employ the Conditional of the Subjunctive
after si (if), as: si hubiera, if I had, but we must use the same
tense in the following principal sentence, or the Conditional of the
Indicative :
Si hubiera tenido dinero, haibria tenido amigos.
» » » » , hubiera » »
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Tenefj to have, to hold. 85
Hay* hombres, there are men.
hahia * » were men.
hubo » » were men.
habrá » > will be men.
habría » > would be men.
Only in this signification the compound tenses with the
participle habido are admissible, as: "
Habrá habido hombres, there will have been men.
6. Haber de with the Infinitive corresponds to "must,"
"shall," etc., as: He de pagarle, I must (shall) pay him.
Tener que has the same signification, as: Tengo que Tiablar
con ü, I must speak with him (lit. I have to speak, etc.).
7. The polite mode of addressing a person (the English
you) introduces a pecuHiar word : Vuestra merced (your Grace)
which always requires the third person singular of the verb.
The full form of this word is no longer used, it having been
replaced by usted — in writing, F. — Usted is the common
mode of addressing all persons, without distinction of rank,
provided they are not relations of the speaker. The Spaniard
addresses even a beggar in V. The plural form ustedes
(accented ustedes), a contraction from vuestras mercedes, short-
ened Yds. or VV., is used in addressing several persons.
The verb is then in the third person plural. Thus: Have you ?
is translated: ¿Tiene V.? /pron. tiene uste(d)]. Had you?
¿Tuvo v.? Shall you (plur.) have? ¿Tendrán Yds,? (pron.
tendrán ustedes).
Near relations commonly address each other in tú
(thou), without totally excluding V,, as: (tú) Puedes decir^
meló, you may tell it me (speaking to a brother).
(As the verb haber offers too little material for Reading
£xercise and Translation, we at once pass on to the verb tener,
which however is no auxiliary, but a principal verb.)
Ninth Lesson. — Lección novena.
Tener, to have, to hold.
Indicative.
Present,
Tengo, I have (hold). tenemos, we have (hold).
tienes, thou hast. tenéis, you have.
tiene, he has. tienen, they have.
* In the compound tense (Compound Perfect), however, ha
(and not hay) habido, there has been (there was).
8*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
86 Lesson 9.
Imperfect.
Tenia, I had (held). teníamos, we had (held).
tenias, thou hadst. teníais, you had.
tenia, he had. tenían, they had.
Definite,
Tuve, I had (held). tuvimos, we had (held),
¿tiria^e, thou hadst. tuvisteis, you had.
¿t«t;o, he had. tuvieron, they had.
Future,
Tendré, I shall have (hold). tendremos, we shall have.
tendrás, thou wilt have. tendréis, you will have.
tendrá, he will have. ¿cwdrán, they will have.
Conditional.
Tendría, I should have (hold), tendríamos, we should have.
tendrías, thou wouldst have. tendríais, you would have,
fcnilria, he would have. tendrían, they would have.
Imperative.
Ten, have (thou). Tened, have (you).
Participle.
Tenido, had (held). .
Compound Tenses,
Compound Perfect,
He \ I have j hemos\ we have |
has > tenido, thou hast > had. ^aí>á¿5| tenido, you have ;had.
^a I he has ) ^an j they have J
Fluptrfect,
Había \ S" I had \ habíamos \ ^ we had |
habías ) |. th. hadst ; had. habíais > |. you had > had.
había ) §" he had | habían ¡S' they had)
2nd Pluperfect.
Hube I ^ I had | hubimos \ S" we had \
hubiste)^ th. hadst /had.' ^tt6is¿eis>|. you had >had.
hubo ) ^ he had ) huibieron ) §" they had )
Compound Future,
Habré \^ I shall 1 , ' habremos]"^ we shall 1 1,-_^
habrás }| thou wilt l^^d ^<^^réis >|. you will )^J^
"' ] ' habrán J
Compound Conditional,
i i Ihave ^cib^ici'^os ,
g. th. wouldst > , T habríais / 1. you would > . ,
S' he would J ^^^' habHan J I' they wouldj ^^^'
Digitized by VjOOQIC
habrá }^ he will ) ^^^' habrán ¡^ they will)^*^-
Compound Conditional,
Habría ) §• I should 1 , habríamos) ^ we should K
Exercises. 37
Gerund.
Teniendo, having (holding).
Subjunctive.
Present.
Tenga, I have. tengamos, we have.
tengas, thou have. tengáis, you have.
tenga, he have. tengan, they have.
Imperfect.
Tuviese, that I had. tuviésemos, that we had.
tuvieses, that thou hadst. tuvieseis, that you had.
tuviese, that he had. tuviesen, that they had.
Future.
(Si) Tuviere, if I shall have. (si) tuviéremos,iíyíeshsllhd,ye,
> tuvieres, if thou wilt have. » tuviereis, if you will have.
> tuviere, if he will have. » tuviesen, if they will have.
Conditional.
Ti«t;iera, that I should 1 ^ ¿tivíáramo^, that we should have.
tuvieras, that thou wouldst \ % tuvierais, that you would have.
tuviera, that he would J ® iwwcraw, that they would have.
Compound Tenses.
These are formed, as in the Indicative mood, by adding
tenido to the respective simple tenses of haber. Thus :
Compound Perfect : Haya tenido, I have had.
Pluperfect: Hubiese tenido, that I had had.
Compound Future : HuMere tenido, that (if) I shall have had.
Compound Conditional: Hubiera tenido, that I should have had.
N.B. — The Participle, if used with haber, is always in-
variable; if with tener, it is not. Thus: ella había amado,
she had loved; ellos han tenido, they have had; las casas que
he tenido, the houses (which) I have had. — But: tengo leídos
muchos libros (or Uidas muchas cartas), I have already read
many books (letters).
Tenth Lesson. — Lección diez.
Exercises. — Ejercicios.
Words.
Xa rigwe^a, (the) riches, wealth, el protector, the protector.
la pobreza, (the) poverty. la pérdida, the loss.
el influjo, \ ^ i^fl^^^^^ el ánimo, the courage.
la influencia, f ^"""«"v^. ^i f^tedo, the fear.
Digitized
by Google
S8 Lesson 10.
la Exposición, the Exhibition, amado, loved.
eldesdichadOtthennhd^ppjmtkn, logrado, got, obtained.
el ¡holgazán, the idler. enviado, sent.
el hambre (f.), (the) hunger. pagado, paid.
la sed, (the) thirst. recibido, received.
la libertad, (the) liberty, free- perdió, he (she) lost.
dom. debe, he (she) owes.
la mercancía, the merchandise, sabido, learned.
d principe, the prince. poco, -a, a little.
la gana, a mind (to do some- más, more.
thing); the appetite. pero, but.
Za nación, the nation. g por qué . . .^, why ? ; porgue be-
l^odccwio, \ g^ff..^^ cause.
Beading Exercise. 14.
¿Hay dinero en esa bolsa? ¿Hubo hombres en el jardín?
Habrá muchas flores en los jardines de la Exposición. La ri-
queza y la pobreza tienen un gran influjo sobre los hombres.
Tuve protectores, pero los (them) he perdido. Hemos sufrido
grandes pérdidas. ¡Tened ánimo! ¡No tengáis miedo! Habría
menos desdichados, si hubiese menos holgazanes. ¿Tiene V.
dinero? ¿Tienen Yds. hambre ó sed? ¿Ha amado Y. á ese
hombre? El capitán no habría logrado su libertad, si no
hubiese tenido grandes protectores. Le habría enviado á V.
más mercancías, si Y. me (me) hubiese pagado. (Él) no me
ha pagado el dinero que (which) me debe (owes). Cuando
(él) hubo recibido su (his) dinero, lo (it) perdió. No he re-
cibido las mercancías que Y. me ha enviado. Habiendo sabido
por mi criado que el capitán está aquí, le (him) he enviado
todos sus libros. El desdichado no tendrá protectores. ¿Ha
visto Y. los castillos del rey? Los niños de nuestro tío ten-
drán papel y plumas, tinta y lápices. Los hermanos de nuestro
jardinero han sufrido una gran pérdida. ¿Por qué tuvo
Y. miedo? Ha* habido muchos criados en el palacio del
príncipe. El holgazán no tiene jamás gana de trabajar. El
señor N. tendría más dinero, si hubiese tenido gana de traba-
jar. La libertad tiene un gran influjo sobre las naciones.
El general quiere que Y. no tenga miedo. Ha de pagar Y.
el dinero que (Y.) perdió. Tendré que hablar con Y.
Tradnccióu. 15.
1. This man had great riches. What have you to tell
me (decirme)*^ The footman was always thirsty (tr. had
always thirst). Riches (sing,) will always have a great in-
fluence on (the) men. Are there any large towns in this
* See page 35**.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Exercises. 89
country? There (have always been) were always men who
(que) had no mind to work. I will not (have you lose heart)
that you have (suhj, pres,) fear*. I ha^á to speak to you
yesterday. We should have many friends if we had more
money. I have lost the protectors whom (que) I had. The
unhappy man has always had poor friends. Had you much
money in the purse which you have lost ? The prince would
have obtained his liberty had he had more protectors. Why
have you not sent me (me precedes the verb) the merchandise
(pi.)? I had no mind to speak with (á) the prince.
2. The idle man is hungry (tr. has h.), but he will not
work. Are you hungry or Üiirsty (tr. have you h. or th.)?
Mast you pay the money which the footman has lost?
These nations have sustained** great losses. There are men
who love (the) liberty more than (the) riches (sing.). Why
have you not loved this man? These nations had always
good (buenos) princes. The prince had two castles and three
palaces in (the) town. Do you know (sahe V.) how many
(cuánto, -a) provinces Spain has? Has Mr. Figueredo many
books? He has more books than my father and my cousin (m.),
I had already (ya begins the sentence) paid (for) these goods
yesterday. Thou wilt have the money to-morrow. He had
had unfortunate friends.
Conversación.
¿ Quién ha tenido dinero? El comerciante ha tenido mu-
cho dinero?
¿Tiene el criado hambre ó No tiene hambre, pero tiene
sed? siempre sed.
¿Hay flores en ese jardín? Hay en ól flores y árboles.
¿ Qué tiene un gran influjo La riqueza y la pobreza tienen
sobre los hombres? un gran influjo sobre los
hombres.
¿Que tendrá la señorita El- Tendrá un hermoso espejo
vira? (looTdng-glass).
¿Cuántas horas (hours) tiene El día tiene veinticuatro horas.
el día?
¿Tiene V. que hablar con mi No, señor, tengo que hablar
hermano? con V.
¿Por qué no tiene amigos el Porque no tiene dinero.
desdichado ?
¿Tuvo muchos palacios el Tuvo dos palacios y muchos
principe? jardines.
* For the convenience of the beginner the English text is
occasionally modified, so that a literal translation may be good
Spanish.
** Transí, suffered.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
40
Lesson 11.
i Por qué no me ba pagado V. ?
¿Ha sabido V. que mi padre
ba sufrido una pérdida?
¿Ha visto V. las mercancías?
Porque no be tenido dinero.
No, sefior, no lo be sabido.
No las be visto.
Eleventh Lesson. — Lección once.
The Auxiliary Verb Ser, to be. — El verbo auxiliar
ser^ to be.
Indicative.
Present,
(nosotros) somos, we are.
(vosotros) sois, you are.
(ellos) son, they are.
Imperfect.
éramos, we were.
erais, you were.
eran, they were.
Definite.
fuimos, we were.
fuisteis, you were.
fueron, they were.
Future.
seremos, we shall be.
seréis, you will be.
serán, they will be.
Conditional.
seriamos, we should be.
seríais, you would be.
serían, thej would be.
Imperative.
sed, be (you).
Participle.
Sido, been.
Compound Tenses.
Compound Perfect.
He sido, I havo been. hemos sido, we have been.
has sido, thou hast been. habéis sido, you have been.
ha sido, he has been. han sido, they have been.
(Yo) sop, I am. '
(tú) eres, thou art.
(él) es, he is.
Era, I was.
eras, thou wast.
era, he was.
Fui, I was.
fuiste, thou wast.
fué, he was.
Seré, 1 shall be.
serás, thou wilt be.
será, he will be.
Seria, I should be.
serias, thou wouldst be.
seria, he would be.
Sé, be (thou).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Auxiliary Verb 5er, to be. 41
Pluperfect.
Había sido, I bad been. hdbiamos sido, we bad been.
Mbias sido, tboti badst been, habíais sido, you bad been.
Mhia sido, be had been. habían sido, they had been.
3nd Pluperfect
Htibe sido, I had been. hubimos sido, we had been.
hubiste Hdo, thou hadst been, hubisteis sido, you had been.
hubo, sido, he had been. hubieron sido, they had been.
Compound Future.
Habré sido, I shall | , habremos sido, we shall j ,
habrás sido, thou wilt}, habréis sido, you will >i^^^
habrá sido, he will ) ^^^' habrán sido, they will) ^®®'^-
Compound Conditional.
Habría sido, I should j, ^^riamosstdo, we should!.
habrías sido, th. wouldst; ?*^® habríais sido, you wo'il<^rv>f!J^
Ju¿bría sido, he would j habrían sido, they would) ^
Gerund.
Siendo, being.
Subjunctive.
Present.
Sea, I be. seamos, we be.
seas, thou be. 5eíí¿5, you be.
sea, he be. sean, they be.
Jmjjer/cci.
Fuese, I were. fuésemos, we were.
fueses, thou wert. fueseis, you were.
/mcsc, he were. fuesen, they were.
Fuere, (if) I shall be. fuéremos, (if) we shall be.
fueres, > thou wilt be. fuereis, > you will be.
/were, > he will be. fueren, » they will be.
Conditional.
Fuera, that I should be. fuéramos, that we should be.
fueras, that thou wouldst be. fuerais, that you would be.
/«era, that he would be. fueran, th&t they would be.
Compound Tenses.
Like those of the Indicative Mood, the compound tenses
of the Subjunctive are formed by adding the Participle sido
to the respective forms of the Subjunctive of haber, thus :
Digitized by VaOOQlC
42 Lesson 11.
Haya sido, I have been.
Hubiese sido, that I had been.
Hubiere sido, if I shall have been.
Hubiera sido, that I should have been.
Remarks.
1. Ser is used with nouns, adjectives, etc., in order to
express a permanent state of existence of the sabject, as:
Ser hombre, to be a man; ser general, to be a general; ser
bueno, malo, to be good, bad, etc. Here the qualities attri-
buted to the subject appear as characteristic and, as it were,
inseparable from it. Such qualities are size, dignity, ncUionaJ-
ity, office, occupation, etc. Thus:
Ese señor es juez, francés, general, pintor, alto, bajo^ etc.
This gentleman is a judge, a Frenchman, a general, a
painter, tall, short, etc.
2. On the contrary, estar is used when the attribute
appears merely accidental, or if a dwelling in any place what-
ever is to be expressed. Thus:
Está cansado, he is tired.
No está en casa, he is not at home.
Some examples will show the difference between the two
verbs:
Ese hombre es bueno, malo, this man is good, bad.
Ese hombre está bueno*, malo, this man is well, un-
well (in good gealth, in bad health), etc.
In the first example, the quality is a characteristic and
permanent one; in the second, it is accidental and transient.
Esta puerta es alta, this door is high (i.6., the quality
is permanent).
Esta puerta está cerrada, this door is shut (i.e., in
this moment, but it might be open).
The pupil should carefully compare the following sentences :
El señor N. es muy docto, Mr. N. is a very learned man.
Estamos prontos, we are ready.
Es librero, he is a bookseller.
Estoy contento, I am satisfied.
Somos fuertes, cuerdos, we are strong, prudent.
Estar en el paseo, en el café, en el campo, to be on the
promenade**, at the coffee-house, in the country.
Ser rey, to be king.
* Estar bien means also: to be at ease.
** el paseo—i.e., the avenue, park, public gardens, quay,
place or street where the townspeople usually take their walk.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Estar^ to be. 43
Es sabio, rico, etc., he is wise, rich, etc.
Ya estamos aqui, now we are here.
Bon Fulano es de Paris, Mr. N. is from Paris.
3. Sometimes ser and estar may be coupled with the
same word, as:
8er enamorado, to be of an amorous disposition.
Estar enamorado, to be in love.
But here, again, in the first example the quality is a
characteristic mark of the person; in the second, however, it
is merely accidental and transitory.
4. The Passive voice of the verb is always formed with
ser, as: Ser amado, to be loved. The compound tenses do
not differ from the English: He sido amado, I have been
loved. (See the Passive Voice,)
5. The adjectives atento, attentive; contento, satisfied;
libre, free; enfadado, angry, are commonly used with estar.
6. Very often estar with the Gerund is an equivalent
for to be with the present participle, as :
Estoy buscando á mi hermano, I am looking for my
brother.
Estaba leyendo un libro, I was reading a book.
Twelfth Lesson. — Lección doce.
Estar, to toe*.
Indicative.
Present
Jfj I am. estamos, we are.
^9tás, thou art. estáis, you are.
wW, he is. están, they are.
Imperfect.
Estaba, I was. estábamos, we were.
^abas, thou wast. estabais, you were.
estaba, he was. estaban, they were.
Definite.
Estuve, I was. estuvimos, we were.
tuviste, thou wast. estuvisteis, you were.
estuvo, he was. estuvieron, they were.
* We need not add that estar (like tener) is no auxiliary,
*^^t a principal verb.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
44 Lesson 12.
Future.
Estaré, I shall be. estaremos, we shall be.
estarás, thou wilt be. estaréis, you will be.
estará, he will be. estarán, they will be.
Conditional.
Estaría, I should be. estaríamos, we should be.
estarías, thou wouldst be. estaríais, you would be.
estaría, he would be. estarían, they would be.
Imperative.
Está, be (thou). estad, be (you).
Participle.
Estado, been.
Compound Tenses.
Compound Perfect.
He estado, I have been. hemos estado, we have been.
has estado, thou hast been. habéis estado, you have been.
ha estado, he has been. han estado, they have been.
Pluperfect.
Había \ I had | ^ habíamos) 8 we had |
h<Mas) estado, th. hadst>Í habíais ||* you had [been.
haUa ] he had J ? habían \P they had j
2nd Pluperfect.
Hube I I had . | ^ hubimos | S we bad 1
hubiste \ estado, th. hadst > * hubisteis \ S* you had \ been.
hubo J he had J? hubieron]^ they had J
Compound Future.
Habré \ I shall ) , habremos ) S we shall ] ,
habrás \ estado, th. wilt ^^^® ^aftrew |" you will ?*J®
^aftrá J he will J ^®'*- habrán \f they will J *^®®^-
Compound Conditional.
Habría estado, I should have habríamos estado, we should
etc. been. etc. have been.
Gerund.
Estando, being.
Subjunctive.
Present.
Esté, I be. estemos, we be.
estés, thou be. estéis, you be.
esté, he be. estén, they be.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Exercises. -45
Imperfect.
Estuviese, I were. estuviésemos, we were.
estuvieses, thou wert. estuvieseis, you were.
estuviese, he were. estuviesen, they were.
Future.
Estuviere, ' (that) I shall be. estuviéremos, (that) we shall be.
estuvieres, (that) thou wilt be. estuviereis, (that) you will be.
estuviere, (that) he will be. estuvieren, (that) they will be.
Conditional.
Estuniera, that I should be. estuviéramos, thB,t we síhonláhe,
es^wwra^, that thou wouldst be. estuvierais, that you would be.
estuviera, that he would be. estuvieran, that they would be.
Compound Tenses,
Like those of the Indicative Mood, they are formed
by joining the Participle estado to the Subjunctive of
haber ^ as:
Haya estado, (that) I have been.
hubiese estado, that I had been.
hubiere estado, that I shall have been.
hubiera estado, that I should have been.
Bule, — The past participle, used with haber, is al-
ways invariable, as in EngHsh; thus:
ÉH ha estado, he has been.
eUa ha estado, she has been (and not estada),
eUo8 han estado, they (m,) have been (and not estados).
ellas han estado, they (f,) have been (and not estadas).
Thirteenth Lesson. — Lección trece.
Exercises. — Ejercicios.
Words.
El deseo, the wish, desire. el viaje, the journey.
ia manera, the manner. el extranjero, the foreign coun-
^ sueño, the dream. try; al extranjero, abroad.
^ cosa, the thing. el bebedero, the trough, bird's
^ situación, the situation. trough.
el heredero, the heir. la cruz, the cross.
^ precio, the price. el pájaro, the bird.
el ceibal juicio, the good sense, la virtud, the virtue.
^ error, the mistake. el reina, the kingdom.
h piedra, the stone. la aldea, the village.
^l duque, the duke. eí concierto, the concert.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
46 Lesson 13.
la viuda, the widow. adornar, to adoro.
d edificio, the building, edifice, mirar, to look at.
la plaza, the square. conquistar, to conquer.
el baile, the ball. alcanzar, to obtain, to get.
la compañía, the company. vivir, to live, to dwell.
la prosperidad, the happiness, muerto, died (Past, p.), dead.
prosperity. tarde, late.
lastimoso, -a, sorry, sad. lejos, far.
precioso, -a, precious. j?or desgracia, unfortunately.
enfadado, -a, cross. a^wi, here.
cierto, -a, certain. de paso, for the time being,
colmado, -a, filled. actually.
favorable, favourable. en medio, in the middle, amidst.
Reading Exercise. 16.
El deseo de alcanzar fama es activo en muchos hombres.
El suefio no es más que una fantasía (fantasy). Mi situación
es muy lastimosa, no obstante de ser* yo un heredero rico.
Las mercancías inglesas son de precios moderados. Y. no está
en su cabal juicio. V. estuvo en un error. ¿Estará V. en
casa mañana? Esta cruz de oro estaba adornada de muchas
piedras preciosas. El duque y la duquesa están aquí de paso
en su viaje al extranjero. Los niños- tendrán de cuatro á
cinco años. Estoy mirando (looking) si (whether) el bebedero
del pájaro tiene agua. Doña Julia está muy enfadada hoy.
Por desgracia es cierto que el hijo de la pobre viuda ha
muerto. ¿Qué edificio es aquel que está en medio de la plaza?
¿Estuvieron Vds. ayer en el baile? No hubo baile ayer.
Sería muy hermoso este viaje, si no hiciese tanto calor (were
not so hot). El duque ha estado en su palacio, y la duquesa
estuvo en el extranjero. La vida es un sueño. Los niños no
están en su cabal juicio. Mi padre quiere que yo esto en
casa todo el día. Es una cosa deliciosa vivir en compañía
de un amigo. La casa de su amigo de F.** está muy lejos
de la ciudad. ¡Quiera (would to) Dios que sus años de V.
sean colmados de toda (all) prosperidad! Las plazas fuertes
de todo el reino están conquistadas.
Traducción. 17.
Where are you*"^? Were you at home yesterday? No,
sir, I was not at home. I was at the concert. The cross of
the duchess was (set) adorned with precious stones. A poet
* no obstante de ser, although I am. In English, the Infini-
tive following no obstante should be rendered by the respective
tense of the verb.
** you when printed in italics is always V. — For Your,
see the Note on page 48.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Exercises. 47
says (dice): (the) Error is (the) life. The duke and the
dnchess are travelling {tr, on a journey) abroad. In the middle
of the square there is a large palace and a beautiful garden.
The building is very for from the village (la aldea). Where
was (Def,) the son of the widow? The trough of the bird is
without water. (The) Fortune is a precious thing; but (the)
virtue is more (más) precious. Your cousin (m,) is very cross
to-day. unfortunately it is certain that the emperor has died.
There were ten precious stones on the cross. The prices of
(the) English goods are very moderate. Your brother (Su
hermano de F.) has been greatly mistaken (transí, in a great
mistake). Why are you not* satisfied with (con) your situ-
ation? I wish you to be (tr, I wish that you be) at home
at 12 o'clock (á las doce). If you were in Madrid» your si-
tuation would be more favourable. Were you not at the con-
cert yesterday? I should have been at home if your brother
had come (venido). It is already (ya) somewhat (algo)
late; why did you not come at ten o'clock (á las diee)l
This man has always been very happy (feliz); notwithstand-
ing (sin embargo) he is not satisfied with his (su) situation.
I was just reading a book, when (cuando) my brother came
(vino). What are you looking for? I am looking {tr. searching)
for my hat.
Conversación.
¿Dónde está el duque? Está en el palacio de la duquesa.
¿Qué deseo es activo en los El deseo de alcanzar fama y
hombres? riqueza.
¿Qué es el sueño? El suefio es una cosa fantástica.
¿Por qué se lastima (compíatn) Porque mi situación es muy
V.? lastimosa.
¿ Cómo son los precios de esos Son muy (very) moderados.
géneros (commodities)'^
¿ Estuvo V. ayer en su casa ? No, señor, estuve en casa de
mi primo.
¿De qué (With what) estaba Estaba adornada de muchas
adornada la cruz del obispo piedras preciosas.
(bishop) 'i
¿ Qué edad es la de V.? (or tiene Tengo treinta años (lam . . .
V?) — (How old are you ?) old), '
¿Qué estás leyendo? Estoy leyendo el Don Quijote.
¿Está V. buscando su som- No, señora, estoy buscando
brero? mis guantes.
¿Quién ha muerto? El hijo de la pobre viuda ha
muerto.
* In Spanish, the meaning of a verb is rendered negative
by prefixing fto to it, as : I do not think, (Yo) no pienso.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
48 I^esson 14.
¿No puede (^Canno^^V. decirme El edificio que e$tá en medio
(tell me) qué (what) edificio de la plaza es el Tribunal
es aquel? Real (royáí).
¿Qué quiere su padre de V.?* Quiere que esté hoy en casa
hasta la tarde.
¿Cómo está su padre de V.? Está un poco indispuesto (un-
well).
Fourteenth Lesson. — Lección catorce.
DetermlnatiTe Adyectiyes. — Ádjectíyos deter-
minantes.
!• BemonstratiTe Adjectiyes. — Adjectiros demostratiyos.
They are;
Sing. Plur.
JStoíe**, esta, esto, this estos, estas, these.
Bse, esa, eso, that esos, esas, those.
Aquel, aquélla, aquéllo, that aquellos, aquellas, those.
Demonstratives are considered to be Pronouns when
employed zvithout a substantive. When employed with
a substantive, they are Adjectives.
§ 1. These demonstratives diflfer as follows. Este
refers to anything which is near the speaker, and ese
to anything which is near the person addressed. Thus
este sombrero means this hat (near me), whereas ese
sambrero means this or that hat (near you). Aquel, on
the contrary, refers to a person or a thing distant from
the speaker as well as from the person addressed to.
Again esta ciudad is the town where the speaker or
writer lives; esa ciudad means the town in which the
person to whom I write or speak Hves — i.e., your, town';
aquélla ciudad is neither my town nor yours, but another
place remote from both.
§ 2. The forms esto (this), eso, and aquello are
neuter (like the article lo\ and difíer in the same way.
They may never be. coupled with a substantive. Ex.:
¿Le has hablado de eso? Have you spoken to him of
it? (of that, thereof etc.)
* Your (polite mode) is expressed el . . . de V. (the ... of
you), or more elegantly su . . . de V. (your ... of you). (See the
following Lesson.)
** JDe este, de esta, de esto were formerly contracted into
deste, desta, desto. This practice is now obsolete.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Determinative Adjectives. 49
§ 3. JEZ mistifio, la misma, lo mismo^ the same.
This demonstrative takes the definite article as
well as the indefinite. Preceded by un, it corresponds
to the English similar or like; thus:
El mismo árbol, the same tree.
Del mismo árbol, of the same tree, etc.
Un mismo uniforme, a similar (the like) uniform.
Mismo may also be joined to este, ese, and aqud,
and then means the very same, or this very . . ., as:
Este mismo hombre, the identical man.
io mismo is neuter and means the same thing.
2. Interrogative Adjectives.
§ 4. ¿ Qué? what? which? is invariable as to
ier and number; and its sense is more general
than that of ¿cuál? thus: ,
¿Qué hombre? What man?
¿ Qué culpa tengo ? What is my fanlt ? i.e., in what
does my. fanlt consist?
¿Qué libro tiene Y,? Which book have you got?
Qué is also exclamativo, as:
/ Qué hombre ! What a man I
If followed by an adjective, tan (so, so much) or
más, most (utmost) should be added, as:
/ Qué mujer tan, hermosa ! What a beautiful woman I
/ Qué casa más alta! What a high house!
N.B,— Indirect interrogative sentences are also intro-
duced by qué, as:
No sabemos qué pasajeros han llegado.
We do not know which passengers have arrived.
Preguntaba qué noticias traía el vapor,
I was asking what news the steamer brought.
§ 5. The interrogative and exclam^itive qué, when
joined to the Accusative of a person, does not, like the
relative pronoun que (see Lesson 26), admit of the pre-
position á; thus:
¿ Qué hombre ha visto V, ? Which man have you seen?
and not: ¿A qué hombre ha visto V,?
§ 6. ¿Cuál? ¿Qué? what? which?; ¿cuál? which?
what? (plur. ¿cuáles?) are invariable only as to gender,
Spanish Conv. -Grammar. *
Digitized by vaOOQlC
50 Lesson 14.
and used to specify or distinguish between two or
more persons or things :
¿Cuál hombre? which man? what man?
¿Cuál mujer? which woman?
PI. ¿ Cuáles hombres ? ¿ Cuáles mujeres ? which men ? which
women?
Words.
La carta, the letter. majestuosOy -a, majestic.
ü muchacho, the boy. pesado, -a, heavy.
la callé, the street. natural, native, born in.
la arquitectura, the architec- alto, -a, high.
tore. primorosamente, first rate,
la iglesia, the church. very well.
el nombre, the name. hablo, I speak.
la tienda, the shop. habla, he (she) speaks.
la señora, the lady. mire F. , look! (3rd Sing.
el lujo, the magnificence. Imper.)
la carga, the burden, weight, se llama, is named.
el oficial, the officer. comprado, bought.
(H cuarto, the room. hecho, done, made.
el color, the colour. cómo, how.
á^-i^vii "»'•»«••'•
dos, two.
Beading Exercise. 18.
Este hombre. Aquellas cartas. Esa mujer. Ese muchacho,
i Qué calle tan hermosa! Ese {or aquel) teatro es muy grande.
Esta casa no es grande. La arquitectura de aquella {pr esa)
iglesia es majestuosa. iMire V. estos árboles! Aquellas dos
señoras son extranjeras; son cantantes (singers). Esta señora
es natural de Madrid (es madrileña), ¿Cómo se llama este
café? ¡Qué lujo en esta casa! lOh qué carga tan pesada!
¿Está bueno su amigo de Y. en esa ciudad? ¿Tiene V. el
mismo libro que tengo yo? Aquellos oficiales tenían un mismo
uniforme. He visto á las mismas señoras que usted ha visto.
¿Qué deseo tiene su hermano de V.? ¿Cuál hombre estuvo
en mi cuarto ? No hablo de este hombre sino (but) de aquel.
El mismo color. Las mismas personas. El hijo de aquel
hombre es muy pequeño. He comprado las mismas plumas
en la tienda de aquel mismo hombre. Hemos leído los mismos
libros,
Tradnccién. 19.
This man is rich. That boy is poor. Those women were
in my room. Have you seen that theatre? This church has
a majestic architecture. What splendour in this palace!
What [a] rich man! In your (§ 1) city there was (hubo)
Digitized by VjOOQIC
PossesBÍves. 51
a merchant who (gue) had the same name. These two officers
have the same uniform. This gentleman is called (has the
name of) Charles, and that lady is called Elvira. Do jou speak
of these gentlemen or of those ? Many flowers have the same
colour. What [aj maní What [a] beautiful woman! These
boys were at (the) church. I have seen the same persons.
These gentlemen are natives of Paris, and those ladies of
Madrid. The trees before your house are very high. This
burden is very heavy. What is the name of that boy (tr.
How calls himself that boy) ? Do you speak of this gentleman
or of that lady?
CoDTersación*
?Cómo se llama este mu- Se llama Celedonio.
chacho ?
¿T cómo se llaman esos hom- No sé como se llaman.
bres?
¿Es grande ese teatro? Si, señora, es muy grande.
¿Cómo es la arquitectura de (ja arquitectura de aquella
aquella iglesia? iglesia es majestuosa.
¿No es madrileña esta señora? ¡Perdone V.! (1 beg your par-
don O Esta señora es natural
de Paris (or ftcí^er parisiense.)
¿Conoce V. esta flor? Si, es una rosa.
¿Y aquella? Es un tulipán.
¿Son cantantes esas señoras? No son cantantes, pero bailan
(they dance) primorosamente.
¿ Cómo estaban vestidos aque- Tenían todos un mismo uni-
llos oficiales? forme.
¿ Qué hombre ha visto V. ? He visto al padre de este mu-
chacho.
¿Qué ha hecho V. esta ma- He escrito una carta.
ñaña?
Fifteenth Lesson. — Lección qnince.
Possessiyes. — Posesiyos.
Possessives may be either adjectives (when imme-
diately preceding or following a noun or its equivalent),
or pronouns (when by themselves, whether preceded or
not by an article). Compare:
¡Hija mía! my daughter. Sus libros, his books.
And ¿De quién es hija? — Mia,
Whose daughter is she? — Mine.
¿ Qué libros son ? — Los míos.
Which books are they? — Mine.
4*
Digitized by vaOOQlC
62
Lesson 15.
In any case Possessires are treated as adjectives as
to inflection and agreement, though in Spanish they
agree with the possessed object, not with the possessor.
1. Possessire adjeetiyeg*
They assume two forms:
(a) Complete form (which follows):
Sing,
Plur.
mio, nda, my
1 ^
mios, mias, my
^
tuyo, tuya, thy
ferring to onl
possess
tuyos, tuyas, thy
o 3
1 his i ..
suyo, suya, ) her / ^ ^
^' 1 its
suyos, suyas, ) her f
ring to tno
bject posi
) your
J your
(&«<
S 3
nuestro, niAestra, our
P'O
nuestros, nuestras, our
vuestro, vuestra, your
s
vuestros, vuestras, your
i- i*
\ their
suyo, suya, ¡ ^^^^
J-
suyos, suyas, } ^^^^
. s
Í
i
(b) Apocopate form (which precedes):
Sing,
Plur,
mi, my
^
mis, my
?
tu, thy
s*
tus, thy
of
«.At]'»
sus, her } '^^
your
to only
ssesse
your
11
nuestro, nuestra, our
nuestros, nuestras, our
s ^
vuestro, vuestra, your
vuestros, vuestras, your
Ir
su \ ^^^"
^' i your
<D
1 their
/your.
• §
Examples.
Mi amigo, my friend (= a friend of mine).
¡Amigo mio! my (dear) friend!
Fué por culpa fnia y no por culpa suya, it was
through my fault and not through his (fault).
Fué por mi culpa, y no por tu culpa,
§ 1. His and her are both rendered by su, as sti
amigo, his friend or her friend. — Besides, su signifies
their, as: My brothers have sold their dog, mis hermanos
han vendido su perro, .
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Possessives. 58^
§ 2. Mi, tu, su have no particular form for the^
feminine gender; nuestro and vuestro, however, change
the final o into a, as: nuestro amigo, our friend (m,);
nuestra amiga, our friend (f.).
§ 3. As in English, the possessive adjective, when
no stress is laid on it, may be omitted, if another sub-
stantive with a possessive adjective precedes, coupled
by the conjunction y (and) or ó (or); thus:
Sus libros y (sus) plumas.
His books and (his) pens.
§ 4. If in English a possessive adjective is repeated
before two adjectives expressing matter — as: wooden,
gold, silver, etc. (when in Spanish, as stated in Less. 6,
§ 4, the material is expressed by a substantive with de) —
Üie Spaniard omits the second possessive adjective and
puts the definite article in its stead, as:
Neither your gold nor your silver watch.
Ni tu relej de oro ni el de plata.
§ 5. Likewise, the demonstrative pronoun is ren-
dered by the definite article, if a substantive preceded by
a possessive adjective is followed by another substantive
in the Genitive case, as:
My friend and that of my cousin.
Mi amigo y el de mi primo.
If we say: El amigo mío y de mi primo, the sense
is different. In the first sentence we speak of two per-
sons, whereas in the second phrase the same person is
meant.
§ 6. The English expression : a friend, a relation, etc.
of mine, should be translated un amigo mío, etc., as :
Charles is a friend of mine.
Carlos es (un) amigo mio.
§ 7. The possessive pronoun referring to the polite
form F. is either d (la) de F. or more elegantly su de
V,; simply su (and not su de F.), if F. precedes imme-
diatdy, when no misunderstanding would arise, thus:
Have you your stick? ¿Tiene Y. su hasten? (and not:
su hasten de V., because Y. precedes.) Whereas:
I have your stick. Tengo el hasten de F. ; or more
elegantly: Tengo su bastón de F.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
54 Leeson 15.
N.B.—The English possessive is rendered not by the
Spanish possessive, bnt by the article, in snch phrases as:
I have cat my hand, me he cortado la mano.
He has broken his arm, se ha roto el brazo.
Words.
La dicha, the fortune. la edad, the age.
d conocido, the acquaintance, la iltisión, the illusion.
el mantenimiento, the mainte- poético, -a, poetical,
nance, livelihood. único, -a, sole, only.
la edtuíación, the education. estudiar, to study.
la incuria, the carelessness. cuidar, to care. [teem.
el descuido, the negligence. apreciar, to appreciate, to es-
la causa, the cause. vienes, thou comest.
la desgracia, the misfortune. quieren, they like.
los padres, the parents. repasad, repeat (2nd Plur. Im-
el hierro, the iron. perat.).
la cadena, the chain. hallado, found.
Readingr Exercise. 20.
1 Mire V. mi reloj ! ¿ Vienes á estudiar con tu hermano ?
¡Repasad vuestras lecciones, niños! Mis hermanos estuvieron
ayer en su jardín de V. ¿Tiene V. su reloj de oro ó el de
plata? Esta madre ha perdido su hijo y su hija*. Es culpa
mía el no haber venido ayer. Ese hombre es mi amigo y
no el de mi hermano. Mi amigo y el de mi hermano han
muerto. ¡Por dicha mía he vendido mi casa! ¿No es amigo
tuyo ese señor ? Es un conocido mío. ¡ Dadme (give [pl.] me)
mi libro y mis plumas! Estos niños han perdido á su padre.
He hallado su bolsillo de V. Esta casa es mía, y aquella es
de** mi padre. Mi tío cuida de mi mantenimiento y educación.
Tu incuria y descuido son la única causa de tu degracia.
Hemos hablado de nuestro amigo y no del tuyo. Me he cor-
tado la mano. Se ha roto el brazo.
Traducción. 21.
His children are the cause of his misfortune. Have you
studied (estudiado) with your brother? This gentleman has lost
his son, and this lady has lost her daughter. These children
love their parents. It is (by) your .fault that I have lost
(el haber perdido yo) my gold watch. Is this lady your
friend or that of your sister? I have come with my cousin
(m.) and with yours. Have you your silver or your gold
chain? Have you your hat? I have not mine, but (sino) I
* Ha perdido á su hijo may mean: ''has ruined her son."
** To belong to, is usually expressed by the verb ser with
the Genitive case.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Ppseeseives.
5;^
have my brother's hat. A friend of mine has provided for
the education of the children. My friends and acquaintances
(did not) have not come. I have found your purse in the
garden. Our aunts have found their letters. He has broken
his arm.
Conversación.
¡Mire V. (look at) mi reloj! Su reloj de V. atrasa (loses).
¿Cuál es la causa de su des-
gracia de V.?
¿Quieren esos niños á sus
padres?
¿Con quién ha venido V.?
¿Qué se ha de (must one)
apreciar en un hombre?
¿Dónde estuvo V. ayer?
¿Qué tiene su criado de V.?
La única causa de mi des-
gracia es mi descuido.
Si, señor, los quieren.
He venido con mi amigo y el
de mi hermano.
Su persona y sus cualidades
(qualities).
Estuve en el jardín de mi tío.
Tiene mi gorra (cap) y su
sombrero de V.
¿Es ese señor su hermano de
No, es mi primo; mi hermano
V.?
es aquel.
¿De qué debe (ought, shall)
Del mantenimiento y
de la
cuidar un buen padre?
educación de sus hijos.
¿No es ese señor un conocido
Sí, señor, es un conocido mío.
de V.?
Amigo mió, iqué has hecho
¡No es culpa mía!
(done)\
2. Possessive pronouns.
mase. fern.
neutr.
(el) mío, (la) mía.
(lo) mío, mine
HH
(el) tuyo, (la) tuya.
(lo) tuyo, thine
t' ■
(el) suyo, (la) suya,
(lo) suyo,
his
3
or or
or
hers
S'
(el) de el, (la) de él
(lo) de él,
its
^
* (el) de ella, (la) de ella,
(lo) de ella,
vnni*fl
§■ •'
(el) de Y., (la) de F.,
(lo) de V., 1 *'^"""
(el) nuestro, (la) nuestra.
(lo) nuestro, ours
<A>j
(el) vuestro, (la) vuestra,
(lo) vuestro, yours
^.,.;,
(el) suyo, (7a) suya,
(lo) suyo.
■§. ■
or or
or
theirs
§ , .
(el) de ellos, (la) de ellos.
(lo) de ellos.
yours.
1: ..■:
(el) de ellas, (la) de ellas.
(lo) de ellas.
(él) de VV., (la) de VV„
(lo) de YY„ ) J
;- .•;>:..
Digitized by V
joogle
56
Lesson 16.
mase,
(los) mios,
(los tuyos,
(los) suyos,
or
(los) de él,
(los) de ella,
(los) de F.,
(los) nuestros,
(los) vuestros,
(los) suyos,
or
(los) de eUos,
(los) de ellas,
(los) de VV.,
N.B.—Eñch of the
article :
fem,
(las) mías, mine
(las) tuyas, thine
(las) suyas,
or
(las) de él
(las) de ella,
(las) de Y.,
his
hers
its
yours
(las) nuestras, ours
(las) vuestras, yours
(Uls) suyas
1 theirs
(yours.
^
a
s-
OQ 2
QD
9
or
J-
(las) de ellos
(las) de ellas
(las) de VV.,\
above forms may appear T?ithont the
§
¿Qué libro es éste? — El mío.
Which book is this? — Mine.
¿De quién es este libro? — Mío.
Whose book is this? — Mine.
Tradnccióu.
Which hat have you got ? (¿ tiene F. ?) — Mine. No ;
that is mine ; this is yours. He has lost his (neuter) and hers
(neuter). That house is ours; those windows are mine.
Whose gloves are these ? — Hers. I thought they (creía que)
were yours.
Sixteenth Lesson. — Lección dieciséis.
Numerals. — Namerales.
1. Cardinal Numbers. — Numerales Cardinales.
Uno (un), u/na, one.
dos, two.
tres, three.
cuatro, four.
cmco, five.
seis, six.
siete, seven.
ocho, eight.
nueve, nine.
diee, ten.
once, eleven.
doce, twelve.
trece, thirteen.
catorce, fourteen.
quince, fifteen.
diez y seis or dieciséis, sixteen.
diejs y siete or diecisiete, se-
venteen.
diez y ocho or dieciocho,
eighteen.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Cardinal Numbers. 57
diee y nueve or diecinueve^ trescientos, -as, \ oqq
nineteen. trecientos, -as, f
veinte, twenty. cuatrocientos, -as, 400.
veinte y %mo* \ ^ ^ quinientos, -as, 500.
(veintiuno), ] ^"^^^^y^^^- seiscientos, -as, 600.
veinte y dos, twenty-two. setecientos, -as, 700.
veinte y tres, twenty- three. ochocientos, -as, 800.
veinte y cuatror, twenty-four. novecientos, -as, 900.
treinta, thirty. mil, 1000.
cuarenta, forty. mil uno, 1001.
cincuenta, fifty. mil dos, 1002.
sesenta, sixty. mU tres, 1003.
setenta^ seventy. dos mil, 2000.
ochenta, eighty. tres mil, 3000.
noventa, ninety. [red. diez mil, 10,000.
dentó (contract cien), a hund- cien mil, 100,000.
ciento uno, 101. un millán (antic, un cuento)^
ciento dos, 102. 1,000,000.
doscienios, doscientas, \ oaq
dodentos, decientas, f
1. Uno, either by itself or in its, compounds vein-
tiuno, treinta y uno, etc., drops the o when imme-
diately followed by a substantive or its adjective, or
the numerals ciento, mil, millón; thus: un cabaUo, a
horse; un buen caballo, a good horse; un miUón de
pesetas, 1,000,000 pesetas.
2. Before mil (1000) and dento (100) un is never
used, provided no misconception may arise by omitting
it. Thus, one thousand one hundred and eleven is trans-
lated mil ciento once; but, cuatrocientos y un mil 401,000,
because cuatrocientos mil (without tm) is 400,000.
3. Ciento drops the last syllable (-to) when immedi-
ately before a substantive or an adjective, and hkewise
before mil and millón, as: a hundred men, den hombres,
a hundred thousand, cien mil; but ciento ocho, 108.
The English expressions: eleven hundred, twelve hund-
red, etc., must be rendered by mil ciento [one thousand
one hundred], etc. Ex.: mil ochocientos (-as), eighteen
hundred.
4. C&w^o in the j>iwraZ (two hundred, three hundred,
etc.) is inflected like an adjective, taking s before a
* In modern orthography, veinte is often written as one word
with the following number, thus:
veintiuno, 21; veintidós, 22; veintitrés, 23, etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
58 Lesson 16.
masculine and changing the final o into (is before a
feminine noun, as: Doscientos hombres, 200 men; dos-
cientas mujeres, 200 women; but cientos de hombres,
cientos de mujeres, hundreds of men, hundreds of women.
5. Some before hundred and thousand is translated
unos (-as), as: sojne hundred (thousand) dollars, unos
cien (mil) pesos.
6. The days of the month (except "the first," él
primero) are expressed by cardinal numbers, generally
preceded by the article, as: the 25th, d veinte y dncó;
the 18th of January, ^el diez y ocho de enero. The
general question is: ¿^ cuántos estamos? what is
the date of to-day? — We have the is translated
estamos á: we have the 18th of January, estamos
á diez y ocho de enero. The date of a letter is either
given as in English, as: Madrid, May 4th, 1889, Madrid,
á (cuatro) de mayo, 1889, or: Madrid, y mayo 4 (cuatro)
de 1889 {lit. Madrid and May the 4th of 1889).
Note.—TYíQ Spanish language sometimes prefers cardinal
numbers where the English makes use of ordinals. The
following may serve as examples: In his third year, á los'
tres años de edad; on the ninth day, á los ntíeve dios.
7. The hours of the day are expressed by the
article la, las, and the cardinal numbers. The English.
clock is omitted. What is the time? or what time
is it? is rendered in Spanish by ¿Qué hora es?
Thus:
One o'clock, Za* una (i.e. hora, hour).
Two o'clock, las dos (i.e. horas, hours). '
Three o'clock, las tres, etc.
At is á, as: at four o'clock, á las cuatro.
Time between two consecutive hours is expressed
thus:
A quarter past one, la una y cuarto (= l^^).
Half past one, la una y media (= IVa).
A quarter to two, las dos menos cuarto (lit. : 2 o'clock
less a quarter).
N.B.—It will strike directly . . . is: e8tá(n) pa/ra
dar la(8) . . ., or pronto dará(r¿) la(s) . . . .; it strikes . . .
• The article is in the singular, because one o'clock meana
one hour; with all the other hours the article should be plural.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Cardinal Numbers.
59
is: da(n) la(8) .... and : it has just struck ... is: acaba(n)
€le dar la(8) — Precisely at 5 o^ clock is: á las cinco
en punto. Afternoon is la tarde, evening and night la
noche. The early morning (before daybreak) is la ma^dru/-
gada; the nnornir^ (also before midday), is la mañana.
8. The expressions: a quarter of a year, half a
year, etc., are rendered either by un trimestre, un se-
mestre, or b)»^ three months, six months, etc., as: tres meses
(three months); seis meses (six months). Nueve meses
(nine months), etc. Quince días is a fortnight; media
hora^ half an hour.
9. The age of a person is commonly expressed by
tener .... años, as : He is six years old, tiene seis años
(he has six years). The question: Hoiv old are you? is
therefore translated: ¿Cuántos años tiene V.? or
also: ¿Qué edad tiene V.? (what age have you?).
10. Both is los dos, las dos, or ambos (f. ambas); or,
though less frequently, ambos (-as) á dos, as: He visto
á los dos (or ambos á dos) en el paseo, I have seen them
both on the promenade.
The most important collective numerals are:
medio ciento, half a hundred.
una centena
Un par, a pair, a couple.
una decena, ten.
una docena, a dozen.
una veintena, a score.
una treintena, cuarentena, etc.,
thirty, forty (some thirty,
forty, etc.).
media docena, half a dozen,
The names of the days and months are
(un ciento, un [ a hundred,
centenar, un í some hundred.
centenal), )
un millar, a thousand, some
thousand, etc.
lAmes, Monday.
martes, Tuesday.
miércoles, Wednesday.
jueves, Thursday.
viernes, Friday.
sábado, Saturday.
domingo, Sunday.
Enero, January.
febtero, February.
marzo, March.
abril, April.
mayo. May.
junio, June.
julio, July.
agosto, August.
setiembre, September.
octubre, October.
noviembre, November.
diciembre, December.
Words.
El . alfonso, the alphonse (a el duro, the dollar (= 4 shill-
; gold coin). ings).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
60
Lesson 16.
dreálf the real (==2^2 pence).
la peseta = 4 reals.
el céntimo, the centime.
el biUete de banco, the bank-
note.
la caja, the box.
la caja de cerillas (de fósfo*
ros), the box of matches.
la caja de cigarros, the cigar-
box.
la cajetilla de cigarrillos, the
packet of cigarettes.
un fósforo (una cerilla), a
match.
un cigarro, \ .
un puro, i ^
un cigarrillo (colloq. un pi-
tillo), a cigarette.
el tabaco, the tobacco.
él estanco, the tobacconist-shop.
el ternero, the calf.
el cerdo, the pig.
la revolución, the revolation.
él mes, the month.
la legim, the league.
él contorno, the outskirts ; cir-
camference.
d arrabal, the suburb.
el vecino, the neighbour; the
inhabitant.
la caUe, the street.
d puente, the bridge.
el farol, the (street-) lampi
the lantern.
la luna, the moon.
la tierra, the earth.
Júpiter, Jupiter.
Mercurio, Mercury.
Saturno, Saturn.
Venus, Venus.
d carnicero, the butcher.
el buey, the ox.
la fecha, the date.
la capital, the capital.
el zapato, the shoe.
el gtmnte, the glove.
el pañuelo, the handkerchief!
América, America.
varón, male.
hembra, female.
medio -a, half.
fumar, to smoke.
girar, to turn round.
falleció, he (she) died.
hace, makes, does.
descubierto, -a, discovered.
alrededor, round, round about.
todavía, yet; no, .. todavía (or
todavía no), not yet.
ahora, now.
Beading Exercise. 22.
1. El alfonso tiene cinco duros; el daro tiene cinco pe-
setas; la peseta tiene cien céntimos. ¿Quiere V. cambiarme
este laillete de banco? ¿Dónde hay un estanco? Déme V.
una caja de cigarros. Media docena de cigarros. ¿Cuánto
es ? Déme Y. tres cajetillas de cigarrillos. Una caja de cerillas.
¿Cuánto? ¿Fuma V.? ¿Quiere V. un cigarro? Aqui está
la caja. Tome V. un cigarrillo.
2. ¿Sabe Y. qué hora es? No es todavía la una y
media. Son las ocho y cuarto de la noche. Mi hermano
murió á los tres años de edad. Mi padre tiene 71 años.
¿ Han dado ya las once ? ¿ Á cuántos estamos del mes ? Hoy
es el día diez y siete de julio. Estamos á veinte y siete
(veintisiete) de enero.
3. El carnicero ha comprado 35 bueyes, 42 vacas, 88 ter-
neros y 76 cerdos. Saturno hace su revolución en 30 años;
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Cardinal Numbers. 61
Júpiter en 2 afios, la Tieri-a en 365 días y 6 horas; Venus
en 225 días j Mercurio en 3 meses. La lana gira alrededor
de la Tierra en 27 días, 7 horas y 43 minutos. Esta capital
tiene 9 leguas de contorno, 18 arrabales, 1,500,000 vecinos,
2006 calles, 500,000 casas, 83 plazas, 26 hospitales, 15 puentes
y 80,000 faroles. Están para dar las 10. He visto cien
hombres"'. ¿Ha visto Y. á mis primos? Les he visto ayer
á ambos en la calle.
Traducción. 28*
1. My aunt had 7 children**, 6 boys and a girl. The girl
is seventeen years old. How old are you ? I shall be twenty
in March. My sister is 21 years old. When is your birth-
day (cumpleaños)? My birthday is on the 11th (once) of Au-
gust. To-day is Wednesday. Have we to-day the lOfch or the
11th of May? The 10th. I have 10 dollars and 4 pesetas.
The butcher has bought 10 oxen, 37 pigs, and 17 calves.
The city of Vienna has 1,201,000 inhabitants, 38 suburbs,
and (is) 4 (Glerman) miles in circumference. Louis XVI., king of
France, died in Paris on the 21st of January, 1793. It has
struck 9 o'clock. We have bought 16 pairs of gloves and
two dozen handkerchiefs (de — ). My brother was three
months in Paris and half a year in Madrid. He came at
1 o'clock to-day. It is now 8 o'clock in the evening. He
came (has come) at noon yesterday.
2. The Archduchess (archiduquesa) Sophia of Austria died
in the third year of her age. The letter (bears) has the date :
Vienna, the 8th of May, 1889. To-day we have the 23rd of
April. Spain (España) has 17,500,000 inhabitants Ceie —;. This
town had 301,000 inhabitants. Three hundred and eighty
seven pesetas and 12 centimes. I have given to the lawyer
(abogado) some hundred dollars. America was discovered in
the year 1492. The day has 24 hours, the hour has 60
minutes. June has 30 days, October has 31 and February
has 28 or 29 days.
Conyersación.
¿Qué edad es la de V.? Tengo 41 años.
¿Y su padre de V.? Tiene ahora 76.
¿Cuándo falleció el rey Luis Murió (he died) el (á) 21 de
XVI de Francia? enero de 1793.
¿Cuántos hijos tiene V,? Tengo 4 hijos; 3 niños y una
niña.
* The personal object in the Accusative, when preceded by
a numeral, does not take á,
** As hijos means both sons and children^ the sex must be
expressed by the addition of the words varón (male) and hembra
female), as in the above sentence.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
62
Lesson 17.
¿Qué ha comprado V.?
¿Á cuántos estamos hoy?
¿Ha recibido Y. una carta?
¿Han dado ya las doce?
¿Qué hora es?
¿Cuántos dias tiene el afio?
¿Cuántos dias tiene un mes?
¿Qué ha dado Y. al abogado?
¿En cuánto tiempo hace Sa-
turno su revolución alre-
dedor del sol (the sun)^
¿Ha perdido Y. algo?
He comprado una docena de
guantes y un par de zapatos.
Estamos á 18 de enero.
Si, be recibido una carta de
Cádiz, con fecha 9 de octubre
de 1903.
No, sefior; pero pronto darán.
Acaban de dar las 9.
Un afio tiene 365 dias 6 horas.
Un mes tiene 30 ó 31 dias.
He dado al abogado cien pesos.
En treinta afios.
He perdido 4 duros.
Seventeenth Lesson. — Lección diecisiete.
Numerals. — Numerales.
2. Ordiüal Numbers. — Fractionals. —
Multiplicatives.
Ordinales. — Fracciónales. — Multiplicativos.
^l primero A y^^
la pnmera, f
él segundo, \ . , ,
la segunda, f ^^® ^®^^°^'
el tercero, the third.
el cuarto, the 4th.
el quinto, the 5th.
el sexto (sesto), the 6th.
él séptimo I 4.1 ^ 74.t
(el sétimo), f ^^"^ ^**^-
el octavo, the 8th.
el nono )
(el noveno),!
el décimo, the lOth.
el tmdécimo \
(él onceno), f
él duodécimo, the 12th.
el décima tercio*, the 13th.
the 9th.
the llth.
el décima cuarto, the 14th.
el décimo quinto, the 15th.
el décimo sexto, the 16th.
el décimo séptimo, the 17th.
el décimo octavo, the 18th,
el décimo nono, the 19th.
el vigésimo, the 20 th.
el mgésimo primo (primero),
the 21st.
el vigésimo segundo, the 22nd.
el vigésimo tercio, the 23rd.
el vigésimo cuarto, the 24tb.
?.,'7Sl;, }"■•«'"■•
el cuadragésimo, the 40th.
el quincuagésima I the 50th.
(el cincuenteno), f
el sexagésimo, the 60th.
* The forms decimotercio, decimocuarto, etc., are becoming
more generally used.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Ordinal Numbers. 68
€Í septuagésimOf the 70tb. el quingentésimo, íYlq 500th.
él octogésimo ] el sexcentésimo^ the 600th.
(el octuagésimo), \ the 80th. el septingentésimo, the 700th.
(él ochentésimo), } el octogentésimo \the800th
d nonagésimo, the 90th. (el octingentésimo)^ f
el centesimo, the lOOth. el nonagentésimo \ ^, 900th
el centesimo primo (primero), (él nongentésimo),}
the lOlst. el milésimo, the lOOOth.
el centesimo segundo, the I02ná. el dosmilésimo, the 2000th.
el ducentésimo \ .t^ oaa4.u ^^ penúltimo, the last but one.
hi ">« 200th. a^imo^ \
d trecentésimo, the 300th. el postrero, f
the last.
el cuadringentésimo, the 400th.
2^ ote, — The numbers in brackets are less frequent. —
Besides, there are a few archaic forms, as:
el cuarenteno, the 40th. el setentésimo, \ ., • «q^i
el cincuentésimo, the 50th. el setenteno, /
el sesentesimo, \ ^ ^^ j el ochentésvmo, \ ^^ ^^^^
el sesenteno, f el ochenteno, f
el noventésimo, \ ^ ^^^^
el noventeno, f
The forms setuagésimo for septuagésimo, and octuagésimo
for octogésimo are now obsolete.
Observations.
1. The numerals primero, tercero, and postrero drop
the final o before a substantive, with the exception of
tercero in the legal phrase dentro de tercero día, within
three days. Ex.:
El primer dia, the first day.
El tercer dia, the third day.
Sometimes the feminine primera drops the final a,
as: la primer alma, the first soul. If, however, primero
is coupled by y or ó with another ordinal number,
except tercero and postrero (last), the complete form
should be used, as:
El primero y el octavo libro, the first and the eighth book.
But: El primer y el tercer libro, the first and the third book.
2. The forms deceno, onceno are becoming obsolete.
3. Proper names of princes take the ordinal num-
bers without an article, as:
Philip II., Felipe segundo,
Ferdinand IV., Fernando cuarto.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
64 Leaoon 17.
N,B.—Wiih the names of the kings of ¿Jpotn and of Um
popes, cardinal numbers are used np to the tenth, thus Isabel
segunda, Carias in (tercero). Charles HI., but Alfonso X
(diez), Alfonso doce. From the tenth upwards, both cardinal
and ordiuEil numbers may be used. Thns we ma y sa y in-
differently: Benedicto décimo cuarto. Pope Benedict AlV., and
Benedicto catorce. Wúh the names of other foreign sover-
eigns, ordinal numbers are used up to the tenth or eleventh,
and then follow cardinal numbm. Thus Enrique cuarto,
Henry IV. (of France); Luis once or undécimo, Louis XI.;
Carlos doce, Charles XII. (of Sweden). But: Luis XIV (ca-
torce), Louis XIV.
4. With some substantives, cardinal as well as
ordinal numbers may be employed, but only beyond
undécimo, the eleventh. In this case they should follow
the substantive; thus:
Chapter 15th, Capitulo décimo quinto or Capitulo quince.
Page 20, Fagina veinte or vigésima.
Fractionals are expressed by ordinal numbers, as
in English:
medio, -a, half* {la mitad, un séptimo \ .,
the halO. (unasepHmaparle),}^^^"^^^^'
un tercio \ un octavo \ . ...
(una tercera parte \ a third. (una octava parte), f^^^^^
i.e., part), I un noveno \ . .,
un cuarto \ ^ (una novena parte), f * '^^*^-
(una cuarta parte), I ^ * un décimo \ í ih
un quinto, a fifth (part). (una décima parte), f * *^^^*^-
un sexto Í «¡^fu un centesimo, Vioo.
(una sexta parte) ^ f ' un milésimo, Viooo.
Note. Some feminine forms of fractional numbers are
used in certain expressions only, as: una cuarta, i.e., vara,
a quarter of an ell; una tercia de carne, a pound of meat.
Prom ten upwards the fractional numbers are formed by add-
ing the word avo (liter, fractional part) to the cardinal num-
bers, which thereby undergo some orthographical alteration.
The numbers ending in -ce change this syllable into z, as:
ires onzavos, ^/n; ocho quinzavos, ®/i6. Uno is changed into
unavo(s). Beyond V20, the termination avo is added to the
last consonant, the word p (and) being written f, and the
whole number contracted into one word.
For the sake of greater clearness, all these forms are
given below in their arithmetical order:
* Without article. With the article, un medio, a half (subst.).
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Ordinal Numbers.
$5
Vil un onzavo. .
Vn un dozavo.
Vit un trezavo.
Vi4 un catorzavo.
Vi 6 un quinzavo.
Vis un dicieseisavo,
ViT nn diecisieteavo.
Vis un dieciochoavo.
Vi9 un diecinueveavo.
^/so un veintavo.
Vai un veintiunavo.
^/«a un veintidosavo.
^/as un veintitresavo.
^/a4 un veinticuatroavo.
Vas un veinticincoavOy etc.
'/ii dos onzavos.
%2 dos dozavos.
Vis dos trezavos.
Vi 4 dos catorzavos.
Vi 6 dos quinzavos,
'/it dos dieciseisavos.
ViT dos diecisieteavos.
*/i8 dos dieciochoavos.
Vi» dos diecinueveavos,
Vao dos veintavos,
Vso un treintavo.
Vio un cuarentavo» etc.
un cienavo,
Vi 00 ] un centavo,
un centesimo.
él triple, the triple, etc.
un céntimo (in South America; un centavo) is Vioo of a
peseta, franc, etc.
The MtUUpUcatives are:
Bmpky simple.
triple, I
triplOy -a, 1 threefold.
tfiplice, J
cuadruplo^ -a, fourfold.
gifintuplo, -a, fivefold.
séxtuplo, séptuplo, óctuplo, nóneuplo, décuplo, céntuplo, 6-, 7-,
8-, 9-, 10-, lOOfold, etc.
The other multiplicatives are periphrased with . , . .
freces (times) and a comparative or tanto following, as: Su
pena es nueve veces mayor, his punishment is ninefold (nine
times greater). Catorce veces tanto, fourteenfold.
El diente, the tooth.
la edad, the age.
la elección, the choice, elec*
tion.
el maestro, the masten
el mes, the month.
la libra, the pound.
la onza, the ounce.
el kilogramo, the kilogramme.
d azúcar, the sugar.
Spanish Ck>ny.-Giammar.
Words.
el café, the cofPee,
d té, the tea.
la semana, the week.
la vara, the (Spanish) yard.
el paño, the cloth.
el tomo, the volume.
mudar, to change.
llamado, called.
sucedió, succeeded, followed.
viene, comes.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
66 Lesson 17.
Beading Exereise. 24.
El caballo (horse) mnda los dientes á los dos años y
medio. Felipe Aagnsto faé el 429, Franciso I el 58p, Enri-
que IV, llamado el Grande, el 70? rey de Francia. Carlos IV
sucedió á Carlos III el 12 de agosto de 1788. ¿Sabe V. qué
hora es? Todavía no es la una y media. Á los nueve días
de 8u elección le sobrevino (surprised him) la muerte, que
fué (which happened) el 23 de agosto, á los sesenta y cuatro
afios de edad. Mi maestro de música viene cada (every)
tres días. He comprado una docena de guantes. Déme V.
(give me) la vigésima parte 0^ quincuagésima, la sexagésima
y la centésima parte). Un mes es la duodécima parte del
afio. Tome V. (take) siete veintavos y cuatro diecinueveavos.
Enero es el primero, marzo el tercero, junio el sexto y di-
ciembre el último mes del afio. Compre V. (buy) dos libras
y media de café, una libra de té y dos libras y tres onzas de
azúcar. Cincuenta es la mitad de ciento. Quince es el quin-
tuplo de tres, y la décima parte de ciento cincuenta.
Traducción. 25.
A week is the 52nd part of a year. I was one year and
a half at Paris, and two years and one month in Italy. Louis XVI.
of France died (falleció) in Paris the 21st of January, 1793.
My brother is the fourteenth and my sister the eleventh of
the class. Does your music-master come every fourth day?
No, he comes every other day (un dia si y otro no, lit. one
day Yes and the other No). Take the 10th, the 30th, the
70th, and the 90th parts. I have bought 8^2 pounds of sugar
and 2^/3 pounds of coflfee. Give me % and %. The first
king of France, Pharamond (Faramundo), reigned (reinó)
eight years. Louis XIV. of France died the 1st of Septem-
ber, 1715, at the age of 77 years. I have bought 6% yards
of this cloth. The Emperor Francis Joseph (José) of Austria
was horn (nadó) at Vienna the 18th of August, 1830. When
were you born ? (¿ nació V ?) I was born on the 6th of July,
1878. February is the second, April the fourth, May the fifth,
July the seventh, August the eighth, September the ninth,
October the tenth, and November the eleventh month of the
year. I have read the 18th and the 14th chapter of the 2nd
volume. A day is the seventh part of a week.
Conyersacién.
¿Cuándo muda el caballo los Á los dos afios y medio de
dientes? edad.
¿Cuándo murió el rey Luis Murió el 21 de enero de 1793.
XVI de Francia?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Indefinite Numerals. 67
¿Qué lugar (place) tiene su Es el octavo ó el noveno de
hermano de V. en el co- su clase,
legio?
¿ Y su hermana de V. ? Creo (I bdieve, I think) que
es la sexta.
¿En qué afio nació V.? Nací (I was bom) en el afio
1878.
¿En qué mes? En enero.
¿Qué dia? El 18.
¿De qué emperador habla V.? Hablo del emperador Francisco
José de Austria.
¿Cuándo nació? Nació en Viena el 18 de agosto
de 1830.
¿Qué ha comprado V.? He comprado ocho libras y
media de azúcar y doce
varas de tela (cloth),
¿Cuánto tiempo (how long) Afio y medio*.
estuvo V. en París?
¿ No viene su maestro de V. No, señor, viene cada tres días,
un dia si y otro no?
Eighteenth Lesson. — Lección dieciocho.
Numerals. — Numerales.
3. Indefiüite Numerals. — Numerales indefinidos.
These words are pronouns when used without a
substantive. With a substantive, however, they are
adjectives. They are:
Alguno, -a, plur. algunos j -as, any, anybody, somebody;
pi. any, some.
Alguien, any, anyone, anybody.
Ninguno, -a; no, nobody, no one; none.
Nadie, nobody.
Cualquiera, pi. cualesquiera, whoever, whatever.
Quienquiera, whoever.
Unos, unas, some, any, a few.
Uno Oa) y otro (-a), \ both, all.
plur. unos (-as) y otros (-as), f '
Ni uno, not a single one.
Ni él uno ni el otro, neither the one nor the other.
Unos cuantos, unas cuantas, some, a few.
* In the expressions one year (hour etc.), and a half, the
indefinite article is usually omitted. Ex. : Hora y media, an hour
and a half. Año y medio, a year and a half.
5*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
68 Lesson 18.
Otro, -a (plur. otros, -as), other, another, someone else;
plur. ¡08 otros (las otras), the others.
MismOj -a, plur. mismoSf -as, same.
El mismo, la misma, the same.
Cada (in combination), every.
Cada uno (when alone), each.
TodOy -a, all; plur. tochs, -as, all.
todos los (todas las), all who . . .; every.
Tal, such; plur. tales, such.
Fulano, -a, ) ^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^ ^^
Zutano, -a, /
Observations.
1. Cada, every, each, is used for both genders and
numbers, and may be applied either to persons or
things; as: Cada hombre, every man; coda semana,
every week. With numerals in the plural, it corresponds
to the English every followed by an ordinal number, as:
Ckida cinco días, every fifth day ; coda dos pasos, every
two steps. With uno it means everyone^ as: Cada uno
de por sí, everyone for himself.
2. Alguien, any, anybody, anyone, is likewise used
for both genders and numbers, but only of persons and
affirmatively ov interrogatively, as: ¿Entra alguien? does
anybody enter? Nobody is ninguno, -a (referring either
to persons or things), or nadie (only of persons), as:
Ninguno debe hablar, nobody shall speak. If ninguno
or nadie follow the verb, the negation río shoujd precede
it, as: Eso no es de, ninguna importancia, that is of
no importance.
3. Cualquiera, whoever, whatever, stands for both
genders (in reference either to persons or things); plur.
cualesquiera. The final a is sometimes dropped, but
the complete form is preferable. Thus any thing means
cualquiera cosa or cualquier cosa; pi. cualesquiera libros
or cucdesquier libros. A similar form is quienquiera,
whoever; this pronoun being only used for persons and
commonly followed by que, as: Quienquiera que lo diga,
whoever says so (it).
4. Na^ie is the English nobody, and nada is nothing.
Like ninguno, alguno, and ni uno ni otro (neither one
nor the other), these pronouns admit of no negation be-
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Indefinite N ameráis. 69
fore the verb when preceding it, whereas the verb should
be preceded by nOy if nadie and nada follow. Ex.:
Nadie lo ha visto, nobody has seen it.
Bat: JVo lo ha visto nadie, » » » ».
JSÍada he dicho, I have said nothing.
Bat: JSfo he dicho nada, » » » .
5. Alguno, -a, any, anybody, anyone, is used in
both genders and numbers, and referring either to per-
sons or things. In the plural it means several^ a few^
soine, etc. Like uno, it drops the final o before mascu-
line nouns, as: Algún hombre, any man. Examples:
alguna mujer, any woman; algunos hombres, several men;
algunas mujeres, several women. With no and the verb
preceding, it means nobody, not anybody, not anyone, etc.,
2ñ: No he visto (á) alguno"^, I have seen nobody, I
have not seen anyone. In this case it has the same
signification as nadie, which may be used in its stead,
provided it does not precede the verb. Thus:
A nadie he visto, means: I have seen nobody;
whereas:
(Á) alguno he visto, means: I have seen somebody.
Note.— On nadie with the signification anybody, some"
body, etc., see second Part.
6. Fulano and zutano mean a certain, so and so, etc.
in quite a vague sense; Fulano is sometimes joined by
de tal (lit. of such), as : Fulano lo sabe, so and so knows
it; el Señor don fulano de tal, Mr. So and So. Commonly
they are used together, as: Fulano quiere á zutana, a
certain gentleman (Mr. So and So) loves a certain lady
(Miss So and So).
7. OtrOj 'tty other, is never used with the indefinite
article un; thus: Another has said so. Otro (not un
otro) lo ha dicho, I have another pen, tengo otra pluma*
Words.
El orgullo, the pride. la estampa, the engraving.
la hora, the hour. el paseo, the public walk,
la fuerza, the strength. promenade.
el motivo, the reason. propio, -a, proper.
la comida, the dinner, food. cierto, certain.
* The preposition á is there frequently omitted for the
sake of euphony, or when not emphatic.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
70 Lesson 18.
ir ^ á ver i ^ ^^^ ^°.* ^^ trabajar, to work.
venir f * \ pay a visit. presumir de . , ., to overrate.
quejarse, to complain. tener hambre, to be hungry.
tratar con, to deal with, to tener sed, to be thirsty.
treat. hecho, done, made.
acertar, to succeed in. ahora, now.
preguntar por, to ask for. junto, -a, together.
lisonjear, to flatter. acaso, perhaps.
Reading Exercise. 26.
Nada lisonjea más el orgullo de los hombres que la con-
fianza de los grandes. V. tiene algunos libros. No he visto
á nadie en casa de mi amigo. ¿Ha venido alguno? Nadie
ha venido. He visto á su hermano cada dia. Trabajamos
todos juntos y cada uno de por si (by himself). El mismo
hombre me ha dado el dinero. Yo mismo lo he hecho. Hasta
ahora nadie ha venido. Nadie en esta ciudad conoce á mi
hermano. Ninguno está cierto de la hora de su muerte.
Ninguno debe (shall) presumir de sus propias fuerzas. Quien-
quiera que lo diga, se equivoca (is mistaken). El uno
decía (said) que sí (yes), el otro que no*. Cada seis meses
tendré (I shall come) á verle á V. De todos los (those) que
vratan conmigo (with me), ¿hay acaso uno (alguno) que tenga
motivo de quejarse? Cualquiera cosa que él haga (may do),
la hará mal (he will do it wrong); no puede (can) acertar
en nada. Fulano y zutano han preguntado por V. Todos
hablan de ello (it), como si fuera cierto. Cualquiera comida
es buena para quien (him who) tiene hambre. Quienquiera
que sea, ha hecho mal en decirlo (to say so), ¿ Tiene V. otro
caballo ?
Traducción. 27.
I have no other book. He has given me nothing. We
have some good books and some fine engravings. Nobody
has done it (eso), I have not seen anything. Whoever says
so (que — lo diga), is mistaken. I do not believe (creo) it. Charles
has not done it, someone else (otro) Has done it. Has anybody
asked for (por) me? No, sir, nobody has asked for you. I
have seen the same lady. Everyone speaks (habla) for
himself (si mismo). You (tú) have done it yourself. I do
not know (conozco) anybody in this town. The one is hungry,
the other is thirsty, but neither (of them) has money. I shall
come every third day to call on yon. Does Mr. So and So
live here? (¿ Vive aquí, ,,?) He who is hungry says that all food
is good. Both have done it. I think that someone else has
* After decir y "to say," the affirmative and negative particles
si and no are pleonastically preceded by que. [Aa in French.]
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Adjective.
71
done it. Give me (Déme V.) some books. Nobody knows
(sabe) it, because (porque) I (did not tell anyone) have not
told it to anybody.
Oonyersación.
¿Quién (who) lo sabe?
¿Quién lo ha hecho?
¿Qué han dicho?
¿Cuándo vendrá V. á ver á'
mi padre?
¿Ha venido alguien?
¿Á quién lo ha dicho V.?
¿Quién lo ho creído (believed)?
¿Ño es verdad?
¿Tiene V. otro sombrero?
¿Ha visto V. á alguno en el
paseo ?
¿Quién ba visto á mi amo
(master) ?
¿Ha visto V. á alguna de
aquellas señoras?
Nadie lo sabe.
Ninguno lo ha hecho, or No
lo ha hecho ninguno.
El uno dijo que si, el otro que
no.
Vendré cada cinco días.
Sí, señor; fulano y zutano han
preguntado por V.
Á nadie lo he dicho,
usted mismo lo ha creído.
No, señor; quienquiera que lo
diga, falta á la verdad (tells
a lie).
No, señora, no tengo otro.
No he visto á nadie.
Nadie le ha visto.
Á decir verdad (To speak the
truth), no he visto á ninguna.
Nineteenth Lesson. — Lección diecinueve.
The Adjective. — Del adjetivo.
Rule. — The Spanish Adjective agrees in gender
and number with the word it qualifies.
§ 1. Adjectives ending in o change this vowel into
a for the feminine, as:
hermoso, beautiful, fern, hermosa,
bueno, good, » buena.
Note, — The very limited number of adjectives ending
in -ete and -ote follow the same rule: as:
regordete, short stout (man) — regordeta,
aUote, very high — altota.
§ 2. Adjectives not ending in o, hence those
ending in a consonant (I, w, r, s, ^), or in one of the
vowels a, 6, ¿, have only one termination for both gen-
ders. Ex.:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
72 Lesson 19.
un hambre cortés, a polite man.
una mujer cortés, a polite woman.
un hombre grave, a serious man.
una materia grave, a serious matter.
un oljeto haladi, a trivial olDJect.
una cosa baladi, a trivial thing.
Exceptions.
Some words, being used both as substantives and
adjectives, take a in the feminine in either capacity, as :
holgazán, holgazana, idle and idler; mam^antón, maman-
tona, sackling or nursling.
Also adjectives denoting nationality, as:
francés, French, fern, francesa,
andaluz, Andalosian, » andaluza,
alemán, German, » cUemana.
inglés, English, » inglesa, etc.
Those terminating in a, like persa^ Persian, are
alike in both genders.
§ 3. Formation of the plural of the adjectives.
All adjectives ending in an unaccented vowel form
their plural by adding «, as:
bueno, Plur. buenos,
buena, » bu>enas,
francesa, > francesas.
Adjectives terminating in an accented vowel or in
a consonant add e«, as:
ruin, bad, wicked, plur. ruines,
baladi, trifling, » baladies.
español, Spanish, » españoles.
^oíe.— -The orthographical rule given in § 1, Less. 2, is
also applied to adjectives, as: feliz, happy; plur. felices, etc.
§ 4. The adjectives alguno, ninguno, bueno, malOj
as well as the numerals una, primero, tercero, postrero,
lose the o before a masculine substantive in the
singular; whilst grande drops its last syllable before any
substantive in the singular either masculine or feminine.
— Ciento, also, loses its last syllable before any plural
^see Less. 16, Cardinal Numbers). Thus:
buen hombre for bueno hombre,
mal caballero, » malo caballero,
algún libro, >
Digitized
by Google
The Adjective. 78
gran caballo^
ningún amigo,
una gran casa,
un gran caballo.
Santo drops its last syllable before names of saints,
and its abbreviation is S.
S. Juan (San —), S^- John.
S. Pedro (San -), S^- Peter.
^.^.— Before feminine noons, the omission of the last
syllable is very rare, except with grande. Thus one had better
say: la primera cosa, the first thing, than la primer cosa.
With grande the apocopation* is rather arbitrary, and before
substantives beginning with vowels the full form is preferable,
as: grande alma (soul); grande hombre, great man; grande
amigo. It may be observed that before the names Domingo,
Tomás, Tomé, and Toribio the adj. santo does not drop the
last syllable; thus: Santo Domingo, St. Dominions**.
§ 5. In reference to the position of the adjective,
the following are the principal rules:
1. Adjectives as well as participles denoting a
general quality, as attributed to all objects of the same
kind, precede; whilst those denoting a special quality
attributed to a certain object, foUow:
La dulce miel, sweet honey.
La blanca nieve, the white snow.
Un pié pequeño, a small foot.
Una mano blanca, a white hand,
^ote.-— However, whenever it is desirable to emphasize
the quality of a certain understood object, the adjective pre-
Movió el pequeño pié, she moved her small foot.
Le alargó su blanca mano, she tended him her white hand.
2. Adjectives and participles used in a metaphorical
meaning, as distinguished from their primary one, pre-
cede, while the latter follow:
homi>re bueno, good man. buen hombre, good fellow.
cdbaUo grande, big horse. gran caballo, fine horse.
niño pobre, a poor child. ¡pobre niño! poor child!
* i.e., the omission of the final de.
** However: la isla de San-Tomas, the island of St. Thomas.
The pupil is requested to remember the following "locus memo-
rialis": Santo Tomás nunca estuvo en San- Tomas, St Thomas was
never in St. Thomas.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
74 Lesson 19.
JV!B.— Consequently adjectives not susceptible of a meta-
phorical meaning, such as those expressing nationality y or origin,
scientific ideas or theories of any kind, quantity, number or
division, follow:
La nación española, the Spanish nation.
La bandera inglesa, the British flag.
Las fuerzas físicas, physical forces.
Una linea recta, a straight line.
La religión protestante, the Protestant religion.
Muchos libros, many books.
Dos billetes, two tickets.
Media peseta, half a peseta.
Note. — Adjectives denoting order may precede or follow:
Vivo en el piso segundo (or en el segundo piso),
I live on the second floor.
Lea V, el primer capitulo (or el capitulo primero).
Bead the first chapter.
§ 6. An adjective qualifyÍDg two substantives must
be in the plural; thus:
El amK) y él criado están contentos.
The master and the servant are contented.
El ama y la criada están contentas.
The mistress and the servant-maid are contented.
If the substantives are of different genders, the
adjective is put in the plural masculine, provided the
nouns denote persons or living beings. Thus :
Los hombres y las mujeres fueron salvados.
The men and women were saved.
If, on the contrary, things are spoken of, the gender
of the last substantive prevails, thus :
Ojos y orejas abiertas^ eyes and ears open ;
but: Orejas y ojos abiertos, ears and eyes open.
§ 7. A noun in the plural is followed by several
adjectives in the singular, when each adjective would
have, if alone, the noun in the singular:
Las lenguas latina y griega.
The Latin and the Greek languages.
Los cantos tercero y cuarto.
The third and fourth hymn.
Words.
La costumbre, the custom, el temor, the fear,
manner. el vasallo, the vassal.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Adjective. 75
d orden, the order. casado, -a, married.
la orden, the command. feo, -a, ugly.
el discípulo, the pupil, scholar, cuantioso, -a, considerable.
el autor, the author. vano, -a, vain.
la suerte, the fate. • serio, -a, serious.
la materia, the matter. alegre, merry. [gent.
la canción, the song. trabajador, -a, laborious, dili-
el alma (f.), the soul. desordenado, -a, disorderly.
la injuria, the offence. hábil, able, clever.
la hacienda, the estate, the célebre, famous, renowned.
fortune. honrado, -a, honoured.
d caudal, the capital, fund. sonoro, -a, sonorous.
d difunto, the dead (man), the corrompen, they corrupt, they
late .... taint.
d pintor, the painter. fluctúan, they fluctuate.
d perro, the dog. crió (3rd s. def.), (he) created.
la hazaña, the heroic deed. mantiene, maintains.
Burdeos, Bordeaux. perdona, pardons.
glorioso, illustrious. estudia, studies.
amable, amiable. aborrecido, detested, abhorred.
Readingr Exercise. 28.
Una mujer hermosa, virtuosa y rica se ha casado con un
hombre feo, malo y pobre. Las malas compañías corrompen
las buenas costumbres. Los hombres fluctúan siempre entre
falsas esperanzas y vanos temores. Un hombre malo es siempre
aborrecido. Un buen rey hace felices á sus vasallos. El primer
hombre que Dios crió fué Adán, y la primera mujer fué Eva.
Las españolas son serias y las francesas alegres y amables,
lina mujer holgazana es siempre desordenada, pero una mujer
trabajadora mantiene en orden su casa. El hábil maestro
tiene discipulos aplicados. Miguel de Cervantes fué el célebre
autor del D. Quijote de la Mancha. ¿Qué quiere V. hacer
con esos objetos haladles? La suerte de un hombre es una
materia muy grave. Las canciones andaluzas son muy boni-
tas. Una grande alma perdona fácilmente (easily) una in-
juria. El cTeatro Grande» de Burdeos es un gran teatro.
Mi hermano estudia las lenguas francesa y alemana. Lope
de Vega fué un gran poeta. San Pablo (Paul) y Santo Tomás
han honrado la iglesia católica. Una mujer regordeta no es
hermosa. ¡Tenga V. las orejas y los ojos abiertos! La hacienda
y los caudales del difunto eran considerables.
Traducción. 29.
This man was poor, but virtuous. (A) bad company is
a great evil (mal). False fears and vain hopes are the lot
(d lote) of (the) man. Happy subjects love their king. Cervan-
Digitized by VaOOQlC
76
Lesson 19.
tes was a great writer (escritor) and Mnrillo a celebrated
painter. The Germans are serious, and the French are merry.
This idle girl has no (no —) order in her things. Polite people
(tr. men) are very agreeable. A bad king is a misfortune
lor his subjects. CsBsar (César) was a great man. You live
(vive) in a large house. One must (8e d^he) admire (admirar)
the good manners of these people. This gentleman has very
amiable children (hijos). He studies (estudia) the history of
the second civil (civu) war. The first, second, and tíiird
chapters (capitulo) are good. Our house is large, but our
garden is small. A serious man does not speak of such (tan)
trifling things. One must (Se deben) admire the glorious deeds
of this prince. Men and women are small in that country.
The books and letters on the table (mesa) were open. I have
at home (en casa) a big dog and a little cat (gcUo). The
first man was a sinner (pecador). The Spanish and Italian
languages are very melodious (transí, the languages Spanish
[fem. sing.] and Italian [fem. sing.] are . . . .).
Conversación.
¿Cómo es la casa?
i Quién perdona fácilmente una
injuria?
¿Qué lenguas estudia su her-
mano de V.?
¿ Qué canciones son muy agra-
dables?
¿Qué Santos han honrado la
iglesia católica?
¿Qué sabe V. (do you know y
can you) decirme (tell me)
de Cervantes y Murillo?
¿ Come se deben tratar (must
he treated) los asuntos (mat-
ters) graves?
¿Cuál es la situación de ese
hombre?
¿Qué traje (suit) llevaba ("wore)
el joven (young many youth) ?
¿Qué sombrero tiene V.?
¿Qué causas (law-suits) de-
fiende (defends) un abogado
recto (honest)^
La casa es muy grande.
Una grande alma.
Estudia las lenguas francesa y
alemana.
Las canciones andaluzas.
San Pablo y Santo Tomás.
Cervantes fué el célebre autor
del D. Quijote, y Murillo
fué un gran pintor.
Con ánimo (mind) sosegado
(quiety calm).
Su situación es muy lastimosa.
Llevaba traje azul (blue) j
sombrero negro (black).
Tengo un sombrero inglés.
Un abogado recto defiende
siempre las causas justas.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Degrees of CompariBon. 77
Twentieth Lesson, — Lección veinte.
Degrees of Gomparlsom — Orados de comparación.
§ 1. The comparison of Spanish adjectives is some-
what analogous to the English. The comparative degree
of superiority is formed by the word más (more), and
its superlative by el más^ fem. la más, neut. lo más
(the most). Examples:
Compar. Superl.
hermoso, -a, más hermoso, -a, el más hermoso, \ the most
beautiful ; more beautiful ; f. la más hermosa, | beautiful.
The comparison of inferiority is effected in a simi-
lar way by the adverb menos (less), as:
Compar. Superl.
poblado, -a, menos poblado, -a, el menos poblado, \ the least
populous; less populous/ not i. lámenos poblada, f]^o]^\úoxiB.
so populous;
§ 2. Again, there is an absolute superlative, by
which a high degree is expressed. It is formed by the
addition of the ending isimo for the masculine and
isima for the feminine to the positive degree of the ad-
jective, which then drops its final vowel, as:
docto, learned; abs. superl. doctísimo, very learned.
santo, holy; » » santísimo, very holy.
Note,— Some adjectives undergo a slight alteration in
the formation of the absolute superlative. These are:
(a) Adjectives ending in -io, which drop the i when
adding the ending -isimo; thus: amplio, wide, abs. superl.
amplí9im>o.
Except: agrio, sour; frio, cold; 3,ná pio, pious, which form
agriisimOf friisimo, piisimo,
(b) Adjectives in -ble, which adopt their Latin stem, as:
amable (Lat. amaMlis)^ amiable, abs. superl. amabiUHm^o.
(c) Those in 4ente and -ierto, which drop the i before e,
as: ardiente, glowing — ardentisimo; cierto, certain — cer-
tísimo.
(d) And the following, which are directly derived from
their corresponding Latin forms:
acre, sharp — acérrimo.
amigo, friendly — amicisimo (also amiguísimo).
(mtiguOf old — antiquísimo.
áspero, rough — aspérrimo, also asperísimo.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
78
Lesson 20.
henéficOy beneficent — beneficentísimo,
benévolo, benevolent — henevolentisimo,
bueno, good — bonísimo,
célebre j famous — celebérrimo,
fiel, faithful — fidelísimo,
fuerte, strong — fortísimo,
íntegro, upright — integérrimo.
Ubre, free — libérrimo,
magnífico, magnificent — magnifi^centísimo,
mísero, miserable — misérrimo,
munífico, liberal — munificentísimo,
nuevo, new — novísimo,
pobre, poor — paupérrimo,
sagrado, hallowed — sacratísimo,
salubre, healthy — salubérrimo,
sabio, wise — sapientísimo,
(e) Adjectives ending in -z, -co, and -go change these
terminations into -cisimo, -quisimo, and -guisimo, thus : voraz,
voracious, — voracísimo, most voracious; rico, rich — riquí-
simo; vago, vague — vaguísimo.
(f) Adjectives terminating in i, l,n,r — as: turquí, blue;
paternal, paternal; ruin, wicked, bad; secular, secular — do
' take the ending -isimo. The absol, superl, of these adjectives is
formed by placing the adverb mu¡/, very, before the positive;
thus : muy paternal, etc.
Note.— The absol, superl, of every adjective may be formed
by placing muy before the positive. Thus: Verp faithful is
fidelísimo or muy fiel; very learned, muy docto or doctísimo.
§ 3. The following adjectives, besides their ordinary
regular comparison, have an irregular form for the com-
parative of superiority and the superlatives:
bueno, -a,
good.
malo, -a, bad.
grande*"^,
great.
me^'or, better.
peor, worse.
mayor,
greater.
? I mejor, the
Li ^««*-
el \
l^ypeor, the
lo\ ^^^^*-
^^[maijor, the
lo ( greatest.
óptimo, -a* Wery
(bonísimo, -a)] good.
pésimo \ very
(malísimo) ] bad.
máximo Wery
(grandísimo)) gredit.
Almost absolete.
When grande implies size, its degrees of comparison are
regular.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Degrees of Comparison.
79
pequeño, -a,
little, small.
alto, -a, bigb.
lajo, -a, low.
menor, less,
smaller.
superior,
bigber.
inferior, low-
er, inferior.
el \ menor, tbe
la ) least,
lo j smallest.
en
7 I superior,
J* j tbe bigbest.
f I inferior,
^^j tbe lowest.
mínimo \ very lit-
(pequeñi- > tie, very
simo^ I small.
supremo, I
inñmo \ very
(bajisimo) f low.
Adjectives and Adverbs.
(poco, little, ;nténo5, less,
few.
los menos, leeL»t\poquisimo, very
(people, etc.).! little.
I mucho, más, more, los más, most muchísimo, very
mucb. (people, etc.). | mucb.
Note, — Tbe difference in tbe use of tbe double form
of tbe tbe above adjectives and adverbs is as follows:
Mejor and peor are more frequent tban más bueno and
más malo. Mayor means greater, larger, more considerakle,
and menor denotes tbe contrary of mayor. Besides, mayor
signifies elder, and menor means younger, like tbe Latin
major natu and minor natu, — Superior, supremo, and
inferior, ínfimo denote by preference rank, sometimes also
tbe situation of a place or a tbing. — Tbe regular abs. sup.
grandísimo is more in use tban máximo, — Más and menos
are adjectives and adverbs. Wben used as adjectives, tbey
may, of course, take tbe definite article; tbus las más noches,
most nigbts, etc. Lo más and lo menos are neuter, and mean
the most, the least (for instance, lo menos que V. puede hacer,
etc., tbe least you can do, etc.).
§ 4. Than, after a comparative, is translated in
various ways — vi¿::
(a) By que, if ''than" is followed by a substantive,
Si pronoun, or another adjective^ as:
Tu primo es más rico que mi hermano.
Your cousin is ricber tban my brotber.
Tu primo es más rico que yo.
Your cousin is ricber tban I.
Use hombre es más desdichado que malo,
Tbat man is more unbappy tban wicked.
(b) By de lo que, if "than" is followed by a sent-
ence, as:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
80 Lesson 20.
He is more clever than he seems (i.e., to be).
Es más listo de lo que parece.
(c) By de, if followed by a numeral, as: more
than six. más de seis,
§ 5. As — ds = tan — como. Ex.:
Tan elocuente como Cicerón.
But if the comparison concerns quantity, number, etc.,
as — OS is expressed by tanto, -a — cuanto, -a or tanto, -a
— coma, as:
Tiene tanta hacienda cuanta (como) tenia su padre.
He has as much wealth as his father had.
Esta traducción tiene tantas faltas como las otras.
This translation has as many faults as the others.
Note.— It must be distinctly understood that tanto and
cuanto are adjectives, and therefore agree with their respective
substantives in gender and number, as in the above sentences.
Instead of cuanto, -a, como is used if no verb follows, as in
the second instance. With the verb following (see the fírst
sentence, cuanta tenia su padre), cuanto is preferable, though
coma is admissible, too.
§ 6. If an accessory sentence is introduced by
^Hhat,'' this conjunction is rendered by que, as:
He has so many books that he cannot read them all.
Tiene tantos libros que no los puede leer todos.
Words.
La firmeza, the firmness. dócil, docile, obedient.
el capitán, the captain. cuerdo, -a, i reasonable, pru-
la prudencia, the prudence. prudente, f dent.
el valor, the bravery, valour, sabroso, -a, savoury, delicious.
él obispo, the bishop. dulce, sweet.
la isla, the island. bajo, -a, low.
la almendra, the almond. sincero, -a, sincere.
la cerveza, the beer. barato, -a, cheap.
la noticia, the news. obrar, to work.
el pariente, the relation. conozco, I know.
floreciente, flourishing. vienen, they come.
cansado, -a, tired. contar, to count, to number,
valiente, brave. to tell (a story, etc.).
Reading Exercise. 80«
La rosa es hermosísima. Pedro está muy cansado. El
padre és más prudente que el hijo. Este niño es menos dócil
que prudente. El perro es tan fiel como valiente. Él no es
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Degrees of ComparÍBon. 81
tan cuerdo como su hermana. Yo no tengo tanto dinero, tanta
ñrmeza y tantos amigos como V. El capitán obró con tanta
prudencia como valor. La madre de mi amigo es la mujer
más virtuosa que conozco. V. tiene un criado fidelísimo.
Estamos aquí en un lugar salubérrimo. El piísimo obispo
Fulano ha muerto. Mi reloj es mejor que el suyo, pero el
(that) del doctor es el mejor de todos. Italia tiene buen vino,
Francia lo * tiene mejor, pero España es la que tiene el mejor
vino. Esta isla es más grande que aquella. Mi primo está
en la clase superior, y mi hermano en la clase inferior. Las
frutas más sabrosas se hallan en la baja Andalucía. Mi ve-
cino es un hombre integérrimo. Galicia es un país friísimo.
Las almendras son dulces, pero el azúcar es más dulce. Mi
primo es el hombre más sincero del mundo, y mi prima es la
mujer más hermosa de la ciudad. Esta cerveza es más cara
que el vino, pero es malísima. Las pérdidas por (by) mar
£on más considerables que por tierra. Las manufacturas
inglesas son más baratas que las (those) que vienen de Francia.
El comercio de Sevilla es menos floreciente que el (that) de
Barcelona. Europa es la parte más pequeña del mundo, y
Asia la más grande.
Traducción. 81.
This rose is prettier than that; it is the prettiest of all
tny flowers. My father is very de old ; he is older than yours
(el de usted). Mrs. (La Señora de) Muntafiola is very amiable ;
sbe is the most amiable lady (that) I know. This news is
quite certain (abs, sup,). Murillo was a very famous Spanish
painter. That bishop was very beneficent ; now (ahora) he is
very poor. Is your brother (su,..de V.) older or younger than
you (usted)? He is taller than I, but he is younger. A very
rich man is not always a very happy man. This fruit is more
sweet than sour. This translation is more difficult than it seems.
The captain was as brave as [he was] generous. He has so
many relations that he cannot count them all. That is the
richest man of the town. The island of Madeira is finer than
the island of Majorca. Galicia is the coldest region of Spain,
[it] is a very cold country. Are you in the upper or in the
lower class? This wine is very bad; the beer is better.
We were all very tired, but my sister was the most tired of
all. Why are you (usted) not as obedient as your (su — de
y,) brother? You would have been more prudent if you had
been older (más viejo). Do you know a fruit which is more
* SomCf referring to a preceding substantive, and followed
by an adjective^ is rendered by the acciis. of the personal pro-
fioun; thus: lo tiene mejor ^ has some better (i.e., \*ine).
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. A t
Digitized by VaOOQlC '
82
LesBOD 21.
delidoas than ibis? That book had as many mistakes as the
other. God is the Supreme Being (Ser).
Conrersaeión.
¿ Cómo fué el comercio de esta
ciudad?
¿Eá fuerte su hermano de V. ?
¿Quién ha muerto ayer?
¿Cómo era el capitán?
¿Es pequeña esta casa?
¿ Tiene V. tantos criados como
tenia su padre?
¿Es cierta esta noticia?
¿Es integro ese empleado
(clerk) ?
¿Cómo es la almendra?
¿ Tiene V. buenas almendras ?
¿Quién era Murillo?
¿ Conoce V. á un hombre sin-
cero?
Fué muy floreciente.
Si, es un hombre fortisimo.
El piísimo obispo Fulano.
Era tan valiente como sincero.
Al contrario, es más grande de
lo que parece.
Tengo más.
8i, señor, es certísima.
Es un empleado integérrimo.
Es dulcísima, pero menos dulce
que el azúcar.
Las (see Exercise 30) tengo
buenas, pero mi vecino es
quien las tiene mejores.
Murillo era un celebérrimo pin-
tor español.
Conozco á un hombre muy
sincero, le conozco á V.
Twenty-first Lesson. — Lección veintiuna.
On the Regalar Verb. — Del verbo regalar.
By the terminatiou of the Infinitive Mood we dis-
tinguish three diflferent forms of conjugation— í;í^.:
The first conjugation, with the Infinitive Mood end-
ing in ar, as: amar, to love.
The second conjugation, with the Infinitive ending
in eVy as: comer y to eat.
The ^Aird conjugation, terminating in ivj as: vivir ^
to live.
^o<e.— The vowel preceding the final r is characteristic
of the whole conjugation. The inflections after these charac-
teristic vowels are nearly alike in all three conjugations.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
On the Regular Verb.
83
I. Conjug.
Infin.
Ain-ar, to love.
(Charact. vowel a.)
II. Conjug.
Infin,
Coin-er, to eat.
(Charact. vowel e.)
III. Conjug.
Infin.
TiY-iP, to live.
(Charact. vowel !•)
Yo am-^, I love.
tú —as, thou lovest.
el — a, he loves.
i/uisotros — amos,
we love.
vosotros
dios
--ais,
you love.
— an,
they love.
Amaba, I loved.
— aftcw^thoulovedst,
—aba, he loved.
— ábanios,y/e loved
—abais, you loved.
—aban, they loved.
Amé, 1 loved.
—aste, thou lovedst.
— Ó, he loved.
—amos, we loved.
—asteis, you loved.
—aron, they loved.
Amaré, I shall
love.
—aras, thou wilt
love.
—ara, he will love.
Simple Tenses.
Indicative.
Present,
Comro, I eat.
— es, thou eatest.
— e, he eats.
—emos, we eat.
— éis, you eat.
—en, they eat.
Imperfect,
Comía, I ate.
—ias, thou atest.
—ia, he ate.
—iamos, we ate.
—iais, you ate.
—ian, they ate.
Cowf, I ate.
—iste, thou atest.
— <ó, he ate.
— imos, we ate.
— isteis, you ate.
— ieron, they ate.
Future,
Comeré, I shall
eat.
—eras, thou wilt
eat.
— erd, he will eat.
YiV'O, I live.
—es, thou livest.
— e, he lives.
—imos, we live.
— i«, you live.
— «n, they live.
Vivía, I lived.
—ias, thou livedst.
— ia, he lived.
—iam,os, we lived.
— iai«, you lived.
—ian, they lived.
Yivi, I lived.
— i«f6, thou livedst.
—id, he lived.
—imos, we lived.
—isteis, you lived.
—ieron, they lived.
Firfrá, I shall live.
— <ríí«, thou wilt
live.
— irá, he will live.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
84
Lesson 21.
—aremos, we shall
love.
— aréis f you will
love.
— aran, they will
love.
Amariaf I should
love.
— arias f thou
wouldst love.
—aria, he would
love.
—ariamos, we
should love.
—ariais, you would
love.
— arian,they would
love.
Ama^ love (thou)!
amad, love (you)!
Ame F.*, love!
(polite form.)
^0 ames^y do (thou)
not love!
No améis* y do (you)
not love!
No ame F.*, do not
love! (pol. form.)
Ame, I love.
—eSf thou love.
— e**, he love.
—eremos, we shall
eat.
—eréis, you will
eat.
—eran, they will
eat.
Conditional.
Comería, I should
eat.
—erias, thou
wouldst eat.
— eria, he would
eat.
—eriam^os, we
should eat.
—eriais, you would
eat.
— «rían, they would
eat.
Imperative.
Come, eat (thou)!
comed, eat (you)!
Cornea F,*, eat!
(pol. form.)
Negatively.
No comas, do (thou)
not eat!
No comáis, do (you)
not eat!
No coma V., do not
eat! (pol. form.)
Subjunctive.
Present.
Coma, 1 eat.
— as, thou eat.
—a, he eat.
—irem4>s, we shall
live.
-iréis, you will
live.
—irán, they will
live.
Viviría, I should
live.
—irías, thou
wouldst live.
—iría, he would
live.
—iHamos, we
should live.
—iríais, you would
live.
— ir£an, they would
live.
Vive, live (thou)!
í;¿i;<€í, live (you)!
Fira F.*, live!
(pol. form.)
No vivas, do (thou)
not live!
No viváis, do (you)
not live!
No viva v., do not
live! (pol. form.)
Viva, I live.
—€is, thou live.
I — a, he live.
* These forms are taken from the present of the Subjunctive
Mood (see the following Note).
** The 3rd pers. sing, of the Pres. Subj. is of great impor-
tance, because used with V., it replaces the Imperative of the
polite form, thus: Ame V! (Do) love! Coma V.! (Do) eat! Viva
Digitized by vaOOQlC
On the Regular Verb.
85
—emos, we love.
—HSf you love.
—en, they love.
Amase, if I loved.
—ases, if thou
lovedst.
— «wc, if he loved.
—asemos, if we
loved.
—aseis, if you
loved.
—€isen, if they
loved.
Amare, if I should
love.
—ares, if thou
should st love.
—are, if he should
love.
—aremos, if we
should love.
—areis, if you
should love.
—aren, if they
should love.
— amos, we eat.
—ais, you eat.
—an, they eat.
Imperfect
Comiese, if I ate.
—ieses, if thou
atest.
— iese, if he ate.
—iésemos, if we
ate.
— ieseis, if you ate
—iesen, if they ate.
Future.
Comiere, if I should
eat.
—ieres, if thou
shouldst eat.
— iere, if he should
eat.
—iéremos, if we
should eat.
—iereis, if you
should eat.
—ieren, if they
should eat.
I —amos, we live.
— ais, you live.
I — an, they live.
Fir<e«c, if I lived.
—ieses, if thou
livedest.
—iese, if he lived.
—iésemos, if we
lived.
—ieseis, if you
lived.
— -ie^en, if they
lived.
Viviere^ if I should
live.
—ieres, if thou
shouldst live.
—iere, if he should
live.
—iéremos, if we
should live.
—iereis, if you
should live.
— iereny if they
should live.
v.! (Do) live! The indirect aflBrmative construction would be:
Qukro que F, am>e or que ame F, The diflference between
the affirmative and the interrogative forms, with which the
so-called Imperative of the polite form is easily confounded, will
be seen best in the following table:
I. Conjug,
You love, F. ama.
Do you love? ¿Ama V.?
Do love! ¡Ame F./
IL Conjug.
You eat, F. come.
Do you eat? ¿Come V/f
Do eat / Coma F. /
IIL Conjug.
You live, F. vive.
Do yoa live? ¿Vive V.?
Do live! ¡Viva F./
Digitized by VjOOQIC
86
Lesson 21.
Amara, if I loved.
—aras, if thou
lovedst.
—ara, if he loved.
— aramos f if we
loved.
— araiSj if you
loved.
—aran, if they
loved.
Amando, loving.
Amado, loved.
Conditional.
Comiera, if I ate.
—ieras, if thou
atest.
—iera, if he ate.
—iératnos, if we
ate.
—ierais, if you ate.
—ieran, if they ate.
Viviera, if I lived.
—ieras, if thou
lived.
—iera, if he lived.
—ieramoSj if we
lived.
— ierais, if you
lived.
—ieran, if they
lived.
Gerund.
I Comiendo, eating. | Viviendo, living.
Participle.
I Comido, eaten. | Vivido, lived.
He \
has ) amadOy comido, vivido,
ha }
etc.
Compound Tenses.
Indicative.
Compound Perfect,
I have I
thou hast /loved, eaten, lived,
he has |
etc.
Había I
Pluperfect
I had
loved, eaten,
habías \ amado, comido, vivido, thou hadst/ lived
había J etc.
etc.
3nd Pluperfect.
Hube amado, comido, vivido, 1 had loved, eaten, lived.
etc. etc.
Compound Future.
Habré amado, comido, vivido, I shall have loved, eaten,
lived.
Compound Conditiona},
Habría amado, comido, vivido, I should have loved, eaten,
lived.
Subjunctive.
Compound Perfect.
Haya amado, comido, vivido, that I have loved, eaten, lived.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
On the Regular Verb. 87
Pluperfect
Hubiese amado, comido, vivido, if I had loved, eaten, lived.
Compound Future,
Hubiere amado, comido, vi- if I shall have loved, eaten,
vido, lived.
Compound ConditionaL
Hubiera amado, comido, vi- that I should have loved,
vido, eaten, lived.
By way of practice the pupil should conjugate the
following regular verbs:
After the First Conjugation.
^rre^Zar, to order, put in order, ilustrar, to illustrate.
bajar, to descend. llegar, to arrive.
mar, to create, breed. llevar, to carry, to wear.
emplear, to apply. olvidar, to forget.
engañar, to deceive. representar, to represent.
fumar, to smoke. trabajar, to work.
gastar, to spend. viajar, to travel.
After the Second Conjugation.
Aprender, to learn. emprender, to undertake.
correr, to run. esconder, to conceal.
conceder, to concede, grant. sorprender, to surprise.
deber, to be obliged, to be vender, to sell,
indebted to, to owe.
After the Third Conjugation.
Acudir, to hasten to. percibir, to penetrate, look
exigir, to demand. recibir, to receive, [through.
hundir, to sink (trans.). subir, to ascend.
Remarks.
Although the use of the tenses will be given in the
Second Part, it is* desirable to give here a few hints on
those tenses which offer the greatest difficulties to the be-
ginner.
1. In Conditional clauses beginning with **if," the Spaniard
uses the Imperfect of the Subjunctive or the Conditional of
the same Mood, and the principal sentence follows (or pre-
cedes) with the Conditional of the Indicative Mood, thus:
Imperf, Subj. Cond. Suhj. Cond, Indie.
8i amases (or amaras) los buenos libros, serías más
instruido.
If you loved good books, you would be more learned.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
88 Lesson 21.
Condit Subj, Impf. Suhj.
Si las riquezas hubieran (or hubiesen) podido saciar
Condit Ind,
mis deseos, las habría amado.
If riches could have satisfied my wishes^ I should have
loved them.
2. In exclamations expressing desire, etc., the Imperfect
of the Subjunctive is used as well as the Conditional of the
same mood, as:
¡Ojalá fuera (or fuese) eso asi!
Would that it were so!
3. After to tell, to say, to think, and similar verbs, the
Conditional of the Indicative is used, if the principal sentence
is affirmative. If, on the conti*ary, the principal sentence is
negative, interrogative, or expresses doubt, either the Conditional
or the Imperfect of the Subjunctive should be employed in
the accessory sentence, thus:
He said (had said) that he would come.
Cond. Ind,
Deda (dijo) (hahia dicho) que vendHa*
I did not think that they would overtake us.
Cond. Subj. Impf. Suhj.
No creía que nos alcanzaran or alcanzasen.
4. After the verbs "to be willing, to desire, to wish, to
pretend," etc., the Conditional of the Indicative should never
be used ; the Conditional of the Subjunctive or the Imperfect
of the same Mood are employed, as:
I wished he would come.
Quería que viniera or viniese (but never vendría).
5. The Future of the Subjunctive refers to a FtUure or
Imperative in the principal sentence, as:
You will come if you can (properly : if you will be able
to come).
Vendrá V. si pudiere (or puede, pres.).
This is commonly the case, if the accessory sentence is
introduced by "he who," "that which," "all that," where in
English, too, the Future might be used instead of the Pre-
sent, as:
Choose of these places that which pleases you best.
Elija V. de estos puestos el que más le agradare (or
agrade, pres. Subj.).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
On the Regular Verb. 89
Words.
Los esttidioSf the studies. estudiar^ to study,
el joven, the young man, creer, to believe, to think,
youth. comprender, to understand.
la escoba, the broom. meter, to put.
la capa, the cloak. temer, to fear.
el negodo, the business. ofender, to offend.
el negociante, \ . , merchant l^**^***» to \Qzy^ (for), to set out,
tl comerciante, t ' trabajar, to work.
piadoso, -a, pious. llegar, to arrive.
diligente, diligent. dííc^, said (past part).
Reading Exercise. 82.
¿Que busca V.? Busco mi sombrero, y estos niños
buscan sus libros. Amamos á nuestros padres (parents) y
parientes (relations). Hablaba siempre de sus flores y pájaros.
£se rey ama á su pueblo. Amaremos siempre á los que
(those who) son virtuosos. Hablaré mañana al médico. Ha-
blarla más de sus estudios, si fuese más diligente. ¿Cree Y.
que nuestro vecino llegue hoy? Creo que llegará mañana.
¿Ha comprendido V. lo que he dicho? No lo he comprendido
todo. La criada dejó la escoba en el cuai*to, cuando hubo
acabado (done) de barrerlo (it). ¿Venderá V. sus perros?
Venderé mis caballos, pero no venderé mis perros. Venderla
su capa si se la comprasen (if they . .). Estos negociantes
no venderían sus casas, si hubiesen hecho (done) mejores
negocios. ¿Á quién ha vendido V. sus libros? ¿Cuándo par-
tirá su padre de V. para Madrid? Partirá esta tarde. ¿Desde
(since) cuándo vive V. en esta casa? Desde hace siete ú
(inst. of ó, or; see the Conjunctions) ocho días. ¿Cuándo ha
recibido V. el dinero? Recibí el dinero ayer.
Traducción. 88.
Will you (usted) look for (tr. search) my books and pens?
I should look for them (los), if I had more time. We 2 always
1 speak for our friends. Shall you (V,) speak to the physician
to-morrow? I should speak to the physician to-day, if he
were here. The good king always loved his (su) people. Do
you understand (Entiende Y.) the book which I have given
(dado) you? I have understood all* very well (muy bien).
The footman has put the hat on the table. If you (V.) were
more diligent, you would speak more of your studies. God
loves those who are pious and virtuous. My friend always
spoke of his horses and dogs. I do not think that the Spanish
merchant has (Subj.) yet (todavia) arrived. The young man
* Everything.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
90
Lesson 21.
studied the whole day. I should leave ¡this afternoon if the
weather were not so bad. Do you think (that) you will set
out. to-day? I should set out at once (desde luego) if I had
received my (el) money. We have been living for three
months in this house. The footman has not swept the room
to-day.
CoDTerüaciÓD.
¿Quiere (to love^ like) V. á
mi hermano?
¿Á quién ama Dios?
¿Qué buscaba su criado de V.?
¿Ha cogido (taken) V. mi
cortaplumas (penknife)^
¿Hablará V. hoy á aquel su-
jeto (that man)l
¿Trabajará V. esta tarde?
¿ Por qué llora (crieSj weeps)
este nifio?
¿Vive aquí su tío de V.?
¿ Cree V. que el criado llegue
(see Lesson 22, 2) pronto
(soon)'i
¿Qué ha vendido su amigo
de V.?
¿Desde cuándo vive V. en
esta calle?
¿Ha recibido V. una carta
de Sevilla?
¿ Dónde viven las hijas de su
amigo de V.?
Le quiero mucho á su her-
mano de V.
Dios ama al que (him who)
hace bien á los desdichados.
Buscaba mi sombrero y mis
guantes.
No he cogido nada.
Le (to him) he hablado ya
(aireadla).
No trabajaré, porque no tengo
tiempo.
Porque no tiene nada que (to)
comer (eat).
No, señor, vive en casa (at)
de Don Casimiro Verguero
(Mr, VJs),
No creo que llegue hoy.
Ha vendido sus caballos y sua
perros.
Desde hace año y medio.
Aún (yet) no la he recibido.
Viven en una quinta (country-
Jwuse, cottage) muy lejos
(far) de la ciudad.
Reading Exercise.
Geografía de España.
Situación, clima, extensión, población.
España tiene la misma longitud de las Islas Británicas,
y la misma latitud del Norte de los Estados Unidos. Con-
fina al N. con el Mar Cantábrico y Francia; al E. con el
Mediterráneo; al S. con el Mediterráneo, el Estrecho de Gi-
braltar y el Océano Atlántico, y al O. con Portugal y el At-
lántico. — La Península. Ibérica está" enteramente rodeada de
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Euphonic Changes in Certain Verbs.
91
mar, excepto por la parte donde los Pirineos la separan de
Francia.
Su clima es vario ; en el Norte frío y nebuloso, en el Sud
cálido, en el Centro frío ó cálido, según las estaciones; en
general el clima es muy seco, por la destrucción de los bosques.
La extensión superficial de Espafia es de 504 517 kiló-
metros cuadrados, y la población de 18000000 de habitantes.
Twenty-second Lesson^ — Lección vein-
tidós.
Euphonic Changes in Certain Yerbs.
Certain classes of regular Verbs undergo various
orthographical modifications in order to retain their
pronunciation. These are as follow:
1. Verbs ending in -car^ as: tocar, to touch, change
the c into qu before e; whilst those in -quiry as deHn-
quir', to transgress, change qu into c before o, a; i.e.:
Perf. Imper.
toqué, toque V., (Do) touch,
etc. etc.
But: toco, tocos, etc.
Subj.
toque,
toques,
toque, etc.
Ind. Pr. Imper.
delinco, delinca V.,
etc. etc.
Subj.
delinca,
delincas,
delinca, etc.
But: delinque, etc.; delinquí, etc.
2. Those in -gar as : pagar, to pay, insert u after
g before e; whilst those in -guir, like distinguir, to dis-
tinguish, change gu into ^before o, a; i.e.:
Perf. Imper.
Subj.
pagué, pague Y.,
etc. etc.
But: pago, pagas, etc.
pague,
pagues,
pague, etc.
Ind. Pres. Imper.
Subj.
distingo, distinga V.,
etc. etc.
But: distingues, etc.; distinguí, etc.
distinga,
distingas,
distinga, etc.
Digitized by Google
92 Lesson 22.
3. Verbs in -zar, as : rezar, to pray, change s into
c before e; verbs in -cer and -dr change c into » before
a and o, ca, co, jra^ flfo;
rezavy to pray,
recé. rece, rece F.
rece,
rcccí, etc.
vencer, esparcir, conocer, yacer,
to conquer, to scatter. to know. to lie down.
venzo, esparzo, conozco, yazgo,
venza, esparza, conozca, yazga,
etc. etc. etc. etc.
4. Verbs ending in -ger and -gir change g into J
before a or o, as:
escoger, to choose. dirigir, to direct.
escojo, dirijo,
escoja, dirija^
escojas, dirijas,
escoja, dirija,
etc. etc.
5. Verbs in -guar assume the diaeresis before e,
é; while those in -güir lose the diaeresis before end-
ings not having i with the stress or i:
averiguar, to ascertain. argüir, to argue.
averigüé, arguyo,
averigüe, arguyes,
averigües, arguye,
averigüe, etc. etc.
But: averiguo, etc.; argüí, etc.
6. O if diphthongised to ue assumes the form hue
in oler, and the form ne if preceded by g:
oler, to smell. avergonzarse, to be ashamed.
huelo, me avergüenzo,
hueles, te avergüenzas,
huele, se avergüenza,
etc. etc.
7. i unaccented between two vowels is converted
into y, the same as i unaccented, initial, before a vowel:
argüir, to argue. errar, to make a mistake.
arguyo, yerro,
arguyes, yerras,
arguye, yerra,
etc. etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Euphonic Changes in Certain Verbs. 93
Words.
El cuartOf the room. avergonzarse, to be ashamed.
la sencillez, the simplicity. oler, to smell.
el error, la falta, \ .y^ n i . olvidar, to forget.
d defecto, J ' ignorar, not to be aware.
el iw;o, luxury. entregar, to deliver, to give.
el escritorio, \ the counting- padecer, to suffer.
el despacho, J house, office. llegar, to arrive.
escoger, to choose. escoger, to choose.
la cuenta, the account. dirigir, to direct.
él ahílelo, the grandfather. /mir, to flee, to fly (French :/wir).
el periódico (or diario), the buscar, to search, to look for.
newspaper. es preciso, it is necessary ; me
creer, to believe. (lie, le) es preciso, I, (thou,
pegar, to beat. he), etc., must,
tocar, to touch.
Reading Exercise. 3á.
¿ No le pegue usted al perro ? i No toque V. eso I ¿ Por-
qué toca V. eso? Huyamos del lujo y busquemos la sencillez.
Olvidamos nuestros defectos, creyendo que el mundo los ignora.
Llegué ayer con su hermano de V. Huela V. esta rosa.
Búsquele V., entregúele la cuenta, y que se la pague. ¿Por
qué no paga V. lo que V. ha comprado? Mi abuelo está
leyendo el periódico. ¡Huya V. la mala compañia y busque
V. la buena! Escoja V. lo mejor. Averigüe V. donde tiene
el despacho. ¡Cuanto padezco! Se avergüenza de que yo le
conozca.
TradncciÓD. 35.
(Do) choose one of these rooms! Why did you beat my
dog? I did not beat him Qe precedes the verb). What are
you reading (use leer) ? I am reading the newspaper. The
man who conquers his passions is prudent. Do not beat the
poor boy. He has suffered much in (= during) his life*.
Why don't you pay {transí. Why not pay yon) me (no me — ) ?
Do pay him ! One must pay one's (sus) bills. Did you arrive
(Bef.) from Paris? I attributed (use atribuir) his faults to
bis bad company. Do not touch that, and do not argue. Do
you want me (Quiere V, que) to ascertain it? Do not be
ashamed, everybody (todo el mundo) makes a mistake (use
errar). When you know him, you will like him (le querrá).
He does not want me to (No quiere que le —) direct him.
Smell these roses. Give it to him when he arrives (use the
Mj.),
* Lifetime.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
94
Lesson 23.
¿Qué hace V.?
¿Qué creía su padre de V.?
¿Qué quiere V.?
¡Pagúeme V.I
¿Quién es prudente?
¿De qué se avergüenza V.?
¿Cuándo llegó V.?
ConyersaeióD.
Escojo lo mejor.
Creía que estaba V. leyendo.
Que V. le dirija.
Como quiere V. que le pague
si no me pagan.
El hombre que vence (con-
quers) sus pasiones.
Me avergüenzo de que él no
se avergüence.
Llegué ayer.
Reading Exereise.
Cantares,
Yo no sé lo que yo tengo,
ni sé lo que me hace falta,
que siempre espero una cosa,
que no sé como se llama.
(Ferrán, **La Soledad," XVIIL)
Antes piensa y después habla,
y después de haber hablado,
vuelve á pensar lo que. has dicho,
y verás si es bueno ó malo.
(Ferrán, "La Soledad," XLI.)
Twenty-tilird Lesson. — Lección Yeintitrés*
Personal Pronouns.— Pronombres personales.
Gonjunctive Personal Pronouns.
1st Person.
Plur.
Nosotros (nos),
de nosotros,
á nosotros, nos,
Sing.
Yo, I.
de mí, of me.
á mi, me, to me,
me.*
conmigo, with me.
Sing,
tú, thou.
de ti, of thee.
á ti, te, to thee,
thee.
contigo, with thee.
con nosotros,
2nd Person.
Plur,
Vosotros,
de vosotros,
á vosotros, o8,
con vosotros.
Femin.
Nosotras (nos), we.
de nosotras, oí us.
á nosotras, nos, to
US, US. [us.
con nosotras, with
Femin,
Vosotras (os), you.
de vosotras, of you.
á vosotras, os, to
you, you. [you.
con vosotras, with
* As we stated (Lesson III.), the personal accusative is
rendered in Spanish by the dative.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Personal Pronouns. 95
3rd Person.
(MascuUneJ
Sing, Elf he. Plur, Ellos, they.
de él, of him, de ellos, of them.
á él, le, to him, him. áello8,les,ioihem,ihem.
con él, with him. con ellos, with them.
(Feminine.J
Sing, Ella, she. Plur. Ellas, they.
de ella, of her. de ellas, of them.
á ella, le, lay to her, her. á ellas, lea, las, to them,
them.
con ella, with her. con ellas, with them.
d^euter.)
Sing, Ello, it.
de ello, of it.
á ello, lo, to it.
con ello, with it.
Polite Form of Address^ i.e., you (always in the
third perami).
For both genders.
Sing, Usted (V,), Plur. Ustedes (V.V.).
de usted (V.), de ustedes (V.V.).
á usted (V.); substitute, á ustedes (V.V.); subst. loa,
le, la. les, las.
Reflective of Third Person (usted included).
For both genders and numbers.
Gen. de si, of himself, herself, itself, themselves.
Dat. and \ á si, to himself, herself, itself, themselves.
AccuB. I himself, herself, itself, themselves.
Ablat. consigo, with himself (herself, itself, yourself, polite) ;
themselves, yourselves (pol.).
Remarks.
1. The forms de él, de ella, de ello, etc., were formerly
conti-acted into del, della, déllo, etc. These contractions are
now obsolete.
2. Nos and vos, instead of nosotros, -as, vosotros, -as,
as nominatives, are only used in official style, nos expressing
the so-called "plural of Majesty". Ex.: Xos Don N., Obispo
de , . , , o8 mandamos. We NN. bishop ... bid you.
No8 — as accusative — and os are placed before the verb:
Nos lo dijo, he told us.
¿ No OS lo contó ? did he not tell you ?
Digitized
by Google
96 Lesson 23.
Contrary to the practice of other Romance languages, in
Spanish we and you have a mase, and fern, gender. Thus:
Nosotros (masculine); vosotms (feminine).
3. The preposition con (with) is contracted with mi, tí,
si into conmigo, contigo, consigo, with me, with thee, with
him(self), etc.
4. In the dative and in the accusative there are two
kinds of personal pronouns — viz: the absolute and the con-
junctive; the former is always detached from the verb; the
latter is only employed in the dative and accusative cases
and may closely join the verb.
Yo lo tengo (el periódico), I have it (the paper).
Tómelo V,, Have it.
5. The diflference between the forms de él, de ella, de ello,
de V,, de ellos, etc., á él, á ella, etc., con él, con ella, etc.,
and the forms, de sí, á 8í, consigo is that the latter refer
to the subject of the sentence, whilst the former refer to a
different person or thing. Compare:
Iba hablando con él, he was talking to him.
Iba hablando consigo^ he was talking to himself «
6. Ello (nominative) may only be used as the subject of
the sentence, and should be placed at the beginning. In the
middle of the phrase, lo is used instead of ello; as:
(Ello) parece difícil, mas no lo es.
It seems (to be) difficult, but it is not.
7. The English expressions "I myself or "my own self,"
"he himself," "your own self," etc., are always rendered by
yo mismo, fem. yo misma; él mismo, V, mismo, -a, etc.
^.jB.— The Spanish personal pronoun in the nominative,
i.e., as a subject, is always suppressed, unless required for
the sake of emphasis, contrast, or to avoid ambiguity.
Words.
El dinero, the money. no tener razón, to be wrong.
ver, to see. alabar, to praise.
luego (adv.), soon. acusar, to accuse.
tener razón, to be right. llevar, to carry.
Reading Exercise. 30.
¿ Quién lo (it, so) dice ? Yo, — el — ella — nosotros —
vosoti*as. Nosotros tuvimos razón; vosotras lo veréis (wUl
see) luego. ¿Quién lo ha dicho, él ó ella? ¿Vienes tú con-
migo? No voy contigo. ¿Quién estuvo aquí, él ó ella? No
hablo de él, sino de ellas. Hablamos de vosotros y de voso-
tras. ¿Habla V. de ellos ó de ellas? Esos hombres se ala-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Personal Pronouns. 97
ban á sí mismos (themselves). Las mujeres se acusan á sí mis-
mas. Harías* mejor (You had better) en ocuparle (care) de
tí mismo (mind your own business). Llevo todo mi dinero
conmigo; ól nunca lleva dinero consigo cuando voy con él.
¿Quién ha hablado de mí? Yo he hablado de V., de ól y de
ella. ¡No hable V. siempre de sí mismo I ¿Me ha dado V.
el dinero á mi ó á mi amigo? 8e lo he dado á él. Vosotros
tenéis razón.
Tradnceióu. 87.
Who is there? He, she, we, you, they. Bo you give
(da V,) the money to me or to her? I love (quiero) thee,
bat I do not love him. Have you seen me or her? You
carry it all about (con) you. Has (use llevar) he money about
him? She has no money about her. We (m) are poor, but
you (f,) are rich. We (m,) speak of you (f,), and you (f,)
speak of us (m,). Have you any money? I have more (of
it) than you. Have you any friends? I have none (no los
tengo). That (it) seems [to be] very difficult, but it is very
easy. I have seen you (m, pi,) and them (f, pi,). She loves
thee, but she does not love me. He and she were here; they
have spoken (to) with him and (to) with her. I did not
speak of you, but (sino) I spoke of them (pi, fern.). This
lady praises herself. Why do you accuse her, and not him?
Shall you take all your money with you? He would have
taken all his books with him, if he had had time (tiempo).
Conyersaclón.
¿Quién ha hecho eso? Yo, tú, ól, ella.
¿Quién ha hablado de mí? Yo he hablado de V.
¿Quién ha venido conmigo? Yo he venido contigo.
¿ Tiene dinero ? Tiene más dinero que yo, pero
nunca lleva dinero conmigo.
¿Qué falta tiene ella? Que habla mucho de sí misma.
¿Me llamas (Dost thou cali) No te llamo á tí, les llamo á
á mí? él y á ella.
¿ Quién se acusa á sí mismo ? Pocos se acasan á sí mismos.
¿De quién habla ól? Habla de nosotros y de vosotras.
¿Ha llegado sola ella? No, ha llegado conmigo.
Beading Exercise.
Geografía de España. (Continuación.)
Mares, golfos, cabos; montañas, ríos.
Sus mares son el Atlántico y el Mediterráneo; la parte
del Atlántico que se extiende por la costa norte se llama Mar
Cantábrico ó Golfo de Vizcaya, ó de Gascuña. En Cataluña
• From hacer, to do.
Spanish Cony. -Grammar. 7
Digitized by VaOOQlC
98
Lesson 24.
hay el golfo de Rosas. Sas principales cabos son el de Creus^
en Cataluña, el de Palos en Murcia, el de Gata en Almería,
la Punta de Europa en Cádiz, el Finisterre j Ortegal en la
Corufia, el de Peñas en Asturias, y el Macbichaco en Vizcaya.
En España no hay lagos.
El país está cortado por vanas cordilleras paralelas y
una transversal; á saber: al N. la cordillera Pirenaica, con
las Montañas de Santander y los Montes de Asturias; en el
Centro la cordillera Carpetana, con las Sierras de Somo-
sierra y Guadarrama, y la cordillera Oretana con los Montes
de Toledo; al S. la cordillera Bética, con la Sierra Morena,
y la Penibética con la Sierra Nevada; y al E. la cordillera
Ibérica, que parte de las Montañas de Santander y termina
en el cabo de Gata. Esta cordillera es la principal divisoria
de las aguas.
Los principales ríos corren entre esas cinco cordilleras
paralelas, y la cordillera oriental y los dos mares, y son:
el Duero, el Tajo, el Guadiana, el Guadalquivir y el Ebro;
éste es el único de ellos que desemboca en el Mediterráneo.
Twenty-fourth Lesson. — Lección veinti-
cuatro.
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. — Pronombres
personales afijos.
As we observed in the foregoing lesson, these pro-
nouns have only the dative and accusative cases. They
are:
Sing,
Dat. me, me (to me); te, tbee (to thee);
Ace. me, me; te, thee;
Dat. le; á V., him (to le, her (to her);
him); to you.
Ace. lo, him; la her; — h, it.
Plur. \se
Dat. no8, us (to us); os, you (to you);
Ace. nos, us ; os, you ;
Dat. les, áV.V.,them(io les, them (to them) (f,);
them) ; to you (m.);
Ace. los, them (m,); las, them (f,).
Observations.
1. The rule given in Lesson 3, that the object of
the person is put in the dative, holds good also for the
himself^
herself,
itself,
yourself
(polite),
them-
selves,
etc.
Digitized
by Google
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 99
pronouns, but in this case it is not employed with the
same consistency by all Spanish writers. Thus, when
speaking of persons, we find le and lo for the sing,
and les and los for the pi. mase; for the fem. sing.
la, more rarely le, and for the pi. las, more rarely les.
On the other hand, la and las occur occasionally, besides
le (to her), les (to them) for the dat. feminine — e.g., la
^^1 I give to her; but le is better for both genders.
Examples :
Nuestro amigo salía de su casa, cuando le (or lo) asal-
taron unos ladrones.
Our friend left his house, when several robbers as-
saulted him.
¿Dónde están sus hermanos de Y,? No lea or loa he
visto.
Where are your brothers? I have not seen them.
Creen las mujeres que los hombres laa (ace.) aprecian
particularmente por su hermosura ; pero lo que lea
(or laa) asegura para siempre una estimación verda-
dera es la modestia, la^ virtud, etc.
Women think that men appreciate them particularly
for their beauty; but what always secures them
real esteem is modesty, virtue, etc.
In speaking of inanimate objects le or lo are used
for the masculine, the latter in preference — e,g.:
He comprado este libro, pero no lo {dr le) he leído todavía,
I have bought this book, but have not yet read it.
2. Concerning the construction of these pronouns,
the following are the most important rules:
(a) The conjunctive pronouns precede the verb in
the Indicative^ the Subjunctive, and the Imperative moods ;
in this latter case only when negatively employed, as:
Lo dog, I give it.
Lo he dado, I have given it.
Te mando, I command thee.
No le conocía á Y,, I did not recognize you.
Os ha visto, he has seen you.
(Quiere que se lo diga, he wants me to tell him.
¡No lo diga Y,! do not tell him.
A very remarkable anomaly is presented by the
pronouns of the third person. Whenever a dative of
this person (masculine or feminine, singular or plural)
7*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
100 Lesson 24.
meets with an accusative of the same person, the dative,
for the sake of euphony, is rendered by 8e, not by Ze,
les. Thus :
Sing, Plur,
le lOy I 1^ ^^' \ = 8e Jo, les lo, it them, = 8e lo,
^^ ^^* I her ko) htr' ] ^ ^^ ^^' ^^^ ^^» ^®^ *'^®°^ = *^ ^^•
^' ^^^' { hirthimrS'}= ^ ^^' ^'' ^^^' **^^^ ^^-¿.^^ *^«^'
'^ ^^^' { him them Í/ÍÍ }= *^ ^^^' ^^^ ^^^' ^^^^ ^f'^ ^ *^®™
— sc las,
^of6.— When itc^o of these pronouns, one in the dative,
the other in the accusative case, meet in the same sentence,
they both precede the verb, the dative being invariably placed
before the accusative case, as:
Te lo doy, I give it thee.
Te lo he dado, I have given it thee.
Me lo ha mandado, (lit.) he has ordered it to me.
It makes no difference whether the pronouns
precede or follow (see c) the verb. Thus:
Se lo prometí, I promised it him, for: le lo prometí.
Se los enviaré, I shall send them (m,) to them, for: les
los enviaré.
Prometiéndoselo, promising it him, for: prometiéndotelo.
In order to avoid misconception, or if a particular
stress is laid on the pronoun, either the absolute pro-
noun or the corresponding substantive may be added, as:
Se lo prometí á éí, I promised it to him,
Se lo prometí á ella, 1 promised it to her,
Se lo prometí á mi hermano, I promised it to my
brother.*
Se lo prometí á mi hermana, I promised it to my sister.
(h) The conjunctive personal pronouns follow the
verb in the Imperative (except the negative Imperative,
see a), the Infinitive, and the Gerund, In this case they
are contracted with the verb into one word.
Déjame, let me; whereas: no me dejes, do (thou) not
let me.
Dinas la verdad, tell (thou) us the truth.
* If preceding the verb, the substantive is followed imme-
diately by the dative of the pronoun, as: A mi hermano se lo
prometió, he promised it to my brother.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 101
Vino á visitarme, be came to pay me a visit.
Quererse, to love oneself.
Estoy escribiéndolo, I am writing it.
-^o^e.— In this case, whenever two conjunctive personal
pronouns — one in the dative, and the other in the accusative
— meet in the sentence, the dative precedes:
Díamelo hacer, let me do it.
Biganoálo F., tell us.
Estoy escribiéndoselo, I am writing it to him.
iV.^.— Notwithstanding the preceding rules, the con-
junctive farm precedes (not follows), in the negative im-
perative:
No se lo deje V, hacer, do not let him do it.
No nos lo diga F., do not tell us.
^o<e.— Ancient writers contract the pronoun with the
Infinitive mood in a peculiar manner. Instead oí tomarla, to
take her, they say tomalla; instead of tenerle — teneUe, etc.
In the 2nd PI. of the Imperative mood, which ends in 'd, this
consonant was put before the I — of the pronoun. Thus, in-
stead of tomadlo, take (you) it, they said: tomaldo; instead
of decidle (tell it), decilde. This metathesis, or transposition,
is frequently met with, for instance, in Cervantes, but is now
quite obsolete.
(c) If the Imperative, the Infinitive, or the Gerund
is coupled with an auxiliary verb, or with a verb which
may be considered as an auxiliary, Hke hacer, to make,
dejar de, to cease, volver á, to do again, etc., the pro-
nouns very often precede these verbs, as:
8e deja ver, liter, he lets himself see = he shows him-
self (instead of deja verse).
No me vuelvas á hablar, do not speak to me again
instead of no vuelvas á hablarme),
(Euphony alone decides where the pronoun should be
placed in this case.)
(d) For euphony's sake, a slight alteration is ori-
ginated by the pronouns nos (us) and as (you)— vi>.:
1. When nos is affixed to a form ending in -5,
the final -s of the verb is dropped, thus:
Amémonos, let us love one another, for: amémosnos.
Vémonos, we see each other, for: vámosnos,
2, When as meets with the final -d of the Im-
perative mood, this consonant is dropped, thus:
Amaos, love (you) yourselves, for: amados.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
102 Lesson 24.
Note,— The only exception is id, go (you). Thus: idos,
go away, begone!*
General Memark. — Notwithstanding the preceding
rules, in poetry as well as in literary style the Conjunctive
Pronouns most often follow, not precede, the verb.
Words.
El nombre, the name. parecer, to seem.
la libertad, the liberty. esperar, to expect, to wait for.
el estado, the state, condition, sentarse, to sit down.
el lacayo, the footman, prometer, to promise.
la impaciencia, (the) impa- ir \a p ?to come, to see, to
tience. venir f ^ ^' \ call, to visit **.
la hora, the hour. veneer, to conquer.
comentar, to begin. anunciar, to announce, to im-
lamentar, to lament. part.
recomendar, to recommend. C5¿arew¿eraí?o, to be acquainted,
saber, to know. • mucho tiempo há, it is a good
afligir, to afflict. while.
ver, to see. di, tell (thon).
hallar, to find. apenas, scarcely.
escribir, to write. algo, something.
Reading Exercise. 38.
¡Díganos V. la verdad! ¡Enviele V. esta carta! Le
Tjonocemos. No le conocemos. La conozco mucho tiempo há.
Estaba enterado de la muerte de su padre, pero no he querido
anunciársela por no afligirle. Escríbaselo V. Puede V. ha-
blarle. No le he de decir mi nombre. ¿No sabe V. quién
es esa mujer ? ¿ Se lo ha recomendado V. ? Te lo he dicho á tí, y
no á él. El pobre muchacho se comenzó á lamentar de su
suerte. El caballero halló á su enemigo; y venciéndole (after
having conquered him) en batalla singular (duel), después de
perdonarle generosamente, le dio la libertad. ¿Han venido
Vds. á verme? Ella no se lo ha prometido á él. Apenas me
hubo visto uno de los tres pastores, cuando me llamó. Ha-
llábame en este estado, cuando supe (knew, learned) que el
Señor Gil Blas estaba sin lacayo. Sentámonos á la mesa mi
hermana y yo. Esperábamos con impaciencia la hora para
* French: Allez-vousen!
** In the Romance languages, "to go" (Fr. aller; Ital. andaré;
Span, ir) denotes a motion towards the person spoken tOj whereas
*'to come" (Fr. venir; It. venire; Sp. venir) implies a motion
towards the speaker. "Come to see me" is therefore Fr. Venez me
voir; It. Venga a trovar mi; Sp. Venga F. á verme. "I'll call on
you" is: Fr. JHrai vous voir; It. Andró a trovarla; Sp. Iré d verle
á V.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 103
vemos y hablarnos. ¿Tiene V. algo que decirnos? ¿Conoce
Y. á esos hombres ? Les he visto ayer en casa de mi amigo,
pero no les conozco. Dime la verdad, que (and) no te arre-
pentirás (pou will not repent) de haberla hecho. Se lo dijeron
(told) á mis hermanas. Á mi amigo no le pareció bien este
consejo.
Tradocción. 89.
Tell me (poh form)\ Tell (thou) it us! I expected you.
I do not expect him. Had you expected it? He has given
it to him. There are the books; has he given them to them
(fem,)t He has given them to the daughters of the neighbour.
Leave them (to) them! I promised them to them. Has my
brother seen you (plur,) ? Why will you not impart it to
him, if you are acquainted (with) of it? Have you told him
80? I have told her, but not him. Tell him! We were not
able (lit, in the state) to promise him it. Why have you
promised it her? I should not have promised it to her, if
you had not given it to me. Begone! I do not give you so
much money as I gave you (the) last time (vez). Love one
another, men ! He was very sorry (tr. to afflict ones self)^
when he heard (transí. Tcnew) that you had not recommended
him. Have you known this gentleman? I did not know
him, but 1 knew his sister (transí, hut his sister, I knew her).
He has recommended her to me. We came (tr. have come)
to visit him, but as we do not find him at home, we shall
(wait for) expect him. I have something to tell you. Did
you know (—supo Y.) it? I am acquainted with his con-
dition, and I (did tell him so) have also told him, but he
will not believe it (me). Do you know that I will send them
(mase.) to them?
ConYersaeión.
¡Dígame V. la verdad! La digo siempre.
¿Conoce V. á ese señor? Le conozco muy bien; es el
primo de la Señorita de Fi-
gueras.
¿Espera V. á su amigo? Espero á mi tio: me ha pro-
metido venir á verme hoy.
¿Se lo ha dicho Y. á ól, ó á Se lo he dicho á ella, y no á
ella? él.
¿Por qué lo han hecho? Lo han hecho para honrarle (^¿n
hishonourfVú.tohonourhim).
¿A. quién se lo dijeron (told Se lo dijeron á mis hermanos.
they)^
¿Se lo ha prometido? Sí, se lo ha prometido*
¿ Quién ha venido ? Ha venido un caballero á ver-
le á V.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
104 Lesson 25.
¿ Qué nos manda (orders ^ com- Nos manda amamos como her-
mands) el Evangelio (Gos- manos y socorremos (assist)
pel)^ en la desgracia.
¿Ha enviado V. las cartas Se las enviaré por el correo
á la marquesa? (post).
¿Por qué no le da (gives) di- No puede darle dinero, por-
nero su padre? que no lo* tiene.
¿Quiere V. prestarme este No puedo prestárselo (or no
libro? se lo puedo prestar) á V.
porque lo estoy leyendo.
Beading Exereise.
Cantares.
Cuando nacemos, lloramos,
y sonríen los demás,
y al morir nos sonreimos,
y ellos se echan á llorar.
[Palau, "Nuevos Cantares," CXXXL]
Despedida, despedida,
eres fuente de dolores,
cuando las manos se sueltan
se rompen los corazones.
[Palau, "Nuevos Cantares," CCXCVIU.]
Twenty-fifth Lesson. —Lección veinticinco.
Demonstrative and Interrogative Prononns. — Pro*
nombres demostratiros é interrogativos.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
As stated in Lesson 14, these words are pronouns
when used in lieu of a Substantive — i.e., alone. Of course,
they may be inflected with the prepositions á, de, con,
etc. They are:
Sing. Plur.
Este, esta, this; esto (n.), this; estos, estas, these.
Ese, esa, this; eso (n.), this; esos, esas, these.
A quel, aquella, that ; aquello (n.), that ; aquellos, aquéllas, those.
Note. — The forms aqueste, aquesta, aquesto, for este,
esta, esto; aquese, aquesa, aqueso for ese, esa, eso, are no^
* As the Spanish language has no precise equivalent for
some or any in this meaning, the personal pronoun is often used
instead, as in the above sentence. Thus: ¿No come V, fruta?
Do you not eat fruit? Nunca la como, I never eat any (lit. it)-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. 105
completely obsolete. This is also the case V7ith the compoands
of este and ese with otro: estotro, estotra, this other = the
other.
Again, the articles el, la, and lo are used as de-
monstrative pronouns in phrases such as:
Mi caballo y el de mi hermano.
My horse and that of my brother.
The English phrases he who . . ., pi. those who . . .,
are rendered by the definite article with que following:
Los que no moderan sus pasiones son infelices.
Those who do not moderate their passions are unhappy.
The neuter lo should be added where the EngHsh
tlmt is commonly omitted, as:
No sabe lo que dice.
He does not know what (that which) he says.
He who, especially in the singular, is often trans-
lated by quien, and not by el que — e.g.:
Quien calla, otorga, he who is silent gives consent.
(French: Qui ne dit mot, consent.)
The neuter forms esto^ eso, aquello are only used
substantively — ie., without a noun following, as:
He hablado de esto, de eso, de aquello.
I have spoken of it (that).
J^.^.— Besides their general use similar to that of the
demonstrative adjectives, the Spanish demonstratives may
refer to a person or thing already mentioned:
Escribí á mi amigo, y éste no me contestó.
I wrote to my friend but he did not answer.
Yi al padre y al hijo; aquel no me vio, éste si.
I saw the father and the son; the former did not see
me, the latter did.
Interrogative Pronouns.
The interrogative pronouns differ in their form from
the relative pronouns only in as much as they have
the written accent, but they differ in their use. Besides
those enumerated in Lesson 14, § 4, 5, and 6 (cuál and
qué), we should mention:
¿Quién? plur. ¿quiénes? who?
¿Cuál? plur. ¿cmles? which? and
¿ Cuyo ? í. ¿ cuya ? whose ?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
106 Lesson 25.
(a) ¿Quién?, ¿quiénes? are never used with a
substantive; the singular may sometimes be used in-
stead of the plural. This pronoun is inflected with de,
á, con, etc. Examples:
¿Quién habla? Who speaks? Plur. ¿Quiénes hablan?
¿ De quién (de quiénes) habla V. ? Of whom do you speak?
(b) ¿Cuál? plur. ¿cuáles? never takes the article,
and thus diflfers from the relative pronoun el cual Thus :
¿ Cuál es él más rico ? Who is the richest ? Whereas :
Es una ciudad en la cual no he estado, it is a town
where (in which) I have not been.
(c) ¿Cuyo? fem. ¿cuya? plur. ¿cuyos? f. ¿cuyas?
corresponds with the English whose, and agrees in gender
and number with the noun to tvhich it refers. However,
the pupil should be cautioned against the use of this
interrogative pronoun, which very rarely occurs, and
advised to replace it by: ¿de quién? plur. ¿de quiénes?
Thus:
¿De quién es este libro? rather than ¿ Cuyo libro es este?
¿ De quién es esta carta ? rather than ¿ Cuya carta es esta ?
¿ De quiénes son estos libros ? r. th. ¿ Cuyos libros sen estos ?
¿ De quiénes son estas cartas ? r. th. ¿ Cuyas cartels son estas ?
Whose book is this?
Whose letter is this?
Whose books are these?
Whose letters are these?
N,B. — ¿Quién? (on anyone knocking at a door), who
is there? ¿Qué? what?
Words.
El vicio, vice. la virtud, virtue.
el carpintero, the joiner. pernicioso, dangerous.
el extranjero, the foreigner. degradar, to degrade.
las señas, the address. elevar, to elevate.
dudar, hesitate.
Reading Exercise. 40.
¿Quién se lo ha dicho á V.? ¿Cuál es el enemigo más
pernicioso del hombre ? El vicio. ¿ De quién (whose) es esta
casa, y de quiénes (whose) son esos jardines? ¿Cuáles son
los señores que han venido? Vendrán (will come) unas mujeres.
¿Quiénes? — La del jardinero y la del carpintero? ¿Á quién
hablaba V? Á un extranjero? ¿Á cuál? Á un muchacho
que está en casa. ¿Tiene V. mis sefias y las de mi amigo?
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. 107
go solo las de V. Tenia un bnen amigo, pero ese se
murió (died), ¿Quién duda entre el vicio y la virtud?; aquél
degrada, ésta eleva. ¿ Quién ? (on anyone knocking at a door).
No he hallado lo que buscaba. Hemos hablado de esto y de
aquello. ¿Son esos sus hermanos de V.? No, señor, estos
son mis primos, aquellos son mis hermanos.
Traducción. 41.
Who V7as (tr, has been) there ? Who is there (on anyone
Imocking at a door)? Which of these men has done it?
Whose dog is this? That of our neighbour. To whom do these
flowers belong (use pertenecer)^ Which is the finest of
them? To whom have you given the bill? I do not know
the gentleman to whom I have given it. Who (plur.) has
come? The children whose father was here yesterday. Of
which girls do you speak? Who has seen the foreigner?
Have you my address and that of my friend? I have yours
only. These are they (do not translate they). Who hesitates
between vice and virtue?; the former degrades, the latter
elevates. I have bought (comprado) something. — What?
Conversacióu.
¿Quién está ahí? No sé (I do not know) quien.
¿Á quién ha hablado V.? He hablado á un amigo, que
ha venido ayer.
¿Tiene Y. mi libro ó el de Tengo el de su hermano de V.
mi hermano?
¿De quién es esta casa? No sé de quien es.
¿De quién son esos vestidos? Son los de los niños.
¿De quién son esas flores? ¿Cuáles?
¿Son esos sus niños de V.? Si, lo son.
¿De quién hablaba V.? De un amigo. — ¿De cuál?
Beading Exercises.
Geografía de España. (Continuación.)
Producciones, Industria, Comercio.
Las principales producciones de España son: granos
(Castilla), legumbres y frutas, principalmente naranjas (Ara-
gón, Valencia y Andalucía), arroz (Valencia), vinos y aceites
(Andalucía) ; azafrán, esparto, cáñamo y seda. En las regiones
meridionales se ha aclimatado el café, el tabaco, la caña de
azúcar y el algodón.
La producción animal consiste principalmente en bueyes
(Galicia, Castilla y Andalucía), caballos (Andalucía), mulos
(Estremadnra y Ai-agón), ovejas (Castilla, Aragón y Anda-
lucía) y cerdos (Estremadura, Asturias é Islas Baleares).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
108 LesBon 26.
La producción mineral es rica y variada: hierro (Pro-
vincias Vascongadas), carbón (Asturias), cobre (Rio Tinto),
plomo (Linares), mercurio (Almadén) y sal (Cardona).
La industria está poco desarrollada, aunque progresa:
maquinaria y metalurgia en las Provincias Vascongadas y
Cataluña, hilados y tejidos en Catalnfia y Valencia, salazones
en Galicia y Asturias, molinería en Castilla y Cataluña, vinos
y azúcares en Andalucía, y papel en las Provincias Vascon-
gadas y Cataluña.
El comercio español progresa, y se verifica principal-
mente con Francia ó Inglaterra, la América del Sud, Portu-
gal, Bélgica y las antiguas posesiones españolas de las An-
tillas y Filipinas.
Twenty-sixth Lesson. — Lección veintiséis.
Possessive and Relative Prononns. — Pronombres
posesivos y relativos.
Possessive Pronouns.
The rules given in Lesson 15 on the possessive
adjectives are also applicable to the possessive pronouns.
We have only to add here one observation, reserving
full particulars on this part of speech for the Second Part.
If two sentences have the same substantive for a
predicate, the repetition of which is avoided by the use
of a possessive pronoun, the Spanish language requires
the neuter indefinite article before the verb of the fol-
lowing sentence, thus:
Charles is my friend, and I am his (friend).
Carlos es mi amigo, y yo lo soy suyo.
Relative Pronouns.
As was said ia Lesson 25, these pronouns differ
from the interrogative pronouns in their use, except
cual, which, when a relative pronoun, commonly takes
the article. They are:
que (el que, la que, los que, las que), which, who.
quien, who, pi. quienes,
el cuál, f. la cual ; pi. los cuales, f. las cuales, who, which.
cuyo, f, cuya; pi. cuyos, f. cuyas, whose.
cual, m. & f., pi. cuales (without article, mostly with
tal, tales, preceding), which, as, like, etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 109
1. These pronouns are varied with con^ de, and á,
but the relative que only takes á when preceded by
the definite article (al que, á la que, á los que, á las
que); without the article it can also be used to express
the accusative of the person, but then it does not take á.
Qué is aUke in singular and plural, and used both of
persons and things, as:
Un libro que he comprado, a book which I have bought.
V, es el honibre que yo buscaba (or á quien yo buscaba).
You are the man whom I sought (was seeking).
Los muebles de que está adornada la casa que habitamos,
The furniture with which the house in which we live
is adorned.
2. Qkiietiy plur. quienes, is used oí persons only,
irrespective of gender, as:
El hombre á quien Y, debe la vida,
The man to whom you owe your life.
Las niñas á quienes vi.
The girls whom I saw.
If a particular stress is laid on a personal pronoun
(where in French with the phrases c^est toi, &est lui, etc.,
qui is used), the pronoun in conjunction with el que,
h que or quiefi, in their corresponding cases are used, as :
To soy quien (or el que) lo dice.
It is 1 who say it.
To him you owe your life.
Á H es {or Es á él) á quien le debe V, la vida,
3. Cual, plur. cuales, when relative pronouns,
are preceded by the article, as:
El herm^ano* de mi madre, el cual.
My mother's brother, who ....
Notes,— (a) Que adds to the preceding sentence one of
secondary importance, whereas cual joins to the foregoing
thonght a new one of equal weight. For this reason el cual
is always preceded by a comma, and que is not**.
(b) If cual introduces an indirect interrogative sentence,
it is used without the article, as :
Es difícil determinar cuál de los dos ha hablado mejor.
It is difficult to decide which of the two has spoken better.
* Hermano; Latin, germanus.
** In English, the relative pronouns, though understood, are
often omitted after the noun. In Spanish, they must be added.
Ex.: The letter you have written. La carta que V, ha escrito.
Digitized
by Google
lio Lesson 26.
4. Cuál is likewise used without the article when
expressing a comparison, in which case the English
employ as, like, etc. Ex.:
Era una mujer cual la podía desear.
She wa8 such a woman as he could wish for.
Cual furioso león, like a furious lion.
La vida hay que aceptarla tal cual es*.
One must take life such as it is.
5. If the relative prououn refers, not to a single
word, but to a whole sentence preceding, to que, to cual,
(French: ce qui; It. il che, locche) replace que, as:
Los reos fueron ahsusltos, lo que (or lo cual) causó
un sentimiento general,
The criminals were discharged which {i,e,, their being
discharged) caused a general sensation.
6. If the relative pronoun que is preceded by several
substantives, so that it might become doubtful to which
it refers, the definite article is added to que, Ex.:
La relación de las aventuras de Bon Quijote en la que
los lectores vulgares sólo ven un asunto de entreteni-
miento, etc.
The narration of Don Quixote's adventures, in which
superficial readers only see a matter of amuse-
ment, etc.
7. Cuyo, -a, plur. cuyos, -as, when a relative pro-
noun, means whose, and does not differ in its form from
the interrogative pronoun (see the preceding Less.), as:
El padre á cuyos niños he visto.
The father whose children I saw.
N,B,—B\it here, too, as with the interrogative pronoun
cuyo, the cases of quien or el cuál, etc., may be used:
El padre de quien he visto á los niños, or
El padre á los niños del cual he visto.
As to the further use of cuyo, see Part 11., Lesson 9.
Words.
La circunstancia, the circum- el puesto, the place, situation.
stance. el favor, the favour, kindness.
el deudor, the debtor. la amistad, the friendship.
ser deudor, to be indebted, la estación, the season.
to owe. el olor, the smell.
* Tal, cuál; Latin, talis, qudlis.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. Ill
¡a modestia, modesty. quería, loved, wished.
d literato, the literary man. matar, to kill.
la primavera, the Spring. gastar, to spoil, to spend, to
suave, soft, lovely. waste.
brusco, harsh. desconfiar, to distrust,
digno, worthy. alentar, to encourage.
verdadero, true. lograr, to ohtain.
respetable, respectable. andar, to have intercourse
admirable, admirable, wonder- with, to associate with.
ful. podemos, we can.
locamente, in a foolish way. desear, to wish, to desire.
prudentemente, prudently. es preciso, it is necessary, one
reluce, shines. must.
Beading Exercise. 42.
Él era quien lo quería. Él fué quien le mató. Quien
gasta locamente su dinero, no conoce su valor. De sí mismo
es de quien uno debe desconfiar. Hay circunstancias en que
es preciso obrar prudentemente. La casa que V. ha comprado
vale más que aquella. El joven de quien he hablado á V.
es digno de ser alentado. ¿Sabe V. á quien es deudor del
puesto que ha logrado? Dime con quien andas y te diré
quien eres. Me ha hecho un favor cual lo esperaba de su
amistad. Estas son frutas cuales las podemos desear en la
estación en que estamos. Tengo aquí flores cuyo olor es muy
suave. Fulano es un literato cuya modestia es admirable.
Ellos son quienes lo han hecho. No es oro todo lo que reluce.
Los niños cuyo padre ha muerto están en la casa de mi
vecino. Yo soy quien lo he hecho todo por mis amigos. Lo
que agrada (pleases), seduce (seduces). Su hermano de V. me
dijo unas palabras bruscas, lo que me afligió mucho.
Tradneeión. 43.
I have done it {tr. It is I who . . .). Thou hast not
said so. To her we owe (debemos) (everything) all. I do not
know which of these gentlemen (has) said so. The man who
(has) wasted his money in such a foolish way is not worthy
of being assisted. The friends of my father who were here,
have gone (se — ido) to France. Do you know which of the
two has done it? Is it you who spoke (has spoken), or is it
she who spoke? On the contrary, I have never (nunca)
spoken, it is Miss So-and-so who is always speaking. The
flowers whose smell is so sweet are the children of (the) Spring.
Be my friend, and I shall be yours (thine). The generous
prince to whom I owe my situation, encourages me where
(ever) he can. The soldiers (that) we have seen on (en) the
road (camino), were very tired. The circumstances in which
Digitized
by Google
112 Lesson 27.
I found him, were very sad. We cannot expect favours of
these strangers as we expect them of our friends. We are
those to whom you owe your life. What (tr, that which) is
true is also estimable. The young man obtained the situation,
which (see 5) delighted (fr, alegrar) his mother.
ConTersación.
¿Quién es aquel señor? Es mi amigo, de quien he ha-
blado á V.
¿De quién son estas tijeras Son las de la niña.
(scissors) ?
¿De quién es ese perro? Es mío.
¿Cuál es su opinión de V.? No tengo opinión en esa
materia.
¿Quién ha escrito esta carta? El capitán cuya hermana ha
venido ayer.
¿Cuál de esos señores ha Es difícil decir cuál de los
hablado mejor? dos ha hablado mejor.
¿Á quién debo (mmt I) ba- Á Pedro es á quien debe V.
blar? hablar.
¿Quiénes son aquellos hom- Los hombres de quienes le
bres? hablé á V.
¿De quién debe uno descon- De si mismo es de quien uno
fiar? debe desconfiar.
¿Quién es digno de ser alen- El joven de quien le he ba-
tado? blado á V.
Beadingr Exercise.
Cantares,
¡Despedida de mi casa
bien te he recordado siempre!
Mi padre exclamó: "Sé honrado";
mi madre decía: ¡"Vuelve"!
[F. de Arteaga, "Quinientos Cantares," 76.]
La muñeca hace á la niña,
y la niña á la mujer:
¡Madres las que tenéis niñas,
edacad muñecas bien!
[F. de Arteaga, "Quinientos Cantares," 405.]
Twenty-seventh Lesson. — Lección
veintisiete.
The Passive Voice. — De la yoz pasiva.
The passive voice is formed in Spanish by joining
to the auxiliary ser^ to be, the past participle of the
Digitized
by Google
The Passive Voice. IIS
active verb. This past participle, when coupled v\^ith
ser, is always considered an adjective, and consequently
agrees in gender and number with the noun or pronoun
to which it refers.
Infinitive.
Ser amado, -a; Plur. ser amados, ^as, to be loved.
Indicative.
Present
Sing, Plur.
Soy amado, -a, I am loved. somos amados, -as, we are loved.
eres amado, -a, thou art loved, sois amados, -as, you are loved.
es amado, he is loved. son amados, they are loved (m,).
es amada, she is loved. son amadas, they are loved (f.).
Imperfect.
Era amado, -a, I was loved, etc.
Definite.
Fui amado, -a, I was loved, etc.
Future.
Seré amado, -a, I shall be loved.
Conditional.
Seria amado, -a, I should be loved.
Imperative.
Sing. Sé amado, -a, be (thou) Plur. Sed amados, -as, be (you)
loved. loved.
Subjunctive.
Present.
Sea amado, -a, I (may) be loved.
Imperfect.
Fílese amado, -a, I was loved.
Future.
Fuere amado, -a, that I shall be loved.
Conditional.
Fuera amado, -a, that I should be loved.
Gerund.
Siendo amado, -a, being loved.
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. S
Digitized
by Google
lU Lesson 27.
Compound Tenses.
Infinitive.
Haber sido amado, to have been loved.
Indicative.
Perfect
He sido amado, -a, I have been loved.
Pluperfect.
Hahia sido amado, -a, I had been loved.
2nd Pluperfect.
Hube sido amado, -a, I had been loved.
Compound Future,
Habré sido amado, -a, I shall have been loved.
Compound Conditional.
Habría sido amado, -a, I should have been loved.
Subjunctive.
Perfect.
Haya sido amado, -a, I have been loved.
Pluperfect.
Hubiese sido amado, -a, (that) I had been loved.
Compound Future.
Hubiere sido amado, -a, (that) I shall have been loved^
Compound Conditional.
Hubiera sido amado, -a, (that) I should have been loved^
Remarks.
1. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language to render
almost always the passive voice by the active form with the-
pronoun se — i.e. reflectively. Thus:
Estas mercancías se venden (literally : these goods seU
themselves), rather than estas mercancías son vendi-
das, these goods are sold.
Fm prometida u/na recompensa, a reward was promised ;.
or reflectively:
JPrometiase una recompensa, they promised a reward^
lit. a reward promised itself^.
* Se with the verb commonly precedes the subject of the^
sentence.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Passiye Voice. 115
In English snch sentences are translated with the words :
people, they, one, etc., or with the passive voice, thus:
Se cree, one believes, they believe, people believe, etc.,
it is believed.
8e asegura, one affirms, they, people, etc., affirm.
2. The construction with se is frequently impersonal,
as in the above sentences, se cree, se asegura, where no accusa-
tive follows the verb. In this case se is used with the sin-
gular of the verb, as in the preceding examples. But whenever
an accusative follows in English, as in the sentence: One
sells (people sell) these goods, the verb, in Spanish, agrees
with its nominative; thus:
Estas mercancías se venden, or se venden (véndense)
estas mercancías.
3. Where the reflective form might seem ambiguous^ as
in the sentence: One loves the children, reflectively: The
children love themselves = Los niños se aman, this mode of
expression should be avoided, and the sentence rendered by
the passive voice, as:
Los niños son amados;
or a convenient nominative may be used with the active verb,
as in English; thus:
Amamos á los niños, we love the children.
Aman á los niños, they love the children.
Uno ama á los niños, one loves children.
N.B,— The same idea may be expressed in the follow-
ing way:
se ama á los niños,
á los niños se les ama.
This is also the case, when the English one, people, etc.,
is nsed with a reflective verb. Thus a mode of speaking like
se se ama, one loves oneself, is quite inadmissible, because
bere the sentence would have no nominative case, but in its
stead a double accusative. Sentences like: One flatters oneself
should, therefore, be rendered :
(Nosotros) nos lisonjeamos, we flatter ourselves, or:
(Vosotros) os lisonjeáis, you flatter yourselves, or:
Los hombres se lisonjean, men flatter themselves, or:
Alguno se lisonjea, somebody flatters himself, or:
7. se lisonjea, you flatter yourself.
4. If in English the object is a personal pronoun, the
subject being one, people, etc., the passive voice should be
prefered in Spanish, as:
One loves him, él es amado;
Digitized by VjOOQIC
116 Lesson 27.
or one of the above nominatives may be chosen, as:
Alguno (V.) la ama, etc., also le aman.
5. Dative cases of the personal pronouns likewise occur
with this reflective form, as:
Se me cree, one believes me, or : I am believed, people
believe me, etc.
Se le quiere, one loves him.
8e me contestó negativamente, I was answered in the
negative.
6. Whenever the subject is omitted, as in sentences oí
a, vague character, such as: "they say," "people will talk,"
"it is whispered about," "it is generally believed," "he is
generally beloved," etc., the 3rd pers. plur. without the per-
sonal pronoun (a nominative like los hombres, people, being
understood) is employed. Ex.: Creen, it is believed; aseguran,
people affirm ; se lisonjean, they flatter themselves ; prometieron
una recompensa, a reward was offered ; le aman, he is liked ;
venden estas mercancías, these goods are being sold; me han
robado, I have been robbed.
N,B,—l\iQ Passive voice, rather than the reflective, is,
however, preferred in narratives and statements, to express
what is considered as an accomplished fact:
Tin niño ha sido atropellado por un coche,
A child has been run over by a carriage.
El herido fué llevado al hospital,
The wounded person was taken to the hospital.
The English by with passive verbs is rendered by por
if the agent is a living being, or considered as such, or in
expressing material actions; and by cíe with verbs of feeling
or emotion, or used figuratively:
Tin hornbre ha sido muerto por otro,
A man has been killed by another.
Era muy querido de todos.
He was most beloved by all.
N,B, — Fué muerto de un balazo, he was killed by
a shot.
Neuter Verbs.
They denote either a state of rest, as dormir, to
sleep, or an intransitive action, such as morir, to die,
llegar, to arrive, caer, to fall, etc. Their use is very
simple, the compound tenses being almost always
formed with the auxiliary haber; thus:
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Passive Voice. 117
Hube llegado y I had arrived.
Ha muerto^ he has died.
He dormido, I have slept, etc.
Words.
Los preliminares y the preli- el compañero, the companion.
la paz y the peace, [minaries. soberbio, -a, proud.
d embustero, the liar, hypo- herido, -a, wounded,
crite, cheat. feroz, ferocious, wild.
la lana, the wool. matar, to kill, slaughter.
d cuerOy the leather. asesinar, to murder.
d asunto, the object, matter, derrotar, to put to flight, to
la memoria, the report, the rout (an army).
memoir, memory. asegurar, to assure.
d dueño, \ ., . firmar, to sign,
ei amoy f ' quejarse, to complam.
la felicidad, the happiness. pedir, to ask, to demand.
d volumen^ the volume, cir- ser muy solicitado, to be in
cumference, extent. (great) demand.
d nombre, the name. encumbrar, to raise.
d apuro, the want, necessity, buscar, to seek.
la fortuna, the fortune. acabar, to finish, to terminate.
d poder, the power, might. corregir, to correct, to mend.
el ladrón, the thief, robber. invitar, to invite.
el imperiOy the empire. maltratary to ill-treat.
d viajerOy the traveller. concluir, to conclude.
sostener, to maintain, to sustain.
mucho tiempo ha, it is a good while.
Beading Exercise. 44.
Dicen que los alemanes (Germans) han sido derrotados
por los rusos (Bussians). Aseguran que se han firmado los
preliminares de la paz. Se quejan de V. Somos amados de
todos nuestros amigos. El embustero es aborrecido. La lana
de España es muy solicitada. Los cueros son muy buscados.
Gustavo Adolfo, rey de Suecia (Sweden), fué muerto en la
batalla de Lützen. El militar que ha sido herido por un
paisano*' (civilian), ha muerto esta noche. Cuando nuestras
traducciones se acaben, serán corregidas por el maestro. Fui
invitado por el ministro á escribir una memoria sobre ese
asunto. ¿Han llegado esos señores de Madrid? Este perro
es muy maltratado por su dueño. La operación fué concluida
con toda felicidad. El libro que he dado á mi prima está
escrito (written) por un hombre muy docto (learned). El
imperio de los Césares se ha sostenido mucho tiempo sólo por
8u extensión y su nombre. Si su padre no hubiera muerto,
no se vería (he would not see [find] himself) en tanto apuro.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
118 Lesson 27.
El soberbio y feroz Atila fué vencido por los francos y los
godos. Julio César, encumbrado por la fortuna al más alto
grado del poder, fué asesinado por Bruto y sus compañeros.
Traducción. 45.
Wallenstein was murdered by two of his officers. The
hypocrite is despised by all, and is loved by none. Leather
and wool were much in demand. By whom has the letter
been signed ? We were invited a long time ago, but we had
no time to come. The traveller and his companions were
murdered by the robbers. (The) king Gustavus Adolphus of
Sweden was killed at Liitzen. They say that a 'great many
(muchos) soldiers have been wounded in the battle. Do they
think (believe) that the preliminaries of (the) peace have been
signed? They assure that these goods are selling well. One
is mistaken, if one flatters oneself. My father (has) said
that all the goods have been sold {tr, have sold themselves).
When did the gentleman arrive? The friends of the mer-
chant had all been invited. By whom have the Goths been
conquered? This book has been written by one of the first
Spanish poets. Frequently one does not believe what one
affirms (before) to others. The pupils would have been praised
by their masters if they had done their translations without
any mistakes (falta).
Conversación.
¿Por quién fué asesinado Julio Por Bruto y sus compañeros.
César?
¿Ha llegado ayer su amigo No, ha llegado hoy.
de V.?
¿ Cuándo ha muerto ? Ha muerto ayer ; fué muerto
por otro en una riña (in a
quarrel),
¿Por quiénes fué vencido Atila? El soberbio y feroz Atila fué
vencido por los francos y los
godos.
¿Cómo se concluyó la ope- Fué concluida con toda feli-
ración? cidad.
¿Por quién está escrito ese Está escrito por un hombre
libro? muy docto.
¿Cuándo murió Gustavo Fué muerto en la batalla de
Adolfo? Lützen.
¿ Ha muerto el militar que ha No ha muerto ; al contrario,
sido herido? está mejor hoy que ayer.
¿Por quién serán corregidas Serán corregidas por nuestro
nuestras traducciones? maestro.
¿ Quién es aborrecido ? El embustero es aborrecido de
todo el mundo.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 119
¿Cuándo se ha celebrado (taken Se ha celebrado hoj.
place) la boda (the wedding)^
¿Qaé se dice de nuevo en la Dicen que Su Majestad el em-
ciadad? perador ha llegado.
Beading Exercise.
Geografía de España. (Continuación.)
Gobierno.
El gobierno de España es monárquico, constitucional,
hereditario; el heredero del trono tiene el titulo de Principe
de Asturias. El poder legislativo reside en las Cortes, com-
puestas del Congreso de Diputados y del Senado; el poder
ejecutivo reside en el Rey y en el Ministerio, compuesto de
un Presidente del Consejo de Ministros y ocho ministros que
son, el ministro de Estado, el ministro de Gracia y Justicia,
el ministro de Hacienda, el ministro de la Gobernación, el
ministro de Instrucción Pública, el ministro de Agricultura,
el ministro de la Guerra y el ministro de Marina. España
está dividida en cuarenta y nueve provincias y tie^e por
capital Madrid. — El gobierno local de cada provincia depende
de un Gobernador y de la Diputación Provincial; el gobierno
local de cada término municipal depende de un Alcalde y del
Ayuntamiento ó Municipio. Del gobernador dependen los
guardias civiles y los polizontes, del Alcalde dependen los
municipales.
La Administración de Justicia tiene en cada término
municipal un juez municipal para las faltas menores, y en
cada provincia varios partidos judiciales con jueces de primera
instancia para las causas civiles y criminales; cierto número
de partidos judiciales forman una Audiencia Territorial con
sus Magistrados, y en Madrid reside el Tribunal Supremo,
para la tercera y última apelación.
Twenty-eighth Lesson. — Lección veinti-
ocho.
Pronominal or Beflective Verbs. — Verbos pro-
nominales ó reflexivos.
These verbs are called pronominal or reflective,
because their object is a personal pronoun, referring to
and identical T\dth the subject. In the simple tenses this
pronoun, with very few exceptions, may either precede
or follow the verb. In the latter case it is subjoined
to the verb.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
120 Lesson 28.
Reflective verbs are very frequent in Spanish, a
great many of them being rendered in English by
neuter verbs — that is to say, by a verb without a direct
object. Example :
Me alegro (or alegróme), I rejoice.
Infinitive.
Alegrarse, to rejoice.
Indicative.
Present.
Sing. Me alegro (alegróme), I rejoice.
te alegras (alegraste), thou rejoicest.
se alegra (alégrale), he rejoices.
Plur. Nos alegramos (alegrámosnos), we rejoice.
OS alegráis, you rejoice.
se alegran (aUgranse), they rejoice.
Imperfect.
Sing. Me alegraba (alegrábame), I rejoiced.
te alegrabas (alegrábaste), thou rejoicedst.
se alegraba (alegrábase), he rejoiced.
Plur. Nos alegrábamos (alegrábamosnos), we rejoiced.
OS alegrabais, you rejoiced.
se alegraban (alegrábanse), they rejoiced.
Definite.
Sing. Me alegré (alégreme), I rejoiced.
te alegraste, thou rejoicedst.
se alegró (alegróse), he rejoiced.
Plur. Nos alegramos (alegrámosnos), we rejoiced.
OS alegrasteis, you rejoiced.
se alegraron (alegráronse), they rejoiced.
Future.
Me alegraré, I shall rejoice.
te alegrarás, thou wilt rejoice.
se alegrará, he will rejoice, etc.
Conditional.
Me alegraría, I thould rejoice.
te alegrarías, ihou wouldst rejoice, etc.
Imperative.
Alégrate, rejoice (thou)!
alegraos, rejoice (you plur.)l
alegrémonos, let us rejoice ! (See Less. 24, page 101.)
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 121
Polite form:
Sing, alégrese F., rejoice (you)!
Plur. alégrense Vds., rejoice (you) I
Subjunctive.
Present.
Me alegre, T rejoice.
te alegres, thou rejoice, etc.
Imperfect.
Me alegrase, I might rejoice.
te alegrases, thou mightest rejoice, etc.
Future.
Me alegrare, (that) I shall rejoice, etc.
Conditional.
Me alegrara^ (that) I should rejoice.
Gerund.
Alegrándose, rejoicing.
Compound Tenses.
Indicative.
Perfect.
Me he alegrado, I have rejoiced.
te has alegrado, thou hast rejoiced, etc.
Pluperfect.
Me haUa alegrado, I had rejoiced, etc.
2nd Pluperfect.
Me hube alegrado, I had rejoiced, etc.
Compound Future,
Me habré alegrado, I shall have rejoiced, etc.
Compound Conditional.
Me habria alegrado, I should have rejoiced, etc.
Subjunctive.
Perfect.
Me haga alegrado, I have rejoiced, etc.
Pluperfect.
Me hubiese alegrado, (that) I had rejoiced, etc.
Compound Future.
Me hubiere alegrado, (that) I shall have rejoiced.
Compound Conditional.
Me hubiera alegrado, (that) I should have rejoiced.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
122 Lesson 28.
Notes.
1. Very often the Spanish reflective form of the ver"b
implies separation or isolation. Thus: estar is "to be," estarse^
**to be alone"; ir "to go," irse, "to go away."*
2. Likewise, verbs denoting a state of transition are
very frequently rendered by the Spanish reflective verb.
Thus: dormir J to sleep, dormirse, to fall asleep; morir y to die,
morirse, to die away (French: "se mourir"); ahogarse, to be
drowned; quemarse^ to be burned down, etc.
3. Again, the Spanish reflective form is either redundant
or modifies the meaning of the verb in a way which, in Eng-
lish, must be rendered by an adverb or in some other mode ;
thus:
beber, to drink, beberse, to drink (out).
comer, to eat, comerse, to eat up.
jugar, to gamble, jugarse, to gamble away.
Sometimes the meaning of the verb is rendered more
emphatic by the reflective form. Thus:
Estarse sin hacer nada, to be doing nothing.
Pasarse el dia leyendo, to read the whole day.
4. At others the reflective form is used in conjunxition
with the article to translate the English possessive:
Quemarse la mano, to burn one's hand.
Cortarse un dedo, to cut one's finger.
5. Finally, in the plural, the Spanish reflective verb
expresses reciprocity; thas: se aman means "they love them-
selves" and also "they love each other," or "one another."
Where a misconception might arise, the word mismx), -a, should
be added to correspond with "self," and el uno al otro, etc.;
for "one another, each other," etc.
N,B, — In English a great many verbs are neuter or
passive, which in Spanish require the reflective form. Such
verbs are:
llamarse, to be called or named (French: s^appeler).
enojarse, to grow angry.
levantarse, to rise.
acostarse, to go to bed.
pasearse, to take a walk.
sentarse, to sit down, to take a seat.
* In narratives, the Imperfect of ser, to be, used reflectively,
corresponds with the English there was in days of yore, there
was in olden times, etc. Ex.: Érase un rey, etc. There was in
olden times a king, etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 123
Words.
La orden, the order. incomodarse^ to take pains, to
la razón^ the reason. trouble oneself.
la marcha^ the march. ordenar, to order.
c26oísiíío, the pocket, the purse, retirar, to draw (or go) back,
d jefe, the chief. retire.
la mesa, the table. divertirse, to amuse oneself.
hs naipes, the cards. apartarse, to stand away, to
k bondad, the goodness. keep back.
d camino real (or la carre- acomodarse, to conform one-
cerá), the main-road. self to ... .
el juego, the game (French yeíí). sacar, to take out ....
engañarse, to be mistaken. saber, to know.
jugar (á los naipes or á las dio (3rd sing, def.), gave.
cartas), to play (cards). mui/ de mañana, very early
St juega, one plays, they play, (early in the morning),
etc. á orillas, at the side, brink,
sentarse, to sit down. border, edge, etc.
luego que, as soon as.
Beading Exercise. 46.
V. se engaña. Los hombres se han engañado siempre
unos á otros. Unas veces se juega á los naipes y otras
veces se habla sobre alguna cosa. ¡Tenga V. la bondad de
sentarse ! No se incomode V. ¿ Se ha divertido mucho V. ayer
en el baile (ball, dance)? Me alegro mucho que se haya di-
vertido V. tanto (so well). V. se ha acostado tarde, pero yo
me he levantado muy de mañana. Dióse la orden y todos se
dispusieron (pr^ared themselves) á retirarse. Se ordenó á los
soldados que se apartasen del camino real. Sentéme al pié
de un árbol que estaba á orillas del camino, y para diver-
tirme saqué (see Lesson 22, 1) un libro que tenia en el bolsillo.
Si no se acomodare V. á la vida que hago (I lead), será
dueño (to be at liberty) de retirarse. Sábete que no te he
traído (brought) aquí para que (that) te mueras de hambre.
Luego que nos levantamos (Def,) de la mesa, el criado me
dio la carta.
Tradnceión. 47.
My mother was (transí, has been) mistaken, when she
gave (tr. dando . . . giving . . .) you the letter. If I had been
mistaken, I should have told (you so) it you. Get up, child !
Rise, sir! I gave myself much trouble to pull the book out
of my pocket. We did not deviate from the main-road. Leave
(from apartarse de . , ,) this society ! Shall we sit down at
the foot of that tree? We should draw back if the chief
(gave the order) ordered it. Did they not state (tr, was not
given [fr. darse]) the reason of this order? Do they play at
Digitized by VaOOQlC
124 Lesson 28.
cards (fr. jugarse) every night at your cousin's?* Cards are
seldom played (¿.e., they seldom play) there, but they (talk
about) speak of (a great) many things. Do not trouble (your-
self), sir, I have already {ya, prec.) taken [a] seat (fr. sentarse).
Yesterday I rose at 4 o'clock, and to-morrow I shall likewise
(tambiérí) rise at 4 o'clock. Are you not afraid to abuse
(abusar de , , ,) my goodness? I was alone (see 1) in my
room when the footman gave me the letter. There was once
a king who had a daughter. Alas (¡Ay demi!)\ the unhappy
man will be drowned! We love ourselves and we love one
another. How can you laugh at (de) ih^ misfortune of others?
Conversaeión.
¿Se ha engañado V.? Perdone V., no me he engañado.
¿Á qué hora se levanta V. Me levanto á las cinco ó seis
cada día? de la mañana.
¿ Cuándo se acuesta** V. (go Me acuesto tarde (late) y á las
to bed) ? diez ú*** once, y me levanto
temprano (early).
¿Quiere V. pasearse conmigo? Gracias, no tengo tiempo
ahora.
¿ No se ha divertido V. ayer Al contrarío, me he divertido
en el teatro? muchísimo.
¿ Que se ordenó á los sóida- Se les ordenó que se apartasen
dos? del camino real.
¿ Cuándo le dio á V. la carta Luego que nos levantamos de
el criado? la mesa.
¿Dónde se sentó V.? Me senté al pié de un árbol.
¿ Por qué no juega V. á los Porque no me gusta (I da
naipes? not like) el juego (playing
[cards]).
Reading Exercise.
Soneto.
Los padres y los hijos.
Un enjambre de pájaros metidos
en jaula de metal guardó un cabrero,
y á cuidarlos voló desde el otero
la pareja de padres afligidos.
Si aquí, dijo el pastor, vienen unidos
sus hijos á cuidar con tanto esmero,
ver como cuidan á los padres quiero,
los hijos por amor y agradecidos.
* En casa de su primo. The English phrase with the Saxon
genitive: at my brother's, cousin's, butcher's, tailor's, etc., should
be rendered with en casa de, at the house of
** See Lesson 36. — *** See Lesson 33, 2.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Impersonal Yerbe. 125
Deja entra redes la pareja envuelta,
la puerta abre el pastor del dnro alambre,
cierra á los padres y á los hijos suelta.
Huyó de los hijuelos el enjambre,
y como en vano se esperó su vuelta,
mató á los padres el dolor y el hambre.
(Campoamor.)
Twenty-ninth Lesson. — Lección veinti-
nueve.
Impersonal Verbs. — Verbos unipersonales.
1. These verbs are either really impersonal, i.e.,
they are only used iu the third person singular, as
Uueve — - it rains, or they are used as impersonal verbs,
as parece, it seems, etc.
True impersonal verbs are:
Llover, to rain — llueve^ it rains.
helar, to freeze — Mela, it freezes.
nevar, to snow — nieva, it snows.
tronar, to thunder — truena, it thunders.
escarchar, to be a hoar frost — escarcha, it is a hoar frost.
relampaguear, to lighten — relampaguea, it lightens.
llovizfMr, to drizzle — llovizna, it drizzles.
granizar, to hail — graniza, it hails.
amanecer*, to dawn, to grow — - amanece, it dawns.
Ught
anochecer, to grow dark — awocAcce, it is growing dark.
2. Many others are coupled with hacer, to make,
ser, to be, haber, to have, valer, to be worth, etc., as:
Es preciso, it is necessary, one must (see 4).
es justo, it is just.
es verdad, it is true.
es cierto, it is certain, sure.
hace calor, it is hot (il fait chaud).
hace frió, it is cold (il fait froid).
hace luna, the moon shines.
ocho dias hace, it is a week ago.
mucho tiempo hace, it is a long while.
hay un año, it is a year ago.
* Amanecer and anochecer are also personally used as:
Amanecí en Paris, I arrived in Paris at daybreak.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
126 Lesson 29.
hay muchos hombres^ there are many persons.
más vale tarde qus nunca, better late than never.
más valdría, it would be better.
3. As already stated (Lesson 8, 5), there is, plur.
there are^ is rendered by hay. In all the tenses of this
impersonal verb, the 3rd pers. sing, of haber is used,
whether followed by a singular or by a plural, as;
Huho tin hombre, there was a man. (II y avait un
homme.)
Hubo hombres, there were men. (II y avait des
hommes,)
(When speaking of time, hay is almost always replaced
by hdce, which corresponds with ago; thus : hace dos años^
two years ago.)
If some, or any, joined to "there is" or "there are",
refers to a foregoing substantive (where the French use
en, and the Italians ne), the Spanish language requires
the personal pronoun, which then agrees with the preced-
ing substantive in gender and number. Thus:
If there are cowards, he is one.
Es cobarde si los hay,
I shall give you some books, if there be any.
Te daré libros, si los hay.
We shall eat cherries, if there be any.
Comeremos guindas, si las hay,
4. The English verbs must, to be obliged, etc., are
commonly rendered by deber, as:
Se debe escribir, one must write.
Very often their meaning is expressed by haber
de , . ., tener que , . . (see Lesson 8, 6) or es precisOy
es necesario, es menester with que and the subjunctive
mood, thus:
You must expect my brother.
Se ha de esperar á mi hermano, or:
Se tiene que esperar á mi hermano, or:
Es preciso (menester, necesario) esperar (or que se
espere) á mi hermano (= It is necessary to , , .).
If the nominative is the indefinite pronoun one,
as: One must wait, etc., the infinitive is used, as in
English; thus:
Es menester esperar, one must wait.
Digitized
by Google
Impersonal Verbs. 127
Words,
El remedio y the remedy. la tronadüy the thunderstorm.
la puerta^ the door*. callar y to be silent.
ti nombre, the name. aprender ^ to learn.
d color, the heat. creer, to believe.
tl cuarto, the room. enseñar, to teach.
to ciencia, the science. adivinar, to guess,
c/ almacén, the shop. demasiado, too, too much.
pronto, quick, swift, prompt.
Reading Exercise. 48.
¿Llueve? No, graniza. Hace an mes que estuve en su
casa. No hay otro remedio que esperar. Jamás hubo rey
tan bueno como él. ¿Hay alguno á la puerta? Más vale el
buen nomhre que muchas riquezas. Más vale callar que hablar
mal. Hace demasiado calor en su cuarto de V. Este pobre
muchacho tiene hambre y frío. Es preciso estudiar mucho
para aprender hien una lengua. Te daré dinero, si lo hay.
Hay hombres que creen que había una ciencia que enseñaba
á adivinar lo futuro. Hacía buen tiempo ayer cuando llegó
mi hermano. Ha helado hoy, y ayer ha escarchado. Hace
un año que no he visto á mi hermana. Ocho días hace que
estuvimos en Viena. ¿Qué debemos hacer? Debemos ir al
mercado para comprar pan y frutas. Es preciso que la criada
me llame temprano. Ha de venir V. pronto para ir al al-
macén.
Tradnceión. 49.
Did it rain yesterday? No, it snowed. I think (creo)
(that) it will snow. It thunders and lightens. It has
thundered and lightened. Does it rain? No, it does not
rain, it drizzles. 1 arrived at night (anochecer) at Madrid.
It was daybreak when we arrived (amanecer) at Toledo.
There are many friends who are no {tr, not) better than
enemies. Was there much money in that purse? I think
there were 10 dollars in it. It is too hot {tr. warm) to-day ;
we shall have a thunderstorm. It is too cold in this room.
I should give you some money, if I had some (any). He has
given him no money, because he had none. I mast write a
few letters to-day; yesterday I was obliged to write six. It
is necessary to work if one wishes to learn something. My
brother must wait till (hasta que) my sister comes. Where
were you last year? A year ago I was at Seville, and two
years ago I was at Rome. Is it true (verdad) that you have
written this letter? I have written it a long time ago.
* el puerto, the harbour; French: le port
Digitized by VjOOQIC
128 Lesson 29.
Conversación.
¿Hace frío hoy? Al contrario, hace mucho calor.
¿Tiene V. hambre? No tengo hambre, pero ten^o
sed.
¿Es verdad que su hermano No ha llegado esta mañana;
de V. ha llegado esta ma- llegará esta noche.
ñaña?
¿Es cierto que el rey ha Todavía no (wo¿ ye() ha muerto,
muerto? pero está malísimo.
¿Hay alguno en este cuarto? No, no hay ninguno.
¿ Cuánto tiempo hace que es- Dos años hace que estuve allí.
tuvo V. en París?
¿Es preciso que espere yo á No es menester esperarle.
su padre de V.?
¿Debe V. ir al mercado? Debo ir allá.
¿ Es verdad que ha comprado No, señor, no es verdad, no
V. algunos libros? he comprado nada.
¿Cuántos años hace que está Hace tres años y algunos meses.
V. en esta ciudad?
Beading Exercise.
Geografía de España. (Continuación.)
Instrucción Pública.
La Instrucción Pública se dá en España en las Escuelas
Públicas (ó en las escuelas y colegios particulares), en las
Escuelas Normales, en los Institutos, y en las Universidades.
Las Escuelas Públicas están sostenidas por los Ayuntamientos,
los Institutos por las Diputaciones Provinciales, y las Univer-
sidades por el Estado. En las Escuelas Públicas se dá la
enseñanza elemental, en las Escuelas Normales la enseñanza
superior, ó sea la preparación para maestros y maestras; en
los Institutos se estudia la segunda enseñanza, que termina con
el grado de bachiller, y en las Universidades se estudia fa-
cultad, que termina con el grado de Licenciado : los Institutos
y las Universidades están abiertos á las mujeres. En los
colegios particulares se dá también la segunda enseñanza. El
curso académico empieza el prímero de octubre y termina el
31 de mayo. En España hay diez Universidades (Barcelona,
Granada, Madrid, Oviedo, Salamanca, Santiago, Sevilla, Valencia,
Valladolid y Zaragoza) y 59 Institutos, de los cuales hay uno
en cada capital de Provincia. — La enseñanza primaría es
obligatoria y gratuita, pero á pesar de eso solo un 30 por
100 de la población sabe leer y escríbir.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Adverbs. 129
Thirtieth Lesson. — Lección treinta.
Adyerbs. — Adverbios.
Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.
They denote manner, time, place, motiony order, quantity,
Q^ity^ etc.
They are either proper adverbs (see next Lesson),
as bien, ^well; demasiado, too, too much, etc., or formed
from adjectives or participles by the addition of the
termination -mente, under the following Rules.
Rules.
1 . If the adjective ends in -o, the adverb is formed
by adding -mente to the feminine form in -a, thus:
docto, learned, fern, docta, adv. doctamente,
diestro, dexteroas, » diestra, » diestramente.
2. If the adjective does not end in -o, -mente is
simply added to the termination, thus:
fácil, easy, adv. fácilmente.
constante, constant, » constantemente.
Note.— A. peculiarity of the Spanish language is that
when several adverbs ending in -mente follow each other, this
termination is, for the sake of euphony, added to the last
only. Thus :
Cicerón escribió clara, concisa y elegantemente.
Cicero wrote distinctly, concisely, and elegantly.
(Instead of: claramente, concisamente y elegantemente,)
An adverb in -mente, not derived from an adjective end-
ing in -0, may not come between adverbs derived from
adjectives in -o, but should, for the sake of euphony, be
placed at the end. Thus the sentence:
Cicero wrote learnedly, elegantly, concisely, and distinctly,
may not be translated:
Cicerón escribió docta, elegantemente, concisa y claramente,
but only:
Cicerón escribió docta, concisa, clara y elegantemente,'^
* Likewise, if two or more adverbs in -mente, not derived
from adjectives in -o, follow each other, the termination -mente
of all the adverbs, except the last, may be dropped: thus, instead
of prudentemente y lealfnente we may also say prudente y
lealmente (prudently and loyally).
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 9
Digitized by VaOOQlC
130 Lesson 30.
3. The Spanish adverb in general takes its place
after the verb; thus:
El discípulo estudia siempre su lección.
The pupil always studies his lesson.
In compound tenses the adverb cannot be placed
between the verb and the auxiliary, as in English, but
it must always follow the past participle, thus:
El discípulo ha estudiado siempre su lección.
The pupil has always studied his lesson.
N.B. — Adverbs of negation are excepted:
El discípulo no estudia, (See page 136, § 5.)
4. Adverbs form their comparative like adjectives
(see Lesson 20), as:
Oompar.
Doctamente^ más doctamente que,
míenos doctamente que,
tan doctamente como.
The superlative^ used to express comparison, does
not dififer in form from the comparative, and thus has
no article; it can always be gathered from the context,,
whether the comparative or superlative of the adverb
is to be put in English; e.g.:
Manuelito lee el francés peor que su hermana.
The little Emanuel reads French worse than his sister.
But: De todos los discípulos tú eres el que te portaste peor.
Of all the pupils, you are the one who behaved the worst.
Adverbs are also derived from the absolute superl.
of the adjectives, by changing isimo in isimamente, as:
Doctísimo, adv. doctisimamente, in a very learned manner.
(We need not add that here also the termination -mente
is affixed to the feminine form in a.)
5. Irregular are:
Men, well, mejor, better, lo mejor, the best.
maly badly, peor, worse, lo peor, the worst.
mucho, very, más, more, lo más, the most.
poco, little, menos, less, lo menos, the least.
Absolute Sup. of mal, pésimamente.
The following are both adjectives and adverbs:
Bastante, enough, but also adv. bastantemente;
cierto, certain, » » » ciertamente, certainly;
demasiado, too, too much, etc., but also adv. demasiadamente;
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Adverbs. 151
derecJw, right, but also adv. derechamente, rightly;
solo*, alone, > » » solamente, only, solely;
temprano, early » » » tempranamente.
The signification of the following adverbs differs
from that of the corresponding adjectives :
ÁUo, high, aloud — altamente, magnificently, proudly.
Inyo, low, in a low voice — bajamente, basely, vilely.
(o,ro, dear, beloved — caramente, dearly.
primero, first, before — primeramente, firstly. [promptly.
pronto, direct, forthwith — prontamente, (also = pronto),
Words.
El orador, the orator. digno, -a, worthy.
ei verano, the summer. ancho, -a, broad, large.
d embajador, the ambassador, estrecho, -a, narrow.
d actor, the actor. constante, constant.
d deseo, the desire. generoso, -a, generous.
d gozo, the pleasure. raro, -a, rare, seldom.
d lugar, the village. perdonar, to pardon.
ia raisón, the reason. levantarse, to get up.
tener razón**, to be right. ver (irr.), to see.
CÍ consejo, the advice. llenar, to fill.
ifl voZww^ae?, the will. siga, subj. pres. of seguir, to
¿Í honradez, the honesty, de- follow.
^ o6ra, the work. [cency. vestir, to clothe, to dress.
d inventor, the inventor. conservar, to preserve.
ia lota, the boot. tratar, to treat.
i?ydici«io, -a, near, next. continuar, to continue.
propio, -a, proper. incomodar, to molest, incom-
capaz, capable. venir bien, to fit. [mode.
Beading Exercise. 50.
Este hombre habla muy elocuentemente. Éabla mejor
que el otro orador. Me ha dado V. demasiado dinero. Yo
no tengo bastante. En verano me levanto cada dia temprano.
El actor no habla bastante alto. ¡ Hable V. bajo ! El autor
ha escrito clara, concisa y elegantemente. El deseo de ver
la ciudad y principalmente el palacio real (royal —) me llenó
de gozo.. Los lugares próximos á una gran ciudad venden
bien sus frutos. La razón quiere que el hombre siga más los
prudentes consejos que no (than) su propia voluntad. El rey
dio órdenes para vestir ricamente á los pobres. La honradez
* solo, alone (adjective) without accent, sólo, only (adverb)
with accent.
** Tener razón, French: Avoir raison.
9*
Digitized
by Google
182 Lesson 80.
se conserva tratando siempre derechamente con los hombres.
Cervantes hizo ver (showed, proved; lit. made see) que nin-
guna pluma era capaz de continuar dignamente su obra,
sino la de su inventor. Este vestido me incomoda mucho;
no es bastante ancho. Las botas me son demasiado estrechas ;
no me vienen bien. Cuando uno quiere hablar de una obra,
es menester que la vea primero.
Tradnoción. 51.
This author writes well. The orator has spoken distinctly,
concisely, and elegantly. He has sent me too much money.
He writes too much; if he wrote less he would write more
elegantly and more distinctly. This actor speaks too low.
Do speak loud, sir! I rose (have risen) very earlj to-day.
He has certainly done it. The lawyer spoke very learnedly,
but not distinctly enough. Your coat is better made than
mine; it fits you very well. I gave (have given) money
enough to my son. Why have you followed your own will
more than (qvs no) the wise advice of your friends? The am-
bassadors were all very richly dressed. I always learn my
lesson, and I have always learned it well. He spoke of a
work which he had never seen before. Nobody is always
happy in this world. The king has generously pardoned his
enemies. Which man has always spoken well? We (have)
arrived to-day very early. (The) rich people are seldom happy.
Conversación.
¿Cómo ha hablado este hom- Ha hablado elocuentisima-
bre ? mente.
¿ Cómo escribió Cicerón ? Cicerón escribió concisa, clara
y elegantemente.
¿Ha estudiado V. la lección? He estudiado siempre mi8
lecciones.
¿Quién es siempre feliz en Nadie.
este mundo?
¿Ha dado V. bastante dinero Le he dado demasiado.
á su hijo?
¿Que quiere la razón? Que el hombre siga los pru-
dentes consejos.
¿Cómo su conserva la hon- Tratando siempre derecha-
radez? mente con los otros.
¿ Qué hizo ver Cervantes ? Que otra pluma no era capaz
de continuar dignamente su
obra.
¿ Por qué le incomoda á V. Porque no es bastante ancho.
su vestido?
¿No le vienen bien á V. sus No, son demasiado estrechas.
botas ?
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Adverbe continued. 138
Readbiir Exercise*
Soneto.
Las Hijos y los Padres.
Ni arrastrada nn pastor llevar podía
Á una cabra infeliz que ola amante
Balar detrás al hijo, que, inconstante
Marchar junto á la madre no quería.
— ¡Necio! — al pastor un sabio le decía,
-7- Al qne llevas detrás, ponle delante;
Échate el hijo al hombro, y al instante
La madre verás ir tras de la cria. —
Tal consejo el pastor creyó sencillo,
C!ogió la cría y se marchó corriendo
Llevando al animal sobre el hatillo.
La cabra sin ramal los fué siguiendo,
Mas siguiendo tan cerca al cabrítillo,
Que los pies por detrás le iba lamiendo.
[Campoamor.]
Thirty-first Lesson. — Lección treinta
y nna.
The Ádyerbs eontinued.
In the foregoing Lesson we observed that besides
the adverbs derived from adjectives or participles by
addition of the termination -mente, there are* a great
many proper adverbs denoting place, time, order, manner,
etc. Thus we have 1. Adverbs of place. 2. Adverbs of
time. 3. Adverbs of manner. 4. Adverbs of quantity.
5. Adverbs of affirmation, negation, and doubt.
There are also adverbial expressions— i.e., compounds
of substantives, adjectives, etc., with prepositions, as:
por fuerza, on compulsion, en poco tiempo, soon, etc.
1. Adverbs of Place.
Aqui, here. arriba, up, above.
ahi, there. cerca, near, about.
áttá, there f= thither). abajo, down, below.
acá, here (= hither). debajo, beneath.
donde, where. enfrente, opposite.
5^, }•""■»• fc,}-»^-
de donde, whence. dela/nte, in front.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
134 Lesson 31.
adelantty forward, on. encimay upon, on.
detrás, behind. lejos, far.
atrás, backward, behind. dentro, within, inside.
junto, near, next to . . . adentro, towards the interior.
^.^.— Adverbs of place answer the question ¿dártele?
where?
Aqui, alii, are used with verbs of rest; acá, allá, with
verbs of motion; ahí, with either.
Aqui, acá, refer to the place where the, speaker is;
ahi, to the place where the person addressed is;
alii, allá, to any other place more or less distant from
both.
2. Adverbs of Time.
Cuando, when. aún, yet.
ayer, yesterday. á menudo, often.
hoy, to-day. entonces, then, afterwards.
mañana, to-morrow. después, after.
luego, directly, immediately. ya, already.
tarde, late. pues, then, afterwards.
temprano, early. todama, still.
siempre, always. aprisa, quickly.
despacio, slowly. ahora, now.
^. ] "«'^'y
Ínterin, meanwhile.
-A^.^.— Adverbs of time answer the question ¿cuantió?
when?
Cuando is followed by the Indicative in speaking of
customary actions or positive facts, and by the Subjunctive
if denoting possibility, contingency, or futurity:
Cuando voy á paseo voy solo.
Whenever I go for a walk, I go alone.
Cuando venga se lo diré,
I will tell him when he comes.
The adverb recientemente, recently, drop3 its last three
syllables before participles and adjectives used instead of par-
ticiples, as:
Un niño recién (^= recientemente) nacido,
A new-born child.
Los recién llegados.
The new comers.
Se embarcaron con cuatro personas de las recién libres
(= libradas), Cerv,
They embarked with four persons of the recently rescued
(from among those who had been recently rescued).
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Adverbs continued. 135
8. Adrerbs of Manner.
Como, how. redo (reciamente), violently,
lien, vrell. severely.
mcU, badly. aparte, separately.
asiy so, thus. quedo, quietly.
alto, aloud. medianamente, middling, tole-
%*o, low, softly, gently. casi, almost, nearly, [rably.
^.-B.~ Adverbs of manner answer the question ¿eómo?
Aow?
Adverbs in -nviewte (Lesson 30) belong to this class, as:
dulcemente, sweetly; lealmente, loyally.
The same meaning may be expressed in the two following
ways :
CJon dulzn/ra, or de un modo (de una manera)
dulce, in a sweet manner.
é. Adverbs of Quantity.
Cuanto, how much. demasiado, too, too much.
mucho, much. además, besides.
muy, very, much. tan, tanto, so much.
más, more. cuan, cuanto, how much.
bastante, enough. harto, enough.
poco, little. apenas, scarcely.
^.^.— Adverbs of quantity answer the question ¿ci^íínfo.^
how much?
3Iucho means great in quantity, price, also long in
duration, and is equivalent to much, very much, too much;
a great deal; long, a long time. It is used before m^ds (more),
and menos (less), antes (before), and después (after), with
comparatives, and with active verbs, and substantives. Finally,
it may stand by itself; Le.:
mucho más (míenos), much more (less).
mucho mejor (peor), much better (worse).
mucho antes (después), much before (after).
¿ Cornee mucho ? — Mucho. Does he eat much ? —
Very much.
Muy is an abbreviation of mucho, it means high degree,
and is generally translated by very, great. It is used before
adjectives^ participles, and adverbs; as an exception be-
fore the comparatives anterior (earlier), posterior (later),
superior (superior), and inferior (inferior); with ser and
estar and their equivalents, and before almost all adverbial
phrases. Finally, it never stands by itself:
muy grande (pequeño), very large (small).
muy ainado (aborrecido), very much loved (hated).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
136 Lesson 31.
muy temprano (tarde), 'very early (late).
muy anterior (posterior), much earlier O^ter).
es muy hueno, he is very good.
está muy contento, he is very pleased.
muy de tarde en tarde, very seldom.
¿ Está enfermo ? — y mucho (not muy). — Is he ill ?
Very ill indeed.
Tan and tanto follow the same rules as mu^ and
mucho, thus:
Le he estimado tanto, I have esteemed him so much!
Whereas :
Él es tan estimado como . . ., he is no less esteemed
than . . . (lit, qaite as much as . . . .).
5. Adverbs of Áíñrmation, Negation^ and Doubt.
Si, yes. quizá, \
siempre, always. quizás, I ^^Vi&m
cierto (ciertamente), certainly, tal vez, ( ^ '^ '
no, no. acaso, )
nunca, never. ya no, \ ^^ ^^^^
# / no more.
jamás, ever, never. no , , , ya, f
nunca jamás * never.
^.jB.— The negative terms nunca, jamás, nada (nothing),
ninguno, and nadie (nobody) require no, if they follow the
verb, but not if they precede it, as:
Ko hay ninguno, there is none; but: Ninguno hay»
JVb se dice nada, nothing is said; but: Nada se dice.
No lo crei jamás, I never believed it; hnt: jamás lo eré.
With ni — ni (neither — nor) the case is much the same:
No tengo ni amigos ni dinero,
I have neither friends nor money.
Ni amigos, ni dinero tengo.
Sometimes, however, the first ni may be omitted, as:
No es bueno ni malo.
He is neither good nor bad.
6* Adverbial Expressions.
Por fuerza, on compulsion. por delante, in front.
por extenso, in detail, amply, sin falta, surely, assuredly.
fully. por desgracia, unfortunately.
por la mañana, in the mom- á pierna suelta, carelessly.
ing. en voz alta, aloud.
* Most emphatic.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Adverbs continued. 187
en poco tiempo, soon, in a short cuanto antes, as soon as possible.
time. de buena gana, willingly.
sobremanera, immensely, im- cUpié de la letra, literally, etc.
moderately. ahora mismo, at once, ihis
de repente, suddenly. very moment.
de día, in daytime. á veces, sometimes.
de día en día, daily. á la derecha, on (to) the right.
de tarde en tarde, now and á menudo, often.
then, seldom. á oscuras, in the dark.
Words.
La gloria, the glory. aborrecer, to abhor, to detest.
d subdito, the subject. atreverse, to dare.
d temor, the fear. venir á las manos, to come to
d correo, the post. blows.
d trabajo, the labour, work. arncs^ar,tobeatstake,torisk.
lo8 víveres, the victuals. dudar de, to doubt about.
campestre, rural. vino, he (she, it) came (Fr. venir).
o^raííecwío, -a, thankful, grate- lograr, to obtain, to eam, to
coronar, to crown. [ful. gain, to win.
agradar, to please. muestra, shows, proves.
conceder, to allow, to concede, demás j other.
vivir, to live. voy, I go.
Beading Exercise. 52.
Vivo aqui cerca, alii en aquella casa. No voy allá
porque está muy lejos. América está cerca de Asia, y lejos
de Europa. De buena gana viviría en Madrid, porque allí
tengo muchos amigos. Los enemigos se coronaron de gloria,
donde pocos dias antes habían sido derrotados. No me agrada
la mucha libertad que V. concede á su hijo, ün escritor tan
celebrado como Calderón. El discípulo se muestra agradecido
á su maestro estudiando mucho. Un rey tiránico es muy
aborrecido de todos sus subditos. Siempre he amado mucho
la vida campestre. Ni el uno ni el otro se atrevieron á venir
á las manos por el temor de no arriesgarlo todo. ¿De dónde '^
viene V.? Aun no llegado el correo; ni ayer tampoco vino.
Apenas hubo llegado mi amigo, cuando recibí las cartas. El
fruto de su trabajo no pudo lograrlo (or no lo pudo lograr)
jamás. La carne y demás víveres eran demasiado caros.
* Donde, where, sometimes prefixes the prepositions á, en,
de, and por, and thus forms the adverbs : adonde (also written á
donde), whither; endonde (en donde), wherein; dedonde (de donde),
whence; pordonde (por donde), where through (French: par ou).
Occasionally another preposition may be added, as:
Si vuelves presto de á donde pienso enviarte (Cero.).
If you soon come back from where I have a mind to send
you (to).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
138
Lesson 81.
Tradnecióii. 53.
I am very fond of (tr, I love much) my parents. You.
speak too loud; speak lower! Cervantes is a very celebrated
Spanish writer (escritor). He will never h^ve seen so manj-
towns as I have (seen). Why have you come so soon?
I have written this letter in a hurry. Perhaps you have not
received my letter. This man is so despised that nobody
will speak to him. I have always esteemed you so much
that I shall never doubt (of) your word. He has already sent
me twelve dollars, and now he sends me twenty more. Your
son studies too much; six hours a (por) day are more than
enough. Unfortunately I have neither friends nor money;
how can you expect me to be (tr. will you that I be) satis-
fied with (contento con) my situation ? it is now almost two
years that (since) I am in this town. Yesterday I came (vine,
from venir) too late ; to-day I come (vengo) sooner. Sometimes
we are quite as unjust towards ourselves as towards (the)
others. I have given you enough money; you have received
the price of your work. A town where {tr, in which) the
victuals (provisions) are too dear cannot please a foreigner.
8 So 4 learned la 2 man must have studied much.
Conversación.
¿Por quo quiere V. vivir en
Madrid?
¿Quién es Calderón?
¿Cómo se muestra un discípulo
agradecido á su maestro?
¿Por qué es aborrecido este
rey?
¿No ha llegado hoy el co-
rreo?
¿No te ha pagado aún?
¿Vendrá V. (Will you come)
mafiana á mi casa á comer
(dine) conmigo?
¿Es verdad qne su amigo de
V. ha muerto?
¿Cómo, todavía está V, en
cama (hed)^
¿ Qué se dice en la ciudad ?
Porque tengo allí muchos ami-
gos.
ün escritor español muy céle-
bre.
Se muestra agradecido estu-
diando mucho.
Porque es muy tiránico.
No ha llegado hoy, ni tampoco
llegó ayer.
Me ha prometido frecuente-
mente darme el dinero, pero
hasta hoy no me ha cumplido
(kept) la palabra (word).
Gracias; lo siento (I am very
sorry)^ pero tengo compro-
miso (I am engaged) con
unos amigos para mañana.
Por desgracia es cierto.
Perdone V., me acosté (went
to bed) ayer muy tarde.
No se oye (hears) nada de
nuevo.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Prepositions. 139
¿Ha recibido V. mi carta? He recibido sa carta de V, á las
ocho 7 luego la de su her-
mano.
¿Cuánto tiempo hay (or hace) Aun no hace dos meses,
que aprende V. el caste-
llano?
Keadingr Exercise.
La Opinión.
i Pobre Carolina mía!
¡Nunca la podré olvidar!
Ved lo que el mundo decía
Viendo el féretro pasar:
Un clérigo. — Empiece el canto.
El doctor. -- I Cesó el sufrir!
El padre. — \ Me ahoga el llanto !
La madre. — ¡Quiero morir!
Un muchacho. — ¡Qué adornada!
Un joven, — ¡Era muy bella!
Una moza. — ¡Desgraciada!
Una vieja. — ¡Feliz ella!
— ¡Duerme en paz! dicen los buenos.
— ¡Adiós! dicen los demás.
Un filósofo. — ¡Uno menos!
Un poeta. — \ Un ángel más !
[Campoamor, "Doloras."]
Thirty second Lesson. — Lección treinta
y dos.
Prepositions. — Preposiciones.
In Lesson 4 we have enumerated the prepositions
most in use. The Spanish prepositions are either simply
placed before the noun [see page 19), as: con el padre;
para el hermano; en la ciudad; or they require one of
the prepositions de and á following, as:
Junto d la casa, near the bouse.
Encima de la cama, on (upon) the bed.
Está delante de mi, he stands before me.
They are either adjectives, like junto, or compounds
of prepositions with other words like encima = en cima
(on the top). Reserving all particulars for the Second
Digitized by VaOOQlC
140
Lesson 32.
Part, we now give the prepositions and prepositional
locutions which are most in use.
(a) Followed by de:
Acerca de, for, because of, by
reason of.
además de, besides.
al l4JLdo de, aside.
al cabo de, at the end.
antes de, before.
á espaldas de, behind.
á pesar de, notwithstanding.
debajo de, under.
delante de, before, in front.
dentro de, within.
fuera de, except, outside.
después de, after.
detrás de, behind.
en casa de, at the house,at — 's.
encima de, on, upon.
enfrente de, opposite.
por medio de, through, across.
respecto de, concerning.
(b) Followed by á:
En cuanto á, \ as for, con- conforme á, conformably to,
en orden á, ] ceming. according to.
tocante á, concerning. respecto á, with respect to.
junto á, near, next to . . . «¿wafcwcidwá, without regard to.
Words.
El pueblo, the people.
la fuerza, the force.
el temor, the fear.
la hacienda, the fortune.
el espacio, the space.
la potencia, the power.
la criatura, the creature.
el conciudadano, the citizen.
el cumplimiento, the compli-
ment(s).
el vencedor, the conqueror.
hace.
la seguridad, the safety,
curity.
la Casa Ayuntamiento,
Town-hall.
la costa, the coast.
Undo, lovely, sweet.
valiente, brave, gallant.
desear, to desire.
enojarse, to become angry.
premiar, to reward.
es excusado, is superfluous,
does.
se-
the
Beading Exercise. 54.
El pueblo deseaba que premiaran á los vencedores y á
los sabios. Han llegado dos batallones que estaban de guar-
nición en Madrid. Los padres y las madres trabajan para
sus hijos. El hombre valiente no hace nada por fuerza ó por
temor. ¿Quién soy yo para con (in comparison) él? El
vino (carne) antes de mí á la iglesia, y se puso (sat down)
delante de mi. Además de sus libros tenían todo lo que es
necesario para escribir. El capitán me llamó por mi nombre.
Detrás de la casa hay un jardín muy ameno. Dentro de una
hora estaremos en seguridad. Los malos se enojan siempre
contra los buenos. ¿ Qué tal (What) es este hombre para con
Digitized by VjOOQIC
^ Prepositions. 141
sns conciudadanos? Desde el dia en que los demás (the others)
86 fueron (went away), se faé también él. La lámpara está
encima de la mesa. El perro durmió debajo de la cama.
Para entre amigos son excusados los cumplimientos.
Traducción. 55.
Near the town-hall there are some beautiful palaces.
Shall you come (Vendrá Y.) (still) before night? I shall come
ifter sunset (ponerse el sol). The world was created (hecho)
by God. What ((¿uUn or Qué) is the creature in com-
parison with the Creator? We speak about the affairs (las
cosas) of our nation. There might he (Habrá) above two
hundred persons. Concerning this matter (asunto), I do not
know (sé) anything certain. Opposite the church there were
three very high trees. (The) man was (ha) not born (nacido)
for himself alone. I am not ashamed to speak the truth
always. I was occupied from (the) morning till (to the) evening.
The father distributed (def. of repartir) all his fortune among
his children. (The) war is (está) declared (use declarar) be-
tween the two Powers. The whole honour of the victory is
for the general. The thief hid himself behind the door. The
«hip was wrecked (use naufragar) near (cerca de) the coast
tf Spain. (The) Mount Pico rises (use levantarse) above the
other mountains. The king did not wish (quiso) that his
sons should reign (Imperf. Subj. of reinar) after him.
Conversación.
iQiüé deseaba el pueblo? Que premiaran á los vencedores.
¿Ha partido su amigo de V. ? Si, ha partido ayer sin despe-
dirse (saying good bye),
¿Qué no quiso el rey? Que sus hijos reinasen después
de él.
¿Por quiénes trabajan los pa- Trabajan por sus hijos.
¿Qué ha publicado ese autor? Ha publicado muchas novelas
muy buenas; ha publicado
mucho.
¿Dónde se escondió el perro? Debajo de la cama.
¿Cuál virtud está sobre todas La caridad.
las virtudes?
¿Cuántos años tendrá su Ahora tendrá sobre cuarenta
amigo de V.? afios.
¿Iremos por vapor (steamer) Creo que haremos mejor en
ó por ferro-carril (train) ? tomar (if we take) el tren.
¿Qué no hace el hombre va- No hace nada por fuerza ó por
liente? temor.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
142 Lesson. 38.
Beading Exercise,
El traidor despreciado'^'.
Fué rogado un noble español por Carlos quinto para que
cediese su palacio, el más hermoso de Toledo, al condestable
de Borbón. Viendo el Emperador que resistía, le dijo que
debía mirar como un honor el alojar en su casa á tan gran
capitán. El español respondió que eran muy conocidas las
altas prendas de aquel príncipe; pero que su traidora con-
ducta para con Francia su patria las había borrado todas.
«Le cederé mi palacio por obediencia», añadió, «mas suplico
á Vuestra Majestad (que) me permita darle fuego en cuanto
el duque haya salido de él. No podré yo resolverme á ocupar
la misma casa en que ha vivido un traidor.»
Despreciar, to despise. para con . . ., towards, against . . .
rogar, to request. horrar, to efface, to expunge.
ceder, to cede. la obediencia, the obedience.
el Condestable, the Constable. mas, but.
viendo, seein^j. permitir, to permit.
resistir, to resist. el capitán, the general.
debia, he must; he ought to. añadir, to add.
mirar, to regard. suplicar, to beg.
alojar, to lodge. dar fuego á . , ., to set on fire.
conocido, known. en cuanto, as soon as.
las altas prendas, the eminent salir de , , ., to leave,
qualities. resolverse, to resolve.
traidor, traitor, treacherous. ocupar, to live in . .
la conducta, the conduct. vivir, to live.
TMrty-tliird Lesson. — Lección treinta
y tres.
Coignnctlons. — Conjunciones.
(a) Simple Conjunctions:
Y (é), and. mas**, but.
ó (ú), or. pero, but, yet.
ni — ni, neither — nor. cuando, when, if.
que, that. si, if.
ya — ya, now — now. pues, as, because.
mientras, whilst.
* See the poetical treatment of the same subject in "i^w
Castellano Leal'' por el Duque de Bivas, in the "Spanish Reader .
** mas, but, without accent; más, more, with accent.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Conjunctions. 143
(b) Compound Gonjiiiietions.
Aunque, although, though. asi que, so that, as soon as.
jwr qué, i^hy. con tal que, provided, on con-
porque, because, as. dition that.
hien quCy though, although. por más que, in spite of.
supuesto que, \ pj.Q^¿g¿ 4.jja,4- entretanto que, whilst.
piesto que, / ^ ' á menos que, unless.
W(^ Que, in order to, so that, hasta que, until.
pues que, as, since.
Some of these conjunctions govern always the
Subjunctive mood, such as antes que, before; con tal que,
provided; á menos que, unless; para que, in order to.
Others govern the Subjunctive only when the idea
expressed by the verb appears uncertain, dubious, or
merely possible: such are aunque, though; hasta que,
until ; asi que, so that, etc. For further particulars see
Part n., Lesson 14: Conjunctions.
Notes.
1. For the sake of euphony, t/ (and) is replaced by é
before words beginning with i or hi (but not hie), as:
Padre é hijo, father and son.
Acero y hierro, steel and iron.
2. In a similar way, ó is replaced by ü before words
beginning with o, as:
Siete ü ocho, seven or eight.
3. Porque means both why ? and because, as :
¿ Por qué no habla Y, ? why do you not speak ?
Porque no quiero, because I do not choose.
In order to mark the difference, por qué, why ? is written
in two words and with the accent, and porque, because, in
one word and without the accent.
Words.
El ministro, the minister. sujeto, subject.
el embajador, the ambassador, perseguir, to persecute.
el juez, the judge. velar, to wiatch.
el amo, the master. recompensar, to reward.
la ignorancia, the ignorance. ganar, to earn, to gain.
la sabiduría, wisdom. cansar, to tire; cansarse, to
el discípulo, the pupil, scholar. get tired.
afable, kind, friendly. descansar, to repose.
dichoso, happy. no tener ningún inconveniente,
severo, severe, strict. to have no objection.
dormir, to sleep.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
144 Lesson 88.
Traducción. 56.
The ministers and the ambassadors thought that the
proposal of (tr, what proposed [tr. proponer]) the emperor
would please (convenia) neither the king nor the people.
Peter or [an]other shall do (hará) it. I should be glad
(Quisiera) to reward him, but* I cannot. I earn money
enough, but I am not satisfied. I cannot walk so far, because
I get tired. Provided they are (se muestren) kind, I have
no objection to pay them a visit (en ir á verles). Money
makes (hace) rich, but not happy. (The) virtue, although
persecuted, is amiable. If I get (Si me llegare or llega) my
money, I shall pay you. I waked (Imperf,), whilst be slept.
If it brought (importara) me a kingdom, I would not commit
(haría) an injustice. The judge, though severe, is just. (The)
virtue renders men happy (felices) in this world and blessed
(bienaventurados) in heaven. I say (digo) it now, that (para
que) he may hear (sienta) it himself. Wait (espere V.) in this
room, sir, until my master comes (venga)l (The) men often
say (dicen) that they do not wish for (apetecen) riches.
Science and ignorance are opposed things. The girl under-
stands (sabe) sewing (coser) and spinning (hilar). He rests
neither by (de) day nor by night. Men or women, we are
all liable to passions. One should not (No se ha de) live in
order to eat, but one should eat in order to live. The master
takes pains (se afana) that he may bring forward (Subj.
pres. of adelantar) his pupils.
Conversación.
¿Quién ha llegado hoy? El conde de Aguilar y su
señora (lady),
i Qué vende este comerciante Vende plomo (lead) y hierro.
(merchant) ?
¿ Cuánto dinero le ha dado V. Le he dado siete ú ocho duros
al criado? (dollar).
¿Por qué no ha escrito V. á Porque no tengo tiempo.
su padre?
¿ Cuándo recibió V. la res- Después de haber escrito esta
puesta (answer)^ carta (letter).
¿ No ha querido (did not like) Ni mi tío ni mi tía han que-
venir aquí su tío de V.? rido venir.
¿Qué dice un poeta de la Dice que la imitación es como
imitación (imitation)^ el alma de la poesía.
¿Por qué no pudo el capitán Porque estaba ausente.
asistir (assist) á la función
(solemnity) ?
* But is pero^ seldom mas. After a negative sentence hut
is sino.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Conjunctions. 145
¿Irá V. conmigo? Iré con usted pues lo quiere.
¿EavistoV. en verdad CrcaWy^ Cuando le aseguro á V. que
á mi hermano? le he visto, puede creerme
(believe me),
¿Quiere V. á ese hombre ? Aunque no me ha hecho (done)
nada, no le quiero.
¿Cuándo me pagará V.? Le pagaré á Y. si me llega
(if I get) el dinero.
Beading Exercise.
Canción de la Primavera.
Ya vuelve la primavera:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
tiende sobre la pradera
el verde manto — de la esperanza.
Sopla caliente la brisa:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
las nubes pasan aprisa,
y el azur muestran — de la esperanza.
La flor ríe en su capullo:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
canta el agua en su murmullo
el poder santo — de la esperanza.
¿La oís que en los aires trina?
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
— «Abrid á la golondrina,
que vuelve en alas — de la esperanza.* —
Nifia, la niña modesta:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
el mayo trae tu fiesta
que el logro trae — de la esperanza.
Cubre la tierra el amor:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
el perfume engendrador
al seno sube — de la esperanza.
Todo zumba y reverdece:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
cuanto el son y el verdor crece,
tanto más crece — toda esperanza.
Sonido, aroma y color
(suene la gaita, — ruede la danza)
úñense en himnos de amor,
que engendra el himno — de la esperanza.
Morirá la primavera:
suene la gaita, — ruede la danza:
mas cada año en la pradera
tornará el manto — de la esperanza.
Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 10
Digitized by VaOOQlC
146 Lesson 84.
La inocencia dé la vida
(calle la gaita, — pare la danza)
no toma nna vez perdida:
I oh mi inocencia! — ¡ay mi esperanza!
Fablo Viferrer.
Tliirty-fourth Lesson. — Lección treinta
y cuatro.
Interjections. — Interjecciones.
Interjectionis aré used to express some emotions of
the speaker, as Joy, surprise, gnef, etc. Those most in
use are:
/ Ah ! I eh I ¡ hala I to denote joy.
¡Ah! ¡ay! ¡ay de mi! ¡ó! to denote grief.
¡Oh! to denote silrprise.
/ Eh ! ¡ hola ! to attract attention.
/ Chito ! ¡ quedo! ¡ silencio ! to command silence.
/ Ea ! / Sus! ! Animo ! to encourage.
/ Ta ! ¡ tate! to threaten.
Besides these there are many other expressions, as:
Ojalá, Would that . . .
¡Válgame Dios! Good gracious!
¡Caramba! Oh, dear me I etc.
which are also used a« interjections. The Spanisl>
language abounds in such interjectional locutions.
Beading Exercise. 57.
I Ah, qué desgracia (misfortune) \ ¡Ay, quo jpens, (pain) -y:
oh, desdichado de mi (how unhappy I am) I i Oh, cielos! I Eh,
quo es lo que decías (saidst)\ ¿Hola, muchacho, vendrás^
luego (soon)? i Hola, quién lo hubiera creído (thought, believed) t
¡Chito, ninguno hable, y todos oigan (let all listen) \ ¡Ea, hijo-
mío, buen ánimo! ¡Ta^ ta; qué es lo que veo! ¡Vaya (Up)j-
que ya es tiempo de levantarse! ¡Ay, qué gozo (pleasure)l
¡Ah, desventurada mujer! ¡Oh, dolor! ¡Mira (look), que in-
famia! ¡Gracias á Dios! ¡Bendito (praised) sea Dios!
Beading Exercise.
España, — Diversidad de lenguas.
Subsiste en España no sólo la diversidad de leyes, sino*
también la de lenguas. Se habla todavía en gallego, en bable^
en vasco, en catalán, en mallorquín, en valenciano. Tienen»
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Irregular Verbs. 147
estas lenguas, á excepción de la vasca, el mismo origen que
la de Castilla; y ninguna, sin embargo, ha caldo en desuso.
Lejos de borrarse, pasan hace afios por una especie de renaci-
miento. Eran ayer vulgares, y hoy toman el carácter de
literarias. Se escriben ahora en todas esas lenguas, principal-
mente en las latinas, poesías brillantes de especial índole y
tendencia, donde predomina sobre todos los sentimientos el de
^ antigna patria. Se desentierran los cantos y aún los libros
a prosa que en ellas compusieron hombres de otros siglos ; y
00 bien se los publica, se los lee y devora. En catalán hasta
se escriben y se ponen en escena comedias y dramas de no
escaso mérito.
[Pí y Margall, "Las Nacionalidades," Cap. XIÍ.]
Thirty-fiftli Lesson. — Lección treinta
y cinco.
The irregular Verbs. — De los verbos in*egulares.
Irregular verbs are those which deviate in their
conjugation from the regular verbs, unless this deviation
^ a merely orthographical one, as with the verbs
enumerated in Lesson 22, where the anomaly is only
seeming, as the alterations in the spelling are necessary
in order to maintain the original pronunciation of
the verb.
A very considerable number of Spanish verbs are
only so far irregular as to undergo an alteration of the
radical vowel in certain persons of the present indicative
and subjunctive, and in the imperative, all the other
persons and tenses being perfectly regular.
This alteration is originated by the stress being
laid on the radical vowel', which is, as it were, not
strong enough to support alone the full weight of the
accent, and is, therefore, changed into a diphthong;
whilst in the cases where the stress is not laid on the
radical vowel, it remains unaltered. Thus, in the verb
alentar, to breathe, the 1. sing. pres. indie, ought pro-
perly to be alentó*. Now, this e (the radical vowel)
cannot support by itself the weight of the accent, and
is therefore changed into ie. Thus aliento*, instead
* The accent is only used here to indicate the vowel on
which the stress is laid, and must not be written.
10*
Digitized b
d by Google
148
Lesson 35.
of alentó. The 1st pers. plur. of the same tense, however,
is alentamos, and not alientamos^ because here the stress
is laid on the a (alentamos), and not on the e of
the root.
Observation.— Yqí this transition of the radical vowel
into the diphthongs ie and ue is not confined to the aforesaid
forms, but also occurs in the infinitive mood of some verbs.
Hence we have double forms, like diezmar, and dezmar, to
decimate; adiestrar, and adestrar, to instruct; amueblar, and
amoblar, to furnish (a room), etc. The conjugation of such
verbs with diphthongs for their radical vowel is regular. The
Spanish Academy recognises both forms, yet prefers the form
with the diphthong.
As the aforesaid deviation is found equally with
verbs of the first, second, and third conjugations, we
may bring them all under the
First Class.
Character : The radical e, i is
changed into ie.
Models.
I.
II.
III.
Alentar,
to breathe.
Encender, to set
on fire, to light.
Present.
Indicative.
Adquirir, to ac-
quire, to obtain.
Aliento, I breathe
alientas
alienta
alentamos
alentáis
alientan.
Enciendo, I light
en^ciendes
enciende
encendemos
encendéis
encienden.
Adquiero
adquieres
adquiere
adquirimos
adquirís
adquieren.
AUente
alientes
aliente
alentemos
alentéis
alienten.
Subjunctive.
Encienda
enciendas
encienda
encendamos
encendáis
enciendan.
Adquiera
adquieras
adquiera
adquiramos
adquiráis
adquieran.
Alienta (tú)
aliente (Y.).
Imperative.
Enciende (tú),
encienda (V.).
Adquiere (tú)
adquiera (Y.).
Thus: inquirir.
to inquire.
Digitized by Google
The Irregular Verbs.
149
Alphabetical list of the yerbs liable to the same deriations:
Memarh—In this and the following lists there are many
verbs which are not so important for the beginner. It would
therefore be better to learn first those marked with an asterisk.
Verbs in -ar.
Abnegar, to deny oneself.
^acertar, to guess.
acrecentar, to increase.
adestrar, to instruct.
aferrar, to grapple.
ailebrarse, to crouch.
*alentar, to breathe.
aliquebrar, to break a wing.
aneblar, to get foggy.
apacentar, to graze, to pasture.
apernar, to seize by the leg.
*apretar, to press together.
arrendar, to lease, to rent.
asentar, to set, to note down.
aserrar, to saw.
asestar, to point (a gun).
atentar, to grope, to fumble ^.
aterrar, to fling, to knock
down ^.
atestar, to fill with . . .^.
^atravesar, to perforate, to
bar, to block, to cross.
aventar, to fan, to kindle;
-se, to run away.
* Calentar, to warm.
* cegar, to blind, to dazzle.
*cerrar, to shut.
cimentar, to cement, to lay
the foundation.
*comenzar, to begin, to com-
mence, [concert.
concertar, to arrange ; se, to
^confesar, to confess.
^confesarse con, to confess to.
Decentar, to cut, to get bad
sores.
denegar, to deny.
dentar, to indent, to teeth.
derrenegar, to abjure, to de-
test.
derrengar, to lame.
desacertar, to mistake.
desaferrar, to unfurl, to un-
fasten.
desalentar, to discourage.
desapretar, to loosen.
desarrendar, to unbridle.
desasentar, to disagree with.
desasosegar, to trouble.
desatentar, to perplex the
mind.
desaterrar, to deposit scoriae.
desatravesar, to cross back.
desconcertar, to confuse.
desdentar, to draw teeth.
desempedrar, to unpave (a
street, etc.).
desencerrar, to free, to set
at liberty.
*desenterrar, to disinter, to
dig out.
desgobernar, to disturb.
deshelar, to thaw [helar, to
freeze],
desherrar, to unfetter, to take
off a horse-shoe.
desmembrar, to dismember.
desnegar, to contradict, to
unsay.
desnevar, to thaw.
despernar, to cut off a leg,
to lame a leg.
^despertar (dispertar) , to
awake.
1 Regular in the signification "to attempt the life of somebody."
2 » » » » . "to terrify."
3 » » » » '*to testify."
Digitized
by Google
150
Lesson 35.
* desplegar \ to unfold.
desterrar, to banish, to exile.
dezmar, to decimate.
JEmparentar, to be related
by marriage.
*empedrar, to pave.
*einpezar, to begin.
encensar, to perfume.
encentar, to mutilate.
* encerrar, to imprison, to com-
prehend.
*encomendar, to recommend,
to entrust.
encubertar, to cover with
cloth (horses).
endentar, to join with a mor-
tise.
enhambrentary to starve.
enhestar, to raise, to put up-
right.
^enmendar (emendar), to cor-
rect, to mend.
ensangrentar, to stain with
blood.
^enterrar, to bury.
*errar, to be mistaken (Pres,
yerro, etc.).
^escarmentar, to sharpen one's
wits, to take warning.
estercar, to manure.
estregar, to rub.
* Fregar, to rub, to wash up.
* Gobernar, to govern.
* Helar y to freeze [French :
geler\
herrar, to shoe a horse [f err er].
Incensar, to incense, to per-
fume.
infernar, to vex, to make
angry.
invernar, to pass the winter.
*Manifestar, to manifest.
mentar^, to mention.
*merendar, to take one's after-
noon collation.
*Negar^, to deny.
*nevar, to snow.
*Pewsar^ to think. [legs.
perniquebrar, to break (the)
'''plegar^, to fold.
*0Me6rar, to break.
Recalentar, to warm again.
^recomendar, to recommend.
refregar, to rub hard.
*regar, to water.
regimentar, to organize.
remendar, to mend, to patch.
remesar, to pull out the hair.
renegar, to abjure, to for-
swear.
replegar, to fold often, to
fall back.
requebrar, to break into little
pieces, to flirt, to woo, to
court.
resegar, to reap again.
resembrar, to resow.
restregar, to rub, to scrub.
^retemblar, to tremble re-
peatedly.
retentar, to threaten with a
fresh attack (of illness, etc.).
^ Deitplegar forms desplego and despliego; as well as desple-
garse, to retire in good order (milit). Replegar, to fold again,
follows plegar,
^ The compounds, like comentar, dewcniar, etc., are regular.
Paramentar, to adorn, is not derived from mentar, but from pa-
ramento.
3 Anegar, to drown, is not derived from negar, and is regular,
although in America spurious forms like aniego, aniegas may
occur.
^ Compensar, recompensar, etc., are regular.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Irregular Verbs.
151
^reventar, to burst.
Salpimefitar, to season with
salt and pepper.
sarmentar, to gather (cut off)
vine-wood.
* segar, to mow, to cut.
sembrar, to sow.
sementar, to sow.
^sentar, to seat, to fit ; -5e, to
sit down^
"^serrar, to saw.
sosegar, to tranquillize.
soterrar, to bury.
"* Temblar, to tremble.
tentar, to touch, to try, to
grope; to tempt.
trasegar, to pour over, to
transfuse, to rack wine.
^tropezar, to stumble.
Verbs in -cr.
Ascender, to ascend, to be
promoted.
atender, to attend, to pay
attention to.
bienquerer, to esteem.
Oerner^y to bolt (meal).
coextender, to coextend.
contender, to fight.
*I>efender, to defend.
desatender, to disregard.
* descender, to descend, to come
(down).
desentenderse, to feign ig-
norance.
distender, to distend, [fire.
* Encender, to light, to set on
*entender, to understand.
extender, to stretch out.
Heder, to stink.
hender, to split.
Malquerer, to hate.
*Berder, to lose.
* Querer, to like, to wish, to
want, will.
Mequerer, to love intensely.
Tender^, to tend, to stretch.
trascender, to mount over,
to pass.
Verter, to shed, to spill.
Verbs in -Ir,
Adquirir, to acquire, to obtain.
Diferir, to differ.
Inquirir, to inquire.
JPerquü^r, to search for.
Words.
To be right, tener razón,
to be wrong, wo tener razón,
the bet, wager, la apuesta,
the cigar, ei cigarro,
the rampart, ?a i;a?Za.
the sea, el mar,
the family, la familia.
the cow, la vaca,
the fault, mistake, la falta.
likewise, también, igualmente.
to read, leer,
I say, digo.
not yet, aww — no,
., ji Í la l^na,
the wood, J ;^ ^^^^^^
the blow, el golpe [Ft, le coup],
the valley, el valle,
the noi^e, el ruido.
Traducción* 58.
What do you think of this matter, sir? I think that
you are wrong, and that your friend is right. Think what
^ Presentar and representar, not being compounds of sentar,
are regular.
"* Discernir, to distinguish, formerly discerner, follows the
conjug. of cerner, — Concernir, to concern, is a defective verb.
3 Pretender is regular. The other compounds, like tender.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
152 Lesson 35.
you please ! I know (se) that my friend will lose this wager.
We lose our time, and you (Vds,), too, lose yours. I confess
my faults; why do you not confess yours? We confess that
you were right. I awake every morning at six o'clock. He
eats his afternoon collation at 5 o'clock. The child is teething
(pres.). When do we begin? I shall begin directly, and my
brother also begins. The poor soldier still breathes. I am not
mistaken when I say that he does not understand me. Light
your cigar; there is a match (fósforo, m.). The ramparts
defend the town against the enemies. We now (ahora) begin
to read; dost thou also begin? I do not yet begin. I do
not deny that you have given me the money. The sun
dazzles me. The river falls (desenibocar) into the sea. He
descends from an old Castilian family. I lose too much money
with [at] this game. We lose 10 dollars (duro, m.), and
that gentleman loses 15 dollars. The sun warms the earth.
I split this wood with one blow. The cows graze in the
valley. Correct the mistakes in your translation! Thou dost
not know what thou sayest (dices). I understand everything.
This noise troubles (disturbs) me. A young man acquires
friends if he is diligent and honest. We seldom acquire
anything in this world without pains (Sing,).
Conversación.
¿Piensa V. en su tarea (tasJc)^ Pienso siempre en mis tareas.
¿Pierde V. mucho dinero? He perdido 5 daros, pero mi
hermano pierde más.
¿No quiebra V. el vaso f^Za55^? No quiebro nada.
¿Niegan Vds. que tengamos No negamos que Vds. tengan
razón? razón, pero negamos que ha-
gan bien (do well) en este
caso (case).
¿Por qué no empieza V.? No empiezo, porque no tengo
gana de hacer lo que V,
quiere.
¿Á quién defiende V.? Defiendo á la pobre viuda (wi-
dow) que no tiene protección
(protection).
¿Está enfermo el nifio? ün poco; dienta.
¿ Por qué no despierta V. á sus Porque aún no es tiempo.
compafSeros (companion)^
¡Siéntese V. Mi ama llegará No me siento, porque no tengo
en un instante! tiempo.
I Cierre V. la puerta del cuarto! Ya está cerrada.
Mi primo niega lo que V. Aunque lo niegue, es verdad
ha dicho. lo que he dicho.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Irregular Verbs continued.
153
Reading Exercise.
España. — Diversidad de costumbres.
No hablaré ahora de las costumbres. Su variedad es in-
finita. Cambian de provincia á provincia y aún de pueblo á
pueblo. Las de la ciudad difieren generalmente de las del
campo; las de la montaña de las del valle. Difieren sobre
todo las que se observan en los tres grandes momentos de la
vida: el nacimiento, el matrimonio y la muerte. Son en todas
partes diversos los trajes, diversos los juegos y las fiestas,
diversas las aficiones y las preocupaciones religiosas. Cada
comarca tiene su Cristo y su Virgen, y en cada una se les
presta distinto culto.
[Pí y Margall, *'La8 Nacionalidades," Cap. XII.]
Thirty-sixth Lesson. — Lección treinta
y seis.
The Irregular Yerbs continued.
A great many partly irregular verbs of the first
and the second conjugations change the radical vowel
into ue. To these Jugar (Latin jocare) may be
added. They form the
Second Class.
Character
: o, u, is changed
Models.
into ue.
I.
11.
III.
acordar, to agree.
Morder, to bite.
Present.
Indicative.
Jugar, to play.
Acuerdo, 1 agree
acuerdas
acuerda
acordamos
acordáis
acuerdan.
Muerdo, I bite
muerdes
muerde
mordemos
mordéis
muerden.
Juego, I play
juegas
juega
jugamos
jugáis
juegan.
Acuerde
acuerdes
acuerde
Subjunctive,
Muerda
muerdas
muerda
Juegue
juegues
juegue
Digitized by Google
154
Lesson
acordamos
acordéis
acuerden.
mordamos
mordáis
muerdan.
juguemos
jtiguéis
juegmn/
Imperative.
Acuerda (tú) f2^greQ Muerde (tú), bite
(thou). (thou).
acordad^ agree morded, bite
(you). (you).
Acuerde Y,, do Muerda Y, ,áo\Áie,
agree.
All the other tenses are regular,
Juega (ttt), plaj
(thou).
jugad, play (you).
Juegue F., do play.
Alphabetical list of the verbs
Verbs in -ar.
Abuñolar, to puff out.
aclocar, to brood.
acollar, to earth up.
*acordar, to agree; -se, to
recollect ^
acornar, to gore.
*acostar, to convey to bed;
'Se, to go to bed.
afollar, to blow against, to
breathe at . . .
aforar, to enfeoff, to rent,
to farm*. [phesy.
agorar, tb foretell, to pro-
*álmorzar, to breakfast.
* amoblar, to funiish, see : Mo-
blar,
amolar, to grind, to sharpen.
aporcar, to cover with earth.
'''aportar, to go ashore, to land.
*apostar^, to bet.
*aprobar, to approve.
asolar, to waste, to desolate.
that follow this irregularity:
asoldar, to hire.
asonar, to accord, to chime in.
atronar, to make a great noise.
avergonzar, to shame (aver-
güenzo),
azotar, to work with the axe.
Clocar, to cluck.
colar^, to filter, to wash ; co-
larse, to slip in (coll.).
^colgar, to hang, to suspend.
comprobar, to prove.
concordar, to accord, to agree.
'''consolar, to console, to com-
fort.
consonar, to accord (see sonar),
'''contar, to count, to tell.
'''costar^ to cost.
Degollar, to behead.
demostrar, to prove.
'''denostar, to offend, to injure.
derrocar^, to fling down, to
render downcast.
desacordar, to disagree, to
put out of tune.
^ Acordar, to tune (instruments), is regular.
* Aforar, to gauge, is regular; also in all the other signi-
fications (to adjust [weights, etc.]).
* Apostar, to place, to station, is regular.
* Verbs not derived from colar, but from cola, tail, glae,
like descolar, to cut the tail off; encolar, to glue together, are
regular.
* Derrocar forms derroco and derrueco.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Irregular Verbs continued.
155
desaforar^ to deprive of a
right, etc.^
desamoblar, to unfumisb.
*desaprobar, to disapprove.
descolgar, to take down (from
a hook, etc.).
descollar, to overtop, to tower
over.
desconsolar, to afflict deeply,
to render disconsolate.
*descorUar, to discount.
descordar, to uncord.
descornar, to break off the
horns.
desencordar, to unstring.
desengrosar, to thin.
desflocar, to unravel.
desmajoJ-ar, to pull up vines
by the roots.
*desolar, to desolate, to waste.
desoldar, to unsolder.
desollar, to flay, to excoriate.
desosar, to take the bone out
(of the meat).
desovar, to lay eggs, to spawn.
*despohlar, to depopulate.
destrocar, to break off a barter,
a bargain.
* desvergonzarse, to behave in
a shameless manner.
discordar, to be discordant.
disonar, to be dissonant.
Emporcar, to soil.
enclocar, to fish with a hook,
to cluck (like a hen).
encoclar (better cloquear), see :
enclocar,
^encontrar, to encounter, to
meet, to find.
encorar, to cover with leather;
'Se, to heal, to cicatrize.
encorda/r, to string, to chord.
encornar, to grow horns.
encovar^ to put in the cellar.
engorar, to addle.
*engrosar, to become stout.
enrodar, to break upon the
wheel.
ensalmorar, to brine (pickle).
ensoñar, to dream.
entortar, to render tortuous.
escolar, to strain.
^esforzar, to encourage.
'*' esforzarse, to take pains.
Foliar^, to blow with the
bellows.
* for zar, to force, to compel,
to oblige.
* Holgar, to repose.
hollar, to tread upon, to
trample on.
Improbar, to disapprove:
*Jugar^, to play.
Malsonar, to offend one's ears.
mancornar, to tie by the
horns.
moblar^, to furnish.
*mostrar, to show.
* Poblar, to populate.
*probar, to prove, to try.
Mecolar, to strain a second
time.
recontar, to count again.
*recordar, to remind, to awake,
-se, to recollect.
recostarse, to lie down on one
side, to recline.
*reforzar, to reinforce.
1 Meaning to redeem a mortgage is regular.
2 Foliar (afollar), when meaning "to put in sheetei," is re-
gular.
* Conjugar, to conjugate, and enjugar, to dry up, are not
derived from jugar, and are regular,
* Besides moblar, and amoblar, there are also the regular
forms mueblar, and amueblar (see Lesson 35, Observation),
Digitized
by Google
156
Lesson 36.
regoldar, to eruct.
rehollar, to tread upon.
remolar, to load dice.
*renovar, to renew.
repoblar, to repeople.
* reprobar, to reprobate, to scold.
rescontrar, to balance (an
account), to compare.
resollar, to breathe, to fan.
resonar, to resound.
retostar, to toast again, to
toast brown.
retronar, to thunder again.
revolar, to flee, to flee again.
*revolcarse, to welter, to roll,
to wallow.
*rodar, to roll.
* rogar, to beg, to pray^.
Sobresolar, to pave anew.
solar^, to sole.
soldar, to solder.
* soltar, to loosen.
sollar, to blow with bellows.
*sonar^, to sound; -se, to
blow one's nose.
sonrodarse, to stick in the
mud (a carriage).
* soñar, to dream.
* Tostar, to roast.
trascolar, to bolt, to strain.
trascordarse, to forget.
trasoñar, to see a vision, to
dream.
trastrocar, to invert the order
of things.
trasvolar, to fly across.
trocar, to exchange [Fr. tro-
quer'],
Hronar, to thunder^.
* Volar, to fly.
*volcar, to upset (a carriage,
etc.); -56, to welter.
Verbs in -6r.
* Absolver, to absolve.
amover, to remove.
* Cocer, to cook ('cwe^o).
condoler, to condole, to pity.
conmover, to touch, to stir.
contorcer, to distort.
*I>emoler, to demolish, to
destroy.
. desenvolver, to develop.
destorcer, to untwist.
desvolver, to unfold.
^devolver, to give back.
^disolver, to dissolve.
*doler, to ache, to give pain.
Entrevolver, to pack between.
^envolver, to envelop, to wrap
up, to involve.
escocer, to smart.
*Llover, to rain.
* Moler, to grind, to bother.
*morder, to bite.
*mover, to move.
*'Oler, to smell (pres. huele,
etc., olemos, etc.).
*JPoder, to be able, can.
promover, to promote.
Mecocer, to boil again.
redoler, to cause great pain.
remoler, to regrind.
remorder, to cause remorse.
remoi;er, to remove.
*resolver, to resolve.
retorcer, to re-wrap, to crook,
to curse, to render tortuous
(pres. retuerzo).
^ The compounds of ro^ar are regular,
2 Like 5o2ar the verb consolar, to console, though not
derived from so2ar.
^ Sonar and its compounds are irregular. Verbs derived
from persona, like apersonarse, to behave with dignity, are regular.
* Verbs derived from irowo, throne, like entronizar, destronar,
etc., are regular.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Irregular Verbs continued. 157
revolver, to stir, to disar- *Torccr, to come, to wring, to
range, wrest (pres. tuerzo),
* Soler, to use (be wont). * Volver, to turn back.
solver^, to loosen, to untie. * volver á (with the Inf.), to do
somover, to remove (earth). a thing once more.
Words.
The intention, la intención. to dine, comer,
the place, el lugar. to doubt, dudar,
the bill of exchange, la letra blunt, embotado, -da, or hoto,
de cambio, -a,
the behaviour, la conducta, furious, enfurecido.
the farrier, el herrador'^, the pipe, la pipa,
the movement, el ejercicio, the tobacco, el tabasco,
the promise, la promesa, to smoke, fumar,
Tradncoión. 59.
I bet (that) I guess (adivinar) what (lo que) you are think-
ing, and that you do not guess what I think. This man
shows good intentions. I breakfast at eight o'clock, I dine
at one, and go to bed at eleven. (The) war depopulates the
countries, and stains with blood the places which are its
theatre. Do discount me this bill of exchange! I fear that
you will not approve of my conduct. I do not think that these
gentlemen will agree to it. I doubt whether (si) you remem-
ber me (Gen,), He wishes me to (que yo) exchange my watch
for his. I doubt whether it (will) also rain(s) in the afternoon.
I do not think (that) this farrier shoes my horse well. Take
(Haga usted) more exercise, lest you {transí, that you do not)
become too stout. I approve of all (cuanto) he has done. Do
not forget {tr, recollect) your promises, my friend! Go to
bed ; you are very tired. We breakfast at the same (mismo, -a)
hour as (que) my father breakfasts. Do grind this knife, it
is too blunt. How much does this book cost ? My book costs
seven pesetas. The furious soldiers destroyed the whole house.
Do not be afraid, sir, the dog does not bite. We disapprove
of your sister's conduct; why do not you disapprove of it?
Why do you not play with us? Pray, sir, tell me whether
(tr. que me diga) we return at eight o'clock or at half past
eight? Come back (return) at half past eight o'clock. This
flower smells (fr. oler) very nice {tr, agreeably). In the
morning I (use to) smoke a pipe of tobacco, and in the evening
a couple of (un par de) cigars.
1 Obsolete.
^ From ferrum (Latin), French: le fer; maréchal-ferrant.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
158
Lesson 86.
Gonyersacióii.
¿Acuéstate, amigo mió?
¿Cuánto cuesta ese chaleco?
¿No desaprueba V. la con-
ducta de ese hombre ?
¿Cuál es el efecto de la
guerra ?
¿Qué espera V.?
¡Yo no tengo la culpa! ¿Por
qué me reprueba V.?
¿Muerde ese perro?
¿Truena?
¿No se acuerda V. de mi
criado Juan?
¿Á qué hora se acuesta V.?
¿Qué le ha contado á Y. el
criado ?
¿Cuánto cuestan esos guan-
tes?
¿Uuégole á Y., me diga que
hora es?
¿Á que hora almuerza V.?
¡Gracias! No tengo gana de
acostarme.
Cuesta dos duros.
Yerdad es que (certainly) la
desapruebo ; pero ¿qué puedo
hacer ?
La guerra demuele las ciudades
y despuebla los estados
(states).
Espero que encuentre él á mi
deudor (debtor).
No te repruebo á ti, sino á tu
primo que ha cometido (com-
mitted) la boberia (stupi-^
diiy)*.
¡ Cuidado I (Take care I) El perro
es muy furioso (sava^ge).
No he oído (heard) tronar.
Me acuerdo muy bien de él;
está ahora en casa del ge-
neral Nufiez.
Ordinariamente me acuesto á
las once y media.
Nada. Jamás me cuenta cosa
alguna.
Me cuestan dos pesetas y al-
gunos céntimos.
Han dado las cinco.
Yo almuerzo á las once, y mi
padre almuerza á las once
y media.
Reading Exercise.
M caer de la tarde.
Cuan plácido el río brilla!
En ondas de azul y plata
Luengamente se dilata
Con murmurante rumor:
Y los sauces de la orilla
Se miran en la corriente
Y mezclan confusamente
Su -verde y albo color.
* Who has made a fool of himself.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Irregular Verbs continued. 159
El caminante cansado
Reposa al dulce sombrío,
Y el bochorno del estío
Templa en el fresco raudal:
Por el herboso collado
Pastando van las ovejas,
Y tafie cantigas viejas
El descuidado zagal.
Ni en los nidos cantan aves,
Ni en las granjas las palomas;
El valle destila aromas.
Bulle céfiro sutil;
Voces lánguidas, suaves
En redor vuelan perdidas
Como tiernas despedidas
De las flores del pensil.
El sol, hiriendo á soslayo
Por la frondosa enramada,
La selva deja bañada
De rojo y áureo esplendor:
Y amortecido su rayo
Desciende tranquilo y puro,
Y en el cielo azul, oscuro
Perdido vaga un fulgor.
[José Ma de Arteaga, "Rimas Libres."]
Thirty-seventh Lesson. — Lección treinta
y siete.
Tbe Irregular Yerbs continued.
The Third Class is composed of verbs ending in
acevy ecevy ocer^ and acir. With this class* c is
changed into zcy whenever a or o follows.
Models.
I. II. III. IV.
WaceVf Crecer, Conocer, Lucir,
to be born. to grow. to know. to shine.
* Exceptions are hacer ^ to make, to do (see page 177), and
cocer, to cook (see page 156). Again mecer, to rock, and empecer,
to damage, to hurt, which form mezo and empezó.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
160
)
Lesson 37.
Present.
Indicative,
Nazco
Crezco
Conozco
Luzco
naces
creces
conoces
luces
nace
crece
conoce
luce
nacemos
crecemos
conocemos
lucimos
nacéis
crecéis
conocéis
lucis
nacen.
crecen.
conocen.
lucen.
Subjunctive.
Nazca
Crezca
Conozca
Luzca
nazcas
crezcas
conozcas
luzcas
nazca
crezca
conozca
luzca
nazcamos
crezcamos
conozcamos
luzcamos
nazcáis
crezcáis
conozcáis
luzcáis
nazcan.
crezcan.
conozcan.
luzcan.
Imperative.
Nace
Crece (tú)
Conoce
Luce
naced
creced
conoced
Itmd
nazca.
crezca F.
conozca Y.
luzca V.
NB, — A further peculiar anomaly is presented by the
definite, and its derived forms, of verbs in ducir, which
change the c of their stem into j. Here e is added for the
first pers. sing, instead of i, o instead of id for the third pars,
sing., and eron in lieu of ieron for the third pers. plur. of
the definite, w^hilst the i of the forms in iese, iere, iera is
dropped.
Conducir, to lead.
Present.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Conduzco, I lead Conduzca, I lead.
conduces conduzcas
conduce conduzca
conducimos
conducís
conducen.
conduzcamos
conduzcáis
conduzcan.
Imperative.
Conduce (tú), lead (thou). conducid, lead (you).
Conduzca Y., do lead.
Definite.
Conduje (and not i) I led. condujimos
condujiste condujisteis
condujo (and not i6) condujeron (and not ieron).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Irregular Verbs con tinned.
161
Imperfect
condujese, that
led
condtijeses, etc.
Subjunctive.
Future,
condujere, that
shall lead
condujeres, etc.
ConditxonaL
condujeray that I
should lead
condujeras, etc.
Terbs conjugated like those in cicer, ecevy ocer, ucir*:
Abastecer, to supply with pro-
visions, to victual (a ship).
*aborrecer, to abhor.
acaecer, to happen.
acontecer, to happen.
acrecer, to increase.
adolecer, to fall ill.
adormecer, to lull to sleep;
'Se, to fall asleep. [ful.
* agradecer, to owe, to be grate-
alhorecer, to dawn.
amanecer, to dawn, to be or
to arrive somewhere in the
morning.
amarillecer, to get yellow.
amortecer, to benumb.
anochecer, to grow dark.
^aparecer, to appear.
*apetecer, to wish, to desire.
aterecerse, to grow stiff with
cold.
Blanquecer, to blanch coin.
Canecer, to grow grey.
*carecer de, to want, to be in
want of.
^compadecer, to pity.
*comparecer, to appear.
^complaxier, to please.
conocer, to know.
convalecer, tobe convalescent.
I>ecrecer, to diminish.
denegrecer, to blacken.
desadormecer, to wake.
desaperecer, to disappear.
desbastecer, to plane.
desbravecer, to tame.
desconocer, not to know, to
know badly,
ciesemftrarecer, to tame.
dc5Ctn5ru<ecer, to lose one*s
roughness.
* desencarecer, to get cheaper.
* desenfurecer, to soften anger.
desenmohecer, to free from
rust.
desenmudecer, tohresksiience.
desentorpecer, to recover from
numbness.
desentumecer, to recover from
numbness.
desentristecer, to free from
desfallecer, to faint.
deshumedecer, to desiccate.
*desobedecer, to disobey.
desplacer, to displease.
éZe^vaweccr, to vanish.
displacer, to displease.
Embebecer, to astonish.
embellecer, to embellish.
ew6rat?6ccr, to become furious,
emftrw^ccer, to become brutal,
eiwpe^'ttcííecer, to lessen.
empobrecer, to become poor.
empoltronecerse, to grow lazy.
enaltecer, to elevate, to praise.
enardecer, to inflame,
encalvecer, to grow bald.
encallecer, to grow corns (on
the hands, feet).
encandecer, to heat to a white
heat.
* Of pacer, to pasture, and repacer, to pasture again, the
^8t pare. sing. Ind. Present is not in use.
Spanish Conv. -Grammar. 11
Digitized
by Google
162
Lesson 37.
encanecer, to become grey.
encarecer, to render dear ; to
rise in price.
encorecer, to heal the skin.
encrudecer, to make raw.
encruelecer, to make cruel.
endentecer, to cut the teeth.
endurecer, to harden.
enflaquecer, to get thin.
* enfurecerse, to get enraged.
engrandecer, to enlarge.
enmudecer, to become dumb.
ennegrecer, to blacken.
ennoblecer, to make noble.
* enorgullecerse, to be proud.
enrarecer, to rarify.
enriquecer, to enrich.
enrojecer, to redden.
enronquecer, to become hoarse.
ensoberbecer, to make proud.
ensordecer, to deafen, to be-
come deaf.
enternecer, to soften.
entorpecer, to benumb, to
hinder.
entristecer, to sadden.
envanecer, to make vain,
envejecer, to get old.
envilecer, to degrade.
escarnecer, to scoff.
*establecer, to establish.
Fallecer, to die.
* favorecer, to favour.
florecer, to blossom, bloom.
fortalecer, to fortify.
Guarecerse, to take shelter.
guarnecer, to adorn.
Humedecer, to moisten.
Languidecer, to languish.
*Jlferecer, to merit.
Nacer, to be born.
* Obedecer, to obey.
^ofrecer, to offer.
oscurecer, to become dark.
JPacer, to graze.
*padecer, to suffer.
palidecer, to become pale.
parecer, to seem.
i)erecer, to perish.
*i?erwanecer, to remain.
*i>er<e«ecer, to belong.
Reblandecer, to soften.
'''reconocer, to recognize.
recrwiiecer, to increase.
re^Mvewecer, to grow young
again.
renacer, to be born, to re-
generate.
resplandecer, to shine.
restablecer, to re-establish.
reyereiecer, to grow green
again.
*extremecer, to tremble.
Like conííwcir are conjugated : aducir, to adduce ; ¿radtt-
cir, to translate; producir, to produce; dedu^r, to deduct;
eíí«*cir, to elicit; inducir, to induce; introducir, to introduce;
reducir, to reduce ; reprodÍMCJr, to reproduce ; sedu^cir, to seduce.
Formerly the /Jres. Jwd. and )Sm6;. of the verbs
in ucir terminated in uzgo and uzga (traduzgo^ traduzga)
instead of uzeo and uzea.
The Fourth Class of irregular verbs consists en-
tirely of verbs belonging to the third conjugation. They
change the e of the stem into i, as will be seen by the
following Model. All the forms not mentioned below,
or not marked by bolder type are regular.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Irregular V^erbs continued.
163
Pedir, to ask.
Gerund. Pidiendo, asking.
Indicative
Definite.
Present,
Imperative.
Pido, I ask
Pedí, I asked Pide
(tú), ask fthou).
pides
pediste
pedid,
ask (you).
pide
pidió
pida
v., do ask.
pedimos
pedimos
pedis
pedisteis
piden.
pidieron.
Subjunctive.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
Conditional.
Pida, I ask
Pidiese, that
Pidiere, that Pidiera, that I
I asked
I shall ask
should ask
pidas
pidieses
pidieres
pidieras
pida
pidiese
pidiere
pidiera
pidamos
pidiésemos
pidiéremos
pidiéramos
pidáis
pidieseis
pidiereis
pidierais
pidan.
pidiesen.
pidieren.
pidieran.
The following verbs are C4)iijiigated like pedir:
-^T.^.— Verbs in -gir change g into j before a and o, as
from colegir, to gather, colijo, colija, etc.
* Ceñir, to gird.
colegir, to gather.
to
to
comedirse, to moderate one
self.
^competir, to emulate,
compete.
*concebir, to conceive.
conseguir, to succeed.
constreñir, to constrain,
oblige.
^corregir, to correct.
Derretir, to melt.
desceñir, to ungird.
* descomedirse, to act or speak
unmannerly.
deservir, to be disobliging.
desleír, to dissolve.
desmedirse, to act or speak
recklessly.
*despedir, to discharge (a ser-
■ vant, etc.).
* despedirse, to bid farewell.
desteñir, to lose colour, to
stain.
*Elegir, to select.
*ernbestir, to attack.
engreír, to make proud; -se,
to bloat, to swell.
envestir, to invest (obsolete).
estreñir, to obstruct, to con-
stipate.
'''expedir, to despatch.
Freir, to fry.
* Gemir, to lament, to groan.
Henchir, to fill.
heñir, to knead, to mould.
Impedir, to prevent.
inseguir, to follow.
11*
Digitized
by Google
164
Lesson 37.
investir, to invest.
*Medir, to measure.
* Pedir, to ask for (things), to
require, to order.
^perseguir, to persecute.
proseguir, to continue.
receñir, to gird tight.
recolegir, to gather (deduct).
reelegir, so re-elect.
refreir, to fry well.
^*Begir, to govern (Pr. rijo).
rehenchir, to fill up again.
"^reir, to laugh*. [der.
*reñir, to fight (cocks, etc.), to
scold.
^repetir, to repeat.
reteñir, to dye again, to sound,
to tinkle ♦♦.
^revestir, to clothe anew.
* Seguir, to follow.
*servir, to serve.
*sonreir, to smile.
subseguir, to immediately
follow.
* Teñir, to dye.
* Vestir, to clothe.
* rendir, to render, to surren-
^o^e.— For the sake of euphony, all the verbs in which
the termination of the infinitive -ir is preceded by iT, Uj or
chj drop the i, whenever one of the aforesaid consonants would
otherwise be followed by ie or <o. Thus:
Infinitive. Gerund.
Beñir riñendo (and not riñiendo).
Henchir hinchendo ( » » hinchiendo).
Definite,
riñó (and not riñió).
hinchó ( » » hinchió).
Future Subj.
riñere,
hinchere.
Words.
la caza.
The chase, \
hunting, /
the way, el camino,
the opportunity, la ocasión.
the position, la posición.
the expense, el gasto, él des-
embolso.
the neighbourhood, las cer-
canías, la vecindad.
the payment, el pago, salario.
the sword, la espada.
the workman, el obrero.
the power, el poder.
the cloak, la capa, el abrigo.
the glass, el vaso.
the lie, la mentira.
southern, meridional.
noxious, dañoso, nocivo.
it is cold, hace frió.
* V'erbs in eir drop one t whenever two f s should meet,
thus: riendo, laughing (instead of riiendo)\ riese, that he laughed
(instead of riiese).
** Beteñir, in the signif. "to sound, to tinkle," is also written
retiñir (fr. tañer). The conjugation is the same.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Irregular Verbs continued. 165
Tradncción. 60.
Where are you taking (use the Pres. of to lead) that
dog? I am taking (lead) it hunting. Where do you think
(that) this way leads (subj.), if it does not lead to Barce-
lona? Where do you think (that) this plant grows (subj,)^
I do not believe it (n, creo que) grows but (más que) in South
America. I obey my parents: obey yours! Do obey me!
I offer you the best opportunity to remain in your situation.
Where did you lead (I)ef.) me yesterday? The master did not
wish (no quiso) me to translate {tr, that I translated) the
story. I limit (tr, reduce) all my expenses. My brothers
also limited (Bef,) theirs. I recognize the country where I
was born (Bef.), What do you want of me? We often want
things which would be very dangerous to us. I asked (Bef.)
(for) my payment, and the other workmen asked (for) theirs
likewise. Ask what (lo que) you please {tr. wish), I shall
give it you. I bade farewell (Bef.) to (de) my friends, who
followed (Bef.) me sighing to the (street-door) door of the
house. (It is God's will) God wishes that we serve all men
as much as [it] is in our power. Take {tr. clothe yourself
with) your cloak, it is cold. The foreigner filled (Bef) his
glass and promised (prometió)j laughing, that he would correct
himself. I detest (the) lies! Do not laugh! Why do you
not wish me to laugh {tr. that I laugh) if all the others
laugh ? I serve my king ; serve (2nd pi.) yours also ! If I did
not fear that you would laugh (fr. reirse), I should beg you
to tell me this story once more. I wish (deseo) you to (that
you) (tú) repeat (subj.) your lesson. The general girt on (Bef.)
his sword. Obliging his friends to remain (quedarse) in the
room, he found the opportunity to say a few words to me.
Conversación.
¿Quo me pidió V.? Le pedí á V. un favor que
puede muy fácilmente ha-
cerme.
¿(}uién (hinchó) llenó mi vaso? No sé, pero me parece que el
criado lo ha llenado.
¿Por qué se rie V.? Me rio, porque V. no entiende
lo que digo.
¿Á quién sigue este perro? Sigue al cazador.
¿Es preciso {is it necessary , Hará V. bien en seguirlo.
must I) que yo siga lo que
su hermano de V. me ha
aconsejado (advised)?
¿Qué corrigió el maestro? Corrigió las faltas que sus dis-
cípulos habían hecho (made)
en la traducción.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
166 Lesson 38.
¡Repita V. la lección que dio Ya la he repetido.
V. esta mañana!
¿Á quién expide V. estos gó- Los expido al comerciante
ñeros (goods)? francés.
¿Se vistieron las señoras (la- No, Señora, aun no se han
dies) ? vestido.
¿De qué se rió el oficial Serió áe]2imeptitxiá(awkward'
(officer)? ness) del recluta (recruit).
¿Quién tiñó este paño? El tintorero (dyer) es quien
lo ha teñido.
¿Ya (already) es tiempo de Si, es preciso que se vista V.
irse (to go)? al instante (directly).
Beading Exercise.
Diversidad de las Provincias de España.
Los Cántabros, entendiendo por este nombre todos los que
hablan el idioma vizcaíno, son unos pueblos sencillos y de no-
toria probidad. Fueron los primeros marineros de Europa, y
han mantenido siempre la fama de excelentes hombres de mar.
Su pais, aunque sumamente áspero, tiene una población nu-
merosísima, que no parece disminuirse con las continuas Co-
lonias que envía á la América. Aunque un vizcaíno se ausente
de su patria, siempre se halla en ella como se encuentre un
paisano suyo. Tienen entre sí tal unión, que la mayor re-
comendación que puede uno tener para con otro, es el mero
hecho de ser vizcaíno; sin más diferencia entre varios de
ellos para alcanzar el favor del poderoso, que la mayor ó menor
inmediación de los lugares respectivos. Ei Señorío de Vizcaya,
Guipúzcoa, Álava y el Reino de Navarra tienen tal pacto en-
tre sí que algunos llaman á estos países las Provincias unidas
de España.
Thirty-eighth Lesson. ~ Lección treinta
y ocho.
The Irregular Yerbs continued.
The Fifth Class of the partly irregular verbs con-
sists entirely of verbs belonging to the tlnrd conjugation,
iiike those of the fourth class, they have e before the
final consonant of the root, and change this e in some
tenses into ie, in other tenses into i, as will be seen
by the following example:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Irregular Verbs continued.
167
Sentir J to feel, to hear, etc.
Gerund. Sintiendo, feeling.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Present.
Present
Imperfect,
Siento, I feel
Sienta, I feel
Sintiese, (thAt)líelt
sientes
sientas
sintieses
siente
sienta
sintiese
sentimos
sintamos
sintiésemos
sentís
sintáis
sintieseis
sienten.
sientan.
sintiesen.
Definite.
Future.
Conditional
Sentí, I felt
Sintiere, (that) I
Sintiera, that 1
shall feel
should feel
sentiste
sintieres
sintieras
sintió
sintiere
sintiera
sentimos
sintiéremos
sintiéramos
sentisteis
sintiereis
sintierais
sintieron.
sintieren.
sintieran.
Imperative.
Siente (tú), feel (thou). Sentid, feel (you).
Sienta Y., \ . . ,
Sientan VV., f ^^ ^^^^-
The same is the ease with the following rerbs:
Adherir, to adhere.
* advertir, to inform, to advise.
* arrepentirse, to repent.
asentir, to consent.
Concernir, to concern.
*conferir, to confer.
consentir, consent.
controvertir, to controvert.
*convertir, to convert, to turn
into.
*Deferir, to confer, to yield.
* desmentir, to give the lie,
to deny.
*diferir, to diflFer, to postpone.
*digerir, to digest.
discernir, to distinguish.
disentir, to be of another
opinion.
* divertir, to divert, to amuse.
JBntregerir, to intermix.
erguir, to raise up.
*Herir, to wound.
*hervir, to glow, to seethe*.
* Inferir, .to follow, to infer.
ingerir, to intrude, to inject.
invertir, to turn round, to
invert. [hood.
* Mentir, to lie, to tell a false-
Pervertir, to pervert.
*preferir, to prefer.
*presentir, to forebode.
proferir, to proffer.
* French: fervent, glowing.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
168
Lesson 88.
*Mefenr^ to refer.
*requerir, to request.
subvertir^ to subvert.
sugerir, to suggest.
resentirse, to resent, to be *Trasferir or transferir, to
angry. [regret. transfer.
* Sentir, to feel, to hear, to *Zaherir, to scold, to mortify.
The Sixth and last Class of the partly irregular
verbs comprises the verbs in uir and üiry in which
u is not mute before i, as in the verb erguir, but where
this vowel is pronounced. They add a y in the follow-
ing cases:
Huir,
to flee*.
Argüir, to argue.
Gerund. Huyendo, fleeing.
Ger. Arguyendo**, arguing,
Present.
Present.
Indie.
Subj.
Indie. Subj.
Huyo, I flee
Huyüf I flee
Arguyo, I ar- Arguya, I ar-
gue gue
huyes
huyas
arguyes arguyas
huye
huya
arguye arguya
huimos
huyamos
argüimos arguyamos
huís
huyáis
argüís arguyáis
huyen.
huyan.
arguyen. arguyan.
Definite.
Definite.
Huí, i fled
Argüí, I argued
huiste
argüíste
huyó
arguyo
huimos
argüimos
huisteis
argüisteis
huyeron.
argüyeron.
Subjunctive.
Subjunctive.
Imperfect.
Future.
Imperfect. Future.
Huyese, (that)
Huyere, (that)
Arguyese, Argüyere,
I fled
I shall flee
(that) I ar- (that) I shall
gued argue
huyeses
huyeres
arguyeses argüyeres
huyese
huyere
arguyese argüyere
huyésemos
huyéremos
arguyésemos arguyéremos
huyeseis
huyereis
arguyeseis argüyereis
huyesen.
huyeren.
arguyesen. argüyeren.
* French
fuir.
** In all the forms where ii is not followed by i, the diaeresis
(crema), being
superfluous, is dropped.
Digitized by Google
The Irregular Verbs continued.
169
Conditional.
Huyera, (that) I should flee
huyeras
huyera
huyéramos
huyerais
huyeran.
Imperative.
Huye (tú), flee (thou).
Huid, flee (you).
huya V,, do flee.
N.B, — In comparing y
must be born in mind that y shows simply
change, whilst y implies irregularity.
The same rules apply to:
Conditional,
Arguyera, (that) I should argue
arguyeras
arguyera
arguyéramos
arguyerais
arguyeran.
Imperative.
Arguye (tú), argue (thou).
Argüid, argue (you).
arguya Y,, do argue,
and y in the above table, it
a euphonic
* Atribuir, to attribute.
Circuir, to surround.
* concluir, to flnish, to conclude.
confluir, to meet (of rivers).
constituir, to constitute.
* construir, to build.
*contribu{r, to contribute.
Derruir, to demolish.
desobstruir, to clear away.
destituir, to deprive, to dis-
miss.
destruir, to destroy.
diluir, to dissolve.
*disminuir, to diminish.
*distribuir, to distribute.
Estatuir, to enact.
excluir, to exclude.
Fluir, to flow.
Gruir, to crank.
Imbuir, to imbue.
imbuirse, to appropriate.
Hncluir, to include.
*influir, to influence.
instituir, to institute.
Hnstruir, to instruct.
IJuir, to free from taxes.
Obstruir, to obstruct.
Prostituir, to prostitute.
Mecluir, to seclude.
reconstituir, to re-establish.
reconstruir, to rebuild.
redargüir, to retort.
refluir, to flow back.
rehuir, to withdraw (from
doing a thing).
*restituir, to restore.
^retribuir, to reward, to pay
back.
* Sustituir or 5w6s¿i¿mr, to
substitute.
Words.
The picture, el cuadro.
the engraving | la estampa,
(copperplate), / la lámina.
the superior, el jefe.
the absence, la ausencia.
the stomach, el estómago.
the projectile, el proyectil.
the vice, ei vicio.
the punishment, e2 castigo.
the knowledge, ei conoci-
miento.
the diligence, ia diligencia.
the condition, Za condición.
the levity, frivolity, ?a ligereza.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
170 Lesson 38.
the attention, la atención. contemptible, \ , . , ,
just, jtisto. despicable, / aespreciaoie.
sage, wise, sabio. to accept, aceptar.
lively, vivo. to escape, escapar.
feeble, débil.
Traducción. 61.
I prefer these pictures to those engravings. We prefer
(the) virtue to (the) beauty. Did (Def.) you prefer wine or
beer? I should prefer beer if it were good. I inform my
superior by letter that I cannot (podré) depart to-morrow.
These gentlemen felt very well that they were wrong (to be
wrong, no tener razón). I did not think that he would feel
so much (from vivo, lively) the absence of his best friend.
God distributes all his gifts justly and wisely. To whoni do
you attribute your misfortune (desgracia), to yourself or to
others? Many people never feel the rudeness ("/o iwcímvemewíe)
of their behaviour. My stomach is very weak ; it digests (no — )
scarcely (casi) anything. A man who lies is always contemp-
tible. We never lie; why will you not believe us? Good
children always cling {tr. adhere) to their parents (padres).
The new projectiles wounded (Def.) a great many soldiers.
Restore me what yon have taken (me)l We (avoid) flee bad
company (pi.). Flee (from, tr. the) vice, for it makes thee
unhappy. I conclude from your letter that you will not ac-
cept my conditions. I fled (Def.) when I saw the hostile
(enemigo) rider come. The culprit (el reo) was well aware
{tr. felt [Bef.l well) that, although he denied, he could (podia)
not escape (the) punishment. We all feel that we want (haber
menester) one another (pi.). I repent (of) my levity and
I b^g yon to pardon me this time. Misfortune converts
better than the best sermons {sermon, m.). We amused our-
selves much to-day; do you also enjoy yourself? Thou liest,
child! Do not lie, because (the) lies offend (ofender) God. We
attain knowledge only by great diligence and great attention.
GonyersacióD.
¿Qué arguye V. de lo que he Arguyo de sus palabras deV.
dicho? que no tiene razón.
¿Qué hará V. con ese di- Lo distribuiré entre (among)
ñero ? los pobres.
¿ Por qué huye V. ? Huyo, porque tengo miedo de
que el perro me muerda.
¿En qué instruye V. á los En la historia y en la geo-
nifios ? grafía.
¿Ha restituido V. el dinero Se lo restituí ayer.
que le ha prestado (lent)
mi primo?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
V^erbs entirely irregular. 171
¿Por qué destruye V. ese her- No lo destruyo; quiero sólo
meso cuadro? limpiarlo (to clean).
¿Se divierte V. en esta com- Me divierto mucho, pero el
pañia? afio antes me divertí más.
¿Siente V. mucho dolor? Ahora no siento nada.
¿Se divirtió su hermana de Y. Se divirtió muchísimo.
ayer en el concierto?
¿Prefiere V. partir hoy ó ma- Prefiero partir mafiana, porque
fiana? hoy no estoy bueno.
¿Hierve el agua? Todavía no hierve, pero her-
virá luego.
¿Se quejó (complained) el mi- Sintiéndose herido, se quejó.
litar (soldier )1
Beading Exercise.
Diversidad de las Provincias de España. (Continuación.)
Los de Asturias y las Montañas hacen sumo aprecio de
8u genealogía y de la memoria de haber sido aquel país el
que produjo la reconquista de Espafia con la expulsión de
nnestros abuelos. Su población demasiada para la miseria y
estrechez de la tierra, hace que un número considerable de
ellos se emplee continuamente en Madrid en la librea, que es
la clase inferior de criados ; de modo que, si yo fuese natural
de este país y me hallara con coche en la Corte, examinaría
con mucha madurez los papeles de mis cocheros y lacayos,
por no tener algún día la mortificación de ver á un primo
mío echar cebada á mis muías, ó á uno de mis tíos limpiarme
los zapatos. Sin embargo de todo esto varias familias respe-
tables de esta Provincia se mantienen con el debido lustre,
son acreedoras á la mayor consideración, y producen continua-
mente Oficiales del más alto mérito en el Ejército y Marina.
Los Gallegos en medio de la pobreza de su tierra son
robustos ; se esparcen por toda Espafia á emprender los traba-
jos más duros, para llevar á sus casas algún dinero á costa de
tan penosa industria. Sus soldados, aunque carecen de aquel
lucido exterior de otras naciones, son excelentes para la in-
fantería por su subordinación, dureza de cuerpo y hábito de
sufírir incomodidades de hambre, sed y cansancio.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
172 Lesson 39.
Thirty-ninth Lesson. — Lección treinta
y nueve.
Verbs entirely irregular or with irregularities other-
wise not classified.
Besides the verbs hitherto enuraerated, there are
others in Spanish, which must be considered alniost
entirely irregular, as their deviations from the regular
verbs are as a rule too manifold and too considerable
to be comprised in classes. We therefore give them in
their alphabetical order, as is usual in most Spanish
grammars; still, some of these quite irregular verbs show
a certain similarity in their conjugation, and it will be
rather advantageous for the pupil to learn those together
which are similarly conjugated. The order in which
they ought to be learnt is indicated by the number in
brackets after the English word. The forms not indi-
cated or not distinguished by bolder type are regular.
1. Andar^ to walk. (1.)
Pres. Indie. Ando, etc.
Imperf. » Andaba, etc.
Defin. » Anduvey anduviste, anduvo, anduvimos, an-
duvisteis, anduvieron,
Imperf. Subj. Anduviese, anduvieses, anduviese, andu-
viésemos, etc.
Future » Anduviere, anduvieres, etc.
Condit. » Anduviera, anduvieras, etc.
N,B.—lñ the same way is conjugated desandar, to go
back the same road.
2. Asir^ to seize. (20.)
Pres. Indie. Asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asís, asen.
Pres. Subj. Asga, asgas, asga, asgamos, asgáis, asgan.
Imperative. i Ase (tú) I \asga V.I ¡asid!
^.jB.— Like asir, desasir, to let go.
3. Caber, to give way, to contain. (4.)
Pres. Indie. Qaepo, cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabéis, caben.
Defin. » Cupe, cupiste, cupo, cupimos, cupisteis, cu-
pieron.
Future » Cabré, etc.
Condit. » Cabria, etc.
Pres. Subj. Quepa, quepas, quepa, quepamos, quepáis,
quepan.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Verbs entirely irregular.
173
Defin.
Pres. Subj.
Imperf. »
Future »
Condit. >
Imperative.
Gerund.
Imperf. Suljj. Cupiese, cupieses, cupiese, cupiésemos, etc.
Future » Cupiere, cupieres, etc.
Condit. » Cupiera, cupieras, etc.
Imperative. iCabe (tú)! \ quepa V.! i cabed!
4. Caer, to fall. (6,)
Pres. In die. Caigo, caes, cae, caemos, caéis, caen.
Pres. Subj. Caiga, caigas, caiga, caigamos, caigáis, caigan.
Gerund. Cayendo, Past part. Caído.
jY'.JB.— Like caer y
decaer, to decay,
recaer, to have a relapse, fall upon.
5. Oir, to hear. (8.)
Pres. Indie. Oigo, oyes, oye, oímos, oís, oyen,
Oi, oiste, oyó, oímos, oísteis, oyeron.
Oiga, oigas, oiga, oigamos, oigáis, oigan.
Oyese, oyeses, etc.
Oyere, oyeres, etc.
Oyera, oyeras, etc.
\Oye (tú)! [Oiga V.! ¡oíd!*
Oyendo, Past part. Oído.
^.^.—Like oir,
desoir, not to listen to (disobey),
entreoír, to bear indistinctly,
trasoír, to misunderstand.
N,B,—y shows a euphonic change: y an irregularity.
6. Dar, to give. (2.)
Pres. Indie. Doy, das, da, damos, dais, dan.
Daba, dabas, daba, dábamos, dabais, daban.
Di, diste, dio, dimos, disteis, dieron.
Dé, des, dé, demos, deis, den.
Diese, dieses, diese, diésemos, dieseis, diesen.
Diere, dieres, etc.
Diera, dieras, etc.
iDá (tú)! idé V.! ¡dad!
The same desdar, to untwist a rope.
7. Decir, to say, to tell. (9.)
Pres. Indie. Digo, dices, dice, decimos, decís, dicen.
Decía, decías, decía, decíamos, decíais, decían.
Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, dijisteis, dijeron.
Diré, dirás, dirá, diremos, diréis, dirán.
Diría, dirías, diría, diriamos, diríais, dirían.
Imperf.
Defin. »
Pres. Subj.
Imperf. »
Future »
Condit. »
Imperative.
Imperf.
í)efin. »
Future »
Condit. »
* Compare the old French word Oyez, hear you, from the
verb Ouir,
Digitized by VjOOQIC
174 Lesson 39.
Pres. Subj. Diga, digas, diga, digamos, digáis, digan.
Imperf. » Dijese, dijeses, dijese, etc.
Future » Dijere, dijeres, etc.
Condit. » Dijera, dijeras, etc.
Imperative. [Di (tú)! \diga V.I ¡decidí
Gerund. I>iciendo. Past part. Dicho.
Like ííccir are conjugated its compounds as contradecir,
to contradict; desdecir, to countermand; predecir, to predict;
only in the 2nd Sing. Imperat. they do not form ~di but
-dice, thus: desdice (tú). The two verbs bendecir, to bless,
and maldecir, to curse, form the Future, Conditional, and
Imperative regularly, as: Put. bendeciré and maldeciré ; Cond.
bendeciría and maldecirla; Imperat. bendice (tú) and maZ-
c?¿ce ("¿ty. They have a double form for the past parti-
ciple—viz,, bendecido and maldecido, which, being a real par-
ticiple, is used in the compound tenses of the verb (with
haber); whereas the second past ]^b,yííc\^Ig maldito B,ná bendito
is a verbal adjective, and therefore used with ser and estar.
(See Less. 41.)
Word».
The youth (young man), el
the arrival I ^^ ^^^^^^
tne arrival, ^ ^^ ¿¿e^a^^.
the army, el ejército. the mutton, el carnero.
the purse, el bolsillo. the beef, Za vaca.
the policeman, cZ municipal. the beggar, eZ mendigo.
the word, Zo palabra. the pains, cZ trabajo.
the thunderbolt, eZ Zri^eno. pitiful, charitable, piadoso, -a.
the weddinff I ^^ ^^^^' respectable, honest, honrado.
^' \ las nupcias. to keep, to fulfil, cumplir con.
the cask, la bota. to take care, \ andar con
the ewer, gallon, eZ cubo. to march carefully, / cuidado.
the ear, Za oreja. to descend, bajar.
the cook (f.), la cociHera. to order, command, mandar.
Tradacción. 62.
Napoleon passed (tr. went) (over) the Alps (los Alpes)
with his army. Where did (Imperf.) you go last night ? My
friend told me that he was going (Imperf.) to Paris. It is
not yet (aun no . ..) sure (seguro) whether I shall go (Fut.)
to my cousin's (f) wedding. How much did this cask hold?
It held (Def.) six gallons of wine. I do not think (that)
this theatre will hold 3,000 persons. How much do you think
(that) this purse vrill hold? I fall from the tree. Do not
fall ; there lies (hay) a stone I The child will fall, if you do
not (take) care. Do you hear the noise? I do not hear any-
thing {tr. I hear nothing); we also hear nothing. Do you
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Verbs entirely irregular.
175
hear (Def.) what this man says? Many people have ears,
yet they do not hear. Yesterday I heard (Def,) the news of
the queen's arrival. Listen, my friend! Was not this (a)
thnnder? I heard nothing. The policeman seizes the thief
(al ladrón) in (en) the street. If I heard that you did not
keep your word, I should be very sorry. When I heard
(Gerund,) the thunder, I went down the mountain. What
does the cook (f.) boil? I boil beef and mutton. What do
you give me to (para) eat? I give you ham (jamón), bread,
and wine. He gave (Imperf,) me thirty dollars. Last week
I gave (Def.) you a hundred dollars. The charitable girl
gave (Def.) the beggar some money. Do give me a cigar
and some matches! I have given you nothing. What dost
thou say, child? I say that my father sent (Def.) you the
money yesterday. Tell me, sir, will you give me my salary,
or not? We always speak (the) truth, but you have not
spoken it. Tell me, shall you obey your master if he orders
you [to do] something? Do not say that you are right, for
the whole world knows (sahe) that you are wrong {tr. that
you are [have] not right).
Gonyersación.
¿Por dónde anduvo ayer su
amigo de V.?
¿Ha andado V. mucho hoy?
¿Quo me da V.?
¡Dé y. algo á la desdichada
madre !
¿Qué le dieron á V. mis her-
manas?
¿Qué quiere V.?
¿Qué dice V.?
V. dijo que yo no había
cumplido mi deber ; ¿ es ver-
dad ?
¿ Qué dice V. de este tiempo ?
¿Qué hace V. en la cocina
(kitchen) ?
Fué á ver (to see, to pay a
visit) Á la marquesa de M.,
qpe llegó ayer, y nosotros
fuimos también.
Hoy no; pero ayer anduve
mucho.
Le doy á V. lo que V. me
dio ayer.
Ya le di ayer algún dinero.
Me dieron algunos libros que
mi hermano les dio el otro
día.
Le ruego á V. que me dé lo
que me ha prometido.
No digo nada.
¡No es verdad! ¡No he dicho
tal cosa!
¿ Qué quiere V. que diga, sino
que hace mal tiempo (it is
bad weather) ?
Cuezo la carne (meat) para
la comida de mediodía
(dinner).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
176 Lesson 40.
i Oiga V.I ¿No ha oído V. el No, sefior, no oigo nada.
trueno ?
¿ Á quién ha bendecido Jesu- Á todos los pueblos del mundo.
cristo?
Beading Exercise.
Diversidad de las Provincias de España. (Continuación.)
Los Castellanos son de todos los pueblos del mundo los
que merecen la primacía en linea de lealtad. Cuando el
ejército del primer Rey de España de la casa de Francia
quedó arruinado en la batalla de Zaragoza, la sola provincia
de Soria dio á su Soberano un ejército nuevo y numeroso con
que salir á campaña, y fué el que ganó las victorias, de que
resultó la destrucción del ejército y bando austríaco. El ilustre
historiador que refiere las revoluciones del principio de este siglo
con todo el rigor y verdad que pide la historia para distinguirse
de la fábula, pondera tanto la fidelidad de estos pueblos que
dice será eterna en la memoria de los Beyes. Esta provincia
aún conserva cierto orgullo nacido de su antigua grandeza,
que hoy no se conserva sino en las ruinas de las ciudades y
en la honradez de sus habitantes.
Extremadura produjo los conquistadores del nuevo mundo,
y ha continuado siendo madre de insignes guerreros. Sus pue-
blos son poco afectos á las letras; pero los que entre ellos
las han cultivado no han tenido menos éxito que sus com-
patriotas en las armas.
Fortieth Lesson. — Lección cuarenta.
The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued.
8. Dormir, to sleep. (11.)
Pres. Indie. Duermo, duermeSy duerme, dormimos, dormis,
duermen.
DefiUi » Dormi, dormiste, durmió, dormimos, dormisteis,
durmieron.
Pres. Subj. Duerma, duermas, duerma, durmamos, dur-
máis, duerman.
Imperf. » Durmiese, durmieses, durmiese, etc.
Future » Durmiere, durmieres, etc.
Condit. » Durmiera, durmieras, etc.
Imperative, \ Duerme (tú)! ¡duerma V.I ¡dormid!
Gerund. Durmiendo. Past part. Dormido.
N.B,— The same, adormir, to lull.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued. 177
9. Hacer, to do, to make, to let. (10.)
Pres. Indie. HagOy haces, hace, hacemos, hacéis, hacen.
Defín. » Hicej hiciste, hizo, hicimos , hicisteis, hicieron.
Future » Haréj harás, hará, haremos, haréis, harán,
Oondit. » Haría, harías, haría, haríamos, haríais,
harían.
Pres. Subj. Haga, hagas, haga, hagamos, hagáis, hagan.
Imperf. » Hiciese, hicieses, hiciese, etc.
Future » Hiciere, hicieres, hiciere, etc.
Condit. » Hiciera, hicieras, hiciera, etc.
Imperative. \Haz (tú) I ¡haga V.! ¡haced!
Gerund. Haciendo. Past part. Hecho,
All the compoands follow hacer, such as:
contrahacer, to counterfeit,
deshacer, to undo,
rehacer, to do anew.
Satisfacer (to satisfy) is also conjugated like hacer, ex-
cept in the Imperat., which forms satisface. The Condit. Subj.
is satisfaciera rather than satisficiera, and the Imperf. Subj.
satisfaciese rather than satisficiese, — Liquefacer, to liquefy,
and rarefacer, to rarify, form liquefaré, rarefaré, etc.
10. Ir, to go; irse, to go away. (S.)
Pres. Indie. V€yy, vas, va, vamos, vais, van,
Imperf. » Iba, ibas, iba, Íbamos, ibais, iban.
Defin. » Fui, fuiste, fué, fuÁnmos, ¡fuisteis, fueron.
Future » Iré, irás, irá, iremos, iréis, irán.
Condit. » Iría, irías, iría, iríamos, iríais, irían.
Pres. Subj. Vaya, vayas, vaya, vayamos, vayáis,
vayan,
Imperf. » Fuese, fueses, fúmese, etc.
Future » Fuere, fueres, fuere, etc.
Condit. » Fuera, fueras, fulera, etc.
Imperative. \Vé (tú)! \vaya V.! |id!
Gerund, Yendo. Past part. Ido.
11. Morir, to die, like Dormir, (12,)
Pres. Indic. muero; Pres. Subj. muera; Defin. mori, etc.; él
murió; Futur. Subj. muriere; Condit. Subj. muriera;
Imperf. Subj. muriese, etc. ; except the Past part., which
is muerto.
The same premorir, to die before another.
12. Poder, to be able. (13.)
Pres. Indic. Fuedo, puedes, puede, podemos, ^podéis, pueden.
l^efin. » Pude, pudiste, pudo, pudimos, pudisteis,
pudieron,
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 12
Digitized by VjOOQIC
178
Lesson 40.
Future Indie. Podré, etc.
Condit. » Podría, etc.
Pres. Subj.
Pueda, puedas, pueda, podamos, podáis,
puedan.
Pudiese, etc.
Pudiere, etc.
Pudiera, etc.
Pudiendo, Past part. Podido.
13. Poner, to put, to place. (16,)
Pres. Indic. Pongo, pones, pone, ponemos, ponéis, ponen.
Puse, pusiste, puso, pusimos, pusisteis, pus-
ieron.
Pondré, pondrás, pondrá, etc.
Pondría, pondrías, etc.
Ponga, pongas, ponga, etc.
Pusiese, pusieses, pusiese, etc.
Pusiere, pusieres, etc.
Pusiera, pusieras, etc.
\Pon (tú)! ¡ponga V.! ¡poned!
Puesto.
Likewise the compounds, as: componer, to compose; de-
poner, to depose, etc.
14. Podrir, to rot (obsolete). (14.)
Pres. Indic. Pudro, ptidres, pudre, jyodnmos, ]poáris, pudren.
Podrí, podriste, pudrió, podrimos, podristeis,
pudrieron.
Pudra, pudras, etc.
Pudriese, etc.
Pudriere, etc.
Pudriera, etc.
Pudriendo. Past part. Podrido.
^.jB.— Some grammarians prefer the Condicional Indic.
pudría (inst. of podría), to distinguish it from the correspond-
ing form of pod^r. In fact, podrir is only used with the
stem in o in the Inñnitive, and in the Past Part., podrido,
otherwise being replaced by pudrir, which in its turn adopts
the for its Past Participle. The derivative repudrirse, to long,
to wish ardently, is regular.
15. Querer, to be willing, to wish, to love. (15.)
Pres. Indic. Quiero, quieres, quiere, queremos, queréis,
quieren.
Defin. » Quise, quisiste, quiso, quisimos, quisisteis,
quisieron.
Future » Querré, querrás, querrá, etc.
Imperf.
Future
Condit.
Gerund.
Defin.
Future -»
Condit. »
Pres. Subj.
Imperf. »
Future »
Condit. »
Imperative.
Past part.
Defin.
Pres. Subj.
Imperf. »
Future »
Condit. »
Gerund.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued.
179
Condit. Indie. Querriuy querrías, etc.
Pres. Snbj. Quiera, quieras, quiera, etc.
Quisiese, etc.
Quisiere, etc.
Quisiera, etc.
\ Quiere (tú)! ¡quiera V.! ¡quered!
Queriendo. Past part. Querido.
16. Saber^ to know, to be able. (5.)
Pres. Indie. Sé, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabéis, saben.
Supe, supiste, supo, supimos, supisteis, su-
piaron.
Sabré, sabrás, sabrá, sabremos, sabréis, sabrán.
Sobria, sabrías, etc.
Sepa, sepas, etc.
Supiese, etc.
Supiere, etc.
Supiera, etc.
¡Sabe (tú)! \sepa V.! ¡sabed!
Sabiendo. Past part. Sabido.
17. Salir, to go out; to arise. (18.)
Pres. Indie. Salgo, sales, sale, salimos, salis, salen.
Salí, saliste, salió, salimos, salisteis, salieron.
Saldré, saldrás, etc.
Saldría, saldrías, etc.
Salga, salgas, etc.
Saliese, etc.
Saliere, etc.
Saliera, etc.
i Sal (tú)! i salga V.! ¡salid!
18. Valer, to be worth (17), is conjugated like
salir, as are also all the eompounds of salir and valer, as:
sobresalir, to surpass, to be prominent; equivaler, to be
univalent.
The Imperative of valer, however, is more rarely val
than, vale. The compounds of salir and valer form a regular
Imperative mood. Thus: Sobresale tú ; preválete ! (avail thyself!)
19. Traer, to bring, to feteh. (7.)
Pres. Indie. Traigo, traes, trae, traemos, traéis, traen.
Traia, traias, traía, traíamos, traíais, traían.
Traje, trajiste, trajo, trajimos, trajisteis,
trajeron.
Traeré, etc.
Traería, etc.
Traiga, traigas, etc.
12*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Imperf.
Futura >
Condit. »
Imperative.
Gerund.
Defin.
Future »
Condit. »
Pres. Snbj.
Imperf. »
Future »
Condit. »
Imperative.
Gerund.
Deftn.
Future »
Condit. f>
Pres. Subj.
Imperf. »
Future »
Condit. »
Imperative.
Imperf.
Defin. »
Puture »
Condit. »
ires. Subj.
180
Lesson 40.
Imperf. Subj. Trajese, etc.
Future > Trajere, etc.
Condit. » Trajera, etc.
Imperative. I Trae (tú)! \traiga V.! ¡traed!
Gerund. Trayendo. Past part. Traído.
N.B.—The same retraer, to retract.
20. Venir, to come. (18.)
Pres. Indie. Vengo, vienes, viene, venimos, venís, vienen.
Defin. » Vine, viniste, vino, vinimos*, vinisteis, vinieron.
Future » Vendré, vendrás, vendrá, etc.
Condit. » Vendría, etc.
Pres. Subj. Venga, vengas, etc.
Imperf. » Finiese, vinieses, etc.
Future » Finiere, etc.
Condit. » Viniera, etc.
Imperative. \Ven (tú)! ¡vengra V.! ¡venid!
Gerund. Viniendo. Past part. Venido.
Likewise all the compounds of venir, os: ' convenir, to
agree, to be convenient; revenir, to come back, etc. The Im-
perative mood of these verbs occurs but seldom.
21. Ver, to see. (J21.)
Pres. Indie. Veo, ves, ve, vemos, vóis, ven.
Imperf. » Veía**, veías, veía, veíamos, veíais, veian.
Detín. » Vi, viste, vio, vimos, visteis, vieron.
Future » Veré, verás, etc.
Condit. » Vería, verías, etc.
Pres. Subj. Vea, veas, etc.
Imperf. » Viese, vieses, etc.
Future » Viere, etc.
Condit. » Viera, etc.
Imperative. ¡Ve (tú)! ¡vea V.! ¡ved!
Gerund. Viendo. Past part. Visto.
Likewise the compounds, as prever, to foresee; rever, to
see again, etc.; whereas proveer, to provide, is regular.
Words.
The straw, la paja.
the camp, el campo.
., r J. Í la hacienda,
the fortune, ( ^^ ^¿^^^
the cage, la jaula.
the favour, el favor.
the asS;
I, donkey, <
el asno,
el hurro.
the flower-pot, el florero.
the window, la ventana,
the chair, la silla.
the coat, el abrigo.
f Old and rare forme: veniste, venimos, venisteis.
** Old form: via, etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued. 181
infamous, infame, to distribute, distribuir,
sick, ill, enfermo. to order, to command, manejar.
slowly, lentamente, despacio, to afflict, afligir,
quickly, ligero, de prisa, to quarrel, to scold, reñir,
willingly, with pleasure, con regañar,
muclio gusto, to comply with (a wish), Wenar.
too, too much, demasiado, to accept, aceptar.
Tradnccióu. 68.
1. Do the children sleep? They do not yet sleep, but
I thought (that) they slept. Do you think that I sleep? Do
not sleep the whole day ! The dog slept on the straw before
the house. How am I to (quiere V. que) sleep if you make
(fr. hacer) so much noise ? The soldiers slept (Imperf.), when
the general came into the camp. I die of hunger if you do
not give me something to eat. Napoleon died (Def.) on (en)
the island of St. Helena the 5th of May, 1821. Leónidas and
his gallant companions died (Def,) at Thermopylae. Die,
infamous (man)! — He is dying. — He is dead. At his
^eath the father distributed his fortune among (entre) his
sons. What are you doing (Pres. Ind,) here? I am making
a cage for the bird of my little sister. I did (Def,) all (that)
I could (Imperf,) do for a friend. Wilt thou do what I have
ordered thee? No, I will not do it, because I cannot do it.
I should [like to] do it, if you would also do me a favour.
Always do (thou) thy duty, and thou wilt be contented and
bappy.
2. My friend did (Def.) what his father wished. Where are
you going, my friend ? — I am going, to see my brother, who
is ill. It is (already) time ; let us go away (1st pers. plur. Im-
perative from irse)\ You go too slowly; go more quickly.
Sancho Panza rode (Imperf, of ir) on his donkey like a Pa-
triarch. I went (Def) to tell him that I could not come.
Do go home! There is nothing more to (que) (be done) do!
I cannot tell you how much (cuanto) the behaviour of this
Bttan afflicted me. We cannot do all (that) we like. I could
(Def.) not come. Could not the merchant give you back the
money which you had lent him? I put (Pres.) these books
on the table; put yours on it, too! I put (Def) the flower-
pots in {tr. en) the window. Where do you want me to put
(say mil you that I put) my hat? Put it on the chair! If
you put (Imperf.) it on the table, (papa) father would scold
(you). Gk>d did not wish (Def.) that the desire of the poor
man should be accomplished (reflective: that the d. etc. accom-
plished itself, tr. cumplirse). I wish you not to go out to-day.
if he wished us to go out, he would tell (us so) it us.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
182 Lesson 40.
3. The enemy will not accept our conditions. I know
that yon have done what you could (do). Do yon know that
the countess arrived yesterday? I did not know it, but
the footman told me so (me lo). If I knew that you would
go out to-night, I should not come. How much is this coat
worth ? It may be worth (valdrá) about 20 dollars. Bring (in)
the flowers which I (have) bought this morning! I shall bring
them directly. Do you come at last, my friend? As you
see, I come; but I should not have come if the tailor (el
sastre) had not brought my coat. He did not come (Def.)^
because you had not invited him. Do come! I shall intro-
duce you to my cousin (f.) Yesterday I saw a Turk or a
Persian on the promenade. Did you see what I had written ?
I could not see it, because I was too busy (ocupado). 1 shall
see what I shall be able to do for you.
Conversacion.
¿Duerme V.? No duermo. ¿Qué tiene V.
que decirme?
¿Por qué está V. triste? Porque mi mejor amigo ha
muerto.
¿Á que edad (at what age) Murió á los treinta y seis
murió su tía de V.? afios.
¿Qué hace V. en mi cuarto? No hago nada. ¿Cómo haría
cosa alguna en un cuarto
que no es mío?
¿Por qué no hace V. lo que No lo hago, porque no es
le he dicho? justo.
¿Qué haremos mañana? Haced lo que queráis.
¿ Hizo frío (cold) ayer en su Sí, hizo mucho frío, pero hoy
cuarto de V.? hace calor (it is warm).
¿Por qué no se levanta V. No puedo levantarme, porque
(do you rise)^ estoy enfermo.
¿Podrá V. comenzar sus lee- Me parece que todavía no
ciones mañana? puedo comenzarlas, porque
no tengo tiempo.
¿Quién puso aquí el florero? El criado lo puso en la mesa.
¿Le gusta (pleases) á Y. la Me gusta muchísimo.
comida (meal)^
¿Quieres mucho á tu her- Sí, la quiero mucho, porque
mana? es muy afable (amiMe).
Beading Exercise.
Diversidad de las Provincias de España. (Continuación.)
Las Andaluces, nacidos y criados en un pais abundante,
delicioso y ardiente, tienen fama de ser algo arrogantes; p©ro
si este defecto es verdadero, debe atribuirse á su clima, siendo
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Present Participle. 188
tan notorio el influjo de lo físico sobre lo moral Las ven-
tajas con que natnraleza dotó aquellas Provincias hacen que
miren con disprecio la pobreza de Galicia, la aspereza de
Vizcaya j la sencillez de Castilla; pero como quiera que toda
esto sea, entre ellos ha habido hombres insignes que han dado
mucho honor á toda España, y en tiempos antiguos los Tra-
janos, Sénecas y otros semejantes, que pueden envanecer al
país en que nacieron. La viveza, astucia y atractivo de las
andaluzas las hace incomparables. Te aseguro, que una de
ellas serla bastante para llenar de confusión el Imperio de
Marruecos, de modo que todos nos matásemos unos á otros.
Los Murcianos participan del carácter de los Andaluces
y Valencianos. Estos últimos están tenidos por hombres de
sobrada ligereza, atribuyéndose este defecto al clima y suelo;
pretendiendo algunos que hasta en los alimentos mismos falta
aquel jugo que se halla en los de otros países. Mi imparcia-
lidad no me permite someterme á esta preocupación por ge-
neral que sea; antes debo observar que los valencianos de este
siglo son ios españoles que más progresos han hecho en las
ciencias positivas y lenguas muertas.
Forty-first Lesson. — Lección cua-
renta y una.
Present Participle. — Del participio de presente.
Verbs in -ar form their Present Participle by chang-
ing ar into ante] those in -er^ -ir change these endings
into 'iente.
amar,
amante,
loving.
pretender,
pretendiente,
pretender.
vivir.
viviente.
(living) alive
(a) The following forms are in -ente, not -iente:
, . expelente, ejecting.
From verbs m -er: impelente, impelling.
El cedente, the assigner. repelente, repelling.
antecedente, previous, ante- ponente, reporter (of a com-
cedent. mittee).
excedente, exceeding. componente, con^)onent.
precedente, preceding, exum^le. el exponente, the applicant.
procedente, proceeding from, el imponente, the depositor.
coming from. el proponente, the proposer.
sohreexcedente, surpassing. ahsolvente, absolving.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
184
Lesson 41.
disolvente, dissolving.
envolvente, involving.
abstergente, detergent.
convergente, converging.
equivcUente, equivalent.
incandescente, incandescent.
transcendente, transcendent.
Prom verbs in -in
Coincidente, concurrent.
reincidente, relapsed, old offen-
der.
concurrente, concurrent, spec-
tator, one of the audience.
ocurrente, witty.
conducente, leading.
preferente, preferent.
referente, referring.
adherente, adherent, follower.
fluente, flowing, fluent.
afluente, affluent.
confluente, confluent.
diluente, diluent.
dimiténte, resigning.
remitente, the sender.
presidente, president, chairman.
residente, resident.
asistente, one of the audience,
an orderly.
consistente, consisting, con-
sistent.
existente, existing.
persistente, persistent.
resistente, resistant.
subsistente, subsistent.
astringente, astringent.
restringente, restraining.
regente, regent.
urgente, urgent, immediate.
suplente, substitute.
(b) The following are altogether irregular:
Decir,
el dicente.
witness.
maldecir.
maldiciente.
cursing, the curser.
convencer.
convincente.
convincing.
abstenerse.
abstinente.
abstaining.
contener,
continente.
the continent.
reir,
riente,
laughing.
sonreír,
sonriente,
smiling.
seguir.
siguiente.
following, next.
padecer.
paciente.
patient.
servir,
sirviente.
servant.
delinquir.
delincuente,
culprit.
dormir.
durmiente.
sleeper.
morir,
muriente,
dying.
poder,
pudiente,
well-to-do.
decaer,
decadente,
decaying.
entender.
inteligente,
intelligent.
obedecer.
obediente,
obedient.
permanecer,
permanente.
permanent.
(c) A few have two distinct
Participles with two
significations:
Acceder, to accede
accedente, the one accidente, accident,
who accedes
fit.
ascender, to ascend
ascendente, up
ascendiente, ances-
(train, etc.)
tor.
Digitized by Google
Present Participle.
185
descender, to des-
cend
pertenecer, to be-
long
poder, can, to be
able
poner, to pat, set
descendente, down
(train, etc.)
perteneciente, be-
longing to
potente, powerful
descendiente, des-
cendant.
pertinente, pertin-
ent.
pudiente, well-to-
do.
jjonen^, reporter (of poniente, west, set-
conseguir, to obtain
ting (sun).
consecuente, conse-
quent, consistent.
a committee)
consiguiente, conse-
quent, natural
(d) The following have no verb
Contraproducente, producing insolvente, insolvent.
contrary results.
diligente, diligent.
incesante, continual.
solverUe, solvent.
transeúnte, a passer-by.
insignificante, insignificant.
intransigente, unyielding.
vigente, existing.
Remark.
Present Participles as such— i.e., with an active signifi-
cation, and preserving the ruling power of the verb, exist no
longer in the Spanish language; thus — Present Participles in
Spanish are used:
(a) as Adjectives— -i.e. :
Una comida abundante, a plentiful dinner.
Una circunstancia agravante.
An aggravating circumstance.
Un clima ardiente, a hot climate.
(b) as Nouns— i.e.:
Los creyentes, the believers.
los protestantes, the protestants.
un asistente, an orderly.
un contribuyente, a taxpayer.
los gobernantes, the rulers.
(c) or otherwise in certain phrases — i.e. :
En dinero contante, ready money.
Corriente, all right.
Le conozco bastante.
I know him very well, or well enough.
Tengo bastante, I have plenty.
Eso es suficiente, that will do.
^0 obstante, notwithstanding.
Tocante 4 eso . . ., as to that . . .
Mediante una cantidad.
For the consideration of a sum.
Dios mediante, if it please Grod.
el declarante, witness.
el delincuente, the culprit,
oflfender.
un reincidente, an old offender.
el demanante, the plaintiff.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
186 Lesson 41.
El 5 deH corriente, on the 5th instant.
Par la presente, by this letter.
Par consiguiente, therefore.
Remark.
As most Spanish verbs have no Present Participle, it is
replaced by an equivalent word or phrase— i.e.:
(a) by a Past Participle with an active signification (see
further Past Participle):
Atrevido, daring. considerado, considerate.
bienvenido, welcome. divertido, amusing.
caído, fallen. los fallecidos, the deaths.
KB.-
Nacer, to be born naciente, rising nacido, born.
entender, to under- inteligente, intelli- entendido, expe-
stand gent rienced.
(b) by a Verbal Adjective:
Charlatán, chatter-box. ladrador, barking.
llorón, weeper. merecedor, deserving.
saltaHn, jumper. mordedor, biting.
aflictivo, afflicting. conservador, conservative.
(c) by a Verbal Noun:
Un comprador, a buyer. un lector, a reader.
un fumador, a smoker. el contraventor, the defaulter.
el testador, the testator. el sucesor, the successor.
el examinador, the examiner, un copista, a copyist.
un procurador, a solicitor. los ftígitivos, the fugitives.
Note how the English Present Participle is rendered
in Spanish:
By a relative clause, to specify a noun or pronoun:
It is a child laughing, es un niño que ríe.
That man carrying the stick, ese que lleva el bastón.
Those passing know him, esos que pasan le conocen.
By the Gerund, in progressive actions:
He was crying, estaba llorando.
He came running, vino corriendo.
KB.— To be going, to be coming, to be leaving, iff
venir, salir:
We are going to the theatre, vamos aH teatro.
He is coming as well, él viene también.
We are leaving to-morrow, mañana nos vamos.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Past Participle.
187
By the Infinitive depending on verbs of "seeing,"
**hearing."
We saw them starting, les vimos marchar.
They heard us calling them, nos oyeron llamarles.
Past Participle.
iíetnar A;.— Spanish Past Participles, either regular or ir-
regular, are treated like adjectives in — o as to inflection.
1. Regular Past Participle. A^erbs in -ar form
their regular Past Participle by changing -ar into
-ado'j those in -er, ir change those endings into -ido,
amar, amado, loved.
beber, bebido, drunk.
vivir, vivido, lived.
2. Irregular Past Participles, They assume va-
rious endings more or less closely connected with their
Latin origin, but ending always in -o.
(a) Yerbs having ai
Abrir, to open;
cubrir, to cover;
decir, to say;
tscr^r, to write;
hazier, to do, make;
imprimir, to print;
morir, to die;
poner, to put;
romper, to break;
ver, to see;
volver, to turn, return;
irregular Past Participle:
ahierto, opened, open.
cubierto, covered.
dicho, said.
etcrOo, written.
hecho, done, made.
impreso, printed.
n^uerto, dead.
pueeio, put.
roto, broken.
visto, seen.
vuelto, turned, returned.
Their compounds are formed in the same way,
with the following exceptions:
Liquefacer, liquefacto, liquefied.
rarefacer, rarefacto, rarefied.
tumefacer, tumefacto, swollen.
putrefacto, putrified.
N,B, —Yvom the obsolete solver, to solve, Past Part.
suelto, loose:
absolver, abeuelto, absolved.
disolver, disuelto, dissolved.
resolver, * resuelto, resolved.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
188
Lesson 4L
(b) Yerbs haying an irregrnlar Past Partíciple besides the
regalar one.
Concerning these verbs having a so-called double
Participle, the pupil must bear in mind that the regu-
lar forms in ado and ido are proper Participles — i.e.,
they form (with haher) the compound tenses of the
verb, as:
He omitido, I have omitted,
whereas the contracted irregular forms are Adjectives^
which generally may only be used with ser and estar ^ as:
Una cosa está completa, a thing is complete.
Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles.*
Participle. Verbal Adjective.
Absorber, to absorb Absorbido. Absorto
(amazed).
abstraer, to abstract abstraído. abstracto.
aceptar, to accept aceptado. acepto.
aclarar, to make clear .... aclarado. claro,
aficionarse^ to be fond of . . . aficionado. afecto,
afijar^ to fix, to nail . . . . afijado O.* afijo,
aguzar, to sharpen, to grind . aguzado, agudo,
ahitarse, to overload one's sto- ahitado. cáiito.
mach
anexar, to annex anexado, anexo.
angostar, to narrow angostado. angosto.
asegurar, to assure, to insure . asegurado. seguro,
astrinjir O., to astringe .... astrinjido O. astricto,
atender, to observe, to expect . atendido. atento.
Bendecir, to bless Bendecido. Bendito,
bienquerer, to like, to love • . bienquerido. bienquisto.
Cansarse, to grow tired .... Cansado. Canso O.
ceñir, to gird, to surround . . ceñido. cinto O,
combarse, to bend, to bow . . . combado. combo,
campaginar, to manage to do . compaginado. compacto,
completar, to complete .... completado, completo,
comprimir, to compress .... comprimido. compreso.
concluir, to conclude concluido. concluso.
concretar, to join, to unite . . cotu:retado, concreto.
confesar, to confess confesado. confeso.
confundir, to confound .... confundido. confuso.
consumirse, to consume .... consumido. consunto O,
contentarse J to be contented with contentado. contento,
contraer, to contract, to conclude contraido. contracto,
contundir, to bruise . • . . . contundido. contuso,
convelerse, to contract (of nerves) convelido. convulse,
convencer, to convince .... convencido. convicto.
• O. means óbsolett
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles. 189
Participle. Verbal Adjective.
convertir, to convert, to change convertido. converso,
convulsarsey to convulse . . . convuUado. convulso.
corregir^ to correct corregido. correcto.
corromper, to corrupt corrompido. corrupto.
corvar, to crooken, to bend . . corvado. corvo,
crespar O., to curl, to crisp . . crespado 0. crespo.
cultivar, to cultivate cultivado. culto.
Densar, to condense Densado. I>enso.
descalzar, to take off the shoes descalzado. descalzo,
descontentar, to disappoint . . descontentado. descontento.
desertar, to desert desei'tado. desierto.
desnudar, to denude desnudado. desnudo.
despertar, to awake despertado. despierto.
desproveer, to deprive .... desproveído. desprovisto,
desquitarse, to make up for one's
loss (at play), to repair . . . desquitado. desquito O.
difundir, to pour out, to shed . difundido. difuso.
dirigir, to direct dirigido. directo.
dispersar, to disperse .... dispersado. disperso,
distinguir, to distinguish . . . distinguido. distinto.
divergir, to differ divergido. diverso.
Bfundir, to pour out Efundido. JEfuso.
elegir, to elect elegido. electo.
etÁestar, to set up enhestado. enhiesto.
tif^ugar, to dry enjugado. enjuto.
entecar, to be feeble entecado. enteco.
erijir, to erect . erijido. erecto.
espesar, to thicken espesado. espeso.
estrechar, to narrow estrechado. estrecho.
estreñir, to strain estreñido. estricto.
exceptuar, to except exceptuado. excepto.
excluir, to exclude excluido. excluso.
exentar O., to free exentado. exento.
eximir, to exempt eximido. exento.
expedir, to send expedido. expedito.
^pder, to expel expelido. expulso.
experimentar, to try experimentado. experto.
expresar, to express expresado. expreso.
extender, to extend extendido. extenso.
extinguir, to extinguish .... extinguido. extinto.
extraer, to draw out extraido. extracto.
t'alsear, to falsify Falseado. Falso.
falsificar, to falsify falsificado. falso.
faltar, to want faltado. falto.
favorecer, to favour favorecido. favorito.
ñjar, to fix fijado. fijo.
freir, to fry freído. frito.
Sartar, to satiate Hartado. Harto.
fnduir, to include Incluido. Incluso.
incurrir, to incur . incurrido. incurso.
wforfar, to obstruct . . ,. . . infartado. infarto.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
190
Lesson 41.
Participle.
infectar^ to infect infectado,
infestar, to infest infestado.
inficwnar, to infect inficionado.
inflijir, to inflict inflijido O.
infundir, to pour in infundido,
ingerir, to meddle with .... ingerido,
injertar, to graft injertado.
insertar, to insert ...... insertado,
intrusarse, to intrude intrusado,
invertir, to invert invertido.
juntar, to join juntado.
Leudar, to rise, to swell (of
dough) Leudado,
limpiar, to clean limpiado.
llenar, to fill ... • llenado.
Maldecir, to curse Maldecido,
malquistar, to disunite; to be-
come odious malquistado,
mancar, to be wanting .... mancado.
manifestar, to manifest .... manifestado,
manumitir, to manumit, to set
free manumitido.
marchitar, to wither marchitado.
matar, to kill matado.
mondar, to shear mondado.
mutilar, to mutilate mutilctdo.
Nacer, to be born Nacido.
Ocultar, to hide Ocultado.
omitir, to omit omitido.
oprimir, to oppress oprimido,
Pagar, to pay JPagado.
pasar, to pass pasado.
perfeccionar, to perfect .... perfeccionado
pervertir, to pervert pervertido.
prender, to take, to seize . . . prendido.
presumir, to presume presumido.
producir, to produce producido,
profesar, to profess profesado.
propender, to be inclined . . . propendido.
proveer, to fill (a vacancy) . . . proveido.
Quitar, to take; to impeach . . Quitado,
Raer, and rasar, to raze . . . Raido and
rasado.
ranciarse, to become rancid . . ranciado.
rarefacerse, to become rarefied . raref acido.
recluir, to seclude recluido.
recocer, to boil too much, to boil
once more recocido.
reflejar, to reverberate .... reflejado.
refringir, to refract (of light) . refringido.
remitir, to remit . remitido.
Verbal Adjective.
infecto,
infesto,
infecto,
inflicto O.
infuso,
ingerto,
injerto,
inserto,
intruso,
inverso,
junto.
Leudo,
limpio,
lleno.
Maldito.
malquisto.
manco.
manifiesto.
manumiso.
marchitOn
muerto.
mondo.
mútÜo,
Nato.
Oculto.
otniso.
opreso.
Pago (fami-
paso. [liar).
perfecto.
perverso.
preso.
presunto.
producto.
profeso.
propenso.
provisto.
Quito.
Raso.
rancio.
rarefacto.
recluso.
recocho,
reflejo,
refracto,
remiso.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles. 191
Participle. Verbal Adjective.
repeier, to push back repelido, repulso O.
r^eiar, to fill repletado, repleto,
restringir^ to restrain restringido. restricto,
romper^ to break rompido (poet.), roto.
Salvar, to save Salvado, Salvo,
secar, todry secado. seco.
s^ultar, to bury sepultado. sepulto,
situar, to situate, to place . . . situado. sito,
soltar^ to let loose, to let go . soltado, suelto,
subtender, to submit (to one's
inspection) subtendido. subtenso.
sujetar, to subdue sujetado, sujeto,
surgir, to come forth, to rise . surgido, surto.
mspender, to suspend suspendido. suspenso.
sustituir, to substitute .... sustituido, sustituto.
Tender, to extend Tendido. Tenso.
teñir, to dye tefiido, tinto.
torcer, to wring, to wrest, to turn torcido. tuerto.
Saciar, to empty, to evacuate . Vaciado, Vacio.
Juntar, to put oxen into harness Tuntado. Yunto,
Zafarse, to avoid doing some-
thing Zafado. Zafo.
N.jB.—Oí these verbal adjectives, the following admit of
tbe auxiliary haber:
Frito, preso,
injerto. provisto,
opreso, roto.
Besides their passive signification, some Past Par-
ticiples have an active one, as:
-agradecido, thanked, also grateful person.
arreglado, arranged, » methodical man.
confiado, confided, » a confident person.
cumplido, fulfilled, » a polished or civil man.
desocupado, unoccupied, » an idler.
desordenado, disarranged, » a disorderly person.
disimulado, disguised, » a sly person.
entendido, understood, » a clever man.
^nraclo, honoured, » an honest man.
leido, read, » a well-read man.
pesado, weighed, » a bore.
porfiado, insisted, » an obstinate man.
reconocido, recognised, * a grateful person.
sentido, felt, » a very sensitive person.
sufrido, suffered, » a hardy or forbearing man.
N.B.—For the uses of the Participle, see Ba/rt II.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
192 Lesson 41.
Traducción. 64.
He is a very gratefal person. I have arranged my books.
You are a methodical man. I am tired; she is a very tire-
some woman. He has fulfilled his duty. Spaniards are very
civil. I have not understood anything. He is a very clever
pei*son. To be honoured, one must be honest. I have read
his book; he is a well-read person. Do not be a bore. I
have insisted, but he is very obstinate. She is a very sensi-
tive woman, because she has suffered a great deal, bat she is
very forbearing.
Alphabetical List of the Defective Verbs.
AboUr, to abolish, is only used in those forms in which the
i of the Infinitive ending is retained.*
Acostumbrary to use to, to be in the habit of; used in all
forms except the Compound Perfect and the Imperative.
Antojarse^ to covet, to long for, has only the 3rd persons of
the sing, and plur., the Gerund, and the Past Part.
Atañer, to appertain, is only used in the 3rd persons sin-
gular and plural and the Past Participle.**
Colorir, to colour, is only used in the Infinitive, the other
forms being supplemented by colorar or colorear***
Incoar, to begin, and
* The following verbs of the 3rd Conj. offer the same ano-
maly: aguerrir, to train for war, arrecirse and aterirse, to grow
stiff (by cold); balbucir, to stutter; empedernir, to petrify; entumir,
to benumb; manir, to render mellow (of meat), to wear oat
(clothes, etc.), and a few others of less importance. — Formerly
blandir, to brandish, showed the same anomaly ; but at present the
forms blande and blanden are sometimes met with. Some of the
above verbs have a second regular form to supplement the de-
fective ones — i.e.: aterecerse, balbucear, empedernecerse, entumecerse.
** Likewise usucapir, to acquire a right of property by lapse
of time, and garantir, to guarantee, which is replaced by garantizar.
*** The same is the case with the following verbs:
acaecer, \ . haDoen provenir, to derive (as a conse-
acontecer, j ^*^ ' quence). *
consistir, to be the reason. ocurrir, \
concernir, to concern. pasar, > to happen.
cumplir, to suit, to be due. suceder, J
incumbir, to concern.
Concernir, to concern, is, conformably to the Academy, only used
in the 3rd persons: concierne, conciernen; concernía, concer-
nían, and the Gerund, concerniendo. However, the forms
concernió and concernieron; concierna, conciernan; concerniese;
concerniera, concernieran; concerniere and concernieren are
also met with.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Alphabetical List of the Defective Verbs. 1^3
Loar J to praise, are scarcely used in the l$t sing, Pres. Indie.
Obstar, to be an obstacle, nsed only in the 3rd persons sing,
and pi. of the Indie, and the Subj. No obstante, never-
theless.
Facer, to pasture, has no Ist pers. sing, of the Pres. Indie.
and Fut SuHfj.
Pesar, when meaning to repent and to regret, has only the
3rd pers, sing. The verb is complete when meaning
to weigh and to consider.
Placer, to please, has of the Pres. and Imperf, Ind, only the
3rd persons (place, placen, placía, etc.). The irregular
forma plugo (Def,), plegué, and plega (also plazca) of
the Pres, Subj,, pluguiere (Fut, Subj.), pluguiese (Imperf,
Subj,), and pluguiera (Cond, Subj,) are met with, as
well as the regular forms of the Fuii, and Cond, (placeré
and placerla). Of the compounds, aplacer, to please, is
obsolete, complacer and deplacer are in use.
fiocr, to shave, is seldom used in the first person sing, of the
Pres, Ind., or in any of the forms of the Pres, Subj,
Beponer, to answer, has only the Def. repuse, etc. When
meaning to set back, etc., it is regular.
Boer, to nibble, offers the same anomalies as Baer, The Pres,
is either roa, etc., or roya, but the Comp, corroer forms
only corroa.
Salve, God bless you, is a form used only in prayer.*
Soler, to use, to be in the habit, has only the Pres, and Im-
perf. Indie,: suelo, sueles, etc., solemos, etc., suelen; Im-
perf. solía, etc., and Past Part, solido. The Def, soli is
rare.
Tañer, to playón a stringed instrument, is almost obsolete.
Tacer, to lie, to rest, has only yace (Pres.) and yada (Im-
perf), the former mostly in the expression aquí yace,
here lies (on epitaphs).** Eare forms of this verb are
the Gerund, yaciendo, the Pres, yazgo (yago is quite
obsolete), yaces, etc., Imperf, yada, Fut. yaceré, and a
few others.
Beading Exercise.
Diversidad de las Provincias de España (Conclusión).
Los Catalanes son los pueblos más industriosos de Es-
paña. Manufacturas, pescas, navegación, comercio, asientos,
son apenas conocidos en otras provincias de la península, res-
pecto de los Catalanes. No sólo son útiles en la paz, sino
* Like valCf keep in good health, which is only used in
familiar correspondence.
** In French: ci-git.
Spanish Conv.-Grammar. IS
Digitized by VaOOQlC
194 Lesson 41.
del mayor servicio en la guerra. Fundición de cañones^
fábricas de armas, vestaario j monturas para ejércitos, con-
ducción de artillería, municiones, víveres, formación de tropas
ligeras de excelente calidad, todo esto sale de Cataluña. Los
campos se cultivan, la población se aumenta, los caudales
crecen, y en suma parece estar aquella nación mil leguas de
la gallega, andaluza, y castellana. Pero sus genios son poco
tratables, únicamente dedicados á su propio interés y ganancia^
y asi los llaman algunos los holandeses de España.
Los Aragoneses son hombres de valor y espíritu hon-
rados, tenaces en su dictamen, amantes de su provincia, y
notablemente preocupados á favor de sus paisanos. En otros
tiempos cultivaron con éxito las ciencias, y manejaron con
mucha gloria las armas contra los franceses en Ñapóles, y
contra nuestros abuelos en España.
Cadahalso, «Cartas Marruecas».
Digitized by VjOOQIC
195
SECOND PAET.
Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation.
1. Orthography.
The following letters in certain cases are mis-
b and v, b and p; c and ;2J; c and g; d and t; g
and j; h; m and n; r (rr); x; y.
b and v:
b is used —
1. In the syllables bla, We, Wi, Wo, blu; bra,
Ire, bri, bro, bru; bu, bur, bus; biblo—i.e.:
hablar, cable, república, pueblo, blusa,
brazo, breve, abrir, libro, bruto,
buril, burla, buscar,
biblioteca.
2. In the ending bilidad, as derived from adjec-
tives in ahle:,
amabilidad, afabilidad.
S. In the Latin particles ab, ob, stib, which enter
into the formation of many Spanish words:
absolver, obtener, subvencionar.
4. In the whole conjugation of caber, haber,
saber; beber, deber; also in the verbs with final
sound bir, with the exception of hervir, servir, vivir:
sabe, sabía, hubimos; beben, debemos; recibirán.
18*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
196 Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation.
5. In the sounds in 6a, being endings of the
Imperfect of the Indicatiye of the 1st Conjugation^
also of the verb -ir:
hablaba, jugaban; íbamos, iban,
6. After m:
ambos, cambiar.
V is used —
1. After any combination ےd, aZe^ cla, le, Jo,
ob, sub:
alevoso, clave, advenedizo; leve, joven, obvio, subven-
cionar,
2. After n:
inveterado, invierno, invicto.
3. In the verbs ver, hervir, venir, aervi/r; the
Presents of the Indicatiye^ Imperatiye^ and Subjunc-
tive of -if, and the Perfect of the Indicative of
andar and estar, as well as the forms derived from
them:
veo; hierve; sirven; vengo; vivimos;
voy, vaya, vayamos;
anduvimos, anduviera; estuvieron, estuviese.
4. In the labial sounds ava (not belonging to the
Imperfect of a verb), ave, avo; eva, eve, evo; iva,
ivo (this not being a verb):
esclava, avecilla, clavo; mueva, leve, llevo; aflictiva,
positivo.
5. In any combination with vice, villa, villar:
vicealmirante, villano, ViUarcaya,
p is used before t (except in combinations with
ob, sub):
aptitud, optar; but obtener, subteniente,
c and í^:
The following are written with z:
zend, zendavesta, zeta; zeugma; zigzag, zipizape, zizaña,
zirigaña, zis, zas; also all endings in the soft
sound of c, as in paz, juez, maíz, voz, luz.
c is used in other cases, even in the plurals of
words in «;«?, e^s?, iz, oz, u»:
paces, jueces, voces, luces.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Orthography. 197
d^ and t:
d is used in the particle ad entering into the for-
mation of some Spanish words; also in endings dad,
tud, of Latin stems in taid, tut:
admirar; caridad, virtud,
t in all other cases.
g and J:
g is used —
1. In all beginnings geo, as well as in endings,
qélico, genaHo, géneo, etc. ; gésimál, etc. ; géinico,
gen, gio, gia, gión; ígeno, ígero, derived either
from Greek or Latin words:
geografía, higiénico, religión, analogía,
2. In all verbs in ger, gir, except tejer, bri^ir,
crujir;
j is used —
L In the verbs tejer, brujir, c'i*ujir, also those
in jear.
2. In verbal endings in the sound je, ji of verbs
not having either ^r or j in the Infinitive; also in most
words not having originally either g ox j:
mvjer (from mulier);
dije, dijiste (from decir);
traje, trajiste (from traer).
3. In the endings je, jeria of nouns:
carruaje, relojería,
h is used —
1. In words which In Latin had either h or /:
haber (habere), harina (/arina), hijo (/"ilius), honor (^onor).
2. In any initial combinations hidr, hiper, hipo,
from the Greek:
hidrografía, hipertrofia, hipocampo,
3. In ie Initial, from Latin ge, fe; also in ue,
either initial or in the middle of a word if forming
a syllable by itself:
hielo (gelu); hierro (ferrum); huelo, huevo, ahuecar
(but muevo).
Exceptions are yergo, yerro, yeso.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
198 Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation.
4. Before initial sounds abi, abl, ebr, ibr, emci^
emi, onto, orr:
habitar,
hahlar,
hebreo,
híbrido,
hematosis,
hemisferio,
homólogo,
horror.
m and n:
m is used before 6, p, n:
cambiar, cam^po, am^nistia.
n is used before m^ sometimes before ft:
inmortal, innato.
r and rr are only misleading in the harsh sound
of the r:
r is used at the beginning of a word; also after
I, n, 8:
reloj, razón; malrotar, honra, Israel.
rr is used in all other cases:
carro, perro, prorroga, virrey.
X is used in all words haying the same letter
in Latin:
Felix, examen, lexicología.
N.B.—JJ&Q has caused many people to write s instead
of aj in a few cases, such as estraordinari-o, estraño (as ordi-
narily pronounced) for extraordinario, extraño; but in no
case must such licence be permitted whenever confusion is
likely to arise, such as in expiar, expiate, whereas espiar
means to spy; nor must cs be written instead of cc; axioma,
never acsioma.
y (not i) is used —
1. As a conjunction and as a letter:
la y, y ; él y yo, he and I.
2. In yo (I), ya (already), and at the beginning of
words if followed by a vowel (provided it is not pre-
ceded by h):
yacer, yugo, yeso, but hielo.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Accentuation.
199
3. At the end of words, provided the last syllable
is not accented:
hay y doy y soy, voy, ley, muy, buey, but benjuí, fui, huí.
N.B, — Hierba, hiedra, may also be yerba, yedra.
General Remark. It may be taken as a general rule,
that Spanish words from the Latin preserve the original
spelling ; also that the rules given above hold good as to such
derived words. But there are, however, exceptions which must
be learned by practice, such as:
abogado (advocatus, solicitor),
maravilla (mira&ilia, wonder).
2. Accentuation.
The written accent^ marked—
1. On words of more than one syllable ending in
a vowel, with the stress on the same vowel:
Papá,
café,
alelí,
dominó,
alajú,
amará,
tendré,
partí,
cantó.
Alá,
José,
Martí,
Jericó,
Perú.
2. On words of more than one syllable ending in
n, 8, with the stress on the last vowel:
Alacrán,
almacén,
espadín,
corazón,
betú/n.
amarán,
según.
compás,
revés,
anís,
adiós,
patatús, .
quizás.
Almaaán,
Tremecén,
Albarradn,
Torrejón,
Sahagún,
verás. Caifas,
prevés, Moisés,
decís, París,
Alós,
Jesús.
3. On words of more than one syllable ending in
I, r, Zf with the stress on the last syllable but one:
Cárcel, Setúbal, alcázar, César, alférez, Fernández,
carácter. Alcacer,
mártir. Valor,
crémor,
fémur,
4. On any word of' more than two syllables having
the stress on the antepenultimate syllable:
dátil,
mármol.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
200 Orthography, AccentuatioD, Punctuation.
Música,
tómala,
Málaga,
héroe.
habíale.
Féroe,
sábado,
disdo.
Firamo.
malísimo,
viéramos,
quisiéramos,
5. On words ending in ai, -au (whether followed
or not by a consonant), if having the stress on the i, ú:
Caí, ataúd,
país, Esaú. *•
raíz, laúd.
Bails,
6. On words ending in -í», -mis, -le, -to; na, no
(whether followed or not by n, s), if having the stress on
the Í, Ú:
Poesía, sería, falúa, continúa, decíais,
tío, ríe, dúo, continúo, comprendíais,
rio,
7. On final diphthongs with the stress on the last
vowel, as well as on a, e of triphthongs -uais, -ieis:
Veréis, Sebastián, buscapié, dio,
parabién, rió,
acaricié, adiós,
piélago,
después, benjuí, averiguó,
Navascués, fui, averiguáis,
fué, amortigüéis.
8. OjQ the preposition á, and the conjunctions é,
ó, ú.
BemarJc, — Compound words (verbal forms included) follow
the rules applied to their factors:
Fuese, cortésmente, fácilmente.
9. Foreign words, in the matter of accentuation, are
treated as Spanish words:
Déficit, ultimátum, Leicester, Amiens.
10. Finally, the Spanish language makes use of
the written accent in order to distinguish certain words,
which are written alike, but differ in their signification,
the written accent being marked upon the most emphatic
one, as:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Accentuation.
201
unaccented.
Como, as, like.
cual, which (relat.).
cuando, when, as.
cuanto, -a, so much as . . .
da, he (she) gives.
de, of.
di, I gave.
donde, whereof, wherefrom
(relat.).
el, the (article).
ha, has.
mas, but.
mi, my.
j}orgt«6, because, as, etc.
que, that, which (relat.).
Accented.
¿Cómo? how?
¿cuál? which? (interrog.).
ctiál — ci*ál, the one — the
¿Cíiándo? when? [other.
¿cuánto? how much?
¡dá! give (there)!
dé, pres. subj. of dar, to give.
¡di! tell (thou)!
¿dónde? where?
él, he (pron.).
M, ago.
más, more.
mi, me.
¿por qué? why?
¿^wé.^ what? which? (interr.),
¡qué . ./ what (a) . .!
¿quién? which?
quién — quién, the one — the
other.
sé, I know.
si, yes; him- (her-, it-) self.
sólo (adv.), only.
/5W5/ well! go on!
tal, so.
té, tea.
ii^, thou,
/vé.' go (thou)!
Further, the demonstrative pronouns este, esta^ ese,,
esa, aquél, aquella, are accented when used emphatically
-e.g.:
¿ Cuál es el principe JDon Fernando ? — Ése, ése, ése,
dijo Gutierre de Cárdenas á la princesa Doña IsaheL
Which is Prince Ferdinand? — The one there, said
Gutierre de Cardenas to Princess Isabella.
The stress only is laid, not the written accent
marked, upon:
1. Words of more than one syllable ending in a
consonant, not fiy 8, with the stress on the last syllable:
Querub,
vivac, amad, cesar,
merced, temed, romper,
reloj,
quien, who (relat.).
se, himself, herself, itself, etc.
si, if.
solo (adj.), alone.
sus, his, her, etc.
tal, such a one.
te, thee.
tu, thy.
ve, he (she) sees.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
:202 Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation.
laurel,
azahar,
cenitf partid, venir, Guadix^
carcaj, Ormuz,
verdegal^,
arroz, Godot/.
2. Words of more than one syllable ending in a
Towel, with the stress on the last syllable but one:
Ala, ama, España,
caballete, teme, úñate,
casi, entiendo, Amaifi,
obscuro, Jacobo,
Aramburu,
3. Words of more than one syllable ending in n^
.«, with the stress on the last syllable but one:
Volumen, aman, martes, amaras, Lucas,
canten, crisis, leyeres, Carlos,
amaron,
4. Words of more than one syllable ending in a
Yowel or a diphthong (whether followed or not hy n, s)^
-with the stress on the last syllable but one:
Fatria, sitio, deseo, canoa, agua,
seria, trataseis, fatuo,
lidian, amortiguan,
3. The Signs of Punctuation.
The most striking difference between the Spanish
^nd other languages is the use of the note of inter-
rogation and the note of exclamation. To the prelimi-
nary remarks contained in Part I. we now add the
following observations:
1. If another part of the sentence precedes the
actual question or exclamation, the respective signs are
placed immediately before that part of the sentence to
ivhich they refer, as:
Y bien mirado, ¿valgo yo lo que ella? (Hartzenbusch)
And well considered, — am I as worthy as she?
Con que, ¿ bajará Y. al patio ? (Id.)
Well then, will you come down to the courtyard?
2. If short questions or exclamations succeed each
other immediately, the inverted signs are used but
once, as:
¡Señor! mi Señor! Don Diego! (de Castro.)
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Signs of Punctuation. 203
3. A comma is put—
(a) Between the several subjects, verbs, or objects
of a compound sentence, with the exception of the
last two:
El castellanOy el portugués, él francés y el italiano son
lenguas románicas,
Castilian, Portuguese, French, and Italian are Romance
languages.
Escribe, dibuja, toca y canta.
He writes, draw, plays and sings.
(b) Between the principal^ and the accessory sen-
tence, if the latter begins with a preposition, or if the
subordinate clause is an apposition, as:
Bon Fernando salió de Sevilla con un lu^cido ejército,
en que se contaban diez mil caballos, (Id.)
Don F. went forth from (left) Sevilla with a brilliant
army in which there were ten thousand horse.
Podréis convencer á aquellos hombres tímidos que, des-
lumhrados por una supersticiosa ignorancia, condenan
el estudio de la naturaleza.
Yon may persuade those timid people who, blinded by
a superstitious ignorance, condemn the study of Nature.
4. The colon (:) is used if a sentence of general
import is followed by various other clauses developing
its meaning, as:
Eran en aquella santa edad todas las cosas comunes:
á nadie le era necesario para alcanzar su ordinario
sustento tomar otro trabajo que alzar la mano, y
alcanzarle de las robustas encinas que liberalmente
les estaban convidando con su dulce y sazonado fruto.
(Cervantes.)
The colon is also used instead of a conjunction, by
which the following sentence, containing a reason, a
consequence, or a contradiction, ought properly to be
joined to the preceding phrase, as:
Por eso yo me hago á veces el remolón para pagar:
claro es, que el que no paga es porque no puede ó
no quiere. (Hartzenbusch.)
This is the reason why I sometimes delay paying, for
it is evident that he who does not pay either cannot
or will not pay.
Finally, the colon is employed after the initiatory
address in a letter, unless the writer prefers writing this
Digitized by VaOOQlC
204 Lesson 1.
address in a separate line, which however, is only due
to a person of higher rank. Ex. :
Muy Señor mió: Por fin soy tan dichoso, etc.
Dear Sir, — At length I am so happy, etc.
First Lesson.
The Gender of Snbstantiyes.
(See Part I., Lesson 1.)
§ 1. Feminine substantives beginning with a or ha
and having the stress on the first syllable, which for
the sake of euphony take the article el in the singular,
as: el alma, the soul, have in the plural the article
las, as:
Las almaSf the souls; las habas, the beans.
If the word beginning with a— is not a substantive,
the article la should be used, thus:
La alta sierra.
Note.— The article la is but an abbreviation of the
ancient demonstrative pronoun ela, as:
De las buenas costumnes nasce ela paz et ela concordia,
(Translation of Fuero Juzgo,)
In the century of Cervantes, el was used before feminine
nouns not accented on the first syllable, as: el alegría, the
joy; él arena, the sand; el acémila, the beast of burden; ei
alta sierra, the high ridge of mountains. Formerly el also
occurred before words beginning with other vowels, as el es-
pada, etc.
With words beginning with al—, some authors, for
euphony's sake, substitute á el for al in the dative, thus
d el alma (for al alma); á el alcance (for al alcance),
attainability.
§ 2. Masculine by either their sex or significa-
tion are:
(a) All nouns denoting male beings, or their names,
kindred, degree, rank, or profession, as usually ascribed
to male persons, as: el hombre, man; Carlos, Charles;
el padre, the father; el rey, the king; el poeta, the poet;
el león^ the lion.
Except. : la haca (or jaca), the nag, pony.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Gender of Substantives. 205
(b) Names of rivers, lakes, mountains, volcanoes,
trees, winds, and cardinal points, as: el Tajo, él Gua-
diana, el Ladoga, el Cáucaso, el Vesuvio, él naranjo, él
levante, the east wind; él Sud [S.], el Norte [N.].
Except.: la EsgíAeva and la Huerva, two Spanish rivers,
which, however, are also sometimes masculine. Again, la tra-
montana, the north wind, and la brisa, the north-east wind.
(c) The names of countries, towns, and villages not
ending in —a, as:
JEl Brasil, Brazil; el Perú, el gran Madrid, el Toboso,
Whereas: la España meridional; la baja Andalucía,
because these names of countries terminate in a. Names
of towns not ending in —a may be used with the fe-
minine gender if the word ciudad (town)* or villa is
understood.
(d) Names of seconds, minutes, days, months, and
years; also of numbers, musical and orthographic signs,
colours and languages:
Un segundo, un minuto, el día, el lunes, Monday, el
mes, diciembre es frió, December is cold, el año.
JEl dos, No. 2, el do, C, el punto, fall stop, el blanco,
white, el castellano, Spanish.
§ 3. Feminine by their signification are:
(a) All names of female beings, or their names,
kindred, degree, rank, or profession, as usually ascribed
to female persons and animals, as:
La mujer, la madre, Maria, Mary; la reina, the queen;
la hermana, the sister; la leona, the lioness; la
yegua, the mare, etc.
(b) Names of marshes (lagunas), ranges, chains,
fruits (frutas), as:
Las lagunas de Buidera, Sierra Nevada,
Sierra Morena, la cordillera Pirenaica; la
manzana.
Except.: El melón, el higo, etc.
(c) Names of countries, provinces, towns, and villages
ending in — a, as:
La Mancha; (la encantadora) Francia, France, etc.
* From civitas (Latin) ; cittá (Ital.), cité (French), city (Engl.).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
206 Lesson 1.
(d) Names of hours and seasons, also names of the
letters of the alphabet (because here the word leira^
letter, is understood), as:
Las dos, 2 o'clock. la jota, the letter J.
la primavera, Spring. la equis, the letter X.
Except.: El verano, Summer; el otoño. Autumn; el in-
vierno, Winter.
Note,— If the sex of animals is not distinguished by dif-
ferent words or terminations, macho (male) and hembra (fe-
male) are prefixed, as in English. Thus, müano, hawk, has
no form for the feminine, which is therefore expressed: un
milano hembra, a female hawk. Paloma, pigeon, on the
other hand, has no masculine form, and thus a m^le pigeon
is called una paloma macho,
(e) The names of arts, sciences, and professions
almost all terminating in -a or -ción, as:
La jurisprudencia, jurisprudence; la lectura, reading, etc.
Except those ending in -o, as: el derecho, law; el dibujo,
drawing, etc.
Gender by Termination.
General Bule. — Nouns ending in -a, -d, -j^, and -ion
are feminine, all others are masculine:
Casa, house. vo0y voice.
ciudad, town, acción, action.
luz, light.
Exceptions to the feminine in -a, -d, z,
1. Those that are masculine either by sex or
meaning:
AKbacea, executor. sud, south.
dia, day. juez, judge.
cihad, abbot.
2. (a) Among those in -a:
Mapa, map. tranvía, tramway.
(b) Those in -ma (from Greek, Arab.):
Anagrama, anagram. enigma, riddle.
clima, climate. poema, poem.
dilema, dilemma. sistema, system.
dogma, dogma. telegrama, telegram.
drama, drama.
(c) Those in -a (accented):
sofá, sofa. maná, manna.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Gender by Termination.
207-
3. Among those in
Césped, turf,
ardid, trick.
áspid, asp.
alud, avalanche.
ataúd, coffin.
agraz, verjuice.
antifaz, mask.
disfraz, disguise.
ajedrez, chess.
fez, fez.
d, z:
tamiz, varnish.
cariz, aspect.
lápiz, pencil.
maiz, maize.
tapiz, tapestry.
arroz, rice.
tornavoz, sounding-board.
alcuzcuz, a kind of Moorish».
tragaluz, skylight. [bread..
trasluz, transverse light.
Note.
Some among those in -a, -z admit also of a masculine-
article— i.e.:
(a) Having a personal signification:
m -a:
La alhaja, jewel.
la atalaya, watch-tower.
¡a ayuda, help.
la harba, beard.
la cabeza, head.
la calavera, skull.
un canalla, a rogue.
la corneta, trumpet.
la cura, cure.
la gallina, hen.
la guia, guidance.
la máscara, mask.
la ordenanza, regulation.
el papa, the pope.
la guardia, guard (body-
guard).
la vista, sight.
el (la) alhaja, **jewel" (iron.)..
el atalaya, warder of a tower..
el ayuda, assistant.
el barba, the old man (in
the play).
el cabeza, chief, the head.
un calavera, a harum-scarum,
fellow.
la canalla, the rabble.
el corneta, trumpeter.
el cura, curate.
un gallina, a chicken-
hearted person.
el guia, guide (man).
el máscara, the masker.
el ordenanza, orderly.
una papa, a lie.
el guardia, the guard (man)..
el vista, custom-house officer..
(b) Not having a personal signification:
m -a:
La cólera, anger.
la corneta, kite.
la planeta, horoscope.
la tema, hobby.
el cólera, cholera.
el cometa, comet.
el planeta, planet.
el tema, theme, exercise.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
208
Lesson 1.
in 'Z\
La dobles, duplicity. el doblez, hem.
la haz (de la tierra), sur^ él haz, bundle.
face.
la pez, pitch. el pez, fish (in the water).
Exceptions to the masculine:
To those in -e:
Ave, bird.
base, basis.
calle, street.
came, meat, flesh.
catástrofe, catastrophe.
clase, class.
costumbre, habit.
efigie, effigy.
especie, kind, sort.
fase, phase.
fe, faith,
/ieftre, fever.
/*rase, phrase.
fuente, fountain, dish.
gente, people.
hambre, hunger.
hélice, screw.
indole, character.
intemperie, weather, exposure.
leche, milk.
llave, key.
muerte, death.
nieve, snow.
noche, night.
nube, cloud.
i>esie, pestilence, plague.
plebe, populace.
sangre, blood.
serpiente, serpent.
simiente, seed.
«werie, fortune, luck.
tarde, afternoon.
torre, tower.
vacante, vacancy.
Also nouns in -icie, -aide, -umbre, derived from the
Latin and Greek — i.e.:
Esferoide, spheroid,
superficie, surface,
KB.:
El breve, apostolic brief.
el consonante, rhyme.
el corriente (mes), current
month (inst.).
el corte, cut, edge.
el (la) dote, dowry.
el frente, front (of a building,
army).
el parte, telegram, report.
el pendiente, earring.
el secante, seccative (chem.).
el (la) tilde, the dash.
pesadumbre, sorrow.
la breve, breve (music).
la consonante, letter.
la corriente, stream.
la corte, court.
las dotes, good qualities.
la frente, forehead.
Cal, chalk.
cárcel, jail.
la parte, part.
la pendiente, slope.
la secante, secant.
la tilde, spot (stain).
To those in -I:
col, cabbage.
credencial, credential.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Gender of Compound Nouns. 209
miel, honey. saly salt.
piel, leather, skin. señálj sign, mark.
hie!, gall.
El canal, canal, la canal, gutter.
el capital, capital (money). la capital, capital (chief town).
d moral, mulberry tree. la moral, moral.
d vocal, voter (on a com- la vocal, vowel,
mittee).
To those in -n:
Imagen, image. comezón, itching.
sartén, frying-pan. desazón, affliction.
sien, temple (of the head). razón, reason.
din (crin), mane.
El orden, order (regularity, la orden, order (command,
archit. order). religious order).
el margen, margin. la margen, bank of a river.
To those in -r:
Flor, flower. segur, axe.
labor, labour, needlework.
El mar, the sea (element). la mar, the sea (in speaking
of states).
el mar Bojo, the Red Sea. en alta mar, on the high seas.
To those in -s:
Bilis, bile. res, head of cattle.
crisis, crisis. tos, cough.
mies, harvest.
And, in general, all nouns of scientific use ending
in "is, -sis, derived from the Greek, such as:
Hipótesis, hypothesis, tesis, thesis, conclusion.
paráfrasis, paraphrase,
JY".^.— -Exceptions to those in -i, -j, -o, -u, -x, -y, are:
La diócesi, the diocese. la tribu, the tribe.
la metrópoli, the metropolis. la onix, the onyx.
la troj, the granary. la ley, the law.
la mano, the hand. la grey, the flock.
la seo, the cathedral.
Gender of Compound Nouns.
If the last member is an Infinitive or an in*
variable part of speech, they are masculine:
Spanish Conv. -Grammar.
Digitized
byííoogk
210 Lesson 1.
Un correveidile, a go-between, el hazmerreír, the langhing-
un cusotacalles, idler. stock.
el besamanos, levee. el quehacer, work, bnúness.
el cumpleaños, birthday. un matasiete, a bully.
If a noun, or adjective in the singular, they come
under the rule of gender by termination:
Una hocacaUe, a taming, street corner.
el portaestandarte, standard-bearer.
una marisabidilla, blae-stocking.
Except.:
EH tranvía, the tramway. La aguachirle, the last after-
» contrapeste, a remedy wine.
against the plague. » aguapié, the after-wine.
» cortaplumas, penknife. » bajamar, the lowest-ebb.
» guardamano, the sword- » pleamar, the highest flood.
hilt, guard. » altamar, the high sea.
» guardavela, the sail-rope. » estrellamar, the lily of
» pasacalle, the street-march the valley.
(played on the guitar).
» i^o^amano, the bannister.
» sacabotas, bootjack.
» tapaboca, the muffler.
» ¿ro^mono, the after-hand (at cards).
» trasluz, the semi-darkness.
» I7er(^sinera2c2a, emerald-green.
» verdemontaña, mountain-green, chrysocolla \ (both also
» verdevejiga, sap-green. j feminine).
Gender of Words used as Substantives.
1. If an adjective is used substantively, we must
distinguish whether it denotes a person, abstract idea,
or a concrete thing. In the first case the article is, of
course, employed conformably with the sex of the per-
sons, as: él viejo^ the old man; la vieja, the old woman.
If an abstract idea is intended, the article lo is used, as
stated Lesson 1. Part I. Thus: lo bueno^ the good, lo
ajeno, other people's property, etc. If, however, the
adjective denotes a concrete thing, we employ the mas-
culine article el. Thus el español, Spanish {i.e., the
Spanish language); él azul, the azure or sky-blue.
2. All words that are not adjectives, if substantively
employed, require the masculine article, as: el porqué^
the Why; el no, the No; ei estudiar, the study(ing).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Formation of the Feminine. 211
Formation of the Feminine.
§ 1. Masculine substantives and adjectives in — o
form their feminine in — a, as:
El vecino, the neighbour, — la vecina.
htAcnOf good, — huena.
Except.: el testigo, the witness, el reo, the culprit, el
moddo, the model, which only change the article: la testigo,
la reo, la modelo.
Irregular are:
El canónigo, the dean (of a cathedral), — la canonesa.
el diácono, the deacon, — la diaconisa.
el gallo, the cock, — la gallina.
§ 2. Substantives and adjectives ending in d, n,
and r form the feminine by adding —a, as:
Sefior, Sir, Mr., — Señora, lady, Mrs.,
el huésped, the guest (m,), — la huéspeda, the guest (f,),
el bailarín, the dancer, — la bailarina, the (fern,) dancer.
Exceptions: Emperador, emperor, — emperatriz,
cantador, singer, — cantatriz.''^
abad, abbot, — abadesa,
don, Mr., Sir, — doña,
elector, elector, -— electriz.
§ 3. Masculine substantives in —6 form their femi-
nine in --esa, those in — a form —isa^ as:
El duque, the duke, — la duquesa,
el principe, the prince, — la princesa,
él poeta, the poet, — la poetisa,
el profeta, the prophet, — la profetisa,
el sacerdote, the priest, — la sacerdotisa.
Exceptions: El monje, the monk, — la monja.
el pariente, the relation, — la parienta.
el héroe, the hero, — la heroína,
el elefante, the elephant, — la elefanta,
regordete, corpulent, fat, — regordeta.
altóte, very high, huge, — altota.
§ 4. Invariable are the comparatives in — or, as:
Mayor, larger, fern, mayor,
peor, worse, » peor.
Likewise the adjectives of one termination, like alegre,
fdiz, etc. (See Part I., Less. 19.)
* Cantante is most commonly used for both genders.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
212 Lesson 1.
§ 5. Irregular are the following:
DioSf god, fern, diosa.
coronel, colonel, » coronela,
rey, king, » reina,
jabalí, wild boar, » jabalina,
N,B,—k few nouns of pairs have a feminine derived
from a separate root, such are:
Varón (of persons), hembra, male, female.
hombre, mujer, man, woman, wife.
padre, madre, father, mother.
marido, mujer, husband, wife.
fray, sor, brother (friar), sister.
fraile, monja, friar, nun.
yerno, nuera, son-in-law, daughter-in-law.
caballero, señora, gentleman, lady, madam.
galán, dama, gallant, lady.
lord, milady, Lord, Lady.
macho (of creatures), hembra, male, female.
caballo, yegua, horse, mare.
carnero, oveja, ram, ewe.
§ 6. The following have a double gender:
El compatriota, the countryman, fem, la compatriota.
el cómplice, the accomplice, » la cómplice.
el indígena, the native, » la indígena,
el persa, the Persian, » la persa.
Likewise el testigo, the witness, mentioned § 1.
§ 7. The following are either masculine or feminine:
Centinela, sentinel. crisma, holy oil.
cisma, schism (in ecclesias- espía, spy.
tical matters). guia, guide, leader;
and a few words of rarer occurrence, such as: hermafrodita,
hermaphrodite; híbrida, hybrid, mongrel; nema, seal (of a
letter); neuma, gesture; and anatema, anathema.
§ 8. Arte (art) is in the singular commonly femi-
nine, although for euphony's sake requiring the article
él, thus el arte. In the plural it is always feminine:
las artes mecánicas, etc.
With mar (sea) the masculine gender predominates. In
poetry, however, the singular is commonly feminine, as: Mi
única patria la mar (Espronceda), especially if the adjective
used with mar has only one termination, as: la mar espu-
mante, the foaming brine.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Formation of the Feminine. 218
Nada, nothing, used substantively, is masculine if no
article precedes, nada nuevo, nothing new. Employed with
the article, it is feminine, as: una nada, a mere nothing.
Pro, behalf, benefit, is feminine in the expression huena
pro! much good may it do you! In other significations it is
masculine, as: el pro y el contra, pro and con,
§ 9. Defectives:
(a) Some have no feminine, others have no mas-
culine:
Eremita, hermit. azafata, lady of honour.
espadachín, bully. bacante, bacchante.
evangelista. Evangelist. matrona, matron.
ganapán, drudge. náyade, naiad.
gañán, day labourer. nereida, nereid.
jesuíta, Jesuit. nodriza, wet-nurse.
negociante, business-man. niñera, nurse.
nigromante, wizard, necro- sirena, mermaid.
mancer.
(b) In some others, either the masculine includes
the feminine, or the feminine the mascuHne:
JEl auditorio, audience. la canalla, rabble.
el concurso, concourse. la clientela, customers, clients.
el gentío, crowd. la gente, people.
d vulgo, common people. la muchedumbre, multitude,
el populacho, populace. crowd.
la plebe, mob, common people.
la multitud, multitude.
Tradnceiéu. 1.*
1. The village where we live during the summer has
a beautiful situation at the foot of high mountains. The soul
of (the) man, says Goethe, resembles {say to the) water. The
nag you (have) bought is too dear. The west wind is cooler
than the south wind and usually brings rain. The north wind
and the north-east wind are very cold. Peru was formerly a
colony of Spain. (The) old Madrid has almost disappeared.
Eight does not need science in order to be known and prac-
tised. This word is not spelt (no se escribe) with a G, but
with a J. The male witness as well as the female witness
did not know what to say definitely. My uncle is a dean,
and the aunt of my friend is a deaconess. Have you spoken
to the lodger or the lodger*s wife? The emperor and the
♦ Henceforth the words of the translations are not given in
the vocabulary at the end of this Grammar. The sign () show
the need of the Spanish article.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
214 LesBon 1.
empress orderecl (fr. hacer) the singer (m,) [to] come to the
castle. The duke and the duchess dined with the prince and
the princess. Fernán Caballero is a Spanish poetess. Prophets
and prophetesses are rare in our age (time). Is this young
nun a relation of yours (tr. a r. your)^ The Cid is one of
the greatest heroes of Spain. The maid of Saragossa is cele-
brated by the poets as a great heroine.
2. Hero was a priestess of Venus. This female elephant
is very strong. The ancient heathens had many gods and
goddesses. The King of Spain signs his orders: «I, the king.»
This gentleman is my countryman, and this lady is my
countrywoman. The Persian woman was the accomplice of
the native (m.). The guide was arrested by the sentinel as
a spy. Louis XIV., King of France, was a protector of arts
and sciences. The stream increased on the 7th inst. She
lost an earring on coming down (al bajar) the slope. The
pope is dead (ha muerto). That is a lie. The curate is
entrusted with (encargado de) the care of (the) souls. The
mechanical arts are mostly a matter of practice. The Greeks
on their retreat greeted the foaming brine with exultation.
Nothing is beautiful enough for the discontented (m.), k
dream is a mere nothing. The watch-tower stands at the
entrance of the harbour. The (help-)mate of the tower-warder
is either a dunce or a thoughtless fellow. The boys played
with kites. The comet of the year 1858 was beautiful. At
the end of the present month you will receive my report.
The order of Charles the Third is a Spinish order. The hilt
of this sword is worked with great art. You have here a
very fine penknife. The Better is often the enemy of the
Good. He knows neither how nor why. The crowd [both
w. if" f,] was numerous. There were many people.
Beading Exercise.
Descubrimiento de América.
Adoptada y protegida la empresa por Isabel, pronto iba
á saberse si el proyectista era en efecto un visionario, digno
de lástima, ó si era el más sabio y el más calculista de los
hombres. Seguido de un puñado de atrevidos aventureros, el
náutico genovós se lanza en tres frágiles lefios por los desco-
nocidos mares de Occidente. «; Pobre temerario!», quedaban
diciendo en España y Europa. Y Colón lleno de fe en su
Dios y en su ciencia, en sus mapas y en su brújula, no decía
más que «i adelante!» España y Europa suponían pero igno-
raban sus peligros y trabajos, sus conflictos y penalidades.
¿Qué habrá sido del pobre aventurero? — Transcurridos al-
guno meses, volvió el aventurero á España á dar la respuesta.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Plural of Substantives. 215
Nada necesitó decir. La respuesta la daban por él los habi-
tantes y los objetos que consigo traía de las regiones tras-
atlánticas en que nadie habla creído. El testimonio no admitía
dudas. El Nuevo Mundo había sido descubierto! El miserable
visionario, el desdeñado de los doctos, el rechazado por los
monarcas, el peregrino de la tierra, el mendigo del convento
de la Bábida, era el más insigne cosmógrafo, el gran almi-
rante de los mares de Occidente, el virrey de .Indias, el más
envidiable y el más esclarecido de los mortales. Espafia y
Europa se quedaron absortas, y para que en este extraordinario
acontecimiento todo fuese singular, asombró á los sabios aún
más que los ignorantes.
[Lafuente, Historia de Espalia.]
Conversación.
¿Qaé hizo Isabel?
¿Qaó iba á saberse pronto?
¿Que hace Colón?
¿Que se decía de él, y que decía él?
¿Cuándo se aupo la respuesta?
¿Quién la dio por él?
¿Qué había sido, y qué era entonces Colón?
¿Qué efecto produjo el descubrimiento?
Second Lesson.
Plural of Snbstantiyes.
The principal rules on the formation of the plural
have been given, Lesson 2, Part I. (page 11). We repeat
them here in a more enlarged form.
§ 1. The following words take s in the plural
1. Substantives terminating in a single unaccented
vowel, y excepted, as:
La carta (letter) Plur. las cartas,
el padre (father) » los padres,
la metrópoli (capital) » las metrópolis,
la mano (hand) » las manos,
el espíritu (spirit) » los espíritus.
But, rey (king), reyes.
2. Words terminating in é accented, as:
El pié (foot) Plur. los pies.
Except.: 'la é, las ees.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
216
Lesson 2.
§ 2. The following words take es in the plural:
1. Words terminating in a consonant or in y^ as :
La flor (flower) Plur. las flores,
el ángel (angel) » los ángeles,
el huésped (guest) > los huéspedes,
ü corazón (heart) > los corazones,
ruin (mean) » ruines,
el rey (king) » los reyes,
la ley (law) » las leyes,
i^emarA;.— Substantives in x (if sounded like ks) and z
change their flnal consonant into c before es^ as:
La vez (time) Plur. las veces,
la voz (voice) » las voces,
la cruz (cross) »
feliz (happy) »
el fénix (phenix) »
el ónix (onyx) >
2. Word terminating in an accented vowel, e
cepted, as:
las cruces,
felices,
ios[f^:^p'''
\ fenix.
los ónices.
ex-
El bajá (pasha)
el aleli (gillyflower)
el rondó (rondeau)
el tisú (tissue)
Exceptions:
El papá
la mamá
el sofá
d maravedi (farthing = V»*
part of 1 real)
el bisturí (bistoury)
d zaquizamí (uppermost loft)
Plur.
los. bajaes,
los alelíes,
los rondóes,
los tisúes.
Plur. papas.
» mamas.
> sofás.
» maravedís (maravedíes
or maravedises).
» bisturis.
» zaquizamís.
§ 3. The following are invariable:
Polysyllables in -es and -is unaccented ou the
last syllable, as well as patronymics in -s, -z, and Latin
technical words, as:
El martes (Tuesday)
el éxtasis (ecstasy)
la análisis (analysis)
G^iérrez
Sánchez
El déficit
el memorándum
Plur.
los martes.
los éxtasis,
las análisis,
los Gutiérrez,
» los Sánchez,
Plur. los déficits,
» los memorándums.
Plur.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Plural of Subetantivee. 217
§ 4. Irregular Plurals.
El lord (lord) Plnr. los lores.
eí/ící«»e»(Eoman priest) » [\Z%Zms.
la testudo (testudo) » las testiídines.
d val (sewer, drain) » los valles,
el frac (dress-coat) » los fraques.
Properly speaking, the plural of frac is not irre-
gular, c being of necessity changed into qti before c,
according to a well-known orthographical rule.
Observation, — Sometimes the accent is displaced in the
plural.
El carácter (character) Plur. los caracteres,
el régimen (government, object, diet) » los regímenes.
§ 5. Plural of Compound Substantives.
The question whether a compound substantive is
changed in the plural or not must be decided by
looking at its components.
1. Both factors are changed in the plural, if each,
when taken separately, would undergo such an alter-
ation, as:
La casamata (casemate) Plur. las casasmatas,
el gentilhombre (nobleman) » los gentilesliombres.
d ricohombre \ (member of the / » los ricoshombrea,
la ricahembra ] high aristocracy) \ > las ricashembras,
la mediacaña (semi-circular tools) » las m^diascañas.
Exceptions:
El padrenuestro (the Lord's Prayer) Plur. las padrenuestros,
d ferrocarril (railway) » Jos ferrocarriles,
la vanagloria (vainglory) » las vanaglorias,
la barbacana (barbacan) > las barbacanas,
la bocacalle (street entrance) » las bocacalles,
el viaducto (viaduct) » los viaductos.
2. Only one factor is changed in the plural if the
other, when taken separately, could not undergo such
an alteration, as:
Cualquiera \ ( x. \ Plur. cualesquiera,
quienquiera / ^^ oever; ^ quienesquiera,
el hijodalgo* » los hijosdalgo,
* = hijo de algo, lit, the son of something — t.e., the son
of a person "who is somebody" — viz., who holds some rank in
society.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
218 Lesson 2.
3. Singular and plural are alike if both factors,
when taken separately, could not undergo any alteration
in the plural, or (and this case applies to the majority
of the Spanish compound substantives) if the second
factor is plural already, thus:
El and los sacabotas, bootjack.
el y> los mondadientes, toothpick.
el » los guardapiés (or guardapieses), petticoat.
el » los limpiabotas, shoeblack.
el > los quitamanchas, cleaner, dyer.
el » los besamanos, levee.
el » los azotacalles, lounger.
el » los catalejos, spy-glass (lit, "look-far'*).
§ 6. Besides the words enumerated on page 12, the
following are likewise used in the plural only:
Los bofes, \ expensas, expense.
los chofes, \ lungs. los esponsales, betrothal.
los livianos, ) los pertrechos, utensils, fumi-
gas arras, earnest(-money).* ture.
las carnestolendas, carnival. los postres, dessert.
los calzones, trousers. las ríspcras, vespers,
las pinzas, pincers, nippers.
and a few others of less importance.
§ 7. The following words change their signification
in the plural (see also page 12):
El alfiler, the pin Plur. los alfileres, the pin-money.
la baqueta, the ramrod » las baquetas, the gauntlet.
la corte, the court > las Cortes, the Spanish Parlia-
ment.
la mano, the hand » las manos, the handiwork.****
el zelo, zeal » los zelos, jealousy.
§ 8. The following substantives denote the male
sex in the singular, both the male and female in the
plural (see those enumerated on page 12):
El amo, \ ., . , Plur. los amos, los señores, xnBstQrsaiá
el señor, f Piaster mistress.
el conde, » los condes, count and countess.
el marqués, the marquis » los marqueses, marquis and
marchioness.
§ 9. If a geographical name is plural, as los Arcos,
* French: les arrhes.
** But also "the hands."
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Plural of Substantives. 219
las Navas, Dos Barrios, the verb remains in the singur
lar, since the word denotes but one object, as:
Los Arcos es una ciudad de España,
Los Arcos is a town in Spain.
Traducción. 2.
1. On the sofas in the salon the different papas and
mamas were seated, and watched the amusements of the young
folks. The upper parts of the lofts of these houses are usu-
ally entirely empty. How many maravedís had a real?
Thirty-four maravedís. The flamtns of the ancient Romans
were priests. Of how many members does the English House
of (the) Lords consist? It is very difficult to know exactly
the different characters of men. The principles of government
have a great influence on the prosperity or the decay of (the)
empires. Three consecutive Mondays we could not get our
box at (tr. in) the theatre. You do best (had better not
care) if you do not care for the boastings of that man. The
casemates of this fortress are extremely strong. The noblemen
at the court of this unhappy prince all shared the fate of
their master. The members of the high nobility of Spain
have all the title (of) Grandee. By foreigners the noblemen
of inferior rank in Spain are commonly called "Hidalgos,"
contrary to the rules of the language. The outskirts of Paris
are finer than those of Madrid.
2. Have you given the earnest money to the merchant?
(The) Carnival was very long this year. To what sum does
the expense of your journey amount? In a fortnight we shall
celebrate the betrothal of my cousin (f,). These trousers are
very well made (bien hechos); which tailor has made them?
Why (did) has not the footman put the dessert on the table?
The origin of his family is lost in the obscurity (darkness) of
history. (The) vespers were being chanted when we returned
from our walk. The Estates of the country will not assemble
this year, because the queen and her court are abroad. My
master and mistress will have no reason to complain of my
behaviour. The king and queen refused to receive the count
and countess. Do your parents know that you are here?
Can you tell pae in which province "Las Navas" is situated?
Give me the toothpicks! I bought two bootjacks yesterday.
This petticoat is finer than the petticoats which are sold in
that shop.
Readingr Exercise.
Descripción dd pais mejicano.
Esta tierra tiene cincuenta leguas de costa de la una
parte y de la otra de este pueblo, y por la costa de la mar
Digitized by VjOOQIC
220 Lesson 8.
es toda llana, de muchos arenales que en algunas partes
duran dos leguas y más. La tierra adentro j fuera de los
dichos arenales es tierra muy llana y de muy hermosas vegas
y riberas en ellas, tales y tan hermosas, que en toda Espafla
no pueden ser mejores, asi de apacibles á la vista, como de
fructíferas de cosas que en ellas siembran. Hay en esta tierra
todo género de caza y aves y animales conforme á los de
nuestra naturaleza, asi como ciervos, corzos, gamos, lobos,
zorros, perdices, palomas, tórtolas de dos y tres maneras,
codornices, liebres, conejos; por manera que en aves y ani-
males no hay diferencia de esta tierra á España; á mas da
una gran cordillera de sierras muy hermosas, y algunas de
ellas son en gran manera muy altas, entre las cuales hay una
que excede en mucha altura á todas las otras, y de ella se
vé y descubre una gran parte del mar y de la tierra, y es
tan alta que si el dia no es bien claro no se puede divisar
ni ver lo alto de ella, porque de la mitad arriba está toda
cubierta de nubes.
[Hernán Cortés, Cartas de Relación, Carta primera.]
ConTersacién.
¿Cuál es la extensión de esta tierra?
¿Qué tiene por la parte del mar?
¿Cómo es la tierra?
¿Cómo son sus vegas?
¿Qué tiene en caza, aves y animales?
¿Qué tiene además, y como son sus sierras?
¿Cómo es una de ellas?
Third Lesson.
Use of the Article.
Definite Article.
Expressed in Spanish and suppressed in English.
1. Before plural words in sentences expressing
general or universal characteristics, or before words in
the singular either referring to abstract things or used
in an abstract meaning:
Lo8 cometas tienen cola, comets have tails.
Las golondrinas vuelven en verano.
Swallows return in summer.
Lo8 árboles tienen hqjas, trees have leaves.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Definite Article. ?21
Lo8 pájaros vuelan, y los peces nadan.
Birds fljy fishes swim.
Las abuelas miman á sus nietas.
Grandmothers spoil their granddaughters.
Los oídos son para oir, ears are made to hear with.
La mentira es odiada^ lying is hated.
La tórtola es el emblema de la inocencia.
Doves are the emblems of innocence.
La leña se saca de los bosques.
Firewood is obtained from woods.
La fruta verde es nociva.
Unripe fruit is unwholesome.
El amarillo y el azul produ>cen el verde.
Yellow and blue produce green.
N.B. — Thus, before the Infinitives when used as a verbal
noun:
El saber no ocupa lugar, knowledge is no hindrance.
El viajar es agradable, travelling is pleasant.
Le encontré al salir, I met him on coming out.
Bemark.— When in the above case (See 1) todos, todas
is introduced, it precedes the article; todo or toda replaces
the article:
Todos los árboles tienen hojas, all trees have leaves.
Toda fruta verde es nociva.
Any unripe fruit is unwholesome.
N.B.-Cf:
No todo libro es bueno.
It is not every book that is good.
Todo el libro es bueno, the whole book is good.
2. Before the names of titles, dignities, etc., -- don,
doña, sor, fray excepted — when speaking of the per-
son, riot to the person:
El rey Alfonso XIII, King Alphonse XIII.
El general Prim, General Prim.
El Sr. de Pérez Galdós, Mr. Perez Galdos.
Bon Juan, Bona Maria,
Sor Ju^na, Sister Joan.
Fray Lope, Brother Lope.
3. Before the proper names of certain countries,
provinces, towns, and most of the volcanoes:
El Brasil, Brazil. el Ferrol, Ferrol.
el Canadá, Canada. el Japón, Japan.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
222 Lesson 3.
él Perú, Peru. la Florida, Florida.
d VesuviOy Mount Vesuvius. la Habana, Havana.
la Coruña, Corunna. la Argentina, the Argentine.
KB. —Castilla la Nueva (la Vieja), New (Old) Castile,
iíewiarA;.— Indifferent are:
África, or el Africa, Africa. Asia, or el Asia, Asia.
Argelia, or la Argelia, Algeria. Egipto, or el Egipto, Egypt
^.jB.— Proper names of countries, towns, etc., when re-
ferred to in a restricted meaning require the article:
La España de los Beyes Católicos,
Spain of the time of the Catholic Monarchs.
El Madrid de entonces, the Madrid of those days.
4. With the names of the days of the week and
the hours of the day, except in dates and time in a
letter or telegram:
Le veré á usted el domingo, I shall see you on Sunday.
Hasta el lunes, until Monday.
El año pasado, last year.
El mes que viene, next month.
La semana próxima, next week.
Son las tres, it is three o'clock.
El sol se pone á las cinco, the sun sets at five.
But:
Lunes, 12 diciembre, Monday, December 12.
Madrid, 2. 40 tarde, Madrid, 2.40. p. m.
5. After nosotros and vosotros, if followed by a noun
collectively used, as:
Nosotros los españoles. We Spaniards.
Vosotros los actores. You actors.
6. After the verb dar, when meaning "to wish" in
certain locutions, as:
Bar lo8 buenos dias, to wish a good morning (day).
Bar las buenas tardes.
To wish a good evening, good night.
Likewise: dar el parabién, to congratulate, dar el pé'
same,^ to condole.
7. With certain words, phrases, or idioms:
Voy á la iglesia, I am going to church.
Se prohibe la entrada, no admittance.
Creer en el cielo, to believe in heaven.
* pésame = me yesa, it afflicts me.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Definite Article. 228
Se ha proclamado ¡a ley marcial.
Martial law has been proclaimed.
La luna brilla en el espado.
The moon shines in space.
Me voy al extranjero, I am going abroad.
Los reclutas son llevados al cuartel.
Recruits are taken to bariracks.
La Cámara de los Lores, the House of Lords.
La Cámara de los Comunes, the House of Commons.
La gente va á la iglesia, people go to church.
Irse á la cama, to go to bed.
JEJl monopolio del tabaco, the monopoly of tobacco.
El ministro de la Guerra, the Minister of War.
Competido de la necesidad, compelled by necessity. ;
Todo el mundo, everybody.
ÁI parecer, apparently.
Es á la vez una ciencia y un arte.
It is at once an art and a science.
Señores viajeros, al tren, gentlemen, take your seats.
Pronunciar eZ si, to say "I will".
Hemos estado en el Real.
We have been to the Opera House (Madrid).
8. After todo, all, if the following word has a con-
crete signification, as: todo el dinero, all the money. If,
however, the following words express an abstract idea,
without any further attribute, the article is omitted after
todo^ as:
Con toda consideración, with all consideration.
9. With the names of languages (note the con-
trast), speaking of languages:
Mi hermano lee y escribe el español.
My brother reads and writes Spanish.
Whereas: Esas señoras hablan italiano (or en italiano).
Those ladies speak Italian— i.e., just now, and not
English, etc.
10. To render the English possessives — 's, my,
thy, etc., mine, his, etc.; the correlatives he who^
whoeyer, and the demonstratives that, those — ie.:
La casa de Jtuin, John's house.
Me he cortado el dedo, I have cut my finger.
Aquel libro es el de F., that is your book.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
224 Lesson 8.
El que vive aprende^ he who lives, learns.
El hueno de mi hermano, that good brother of mine.
Observation,-'\t must be well understood that the pre-
positions de and á cannot be contracted with the article, if
this precedes a word which is taken as a title or a name
of a book, opera, or a similar work. Thus:
Bodrigo Diaz de Vivar es generalmente conocido con et
sobrenombre de él Cid (and not del Cid).
R. etc. is commonly known by the surname of the Cid.
Pocas comedias de Calderón aventajan á El alcalde de
Zalamea.
There are but few comedies of Calderón superior to
"The Justice of Zalamea."
Definite Article omitted in Spanish and expressed
in English.
1. With the apposition, as:
Bernardo Taso, padre de Torcuato.
Bernard Tasso, the father of Torquato.
Isabel, reina de España. Isabel, the Queen of Spain.
Exception. — The article should be used with the
apposition:
(a) If the apposition is quahfied by a superlative; as :
Shakespeare, el poeta dramático más famoso de Ingla-
terra.
Shakespeare, the most celebrated dramatic poet of
England.
Dante, él tnaytM* poeta de Italia.
Dante, the greatest poet of Italy.
(b) If a characteristic surname (not a numeral) is
added to an historical name, as:
Luis el grande, Louis the Great.
Carlos el temerario, Charles the Dauntless.
2. With the ordinals with the names of kings,
popes, etc., both in writing and in speaking:
Alfonso XIII (trece, not el trece).
Eduardo Vil (séptimo).
Carlos V (quinto) y Felipe II (segundo).
Fio IX (nono).
3. With titles of books:
Vida de Cristobal Colófi.
The life of Christopher Columbus.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
I>efinite Article. 225
4. With the names of the months, and in the
dating of letters:
Efnero y febi^ero son meses muy fríos,
January and February are very cold months.
Miércoles diez y ocho de octubre,
Wednesday, the 18th of October.
Note.— The article should always be used otherwise:
JSl doce de enero y the 12 th of January.
Le veré á Y, el lunes, I will see you on Monday.
5. The article is omitted after the verbs to he, to
become, to seem, to name, to call, etc., if these verbs are
followed by a word denoting rank, dignity, office, nation-
ality, etc., as:
Es hijo de un principe ruso.
He is the son of a Russian prince.
La reina nombró al general por ministro,
The queen appointed the general her minister.
Likewise, with fines (end), mediados (half, middle),
principios (beginning), if denoting a certain period, as:
A fines de abril, at (towards) the end of April.
Á mediados del año pasado.
Towards the middle of last year.
6. In a great many adverbial locutions and idioms, as :
Morir á hierro, to perish by the sword.
-A porfía, in emulation.
Morir de fiebre (de calentura), to die of (a) fever.
Por desdicha, unfortunately.
Estar en ascuas, to be in great anxiety.
Fin, The end (in books).
En primer lugar, en segundo lugar.
In the first place, in the second place.
Comida hecha, compañía deshecha.
The end of a feast is the parting of company.
Note, —With some expressions, however, the article is not
totally excluded. Thus we may as well say: ir en socorro,
as ir al socorro, to hasten to some one's assistance ; traducir
en francés, as al francés, to translate into French.
Further cases of the omission of the Indefinite
Article in Spanish.
1. In such locutions as:
Tener costumbre, to use (to have the habit),
tener sed, to be thirsty,
tener intención, to have the intention.
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 16
Digitized by VaOOQlC
226 Lesson 8.
Likewise: mudar de semblante, to change colour (of the
face); hacer número, to make up a sum, etc.
Note.— Very often the idea is essentially modified by the
omission or the use of the article. Thus:
Dar alma, means: to give life, and dar el alma, means: to expire.
diade juicio, > law- day, day » dia del juicio, » doomsday.
of trial,
?iacer cama, » to be confined» hacer la cama, » to make
to one's bed, the bed.
iamar estado, » to marry » tomar el estado » to become
eclesiástico, a priest.
2. With the words ca^a and palacio (the latter in
the signification of the Boyal Palace), used in quite a
general sense, after the prepositions de, á, and en, as :
Toy á casa de mi tio, I am going to my uncle's.
Viene de Palacio, he comes from the Royal Palace.
Mi hermana vive en casa de mi prima.
My sister lives at my cousin's.
Otherwise, the article should be added, as:
El militar salió de la casa del aldeano.
The soldier left the house of the peasant.
3. In famiUar style, before the words papá, mamá, as :
Fapá no está (i.e., en casa), papa is not at home.
4. If several words connected by y, ó, etc., follow
each other, no particular stress being laid on any of
them, the article may be omitted after the first, even if
they are of different genders. The same is the case
.if a substantive is qualified by two or more ad-
jectives, as:
Las lenguas* alemana y francesa.
The German and French languages.
El primero y segundo canto.
The first and second canto.
Los palacios, aldeas y castillos.
The palaces, villages, and castles.
N.£. — But the article should be added in speaking of
Uving beings of different sexes, as:
Los hombres y las mujeres, the men and women.
La^ hermanas y los hermanos, the sisters and brothers.
* If the substantive precedes, as in this sentence, it should
be plural.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Indefinite Article. 227
Indefinite Article.
The Indefinite Article omitted in Spanish and
expressed in English.
1. Before nouns used in connection with ser, ha-
cerse^ meterse, to denote class, profession, etc., in a
general sense, also in speaking of qualities, as:
Es liubil músico, he is a clever musician.
Es general, be is a general.
8e metió soldado, be became a soldier.
8e ha hecho ctira, be bas become a priest.
Lo creían traidor, tbey believed bim (to be) a traitor.
Esta flor da buen olor, tbis flower bas a good smell.
Note,— In tbese sentences tbe speaker does not consider
tbe individuality, but only tbe quality. If I say, "He is a
clever musician,'* of course I do not mean to say tbat be is
but one musician, but tbat be is very musical. The substan-
tive is therefore used instead of an adjective, and tbe article
denoting individuality, being superfluous, is omitted in Spanish.
But the indefinite article is required, if the quality
is represented as a particularly remarkable or striking
one, or if the substantive used as a predicate is followed
by an adjunct. Compare:
Es un loco, be is a madman. Es loco, he is a fool (a foolish
fellow).
Es un hoho, he is a dunce. Es hobo, he is stupid.
El marqués es un general de El marqués es general, the
mérito, the marquis is a marquis is a general.
general of great merit.
2. With the apposition (see p. 224, § 1) and with
words denoting office, ranJc^ social position, or any other
particular quality, as:
El desdén con el desdén, drama de Moreto.
Disdain with disdain, a drama of Moreto.
El titulo de marqués, the title of marquis.
El nombre de padre de los pobres, tbe name of "father
of the poor.**
3. Before the adjectives tan (so), tal (such), otro
(other), semejante (similar), igual (equal), medio (half),
derto (certain), tanto, tamaño (so great), and before the
substantives número (number), parte (part), porción
(portion), cantidad (quantity), multitud (many), where the
Digitized by LiiOOQIC
^28 Lesson 3.
•expression becomes more emphatic by the omission of
the article. Examples:
Tan noble acdon, so noble an action.
Tamaño esfuerzo, so great an exertion.
Gran parte de los infelices, a great number of the un-
happy men, etc.
Otra'^ vez, another time.
Media hora después, half an hour afterwards.
Tanta virtud, such (so great a) virtue.
4. In exclamatm'y and interrogatory elliptical sen-
tences, where the exclamation or interrogation is used
instead of a negation, likewise in negative elliptical
sentences, as:
¿Hay tnyjer más arrogante?
Is there a more arrogant woman to be found (that is to
say: there is no woman more arrogant than . . .).
Nunca vi hombre más impertinente.
1 never saw a more impudent man.
5. In elliptical sentences with the admirative
¡qué , . ..' to render What a . . .!
¡Qué hombre más orgulloso! what a proud man!
/ Qué cosa tan bonita ! what a pretty thing !
Use of the Neuter Article, lo.
1. With adjectives in the masculine singular; it
gives the adjective the force of a substantive, or of a
substantive-equivalent :
Lo bueno y lo verdadero, good and truth.
Todo lo barato es caro, cheap things are dear in the end.
Eso será lo prudente, that will be the wisest thing.
2. With adjectives, of either gender and number,
in conjunction with ser (to he) or any of its equi-
valents, and que (either expressed or understood), to
translate how, how much, so, when bringing forth the
attribute or quality:
No sabe usted lo mal que está.
You do not know how ill he is.
¡Lo alta que está! how tall she has grown!
¡ Lo atentos que son! they (m.) are so polite.
No me gustan por lo orgullosas.
I do not like them, because they (f) are so proud.
* Otro is never preceded by the indefinite article.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Indefinite Article. 229
3. Before comparatives, or adverbs to form a kind
of superlative:
Eso es lo peor, that is the worst of it.
Lo mejor es callar, the best thing is not say anything.
Es lo menos que puede hacer, it is the least he can do^
¡Lo bien que canta! how well she sings I
Ignoraba lo cerca que vive V.
I did not know you lived so near.
4. With qtie, almost always with the force of a
pronoun:
Eso es lo que quiero, that is what I like.
¡Lo que es ser pobre! that shows what it is to be poor I
The Articles Used Idiomatically.
Its power of being used in idiomatic expressions is
characteristic of the Spanish article, as:
Al contado, ready money.
Á la española, in the Spanish fashion.
A la moda, according to the fashion.
A la chita callando, on the sly.
Obrar á la ligera, to act thoughtlessly.
Al óleo, á la aguada, in oils, in water-colours.
Al punto, al momento, at once, immediately.
Al revés, al contrario.
Upside down, quite the contrary, on the contrary.
Hacerla, to put one's foot in it.
Guardársela á uno, to nurse a grudge.
Jugársela á uno de puño.
To play a nasty trick on someone.
Pegársela á uno, to take one in.
No tenderlas todas consigo, to feel uneasy.
No se como se las compone,
I do not know how he manages to do it.
Me la pagará, me las pagará.
I will make him pay for it.
Le ha pasado una.
Something serious has happened to him.
A lo militar, in a military way.
A lo torero, in bull-fighter's fashion.
A lo hipócrita, hypocritically.
Comer á lo cerdo, to it like a pig.
JPor lo común, por lo general, generally.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
230 Lesson 3.
Traducción. 3.
1. O Birds fly and () fishes swim. () Ears are to hear
with. Life is short. All () trees have leaves in summer.
Any unripe fruit is unwholesome. Brazil has many mines.
Canada has many pastures. Does the ship call (tr. tocar)
at Corunna and Ferrol? Until Sunday. I wish you a good
night. I am going abroad. Has your daughter blue or black
eyes? The culprit answered bending his head. Has he a
sore eye or a sore ear? His eye is bad. Heaven and earth
proclaim the glory of God. I swear by the God of my fathers
that I have spoken the truth. My elder brother studies
philosophy; my younger, theology. Hatred and love are two
powerful motives of () human actions. () Lead is heavier
than iron, but () iron is more useful than () lead. Has
Mr. Verguero already written to you from Paris? No, sii*,
Mr. Verguero has not yet written, but Miss Verguero has
written to a friend (f,) of hers in our town. You () French
are the vainest of all () nations. We () authors have more
to do than you () actors. We (say the) three brothers found
ourselves in a desperate situation at our uncle's death. I have
condoled with the captain. Go and wish the young lady
good evening!
2. Will you come back at nine or at ten o'clock? Last
week I (had) received a letter from my friend at Madrid. My
grandfather died at 85 years of age. Shall you depart [on]
Thursday or Friday? The ship starts on Tuesdays. Why did
you not bring (use Compound Perfect) all the cloth? With
all respect for your word, sir, I beg leave to doubt the (say
of the) fact. I do not know, whether the ladies spoke Spanish
or Italian; I was too far off to be able to understand them.
My brother speaks () French better than () English. Gre-
gory VII., the son of a peasant, was one of the most cele-
brated popes. Alexander, Caesar, and Napoleon were the
three greatest generals of all () ages. Schiller, the greatest
dramatic poet of Germany, died in the year 1805. Louis XIV.
of France is also sometimes called Louis the Great.
3. Charles the Dauntless was Duke of Burgundy. King
Philip II. of Spain was the father of Don Carlos. Do you
know this gentleman? Yes, he is the son of a rich American
merchant. The prince appointed the lieutenant, captain. July
and August are usually very warm months. December was
very cold last year. We arrived at Prague (on) Tuesday the
14th of October. The second person of the plural of ()
Spanish verbs usually ends in s, and the third person of the
plural in n, Aristides had the surname of the Just. Un-
happily my best friend died of () fever a few days after his
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Indefinite Article. 231
arrival. The awkward footman let the cup fall on the floor.
I have never lost sight of (de vista) this gentleman. The ship
rides at anchor in the harbour of Cadiz. I have translated
this book into French.
Traducción. 4.
1. Many people have the habit to sleep an hour after
dinner. Have you the intention to oflTend me (de ofenderme)
with these words? Are you hungry or are you thirsty? The
poor child has the fever (la calentura). The criminal turned
pale when the Judge appeared. The unfortunate man expired
at 10 o'clock in the evening. The enthusiasm for a great
cause enlivens our endeavours. On the day of the trial (dia
del juicio) there appeared more than thirty persons. Dooms-
day is the day of the end of the world. Has the servant
(f.) made the bed? I was confined to bed for a fortnight.
The young lady will become a nun. One easily takes the
habit of sleeping long. I go to my aunt's in order to dine
with her. Do you live with your aunt or with your cousin
(f) ? When we left the house of the judge, it began to thunder.
Towards the middle of May we hope to be in London.
2. Have you read () "Don Juan," by Lord Byron? No,
but I have read () "Childe Harold." () Canada is a British
colony in North America. () Corunna and () Ferrol are Spanish
towns. There are two Castiles, Old Castile and New Castile.
I study the English and Italian languages. The fourth and
fifth cantos of this poem are most beautiful (superL), The
boys and girls greeted the prince on his entering (al entrar
en) the castle. This young man is a clever physician, but a
bad poet. He obtained the title of Aulic Councillor for his
merits. Such a man can never be my friend. Half an hour
afterwards everything had disappeared. Is there a more
distrustful man than he? I doubt if (tr, that) there is a
good theatre in that town. Do you speak of () "Disdain with
Disdain," by Moreto?
3.* She buys everything that is cheap, but cheap things
are dear in the end. That is not the wisest thing. She is an
admirer (admiradora) of beauty, but you do not know how
proud she is, and that is not the worst of her. When one
cannot praise, the best thing is not to say anything. How
well you speak! I say what I feel. I hate () things done
on the sly, hypocriticaly. Generally () things are done in
(se hacen de) that way. How (neut.) ill he is! How (neut,)
proud they (f.) are for the little they have! That will be
* For this part of the Exercise see " Use of the Neuter Ar-
ticle lo'' and "The Articles Used Idiomatically.''
Digitized by VjOOQIC
282 Lesson 4.
the best. Pay always ready money! He has played me a nasty
trick, but I will make him pay for it.
Reading Exercise.
Descripción de la ciudad de Méjico,
Estaba fundada en un plano muy espacioso, coronado por
todas partes de altísimas sierras y montañas, de cuyos ríos
y vertientes, rebalsadas en el valle, se formaban diferentes
lagunas, y en lo más profundo los dos lagos mayores, que
ocupaba, con más de cincuenta poblaciones, la nación mejicana.
Tendría este pequeño mar treinta leguas de circunferencia, y
los dos lagos que le formaban se unían y comunicaban entre
sí por un dique de piedra que los dividía, reservando algunas
aberturas, con puentes de madera, en cuyos lados tenían sus
compuertas levadizas para cebar el lago inferior, siempre que
necesitaban de socorrer la mengua del uno con la redundancia
del otro. Era el más alto de agua dulce y clara, donde se
hallaban algunos pescados de agradable mantenimiento, y el
otro de agua salobre y oscura, semejante á la marítima, no
porque fuesen de otra calidad las vertientes de que se ali-
mentaba, sino por vicio natural de la misma tierra, donde se
detenían, gruesa y salitrosa por aquel paraje, pero de grande
utilidad para la fábrica de la sal, que beneficiaban cerca de
sus orillas, purificando al sol y adelgazando con el fuego las
espumas y superfluidades que despedía la resaca.
[SoUSy Conquista de Méjico.]
Conversación.
¿Dónde estaba fundada la ciudad de Méjico?
¿De qué estaba coronado el plano?
¿Qué se formaban de los río3 y vertientes?
¿Cuántas poblaciones formaban la nación mejicana, y
qué territorio ocupaban?
¿Cómo se unían y comunicaban los dos lagos?
¿Cómo cebaban el lago inferior?
¿Cómo eran estos lagos, y cómo era la tierra?
¿Para qué era útil?
¿Cómo fabricaban la sal?
Fourth Lesson.
(See Part I., Lesson 15.)
Possessiyes.
Possessive Adjectives.
Use of the complete, postpositive forms (mío,
tuyo, suyo, etc.).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Possessive Adjectives. 238
1. Emphatically after nouns preceded either by the
definite article, or by the indefinite article [not followed
by de], or by que; also by the demonstratives or car-
dinals provided they are not followed by de — i.e.:
El libro mio está encuadernado^ my book is bound.
Un amigo suyo lo vio, a friend of his saw it.
¿ Qué obras suyas conoce F. ?
What works by him do you know?
Aquél tío nuestro murió, that uncle of ours died.
Tres hijas suyas se casaron.
Three of his daughters married.
But:
Uno de su^ amigos lo vio, tres de sus hijas se casaron.
2. In general statements, not emphatically, as a
predicate of 8ev, to be:
Son unas parientas mlas, they (f.) are relatives of mine.
N.B.—jHijo mio! my son!
Padre nuestro que estás en los cielos.
Our Father which art in Heaven.
Muy Sr. mio: — Dear Sir.
Muy Sra. mia: — Dear Madam.
Use of the apocopated, prepositive forms (mf,
tu^ suj etc.).
1. Not emphatically when either the possessive be-
gins the sentence or when no article accompanies the
noun to which the possessive refers:
Mi amigo lo sabe, my friend knows it.
Su8 Ubros no se venden, his books do not sell.
Mis padres han llegado hoy.
My parents have arrived to-day.
No me gusta su cara, I do not like his face.
Le conoci en mi juventud, I knew him in my youth.
2. After uno, una^ the relatives quien, cual^ etc.,
the cardinals, the ordinals, and the comparatives and
superlatives, when they are followed by de:
Uno de mis amigos, one of my friends.
¿Cuál de sus obras? which of his works?
Tres de sus hijas, three of his daughters.
JEl m,ayor de mis hermanos, my eldest brother.
N.B.— The Spanish definite article replaces the English
Possessive Adjective in such sentences as:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
2S4 Lesson 4.
Me he cortado el dedo, I have cut my finger.
8e ha roto la pierna, he has broken his leg.
He perdido los guantes y él anillo,
I have lost my gloves and my ring.
Possessive Pronouns.
Use of the forms with the article (el mío, la
mía, etc.).
1. When referring to a noun in the same sentence
or in a previous one (except in answering a question
with ¿quién?):
Si no tiene F. paraguas llévese V. el mío.
If you have not got an umbrella take mine.
¿Es esta la mía ó la suya?
Is this mine or his (pen, etc.)?
Bat:
¿ Be quién es este paraguas ? — Mío.
Whose umbrella is this? — Mine.
2. In answering to ¿que? ¿cuál? ¿cuántos?,
also in elliptical sentences, as:
¿ Qué libro este? — El mió.
Whose book is this? — Mine.
¿ Á cuál amigo se refiere F. ? — Al mió.
Which friend do you mean? — My friend.
/ Qué memoria la mia ! v^hat a memory mine is I
§ 1. As stated in Lesson 15, § 4 (Part L), the
possessive adjective is in Spanish, as in EngUsh,
commonly expressed but once, if two or more nouns,
connected by y or ó, follow each other, thus:
Su persona y (sus) facultades, his person and qualities.
If, however, these substantives denote persons, or
if they are of different numbers, or if a particular stress
is laid on each word, the possessive should be repeated;
as:
Sits fueros, sus hrios, sus pramáticas, su voluntad,
(Cervantes.)
His privileges, his courage, his deeds, his will.
He perdido m^i sombrero y m,is guantes,
I have lost my hat and my gloves.
Mi amiga y m,i prima.
My friend (f) and my cousin (f,).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Possessive Pronouns. 235
N,B, — Mi amiga y prima would be: my friend and
cousin (i.e., the same person).
§ 2. If the substantive is preceded or followed by
an adjective, either the apocopated or the complete form
of the possessive may be used. The latter is preferred
if a stress is laid on the adjective, or if the expression
is exclamative; thus:
Mi querido amigo, my dear friend. Whereas:
¡Querido amigo mió I dear friend!
§ 3. The complete form should be used if not
possession, but a mere personal reference is intended, as:
Es costumbre suya, that is his habit (a custom of his).
§ 4. By using the indefinite article together with
the possessive adjective, the expression is rendered more
emphatic. Thus :
Es amigo mio, means: he is living on friendly terms
with me.
Whereas :
Es un amigo mio, means: he is a friend of mine.
§ 5. Sometimes a demonstrative pronoun is added
to the possessive adjective, as: this book of yours. In
this case either the apocopated or the complete form
may be used, as:
Esta tu culpa or esta culpa tuya, this fault of yours.
§ 6. Very often the possessive pronoun of the 3rd
person is rendered by the genitive of the personal pro-
noun, especially if a misconception might arise from the
possessive pronoun being alike for both genders. Thus :
My pen, his, and hers.
Mi pluma, ¡a suya y la de ella {lit. that of her).
This is her book, and that is his.
Este es sti libro y aquel es el de él,
§ 7. The possessive of the polite form (your) has
been mentioned Part I., page 53, § 7. Note now how
it is rendered in Spanish.
Mi casa y la de F. (or y su casa de F.).
My house and yours.
Mis amigos y los de F. (or y sus amigos de F.).
My friends and yours.
jY".J5. — The same mode of expression should be employed
if "yours" is preceded by the auxiliary verb "to be," as:
Digitized by VaOOQlC
236 Le88on 4.
j estos guantes son los de V.
These gloves aie yours, < estos guantes son stis guantes
\ de r.
N.B.— Estos guantes son de F. (lit,: these gloves are of
you). *
Traducción. 5.
1. A friend of his saw her and told (¡o dijo á) one of my
friends. Her words were, my son I Do you come from her
house or from your house? Neither from hers nor from mine.
Which of his works do you like best? The best of his works is
**Hamlet*\ She had always loved him for his kindness towards
his sisters. This poet is distinguished for his profoundness and
clearness. Have you found your knife and gloves? I have
found them, but I have lost my pocket-handkerchief and
my earrings. My friend and cousin (m,) has no idea how
much he owes me. Last night my aunt and cousin (f.) har-
rived by (the) train. Dearest sister! You (tr, thou) do
not know how much I love you (tr, thee), or you would
think better of your (thy) ^ brother and friend ! It is an
arrogance on (tr, of) your part (possess, pronoun) to pronounce
(a) judgment on a matter that does not concern you. No
prudence on my side (mia) could have prevented (prevenido)
that danger. So much the worse for him {tr. It is in his
harm) if he does not follow (the) good advice. It is your
fault if we do not succeed. It is a habit of mine to call
everything by its right name. This gentleman is a friend
of mine. Whose book is this? Mine. What a memory mine
is! My friend is a writer; have you read his works? I
have read some. Which of his works?
2. Mr. Ferrer is a relation of mine, but he is not a friend
of mine. (This) your levity will do you the greatest harm.
(This) my behaviour needs not to be concealed from anybody.
Next year my uncle and yours will (go to) visit the Exhibition
in Paris. Your brother and his have settled the conditions
of the sale. Our house, his, and hers will be newly painted
this year. My uncle has always provided for his sister and
her children like a father. This is his pen ; where (did Agnes
leave) has Agnes hers. Whose are these beautiful steel pens?
They are yours. Miss (N.)! My children and yours have done
great mischief in our neighbour's garden.
Beadingr Exercise.
Descripción de Ta plajea del mercado de México,
Digo esto porque á caballo nuestro capitán, con todos
los más que tenian caballo y la más parte de nuestros snjda-
* The English verb "to belong to" is generally translated
by ser de.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Degrees of Comparison with Verbs. 237
dos, muy apercibidos fuimos al Tatelulco, é iban muchos ca-
ciques que el Montezuma envió para que nos acompañasen;
7 cuando llegamos á la gran plaza que se dice el Tatelulco,
como no habíamos visto tal cosa, quedamos admirados de la
multitud de gente y mercaderías que en ella habla y del gran
concierto y regimiento que en todo tenían; y los principales
que iban con nosotros nos lo iban mostrando : cada género de
mercaderías estaba por si, y tenían situados y señalados sus
asientos. Comencemos por los mercaderes de oro y plata, y
piedras ricas y plumas y mantas y cosas labradas, y otras
mercaderías, esclavos y esclavas; digo que traían tantos á
vender á aquella gran plaza como traen los portugueses los
negros de Guinea; y traíanlos atados en unas varas largas,
con collares á los pescuezos, porque no se les huyesen, y otros
dejaban sueltos. Luego estaban otros mercaderes que vendían
ropa más bista, y algodón, y otras cosas de hilo torcido, y
cacagüeteros que vendían cacao; y de esta manera estaban
cuantos géneros de mercaderías hay en toda Nueva España.
[Bernal Diaz del Castillo, Conquista de Nueva España.]
ConTersación.
¿Quiénes fueron á Tatelulco?
¿Cómo iban?
¿Qué hizo Montezuma?
¿Qué les sucedió al llegar á la gran plaza?
¿ De que se quedaron admirados ?
¿Qué hacían los principales que iban con ellos?
¿Quiénes eran los mercaderes?
¿Cómo llevaban á los esclavos?
¿Cuales eran los géneros de mercaderías?
Fifth Lesson.
Degrees of Comparison with Verbs.
Degrees of Comparison.
1. Máximo, greatest, and mínimo, smallest, and ín-
fimo, lowest, are only used in certain phrases, as:
Un circulo máximo (mínimo), a great (small) circle.
Un disparate máximo, the greatest nonsense.
Binen por la cosa más minima.
They quarrel for the slightest thing.
A precios Ínfimos, at the lowest prices.
2. The forms bonísimo (also buenisimo) and malísimo
have almost the same signification as óptimo (best) and
Digitized by VaOOQlC
238
Lesson 5.
pésimo (worst), whereas el menor (the least) expresses the
accessory idea of comparison^ el mínimo denoting a6-
solutely the lowest degree. Of pequeño (little) there
exists a regular superl. absol. pequeñísimo, meaning the
*'very least," the *'most trifling," etc. Supremo corre-
sponds with the English adjective "supreme," as: el
consejo supremo^ the supreme council. Sumo means the
highest — i.e., the greatest, as:
Con sumo gustOy with the greatest pleasure.
Formulae of Comparison with Verbs.
1. For equality:
lo sabe como yo.
he andado tanto como usted,
no sabe tanto como dicen,
le conozco tan bien como
usted,
lo sé no menos que él.
como,
tanto como,
as
as much as
tan bien como, as well as
no tnenos que, not less than
N.£. — Lee tanto que pierde la vista.
gana tanto que no sabe lo que gana.
2. For superiority:
m,ás que, more than
mejor que.
better than
paseo más que antes,
le quiere más que él á
ella,
le conozco mejor que usted,
escribe mejor que Cervantes,
3. For inferiority:
menos que, less than
los jóvenes saben menos
que los viejos,
estudia m^nos que su her-
mano.
not— so— as no sale tanto como antes,
no me costó tanto como á
usted.
worse than lo hace peor que yo,
está peor que estaba.
not so well as no lo hace tan bien como yo.
no duermo tan bien como
solía.
4. If a number forras the second part af a com-
parison, the English "than" is not rendered by que
(see page 80) but by de [as in French], Thus:
no— tanto— CO'
m^,
peor que,
no tan bien co
mo.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Degrees of Comparison with Verbs. 289
Cayeron más de cincuenta hombres.
There fell more than fifty men.
Habia menos de veinte hombres.
There were less than twenty men there.
If, however, the first part of the comparison is
negative, **than" is translated by que^ as:
No tengo m,ás que cinco duros,
I have only ^y% dollars.
N,B,—No tengo m,ás de cinco duros,
I have not more than ^\q dollars.
5. If the second part of the comparison is an
accessory sentence (seepage 79, §4b), "than" is rendered
by de, as:
Mi amigo tiene más (or menos) libros de los que puede
leer.
My friend has more (or less) books than he can read.
If, on the other hand, the comparative is an ad-
verb J que lo is employed, as:
Habla el español mejor que lo (or de lo que lo) escribe,.
He speaks the Spanish language better than he writes it.
6. The English "the more the more" and
"the less the less" are rendered by cuanto más
(menos) .... (tanto) más (menos), as :
Cuanto, más dinero tiene^ (tanto) más quiere,
The more money he has, the more he wants.
Note, — The first part of the comparison may likewise be
expressed by mientras más (menos), but then in the second
part only más (and not tanto más) follows, whereas after
cuanto más the corresponding tanto may, or may not be ex-
pressed, as shown by the above sentence.
If cuanto or tanto are followed by a substantive^ they
become adjectives, and therefore agree with their noun, as:
Era tanto más aplicado, cuanta más facilidad tenia
para estudiar.
He was the more diligent, the more talent he had for
studying.
7. If in English a superlative immediately follows
a numeral, as: "owe of the greatest men," etc., the
Spanish equivalent may be rendered as follows:
One of the most cruel kings.
Tin rey de los más crueles.
Uno de los reyes más crueles.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
240 Lesson 5.
8. The adjectives most and least are rendered as
follows:
(a) By la mayor (menor) parte, if a substantive
follows, as:
Most men = La mayor parte de los hombres.
(b) If these words are neuter — i.e., if they are them-
selves substantives, as: *'the least," "the most," they
are rendered lo más (lo menos) ^ as:
That is the least you can do.
Esto es lo menos que Y. puede hacer.
(c) If the substantive following most or least denotes
not persons but things, los (las) más (menos) de los
(las) may be used, as well as la mayor (menor) parte
de . . ., as:
(The) most houses of this town.
Las más de las casas de esta ciudad,
9. The highest degree of comparison is rendered
in Spanish:
(a) By the relat, superl. preceded by lo más (me-
nos), as:
An extremely clear river, un rio lo más limpio.
An extremely simple woman, una mujer lo m,as sencilla,
(b) By the verb poder (to be able), sabm* (to know),
or, less frequently, by caber, as:
He shouted as loud as possible, gritó lo m,á8 que podia.
He did his best, hizo cuanto supo.
I shall do my utmost.
Haré cuanto pueda (todo cuanto cabe en mi),
(c) By lo (la), todo (toda) . . . posible, if a substantive
without another adjective follows, as:
With the utmost correctness.
Con la posible corrección (or con la corrección posible).
(d) By hasta no más (lit, *'till no more"), in which
case the substantive with its adjective should precede, as:
An extremely timid woman.
Una mujer tímida hasta no más.
Degrees of Comparison with Adverbs.
1. Spanish adverbs expressing ideas which admit
of comparison follow the rules given for the adjectives :
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Degrees of Comparison with Verbs.
241
tan lejos como, más ó menos lejos que.
tan tarde como, más 6 menos tarde que,
tan dulcemente como, más ó menos dulcemente que,
muy lejos, lejisimo,
muy tarde, tardísimo,
muy dulcemente, dulcisimamente.
Note the following:
mucho antes (not muy antes),
mucho después (not muy después),
mucho más (not muy más),
mucho menos (not 'tnuy menos).
N,B,—lrí degrees of comparison acá and allá are used
instead of aqui and alii;
tan acá (ahi, allá) más acá (ahí, allá) muy acá (ahí, allá),
como, que,
Formulae of Comparison with Adverbs.
1. For equality:
tan — corno, as — as
no— menos—
que,
not— less— than
2. For superiority:
tnás—gtief more— tban
3. For inferiority:
míenos— que, less— than
no — tctn—conto, not— so— as
Traducción.
1. To quarrel for the slightest
sense. She is a very good woman,
Spanish Conv.-Grammar.
vive tan lejos como yo,
llegué tan tarde como éL
toca tan lien como canta,
vive no menos lejos que yo.
llegó no menos tarde queyo.
toca no únenos bien que
canta,
vive más lejos que yo.
se levantó más tarde que
ayer,
habla más dulcemente que
su hermana,
se ha levantado menos tarde
que ayer,
le veo menos á menudo
que le veia.
vive menos cómodamente
que antes,
no le veo tan á menudo
como le veia.
6.
thing is the greatest non-
but he is very wicked ; he
Digitized by VaOOQlC
242 Lesson 5.
is one of the most wicked men. She had very bad taste ( —
pésimo) when she married him. I will do it with the greatest
pleasure. ( ) Fruit is now sold at the lowest prices. He know»
her as I (do). You do not know him as well as I do. I know
him as much as you do. I have read more than I read.
He speaks better () French than () English. I walk more
than I used to (solía). There were more than a thousand per-
sons there. We waited more than three hours. I have seen
that opera more than six times. They spend more than ne-
cessary — at least, more than they ought to. () Old people have
more experience than () young people. She does not receive sa
much as she used to, because she is not so well as she was.
She is worse than she was. She lives very far and retires
very early. I knew her much before I knew (de conocerle á)
you. You knew me much later. Come a little closer (más
acá). Move back (Hágase V.) a little farther (más allá).
Does he live so far as he did before? He does not live
nearer than he did. I do not go to bed so late as when I
was young. They do not go to the theatre so often as
before. Lying is the worst excuse of a fault. **Wallenstein" is
the best dramatic work of Schiller. In the whole town there
is no worse lodging than ours. The greatest sum does not
suffice to satisfy his wishes. I have read the new novel with
the greatest pleasure. One hears such abominable words only
amongst (entre) the lowest people. Did you pay more than
200 reals for this coat ? No, sir, I did not pay more than 180,
This lady has more whims than she can satisfy. You write
English better than you speak it.
2. The more wealth we possess, the more we wish to
possess. The more faults we have, the less we are inclined
to confess them. These people are the more presumptuous,
the less knowledge they possess. The more talent he has for
learning, the less diligent he is. Frederick Barbarossa was
one of the most powerful emperors of Germany. (The) most
young people like pleasure (better) more than work. Ten
dollars are the least you can give. It is you, my friend, who
always speak most and act (do) least. The greatest number
of the trees of this garden are old and do not bear any
fruit. Few (tr. the least) things please us long, as soon a&
we possess them. Italy has an extremely agreeable climate.
I said as much as I could, but he would not believe me.
The prince promised him to do his utmost (fr. poder). Write
this letter with the utmost care! An extremely impudent
beggar followed me through several streets.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Numerals. 243
Reading Exercise.
Be las riquezas del Peru,
Los que miran con otros ojos que los comunes las ri-
quezas que el Perú ha enviado al mundo viejo y derramá-
dolas por todo él, dicen que antes le han dafíado que aprove-
chado, porque dicen que tas riquezas comúnmente antes son
causa de vicios que de virtudes, porque á sus posesores los
inclinan á la soberbia, á la ambición y á la gula, y que los
hombres, criándose con tantos regalos como hoy tienen, salen
afeminados, inútiles para el gobierno de la paz, y mucho
más para el de la guen-a, y que como tales emplean todo su
cuidado en inventar comidas y bebidas, galas y arreos ; y que
de inventarlos cada día tantos y tan extraños, ya no saben
que inventar, ó inventan torpezas en lugar de galas, que más
son hábito de mujeres que de hombres, como hoy se vé; y
que si han crecido las rentas de los ricos, para que ellos vi-
van en abundancias y regalos, también han crecido las mi-
serias de los pobres, para que ellos mueran de hambre y des-
nudez, por la carestía que el mucho dinero ha causado en
los mantenimientos y vestidos; que, aunque sea pobremente,
ya los pobres el día de hoy no se pueden vestir ni comer por
la mucha carestía, y que ésta es la causa de haber tantos
pobres en la república, que mejor lo pasaban cuando no había
tant^ moneda.
[El Inca Garcüaso de la Vega, Comentarios Keales.]
Conyersación.
¿Qué se dice de las riquezas del Perú?
¿Quiénes lo dicen?
¿Por qué dicen que las riquezas son causa de vicios?
¿Qué les sucede á los hombres que se crian con tantos
regalos ?
¿ Y cuál es la consecuencia de ello ?
¿De haber crecido la riqueza en los ricos y la miseria
en los pobres qué resulta?
¿Cuál es la causa de haber tantos pobres?
¿Cuándo lo pasaban mejor?
Sixth Lesson.
Numerals.
(See Lessons 16, 17, Part I.)
§ 1. In colloquial language, iino^ una, are very
much used pronominally, either with a personal or
with an impersonal meaning:
16*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
244 Lesson 6.
A veces uno no piensa en lo que hace.
Sometimes one does not think about what he is doing.
No sabe uno que hacer, si ir ó no ir.
I do not know what to do, whether to go, or not.
As an indefinite, uno, una, may be used both in
the singular and in the plural:
Ha estado uno á preguntar por V.
Somebody called for you.
Ha venido una con un niño.
A woman with a child came.
Pasaban unos, y lo vieron.
Some that were passing saw it.
As an indefinite, as well as a partitive, may be
U3ed with the article:
Be los dos, él uno escapó, one of the two escaped.
Las unas decían una cosa, las otras, otra.
Some of them (f.) were saying one thing, the others
another.
§ 2. AmboSj both is often expressed (see p. 59, 10),
by uno y otro, and negatively, by ni uno ni otro. Seldom
*'both" is rendered by el uno y él otro. Likewise, dos
occurs with the signification "both," as:
Sus do8 primos, both his cousins.
¿ Tiene Y. pan y vino ? Tengo uno y otro.
Have you (some) bread and wine? 1 have both.
N.B.—Both used adverbially means á la vez, á un
mismo tiempoj and may be rendered by tan(to) . . . como . . .,
or negatively by no menos — que. Thus, he is both prudent
and brave, is rendered by:
Es á la vez prudente y valiente.
Es á un mismo tiempo prudente y valiente,
Es tan prudente como valiente, or negatively :
No es míenos prudente que valiente.
§ 3. Some peculiar expressions may be noted:
Á últimos de mes, in the last days of the month.
Á primeros de enero, in the first days of January.
A mediados de semana, about the middle of the week.
We need not add that in these examples the word dias
(days) is understood.
§ 4. Frequently primero is used adverbially with
the signification first(ly) and sooner, or it is periphrased
by to like better, to prefer, etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Indefinite Numerals. 245
Primero quiero comer, first I will eat.
Primero me quedo con el libro que venderlo tan barato,
I would sooner keep the book (I prefer keeping the book)
than sell it so cheaply.
§ 5. The adverb first and last are frequently trans-
lated primero and último, preceded by the respective
article, as:
Los niños se recogieron los primeros (los últimos),
The children went away first (last).
Indefinite Numerals.
(See Lesson 18, Part I.)
1. Alguno* followed by que otro means now
and again, now and then, very few, seldom. It is
equivalent to the plural of alguno, as:
Leo alguna que otra novela.
I read now and again a novel.
Voy alguna que otra vez*
I go now and then (seldom).
Le veo alguno que otro día.
I see him now and then.
Hdbia alii alguna que otra persona.
There were very few people there.
2. The contrary of alguno is ninguno (none). It
requires the negation only when follotving the verb.
8u opinión no es de ningún valor.
His opinion is of no importance.
N,B,-'En ningún pais de Europa,
In no country of Europe.
En ningún caso, in no case.
3. Nadie (nobody) and nada (nothing) follow the
same rules as ninguno — i.e,:
fji".^- ] "' ■"«" """»«■
In the following cases they are expressed in Eng-
lish by the affirmative words one, anybody, anything.
* If alguno, mucho, poco, tanto, harto are used adverbially
before más, they beconie true adjectives, as : Alguna (mucha, poca}
más agua, Some (much, a little) more water.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
246 Lesson 6.
(a) In rhetorical questions— e.gr.;
¡Denws á la nueva población el nombre de Santa Fé!
¿ Cabe en el mundo ninguno tan glorioso ?
Let US give to the new town the name Santa Fé! Is
there a more renowned one in the world?
¿Hay nada más formidable?
Is there anything more terrible?
(b) After a comparative — e.g.:
F. lo sabe mejor que nadie.
You know it better than anyone else.
Also the preposition, sin, tvithouf, and the conjunction
derived from it, sin que, icitliout (that) change the follow-
ing indefinite numeral into a negative one — e.g.:
Sin ningún amigo, without any friend.
Sin que na^ie lo supiera, without anyone knowing it.
4. Quienquiera is only used substantively (i.e.,
without a substantive), whereas cualquiera is either
an adjective or a substantive, as:
He de salir con cualquier tiempo.
I must go out in any weather whatever.
Dígalo F. á quienquiera.
You may tell whom you please.
Note,—\{ cualquiera or quienquiera introduce a relative
accessory sentence, they should be followed by que, as:
Cualquiera que sea el tiempo he de salir.
Whatever the weather may be, 1 must go out.
Cualquiera que lo diga se equivoca.
Whoever may say it is mistaken.
N.B.—Ese en un cualquiera, he is nobody.
5. Todo (all, whole, every) is either an adjective or
a substantive. In the former case it should be followed
by the article (as in French and Italian), or by its
substitutes, unless in sentences of a general character,
with the meaning of every, — Compare:
Todo el mundo, the whole world.
Todo un día, a whole day.
Toda mi casa, my whole house.
And:
Todo hombre honrado, every honest man.
Toda día trae sus penas, every day brings its sorrows.
Toda casa tiene puerta, every hoise has a door.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Indefinite Numerals. 247
On the other hand, the article is omitted before
proper names or in adverbial expressions, as:
Por toda E$paña, all over Spain (lit. through the
whole Spain).
Con toda puntuálidadj with all punctuality, in the nick
of time.
If everyone or all is followed by a rdative pronoun,
this pronoun is rendered either by the corresponding
form of cuanto or by que preceded by the article, as:
Todo lo que tengo, all (that which) I have.
Todo el que lo haya dicho, whoever may have said so ; or
(Todos) cuantos lo hayan dicho* (but not cuanto lo
ha dicho).
El principe ha hablado con (todos) cuantos estaban
presentes,
The prince spoke to all those who were present.
Bemark, — Todo is also neuter and corresponds to the
English everything, as:
Él habla de todo, he speaks of everything.
N'.B,— TodOf if adverbially used (as much as, all, every-
thing, entirely), is invariable, and when followed by a verb is
used in connection with que, cuanto — i.e.;
Lo ha perdido todo, he has lost everything.
Ha jugado todo lo que tenia.
He has gambled away all he had.
Todo cuanto se haga, sera inútil.
All that may be done will be useless.
Idioms with toclo:
Es todo un caballero, he is a perfect gentleman.
Es una mujer todo corazón, she is a woman all heart»
Lo sabe y, con todo, no lo dice.
He knows it, and yet does not tell.
Lo sabe él y todo, even he knows it.
6. Mismo, saine, self, own, is used adjectively, as:
la misma cosa, the same thing, su mismo padre, his
own father. Sometimes it occurs as an absol. superl.,
as: la mismísima cosa, the very same thing, and
frequently it corresponds to the English even, as:
La misma reina lo ha dicho.
Even the queen said so.
* Todos cuantos lo han dicho, all those who said it.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
248 Lesson 6.
In conjunction with the personal pronouns it
immediately follows the pronoun, thus:
Nosotros mismos, we ... . ourselves.
Vosotras mismas, you .... yourselves (few,).
If the personal pronoun is a dative or accusative
case, both the conjunctive and the absolute form of
the same pronoun should be used, as:
He will give it me (to myself).
Me lo dará á mí mismo.
Note the expressions:
Hoy mismo, this very day.
Mañana mismo, on the (very) morrow itself.
Propio, propia (self, same, own) may be used
as an adjective and as a pronoun:
Al propio tiempo, at the same time.
A las 9 de la mañana del propio dia.
At 9 o'clock in the morning of the same day.
N.B, — Identity, equality, are the striking features of
mismo; possession, suitability, those oí propio. Compare:
Ya no soy el mism^ (not el propio).
I am not the same man.
Tiene coche propio (not mismo).
He has a private carriage (of his own).
Esto es lo fnism4> qtie eso.
This and that are the same.
Eso es lo propio del caso.
That is the proper thing under the circumstances.
Thus, though mismo and propio may join nouns,
and pronouns, only mismo, on account of its signi-
fication, may join adverbs of time and place :
To propio (yo m^ismo) lo oi, I saw it myself.
Él propio (él mism,o) Juan lo asegura.
John himself affirms it.
Ayer m^ismo (not propio), indeed yesterday.
Aquí nUsm^o (not propio), in this very place.
7. Demás (from de — más), "pther," is invariable
and used both adjectively and substantively, as:
Las demias hermanas, the other sisters.
Los demás no han hablado.
The others did not speak (have not spoken).
Dígale V. eso, y yo le diré lo demús.
Tell him that, I will tell him the rest.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Indefinite Numerals. 249.
A derivative of demás is demasiado, ''too much,"
whicli (like the Italian troppo) is used both adjectively
and substantively, as:
Demasiada gente, too many people.
Bebió demasiado vino, be drank too much wine.
Somewhat stronger than demasiado is sobrado, as:
Ha dado á su hijo sobrado dinero.
He gave his son too much money.
^.jB.— From sobrado is formed the adverb sobradamente,
8. Bastante and harto (enough) are used both
adjectively and substantively, and sometimes even ad-
verbially, as:
Tengo bastante dinero, I have money enough.
Me ha dicho bastante (harto), he has told me enough.
Harto se ¡o he dicho, I have told him many a time.
9. Otd*o, -a (other, another) is both an adjective
and a pronoun. As already stated (p. 69, 7), it never
takes the indefinite article. Coupled with uno, as: uno
con otro or uno y otro, pi. unos y otros, it corresponds
to the English both; uno á otro with one another, each
other, as:
Eso es otra cosa, that is a different thing.
Déme F. otro, give another.
Salieron uno con otro, they both went out.
Miráronse unos á otros, they looked at each other.
Followed by tanto, it means just as much or quite
as much (as many), as:
Yo tengo dos varas, y V, tiene otra>s tantas*.
I have two ells, and you have just (quite) as much.
KB.-
otro libro, el otro libro, another book, the other book.
otro dia, el otro dia, another day, the other day.
otras casas, las otras casas, other houses, the other
houses.
10. Tal (such, such a thing) is both a substantive
and an adjective. It also means the aforesaid, the
same, etc., as:
M tal Diego, the aforesaid D.
* In this case otro tanto should agree in gender and num-
ber with the word to which it refers.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
250 Lesson 6.
Joined to uno, it means a certain, etc., as:
Un tal López lo ha dichOy a Mr. Lopez said so.
Habla de una tal Elvira^ he speaks of a certain E.
-^0 haré yo tal, I will not do such a thing.
Preceded by cual it means as — so; thus:
Cual es el padre, tal es el hijo.
As the father, so is the son.
In proverbial expressions tal is often used instead
of cual, as:
Tal amo, tal criado, like master, like man*.
Idioms with tal are:
Por tal razón, therefore.
Si tal; no tal, yes, indeed; no, indeed.
Ese es un tal, he is a rogue.
No hay tal, no such thing!
Con tal que, on condition that ....
¿ Qué tal? — Tal cual, Well, how are you? — Middling.
Tal vez, perhaps.
11. Fulano or fulano de tal (Mr. So-and-So):
Fulano no quiere pagar, So-and-So won't pay.
Tiene en su casa á fulano y á zutano.
He has Mr. So-and-So and Mr. So-and-So at his house.
Traducción. 7.
1. Sometimes one (m.) does not know what to do. One
(f.) does not know what to say. Somebody (m.) has been.
Some (m.) came, but did not leave their naiaaes. Oae-of
the two (say of the two, the one) was a foreigner. Both
my sisters are now in Paris. Here is ice and lemonade;
you may have both if you like. The ship will arrive
here in the last days of June. We left the town in
the first days of January. Will you write a letter, or give
me your orders by word of mouth? I prefer (see p. 244, § 4)
keeping my old servant to (tr, than) taking (Inf.) another
(one). The gentlemen entered last and the ladies went out
first. Have you found any (see page 245, 1) book that you
could recommend me? In no town of this country are there
so many foreigners as in the capital. These jewels are of no
value. None of your friends (has) said that you had not done
your duty. He arrived in this town without having (Inf)
any acquaintances here. Is there anything more precious than
the friendship of a virtuous man?
* In French: Tel maitre, tel valet
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Indefinite Numerals. 251
2. I go now and then to that house, and I sing now
and again; I meet very few people there. You know me
better than anybody else; how can you say that I have
cheated my friends on (en) any occasion? Whatever ex-
cuse he may proffer, I shall not pardon him. The whole
town speaks of this accident. All over Earope one finds
Englishmen travelling. I have listened to him with the
greatest (toda) attention. Everybody that (has) seen it will
say that I am right. All he said was the purest truth.
Every sensible man will be of my opinion. Here you have
your poems; I (have) read them all, but none has pleased
me. You speak of everything, you judge of everything,
and yet you know nothing. That is all (which) I have heard.
The child screamed with all its might, and nevertheless the
nurse did not awake. She has lost all she had, and yet even
in her poverty she is a perfect lady,
3. She is not the same woman she was (que era) since
(desde que) she has a private carriage. This (neuter) and that
(n.) are not the same. I heard it myself, indeed, to-day, in
this very place. The eount (has) told me so himself. Has the
footman given it to you (thee) himself? No, he has not given it
to me himself, the (maid-) servant gave it to me. Give me
another book, the other book. Where are the other books?
Have you not (got) them all? Yes, you (thou) have given
them to me yourself. The coachman got five dollars, and the
cook (f,) as much; the others got nothing. No, (indeed) you
want (pide) too much, my friend. That is too much money
for so little work. He has shown (to) his children too much
tenderness. Have you wine enough? Thank you, sir, I have
enough. Yesterday he lost ten dollars, and I gained (gané)
just as much. Yesterday they spoke (with) me of a certain
count Fabian; is he still here? The proverb says: Like
mistress, like maid; like master, like man. Shall you come
with me? Yes, (but) on condition that we return soon.
Reading Exercise.
De algunas costumbres de los Incas.
Tuvieron los indios por costumbre traer las orejas hora-
dadas, y el primero que lo usó fue Mango Capa, Inca, de
donde todos proceden. Y visto después como este traía esta
señal, y que habia sido valiente, usaron después los sucesores
de ella, y otros muchos, asimismo, á quienes ellos daban li-
cencia, por ser criados, ó allegados, ó parientes, como se dirá.
Y tuvieron por grande blasón y nobleza esto, y asi lo tienen
el día de hoy. La solemnidad y costumbre que entre ellos
habia cuando se horadaban las orejas, y se hacían Incas (que
Digitized by VaOOQlC
252 Lesson 7.
es como cuando arma el Bey á uno caballero), es ésta. To-
dos los que se habían de horadar las orejas venían donde
estaba el señor, y todos allí juntos ayunaban treinta días
(que era no comer sal ni ají, que son dos cosas que ellos más
usaban en sus comidas, y usan el día de hoy). Vestíanse
todos unas camisetas casi blancas, que tenían por delante una
señal como cruz: y estas no las vestían en otro tiempo, sino
para este efecto. Y á los quince días juntábanse todos, y
subían á un cerro, el más alto que hubiese, ó iban corriendo,
y los que más presto subían estos eran tenidos en más, y por
más valientes y señalados.
[Diego Fernandez, Historia del Perú.]
Conversación.
¿Qué tenían por costumbre los indios?
¿ Por qué la usaron después los sucesores de Mango Capa?
¿Por qué lo tenían?
¿Qué cosa era hacerse Inca?
¿ Qué hacían todo? los que se habían de horadar las
orejas ?
¿En qué consistía su ayuno?
¿ Qué se vestían ?
¿Se vestían esas camisas en otro tiempo?
¿Qué hacían á los quince días, y quiénes eran tenidos
en más, y por más valientes?
Seventh Lesson.
Pronouns.
(See Lesson 24, Part I.)
Personal Pronouns.
§ 1. From numerous examples the learner will have
observed that the personal pronoun in the nominative
case is usually omitted before the verb, provided no
stress be laid upon it, or that no misconception can
possibly arise by this omission. Thus we should say:
Yo trabajo más que tú, I work more than you (thou), be-
cause here the comparison requires the personal pronoun.
§ 2. The form of address usted (V.) or its plural
ustedes (VV., Yds,), is only omitted if it has been
employed immediately before, so as to avoid every
chance of a misconception, as:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Pronouns. 253
Y, ha venido y me ha hablado mucho,
Yott have come and (you) have spoken much with me.
§ 3. Concerning the position of the dative and
accusative case of the conjunctive personal pronouns
the general rules have been given, page 100, 2(b).
Further particulars are here added.
(a) Contrary to the general rules, the conjunctive
pronouns are affixed to the verb if the latter begins the
sentence, also in poetry and in literary prose, as:
Alegróme f I rejoice.
Porque alii llego sediento,
Pido vino de lo nuevo;
MidenlOy dánmelo, béíolo,
Pagólo, y voyme contento:
Parecióle ser ya tiempo oportuno.
It seemed to him üi^t it was the right time (to be the r. t.).
(b) These pronouns are rarely applied to the first
and second persons plural. If the accent is on the ante-
penultimate of the verb, they can never be affixed. Thus :
ló8 mandaríamos, we should send them, but never
**mandaríamoslo¿**
• (c) In the case of auxiliary verbs used in a wider
sense, the pronoun can either be put before these or be
attached to the following gerund or infinitive— e.gf.;
Iba buscándolo or Lo iba buscando. •
He sought it (cf. Lesson 23, The Gerund).
No me lo quiere decir, or:
No quiere decírmelo, he won't tell me.
Se estaba levantando, or:
Estábase levantando, or:
Estaba levantándose, he was rising.
No he de decirlo, or:
No lo he de decir, I shall not tell.'
N.B. — In literary style, this practice is also admissible
in the tenses compounded with haber, as:
Habíanlo hallado, they had found it,
but in conversation the auxiliary is always preceded by the
. pronoun: .
: , Lo habían hallado.
(d) If an accessory sentence refers to a conjunctive
personal pronoun in the dative or accusative case, the
accessory sentence should be preceded by the absolute
form of the same pronoun, as:
Digitized by vaOOQlC
254 Lesson 7.
Declaróte por mi heredero á tí que has tenido ingenio
para entender el sentido de ¡a inscripción.
I declare thee for my beir that hadst sagacity enough
to understand the meaning of the inscription.
(e) Sometimes for the sake of greater emphasis, a
substantive in the dative or accusative, is placed before
the verb, contrary to the general arrangement of words.
In this case the corresponding personal pronoun should
be added, as:
Á mi padre no le conocí, as to my father, I did not
know him (instead of: I did not know my father).
Eso no lo sé, 1 do not know that (and not eso no se).
§ 4. Very frequently, even with good authors, the
accusative cases lo and le are used indiscriminately.
When speaking of things, we may, as we observed
page 99, 1, substitute lo for le; thus:
¿ Ha visto V, mi libro ? No lo (or le) he visto.
Have you seen my book? I have not seen it.
If, however, the preceding substantive denotes a
person^ le is decidedly preferable, as:
¿Quiere V. á su hermano? Si, le quiero mucho.
Do you love year brother? Yes, I love him much.
§ 5. Notice how such expressions as " Ye English,''
''We . . . both,'' are rendered in Spanish:
Mase. Vamos loa dos juntos, let us go both (together).
Fem. Vamos Ids dos juntas, » » » » » .
Lds midieres queréis hablar iodo el dia.
Ye women like to chatter all day long.
Vosotros los médicos, ¿ qué sabéis ?
You, doctors, what do you know?
The same, if a relative accessory sentence follows
a personal pronoun, as:
You that know nothing.
Los (fem. Itis) que no sabéis nada.
§ 6. Whenever in exclamations an adjective or an
interjection is joined to a personal pronoun, the pro-
noun should be preceded by de, as:
¡Desdichado de ml! Unhappy man that I am!
¡Desdichada de ti! Unhappy woman that you are!
¡Ay de mi! Woe to me!
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Pronouns. 255
Traducción. 8.
1. Have you studied the song which I brought (trcfje)
you yesterday ? Yes, it is very pretty ; I (have) sung it twice
this morning. You have written more than I, but I have
drawn more than you. You have asked me, and you have
got the answer (which) you desired; what more do you wish?
I am very glad to see you here. I told (fr. referir) him
[about] the accident, but he would not believe me. Let us go
(fr. irse)\ If we had already received the books, we should
have sent them to you. Have you found your hat ? No, I have
been looking (§ 3. c) for it in my room and in yours, but I
cannot find it. I went to see him at his house in order to
ask him if he could lend me a book. I wrote him three
times, but he would not answer me.
2. I appeal to you who have been my best friend. To
that famous Greek called Ulysses they gave the surname of
the Prudent. As for his brother, I never saw him. Have
you read this novel? No, I have not yet read it. Have you
(already) seen the author of the new play? I have not yet
seen him; but the play, — I have seen it. "We shall both
go to Paris," said the girls; "there we shall visit our uncle and
aunt." Ye men are often more loquacious than (the) women.
We who always work, we do not know weariness; but you,
who do nothing the whole day, you are always complaining
of weariness. Woe to you, reprobate (m,), if you dare to
enter this house! "Alas (¿r. Woe to me)!" cried the peasant,
"I have lost all my money!"
Reading Exercise.
Be algunas costumbres de los Incas. (Continuación.)
Todos los treinta días, desde el primero hasta el postrero,
se juntaban en la plaza del Cuzco, ó en las del pueblo donde
se hallaban aquel año. Y sentábanse por su orden, y hacían
sus calles, y venían allí sus parientes y hermanos y deudos,
y á las veces sus caciques. Y ponían á cada uno de los que se
habían dr.imcer Incas una lanza en las manos, las cuales
tenían juntas, como cuando un cristiano está rezando, y en
medio tomaban la lanza. Y luego decían á cada uno los
padres, y sus parientes y caciques: «Mira que de aquí en
adelante no seas vellaco; sirve y obedece bien á tus padres,
y trabaja y no seas perezoso ; corre mucho y haz todo lo que
te mandaren, con mucha diligencia, porque cuando te llamare
el Inca para la guerra, ó para cualquier otra cosa, le sepa»
servir». Ellos decían en respuesta que así lo prometían hacer,
y acabadas de decir estas palabras dábanle cuatro azotes, en
cada brazo uno, y en cada pierna otro, y él habíase de estar
quedo, y no se había de menear, ni hacer muestra de senti-
Digitized
by Google
256 Lesson 8.
miento, porque si se meneaba ó hacia muestra de dolerse,
teníanle en poco. Llegado el postrer dia, sentábase el Inca
en medio de toda la gente, y venían indios viejos, y maestros
de horadar las orejas con sus herramientas, que para ello te-
nían. Algunos de estos maestros lo hacían mejor, y eran
más diestros, y no lastimaban tanto y dejaban los agujeros
mayores. Luego les metían los anillos, y á los que eran hijos
de caciques y señores poníanselos de oro, y de plata, y á los
demás de madera ó de metal. Acabado esto, ofrecían sus
padres ó parientes un carnero ú oveja, y matábanlo y sacábanle
el corazón, y tomábale un hechicero y mirábale, y soplábale ; y
6Í el corazón estaba tieso, decía que aquel tal había de ser para
muchOj y valiente, y que era buena señal ; empero, si el cora-
zón estaba flojo, decía que viviría poco, y que aquel tal no
había de ser valiente, ni para nada. El carnero que se ofre-
cía partíase entre los padres y parientes de cada uno, y luego
bebían y hacían sus borracheras.
[Diego Fernandez, Historia del Perú.]
ConversacióD.
¿Qué hacían cada treinta años?
¿Cómo se sentaban y que hacían?
¿Qué les ponían á los que se habían de hacer Incas?
¿Y qué les decían?
¿Y ellos qué respondían?
¿Qué les hacían entonces?
¿Cómo se habían de estar?
¿Qué hacían el postrer día?
¿ Cómo les horadaban las orejas?
¿Y qué les níetían en ellas?
¿Cuántas clases de anillos había?
¿Qué hacían después?
¿Qué decían los hechiceros?
¿Qué hacían por fin?
Eighth Lesson.
Demonstratires. — Interrogative Pronouns.
(See Lesson 25, P. I.)
Demonstratives.
§ 1. The principal difference between este and ese
is that este generally refers only to the speaker or
anything near him, whereas ese refers not only to the
Digitized
by Google
Demonstratives. 257
person addressed* or things near by, but also to the sub-
jects of conversation. The opposite of both is aqtid.
From this difference it results that este should always
be rendered by *'this/' and that esc frequently corre-
sponds to the English "this . . . here/' whereas aquél is
"that." Examples:
Esta casa es más alta que aquella.
This house is higher than that (house).
JDéme Y, ese libro, give me that book near you, or:
which you have in your hand.
Esas palabras no las dije yo, I never said those words.
La cuestión no es esa, that is not the case.
Eso no es verdad, that is not true.
N.JB.—Este and ese can never be used as contrast in
translating the English the former, . . . the latter . . . ; which
must be rendered by aquél . . ., éste . . . ; or more generally,
éste . . ., aquél . . ., agreeing in gender and number with
the words to which they refer. Compare:
Los niños y las mujeres tienen derecho á la protección
de los hombres, éstas por su debilidad, aquellos por
su inocencia.
Children and women have a right to be protected by
men, the former on account of their innocence, the
latter on account of their weakness.
§ 2. In English, it (or that) is very often used ab-
solutdy—i.e., as the seeming subject of a sentence, whilst
the real subject follows, as: It is my sister. In Spanish,
the neuter form may only be used, if "that" refers to
a whole sentence preceding, as:
Eso es increíble, it (that) is incredible {viz,: what I
heard or\ what I have been told, etc.).
But, as in English:
Esta es mi hermana, this (that) is my sister.
Estas son mis esperanzas, these are my hopes.
Esta es la Señora de A. y aquella es la Señora de N,
This is Mrs. A. and that is Mrs. N.
N,jB,— Position of the demonstrative. Though demon-
strative adjectives precede the noun, they must follow it when,
— for the sake of emphasis — this is affected by the definite
article, also in exclamations with qué . ./
* The Italian cotesto.
Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 17
Digitized by VjOOQIC
258 Lesson 8.
Este libro . . . ., 6Í libro este^ this book.
Esa casa la casa esa . . ., that house.
Aquél amigo . ., el amigo aquel, that friend.
¡Qué hombre ese! what a man!
¡Qué muyer aquella! what a woman!
§ 3. We noticed (page 105) that the Spanish lan-
guage often replaces the article by the demonstrative
pronoun. This is the case when the demonstrative
pronoun refers to a preceding substantive, as:
My house and that of my neighbour.
Mi casa y la de mi vecino.
§ 4. If the real subject of the sentence is not a
single word, but an infinitive with its object, as: To see
you happy is my greatest happiness, this infinitive in
Spanish commonly follows and, if so, should be intro-
duced by the article^ and de; the article, of course,
agreeing with the preceding predicate. Thus:
Mi única felicidad es la de ver á V, dichoso.
My only happiness is to see you happy.
§ 5. The article used in lieu of the relative pronoun
may also appear as a genitive or dative case, as:
Prefiero este libro al que V, leyó ayer,
I prefer this book to that which you read yesterday.
^.J5.— Formerly the preposition de was often contracted
with este and ese into one word, as: deste = de este; destos
= de estos; desa = de esa. These contractions are now
obsolete.
§ 6. In English the reference to a foregoing sub-
stantive or adjective is often not expressed. In Spanish
the neuter article to is used:
¿Es V. la hermana de este señor?
Are you the sister of this gentleman?
Si, lo soy, yes, I am {i.e., the sister).
¿Sois los criados del conde?
Are you the servants of the count?
Si, lo somos, yes, we are (i.e., the sei-vants).
Todos se precian de patriotas; y sin embargo de que
muchos lo parecen, ¡ cuan pocos lo son !
All boast of being patriots, and though many seem to
be such, how few are so!
Hermoso fué aquel dia, y no lo fué menos la noche.
Beautiful was the day, and no less {i.e., beautiful) was
the night.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Interrogative Pronouns. 259
Likewise, the reference to a preceding adverb is
expressed by lo, as:
Amadis fué él sol de los valientes. Siendo pues esto
asíj como lo es, etc.
Amadis was the star of the gallant (knights). This
being as it is, etc.
§ 7. Note the following peeuliarities of the
Spanish demonstratives:
¿(iué hay de nuevo en ésa?
What is going on at your placed
En ésta no ocurre nada.
Nothing new is going on here.
Los niños de estos días, children nowadays.
Idioms :
JEsta noche, to-night.
Ése lo sabe, he knows it.
Ni por esas, not even so.
Ésta (or ésa) no se la perdono.
I shall not pardon him for this.
¡A ése, á ése! stop thief [murderer]!
No me ha dado ni esto.
He has not given me even the smallest thing.
JEn esto, at this time.
¿Hemos reñido ? — ¿Y eso ?
We have quarrelled — Why?
Me fui á eso de las cinco, I left about 5 o'clock.
Interrogative Pronouns.
§ 1. Like que in French, the interrogative qué?, what?
is often accompanied by de, if the following adjective
is used substantively, as:
¿Qm hay de nuevo? What is the news? (Qu'y a-t-il
de nouveau?)
§ 2. If in an exclamation qué precedes a substan-
tive, it should likewise be followed by de, if more em-
phasis is required, as:
¡Qué de envidia! What envy!
¡Qué de locuras! What follies!
§ 3. If qué precedes a substantive qualified by an
adjective, tan is often inserted for the sake of emphasis, as:
17*
Digitized by vaOOQlC
260 Lesson 8.
¡Oh, qué carga tan pesada! Oh, what a heavy burden !
/ Qtfé mucha>cha tan hermosa es esta !
How beautiful this girl is!
N,B,—Yqí tan may be omitted: ¡Qué hermosa muchacha
es esta!
§ 4. As mentioned on page 106, cúyo"^ occurs as an
interrogative pronoun (whose?); but the proper inter-
rogative pronoun is preferable. Thus:
Whose books are these?
¿Cuyos libros son estos? Or rather:
¿Be quién son estos libros?
§ 5. ¿Cuál? implies distinction between two or
more persons or things; it always carries the written
accent; as:
Estoy leyendo una novela, — ¿Cuál?
I am reading a novel. — Which one?
¿ Cuál es su sombrero de F., éste ó aquél ?
Which is your hat, this one or that one?
¿ Cuál de los dos le gusta á F. mus ?
Which of the two do you like best?
Traducción. 9.
1. These flowers and yours (see § 3) are finer than
those. Which hat do you want, this or that ? Give me that
which you have in your hand. I have seen this picture and
that; that pleases (fr. gustar) me better (más) than this.
Father and son parted, the former to return to his lonely house,
the latter to join his friends. This wine is bad ; this bread is
good ; what bad wine ! what good bread (see p. 259, § 3., N.B.).
— I never said those words, that is not true. These gentlemen
and those have not been present at the ceremony. Is this your
sister or your cousin? Neither one nor the other; she is
my aunt. If these are all your wishes, they are very easily
fulfilled {tr, to fulf.). Those are remarks which are not be-
coming to a young man. He said he would not give the
workman his wages; that is abominable. My cloak and that
of my cousin Paul are made in the latest fashion. You say
that he has told you (that) he came at 3 o'clock, but that
* The relative cuyo is sometimes separated from its sub-
stantive by the verb, as:
El caballero, cuya era la espada.
The knight to whom the sword belonged.
Yet de quien is much to be preferred in such a case.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Interrogative Pronouns. 261
is impossible. Who is that lady ? She is Miss Vallarino, and
her companion is my sister's governess.
2. He has lost his fortune and that of his uncle. She
has invested your money and that of her sister. My most
ardent wish was always to see you friends. Do you speak
of Mr. Estrada? I do not speak of (the) Mr. Estrada who
lives here, but of him (tr, that) who is in Mexico. I prefer
this wine to that which we had (tr, drunk) yesterday. What
news have you heard ? Nothing of importance. What non-
sense I How can anybody believe such a thing as that ? Oh,
what a horrible crime! What meanness to do such a deed!
How charming are the banks of the river! How majestic
are the summits of these mountains! Whose gloves are these?
They are those of the young officer who arrived with me
yesterday. Are you the daughter of my old friend Sagasta?
Yes, sir, I am. Were you satisfied (plur, f,) with your
new dresses? Yes, Mrs. B., we were. Is this man really
happy? To be sure he is. My dear mother, nothing new
is going on liere ; Charles left and must be now at your place
(see p. 259, § 7). I will write more to-night. They have
quarrelled. Why? She begged and cried, but not even so.
She will not pardon him for that. I left their house about 11.
Which of the two do you think is right ? Which do you
like best?
Reading Exercise.
Grandeiza y decadencia de España,
España es país para todo, y también los españoles. Es-
paña produce todas las materias necesarias para la vida, no
sólo las de primera necesidad, sino aún las útiles y de deli-
cia. España es, entre los descubiertos, el único reino que
pudiera vivir con solos sus frutos, sin mendigar género alguno
extranjero : pan, vino, legumbres, aceites, agrios, frutas, miel,
cera, pescados, carnes, aves, caza, lana, seda, linos, cáñamos
y minerales de todas especies. Estas son sus más abundantes
producciones; y se hallan debajo de un clima sano, delicioso,
de aguas muy saludables, y de ríos en gran número, y rodea-
dos de dos mares. España tiene en sus dominios todas las
materias simples que necesitan sacar de nosotros las fábricas
extranjeras; á ninguna nación le sucede otro tanto. Y á Es-
paña DO le falta, en fin, ni le ha faltado nunca, más que ser
conocida. El cielo hizo mucho por ella; nosotros lo deshace-
mos; á Dios le debe infinito; á nosotros muy poco.
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara. — ^^ Apuntes sobre el bien y él mal de España,'']
Digitized by vaOOQlC
262 Lesson 9.
Coiirersación*
¿Qué clase de pais es Espafia?
¿Qué clase de gente son los españoles?
¿Qué produce Espafia?
¿Puede algún pais vivir con solos sus frutos?
Pruébese con la descripción de las producciones y clima
de Espafia.
¿Qué materias simples tiene Espafia?
¿Qué le falta á Espafia?
Ninth Lesson.
Possesstye and Relative Pronouns.
(See Lessons 15 and 26, Part I.)
Possessive Pronouns.
Concerning the possessive pronouns we need add
but one observation to what we stated in the first part
of the Grammar — t;e>.;
As the possessive pronoun of the third person sin-
gular is alike in the masculine and feminine, a mis-
conception might often arise, as in the sentence:
This is his book and that is hers, or yours,
Este es su libro y aquel es el suyo,
where it seems doubtful whether "el suyo" means Ms,
hers or yours. Hence the above sentence should be accor-
dingly translated:
Éste es su libro y aquel es el de ella.
This is his book, and that is hers.
Éste es su libro y aquel es el de usted.
This is his book, and that is yours.
N.B. — Idioms:
lios míos, my people (family, friends, partisans).
Le han pasado de las suyas, he has had many troubles.
He de hacer la mía, I shall have my own way.
Relative Pronouns.
1. The rel^-tive pronoun que is used for all cases
if referring to things; with reference to persons, however,
it may only be employed in the nominative and accusa-
tive case. Que also does not take á if it is an accusative
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 268
and refers to persons. Besides de and á, other prepo-
sitions may likewise be coupled with que, provided they
are monosyllables. The preposition por, however, cannot
be used before que*. Examples:
Nam, La señora que mene, the lady who comes.
Las señoras que vienen, the ladies who come.
Ace. La carta \ .-., the letter \ ^hjch T received
Las cartas] ^^^ ^^^^^^' the letters P^^^*^^^® ^®^^^^-
Las señoras que he visto, the ladies whom I have seen.
With prepositions : La casa de que le hallé á F.
The house of which I spoke to you.
El jardín en que he visto á V,
The garden where (in which) I saw you.
N.B, — The direct object que is never suppressed in
Spanish; compare:
I have read the book that yon |
lent me, [ He lei do el libro que
I have read the book you lent [ 7. me prestó,
me, I
2. Que also occurs with the article, especially if
preceded by two substantives, in which case it is used
instead of el (la) cual, as:
La señora me envió á un colegio de Cartagena, del que
era directora una parienta suya,
The lady sent me to a school in Cartagena, the head-
mistress of which was a relation of hers.
Note, — usually no comma is put before the relative
pronoun. If it is, the meaning of the accessory sentence
undergoes a slight variation. [A similar rule obtains in
French.] The pupil is requested to compare the following
sentences :
Las señoras, que deseaban descansar, se retiraron.
The ladies, who wished to repose, withdrew (here all
the ladies wished to repose).
Whereas :
Las señoras que deseaban descansar, se retiraron, means:
(Only) those ladies who wished, etc., withdrew.
It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language that if que
refers at once to two foregoing nouns of different gender,
* Que corresponds to the French que and the Italian che,
with the sole exception that these relative pronouns only refer
to the nominative and accusative, whilst the Spanish que admits
of other prepositions. Por is avoided before que, because por que
(=z porque) means "because" and por qué, why?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
264 Leeson 9.
demonstrative pronouns should be added in order to distinguish
these words, as:
Adornaron la nave con flámulas y gallardetes que, éUos
a/sotando el aire y eUas bescmdo las aguas, vistosí-
sima vista hacían. (Cervantes.)
They adorned the ship with pennons and flags which,
the latter beating the air and the former kissing
the waves, offered a splendid sight.
Note,— Que if coupled with ser emphasizes the foUowing
verb:
¡Es que no quiero! But I won't! (French: Cest que je
ne veux pas!)
¡Es que no se trata de eso!
We are not speaking of such a thing!
¡ 8i no fuera que teme ser descubierto!
If it were not for his being afraid of discovery!
N,B, — Que is very often met with in phrases such as:
JBI que lo sepa que lo diga, let he who knows tell.
JLa que lo sabe lo calla, she who knows it does not tell.
Sea el que sea (or la que sea), whoever it may be.
Sea el caballero (or la señora) que sea.
Whatever gentleman (or lady) it may be.
Suceda lo que suceda, whatever may happen.
To soy el que lo dice. It is I who say it.
JElla es la que lo sabe, it is she who knows it.
La casa es la que arde, it is the house that is on fire.
JRemarA;.— Finally, que being a weaker relative is used
after quienquiera, cualquiera (compounds of quien and
cual), which quien and cual cannot.
Quienquiera (or cualquiera) que lo diga se equivoca.
Whoever says it makes a mistake.
3. Quien (like the Italian chi) often corresponds
to the English he who, people who, as:
Hay quien* dice, there are people who say.
Á quien está contento nada le falta.
To him who is satisfied nothing is wanting.
Quien — quien is an equivalent for the English
some — , some — , or the one — the other, as:
Quien lee, quien escribe; some read, some write.
(Cual — cual is likewise used in this sense.)
* Also in the plural, as: Hay quienes no tienen vergüenza,
there art? people who are shameless.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 265
N.B. — Quien is also found in phrases referring to per-
sons, and similar to those above (see page 263, N.B.), though
withont the article, as quien already means el que:
quien lo sepa que lo diga,
sea quien sea,
yo soy quien lo dice.
4. Cual (without the article) expresses a comparison
(see Lesson 26, Part I., page 110, § 4), whilst el (la) cual
develops the meaning of the preceding sentence. In
the former signification, it supposes a preceding tal,
which, however, may be omitted, as:
Esos hombres no son (tales) cuales se muestran.
These people are not (such) as they show themselves.
5. Cuyo, -a, pi. -os, -as, as a relative pronoun,
renders the Enghsh whose, and, like this, requires a
substantive following, with which it agrees in gender
and number, as:
La madre cuya hija es tan laboriosa.
The mother whose daughter is so diligent.
El caballero cuyos amigos han llegado.
The gentleman whose friends have arrived.
Note. —Sometimes cuyo is also separated by the verb from
the substantive to which it belongs, as:
El caballero cuya era la espada.
The knight whose sword this was {i.e., to whom this
sword belonged).
Bufc, at any rate, it is better, in sueh a ease {i.e., when
speaking of persons or personified beings), to use de quien
instead of cuyo.
But if the substantive after the relative whose is
the predicate of the accessory sentence, cuyo must be
replaced by another relative pronoun. Thus we cannot
say:
El niño cuyo tutor él es, the child whose guardian he
is, but only: El niño de quien or del cual es tutor.
Observations.
1. If the relative pronoun is followed by a numeral
referring to a preceding substantive, as in the sentence:
The child looked at its apples, which were seven (i.e.,
apples), que is coupled with the corresponding article in
the nominative case, as:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
266 Lesson 9.
He conn ted the dollars in his parse, which were eight.
Contó los duros de su bolsillo, los que eran ocho.
2. Quien (see p. 264, n? 3) referring to things, though
met with in ancient writers, is now quite obsolete and
must not be imitated.
Es un bálsamo de quien tengo la receta en la memoria.
(Cervantes.)
It is an ointment who?e receipt I have in my memorj.
Es un bálsamo cuya receta tengo . . (or del cual tengo
la receta . .).
3. Donde is used instead of a relative pronoun,
provided it denotes a local circumstance, as:
La ciudad donde or en donde vivo.
The town where (or in which) I live.
4. Cuyo connects more closely an apposition with
the word to which it refers, as:
Tin porquero tocó un cuerno, á cuya señal se recogen
los puercos, (Cerv.)
A swine-herd blew a horn, at which signal the pigs go
home.
Vinieron algtmas embajadas, por cuyo motivo se detuvo.
There came several embassies, for which reason he re-
mained longer.
5. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language to
employ relative sentences, where the English use indirect
questions or exclamations, as:
No puede V, figurarse el dolor con que recibí esta
noticia.
You cannot imagine how much grieved I was to learn
this news.
Sé lo Men* que me quiere,
I know how much he loves me.
6. The English in that ... to introduce an ex-
planatory sentence, is rendered by its Spanish equi-
valent en qiie; but in referring to a previous sentence,
by en lo que, en Jo cnal. Compare:
Animals differ from () plants in that they feel and
move, or: by their being capable of feeling and
* Querer bien, to love, lit. to wish the good of somebody.
French: Le bien qu^il me veut. Ital. II bene che mi vuole.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 267
moving, or: by sensation and motion, (French: en
ce quHls sentent et se meuoent.)
Los animales se diferencian de las plantas en que
sienten y se mueven.
Pueden los relativos no sólo reproducir un concepto pre-
cedente sino anunciar un concepto subsiguiente; en
lo que no se diferencian de los otros demostrativos.
The relative pronouns are not only capable of reproduc-
ing a preceding idea, but they can also indicate a
following notion, wherein they do not differ from
the demonstrative pronouns.
7. If the relative sentence is but a periphrase of a
substantive in the nominative case, the definite article
€Í ^should precede que, as:
Parecieron estas condiciones duras ; ni valió, para hacer-
las aceptar, el que Colon propusiese contribuir con
la octava parte.
These conditions seemed bard, and it was of no avail
Colnmbus proposing (= Columbus' proposal was of
no avail) in order to have them accepted, to contri-
bute with the eighth part.
Again, relative sentences which imply an accusative
case are introduced in this way, as:
No podia yo mirar con indiferencia el que se infamase
mi doctrina.
I could not see with indifference how they calumniated
my doctrine (= the calumniation, detraction, etc., of
my doctrine).
8. If which refers to a whole foregoing sentence, it
is rendered by lo que (French : ce qui; It. il or lo che),
as:
Los reos fueron condenados al último suplicio, lo que
causó un sentimiento general.
The culprits were condemned to death, which caused a
general sensation.
9. The exclamative *'how" or "how much" is very
often lo . . . . que, and then the adjective takes its place
between lo and que. Now it may occur that the adjective
is feminine, when the pupil might easily be misled to
consider the somewhat strange form (lo . . a) incorrect,
which is by no means the case. Example:
Asi se ve lo generosa que eres.
Thus one sees how generous (fern.) you are.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
268 Lesson 9.
This must be understood thus:
Asi se ve lo que (how much) tú eres generosa.
Traducción. 10.
1. Yesterday I saw your friends and mine. I cannot
at once comply with his wishes and with hers. He wrote a
long letter to his relations and to hers. These are his flowers
and those are hers. He has had many troubles, because he
always had his own way. (See page 262, N.B.) Who are
the gentlemen that come there ? They are the two merchants
of whom I spoke to you. I thank you for the kindness with
which you have always treated me. Have you read that
book I lent you ? Yes ; the friend you know wants to read it.
(See page 263, N.B.) To him who is hungry, any meal
pleases (le gusta). Have you thought of (en) what you have
promised me ? Mr. Silvela lives at the beginning of the street
in which the house of (the) General Moya is situated (fr.
hallarse). You behave like a man (pronoun) who knows no-
thing. He who flatters you, wants (fr. querer) to cheat you.
(The) one prefers (the) work, the other (the) idleness. (The)
one pretends this, the other something else. These people are
as you have depicted them to me. The workman whose child
is 80 ill, is (tr. finds himselQ in the greatest distress. Let him
who knows how to do a thing do it, whoever it may be. Who-
ever may come, tell them that I am not at home. And if
it should be that lady? Whatever lady it may be. It is I
who say it. Do your duty, whatever may happen.
2. The tulips whose colours are so brilliant, have no
smell. The girl whose aunt you saw here yesterday will
now live in our house. The boy whose godfather he is, gives
him much trouble (dar disgustos). He attentively observed
the members of the family, who were seven. The little girl
joyfully counted her dolls, of which she had received four.
The house where we live stands in the middle of a beautiful
garden. He had to pay seven hundred dollars, which sum
he could not raise for the moment. She asked her money
from him, for which reason he resolved to (á) sell his house.
You cannot imagine with what great joy I accepted this
proposition. If you knew how much (lo bien que) she loves
him, you would not doubt (of) her sincerity. Now, one could
see how malicious the servant (f,) had been. I cannot de-
scribe to you how afflicted my mother was at this news.
Beading Exercise*
(jhrandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
Doscientos afios hace que comenzaron flamencos, ingleses
y franceses á aprender de nosotros el arte de las fábricas, á
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Adverbs. 269
sacarlas, tomarlas y llevarlas de España á sus países; y ésta
fué la época en que dio principio nuestra decadencia. En el
siglo diez y seis daban nuestras fábricas la ley en tres cuar-
tas partes del mundo. En todas ellas tenían factorías nues-
tros comerciantes españoles. El increíble número de telares
que contaba España, es cosa repetida en muchos escritos an-
tiguos y modernos. Pero lo más notable es que con todo el
esmero de su esquisita aplicación, aún no han llegado todavía
estas industriosas naciones á dar á los bordados, telas de seda,
tisúes, y tejidos de oro y plata, aquella perfección, permanen-
cia, solidez y hermosura que, después de doscientos años, to-
davía se admiran hoy en los nuestros. Los ornamentos de
altar que Felipe II donó á la sacristía del Escorial, fabricados
en Sevilla, etc., y que se conservan en ella, expuestos á la
disposición de quien quiera verlos, responden de esta verdad.
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara. — '* Apuntes sobre el bien y el mal de España,'*]
Conversación.
¿Cuándo principió nuestra decadencia?
¿Cuál era el estado de las fábricas españolas en el
siglo dieciseis?
¿Han llegado Flandes, Inglaterra y Francia á igualar
nuestros bordados, etc., de entonces?
¿Qué era lo distintivo de aquellos bordados, etc.?
¿ Dónde pueden probarse esas verdades ?
Tenth Lesson.
Adrerbs. — Their position. — Affirmations and
Negations.
In addition to the treatment of this Subject in Part I.
(Lessons 30th, 31st) we further add:
1. Peculiarities of certain Adverbs.
Adverbs of Place.
(a) Adonde instead of donde, where? is now obso-
lete. In modern speech it means only where-to, as:
El lugar adonde nos encaminamos.
The place where we go to;
whereas:
El liigar donde residimos, the place where we live.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
270 Lesson 10.
(b) Donde may be used as a relative or as a con-
junction in such sentences as:
La ciudad por donde transitábamos.
The town through which we passed.
Que to haga, donde no, que le castiguen.
Let him do it, otherwise, let him be punished.
Adverbs of Time.
(a) Cuando cannot be a relative, and must be re-
placed by en que to render wlien in sentences such as:
Hay dias en que todo sale mal.
There are days when everything goes wrong.
N.B. — However, in referring to another adverb of time,
it renders the English relative that in such sentences as:
Ayer fué cuando la vi.
It was yesterday that I saw her.
Mntances fué cuando me lo dijo.
It was then that she told me.
(b) Cuando as a conjunction— i.e.:
¿Cómo se lo he de dar cuando no lo tengo?
How can I give it to him if I have not got it.
Adverbs of Manner.
Note the peculiar meaning of the following adverbs.
¿ Cómo no se lo dijo V. ?
Why did you not tell him?
Es cierto, como que lo vi yo, it is true, for I saw it.
Como soy Juan [in strong assertions].
As true as my name is John.
¿A cómo se venden? How much do you sell them at?
Eran cotno unos veinte.
There were about twenty of them.
Tráigame V. agua bien caliente.
Brint; me some water very hot.
Bien se lo decía yo á V., I told you so.
Ha^e V. mal en hacer eso.
You are wrong in doing that.
Mal podrá decirlo, si no lo sabe.
He cannot say it, since he does not know it.
MeQor que mejor, so much the better.
Peor que peor, so much the worse.
¡Así lo maten! I wished they would kill him I
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Affirmation and Negations. 271
AH lo tncUen no lo hará.
He will not do it, even if they kill him for it.
Asi como asi, anyhow.
2. Position of the Adverb.
Regarding the position of the adverb, we now add
the following rules:
(a) Proper adverbs are generally placed after the
verb and before the direct object — Le., the accusative
case (see Less. 15, Part II.: The Direct Object). Thus:
Mi amigo no ha llegado todavía.
My friend has not yet arrived.
Su amigo de V, ha ganado siempre mucho dinero.
Your friend has always gained a great deal of money.
Observation,— \t must be distinctly understood that if
the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb can never be
placed between the auxiliary and the past participle, bat
always follows the latter. A construction like: ha siempre
ganado, would therefore be erroneous.
(b) Adverbial locutions follow the direct object, as :
He Uido su carta de V, con mucfia €Uención,
I have read your letter with great attention.
The above observations are understood of the con-
struction when regular. As, however, the Spanish language
abounds in inversions — i.e,, deviations from the regular
construction — mauy exceptions are met with in the works
of Spanish authors; for emphasis, euphony, distinctness,
and elegance of speech often require another arrangement
of the words than that of the regular construction.
3. Affirmations and Negations.
The simplest affirmation is si, yes. Si and no are
seldom used alone, but generally accompanied by señor,
señora, señorita, hijo, hija, hombre, mujer, amigo, etc.,
according to the degree of respect or familiarity be-
tween the speaker and the person spoken to. Instead
of St, the word ya (already) is also used as an affirmation
(like giá in Italian) if the speaker supposes that the
meaning of his answer is already known to the person
addressed, as:
Yes, I recollect, ya me acuerdo.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
272 Lesson 10.
The simple affirmation or negation is made more
emphatic by the addition of que, as:
I say neither Yes nor No.
No digo ni que si ni que no.
Note,— The student will not forget that, as stated on
p. 136, the first negative particle ni may be omitted with
neither — nor, as:
No debe V, (ni) decirlo ni escribirlo.
You shall neither tell nor write it.
Observation,— The English student must bear in mind
that the English practice of answering simply with "Yes, I
do" or "No, I do not," etc., is by no means admissible in
Spanish. Here the answer is either simply SI, señor, or No,
señor, or a complete sentence added to the negative particle, as :
Did you see my brother to-day? Yes, I did.
No, I did not,
¿ Ha visto V, hoy á mi hermano ? Sí, señor, le he visto.
No, señor, no le he pisto.
Only the verbs ser, estar, and hacer sometimes show a
certain resemblance, though only a seeming one, with the
English construction. Examples:
Are you the mother of this child? Yes, I am.
¿Es V, la madre de este niño? Si, lo soy.
Are yon ready? Yes, I am.
¿ Está V, pronto ? Si, estoy pronto.
Did the shoemaker make my shoes? Yes, he did.
¿Hizo el zapatero mis zapatos? Si, los hizo.
It is easily understood that in Spanish these verbs are
not atixiliaries, as in English, but principal verbs, with pre-
dicates or objects of their own, which is not the case in Eng-
lish; and therefore the English and Spanish constructions are
totally different.
As already stated (Lesson 31, Part I), in Spanish
the negations never, nothing, none, nobody, etc., may be
used with the preceding particle no. But this is only
the case with the regular construction. As soon as the
negation itself begins the sentence (by inversion), no is
omitted as superfluous; thus:
No como jatnás en esta fonda, I never eat at this inn.
Ese vil perezoso no hace nada.
This vile idler does nothing at all.
No verá V, hoy á nadie.
You will not see anybody to-day.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Affirmations and Negations. 273
Whereas:
Jamás como en esta fonda.
A nadie le gusta recibir consejos.
Nobody likes to receive advice.
Nada me agrada^ nothing pleases me.
Note.—Ji the English no or not any is rendered by nin-
guno or (no) alguno, the position of these two words should
be carefully observed. Ninguno always precedes, algimo follows
the accusatvve to which it belongs. Thus:
No le confiaré á 7. ningún secreto, or:
» » » » » secreto alguno,
I shall not entrust you with any secret.
No more, if the verb has an accusative (direct ob-
ject), is y a no, as: Ya no tengo dinetH), I have no
more money. If, on the contrary, the verb governs no
accusative case, it is no — más, as: I shall lie (tell
a falsehood) no more, no mentiré más; or, rendered
more emphatic by the addition of nunca (never): ya no
mentiré nunca más.
If no more (or not . , , any more) means as much as
"wof again," it may be rendered by no with the cor-
responding tense of volver with á, as: I shall lie no
more, no volveré á mentir; do not come to my house
any more, no vuelvas á entrar en mi casa.
If only or but refers to a number, as : "I have only
six dollars," it is translated no — más que, as:
I have but (only) ten dollars.
No tengo más que dieis duros. (Je n'ai que . . ,)
In aU other cases but (or only) is no — sino, as:
I travel but rarely. No viajo sino rara vez,
N,B, — But and only are also rendered by solamente, sólOf
meramente, etc. In exclamations más que is also met with, as:
¡Más que nunca vuelva!
If he but never returned! (God forbid he should ever
return!)
Traducción. 11.
1. Where are you going? Tell me, otherwise I shall not
let you go. How can I tell you if I do not know it my-
self? There are occasions when one does not know what to
do. It is now that I do not understand you, as true as I am
here. So much the better. Are you here at last? Yes, I
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 18
Digitized by VaOOQlC
274 Lesson 10.
am ready. How do you think about {tr. what do you say of)
this demand? I say neither Yes nor No, for I do not know
whether Mr. Moreno is right or wrong. I never got a letter
from you, and I never (have) heard that you had written
to me. I never write in twilight, because I am afraid to
injure my eyes. Did you write to Mr. Marino? Yes, I did.
Shall you come this evening? Yes, I shall. Are you the
tutor of these young gentlemen? Yes, I am. Never, shall
Í forget what you have done for me! Why do these young
people not work? They have nothing to do, because you
have not given them anything to do. I saw nobody when
I entered the house.
2. Nobody has arrived by (en) (the) train. Tell nobody
that I have spoken with you. You are a queer fellow, my
dear friend; nothing pleases you, you do not feel sympathy
with anybody, you treat everyone unkindly, and yet you
want everyone to treat you (tr, that everyone treat [St^j.']
you) politely and affectionately. I always avoid intercourse
(el trato) with a man that has no friends. Have you some
wine left (tr. still some wine)? I have no more. You have
cheated me, therefore I shall not believe you any longer
(more). Pardon me, sir, I shall not do it again (tr. no more).
I had but two hundred dollars. I write only in the morning;
in the evening I have no time to write. Have you given
him only 12 pesetas? He has not asked for more; if he had
asked for more, I should have given him more.
Beading Exercise.
Grandeisa y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
¿Y España, no es país para fábricas? ¿Puede oírse
esto sin compasión? ¿Qué Londres, qué París, qué Nimes,
ni qué Lyon han igualado á las fábricas antiguas de Toledo,
Granada, Sevilla y Segovia? Si exceden hoy á las actuales
(en que no hay controversia) ya se ha indicado el motivo en
que consiste: y se dirá más todavía para que en pocos años
se queden muy atrás, si se practicare lo que yo propondré en
estos apuntes. Damascos ha hecho la piedad del Rey fabricar
en Talavera para adornar una capilla del Escorial, que no
pueden ceder á ningunos de Europa. ¿Pero qué ha de suce-
demos, si cuando más hacemos, quitamos un par de grillos
de los pies del comerciante, labrador, fabricante, ó navegante,
y en el mismo acto le amarramos por la cintura con una ca-
dena mucho más fuerte? y no obstante decimos: «camina ade-
lante, que ya tienes los pies sueltos.» Él no da paso, ni
puede ; y luego se dice : « \ ven ustedes que España no es país
para esto! . . .» (To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara. — i< Apuntes sobre el bien y el mal de España.»\
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prepositions. 275
CourersaciÓD.
¿Es Espafia pais para fábricas?
Pruébese.
¿Dónde se fabricaban los damascos? ¿Eran notables?
¿Qaé sucede pues, j por qué no adelanta Espafia ?
Eleventh Lesson.
Prepositions.
As stated in Part I., the Spanish prepositions are
either proper prepositions, being simply placed before
the word to which they refer, as: sobre los montes, over
the mountains, or they are adjectives, substantives, par-
ticiples, etc., coupled with a preposition, and thus pro-
perly prepositional locutions, as delante de testigos, be-
fore witnesses.
1. Proper Prepositions.
Among these, á, de, en, para, and por offer the
greatest difficulty; we will, therefore, consider each of
tiiem separately.
Á, at, in, to, etc.
1. The predominating idea of this preposition is direc-
tion, aiming at a point, therefore motion to or towards, as:
Ir al correo, to go to the post.
Tirar al blanco, to shoot at the target.
Volverse al principe, to address oneself to the prince.
2. Thus, action:
Empezar á andar, to begin to walk.
Ponerse á leer, to begin to read.
JEntregarse á los placeres.
To give oneself up to pleasure.
3. Again, it impUes the majiner of an action or
state, as:
Á mi modo, in my (own) way.
Á la turca, after the Turkish fashion.
A lo militar, in a military fashion.
Á sangre fría, coolly, in cold blood.
Cara á cara, face to face.
4. With transitive verbs, to point out the direct
object, if a person or a personified thing:
18*
Digitized by VaOOQlC
276 Lesson 11.
Amar al prójimo^ to love the neighbour.
Aborrecer á alguno^ to hate someone.
Temer á la muerte, to fear death.
Thus, to distinguish the personal from the im-
personal object, as:
Bar una cosa á alguno^ to give someone something.
Permitir algo á otro, to allow anyone anything.
5. Time and place of an action or state, as:
El mendigo está á la puerta.
The beggar stands at the door.
Á las diez, at ten o'clock.
Al anochecer, at nightfall.
6. The price of something, as:
Á dos pesetas kilo, 2 pesetas a kilogram.
7. Instrument, means, and cause, as:
Matar á hierro, to kill with the sword (lit. iron).
^ fuerza de armas, by force of arms.
Á instancias de sus amigos, at the request of his friends.
8. A with the infinitive replaces an accessory sen^
ence beginning with when or if, as:
Á verla V. diría, if you could see her (or when you saw
her) you would say. [French: A la voir, rows diriez.']
9. Besides, á is met with in a great number of
peculiar expressions, mostly adverbial locutions, to be
foimd in every good dictionary. Such are:
Á sabiendas, wittingly, purposely.
Á ojos cerrados, blindfold (lit. with closed eyes).
A saiga lo que saliere, at random, at haphazard.
De.
1. jDe is frequently the opposite of a. Its pre-
dominating idea is possession, motion towards the speaker,
material, and origin. Examples:
El jardín de mi tío, the garden of my uncle.
Mi primo viene de Madrid, my cousin comes from M.
Un reloj de oro, a gold watch.
El hijo del capitán, the son of the captain.
2. Again, the end of an action:
Acabar de comer, to finish dinner.
Dejar de estudiar, to leave off studying.
Cesar de Hover, to stop raining.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Prepositions. 277
3. With reflective and passive verbs or participles
to point out the agent of a reflective or passive action,
almost always equivalent to por (by, with, at):
Ofenderse de algo, to be hurt (offended) by something.
Querido de sus amigos, loved by his friends.
Sorprenderse de %ma cosa, to be surprised at something.
4. Thus, the cause of an action or state, as:
Ciego de furor, blind with fury.
5. Extent:
Este cuarto tiene 12 pies de ancho y 16 de largo.
This room is 12 feet wide and 16 feet long.
6. Qualities ascribed to a person under certain
circumstances*, as:
Trabajar de sastre, to work as a tailor.
Hacer de intérprete, to officiate as an interpreter.
De is preferred if a peculiar distinction of a person
or thing is denoted, as:
El hombre del gabán verde, the man with the green coat.
La niña de los ojos azules, the girl with the blue eyes.
Francfort del Main, Frankfort on the Main.
7. After the names of days^ months, titles^ dignities,
etc. Examples :
La dtidad de Toledo, the city of Toledo.
El mes de enero, the month of January.
El titulo de conde, the title of count.
^.-B.— With mountains and rivers de is only used, if the
attribution is a proper nams or an appellative noun, as:
El rio de San Lorenzo, the river St. Lawrence.
El rio de la Plata, the river La Plata (silver).
If this is not the case, de is omitted, as:
El rio Duero, the river Duero.
8. It is a pecuHarity of the Spanish language** that
in exclamations a substantive is often joined by de to
the following proper name or appellative noun denoting
a person, as:
* Chiefly after the verb estar, as: El conde de B. está de
embajador en París, Count B. is ambassador at P.
** In German likewise: „S)er 2:5I|)eí t)on ^utfd^err ^a)a8
Sommerbilb t)on SDilenfd^cn!* „S)er Glacier ton ©taat!"
Digitized by VjOOQIC
278 Lesson 11.
¡El pobre de Bocinante! Poor R.!
¡La loca de Elvira! That foolish E.!
¡El ladrón del* criado! That thief of a footman I
9. With de are formed a great many locutions, as :
de baJde, gratis; de miedo, for fear; de veras, in truth;
vestir de verano, to dress in summer clothes; de camino,
on the way, etc.
The cases where de is coupled with a foregoing
adjective, substantive, or verb are so manifold that we
refer the pupil to his dictionary. For those who are
somewhat acquainted with the language, we recommend
the excellent work of V. Salvá*"^.
Bn.
1. The predominating idea of this preposition is
residence in some place. It therefore denotes a state of
repose, as:
Estoy en ntt cuarto, I am in my room.
En su casa de Y., in your house.
Mi primo vive en Paris, my cousin lives in P.
2. It likewise denotes direction, but diflfers from the
synonymous á in so far as it also conveys the second-
ary idea of penetration into, as:
El criado entró en mi cuarto,
The footman entered (into) my room.
La piedra cae en el agua.
The stone falls into the water.
3. With verbs of motion, to express the means of
conveyance:
Ir en ferrocarril, to go by rail.
Viajar en vapor, to travel by steamer.
But, á pié, on foot; á caballo, on horseback.
4. Moreover, en denotes an epoch at or within
which something happens, as:
En el mes de enero, in (the month of) January.
En el año de 1880, in the year 1880.
En breve, in a short time.
But, á las diez, at 10; por la noche, in the evening.
* With appellative nouns the article is commonly affixed to de.
** The full title of Salvá's Work is, Gramática de la lengua
castellana según ahora se habla, ordenada por Don Vicente Salva;
Paris, Gamier Hermanos.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prepositions. 279
Note,— En is not used, if a demonstrative adjective, a
numeral, or the definite article precedes the respective day ol
the week, the month etc., as:
FA diez de octubre, the 10th of October.
¿Irá V. á ver á mi tic el miércoles?
Shall you come to see my uncle this Wednesday?
5. Again, en denotes the cause as well as the pur-
pose of an action, as:
Lo hizo en provecho de su patria.
He did it for the benefit of his country.
Le mató en venganza del ultrage.*
He killed him in revenge of the offence.
Un discurso en memoria del rey,
A speech in memory of the king.
6. With some adjectives denoting skill, superiority,
and their contraries:
Hábil en todo, skilful in everything.
Superior en calidad, of a superior quality.
7. The manner and kind of an occupation, as:
8e ocupa en cazar, he is busy hunting.
Trabajar en plata, en oro, to work in silver, in gold.
Negociar en tabaco, to deal in tobacco.
8. En precedes the infinitive governed by a sub-
stantive with haber (where the French use il y a), as:
Hay dificultad en decirlo.
There is a difficulty in telling it.
9. When before a substantive which occurs tunee,
it denotes continuation or repetition^ as:
De dia en dia, from day to day.
De hora en hora, from hour to hour.
10. Finally, en is used after a great many ad-
jectives and verbs, of which we give those most in use.
The adjectives are: lento and tordio, slow; versado, versed,
experienced; exacto, exact; and the verbs: comerciar and
traficar, to deal, to transact; insistir, to insist; meditar,
to reflect; pensar, to think (of something); perseverar, to
persevere; tardar, to tarry; vacilar, to stagger, to totter;
alucinarse, to be mistaken; emplearse and ocuparse, to
occupy oneself; mezclarse, to meddle with.
* = "outrage" (French and English).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
280 Lesson 11.
11. Idioms with en are:
En estOy at this moment.
En voz hoja, in a low voice.
Beber en una taza, to drink out of a cup (in a cap*) etc.
N.B.—En comiendo f se vá.
No sooner he finishes dinner, he leaves.
JEn Uegando le veré.
I will see him as soon as I arrive.
Con.
It expresses:
1. Accompaniment, cooperation, state, contact:
Ir con alguno, to go with somebody.
Vivir con otro, to live with someone.
Trabajar con alguno, to work with somebody.
España confina con Francia.
Spain lies adjacent to France.
Estar con un constipado, to have a cold.
2. Manner, instrument:
Vivir con economía, to live economically.
Hablar con dulzura, to speak softly.
Pescar con caña, to fish with a rod.
Tocar con los dedos, to touch with the fingers.
3. Disposition towards:
Llevarse bien con otro.
To be on good terms with another.
Afable con los niños, kind to children.
N.B,— 'Conmigo, contigo, with me, with you (thee).
General Remark.— K peculiarity possessed in common by
the prepositions á, con, de, en is that of their being used
after verbs beginning with such prepositions— i.e.;
Acercarse á, to get near to.
Acostumbrarse á, to get used to.
Combinar una cosa con otra.
To combine one with another.
Colaborar con otro, to collaborate with another.
Contentarse con algo.
To be pleased (satisfied) with something.
* French: hoire dans une tasse.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Prepositions. • 28 1
Depender de las circunstancias.
To depend on circumstances.
Encastillarse uno en su opinión.
To stick to one's opinion.
Tradncción. 12.
1. Shall you go (fut,) to the theatre to-night? No, I
am going to the concert and afterwards to my friend Bastinos's
who gives a hall to-night (baile esta noche). The dog stood
before the door and barked. At nightfall we arrived at Ma-
drid. It began to rain and did not stop raining. The ladies
were dressed after the English fashion. I should like to speak
with you (in private) face to face. Allow me to finish dinner.
These cherries are sold (reñect.) (at) one real a pound. At
the prompting (A instancia) of my friends I have bought the
house. If one hears him, one thinks that he is right. I
should find the way to your house blindfold. Stay with
us to supper. He conld not move for the cold. This tower
is (has) 200 feet high and 40 feet wide. His brother worked
long (tr. much time) as (a) joiner at Paris. We shall disguise
ourselves (disfrazarse) as gardeners and go to the badl in
this costume. The president's brother is (estar) interpreter
at the embassy at Athens. The girl with the fair hair has
spoken to the gentleman with the brown cloak.
2. In the month of March he obtained the title of Mar-
quis. This rogue of a lawyer (has) made me pay two hun-
.dred dollars. In my room you will find ink, pens, and paper.
Last year in (the month of) May we travelled to Paris. Ere
long (in a short time) I shall write to my cousin (f,). On
Tuesday there will be (habrá) a ball at the count's. It is
generous to speak on behalf of the oppressed. Tou have done
it to your own damage. The merchant deals in sugar and
coffee, wine and oil. Why will you give vent (desfogar) to
your anger on me ? I did not think of offending you. It was
dangerous to speak. There was danger in speaking the truth
to a favourite. I am waiting from day to day, but no letter
is forthcoming (no llega carta). He waited hour after hour
(for) the return of his friend. The just man is always slow
to punish. It is a disgrace not to be acquainted with (no
estar uno enterado de) the history of one's country. Do you
still think of going (Infin,) to Italy ? It is sometimes a dan-
gerous thing to meddle with other people's affairs. With
whom do you live? Are you coming with me? I am going
to fish with rod and line (hilo y caña). He is not on good
terms with her. He is in bed with a cold. Get near the
fireplace, it is cold. No, thanks; I am used to cold weather.
Would you be satisfied with that? It would depend on () cir-
cumstances.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
282* Lesson 12.
ReadiDgr Exercise.
Grandesa y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
La nación española es nación de mucho honor, dócil,
fiel, obediente j amantisima de sus Soberanos. Sn carácter
es vivo, pronto, esforzado, constante, especulativo y penetrante.
Por la senda del honor se la conduce hasta lo sumo. Los
Beyes Católicos y el famoso Jiménez (por no volver más atrás)
que quisieron teólogos, jurisconsultos, capitanes, estadistas y
políticos, todos los hallaron con superioridad á las demás na-
ciones. Sus obras doy por garantes. Carlos V deseó capi-
tanes y estadistas : jamás vio la Europa un Consejo de Estado
como el suyo, y nunca hubo príncipe que tuviese tanto nú-
mero de generales insignes. Felipe II anheló toda suerte de
hombres sobresalientes en todas líneas, y en todas se aventa-
jaron sus vasallos. El Concilio de Trento lo dirá. Felipe III
quiso santos, y los altares se poblaron. Felipe IV amó poetas,
y el Parnaso se declaró español. La débil complexión de
Carlos II no le permitió pensar en nada, y en España nada
hubo. El Rey Felipe quiso capitanes y eruditos, y en un
instante se formaron de la nada: no digo hasta lo sumo;
pero digo hasta más allá de aquel punto que permiten los
instantes. ¿Si probarán estas expresiones que todas las cosas
dependen de los Gobiernos?
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara. — ^Apuntes sobre él bien y el mal de España,*]
Conversación.
¿Qué clase de nación es la española, y cuál es su
carácter?
¿Cómo se la puede conducir?
Pruébese que en cada época ha producido España los
hombres que sus Reyes necesitaban.
¿Á qué pregunta puede dar origen este hecho?
Twelfth Lesson.
The Prepositions continued.
For and para (i.e., por á), on account of their
common origin, are sometimes misleading. It will,
therefore, be worth stating that por denotes cause, whilst
para means purpose.
For.
1. It denotes the intrinsic motive or the criteriofi
of an action, as:
Digitized by vaOOQlC
TJie Prepositions continued. 283
La mvjer lo hizo por vanidad.
The woman did it from vanity.
Lo sé par experiencia, I know it by experience.
N,B, — Where par denotes purpose, the preposition para
may be used in its stead, as:
Callaré por (or para) no dar disgusto á V,
I shall be silent, that I may not vex you.
2. A certain quality attributed to a person or a
thing, as:
Tomar la mar por patria, to take the sea for one's home.
Becibir á uno por maestro, to take one as a tutor.
Tener á uno por docto.
To consider a person to be learned.
3. The price of anything, barter, or in general an
act of exchange, as:
¿ Cíiánto pide V, por este sombrero ?
How much do you ask for this hat?
Compré mi casa por 10,000 duros,
I bought my house for 10,000 dollars.
No daré mi lápiz por tu pluma,
I shall not give my pencil for your pen.
Trabajo por mi amigo.
I work in place of my friend (or for my friend's sake).
Trabajo para mi amigo.
I work on behalf of my friend.
4. A certain place, direction, as well as repose, as:
Pasar por la calle, to go through the street.
Fui por París á Londres,
I went by Paris to London.
Echar por tierra, to throw to the ground.
Perdí mi dinero por esta calle,
I lost my money in this street.
5. Por used with the passive voice* indicates the
argent, and is translated by by or through, as:
Fué muerto por otro de una puñalada.
He was killed by another by a thrust with a poniard
(he was stabbed).
If the English passive voice is rendered by the
reflective verb, por should be used, as:
* Generally speaking, por is an equivalent for the French
par, whereas para corresponds to pour.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
284 Lesson 12.
Aqud busto se hizo por un gran escultor.
That bnst was made by a great scalptor.
6. Again, por denotes timey answering to the ques-
tions **when?" and "how long?" as:
JPor la tarde, la mañana, la noche.
In the afternoon, the morning, the night.
Hemos hablado por una hora.
We talked for an hour.
Le he prestado á V. el libro por una semana.
I lent you the book for a week.
7. Certain parts of anything may be denoted by
por, as:
Coger por la mano, to seize by the hand.
Asir por el brazo, to seize by the arm.
El perro cogió al toro por la oreja.
The dog seized the ball by the ear.
Lo tomó por el mango, he took it by the handle.
8. Por frequently answers to the question howF
thus implying manner or means, as:
Tor orden alfabético, in alphabetical order.
Tor fuerza, on compulsion.
Lo supo por él criado, he knew it from the servant.
Marchar por compañías, to march by companies.
9. Por often corresponds to the English for, when
it means in favour of, as:
Combatir por la patria, to fight for one's country.
10. After verbs importing motion, as ir, enviar, etc.,
por indicates the object of the motion, as:
Ir por pan, to go for bread.
Enviar por d vidriero, to send for the glazier.
11. Whilst estar para implies an impending futu-
rity, something about to happen, estar por expresses
that something has not yet happened, as:
Las peras estfin por madurar.
The pears are not yet ripe (i.e., must still ripen).
Las casas están por alquilar*.
The houses must first be let (they are not yet let); on
the other hand:
* Estar por used with the Ist person expresses a desire of
this person to do something, as:
Estaba por abofetear al palurdo.
I had a mind to give the impudent fellow a box on the ear.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Prepositions continued. 285
Las casds están pa/ta alquilar.
The houses are to let (they can be had at any moment).
(See under ;para No. 5.)
12. With an adjective, por corresponds to the Eng-
lish "however," and requires the subjunctive of the verb
following with que, as:
Par hermosa que sea esta señora.
However beautiful this lady may be.
Bor grandes que sean los reyes, Dios es superior á ellos.
However great kings may be, God is greater than they.
13. Far with the infinitive mood is an equivalent
for an accessory sentence denoting cause, as:
Por ser yo tu amigo, as I am your friend (being y. f.).
Se le recompensará par haber cumplido con su obligación.
He will be rewarded for having done his duty (because
he, etc.).
Here, just as in the example under No. 1:
(Callaré por no dar disgusto á Y,)
por expresses the reason, and its sentence takes the place of
a single substantive, as is frequently the case in Spanish. See
Lesson 21, n.<^ 4, Part II.
Para.
1. To indicate purpose and destination, advantage
and prejudice, as:
8e come para vivir, one eats in order to live.
Este libro es para V,
This book is for you (destined for you).
Partiré para España, I shall set out for Spain.
La casa está para vender, the house is to be sold.
Lo he hecho para un amigo,
I have done it for (the benefit of) a friend.
Lo hizo para engañarme.
He did it in order to deceive me.
J^.^. —After ir (to go) á should be preferred; 2iñ&r partir
and salir, to depart, to set out, hacer vela, to set sail, á like-
wise obtains, but para is preferable, as:
Ir á Inglaterra, to go to England.
Salgo para Madrid, I start for Madrid.
Hieo vela para Málaga, he sailed for Malaga.
Fartir para (seldom á) Inglaterra,
To start for England.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
286 Lesson 12.
2. To denote the time when an action will be per-
formed or something will happen, as:
Me pagará V, para San Juan.
You will pay me on St. John's day (Midsummer).
JPara siempre*, for ever.
3. Frequently para restrains the meaning of the
predicate to a certain subject or object, as:
Tengo para mi, I, for my part, am of opinion.
El general legó la relación para si.
The general read the report to himself (in private).
4. "In proportion" or "comparatively" is commonly
rendered by paray as:
El niño es pequeño para su edad.
The child is small for its age.
N.B. — Para should be followed by con if the comparison
lies between two different subjects, as:
¿ Quién eres tú para con tu hermano ?
What are you in comparison to your brother?
Fara con likewise signifies for or towards, with reference
to a person**, as:
No tengo reserva para con mi madre.
For my mother I have no secret.
Era mug paternal su conducta para con Francisco.
To Francis he behaved very much like a father.
If "in proportion" or "proportionally" is not followed by
a substantive, but by an accessory sentence, para lo que is
employed, as:
V. no pagó el sombrero pa/ra lo que vale.
* You have not paid for the hat in proportion to what
it is worth.
5. Coupled with estar, the preposition para denotes
that something is impending*"^*, as:
Estamos para salir, we shall go out directly.
Esiog para acabar, I shall have done presently.
6. Frequently para is joined to an infinitive or par-
ticiple, instead of an accessory sentence denoting condi-
tion, as:
* But also: Por siempre.
** Where the French often use vis-a-vis and envers.
*** In Italian essere per or essere in procinto, sul punto di . . .
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Prepositions continued. 287
Tara decir verdad no le he visto á V.
To speak the truth (= if I shall speak the truth), I
have not seen you.
Es difícil para aprendido de memoria.
It is difficult to learn by heart.
If para with the infinitive does not replace an
accessory sentence, it means "in order to," as:
Para escriMr es menester . . .
In order to write, it is necessary ...
Tradaecién. 18.
1. On par. He acted thus from pride and supercilious-
ness. For (jod*s sake (par amor de , , ,) do not speak in
this way I One might think that you said so only from envy.
In order to (give) do my friend (a) pleasure, I at once im-
parted (to) him the news. He may say what he pleases, no
matter how much (par muchoque) he affirms it, I shall not
believe him. The Count has adopted his nephew as [a] son.
I sold my library for 800 dollars. I gave hira my "Cervantes'*
for his "Lope de Vega." This morning when I passed (on pass-
ing by) the great square, I met my tailor, who had promised
(me) to bring my new coat yesterday. Why (did) have yoa
thrown the water on the ground ? I did it by accident. The
boy was run over (atropellado) by a carriage. We were in-
vited to (the) dinner by the aide-de-camp of the prince. The
works of this poet are admired by everybody. I have lent
him the money for two months. He seized me by the shoulder
and pretended that I had taken the money. Tou must not
take the dog by the tail, else he will bite you. With mild-
ness we often obtain more than with severity. I knew of
your arrival from my aunt. The soldiers marched by com-
panies. Do you go for wine or for beer? Send for the
physician; the child is ill. The house and garden are (still)
to he sold. The linen must still dry. However rich (the)
men be, they are seldom satisfied. However nice this child
be, it also has its faults. I had a good mind (Estaba por)
to tell him. As there is [a] great deal of (mucho) wine in
this country, the commerce in this article is very lively.
2. On para. Are these flowers for you or for your
sister? This garden is not to he sold (active voice). Shall
you travel to France or to Italy? I do not say the word^
that I may not betray myself (tr, me). Do you go to Toledo
or to Madrid? I shall go to Madrid. He has bid me fare-
well for ever. I shair write to you at Christmas if you are
still at Paris then. The girl read the letter by herself. I
find that it is little money for (in comparison with) such
Digitized by VaOOQlC
288 Lesson 12.
great pains (sing.). What is the creature in comparison with
the Creator? I am a beggar in comparison with that prince
of the Exchange. For (one's) friends one must not have se-
crets. What he spends (gastar) is little in comparison with
what he earns. We were on the point of (leaving) departing
by (fche) rail (road) when we got your letter. I was on the
point of setting out when your aunt arrived. I do as much
as I can, in order to gain the esteem of my equals (mis
semejantes.) For being (i.e., considering it was) sung from
memory, the song was very correctly sung. — If I am to
speak my mind (tr. to speak freely), the comedy did not
please me. — In order to please, it is necessary to be ami-
able and good-natured. He who works for his family is an
honest man.
Reading Exercise.
Grandeva y decadencia de España. (Continuación.)
Guando las Castillas solas ponian cómodamente cuarenta
mil caballos bizarros en campaña, no habla las ordenanzas
que hoy; pero había libertad, labranza y crianza. Tampoco
había caballería andaluza; ésta era batida por la castellana.
Los ejércitos de nuestros augustos soberanos no se sirvieron
de caballos andaluces hasta el reinado de don Juan II. Al-
fonso Yin, rey sólo de las dos Castillas, para coronarse de
laureles en las Navas de Tolosa, revistó en Toledo 40,000
caballos castellanos, pagados á cinco reales cada uno; 130,000
infantes á tres, sin contar algunos tercios de infantera que
aún no habían llegado: y 60,000 carros de provisiones, equi-
pages y bagajes, que ocuparían, á lo menos, 140,000 ca-
ballerías; y algunas irían de carga, aunque la historia no
lo dice. Á este respecto, no sería mucho creer que la España
de entonces, considerada en toda la extensión que domina hoy
la corona de Castilla, podría poner hoy en campaña desahoga-
damente 120,000 caballos, con 400,000 infantes, y 200,000
carros. Y al presente costaría buen trabajo sacar de las
Castillas 6,000 caballos, con 50,000 infantes efectivos, y 20,000
carros. Esta cuenta gira sobre el supuesto de que las dos
Castillas compongan una tercera parte de las Españas unidas
hoy, que no la componen. (To be continued.)
[M. A. Gáná&r&.—* Apuntes sobre el bien y el mal de España.y^]
" Conyersacién.
¿Cuántos caballos podían poner cómodamente en cam-
paña las dos Castillas?
¿Por qué?
¿Había entonces caballería andaluza?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Prepositions. 289
¿ Cnándo empezaron á servirse los Reyes de la caballería
andaluza?
¿Qné ejército revistó Alfonso VIH antes de la batalla
de las Navas de Tolosa?
Thirteenth Lesson.
Prepositions.
(Conclusion.)
The following are the other simple prepositions in
their alphabetical order:
1. Ante, before — i.e., in the presence of^ as: ante d
rey^ in the presence of the king; ante sus ojos^ before
his eyes. Ante denotes time and order only in ante todo
or ante todas cosas, before any other thing, before all.
Aqtiende (obsol.)» bere, on this side, and aUende, there,
on the other side, are properly adverbs, although used as
prepositions, as : Aquende el mar, on this side of the sea ;
allende el rio, on the other side of the river. {Allende de is
quite antiquated. It means more than = además de, etc.)
2. Contra, against, implies opposition or resistance,
contact^ as:
No hay remedio contra la muerte.
There is no remedy against death.
Dio contra la pared.
He knocked against the wall.
It rarely refers to place, as:
Mi casa está contra el (better frente al) palacio.
My house is situated opposite the palace.
3. Desde, from, is the contrary of hasta (see 6),
and denotes the point of departure, as:
Desde Paris hasta Yiena, from Paris to Vienna.
Desde may be used of time as well as place:
Desde ayer, from yesterday (till . . .).
N,B,—li not the point of departure, but duration is
intended, de may be used instead of desde; in which case to
is rendered by á: e,g,, from 3 to 4, de las tres á las cuatro,
4. JEntre, among, between, from, denotes space,
time, and number (French parmi), as:
Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 19
Digitized by VaOOQlC
290 Lesson 18.
Entre ayer y hoy, between to-day and yesterday.
Entre doce y veinte, from (between) twelve to twenty.
EfUre et jardín y la casa, between the garden and the
house.
5. Hdoia, towards, denotes direction, but without
the accessory idea of aim; also an approximate time^ as:
Hacia el poniente, towards the west.
Hada medianoche, towards midnight.
6. Hasta, till, as far as, denotes limit as to space,
time, or number, as:
Hasta el mar, as far as the sea.
Hasta las once, till 11 o'clock.
Tengo hasta 2,000 libros, I have some 2,000 books.
N.B. — When used as an adverb, hasta means even, as:
Hasta las miÁJeres pelearon, even the women fought.
Hasta no más signifies to the utmost,
7. Según, according to, conformably, agreeably,
expresses the conformity of a circumstance, as:
Según las historias, conformably to the histories.
Según las circunstancias, according to circumstances.
Según factura, as per invoice.
8. Sin, without, differs from the English preposition
in so far as it may never be used as an adverb:
Sin duda, without doubt.
N,B.— Tiene otras casas, sin esas.
He has other houses, besides those.
9. So, under, is now almost obsolete, and occurs
in but few locutions, as:
So capa, so color, so pretexto, under pretext.
So pena, upon pain of ... .
10. Sobre, on, upon, denotes height and superiority
in the proper sense as well as figuratively, as:
Sobre la mesa, on the table.
Sobre todos los vicios, worse than all vices.
Sobre cien duros, more than a hundred dollars.
When used with the names of places, it likewise
denotes vicinity, as:
Anochecer sobre Valladolid,
To arrive at nightfall near Valladolid.
El rey I)(on) Sancho murió sobre Zamora,
King Sancho died before {i.e., at the siege of) Zamora.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Improper Prepositions. 291
Moreover, it expresses the subject of a book, an
essay, etc., as:
Un libro sobre la inmortalidad del alma,
A book on the immortality of the soul.
A higher rate of something, as:
Sobre el salario^ over and above the salary.
A security or warrantship, as:
Creer sobre palabra, to believe upon (one's) word.
A repetition with the accessory idea of reinforce-
ment, as:
Escribir carta sobre carta, to write letter after letter.
And finally an approximate time, as:
Vino sobre las ocho, he came about 8 o'clock.
N.B, — Sobre ser caro, es malo, it is bad besides being dear.
11. Tras, behind, after, implies time and space, as:
Tras los montes, behind the mountains.
Tras el verano viene el otoño.
After (behind) the summer comes the autumn.
2. Improper Prepositions.
These were originally either adjectives or substan-
tives with prepositions or adverbs. With the only ex-
ception of bajo (see 3), they all require cle after them.
They are:
1. Acerca de, about, relating to, in reference to,
concerning. It is only used in referring either to per-
sons or matters, as:
Le hablé acerca de éso, I spoke to him about it.
¿ Qué piensa V, acerca de él ?
What do you think about him?
2. Antes, before, denotes time and order, as:
Antes del otoño, before autumn.
Antes del dia, before daybreak.
Antes del rey, before the king {e.g., marching before
the king).
N.B.— Antes y con antes, long before.
3. Bajo, under, underneath, below, beneath, as:
Bajo protesto, under protest.
Bajo la rodilla, beneath (under) the knee.
19*
d by Google
Digitized b
292 Lesson 13.
N,B,^Bajo may be followed by de, as:
Bajo del brazo, under the arm.
4. Delante de . , ,, before (of space), but also in
presence of, as:
Delante de testigos, before witnesses.
Delante de la puerta, before the door.
Vive delante de la iglesia, he Uves opposite the church .
5. Dentro de . . ,, within, as:
Dentro de las murallas, within the walls.
Dentro de sí mismo, within him- (her-, it-) self.
Dentro de ocho dios, within a week (8 days).
6. Después de, after, behind, imports time and
order, as:
Despides de sus días, after his death.
Uno después del otro, one after another; one behind
the other.
7. Encima de, on, upon; besides, as:
Encima de la mesa, on (upon) the table.
Encima de la carta, above (upon) the letter.
Le regañan y endma le pegan.
They grumble at him and, besides, they beat him.
8. Fuera, outside, without, beside, as:
Fuera de la puerta, outside the door.
Fuera de hora, oat of time.
Estar fuera de sí, to be beside oneself.
As observed with reference to para con (p. 286),
a preposition may be coupled with another preposition
in order to modify the original idea. Thus:
De á, each of, as: Dos barriles de á cien libras, two
casks, each of 100 pounds.
De debajo, from under, as : De debajo de la mesa, from
under the table.
De entre, from between, as: De entre las piedras, from
between the stones.
De hacia, from, as: De hacia los montes, from the moun-
tains {Le,, in the direction from the m.).
Por entre, between, as: For entre la reja, between the
trellis or grating (direction).
For endma de, over, as: For endma de la mesa, (to
pass, to throw, etc.) over the table.
For detrás de, from behind, as: For detrás del árbol,
from behind the tree.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Improper Prepositions. 293
Traducción. 14.
1. We are not speaking about that. Concerning that
• I know nothing. I will see him about it, he spoke about
you. Make the payment as per invoice. There are many
reasons besides (tr, withotit) that. He dare not (no se atreve)
(to) appear before my eyes! Before all things (todo) I tell
you that you are mistaken. The maniac thrust (did) (with)
his (tr. the) head against the wall. Quinine is an excellent
remedy against fever. He has married the lady against the
desire of his family. He knocked his head against the wall.
I accompanied him from his house to the bridge. We must
suffer from the cradle to the grave. Even among robbers
there is still a law. There is a great difference between him
and his father. There came between (from) 50 to 60 soldiers.
The suburb is situated towards [the] west. Go on (Ade-
lante)*; there you will find room enough. Towards 9 o'clock
I shall come home. We stayed with your brother till
8 o'clock. To meet soon again! (Hasta luego,) Even the
children laughed at the nonsense (which) he told us. One
noust always act conformably to (the) circumstances. In con-
sequence of the treaty, the town belongs to the king. Ac-
cording to the law, he deserves a severe punishment. Your
father will he now above 70 years old (tendrá). That is in-
sipid beyond [all] measure (manera). Vice exercises a great
dominion {dominio^ m.) on (the) man. Is this a book about
hunting or about fishing? The church is built on the top
of a hill. Besides their salary, the actors sometimes receive
a special payment (i.e., gratification) if they perform (tror
bajan). He lent me 10 dollars on my ring.
2. We sent one messenger after another, but he did
not come. At last, about 8 o'clock, he appeared, and besides
being late he grumbled. Beyond {tr. behind) the mountains
there are also people, my dear friend. Why do you not shut
the door behind you? I have come even {tr. still) before
the appointed time. Long before. Three pages walked be-
fore the duke. The garrison did not surrender on {tr. under)
such conditions. The soldier was wounded below the elbow.
What shall you do before the trellis? He confirmed the truth
before witnesses. Do write to me within a fortnight {tr. 15
days)! Within my house I am king. After an absence of
seven years, I returned (fr. volver) to Vienna. After the Po,
the Tiber is the greatest river of Italy. Put the books on
the chest of drawers! Do you see that little bird on the
* ^'¡Adelante cm juicio (= judgment)"! = "Drive on cau-
tiously 1" — words of Ferrer, the governor of Milan, to his
coachman during the riot (Manzoni, «I Promessi Sposi»).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
294 Lesson 13.
roof? God be thanked, now we are out of danger! He tagged
the dog from under the bed. The thunderstorm came from
the direction of (de hacia) Valencia. The robber stepped forth
from behind a column.
Beading Exercise.
Grandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
Y para que nadie se admire de esta diferencia de fuerza,
sepan todos que, mucho más inmediato á nosotros, en el año
de 1563, en la feria de Medina del Campo solamente, se tra-
ficaron y giraron en letras de cambio más de 150,000,000 de
escudos. En los afios anteriores habia sido mayor el tráfico.
Las ferias consimiles que entonces se celebraban por todo el
reino, eran muchas, y muchos los millones de millones que
se comerciaban cada año. Cotéjense con las contrataciones
de hoy. T afiádase á esto, para convencimiento general de
las cosas, tanto de mar cuanto de tierra, el número increíble
que á todos consta de las embarcaciones mercantiles que habia
en solo el puerto de Pontevedra, reducido hoy á cuatro tristes
pescadores; y de los millones de fanegas de pan que se cogían
en España, y resulta de las tazmías eclesiásticas. Sueños pa-
recen estas realidades ... Dv s siglos ha que está bajando
España, y dos siglos ha que están subiendo sobre nuestras
caídas, errores y desaciertos, primero Holanda, luego Ingla-
terra, y después Francia. ¿Cómo, pues, no han de haber as-
cendido ellas á la cumbre de la felicidad, y descendido noso-
tros al abismo de las desdichas? A la verdad han sabido
aprovecharse bien de las ocasiones que les hemos presentado;
y en esto merecen elogio . . .
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara.— «J|)Mníc5 sobre él bien y el mal de España.^]
Conversación.
¿ Qué hecho explica esta diferencia de fuerza ?
¿Había muchas ferias entonces? ¿Por cuanto se comer-
ciaba en ellas?
¿Cuál era una de ellas?
¿Era notable el puerto de Pontevedra?
¿Cuál ha sido la causa de la decadencia de España?
¿Qué naciones han subido mientras España ha bajado?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Use of Conjunctions. 295
Fourteenth Lesson.
Use of Coigunctions.
Connective Conjunctions.
Y (and). In a series, between the two last, in
reading out numbers, between tens and units; between
two words alike to translate the English after or many
and many a in similar cases:
El padre, la madre y el hijo.
Tbe father, the mother, and the son.
Limes, miércoles y viernes,
Mondays, Wednesdays, and Saturdays.
1900, mil novecientos; 891, ochocientos noventa y uno.
Horas y horas, hours after hours.
Libros y libros, many and many a book.
At the beginning of sentences, such as:
¿ Está V, contento ? — Y mucho.
Are you pleased? — Very much indeed.
/ T qué frió hace! How cold it is!
N,B,— Hablo de él y no de Y,, or
Hablo de él, que no de Y.
I am speaking of him, and not of you.
Hi (neither, nor). It may follow a sentence with
no, or y no, or ni, or even stand by itself at the
beginning of a sentence, but cannot be followed by no.
In such sequence of compound negations, no, y no
are used only with verbs, whilst ni is used with any
part of speech:
No le he msto, ni le veré hoy.
I have not seen him, nor shall I see him to-day.
Entró, y no me dijo nada, ni yo tampoco.
He came, and did not say anything, neither did I.
No tiene ni dinero ni salud.
He has neither money nor health.
Ni ayer, ni hoy, neither yesterday nor to-day.
Ni él, ni yo, neither he nor I.
¿Le ha visto Y.? •— Ni le veré.
Have you seen him? — No, neither will I see him.
Ni eUa misnia sabe lo que quiere.
Not even she herself knows what she wants.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
296 Lesson 14.
yi siquiera me ha hablado.
He did not even speak to me.
i^.J?.— JVI may be immediately followed by the negatives
ninguno, nadie, nada, nunca, as well as follow them, which
no may not:
No lo sabe ni nunca lo sabrá.
He neither knows it, nor will he ever know.
yi él ni nadie, neither he nor anybody.
Nadie, ni él; nobody, not even he.
Disjunctive Conjunctions.
ó (or). Between the last of two or more disjunctive
parts of a sentence or clause; or before each of them,
if emphasis, distinction, etc., is required, or verbs are
introduced, or distribution is implied:
Vendrá hoy é mañana.
He will come either to-day, or to-morrow.
¿8e queda V., 6 viene?
Are you coming or are you going to stay here?
Ó v., é él, uno de los dos.
Either you or he, one of the two.
Ó no lo sabe, é no lo quiere decir.
Either he does not know or will not say.
To denote approximate number:
Tiene veinte ó veintiún años.
She is twenty or twenty one.
Habia ocho ó diez personas.
There were eight or ten (about eight or ten) people
there.
In conjunction with sea^ be:
Sea v., é (sea) él, it may be either you or he.
N.B.— Ó lo has hecho tú, ó él.
Either you have done it or he has.
Ó tü, 6 él, lo habéis hecho.
Either you or he has done it.
Adversative Conjunctions.
Sino (but). To correct a statement by turning a
negative sentence into an affirmative one. If a verb is
introduced in the latter, sino que is employed:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Use of Conjunctions. 297
La huena crianza no es obra de da naturaleza, sino el
fruto de una huena educación (or sino que es el.. .).
Good behaviour is no work of Nature, but the result of
a good education.
No lo dijo él, sino ella, or
No lo dijo él, sino qtie lo dijo ella.
It was not he, hut she tliat said it.
No lo sabe, sino que lo aparenta.
He does not know, he only pretends.
No sólo habla bien, sino que escribe muy elegantemente.
He does not only speak well, but he also writes very
elegantly.
No — sino corresponds also to the English but or only, as:
No viene sino raramente,
H-í comes but seldom (Ital. Non viene se non rara-
mente).
No espero sino que te vayas,
1 only wait till you are gone.
As seen by these examples, the principal sentence sihonla
likewise be negative.
JPero (but). To introduce distinction without deny-
ing a previous statement, which may be either affirma-
tive or negative. JPero may he followed by a nrgative,
and be the first word of a sentence, or even stand by
itself, which sino may not:
Lo dice, pero no lo cree.
He only says it, he does not believe it.
No sabe mucho^ pero habla bien.
He does not know much, but talks well.
Pero ¿por qué?, but why?
N.B.—Es malo, pero malo, it is very bad indeed.
Mils (but). To denote either opposition to what
immediately precedes, or a consequence differing from
that which one might have expected, as:
Lo dice Tácito, mas no convienen con él los otros
historiadores,
Tacitus says so, but the other historians do not agree
with him.
Mas no porque las ciencias sean el primero, deben ser
el único objeto de vuestro estudio.
But although the sciences be the first object of your
study, they must not be the only one.
Digitized
by Google
298 Lesson 14.
N.B. — JPero aiKl mtis are much the same thing; the
former is more used in the colloquial language, the latter in
literary style.
Aunqiie (though, although^ even, in spite of) in
hypothetical sentences is followed by the Subjunctive, as :
Aunque lo sepa, no lo dirá.
Even if he knows, he will not tell.
No lo haga Y, aunque él se lo diga.
Do not do it, even if he asks you.
Also aun cuando, even if:
Aun cuando lo sepa, no lo dirá.
No lo haga F. aun cuando él se lo diga.
Cuando (provided, on condition, if; even, though),
also precedes the Subjunctive in hypothetical sentences,
as:
Ctuindo no lo sepa V., pregúntelo.
K you do not know it, ask.
Cuando venga Y., tráigalo.
Bring it when you come.
J^r.5.— However, in speaking oí positive facts, the Indi-
cative, not the Subjunctive, is used:
Aunque lo sabe, no lo dice.
He knows, but does not tell.
Cuando viene, lo trae.
Whenever he comes, he brings it.
No lo hace aun cuando él se lo dice.
He does not do it, although he tells him to.
Adversative conjunctional phrases are:
Sin embargo.
no obstante,
con todo,
no por eso,
nevertheless, notwithstanding.
«oto ^e, \ J ^i^^j
solo si que, f ^
Conditional Conjunctions.
Si (if). It requires the Conditional or the Imperfect
of the Subjunctive if the condition appears only possible
or dubious, as:
Si estudiaras (estudiases), te querría mucho más.
If you would study (learn), I should love you (much)
more.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Use of Conjunctione. 299
Si esto fuera asi, yo lo consentiría.
If it were so, I should consent.
In this case the sentence expressing the condition
may be contracted into an infinitive with á, as:
A ser esto asi, yo lo consentiría.
If ¡t were so (it being so), I should consent.
N.B.—Si with the Present of the Indicative expresses
also condition:
Si viene, que espere, if he comes, tell him to wait.
But if the condition rather than such is something con-
sidered as certain or universally known, the Indicative
follows, as:
Si aspiréis á ser docto, estudia.
Study, if you wish to be learned.
Si hay malos. My buenos.
If there are wicked people, there are also good.
N,B, — The following are further uses of si with the
Indicative:
¿Si lo sabrá? I wonder if he knows it.
No me ha dicho si lo sabe ó no.
He has not told me whether he knows it, or not.
No lo dirá si le aJwrcan,
He will not tell, even if they hang him for it.
Como, when signifying if, unless^ or / wonder if,
requires the Subjunctive; but meaning as, or in question-
ing, the Indicative, as:
C<ymo aprendas la lección, la sabrás.
If you learn your lesson, you will know it.
No iré como él no venga,
I will not go, unless he comes.
¿ Como no esté malo ?
I wonder if he is ill?
Como está enfermo, no sale.
As he is ill, he does not go out.
Mientras, with the Indicative, ex^^resses positive
facts; with the Subjunctive, condition:
Mientras más le dan, más quiere,
The more they give him, the more he wants.
MienU'as no me lo pierda V,, lléveselo,
1 will lend it to you, provided you do not lose it.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
800 Lesson 14.
Causal and Final Conjunctions.
JPorque (because, as, since), denotes ''the reason
why,'* the cause of something, and is used in state-
ments and answers as a correlative of ¿por qué?,
¿JPor qué? — JPorque si.
Why? — Because it is so.
Lo haré parque V. me lo pide.
I will do it, because you ask me.
No fui parque llovia.
I did not go, because it rained.
N.B. — At times it expresses a mere wish:
Daria la vida porque ella me quisiese.
I would give up my life that she would love me.
Fiara que (that, in order that, so that) denotes
obtainable end, or purpose, and is generally followed by
the Subjunctive:
8e lo digo á V. para que lo sepa.
I tell you, that you may know it.
Tráigalo ¥., para que le conozcamos.
Bring him, that we may know him.
N.B. — When the reason why and the purpose are much
the same, either porque or para que may be used:
Lo hago porque (or para que) no ae ofenda.
I do it that he might not be offended.
JPues^ ptiesto que^ implies ''the- reason why''
as immediate consequence of something understood;
whilst porque*"^ expresses the reason why as a cause, as :
Iré contigo, pues"^** lo quieres.
I shall go with you, since you wish it.
No pude asistir á la función, porque estaba ausente.
I could not go to the performance, because I was away.
Very often pues corresponds to the English well, well
now, why, only, etc., with a question or a command, and fre-
* Puesto que meaning ifj and followed by the Subjunctive,
is almost obsolete:
Puesto (supuesto) que te favorezcan, muéstrate agradecido.
If they favour you, show yourself thankful.
** French pmsque and parce que. Ital. poicM and perché.
*** If pues indicates the reason subsequently, it is often ren-
dered by for, as:
No puedo creer á V. pues ha mentido.
. I cannot believe you, for you have told me a falsehood.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Use of Cod junctions. 301
quently it expresses opposition, being rendered by yet, never-
thelesSf etc. Examples:
. Pue8 ¿como he de salir? well, how shall I get out?
¡Pues dígaselo YJ only tell him sol
Dice que no tiene dinero ; pues le he dado hay 10 duros.
He says that he has no money, yet I gave him 10
dollars to-day.
€on tal que (on condition, provided) requires the Sub-
junctive mood, as:
Diviértete, con tal que cumplas con tu obligación.
Enjoy yourself, provided you do your duty.
The conjunctions ya (si ya), es que, si es que, and si
must often be periphrased in English, as a literal translation
would be impossible. Ex.:
/ Ya (or si) lo dije! did not I say so!
¡8i hablé con ella ayer!
I spoke with her but yesterday!
¡Es qué se lo dije esta mañana!
Why, this very morning I told him so!
These sentences are all more or less exclamative, and
either confirm or contradict what has been said before.
Other conjunctions are á fin de que, so that, in
order that; así, so, thus; así que, so that, as soon as;
demás de (á más de), besides; entre tanto, meanwhile;
luego, con que, por (de) consiguiente^ therefore, thus;
consequently.
Note,— Luego, like the Latin ergo and the French done,
draws a conclusion from what precedes, as:
Pienso, Iv^o existo, I think, therefore I exist.*
Con que** and por consiguente express the same
idea, but less positively. In conversation, con que seldom
introduces a proper logical conclusion, but rather sums
up what has been said, etc., before, as:
¡€on que, hasta luego! well, then, I hope to see you
soon again! [In French, sur celk, je vous salue!]
¡€an que, vendré á las ocho!
Well, so I shall come at eight o'clock!
¿ Can que, nos deja V, 9
So you are leaving us?
* Cogito, ergo sum.
** German olfo.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
802 lesson 14.
Subordinate Conjunctions.
To these beloug que, that, and según with the
signification; as, in conformity, agreeable, etc., as:
Dice gtie no quiere venir conmigo.
He says that he will not come with me.
Habla según lo entiende,
Hé speaks as he nnderstands it.
Bemark,— As in Italian, que often immediately follows
a past participhj in which case it replaces a compotmd con-
junction, like luego que, después que, etc., the arrangement of
words being inverted. Thus:
Dicha que fué esta palabra.
(Ital.: Delta che fu questa parola.)
Scarcely had this word been uttered.
The regular order would be:
Luego que esta palabra fid dicha.
In both sentences, dicha is feminine, because it must
agree with the following subject in gender and number (see
The Passive Voice).
Again, '*when" and ''as," referring to an adverb
or adverbial phrase of time immediately preceding, are
rendered by que. In English, the present participle is
frequently introduced, the conjunction being omitted, as:
Un dia que estuve en una tertulia.
Once (one day) when I was at a party.
» » » being at a party.
Note, — In such a case the conjunction ctuindo is not ad-
missible. If, however, a sentence containing an adverbial
phrase of time (as: At 5 o'clock he entered my room) is
turned into a principal sentence having the sense of the ad-
verbial phrase, an accessory clause introduced by when, cuando
should be used, not que. Thus:
At 5 o'clock, etc. = it might be ñve o'clock, when he
entered my room.
Serian las dnco, cuando entró en mi cuarto.
Que often replaces phrases formed with que, such
as antes que, después que, in order to avoid re-
petition, as:
Después que el ejército fué desbaratado y que (for des-
pues que) él general hubo entrado en la ciudad . , .
After the army was beaten and (after) the general had
entered the town.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Use of Conjunctions. 303
Before the Subjunctive, too, que is frequently omitted,
as in English. Ex.:
No quiso (que) le alcanzase.
He did not wish (that) he might overtake him.
This is almost always the case with the verbs rogar^
and suplicar, to beg, request, which are never used
with the Infinitive, but with the Subjunctive either with
or without que — e.g.:
Buego á F. me diga el motivo de su proceder,
I beg you to tell me the reason of your conduct.
Traducción. 15.*
1. I told you that I was at home Mondays, Wednes-
days, and Fridays. Did you wait for (tr. esperar) me, then?
A long time, indeed; hour after hour. How sorry I am!
It was in 1897, and then I had no health nor humour. I
was never ambitious, and I never thought of soliciting (en
solicitar) official situations. I want sincerity, and no lies and
subterfuges. I have not told him, and I shall not tell him.
Neither to-day nor to-morrow. Do you want gold or silver?
Silver or gold, as you like. We were about ten or twelve
friends. It was not I, it was he, and it did not happen on
Thursday, but on Monday. He did not know it, he only
pretended. I am your friend, but not your servant. You
are my beloved sister, but not my mistress. (The) good taste
is not the produce of erudition, but an inborn talent of (the)
man. I encounter many difficulties in my studies, but I will
not let myself &e (fr. dejarse) discouraged (Infin. acobardar)
by them. You affirm it, but your master affirms the contrary.
Not only is he a good painter, but he is also familiar with
literature. Though I saw him, I did not speak to him; and
even if he asks me, I will not tell; but he must know, for
(tr. when) he does not ask, and when they speak about her,
he does not say even a word. How can you think that I
will already go away (now) if I have come only an hour
ago? (si no hace más que una hora que he llegado). If you
had asked me, I should have answered you directly. If you
write to me, I shall also write to you. I shall give him the
money, because you find the account in order. I am staying
here because you wish it. I could not come yesterday be-
cause I was ill. If I am told to do such a thing, I shall
at once refuse. I shall lend you the money, provided (on
* As the English and Spanish expressions often greatly dififer,
it is occasionally preferable, for the convenience of the pupil, to
write the English so that a literal translation will be good Spanish.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
804 Lesson 14.
condition) that you give it me back within a month. I do
not know whether he knows it or not. I wonder if someone
has told him. He will not say a word, even if they hang
him for it (use si). The more she has, the more she wants;
the more money, the less charity (use fnientras); and provided
you flatter her she is happy. Why did you not come? Be-
cause it rained. I wonld give all I have if he would do it
(use parque), I tell you that you may know it, for I call
myself your friend.
2. I told him, but he does not want to do it. He is
very obstinate indeed (use pero). Have I not (tr. But I
have) told you to-day that I shall not go to the play? Bat
I brought yon the newspaper yesterday evening. You refuse,
80 we shall (drop the subject) not speak any longer of the
matter. Yon will not pay me, so I shall send the note to
your uncle. Well, you come to dine with us [on] Sunday?
So you will not come with us to the promenade? So I shall
depend upon it (cimento con ¥,). I tell you so, that you may
know it. I declare (you) that I have not deserved these
words. As (it) seems to me, you have not done your task.
Relate me the accident as it happened (siicedió). The field
brings fruit according as it is cultivated (reflect, fr. cuUivar),
As soon as (the) supper was over {tr, finished), the gentlemen
went away. As soon as I shall have paid (sulj.) my bills,
I shall depart. One morning, when I took my chocolate,
someone knocked at the door. It might be nine o'clock,
when we heard a great noise in the street. As soon as all
was put in order and the room shut, we left the house. We
feared (lest) our enemies should he victorious (tr. conquer).
Beading Exercise.
Grandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
La verdadera y física riqueza de España consiste en la
abundancia interior de todo género de frutos nacionales; el
oro y la plata americana no es buena, sino se hace servir de
instrumento para mejorar esta felicidad natural del país.
El dinero en si no es más que señal, representación ó
ficción de ella. España en general está pobre desde que le
vino de Indias más dinero; y no es culpa de las Indias.
¿Pues qué es? Es que yendo á las Americas en busca de
esta señal de riqueza, abandonamos más la riqueza física y
real, que teníamos dentro de casa. ¿De qué sirve labrar y
traer mucho dinero de las Indias, si no le labramos ni trae-
mos para nosotros? Nosotros nos fuimos á buscar tesoros en
América, y las naciones cultas se vinieron á sacárnoslo de
nuestra casa con la venta de los frutos de su industria. Ck)n-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Object of the Verb. 805
quistamos á las Indias, es verdad; pero nos hicimos tribnta-
rios vohmtarios de Inglaterra, Francia, Holanda, Oénova,
Venecia, Hamburgo, etc. Más tributo pagamos á estas naciones
que al Bey. De todas las producciones de España y América
no nos queda más que el vano y fastuoso honor de tener las
naciones ocupadas en servirnos; quiero decir, en chupamos
la sustancia, y despojarnos del comercio, artes, fábricas, manu-
facturas ó industrias.
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara. — tApuntes sobre el bien y el mal de ^apa/la.»]
Conversación.
¿ En qué consiste la verdadera riqueza de España?
¿Son buenos el oro y la plata americanos?
¿Qué es el dinero en si?
¿Desde cuándo está pobre España?
Expliqúese por qué.
Al conquistar las Indias, ¿qué nos hicimos?
¿Qué nos queda hoy?
Fifteentli Lesson.
The Object of the Verb.
The Direct Object.
The most striking diflference between the Spanish
and other languages is exhibited by the direct object
of the verb, as stated in the First Part (see The Sub-
stantives in connection with the Prepositions, p. 15). There
it was stated that the direct object (accusative), when
importing a person or personified thing, seems to be ex-
pressed not by the accusative, but by the dative case —
i.e., by the preposition á preceding the noun. Thus;
The mother loves the daughter, is not: La madre ama
la hija, but: La madre ama á la hija.
To this general rule are now added the following
remarks :
1. Not only names of persons, but also names of
countries and toivns without article, and personified ideas,
are connected by á with the preceding verb, as:
Amar á la patria, to love one's country.
Los franceses conquistaron á España,
The French conquered Spain.
Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 20
Digitized by VaOOQlC
806 Lesson 15.
El almirante atacó y saqueó á Nicotera.
The admiral attacked and plundered N.
Note.-- The prepos. á may be omitted before proper names,
if the accusative is taken in a general sense. Thus:
Aguardar á un criado, to expect a (certain) footman.
Whereas:
Aguardar un criado.
To expect a footman (any person of that class).
This is also the reason why substantives taken in a
general sense (the French sens partitif) are not preceded bj
á in the accusative, as:
Busco criados.
I am on the look-ont for servants (Fr. Je cherche des
domestiques).
Es preciso que el ejército tenga oficiales inteligentes,
The army must have intelligent officers.
No conozco invjer más arrogante.
I do not know a more arrogant woman.
2. If a verb governs two direct objects (i.e., accu-
sative cases), of which the second is properly the predi-
cate of the first, the former is rendered by the dcUive
case and follows the latter, as:
He calls his caprice character.
Llama carácter á su capricho.
3. If the accusative of the person, which according
to the general rule ought to be expressed with the dative
case, is followed by another attribute with á, the first
á is omitted, as:
/ Envíe V. el jardinero á la plaza !
Send the gardener to the market!
N.B. — If, however, the personal complement is a proper
name, and the following attribute denotes a place, hoth take
áy as:
/ Envie V. á Carlos á la plaza !
Send Charles to the market!
But if both complements denote a person, the first á is
dropped, as:
¿Prefiere Y. Cervantes á Calderón?
Do you prefer Cervantes to Calderón?
4. If by the use of it a misconception could arise,
this preposition is omitted, as:
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The Object of the Verb. 307
Mi amigo me recomendó el general.
My friend recommended the general (acms,) to me.
(Me recomendó al general^ would be "recommended me
\_acc,] to the general" [daf].)
5. Again, á is suppressed before numerals (except
unOy or others if used with a restrictive meaning), as:
Conocí seis señoras de la reunión,
I knew six ladies of the society.
(But:
Conocí á una señora^ etc., I knew a lady . . .
Conod á seis de las ocho que allí había.
I knew six of the eight ladies that were there.)
6. After the verbs to name, to elect, to choose, etc.,
the accusative without á is used. Thus:
España ha producido grandes poetas.
Spain has produced great poets.
El príncipe nombra los empleados.*
The prince appoints the functionaries.
If, however, the personal object is a proper name,
the dative should be used, as:
España ha producido á Cervantes y á Calderón.
Spain has produced Cervantes and Calderón.
Han nombrado Coronel á . . .
They have appointed so and so to be a Coronel.
7. Occasionally the omission of a is required by
euphony. Thus: Mira aquél hombre, look at that man,
because Mira á aquel hombre, would grate on the ear.
The latter also, however, is occasionally found; in, fact
in the best writers we meet with numerous exceptions
* K another personal accusative follows, as : The prince ap-
pointed him general, this accusative is, as in English, added
without the article, or with por (after to recognize^ to acknowledge,
etc.), or else with como (after to consider, to depict, etc.), as:
El principe le nombró capitán.
The prince appointed him captain.
Los soldados le reconocieron por general.
The soldiers reco}fnize<i (acknowledged) him as their general.
Le considero como bribón.
I consider him as a scoundrel.
If these verbs are passively used, the accusative case is turned
into a nominative, as:
Fué nombrado capitán, he was appointed captain.
20*
Digitized
by Google
308 Lesson 15.
to the rules given above on the omission of á when
the object is a person.
8. With some verbs the signification is altered by
the omission or the use of á. Thus:
robar alguno, means: to kidnap somebody;
robar á alguno, » to rob somebody;
dejar alguno, » to leave behind (a son, etc.);
dejar á alguno, » to desert somebody;
pierde sus hijos, » he loses his sons;
pierde á sus hijos, » he ruins his sons.
9. In Spanish several verbs always govern the
accusative case without preposition (except names of
persons, which take the accusative with ó), whilst in
English they are introduced by prepositions. In Eng-
lish some of them may govern the accusative. They
follow in alphabetical order:
Acechar, to lie in wait for . . . mirar, to look at.
cortejar, to pay one's court pedir, to beg (of).
to, to render homage to. rogar, to beg (of).
escuchar, to listen to. tratar, to treat with.
encontrar, to meet (with). violentar, to offer violence to,
extrañar, to wonder at. and many others.
huir, to flee from.
As these verbs are all transitive in Spanish, they
may, of course, also be used passively, as:
Fuifnos escuch€ido8 por el juee.
We were listened to by the judge.
If another object, denoting a person^ is added to
these verbs, it is rendered by the dative of the pronoun
or the substantive, thus:
Me pide un favor, he asks me a favour.
Fide un favor al rey, he asks a favour of the king.
10. As stated in p. 122, 3, verbs are often used
reflectively in Spanish, in order to modify the original
idea. In such a case, the personal object takes á,
whereas the direct object importing a thing does not, as:
Tragarse, to devour; Las fieras se tragan á los
hombres, the wild beasts
devour the men.
llevarse, to take away; Se llevó el dinero, he took
away the money.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Object of the Verb. 809
11. As already stated, if, for the sake of greater
emphasis, either the direct or indirect object pre-
cedes the verb, the corresponding personal pronoun
should be added.
A ná no me lo puedes decir.
To me you cannot say so (for: no puedes decírmelo),
AquelUis siete medallas las hallaré,
I shall find those seven medals.
Traducción. 16.
1. If we love our country, we only do our duty. The
Greeks conquered Troy after a siege of ten years. He calls
his nonsense jokes, and his impertinence witticisms. I (have)
sent the footman to the mill and the (maid-) servant into the
garden. I prefer Souvestre to Lamartine, and Dante to Pe-
trarca. He recommended me his servant, but I have not
taken him. I have known seven or eight wealthy families
in that town. Do you know more talented authors than
Dickens and Thackeray? The king appointed the Marquis
captain-general of the Island of Cuba. The minister appoints
the officers, and the king confirms them. I consider every-
body an impostor who does not speak the truth in such a
case. Napoleon was elected emperor by the French. Ger-
many has produced great philosophers, and France great ge-
nerals. The city of Mayence produced Gutenberg, the inven-
tor of the art of printing. Look at that lady; what do you
think of her beautiful dress? Napoleon the First left a son,
the Duke of Reichstadt. If I must leave my country, I am
very unhappy.
2. The robbers have stolen (me) my -whole fortune. (The)
gipsies have often kidnapped children. We should never
flatter the great in order to obtain a favour. Thank your
father for his great kindness. I have dissuaded your friend
from his project. Obey thy parents, if thou wilt become
happy. We have prevented the danger in time. I renounce
(to) all my claims to (tr. at) the estates of that family. I
could not resist his entreaties. Help your neighbour on every
occasion. Assist the unhappy man, lest he be lost! It is a
great misfortune if a young prince is always flattered by
his courtiers. I was helped when it (was not too late) still
was time. Happily the danger was avoided! I remind you
of your promise. The beggar asked me for alms. Ask the
peasant the way! What are you doing here? I am pidting
on my boots (tr. calzarse). Why do you not put on (tr. po-
nerse) the waistcoat which the tailor (has) brought you yester-
day? I shall read this letter, though you have forbidden it
Digitized by VaOOQlC
310 Lesson 16.
to me. You cannot deceive me (see 11), my dear friend!
I know you better than you know yourself!
Reading Exercise.
Grandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
Ya he dicho (y diré mil veces) que las riquezas ameri-
canas solo son útiles haciéndolas servir para florecimiento de
las producciones naturales de Espafia. Este uso es el que
hasta aquí no hemos hecho, y este uso es el que necesitamos
hacer si queremos que vuelva Espafia á su antigua felicidad,
esplendor y abandancia. Y veis aquí descubierto aquel mis-
terio oscuro que tiene confusos á muchos hombres muy há-
biles, sin acertar á comprender cómo florecieron Holanda,
Inglaterra y Francia desde que comenzaron á poseer las In-
dias, y cómo decayó Espafia desde que tuvo Americas. Estas
tres ilustres potencias se valieron de aquellas sefiales de rique-
za para fomentar la riqueza real de sus dominios europeos,
y Espafia al contrario, se tiró inconsideradamente á las mis-
mas riquezas representativas, abandonando su labranza, su
pastoría, sus artes, sus fábricas, sus manufacturas y sus indus-
trias, que formaban la sustancia real y esencial del Estado:
ésta fué la desgracia, y este el efecto, contrario al suceso de
nuestros vecinos. Más claro os lo diré. Los Gobiernos ho-
landeses, ingleses y franceses miraron siempre sus patrias como
parte principal, y sus Indias como parte accesoria, que debía
hacer la felicidad de sus estados hereditarios ; nosotros al revés,
por falta de buenas medidas, venimos en el efecto á mirar
las Americas como parte principal de nuestras riquezas, y
descuidando los intereses sólidos de la madre, la hicimos como
accesoria de sus hijps. Y lo peor es que por tal camino
venimos á infelicitar á nuestra Espafia, sin haber hecho felices
á nuestras Americas . . .
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara. — (a Apuntes sobre el Men y el mal de España.*]
Conversación.
I Con qué condición son útiles las riquezas americanas ?
¿Hemos hecho ese uso?
¿Qué descubre esto?
¿ En qué consiste ese misterio ?
Expliqúese por qué florecieron Holanda, Inglaterra y
Francia desde que tuvieron las Indias, y por qué
decayó Espafia desde que tuvo Americas.
¿Cuál fué la conducta de los Gobiernos extranjeros, y
cuál la de nuestros Gobiernos?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Remarks on the Spanish Passive Voice. 311
Sixteenth Lesson.
Remarks on the Spanish Passive Yoice and on
some Spanish and English Yerbs.
1. As already stated, to bSy when used as an
auxiliary to form the passive voice, is rendered by ser,
as: to he loved, ser qiierido. However, the pupil should
always bear in mind that the passive voice is much
less used in Spanish than in English, the reflective verb
being commonly used instead.
N,B. — The Spanish passive voice signifies that an action
has been, or not, completed; and therefore is almost always
used in past tenses, in narrative and statements of what is
considered to he (or not to he) an accomplished fact.
Fué muerto de un tiro, he was hilled by a shot.
Ha sido enterrado hoy, he has been buried to-day.
Su memoria será respetada siempre.
His memory will always he honoured.
Whenever the above is not the case, the English passive
voice is rendered in Spanish either by the active voice (in
the 3rd pers. plnr.) or by the reflective se (with the 3rd p.
plur. or sing.) or by se with a pronominal indirect object.
Le mataron de un tiro.
Se le ha enterrado hoy.
Su memoria se respetará siempre.
Note how the following English Passive forms are
rendered in Spanish:
Spanish spoken here, se habla español.
No re -admittances given, no se dan salidas.
No admittance, se prohibe la entrada.
Apprentice wanted, se necesita un aprendiz.
Carriages lent on hire, se alquilan carruajes.
T. . -J -J. • r ji Í se dice, se teme.
It IS said, It IS feared, | ^.^^^^ ^^^^^
If the action or state expressed by the passive voice
is represented as frequently repeated and therefore habi-
ttml, the verb ir (to go, like andaré in Italian) is pre-
ferred to ser, as:
Este verbo va conjugado asi.
This verb is conjugated thus.
Note the following among many idioms:
Ser de buen corazón, to be good-hearted.
Ser de buenas piernas, to be a good walker.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
812 Lesson 16.
Ser de huen comer, to have generally a good appetite.
Ser de muchos años, to be very old.
2. To become (sometimes also "to grow") is ren-
dered:
(a) By ser, if the state is represented as a lasting
one, as:
Es menester estudiar mucho para ser sabio.
One must study much in order to become learned
(i.a , if a man is learned, he remains so).
Mi hijo será comerciante.
My son will become a merchant.
(b) Ponerse, if the transition from one state to another
is to be denoted, as:
8e pu80 triste, he became sorry.
Se ha puesto pálida, she has become pale.
(c) Volverse, if the idea of an alteration predominates,
as:
Volvióse alegre.
He became merry (i.e., having before been sad).
Se ha vueUo muy insolente.
He has become very insolent.
(d) Hacerse, salir, if the stress is laid on the deve-
lopment of the action or state, as:
¿Qué se ha heclio de su amigo de Y,?
What has become of your friend?
8e me hace cada día más desagradable.
He becomes every day more disagreeable to me.
8e hizo soldado, he became a soldier.
Salió un afamado actor.
He turned out or became a famous actor.
N.B. —The same idea is expressed by ser de, as:
¿Qué fué de él?
What became of him? (Ital. Che fu di lui?)
(e) Llegar d ser^ ponerse, meterse (á), venir á ser,
when implying intention or aim, or result^ as:
Quiere meterse soldado, he will become a soldier.
Vino á ser infelie por el descuido de su hijo.
He became unhappy by the imprudence of his son.
Llegará á ser él primero de todos.
He will become (he will be) the first of all.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Remarks on some Span, and Engl. Verbs. 313
(f) Ir á parar, venir á parar, parar en . . ., pasar
á ser, pasar de (á), salir, when importing a final aim, as :
¿ En qué irá á parar esta cosa ?
What will in the end become of the matter?
¡No sé en que parará!
I really do not know what will become of him I
(g) Quedar^ if the alteration is represented as merely
accidental or involuntary, as:
Á esta noticia quedó muy afligido.
At this news he became very sorry.
Observation,— Besides these verbs, there are some others
which convey the notion of development or transition, but with
an accessory idea, as: anochecer, to grow dusk, enverdecer,
to become green; empeorarse, to grow worse, to deteriorate,
to degenerate; envejecer, to grow old, etc. With these verbs
(in the gerundio) estar is often used, in order to express an
accessory idea of duration, as:
El ruido está creciendo.
The noise is growing louder and louder.
(See The Gerundio,)
3. To be able, Can, etc. See Part 11., Less. 17, n.^ 15.
4. To ha/ve with the accusative and past participle
following, as: I shall have a coat made, means hacer
hacer [in French: faire faire], as:
8e hizo hacer un sombrero, he had a hat made.
Sometimes in such a sentence, to have is not trans-
lated, if the person who performs the action is not
mentioned, as:
He has his books printed at Madrid.
Imprime sus obras en Madrid (= he prints ....).
5. To cause, to order, is hacer and sometimes
mandar, as:
Haga V. entrar al criado.
Order (tell) the footman to come in.
Mandó al soldado acompañar al prisionero,^
He ordered the soldier to accompany the prisoner.
* If '*to order" or "to cause," etc., is followed by the infini-
tive of the passive voice, as in the sentence: He ordered the sol-
dier to be shot, the object should be placed after the infinitive
of the active verb. Thus: 3Iand6 fvsilar al soldado.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
814 Lesson 16.
6. To let, when meaning '*to permit," "to allow,"
is commonly dejar y as:
No me dejo engañar {lit, I do not let me cheat).
I do not let my self be cheated.*
No deja cerrar la puerta.
He does not allow the door to be shut.
Dar likewise occurs in this signification, as:
jyéme F. esta carta á escribir, let me write this letter.
^o¿e. — "Let me know'' = send me word, is rendered bj
hucer saber j as:
Hágame F. saber si puede venir.
Send me word if you can come.
To be let (= hired) is alquilar, as:
This house is to be let, esta casa está para alquilar,
7. To get is also frequently rendered by hacer.
Yet this verb has so many other significations in Spanish,
that its meaning must be gathered from each peculiar
instance — i,e, :
¿Ha recibido F. su dinero?
Have you got your money (i.e., have you received your
money) ?
He alcanzado, or logrado la colocación, ya tengo la
colocación.
I have got (i.e., obtained) the situation.
Ha engordado, se ha puesto (vuelto) gordo.
He has got (i.e., become) fat.
No puedo veneer esta dificultad, etc.
I cannot get over this difficulty = I cannot overcome
or conquer this difficulty.
8. To be obliged^ to be compelled, I tmisty
Hkewise present some difficulties.
(a) If the subject of the sentence is expressed by
(me, people, etc., es menester, es preciso, es ne^
cesarlo, hay que, conviene, are used with the in-
fi^nitive and toithotU a nominative case; thus:
Es menester (necesario, preciso) trabajar para ganar
la vida,
One must work in prder to gain one's livelihood.
(Lit, It is necessary to work, etc.)
No hay que decírselo, one (you) must not tell him so, etc.
** In Spanish the passive voice cannot be nsed after the
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Remarks on some Span, and Engl. Verbs. 315
(b) K, on the contrary, the subject is distinctly
expressed, an accessory sentence is introduced by que, as:
Es precisa (necesario etc.) que F. trabaje para ganarse
la vida.
You must work in order to gain your subsistence.
Es preciso que las mujeres trabajera para *
Women must work in order
(c) Instead of es menester, etc., deber (de) or haber
de may Ukewise be used, it being immaterial whether a
moral necessity or a compulsion by some material force
"be meant; though in this latter case, tener que may be
xised.
He de estar en mi cuarto, I must stay in my room.
I>ébe de hacer frió, it must be cold.
Tengo que escribir muchas cartas,
I have many letters to write.
8u hermano de F. ha de estar enfermo.
Your brother must be ill.
Observations,—!. A construction not rarely met with, is
ihe dative of the personal pronoun with es preciso, followed
by the infinitive, as:
Me fué preciso hacer eso,
I was obliged to do so. (French: il me fallut faire cela.)
2. The English *'oughf' is likewise rendered by es me-
-nester, etc., or by deber, etc. If this verb is followed by the
Compound infinitive (as: you ought \o have given), it is trans-
lated by the imperfect Indie, or by the corkditU>nal of the
Sut)j,',
I>ébía (or debiera) habérmelo dicho.
He ought to have told me so.
Tradneción. 17.
1. He was run over by a carriage. He was taken to
the hospital. He has been buried to-day. His death will
be greatly (muy) felt. Listen to me : "English spoken here."
•'Carriages lent on hire," "apprentice wanted," "it is said," etc.,
are always rendered (se traducen) by se. Yes, I understand,
verbs "to permit," "to allow." Dejar should always be followed
by the infinitive of the active verb :
Dejó m>atar (or que matasen) á aquél hombre.
He allowed that man to be killed.
• In French: 11 faut travailler, and: II faut que ¡es femwes
travaillent.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
816 Lesson 16.
but let us go out this interval. But we cannot. Why? Be-
cause "no re-admittances are given.** Though he is a verj
old man, he is a good walker (use ser de). Have you (ge-
nerally) a good appetite? What has become of your friend?
In order to become clever, it is necessary to have intercourse
with clever people. The boy said : '*! will become an officer."
My sister was {tr, became) very glad when she heard this
news. At first he was sad (afligido) y and afterwards he be-
came merry, without any reason. Not every acorn becomes
on oak-tree, and not every soldier a general. This man be-
came richer every year. Who will be (become) the first of the
class? If you want to become (a) merchant, you must first
of all learn order and diligence. You will turn out a spend-
thrift if you (go on like that) continue in the same way.
Jacob Lafitte was (became) at last a great banker. Tell me,
what has become of the servant (whom) you had last year?
When we heard this, we were (became) much surprised. (The)
spring is coming; the trees are getting green. Do you know
that your father is growing rather (muy) old? Do not be
deceived {tr. Do not let yourself deceive) by (the) appearances.
Why do you not let the dog come in? Tell the footman
to come in. The emperor ordered the culprit to be put in-
to prison.
2. Where do you (Por quién . . see 4) have your linen washed
(i.e., who washes y. 1.)? I shall send him word that I am
(estoy) engaged. It is to be hoped {tr. it lets itself hope)
that we shall have fine weather. That is easy to assert (lit. :
it is easy to assert that), but difficult to prove. It is not
said {lit.: it cannot be said) that you are not right, but
yet I do not believe it. Where have you had this coat
made? My neighbour will have his house freshly painted.
One must always speak the truth. You need* only com-
mand (mandar)y and it will he done (tr. hacerse) directly.
The children must go to bed at eight o'clock and get up at
six. I must stay at home to-day, for I have yet to do my
task. Our friends must be abroad, for their house is shut
up. You ought to have waited for me, for you knew for
certain {tr. certainly) that I should come. You ought not
to have done so (it) if you did not wish deeply to afflict
your poor father.
♦ "To need" and "to want" are often rendered as shown
by the following examples:
Necesitamos dinero^ we want some money.
No hay más que hablar ^ one only needs to speak.
"Ought" is sometimes translated by necesitar ^ as:
V. hubiera necesitado descansar.
You ought to have reposed.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 317
Reading Exercise.
Grandeza y decadencia de España. (Continuación.)
La codicia inconsiderada del oro 7 plata americana em-
pobreció la riqueza natural de España: oro y plata la des-
poblaron: oro y plata la convirtieron de industriosa en ocio-
sa: oro 7 plata destruyeron su labranza, crianza, fábricas,
artes é industrias: oro 7 plata trasmutaron en esterilidad su
.abundancia, 7 en carestía la baratura de sus víveres: oro 7
plata, extraídos del reino, la hicieron pobre. De la pobreza
de los particulares resultó la indigencia universal 7 las nece-
sidades del Erario: de ésta, la ruina de los vasallos 7 sus
pueblos: de sus atrasos, el general de la monarquía; de éste,
el de los miembros. Una á otra se dio la mano. Crecieron
los gastos, el lujo 7 las obligaciones de la corona, cuando
eran menores los medios de asistirla, fomentarla 7 auxiliarla.
De esta misma indigencia se derivó el aumento de tributos,
impuestos 7 arbitrios, que fué redoblar 7 remachar el mal.
Una carga superior á las fuerzas conclu7Ó en de8ma7o, aban-
dono 7 holgazanería. Y de estos antecedentes resultó (7
necesitó resultar por consecuencia necesaria) toda la actual
que padecemos en todas líneas. En una palabra, nosotros ba-
jamos por aquel principio mismo que hizo subir á los demás,
7 todo ha provenido de una conducta contraria á la natura-
leza del bien; de sistemas, digo, opuestos á la conveniencia
del Estado.
(To be continued.)
[M. A. Gándara.— «^pMwfeí sobre él him y el mal de España,^]
Conversación.
¿Qué empobreció la riqueza natural de España?
¿Qué hicieron el oro 7 la plata?
¿Qné resultó de todo esto?
¿Por qué se aumentaron los tributos?
¿Y de estos antecedentes que resultó?
¿Por qué bajamos?
Seventeenth Lesson.
Pecnliarities of some Spanish Yerbs.
With some verbs idioms are formed which in Eng-
lish must commonly be periphrased with adverbs, etc.
Tho^e most in use are:
1. Acahar, to finish, to terminate, is commonly
rendered by just, just now, also by to have done, as:
Digitized by VaOOQlC
318 Leeson 17.
Acaban de llegar, they have just arrived.
Acabo de leer, I have done reading.
Sometimes acabar corresponds to the English finaUy,
at lasty and fuUy, as:
Acabar de resolverse, to resolve finally, at last.
Acabar de entender, to understand fully, entirely.
Acabar de conocer, to know at last.
No acabar may be rendered in diflPerent ways, as:
No acababa de maravillarse,*
Lit.: He could not leave ofiF wondering = he was
quite amaeed, etc.
Acabar con uno, to kill a person.
2. Acertar^ to gain, to carry one's point, answers to
the English "to be able," as:
No acertó á resolver qué hacer.
He could not determine what to do.
Sometimes it expresses a casualty or contingency
and is an equivalent for to happen, as:
Acerté á pasar, I happened to pass.
Acertar con alguno cosa means: to guess.
3. Alcanzar, to reach, to overtake, has very nearly
the same meaning as acertar; thus:
No alcancé á persuadirle,
I was not able to (I could not) persuade him.
No alcanzo como pueda ser eso.
I cannot understand how that could be.
4. Cansarse, to get tired, when negatively employed,
imphes (like no acabar) that an action is going on^ as:
No se cansaba de hablar.
Literally: He did not grow tired of speaking = He
went on or kept speaking.
5. Bar, to give, like echar (see this verb, 7), ex-
presses the sudden and instantaneous beginning of an
action or a state, as:
El niño dio á reir, the child began (suddenly) to laugh.
(Besides, dar forms a good many idioms, for which the
pupil is referred to the dictionary):
Dar las gracias, to thank.
Dar los buenos dias, to wish (one) good morning.
* In French: II ne finissait pas de ^émerveiller.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 319
Bar la enhorabuena, to congratulate.
Bar el pésame, to condole with.
(Ir á) dar un paseo, to go for a walk.
Bar las doce, to be striking 12.
Bar que decir, to cause people to talk.
Bar de bofetadas.
To give a sound smacking on the face.
Se ha dado á la bebida (á las diversiones).
He has taken to drink (to amusements).
6. Dejar, to let, joined to the participle, chiefly in
commercial style, is equivalent to an auxiliary verb, as:
Bejé acreditado en cuenta, I have credited the account.
(On dejar, to let, see the preceding Lesson.)
Bejar dieho, to leave word, to have already stated.
Bejar de hacer una cosa.
To leave off doing something (i.e., not to do it).
No dejar de hacer una cosa.
To go on doing a thing (i.e., to do it).
7. Echar, to throw, is often synonymous with dar
(see 5), as:
Echar á correr, to start running.
Se echó á llorar, he began (all at once) to cry.
Echar de ver means "to behold, to get a sight of";
echarla de escritor, to pose as a writer {Echar, too, forms a
great many idioms).
8. Estar para, followed by the infinitive, corresponds
to the English ''to be about," ''to be upon the point
of," *'to be going to," as:
Estaba para decirle,
I was going (I was about) totell him (see p. 286, n.® 5).
Note the following, among many idioms:
Estar de cumpleaños, to be one's birthday.
Estar de luto, to be in mourning.
Estar de paseo, to be out for a walk.
Estar en candelero, to be a high wig.
9. Gustar, to please, to relish, when negatively em-
ployed, means "to dislike," as:
No me gusta ese hombre, I dislike that man.
10. Haber de (see the preceding Lesson) is some-
times an equivalent for the English "ought," as:
F. había de saberlo, you ought to know it.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
820 Lesson 17.
But: Ha de saber F. (has de saber), know, then!
V, ha de saber que estoy aqui.
Enow, then, that I am here.
When used impersonally (hay — quej^ it should
be rendered as in the following sentence:
Htxy mucho que desear, there is much to be wished for.
Note,— Haber, though commonly an auxiliary, is some-
times a principal verb, especially in poetry, as:
Héroes hubieron Inglaterra y Francia,
England and France had their heroes.
Los hijos que de Isabel hubo el rey 2>. Fernando.
The children that King Ferdinand had from Isabella.
Conviene que se haya como hombre que no sabe ni oye
(Oranada).
He must behave like a man who does neither know
nor hear.
Also in the expressions he aqui, here is, there is, haber
is an independent verb: he aqtii á nuestro héroe, here is
our hero.
Besides, haber is used absolutely in certain exclamative
expressions, as:
¡Bien haya! happy he who . . .
¡Mai haya! woe to him who . . .
¡(^ue Bios haya! God give him eternal repose!
11. Ir á, like the English '*to be going to," denotes
impending futurity, as:
Voy á decirle, I am going to tell him.
Vamos á ver, let us see!
Idioms are:
Ir de luto, to be (dressed) in mourning.
Ir de paseo, to go for a walk.
Ir de reunión, to go to a party.
12. Llegar^ to arrive, like acabar , frequently an-
swers to the English "at last," **finally,", "in fine,"
etc., as:
Ha llegado á comprender, at last he understands.
Llegar á oir, á entender means: to hear for the first
time; We^ar á saber is "to come to know," "to be informed,"
"to learn," "to hear," etc.
13. Llevar, to bring, to carry, to wear, joined to
the participle, expresses, like dejar (see p. 319, n.® 6), past
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 321
time in general, as: llevar sabido, to have known; Uevar
estudiado, to have studied, learned; Uevar hecho, to have
done. The pupil must bear in mind that if the past
time is expressed by dejar, Uevar, tener (see 17) or trasr
(to bring), the past participle should agree in gender
and number with the substantive to which it refers:
Le Uevo escritcis ya cuatro cartas,
I have already written four letters to him.
Lleva mandados tres recados.
He has sent three messages.
14. Ponerse á, meterse á correspond to the Eng-
lish "to begin" (French: se mettre a), as:
8e puso á escribir, á hablar, á comer.
He began to write, to speak, to eat.
Foner forms a great many idioms:
Poner en duda, to doubt.
Poner en claro, to ascertain.
Poner en limpio, to make a fine copy.
Ponerse (el sol), to set (the sun).
Ponerse colorado (or encarnado), to blush.
Poner por escrito, to put down in writing.
Poner miedo, to ifrighten.
Ponerse en la razón, to be reasonable.
15. Saber J to know, to be able, denotes an acquired
ability, as:
¿Sabe V. hablar castellano?
Can you speak Spanish (i.e., have you learnt it)?
Saber de algtmo, to hear from anyone.
Poder, on the contrary., expresses an innate faculty, as:
No puede hablar, porqtte es mudo.
He cannot speak because he is dumb.
16. Tardar, is to (tarry) be a long time in . . .,
to defer, to delay, as:
Tarda mucho en responder.
He Is a long time in answering.
No tardar is commonly rendered by soon, as:
No tardará en responder, he will soon answer.*
Note: ¡Cuánto tarda el tren! how late the train is!
¿Cuánto se tarda de aquí aUá?
How long does it take from here to there?
* In French: II ne tardera pas á repondré.
Spanish Conv. -Grammar. 21
Digitized by VjOOQIC
322 Lesson 17.
17. Tener, to have, to hold, as already stated (Part L,
p. 10), is commonly used instead of the auxiliary "to
have." The difference between tener and habe^- has been
explained. Tener impUes the lasting eflPect of an action,
as: te he dicho, I told you; but: te tengo dicho, I told
you once for all. Thus: he escrito la carta, I have
written the letter, simply denotes the past tense, whereas:
tengo escrita la carta lays a particular stress on the
word written, — Me ha ofendido is: he has offended me,
but me tiene ofendido, means: he has offended me, and
I still resent the offence. — La casa que ha comprado,
the house he (has) bought; /a casa que tiene comprada,
the house he has bought and still possesses. — The
pupil will notice that the participle used with tener
agrees in gender and number with the word to which
it refers. — Without an accusative following, tener sel-
dom occurs with the past participle, as:
Tengo acabado, I have done (see Participles).
Tener que . . ., to be obliged, has been mentioned before.
Tener likewise forms a great many idioms:
Tener miedo, to be afraid.
Tener frío (calor), to be cold (warm).
(No) tener razón, (not) to be right.
Tener en poco (en mucho), to value (not to value).
Tener que hacer, to have something to do.
18. Tratar^ to treat, to deal, to purpose, to set
about, if emphatically denoting a design or purpose, is
followed by de, as:
Los conjurados tríUqban de asesinar al rey,
The conspirators purposed killing the king.
19. Venir de , , , like acabar, intimates that an
action has just been performed, or that a condition
began or ceased immediately before; thus:
Viene de verla (or: acaba de verla), he has just seen her.
However, venir de cannot be used, unless the idea of
''to be coming from^^ is implied.
Venir á ser (or: llegar á ser), simply means "to be,'*
**to become."
20. Volver á . . ., is an equivalent for again or
once more, as:
Vuelvo á decir á su hermano de V, , , .
I once more (again) tell your brother . . .
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 328
Volver without the infinitive following is "to return/*
"to come back," as:
Volveré á las once, I shall be back at 11 o'clock.
N,B.— The repetition of an action is often expressed by
the prefix re — , as:
Animar, to animate; reanimar, to reanimate.
Observation, — The cases where duration, etc., of an action
or a state is expressed by the verbs andar, estar, ir, and
venir with the gerundio, are explained in Lesson 23, "The
Gerund."
Tradnecién. IS.
1. We had just entered the house when we heard her
crying. We could not wonder enough at his impudence.
He will kill (use finish) her. I was not able to dissuade him
from his project. You have hit (guessed) it, my friend! He
has taken to drink; he has taken to amusements (see 8. dar),
I congratulate you. I thank you very much. It is striking one.
That will cause people to talk. He left word that you should
do it (use d€Qar), When he poses as a writer, I always
begin to laugh. It is her birthday, but she does not keep
it (lo celebra) because she is in mourning. I was on the point
of writing to you when I got your letter. I did not wish
to speak to him any longer, for he bored me dreadfully. I
cannot go out to-day, I must stay at (tr. guardar, to watch)
the shop. You must send me the book (still) to-day. There
is (a good deal more) still much to be (tr. dejarse) said
about your behaviour, but I have no mind to scold any
longer.
2. What are you about (to do) there, Charles? I want
to open the window, for it is very warm in the room. Have
you at last understood that I cannot comply with your re-
quest? I have already asked him three times (use Uevar),
He just began to work when his friend came into the room.
I doubt it (use poner). You are not right ; I value your
opinion very much (use tener). Can you dance? No, I
cannot dance, but I can fence and ride. You cannot ride
to-day; the horse is ill. You can never get your task done
(fr. You always tarry to finish your task). Never mind ! I shall
soon come back. As I have bought the article, I shall not
send it back again. We tell you again that you are wrong
in acting thus. Mr. Gayoso has sold the house which he
bought two years ago. I would get rid of this disagreeable
occupation, but my master told me that he could not get on
without me. Do not trouble me. You see that I have no
time to talk to you. He has insulted me, and I shall never
21»
Digitized by VjOOQIC
324 Lesson 17.
forgive him again for this insult. I shall not sell the garden
again which I bought. I have already dressed myself this
morning, and now I must (es menester) dress myself once more.
I never saw my poor brother again!
Reading Exercise.
Grandeza y decadencia de España. (Continuación.)
El carácter de la nación en general no es holgazán; si
fuese este su genio y su temperamento, ¿cómo habla de ha-
ber sido la más industriosa hasta el reinado de Felipe III?
Aquel mal es adquirido. Hoy mismo no me señalarán en
toda la Europa cinco naciones que amen el trabajo tanto como
los Catalanes, Gallegos Vizcaínos, Guipuzcoanos y Montañeses:
improbas son sus fatigas .... Puertas abiertas y puertas
cerradas, digo que han sido las dos fuentes de todas nuestras
desgracias. Abriéronse las que debieron cerrarse y cerráronse
las que debían abrirse. Veis aquí ya el trastorno de toda
España. Ésta en realidad, ha sido, es y será, siempre que
no se remedie, la surgente de los males políticos que han
armiñado al Estado. Carcoma silenciosa, que insensiblemente
ha ido royéndole hasta el corazón. Todas nuestras decaden-
cias son hijas de esta lima sorda.
Para restituir la monarquía á su antiguo y debido es-
plendor, es preciso mudar de estilo. Volver el cuadro al re-
vés: abrir, digo, lo cerrado, y cerrar lo abierto. Veis aquí
ya los dos polos de la felicidad pública. Este es el sistema
necesario; ni el bien tiene más entrada, ni los males otra
cura. Y nada es más conforme al derecho natural que dis-
tribuirse y consumirse los productos dentro de la nación
misma que los contribuye. Por aquí ha de comenzar sus
operaciones el héroe que se propusiere el plan de remediarla.
No hay que equivocarse : todo lo demás será pérdida de tiempo,
y acaso complemento de la destrucción. Crecerá el mal cada
día: bajarán las rentas reales: se empeñará el Real Erario:
irán los pueblos á menos, y á más la dificultad. ¡Ojalá sea
yo mal profeta!
(To be continued.)
[M. E. Gándara.— «4pwníes sobre él bien y el mal de España.*]
Conyersación.
¿Cómo se prueba que el carácter general de la nación
no es holgazán?
¿Quiénes pueden señalarse entre los más trabajadores
de Europa?
¿Cuáles han sido las dos fuentes de todas nuestras
desgracias ?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
/
Moods. 325
¿Por qué?
¿Qué es preciso para restituir la monarquía á su an-
tiguo esplendor?
¿Hay otro sistema?
¿Por qué no lo hay?
¿Todo lo demás que será?
Eighteenth Lesson.
The Moods.
1. The Indicative Mood.
This mood represents an action as positive and
beyond all doubt. In this regard the English and Spanish
language offer no remarkable difference. In accessory
clauses, no less than in the principal sentence, the In-
dicative Mood is employed, as:
El criado dice que ya está pronto,
I'he footman says that he is ready.
Mi amigo me escribió que ya había visto á su primeo.
My friend iwrote me that he had already seen his cousin.
2. The Subjunctive Mood.
Any action or state that does not appear to be
quite certain, but is represented as possible or doubtful,
as well as consequences resulting, not from any fact, but
from mere thought or feeling , should be expressed by
the Subjunctive Mood. In Spanish this mood — com-
monly neglected by the English — is strictly observed
and is one of the greatest beauties of the language, as
it modifies the expression far more than is possible
with the English Subjunctive. For this reason the Eng-
lish verbs could, wotdd, should, may, might, must, etc.,
are usually not translated, but rendered by the Spanish
Subjimctive. The student who is acquaiuted with the
French and Italian languages will find a great analogy
between these languages and the Spanish, and will be
seldom mistaken in using the Spanish Subjunctive (ex-
cept the future and conditional) where he would employ
the Subjunctive in French or Italian.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
826 Lesflon 18.
We may distinguish between:
(1) The dependent Subjunctive.
(2) The absolute Subjunctive.
The dependent Subjunctive is used:
1. After the conjunctions antes que, before, ere;
aunque, although, though; cuando, when; con tal que,
on condition that ; dado que, caso que, puesto que, pro-
vided that; para que, in order to, so that; por más que,
however .....; 5¿, if; como si, as if; sin que, without . . .;
and after the exclamation ¡Ojalá!, God grant it, and a
few others. Examples:
Vendré aunque Uueva, I shall come, though it may rain.
Haré mi deber, sin que F. me lo recuerde,
I shall do my duty without your reminding* me of it.
For más que hcigaSy no te perdonaré.
Whatever you may do, I shall not pardon you.
Note.—li, however, a fact admitting of no doubt is
stated, the Indicative mood is required even after these con-
junctions, as:
He venido aunque lluetfe, I have come, though it rains.
2. After verbs importing order, fear, and apprehen-
sion, permission, desire, doubt, etc., as:
Temo que mi tío no venga,
I am afraid my uncle will not come.
El maestro quiso que y o diese mi libro á mi hermano,
The master wanted me to (= wished that I should)
give my book to my brother.
Dudo que cumpla con su palabra.
I doubt if he will keep his word.
N,B,— But after dudar (de) si ..,, to doubt, the Indi-
cative should be used, as:
Dudo (de) si está á su palabra.
I doubt whether he will keep his word.
3. Decir, when meaning "to order," "to ask," and
esperar, when meaning "to hope," govern the Subjunc-
tive mood; when meaning, respectively, "to relate" (to
* We need not add that the English presewi participle, when
used, as in the above sentence, instead of accessory clauses, should
always be rendered by the respective person and tense of the
verb with the corresponding conjunction. Thus: without your
reminding me = without that you remind me.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Moods. 827
tell, speak), or "to wait" ("to expect"), they govern the
Indicative, as:
Me dice que venga, he tells (orders) me to come.
Espero que venga F., I hope (that) you will come.
Whereas:
Me dijo que mi tío vendría.
He told me that my uncle would come.
Espero que F. vendrá, I expect that you will come.
4. The Subjunctive is also used in relative sentences
if the action, expressed in them, is not meant to imply
something as definite, but as negative, unknown, doubt-
ful, intended in the future — e.g.:
Diga lo que quiera, no le creeré.
He may say what he likes, I shall not believe him.
No encontrarás quien te perdone semejante injuria.
Thou wilt find no one to pardon thee such an insult.
JDonde quiera que fueres, haz lo que vieres (Truéba).
Wherever thou mayest be, do what thou seest done.
5. In compound interrogatory sentences meant
to be open questions:
¿Hay aqui alguien que lo sepa?
Is there here anyone who knows it?
¿He dicho yo que no tenga razón él?
Did I ever say that he was wrong?
6. After sin que:
Lo hizo sin que le viesen.
He did it without anybody seeing him.
8e lo han dado sin que lo pidiera.
They have given it to him without his asking for it.
7. In sentences such as:
Sea el que sea, whoever it may be.
Dijéralo quien lo dijera.
No matter v^rho might have said it.
Que viniese que no viniese, whether he came or not.
Si lo dice, que lo diga, if he says it, let him say.
Si viniese, que venga, if he comes, let him come.
The absolute Subjunctive is used:
1. In exclamations with que — viz.:
i Que me haya este favor!
If he only would do me this favour!
Digitized by VaOOQlC
828 Lesson 18.
NoU.—Que is dropped in such expressions as:
J Quiera Dios! God grant it!
¡Quiera el cielo! Please heaven 1
2. In requests, exhortations, and commands assuming
a negatiTe form, as:
¡No dig€i8 que estoy aqui!
Do (thou) not say that I am here!
¡No vengas acá! do not come here!
¡No me niegues tu favor!
Do not deny me your (thy) favour!
Observation.— In sentences of this kind, as well as in
those introduced by ^we, a verb importing a msh or desire
is understood, so that the construction is properly elliptical.
The whole phrase would run:
¡(Quiero) Que me haga este favor!
I wish that he would do me this favour!
¡(JEM jo que) No hagas ruido!
Do (thou) not make a noise! {i.e., I wish that thou do
not make a noise!)
3. The Imperative Mood.
It is used:
1. In requests, exhortations, and commands, niiless
assuming a negatiye form:
Mancedlo, do it. No lo hagáis, do not do it.
Diselo, tell him. No se lo digas, do not tdl him.
2. In ironical expressions to show the consequences
of an action:
Hazlo, y te pego (lit.: do it, and I will beat you).
If you do it, I will beat you.
Dígalo v., y no le creerán (lit.: say it, and they will
not believe you).
Do not say it, because they will not believe yon.
Idiom atical Imperative by means of the Infinitive:
A comer, come to dine; eat!
A vestirte! get dressed!
Traducción. 19.
1. I (am at) work now, that I may have finished (haber
acabado) at 6 o'clock. These people looked at me, as if I
were a criminal. Before (i.e., sooner than) doing (tr. I do)
that, I had rather (tr. I will) die. I shall come at all events,
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Moods. 829
even if I have no news from you. I lend yon the money
on condition that you give it me back soon. In case (that)
Mr. Barrera should depart to-day, let me know (tr. avisar)
by telegraph. I entered the saloon without the others noti-
cing (tr. notar) it. God grant that I find my family in good
health! I was afraid (that) your mother would not find us
at home. I wish you a happy journey (transí, that you have).
I doubt (very) much that he will come (still) to-day. I (have
no doubt, but) do not doubt that every one of your words
is the strictest truth. Tell the footman to come (i.e., that
be comes) directly. I tell you that I have not received your
letter. I hope (that) you will send me good news again. I
still expect (you to keep) that you will keep the promise
which you have made me. Is there anyone here who. has
seen it? He did it without anybody seeing him. No matter
who may say it, it is not true.
2. Do it. Do not do it. Tell him. Do not tell him.
Do it, and do not tell him. Get dressed, and come to dine.
(Idiom, Imperat,) Do come, my dear friend, it is much too
cold in this room! Never mind (tr, that may not give you
trouble), I shall put all to rights! Tell him that I am ready!
I am looking for the book in order to give it to you. I seek
a footman that may serve me well. God grant (that) it
were true! Let him speak out (tr, speak) if he wishes us
to do him the favour. Do not tell your brother that we are
here. Do not come here! There is no room for you! Do not
tell him the whole truth, that he may not be too much up-
set. Do speak to me with (en) confidence! I shall do all
that is in my power! Be patient! I told the servant to
tell the physician to come directly! Fear (thou) my wrath I
Do (thou) not fear anything! I shall assist you! Let us
take (Vamos á dar) a walk!
Reading Exercise.
Grandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.)
Ciérrense, pues, en España las puertas abiertas ; ábranse
las cerradas: pónganse diques á los ríos de oro y plata que
desaguan fuera del reino: piénsese, búsquese, y tómese por
primera diligencia un temperamento equitativo que sirva de
equivalente, y aún de grande aumento al Real Erario: róm-
panse las cadenas que embarazan los progresos: repruóbense
los estorbos: quítense á la Nación los grillos que se han fa-
bricado de los yerros de dos siglos: derríbense las murallas
que quedan señaladas: mírese la libertad del comercio como
único fundamento de la felicidad pública: fórmese y dése
sistema fijo á todas las partes y ramos de la monarquía, que
Digitized by VaOOQlC
880 Lesson 19.
vive, ó mejor diré, muere 8in él. Un sistema, digo, sabio,
prudente, justo y equitativo: un sistema libertador: x\n sistema
combinatorio, que abrace desde el interés y parte más alta
del Estado hasta el ramo y partecilla más mínima de la mo-
narquía: nn sistema auxiliador, reformador: en una palabra,
un sistema sencillo y perfecto, obra ilustre de un rey grande,
que sujete á un centro de unión todas las ideas del Gobierno;
qne reduzca á su punto de vista todos los intereses de la
autoridad real, del pueblo y del £rario; que enlace intima-
mente la gloria de la majestad con la abundancia y felicidad
pública, de tal modo que, unidos estrechamente estos dos ob-
jetos (que siempre deben caminar á paso igual), se haga im-
posible la ventaja del uno sin la mejora del otro, el adelan-
tamiento de éste sin el florecimiento de aquél: y en fin, un
sistema dichoso y perpetuo que lleve á la inmortalidad el
glorioso nombre del Rey, restablezca la opulencia en Espafia,
y haga respetable el crédito de la nación.
(M. A. Gándara. — «42^***^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ V ^^ ^^^ ^^ Esjpaña.^]
Con ver sacien.
¿Qué hay que hacer?
¿Qué sistema ha de ser ese?
¿ De qué modo se ha de enlazar la gloria de la majestad
real con la felicidad pública?
¿Pueden caminar separados esos dos objetos?
¿Cuál será el resultado de tal sistema?
Nineteenth Lesson.
The Use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses.
Use of the Tenses of the Indicative.
§ 1. Present.
(a) In narratives, instead of the Definite; as:
Esta mañana iba yo por la callea cuando un amigo se
me acerca y me dice (se me acerco y me dijo):
Thiá morning I was going along the street, when a
friend approached me, and said to me . . .
(b) Likewise in colloquial language to replace the
Future, as:
Voy (instead of ire) á misa mañana,
I shall hear mass to-morrow.
Dentro de quince días me vuelvo á Inglaterra,
Within a fortnight I shall return to England.
Digitized
by Google
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 331
§ 2. Imperfect.
(a) In descriptions of characters, opinions, states,
manners and customs^ representing a past action as often
repeated, or customary, or progressive, as :
Tenia en su casa un ama que pasaba de los cuarenta,
y una sobrina que no llegaba á los veinte, y un
mo0O de campo que así ensillaha él rocín como to-
maba la podadera, (Cervantes: <íDon Quijote.T^)
He had in his house a housekeeper that was more than
forty years old, a niece who ha-d not yet reached
her twentieth year, and a farm-hand who used to
saddle the tiag, as well as to handle the pruner.
Cuando yo era pequeño era muy travieso.
When I was small, I used to be very mischievous.
¿Qué iioHa Y,? — Estaha leyendo,
What were you doing? — I was reading,
(h) When two actions are represented as being
performed at, or as lasting, the sam£ time, as:
Mientras yo escribia, mi amigo fumaba,
AVhilst I was writing, my friend was smoking.
Él hablaba, pero no le entendían.
He was speaking, but they did not understand him.
N.B.—li one action is interrupted by another, the Imper-
fect denotes the action that was going on when the other took
place; the latter requiring the Definite, Ex.:
Mientras yo escribia, él entró en mi cuarto.
Whilst / was writing, he entered ray room.
(c) To render the Imperfect auxiliaries could, should,
iind ought, etc., as:
Debía (or debiera) habérmelo dicho.
He should have told me so (= He ought to have told
me so. See page 315, Observ. 2).
§ 3. Definite.
(a) To represent a past action as occurred on one
occasion and entirely elapsed; hence in historical
narration. Ex.:
Falleció Napoleon el 5 de mayo de 1821,
Napoleon died the 5th of May 1821.
En la mañana del 8 renovaron el asalto.
On the morning of the 8th they renewed the assault.
Me lo dijeron ayer, they told me yesterday.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
832 Lesson 19.
Cervantes murió pobres Cervantes died in poverty.
Colón descubrió la América en 1492.
Columbas discovered America en 1492.
^.^.— The Definite may mark duration, but withoat
any reference to another action or state, as:
Napoleon fué un gran general.
Napoleon was a great general.
JPaaé mi niñez en Inglaterra,
I passed my childhood in England.
(b) Instead of the Compound perfect whenever the
speaker considers less the action or the state itself than
the final result^ as:
¿Cuándo ha visto F. á mi madre?
When have you seen (did you see) my mother?
La VÍ esta mañana, I saw her this morning.
Me did orden de esperarle á él.
He gave me orders to wait for him.
N.B. —¥or euphony Spaniards very often replace the
Pluperfect or 2nd Pluperfect by the Definite, if one of these
tenses immediately precedes. Thus:
HaMa admirado las tablas que mi tio compró (for
había or hubo comprado).
I had admired the pictures which my uncle had bought
§ 4. Compound Perfect.
To represent an action perfected some time ago, but
whose consequences extend to the present time.* Thus:
(a) In referring to a past still present in its results:
Su padre le ha desheredado.
His father has disinherited him.
To he viajado mucho.
I have travelled a great deal.
Lope de Vega ha escrito más de 1800 comedias.
Lope de Vega has written more than 1.800 plays.
(b) To represent past actions which have occurred
within a period of time which we consider as not
elapsed :
* It never has the meaning of the English Perfect in
the sentence: Mr. Scrooge has been dead these seven years
(Dickens).
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 888
JHJoy por la mañana ha hecho frió.
This morning it was cold.
Esta semana casi no he salido de casa»
I scarcely have been out of doors this week.
§ 5. Future.
(a) As in English, with the force of an Impera-
tive, as:
¿No callarás? will you not be silent = Be silent!
Darás al momento el dinero á tu tía.
Yon will at once give the money to your aunt! = Give
the money to your aunt at once!
(b) Again, to express a desire to do somethmg, as:
¡Con que, tú serás müitar!
Well, so you want to be a soldier!
(c) To express doubt, probability, or strong con-
viction by means of an indirect question which does
not admit of a negation, as:
¿Qué tendrá, que no viene?
I wonder what is the matter with him, that he does
not come?
Esta/rá enfermo, probably he may be ill.
¿Habrá amigo mejor que él?
Can there be a better friend than he?
Observation. — After dicese, it is said, they say, etc., where
in| English the Infinitive mood follows, preceded by to, the
Future should be used in Spanish, as:
The general is said (expected) to come to-day.
Dicese que el general llegará hoy.
§ 6. Conditional.
This mood presents some difficulties to the foreigner.
In Part I., on the Auxiliaries, the most important ob-
servations may be found. As we shall yet have to
speak of the Conditional mood when treating of the
Sequence of tenses (Lesson 20), we need only add that
the absolute Conditional of the Indicative is often used,
in order to express an approximate time or number,
as well as any uncertain assertion whatever, as:
Serian las 5, cuando él llegó.
It was about 5 o'clock when he arrived.
Digitized by V^OOQIC
834 Lesson 19.
Tendría en aquél tiempo veinticinco años.
Sbe might then have been 25.
¿No se equivocaría Y.?
Bat might you not be mistaken?
Also in expressing any humble request, question, or
wish; and in exclamations to a express strong wish:
¿ Tendería F. la amabilidad de , . .?
Will (or would) you kindly . . .?
¿Querría V. dar un paseito?
Would you not come for a short walk?
¿No Unna/ria F. un bizcochito'f
Will (or would) you not take a biscuit?
¡Lo mataría! I would kill him!
^.^.— With querer, in expressing wishes (not requests)
the Conditional of the Subjunctive (Vo) is preferred:
Quisiera decirle á F. dos palabras.
I wish to speak a few words to you.
The Imperfect, the Definite, and the Compound
Perfect compared.
The Imperfect refers to continuous or customary
actions as viewed from the past, as:
Cuando tenia dinero, tenia muchos amigos.
When I bad money, I used to have many friends (then).
The Perfect to complete actions as not connected
vdth the Present, as:
Perdí el dinero, I lost the money (not now).
The Compound Perfect to past actions as still present
in their consequence, as:
Solo me ha quedado un amigo.
I have only one friend left (still).
Or, compared in a clause:
Chiando tenia dinero, tenía muchos amigos; perdí él
dinero, y solo me ha quedado uno.
Tradncción. 20.
1. Yesterday I wascoming home when a friend of mine
stopped me and said (to me): *To-morrow I am going to Paris".
(Use the Present.) Do you go to the theatre to-night? No,
I go to the concert; I went to the theatre last night. Oh,
yes, I met you when you were going. Did you come out
late ? We came out very late. How is it that the perform-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 335
anee ended so late? Because the theatres in Spain begin
late, and the intervals are very long. Is it a long time since
you bought this house? No, I bought it last autumn. This
summer I bought a garden; but as it did not please me, I
sold it. May I offer (fut,) you a glass of wine? No, thank
you, I have (had some) already drunk some. Tell your bro-
ther that he must pay me. The Lord's Commandment says:
*'Thou shalt not kill!'* When we were in the country, we used
to take a walk every day ; after breakfast we read or played,
and after dinner we took a nap. Napoleon was bom in the
island of Corsica. The Greeks besieged the city of Troy, and
finally took it by assault. I wonder if he is ill. (use the
Future,) Go and give him this letter. (Use the Future,)
Can there be a better man than he?
2. Schiller and Goethe have been the greatest poets of
Germany. Did you pay a visit to Mr. Lorenzo Sepiilveda
last week? Yes, I was there, but I could not speak to him.
Whilst the young gentlemen and ladies danced, the papas
and mammas played at cards or looked at the amusements of
the young folk. Italy had her greatest poets in the 13th and
15 th centuries. For three years I received no news of my
brother. The ball lasted till 6 o'clock in the morning. Was
the count last year in Italy or in France ? How much have
you paid for this coat? I do not recollect whether I paid
24 or 26 dollars. When I got your letter, I had already
posted the one I sent you. When he* had related him all
(which) his father had told us, he grew (tr. quedar) very sad.
After I had done the task which the master had (set) given
me, I went down into the garden.
3. Do your duty, come what may. If it please God,
I shall go to Seville next month. I should give you your
money if you had done your duty. If you were less dis-
contented, you would not always be complaining. I should
very much like to learn something new. If we do our duty,
no one can blame us. I have ordered {tr, that you go not
out) you not to go out to-day; why have you not obeyed
me? He has advised (tr. that I may not write) me not to
write in the twilight, because my eyes are too weak. I
should have asked you to do me this service if I had not
known that you were absent. Do you doubt (de) that (que)
I am an honourable man? No, but I doubt that you are
able to do what you have promised me. I expect you to
tell me the truth. I am waiting for my brother to come, in
order to speak to him about (de) your proposal. He has
told me he cannot do what you wish. I tell you to be quiet
(suent). Do not speak to your friend about what I have
been telling you. Do not stay here. Do not interrupt me
Digitized by VaOOQlC
836 Lesson 19.
if I speak. Do not trust him with your secrets, he is a
prattler. Let us go, that we may be in time (llegar á).
Reading Exercise.
La Farsa de Ávüa.
Incorporados los de la liga con el arzobispo de Toledo
en Ávila, determinaron desposeer al rey de una manera tan
solemne como audaz y afrentosa. En un llano inmediato á
la ciudad hicieron levantar un estrado tan alto que pudiera
verse á larga distancia. En él colocaron un trono, sobre el
cual sentaron una efigie ó estatua de don Enrique con todas
las insignias reales, aunque en traje de luto. Hecho esto,
leyeron un manifiesto en que se hacían graves acusaciones
contra el rey, por las cuales merecia ser depuesto del trono
y perder el titulo y la dignidad real. En su consecuencia
procedieron á despojarle de todas las insignias y atributos de
la magestad. El arzobispo de Toledo fué el primero que le
quitó la corona de la cabeza; el conde de Plasencia le arre-
bató el estoque; el de Benavente le despojó del cetro, y don
Diego Lopez de Zúfíiga derribó al suelo la estatua. Seguida-
mente alzaron en brazos al joven príncipe don Alfonso, y le
sentaron en el trono vacante, proclamando á grandes voces:
«i Castilla por el rey don Alfonso!» Los gritos de la multitud
se confundieron con ^ ruido de los tambores y trompetas, y
los grandes y prelados, y después el pueblo, pasaron con gran
ceremonia á besar la mano al nuevo monarca.
[Lafuente. — «Historia de España.^]
Conversación.
¿Qué hicieron los de la liga, y cuando lo determinaron?
¿Dónde levantaron el estrado? ¿Cómo era? ¿Qué
pusieron en él?
¿Qué leyeron? ¿Qué contenía el manifiesto?
¿Qué hicieron después, y que parte tomó cada uno?
¿Qué hicieron con el Príncipe?
¿Cómo terminó el acto?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 337
Twentieth Lesson.
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses.
(Conclusion.)
The Tenses of the Indicative.
Of the tenses of the Indicative mood we have still
to consider the Pluperfect, the 2nd Pluperfect, the Com-
pound Future, and the Compound Conditional.
The Pluperfect and the 2nd Pluperfect, being
compounds of the Imperfect and the Definite, are dis-
tinguished in a similar way.
Thus the 2nd Pluperfect refers to a past action
as occurred immediately before another already completed
or past and with which it is more or less connected.
So it must be used in compound sentences, after ad-
verbs and conjunctions denoting time, as: cuando, luego
que, así que, apenas (scarcely) or apenas . . . (cuando),
no bien . . . (cuando), Ex.:
Cuando hubo amanecido salí.
When it had grown light, I went out.
JLuego que to hubo dicho se arrepintió.
Así que lo hubo dicho se arrepintió.
Apenas lo hubo dicho (cuando) se arrepintió,
lío bien lo hubo dicho (cuando) se arrepintió.
Are all rendered by:
No sooner he said it, he repented.
If, on the contrary, the actions do not appear so
closely following on another, and on the other hand
are not considered as being connected, the Pluper-
feet should be used. Ex.:
Los israelitas desobedecieron al Señor que los había
saciado de la tierra de Egipto,
The Israelites were disobedient to the Lord, who had
led them out of the land of Egypt.
Ya lo hdbia dicho cuando se arrepintió.
When he repented, he had already said it (i.e., he re-
pented, but he had already said it).
In these sentences there is no immediate connection
between the two actions (desobedecieron and habia sa-
cado, and habia dicho and arrepintió).
Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 22
Digitized by vaOOQlC
338 Lesson 20.
The Compound Future denotes a future action
or state, as previous to another future action, as:
Véame F. pasados algunos dios, quizá le habré pro-
curtido una colocación.
Cali on me in a few days; perhaps I shall have found
yon a situation.
Cuando yo llegue, ya se habrá ido (previous future).
He will be gone by the time I get there.
N.B. — No se habrá ido cuando yo llegue (preyions
future).
He will not be gone, by the time I get there.
For the Compound Conditional see The Conditional
(page 341).
The Tenses of the Subjunctive.
The Present of the Subjunctive is used:
(a) Negatively— i.e.^ in prohibitions, also in requests,
exhortations, and commands made in a negative form,
as:
No lo h4iga F., se lo prohibo.
Do not do it, I forbid you.
No se vaya V,, si es temprano.
Do not go, it is so early.
No se acerquen F. F. al perro, que muerde.
Do not come too near the dog, it bites.
Nunca preste V, libros, porque no se devuelven.
Never lend your books, because books are never returned.
(b) With que, in elliptical sentences depending on
verbs of command and wish:
¡Que entre! let him come in!
¡Que OS divirtáis mucho! enjoy yourselves!
¡Que tengas feliz viaje! happy journey to you!
(c) In exclamations:
/ Sea F. muy bien venido ! welcome !
¡Ojalá venga pronto! oh, that he may come soon!
¡Bendito seas! God bless thee!
Sequence of Tenses.
The Subjunctive being a depending Mood, the theory
of the use of its tenses at once comprises the most im-
portant rules concerning the sequence of tenses— ^'.e.:
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The use of the Teosee. Sequence of Tenses. 839
1. The Present of the Subjunctive, preceded by
que, is used in subordinate clauses depending on a
Present, Future^ or Imperative of verbs of wish, command,
fear^ and sorrow, in the principal sentence [the same
rule as in French], as:
Deseo que lo consiga V,, I hope you will succeed.
Desearé que F. ae alivie, I hope you will get better.
Teme que no le comprendan.
He is afraid lest they do not understand him.
Le mando á F. que lo haga, I command you to do it.
Le he dicho que me escriba.
I told (asked) him to write to me.
¡Cuanto siento que V. se moleste!
How sorry I am to trouble you!
Sentiré que se ofenda.
I should be sory if he feels hurt.
N.B. — If the subject of the two sentences is the same,
the Infinitive, without que, is used:
Deseo conseguirlo, I wish to succeed.
Temo no comprender I am afraid of not understanding.
2. The Imperfect of the Subj. (or the Conditional
in -ra), preceded by que must be used in subordinate
clauses depending on a past tense in the principal sent-
ence [the same rule as in French], as:
Deseaba (deseé, he deseado), que F. lo consiguiese
(or consiguiera).
Temía (temió, había temido) que no le comprendiesen
(comprendieran).
Le mandaba (mandé, he mandado) á V. que lo hiciese
(hiciera).
¡Cuánto sentía (sentí, he sentido) que V. se molestase
(molestara) I {See 1. N.B.)
Likewise depending on the Conditional of the In-
dicative,
(a) with que in the above sentences:
Desearía que consiguiera (consiguiese) V.
(b) with si in conditional sentences:
Conseguiría el empleo si tuviese (tuviera) amigos, or
si tuviese (tuviera) amigos, conseguiría el empleo.
He would obtain the situation if he had friends.
3. The Future of the Subj. in a subordinate
clause refers to a Future, Present of the Subj., or 7m-
22*
Digitized by vaOOQlC
340 Lesson 20.
perative in the principal sentence. In English this tense
is wanting, being commonly rendered by the Present
Subjunctive. Ex. :
Si el cielo diere fuerzas, cantaré aquí el dulce ccmto,
(Valbnena.)
If Heaven grant me strength, I shall sing here the
sweet song ....
En ¡0 que tocare á defender mi persona, no tendré
mucha cuenta con esas leyes.
Concerning the defence of my person, I shall not care
much for these laws.
Hazlo si pudieres.
Do it, if you can (= if you mil be able to . . . .).
N,B,—Yerj often the JFuttM'e of the Subj. may be re-
placed by the :Bre8ent of the same Mood, without any
essential alteration of the meaning. Thus we may as well
say (in the second of the above sentences): en lo que toque
á Only if, as in the first sentence, the future of the Siibj.
is introduced by si, this change is not admissible. The
student should be careful not to mistake conditional clauses
like these for those which admit of the conditional. To be
quite certain, he need but try whether they may be rendered
by the present or not. Thus the sentence:
Si ella fuere de tanta hermosura, de buena gana conr
fesaremos la verdad, (Cervantes.)
If she be so beautiful, we shall willingly confess the truth
— might quite as well be expressed:
Si ella es de tanta hermosura ....
With the conditional, however (if she were or would
be, etc.), the sense would be quite different.
With the Compound Futttre of the Subju/nctive, which
occurs very rarely, the same rules are to be observed as with
the simple future in -re, of course taking into consideration
the correlativeness of the tenses:
Si ella hubiere sido de tanta hermosura, de buena
gana confesaríamos (or huMéra/mos confesando)
la verdad,
4. The Compound Perfect of the Subj, is used
in a subordinate clause*, if a Present or Future pre-
cedes in the principal sentence [the same rule as in
French], as:
* We need not observe that these compound tenses may
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 341
Espero que el correo haya Uegado para fines de la
semana,
I hope the post will have arrived by the end of the
week.
5. The JPltiperfect, as far as this tense is not
concerned with the conditional (see this), is used in a
subordinate clause, if the verb of the principal sentence
stands in one of the past tenses, [the same rule as in
French], as:
Deseaba que lo hubiese (or httbiera) F. conseguido,
I wished you might have succeeded.
Conditionah
In Part I. (on the '*Auxiharies") we gave some ge-
neral rules as to the uses of the Conditional. We now
add further rules, at the same time stating that every-
thing said there concerning the simple tenses must
also be understood of the compound forms.
1. Of the Indicative:
(a) Simple Conditional. Preceded by que
follows any Past tense (either simple or compound)
of the Indicative of verbs of ''believing," "saying,"
''knowing^" or "affirming":
Creía que me escribiría V,
I thought you would write.
Dijo V, que lo haría, you said you would do it.
HoMa escrito que vendrían.
They had written that they would come.
Ta sahia yo que no to haría,
I knew he would not do it.
Ha prometido que lo mandaría.
He has promised that he would send it.
quite as well be used absolutely as the simple tenses (see on the
Subjunctive\ as:
Mañana^ haya venido ó no d socorro, ha de capitular la
plaza,
To-morrow, though relief may have come or not, the place
must surrender.
Or: El gobernador de la plaza era de opinión que, viniese 6 no
el socorro, era necessario rendirse,
The governor of the place was of opinion that he must
surrender, though relief may have come, or not.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
342 Lesson 20.
It is also used in comparisons, preceded by canio,
and with the verb repeated:
Le hablo á F. como hablaría á tm amigo,
I speak to you, as I would speak to a friend.
(b) Compound ConditionaJ. It is used in Con-
ditional sentences, the condition either preceding or
following — in the Past tenses of the Subjunctive
— and being opened by «Í, aunqtie:
8i lo hubiera visto, se lo habría preguntado.
If I had seen him, I should have asked him.
Lo habría dicho, H lo supiese.
He would have told, had he known it.
Aunque lo supiera, no lo habría dicho (or hubiera
dicho).
Even if he had known it, he would not have told.
Likewise, aunque lo supiera, no lo diría.
It may, hke the simple Conditional, express either
doubty probability, or inclination, or intense wish:
Tal vez no habrían Uegado.
Perhaps they had not yet arrived.
Le habría comido á besos al niño.
I could have devoured the child with kisses.
N.B. — The conjunction si cannot precede any of the two
Conditionals of the Indicative in Conditional sentences, though
in other sentences, it may, as:
¡Si lo contaría! I wonder if he has told!
¡Si habría venido, mientras yo salí!
I wonder if he might have come while I went out!
But: Si hubiera venido, lo hubiera sabido.
I should have known if he had come.
2. Of the Subjunctive:
(a) The Conditional may be used in all cases
instead of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, as:
Deseé que lo consiguiera (or consiguiese) usted.
I wished that you might succeed.
Ü^.^.—The form in -ra (not in -se) is used in certain
special cases, instead of the Conditional of the Indicative,
especially with deber, poder, querer, and ser:
Jurara yo que lo sabe, I would swear that he knows it.
Debiera decirlo él, no V,
He should have said it, not you.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 343
¡Quisiera ser rico! I wish I were rich!
Eso fuera fácil de hacer.
That would be an easy thing to do.
(b) Very often the simple Conditional replaces the
compound, as :
Esta noticia me desazonó tanto como si estuviera (for
hubiera estado) enamorado de veras. (Isla.)
This news exasperated me as much as if I had been
indeed in love.
^.5.— Instead of the Compound Conditional of the In-
dicativCy the Simple is sometiuo^s used, chiefly with ancient
writers, as:
Pasarían (for habrían pasado) ya tres semanas desde
nuestra llegada.
Three weeks might have elapsed since our arrival.
Further Remarks on the Sequence of Tenses.
1. In a series of sentences depending on a principal
verb on any past tense, or on the Conditional of the
Indicative, either the forms in ^ra and ^se are found
together, or either of them repeated:
Me suplicó qtie le viera á F. (viese á V.) y se lo
dijese (dijera).
He asked me to see you and tell you.
Desearía que viniese Y. (vieniera V.) para que pasar
sernos (pasáramos) unos días juntos.
I wish you would come, that we might spend a few
days together.
2. The Conditional (or the Imperfect) of the Sub-
junctive, as well as the Compound Perfect, the Pluper-
fect, and the Compound Conditional of the same Mood,
preceded by como si, may follow any tense of the
Indicative— i.e.;
Habla como si tuviese razón.
He speaks as if he were right.
Farecía como si le hubiera pasado algo.
He looked as if something had happened to him.
Tradnccion. 21.
1. I did not yet know that the letter had arrived. The
news (which) we had received set us at rest as to {tr. on)
the fate of the fugitive. Scarcely had I entered the drawing-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
344 Lesson 20.
room, when he took my arm and began to talk to me. As
soon as the bear had been seen (tr. dejarse ver) in the forest,
they resolved to give him a general chase. As soon as we
had heard (sabido) that your cousin had arrived, we went to
pay him a visit. The general reconquered (tr. recuperar) all
the fortresses of the country which the enemy had taken.
When you have done your duty, you may quietly await what
then will happen. The judge wants the witness to speak the
truth. Ask him to pay (tr, ask that he pay) you your money.
He will be here by the time the letter arrives, do not write
to him. Oh, that he may come soon!
2. The judge wanted the witness to speak the truth. I
have not said that you had written to me; it was my foot-
man who told your father so. The colonel permitted the sol-
diers to give a ball at the barracks. You would work more
easily if you studied more carefully. You may do (subj. pr.)
what you please, I shall not obey you. You will tell me all
(which) he will impart to you. Whatever it may be, I do not
believe that he has told a falsehood. Cost what it may, I
shall revenge myself. I hoped you would call on us more
frequently (más á mentido). He did not know that we
waited for him, otherwise he would have come. My uncle
wished (tr, that) his son should at once set out for Paids.
3. I want to do it, and I told my friend to recommend
you, because I wish you to succeed. I should be sorry to
trouble you. I was afraid of not getting it. I thought you
would recommend me to him, because he said you would do
it. I knew he would not do it, though he told you that he
was speaking to you as a friend. Had I known it, I should
not have relied upon him. I wish you would not believe
everything they tell you. But he spoke as though he spoke
sincerely.
Reading Exercise.
Á Don Pedro Fernandez de Castro^ Conde de Lemos,
Aquellas coplas antiguas que fueron en su tiempo tan
celebradas, que comienzan : Puesto ya el pié en eZ estribo, qui-
siera yo no vinieran tan á pelo en esta mi epístola, porque
casi con las mismas palabras la puedo comenzar diciendo:
Puesto ya el pió en el estribo.
Con las ansias de la muerte,
Gran Señor, esta te escribo.
Ayer me dieron la Extrema- unción, y hoy escribo ésta:
el tiempo es breve, las ansias crecen, las esperanzas menguan,
y con todo esto llevo la vida sobre el deseo que tengo de
vivir; y quisiera yo ponerle coto, hasta besar los pies á V. B.,
que podría ser fuese tanto el contento de ver á V. E. bueno
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Infinitive Mood. 345
en España, que me volviese á dar la vida. Pero si está de-
cretado que la haya de perder, cúmplase la voluntad de los
Cielos, y por lo menos sepa V. E. este mi deseo, y sepa que
tuvo en mi un tan aficionado criado de servirle que quiso
pasar aún más allá de la muerte, mostrando su intención.
Con todo esto, como en profecía, me alegro de la llegada de
V. E. : regocijóme de verle señalar con el dedo, y realegróme
de que salieron verdaderas mis esperanzas, dilatadas en la
fama de las bondades de V. E. Todavía me quedan en el
alma ciertas reliquias y asomos de la Semana del jardín,
y del famoso Bernardo, Si á dicha, por buena ventura mía,
que ya no sería ventura sino milagro, me diese el Cielo vida,
las verá, y con ellas el fin de la Galatea, de quien sé está afi-
cionado V. E. ; y con estas obras continuado mi deseo. Guarde
Dios á V. E. como puede. De Madrid á 19 de Abril de 1616
años. Criado de vuestra Excelencia
Miguel de Cervantes.
Twenty-first Lesson,
The Inflnitive Mood.
I. The Absolute Infinitive.
The Infinitive, when called absolute, is used as a
substantive, and appears with or without the article.
Though considered a noun, this mood does not lose its
verbal character, and may therefore govern a gramma-
tical object as such a verb. In English the absolute In-
finitive is rendered either by the Infinitive mood or,
more frequently, by the present participle. The absolute
Infinitive appears:
1. As a substantive with the article, as:
. El escribir, writing; el hablar, speaking.
2. Likewise as a substantive, but without the article,
and as a predicate, as :
El reino de Dios no es comer ni beber, mas paz y
justicia, (Granada.)
The kingdom of God is neither eating nor drinking,
but peace and justice.
3. With adjectives and adverbs, as:
El hablar bien, to speak well.
El vivir mío, my life {Jit, living).
El levantarse temprano, to rise early, rising early.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
846 Lesson 21.
4. With a grammatical object like the personal
forms of the verb. These objects may be either direct
or otherwise {ix,, English). Ex.:
El comer manjo/res eacquisitos, to eat choice food.
El murmurar las fuentes, the babbling of the springs.
With an adverbial object, as:
El escribir can atención^ to write with attention.
Observations. — 1. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish lan-
guage that the Infinitive very rarely governs the genitive case,
as the present participle (''the babbling") does in English in
the above example ("the babbling of the springs"), where the
genitive has properly the value of a nominative {who babbles?
the springs f nomin,). Whenever in English such a genitive
occurs with the present participle, it must be placed after the
infinitive as a nominative, as: At the entering (entrance) of
the foreigner (who enters? — the foreigner, nom,) al entrar
el extranjero. The eclipse (darkening) of the sun (who dark-
ens? — the sun, nom.), el eclipsarse el sol.
Whenever in Spanish the Infinitive governs the genitive
case, this is to be considered as an irregularity which mast
not be imitated, as:
El murmurar de las fuentes.
Al alborear del 3 de julio.
2. Though infinitives have no plural, however, the infini-
tive appears with the plural termination when it has entirely
lost its verbal character and become a real substantive.
Such are:
Los placeres, the pleasures; los dares y tomares, things
given and taken; los Cantares, Solomon's Song, etc.
Note.— The infinitive with the article preceded by the
preposition á imports simultaneousness, whereas the infinitive
with á without the article expresses a condition, as:
Al ceñirle la espada, whilst girding on his sword.
But: A saber yo.
If 1 knew, or: If I had known.
A oirle, if one hears him.
A no ser que esté dotado de . . .
If he is not endowed with . . . (Trueba.)
II. The Dependent Infinitive.
The Infinitive when depending on another word
is used either mth or without a preposition.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Infinitive Mood. 347
1. Without a preposition after those verbs which
take their object likewise without a preposition. Such
are: alegrarse^ gustar, to be glad; deber, to be obUged,
must; dejar y to let; desear, to desire, to wish; dignarse,
to deign; figurarse, to imagine; esperar, to hope, to ex-
pect; hacer, to make, to cause to be done; llamarse, to
be called; air, to hear; mandar, to order; parecer, to
seem; pensar, to think; poder, to be able; proponer,
to propose; procurar, to endeavour; querer, to be willing;
saber, to know; sentir, to feel, to resent; ser, to be;
servirse, to have the kindness, to please; soler, to use;
temer, to fear; ver, to see, etc. Ex.:
Le veo salir, I see him go out.
Pienso salir, I have a mind to go out.
¡D^ame dormir! let me sleep!
Quiero imitar al pueblo en el vestido,
En las costumbres sólo á los mejores, (Rioja.)
lu (my) dress I'll imitate the people,
In manners (I shall imitate) only the best.
N,B. — Frequently the infinitive with que is used ellipti-
cally^ nada or algo being understood, as:
Déme F. que comer (== algo que comer).
Give me something to eat.
Aqui no hag que ver (= nada que ver).
Here is nothing to be seen.
2. The Infinitive with de is used after those verbs,
adjectives, etc., which take likewise this preposition, as:
L/uego que fueron capaces de amar.
As soon as they were able to love.
No d^aha el principe de lograr alguna ocasión,
The prince did not omit (forget) to avail himself of
any opportunity.
Es tiempo de irse, it is time to be gone.
JRemarTc,—(a) The locutions with acabar and venir de,
mentioned Less. 17, Part II., fall under the same rule, but it
must be born in mind that verUr de cannot be used unless
motion is implied. Ex.:
Vengo de hacerlo,
I have done it just now (I am coming from doing it).
Acaban de dar las 8, it has just struck 8 o'clock.
(b) De is also used after deber, haber, and ser, with the
signification "must," "ought," "to be obliged," etc. Ex.:
Digitized by VaOOQlC
848 Lesson 21.
Debe de estar enfermo, be must be ill.
Ea de presumir, it is to be presumed.
He de verle, 1 must (sball) see him.*
(After deber, however, de may also be omitted without
altering much the signification, i,e,, debe estar enfermo.)
(c) If después (after) precedes an infinitive, it should be
followed by de, as:
Después de haber escrito la carta.
After having written the letter.
3. The Infinitive with á is used (besides the cases
mentioned when speaking of this preposition, see
Lesson 11, Part 11.), after such verbs as to teach or to
learn, to begin**, to set oneself, as:
Aprende á escribir, he learns writing.
Comienza á nevar, it begins to snow.
8e puso á reir, he began laughing.
Echaron á correr, they started running.
Este ministro se dedicó á dar á E. una enseñanza, (Isla.)
This minister tried to give E. an education.
Itemark,—k^ before mentioned, the Infinitive with á is
used after ir, in order to express a future, close at hand, as:
Voy á oir misa, I shall go to (hear) mass.
The Infinitive with á is used after words implying ex-
clusion, like solo, último, primero, etc. Ex.:
Fui el solo á hablar.
I was the only one to speak.
* Haber de , . . . followed by an Infinitive very often ex-
presses futurity. In all Romance languages this tense is nothing
else but the Infinitive coupled with the Latin verb habere, to have,
and contracted with it into one word. Thus:
Spanish: amaré = armar-he, literally: I have to love =
I sball love.
Italian: sentiro = sentirhOf » I have to feel =
I shall feel.
French : parlerai = parler-ai, » I have to speak =
I shall speak.
Portuguese: partir ei = partir-hei, » I have to divide =
I shall divide.
** If, on the contrary, the starting point of an action or its
final point is indicated (the latter with acabar), the prepos. par
should be used, as:
Comenzó por decirme, he began by telling me (= first he
told me).
Acabó por decirme, he finished by telling me.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Infinitive Mood. 349
4. The Infinitive with par is often used instead
of an accessory sentence beginning with porque, because,
as, etc. Ex.:
Por ser pobre esta muchacha.
As the girl is poor (in lieu of porque esta muchacha es
etc.).
^.^.—1. For por with dejar, estar, and quedar, as well
as para after estar, see Lesson 12, Part II.
2. It sometimes occurs that a whole accessory sentence
is inserted between the infinitive and its preposition, as:
Tenia una tropa de cabaUeria de respeto para, en caso
que perdiese la jornada, poderse salvar. (Hen era.)
He held a troop of cavalry in reserve, that he might
save himself in case he should lose the battle.
Tradncciéu. 22.
1. Writing and drawing are useful accomplishments. Too
much sleeping is quite as injurious as too much eating or
drinking. Rising early is very good for the health. We
heard the babbling of the rivulets and the singing of the
birds in the wood. Reading bad books is a very bad thing
(tr. very prejudicial) for young people. On the entrance (infin,)
of the (nom,) monarch, the whole assembly rose. At daybreak
(to break, rayar), the enemy began to bombard the fortress.
The sowing of the grain takes place in (the) autumn, after
the harvest. You must not tell your brother that I (have
been) was here to-day. I wish to speak to your uncle; is
he at home? Let me eat in peace! When I shall have had
my dinner (tr, after having eaten), I shall tell you everything
you want to know. Please (tr. servirse) walk in, sir! Why
do you not let (go) out the dog?
2. I saw the footman entering (in) the house, but I do
not know whether he is still there. Come, children, it is time
to go to bed! The intention to do one's duty is not suffi-
cient, for we do not judge the intention (infin. querer)^ but
the action (tr. the doing). What o'clock is it? It has just
struck 9 o'clock. The king had just arrived when the can-
nonade began. A priest must be adorned with all (the) virtues.
I have nothing to do. Do give me something to do! I had
still to write three letters when the servant told me that the
post had already gone. After having read the novel, I forgot
to send it to my sister. After having shut the door, he for-
got to take the key out. Does the child begin to speak?
Who teaches him singing? When he began to sing, they
started laughing. He began by calling the footman a thief.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
850 Lesson 21.
and finished by giving him a box on the ear. As he is an
impostor, he will be punished. He has been punished for
haying been an impostor.
Beading Exercise.
Lope Félix de Vega Carpió,
Hijo de ana familia de conocida nobleza, nació en Madrid
en 1562. Anunciáronse ya en su más tierna infancia sus agi-
gantadas disposiciones. Poeta desde la cuna, con una facili-
dad extraordinaria componía versos, cuando aquellos á quienes
la naturaleza trat-ó menos pródigamente, empiezan á articular
palabras. Á los doce años había estudiado las Humanidades.
Habiendo perdido á sus padres en tan tierna edad, se habrían
acaso malogrado los talentos de este monstruo de la natura-
leza, como le llama Cervantes, si en su orfandad no hubiera
encontrado un apoyo en D. Gerónimo Manrique, obispo de
Ávila, que le recibió en clase de familiar suyo. Estudió la
filosofía en Alcalá, vino después á Madrid y sirvió de Secre-
tario, al Duque de Alba. Casóse con D*^ Isabel de Urbina, y
por un lance de honor en que hirió gravemente á su adver-
sario, tuvo que andar por algunos años desterrado. A su re-
greso perdió á su esposa, y parte obligado por la necesidad,
y parte aburrido por las desgracias, tomó servicio en la aciaga
espedición naval de Felipe II contra Inglaterra, cuando nuestra
Invencible quedó vencida. Disgustado sin duda de esta carrera,
volvió de nuevo á su patria, y casóse segunda vez ; pero habiendo
también perdido á su esposa, abrazó el estado eclesiástico. La
consideración que le dio esta nueva situación, y el sosiego de
que la acompañaba, contribuyeron mucho á multiplicar sus
obras y extender sus relaciones y celebridad. Llegó ésta á
tal término que el Papa Urbana VIII, nada amigo de Fe-
lipe IV ni de España, y mas apasionado del jesuíta Santa-
relia que de Homero ni Virgilio, le escribió de su puño con-
firiéndole el título de Doctor en teología y el hábito de
S. Juan, y nombrándole Fiscal de la Cámara Apostólica. Col-
mado de honores, lleno de aplausos, y en el seno de la abun-
dancia vivió Lope de Vega hasta que, en 1635, terminó sus
días de edad de setenta y tres años, recibiendo un suntuoso
entierro por dirección y á costa de su testamentario el Duque
de Sesa.
[P. Mendibil y M. Silvela. — «Biblioteca Selecta Española.'»]
Conversación.
¿De quién era hijo Lope de Vega?
¿Dónde y cuando nació?
¿Demostró pronto sus disposiciones? Dése una prueba.
¿Cómo le llama Cervantes?
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Infinitive. 351
¿Quién le protegió? ¿Cómo?
¿Dónde estudió Lope de Vega?
¿Cuántas veces se casó? ¿Con quién la primera vez?
¿Por qué estuvo desterrado?
¿Qué hizo después de haber perdido ásu primera esposa?
¿Y qué después de perder á la segunda?
Consecuencias de su nuevo estado.
Prueba de su celebridad.
¿Cómo murió, y cuándo?
Twenty-second Lesson.
The iDflnitive. (Conclusion.)
in. The Infinitive taking the place of an acces-
sory sentence.
As the Infinitive specifies neither person nor number,
it is peculiarly suited for the forming of such contrac-
ted accessory sentences where the references to person
and number are so evident as not to need to be ex-
pressed. These contracted sentences are introduced:
1. When both the principal and the accessory sent-
ence have the same subject (the same as in French), as:
Figurábase ver á Enrique ya en el trono.
Lit. He fancied he saw Henry already on the throne.
(Without contraction: He fancied that he saw etc.)
2. When the subject of the subordinate clause
stands in the principal sentence as a dative or accu-
sative case:
Castigué al niño, por hctberme dicho una mentira.
I punished the child for having told me a falsehood.
( Without contracton : I punished the child because it had
told me, etc.)
Here the subject of the subordinate clause (it) occurs as
an accusative (the child) (in Spanish al niño) in the principal
sentence.
N.B,—MiQY the verb decir, to say, to tell, the direct
form is used, just as in English; thus:
Bice que ha visto á tu primeo en el teatro (and not
haber visto, etc.).
He says he has seen your cousin at the theatre.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
852 Lesson 22.
Remark, — It must be well understood that the con-
traction of a subordinate sentence by means of the Infinitive
is not imperative; and that the speaker wishing to lay a
greater stress on the accessory idea may do so by employing
the direct form. Thus the phrase: He did not know whom
to apply to, may be translated:
No supo á quién volverse,
or, in a direct form:
No supo á quién debía volverse.
He did not know to whom he should apply.
3. When the subordinate sentence is practically
but the Subject of the principal one — i.e.:
Es notorio ser este hombre tm picaro.
This man is known to be a rogue.
(A misconception cannot arise in such a case, because
the contracted subordinate clause has its own subject: este
hombre.)
4. With other subordinate sentences the contracted
form is also possible, even when the subject of the
accessory sentence stands only indirectly in the prin-
cipal one ; but not if any misconception could arise. Ex. :
Su misantropía proviene de no haber tenido nunca un
verdadero amigo.
His misanthropy is caused by his never having had a
true friend.
Here the subject of the principal sentence *'misan-
thropy," could not possibly be considered as the subject
of the contracted accessory sentence.
If, however, a misconception could arise, the sub-
ject of the subordinate sentence ought to be added to
the Infinitive, as in 2 (see above); thus:
Antes de salir yo, llegó mi amigo.
Before I went out, my friend arrived.
{Antes de salir llegó mi amigo, before going out, my
friend arrived, would suggest that it was the friend who
went out.)
^.^.— After antes (before), and después (after) the In-
finitive should be preceded by de, as:
Después de haber pesado bien las razones ....
After having well weighed the reasons ....
Antes de hacer algo, hay que pensarlo bien.
Before doing anything, one must think it over.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Infinitive. 353
Tradnccién. 23.
(The subordinate sentences are to be rendered by the Infinitive.)
1. I gave (have given) the gardener a tip, because he
has taken my letter to the post. I do not know how I shaU
get rid of this tedious company (how to get , . .) My poor
friend, you never know how to spend your time! I know my
brother too (muy) well, to think he could have done such a
tbing. Did you not tell me yesterday, that your cousin (f,)
bad gone to England? I have told you that you must be
quiet. The footman affirmed that he had not seen his master
(all day long) the whole day. You will do well if you (en)
do not send him more money than he wants for his journey.
It is well known (admitido) that Cervantes and Calderón art
tbe greatest Spanish writers {or: C. and C. are known to
"be . . . .). When I arrived in Paris, I did not know which
of my relations / should go to see first. Bring me some-
thing to drink! Is there anything to be seen in this church?
Before I have received his letter, I cannot go away. Before
mj uncle has arrived, I cannot start.
2. After having arrived, we visited the cathedral, the
museum, and the public gardens of the town. As (por) the
rain was so heavy, my friend lent me his umbrella. By (con)
always doing our duty, we gain the esteem of people. If (á)
you take (tomar) this way, you will attain your end. If (á)
one hears him, he knows everything better than other people.
If (á) I had not seen it with my own eyes, I should not
believe it. It is not enough that he (sobre) does not work,
he also wants to be paid better than the others. If (para)
one wishes to attain one's end, one must carefully examine
every circumstance. After having teased me long, he finally
desisted from his request. It is enough for me that I know
it. Before the physician arrived, the patient had died. You
have offended me too much* for me to (para) forgive you.
Beading Exercise.
Retrato del Duque de Wellington.
Representaba Wellington cuarenta y cinco años, y esta
era su edad, la misma exactamente que Napoleón, pues am-
bos nacieron en 1769, el uno en mayo, y el otro en agosto.
El sol de la India y el de España habían alterado la blancura
de su color sajón. Era la nariz, cómo antes he dicho, larga
y un poco bermellonada ; la frente, resguardada de los rayos
del sol por el sombrero, conservaba su blancura y era her-
* Too much with that following is simply translated muy
or mucho.
Spanish Conv. -Grammar. 28
Digitized by vaOOQlC
854 Lesson 23.
mosa 7 serena como la de ana estatua griega, revelando nn
pensamiento sin agitación y sin fiebre, ana imaginación en-
cadenada 7 gran facaltad de ponderación y cálcalo. Ador-
naba sa cabeza un mechón de pelo ó tup^ que no usaban
ciertamente las estatuas griegas, pero que no cala mal, sir-
viendo de vértice á una mollera inglesa. Los grandes ojos
azules del general miraban con frialdad, posándose vagamente
sobre el objeto observado, y observaban sin aparente interés.
Era la voz sonora, acompasada, medida, sin cambiar de tono,
exacerbaciones, ni acentos duros, y el conjunto de su modo
de expresarse, reunidos el gesto, la voz y los ojos, producía
grata impresión de respeto y cariño.
[B. Pérez Galdós.— «Xa Batalla de los Arapile8.y>]
Conversación.
¿Qué edad tenia Wellington? ¿La representaba?
¿Había mncba diferencia de edad entre él y Napoleón?
¿Por qué?
¿Cuál es en general el color de la raza sajona? ¿Lo
era el de Wellington? ¿Por qué no?
Describase la fisonomía de Wellington.
Descríbase su modo de mirar y de hablar.
¿Cuál era el resultado de este conjunto?
Twenty-third Lesson.
The Gerand.
§ 1. This invariable form either replaces an acces-
sory sentence introduced by one of the conjunctions
hecaicse, as^ whilst, if, etc., or corresponds exactly to the
English present participle*. It commonly refers to the
subject of the principal sentence^ and expresses an action
simultaneous ,with that of the principal sentence. At
the same time it loses nothing of its verbal character
and may, therefore, govern an object If we consider
the following sentence:
Los cabreros, tendiendo por él suelo unas pieles de
ovejas, aderezaron su rústica cena,
The goat-herds, spreading on the ground some sheep-
skins, prepai*ed their simple supper.
• Or, rather, to the English gerund, commonly misnamed
"Present participle," bacause it has the same form.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Gerund. 355
we observe:
1. that the gerundio tendiendo (spreading) refers
to the subject, los cabreros (the goat-herds);
2. that the action expressed by tendiendo is simul-
taneous with that which the principal sentence, Los
cabreros aderejsaron su rústica cena, imports;
3. that the gerundio has retained its verbal character,
and thus governs its own object, unas pieles (some
sheep-skins).
It must be distinctly understood that the Spanish
Gerund cannot take the place of the English present
participle if this latter be* employed as an equivalent
for an adjective, as in the sentence:
He sent four parcels containing 20 pieces of cloth.
It is true that Spaniards likewise often say:
Envió cuatro fardos conteniendo veinte piezas de paño,
exactly as in English, but this mode of speaking is in-
correct and must be considered a Gallicism, The re-
lative que should be used instead:
Envió cuatro fardos que contenían ....
§ 2. Where no misconception can possibly arise,
the Spanish Gerund may quite as well refer to the
accusative case**, especially if this accusative is a per-
sonal pronoun and not a substantive. Thus :
Le hallaron durmiendo, they found him sleeping.
Here * 'sleeping" can by no means refer to the subject
"they," but only to "him," i.e., the accusative case, and thus
any misconception is impossible.
§ 3. If the Spanish Gerund is used instead of an
accessory sentence whose subject is a substantive, this
substantive should be added to the gerundio, as:
Faltándoles los víveres, los sitiados se rindieron á
discreción.
As provisions were wanting, the besieged surrendered
unconditionally.
(Here the subordinate clause: as provisions, etc., has its
own subject, which is therefore added to the gerundio.)
* No gerund, but a participle.
** The Spanish Gerund often does refer to the accusative in
Spanish, whilst in Italian such constructions (see our Italian
28*
Digitized by vaOOQlC
856 Lesson 23.
§ 4. If the Gerund refers to the subject (nomina-
tive) y it takes its place before the verb; when referring
to the accusative^ it follows the verb, as:
SaUendo me dijo.
Going out, he told me (saliendo refers to the nomina-
tive él [he], suppressed in dijo).
Whereas:
Le oigo hdblando con un hombre desconocido.
I hear him speaking with an unknown man (hablando
refers to the accusative le [him]).
Note.— In the latter case, however (i.e., where the Gerund
refers to the accusative case), the Infinitive is preferred, pro-
vided no peculiar stress be laid on the duration of the action
(see 8).
§ 5. Commonly the Spanish Gerund is used in-
stead of the Infinitive with verbs of ''seeing" "hearing"
''feeling," etc. But it cannot be used with these verbs
if the verb of the principal sentence is in a past tensCy
or if the accusative is a substantive (see § 2). Thus:
La VÍ* escribir (and not la vi escribiendo).
I saw her writing (Vi is a past tense).
Oigo habUir á mi hermano (and not oigo hablando á....).
I hear my brother speaking. (The accus. my brother is
a substantive.)
§ 6. Sometimes the Infinitive conveys another
meaning than the Gerund: the former being passive
(and therefore never taking an object) , the latter active
(sometimes, with an object). Thus:
Le vi dibujando (una cosa).
I saw him drawing (something).
Le vi dUyujar, I saw him as he was drawing.
§ 7. The English Participles (both Present and
Past) are often preceded by 9i preposition^ as: On seeing
him; whilst reflecting; after having said; when bom, etc.
In Spanish en precedes the Gerund if it is to be meant
Grammar y 5th edit. : On the Gerund) are carefully avoided, being
now quite obsolete. — In English the present participle frequently
refers to the accusative, as in the above sentence: They found
him sleeping.
"^ If the áuration is to be emphasized with a past tense, the
corresponding tense of estar is coupled with the gerundio of the
prvncvpal verb (see 8).
Digitized by VaOOQlC
The Gerund. 357
that the action imported by the principal sentence is sub-
sequent to, and closely connected with the action expressed
by the Gerund, otherwise, al with the Infinitive is
employed. Ex. :
En Uegando^ le veré.
As soon as I arrive, I shall see him.
Lo primero que en naciendo* hacemos^ es llorar.
The first thing we do, on being born, is to cry.
Al verlCy le abrazó, on seeing him, he embraced him.
^.^.— In no case, but the above, is a Spanish preposition
used with the Oernnd:
JPracticándolo, el lector lo aprenderá.
By practising it, the reader will learn it.
§ 8. In order to express duration, the verbs andar,
estar, ir, ser, and venir are joined to the Gerund; if
the continuation of the action is to be emphasized,
caminar, continuar, and seguir are used in the same
way. Ex. :
Le aconsejaba redoblase su ternura para ir dispo^
fiiendo el corazón de Blanca,
He advised him to redouble his tenderness, in order to
soften Blanca's heart.
La grave enfermedad que le iba consumiendo.
The severe illness by which he was consumed (which
was consuming him).
Los grandes del reino están aguardando vuestras
órdenes,
The grandees of the kingdom are awaiting your orders.
8e va haciendo tarde, it is growing late.
El ave vino volando, the bird flew hither.
Siguieron durmiendo.
They slept on (they continued sleeping).
Poco á poco fué Tiaciéndose rico.
Little by little he became rich.
§ 9. A pecuharity of the Spanish Gerund is that
it receives — in a very few cases — the masculine dimi-
nutive ending, as: corriendito, callandito. These Ge-
** In Italian the gerundio with in only occurs in ancient
writers. Thus:
Se Vardor fallace.
Duró molfanni in aspettando un giorno. (Petrarca, Son. 21.)
Digitized by VjOOQIC
358 Lesson 28.
mnds have lost their signification as verbs and are
simply adverbs.
Note the following:
Hágalo F. volando, do it this very moment
Vuelva F. corriendo, come back at once.
Callandito, que hay enfermos.
Keep (or come in) very quietly, somebody is ill here.
Matarlas caUando, to do things on the quiet
¿Cómo sigue F? — Pasando.
How are you getting on y — Middling.
Bemark. — In modern Spanish, the Gerund, which by its
nature can only express a time preceding to, or simultaneous
with, the time of the principal sentence, is also sometimes
erroneously employed in such cases where the action denoted
by the Gerund must be logically considered as following that
implied by the principal sentence. If we analyse the sentence:
Las tropas se hicieron fuertes en tm c&nvento, teniendo
pronto que rendirse, después de una vigorosa rcsís-
tencia ....
The troops entrenched themselves in a convent, beifi^
soon obliged to surrender, after a vigorous resist-
ance ....
it may be easily seen that the action of "entrenching
themselves" must be previous to the action of "surrendering."
The gerund teniendo qus is therefore incorrect. A logical
construction of the sentence would be:
Las tropas, qus se habían hecho fuertes en un con'
vento, tuvieron pronto que rendirse, después de
una vigorosa resistencia.
Tradnccién. 24.
1. Handing me the letter, he requested me to read it and
send it at once (adverbial gerund) to you. Whilst uttering
these words, she began to sob. I found him smoking his cigar.
Alfonso XII. died after having said these significant words:
''What a responsibility r These people spend their nights
(in) gambling. Whilst we were (estar) talking, we heard an
alarm of fire. By always speaking the truth, we obey the
voice of our conscience. If you study (ger.) with zeal, you
will soon make great progress in anything. As he entered
(infin.), he told me to shut the window. I saw him talking
to your aunt. This is your father's portrait; I saw him
sitting for it. Yesterday the painter was in this drawing-
Digitized by vaOOQlC
The Gerund. 359
room; I saw him painting. Yesterday I heard the new singer
singing. Whilst (mientras) I listened to the singer (f.)
[tr. Whilst I heard (with estar) the singer singing], the foot-
man entered (in) the room.
2. This man is a sluggard; in order to avoid working
[tr. for (para) not working (infin.)'], he will (tr. ir) sell (ger7)
all (ciumio) he possesses. The agent is (tr. andar) running
about the town all day long. By following his advice, I have
sustained a great loss. On leaving the room, he went out
(use irse); I saw him shutting (¿nf.) the door. After having
read the letter to the end (tr. acabar, preposit. gerund), he
gave it back, saying: **As soon as I get (tr. llegar) to the
office, I will see to (tr. ocuparse de) this business." -á^ the
singer (m,) is ill to-day, the opera cannot be performed.
Speaking thus to me (tr. al with infin.), he gave me his (the)
hand. I looked everywhere (ir with ger.) for my hat, but I
could not find it. I have been (fr. estar) waiting for yon
three hours, but you did not come. What are you doing
there (tr. estar)? I am waiting for my master. It kept on
raining the whole (seguir with gerund) night. The heat is
increasing (ir with ger.) from hour to hour. Let us go; it
is growing (tr. irse haciendo) night. Do it this very moment
(gerund) and come back at once (gerund). How is the
invalid? Middling (gerund); come in quietly (gerund) , he is
asleep (gerund) now.
Beading Exercise.
Facia,
No era antipática, ciertamente, la cara de aquella sir-
viente, y hasta se hallaban en ella vestigios de haber sido
hermosa en su juventud. Respondía con agrado á las pre-
guntas que me arriesgué á hacerla, por hablar de algo y
alegrar un poco el tedioso colorido de mis ideas. Así supe que
se llamaba Facia; que desde muy joven servia en casa de mi
tío, y que en ella pensaba morir, si esa era la voluntad de
su amo, á quien quería y respetaba como á padre y señor, y
aun con eso no le pagaba bastante los grandes beneficios que
le debía. El y su señora la habían recogido huérfana y des-
amparada, dándola desde entonces buena enseñanza y poco
trabajo, pan abundante, y lo que vale más que eso, cariño y
sombra. Todo esto me lo iba declarando como á la descui-
dada, en períodos cortados y sin mirarme á la cara, pero
reflejando en la suya cierta expresión de dulzura melancólica
que la hacía muy interesante, mientras se movía lentamente
de acá para allá, poniendo aquí un plato después de pasarle
con un lienzo blanquísimo, y allí un vaso ó tenedor.
[José M.a de Pereda. — «Peñas Arriba.»]
Digitized by VaOOQlC
860 Lesson 24.
CoüTersación.
¿Qué era Facia, y cómo era su cara?
¿Había sido hermosa? ¿Cómo se conocía?
¿Por qué la habló?
¿Qué supo?
¿Cómo ñié declarando todo aquello Facia?
¿Qué hacía Facia entretanto?
Twenty-fourth Lesson.
Past Participle,
In Lesson 11, Part I., we have already treated the
Present as well as the Past Participle. We now add
a few remarks as to the use of the latter.
§ 1. As stated in Lesson 9, Part L, the past parti-
ciple coupled with haber is always invariable'^, as:
He visto una hermosa comedia,
1 have seen a fine comedy.
Les he referido el suceso y no me lo han creído,
I have informed them of the event, and they have
not believed me.
Las cerezas que he comprado son buenas.
The cherries which I have bought are good.
§ 2. On the contrary, joined to ser or estar, or to
one of the auxiliaries dejar, llevar, quedar (see Part II,
Lesson 17), it becomes an adjective, and must therefore
agree with the substantive in gender and number, as:
La casa fué edificada en 1901,
The house was built in 1901.
La carta está acabada^ the letter is finished.
Los asesinos fueron muertos.
The murderers were killed.
Yo quedé muy agradecida á sus beneficios,
I (f,) was very thankful for his kindness.
* In ancient Spanish, however, examples are met with where
the past participle, coupled with haber, agrees with its foregoing
object, as in French and Italian. Thus:
Ayquellas (= aquellas) lees (= leyes) que habernos (= hemos)
fechas (= hechas).
These laws which we have made.
(Partidas del rey D, Alfonso X.)
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Past Participle. 361
§ 3. If the participle is coupled with tener instead
of haber, it hkewise agrees in gender and number with
its object, as:
Tengo leida la carta.
I have already read the letter.
Tengo comprados algunos libros,
I have bought some books.
§ 4. Tener may be used with a participle that
governs no accusative; in which case the participle is
invariable, as:
Les tengo escrito largamente sobre esta materia,
I have written them in fall about this matter.
Note, — The student should be well aware, that in such
a case tener may only be used with verbs that are not ge-
nerally neuter, but which are only used as such, so that the
direct object of the verb is understood from the context. In
the above sentence, the direct object of tengo escrito would be
lo que era menester, that which was necessary, or lo que con-
venía, or something similar. As this object is not a word,
but a subordinate sentence, the participle cannot, of course,
agree with it. The whole sentence would be properly:
Les tengo escrito largamente sobre esta materia lo que
era menester.
Neuter verbs do not admit of the construction with tener,
as such verbs can never govern a direct object. Thus it
would be utterly impossible to say: Tengo sido cónsul en
Hamburgo, I have been Consul at Hamburg, or tenían en-
fermado de la epidemia reinante, they were taken ill with
the prevailing epidemic; the only correct rendering of which
would be: He sido cónsul, etc., and habían enfermado.
Note, — Nor is the construction with tener admissible with
reflective verbs. Thus we may say: Les tiene instruidos, he
has instructed them, but never: Él se tiene instruido, he has
instructed himself. The sentence may only be: Él se ha
instruido.
§ 5. Very often the participle replaces an accessory
sentence (the Latin Ablativus absolutus). In such a case
the participle agrees in gender and number with the
word to which it refers, and the auxiliary is omitted,
bnt the participle mnst always precede. Ex.:
Becobrados* los espíritus, volvió Blanca en si.
After having recovered her senses, Blanca came again
to herself.
* Properly: habiendo recobrado^ etc.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
862 Lesson 24.
Abracada esta idea, quedó un poco más tranquilo.
After having taken this resolution, he became a little
more tranquil.
§ 6. Very often these participles are preceded by
después de ... . (less frequently by antes de, before and
luego de, as soon as), for the sake of greater emphasis, as:
La hija de aquel Manfredo, á quien después de ven-
cido y muerto el padre, había tratado con una
barbarie sin ejemplo ....
The daughter of that Manfred whom, after having con-
quered and killed her father, he had treated with a
barbarity without example ....
Antes de dada la arden, before the order was given.
iMcgo de acabada la misa, as soon as mass was over.
Again, the personal pronoun in the nominative case
sometimes occurs with such participles, though, in the
modem language, it must follow the participle, as:
Después de yo muerta (i.e., de muerta yo).
(Santa Teresa.)
When I shall be dead.
§ 7. Constructions like: Tomado que fuese uno de
ellos (i.e., castillos, as soon as one of them would have
been taken) have been explained in LfCsson 14, Part 11.
("On the Subordinate Conjunctions"). It must be dist-
inctly understood, that this is not an instance of an
absolute participle, like those mentioned under 5, but
simply of an inversion, where que is used instead of a
compound conjunction. The ordinary construction of
the above sentence would be:
lAiego que uno de ellos fuese tomado etc.
Finally, we add now a further list of the participles
mentioned on p. 191, Parti, which, besides their j^assive form,
have an active signification, and are therefore adjectives most
frequently used with ser\
Acomodado, comfortable and well-to-do.
atrevido, dared » bold.
avisado, advised » cautious.
callado, (having) been silent » taciturn.
cansado, fatigued, tired » tiresome.
cenado, supped » having supped.
comido, eaten » having eaten.
comedido, measured » prudent.
desarreglado, disarranged » careless.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Past Participle.
363
desconfiado, mistrasted
desesperadOy despaired
determinadOy resolved
disimulado, concealed
distinguido, distinguished
entendido, understood
esforzado, encouraged
fingido, feigned
(bien) hablado, spoken
leido, read
medido, measured
mirado, looked
moderado, moderated
necesitado, needed
ocasionado, caused
ordenado, ordered
osado, dared
parado, arrested
parecido, seemed
pausado, paused
pesado, weighed
porfiado, persisted, quarrelled
precavido, taken care or heeded
preciado, appreciated
presumiclo, presumed
recatado, concealed
sabido, known
sacudido, hit, hurt, etc.
sentido, felt
sufrido, suffered
válido, esteemed
versado, versed
and mistrustful (person).
» desperate.
» very resolute.
» malignant.
» distinguished (person).
» intelligent.
» bold.
» fallacious.
» eloquent.
» learned, well-read.
» cautious.
» circumspect.
» moderate, temperate.
» a poor, indigent person.
» causing . . .
» methodical person.
» daring, dauntless.
» slow, lazy.
» similar, seeming.
» deliberate.
» tiresome, a bore.
» stubborn.
» cautious.
» vain, affected.
» . presuming, haughty.
» chaste, modest, cautious.
» intelligent, prudent.
» harsh, audacious.
» sensible.
» hardy.
» beloved, favourite.
» very conversant.
N.B.—Wiih ancient authors, and even now sometimes in
poetry, some verbal adjectives derived from intransitive verbs,
like nacido, born; muerto, died, dead; ido, gone; venido, come;
vuelto, come back, returned; llegado, arrived, occur with the
auxiliary ser. The difference is exactly as in English. Ex.:
Son idos, they are gone; han ido, they have gone.
Es vuelto, he is returned (a good while); ha vuelto, he
has returned.
JEs musrto, he is dead; ha muerto, he has died.
Son llegados, they are arrived; han llegado, they have
arrived.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
864 Lesson 24..
Further Remarks on the use of the Past Participle.
1. Some denoting state, condition, eaunot be used
with estar, but are replaced by the corresponding
a^ectiye:
8e ha alegrado, but está alegre, he is pleased.
se ha calentado, » está caliente, he is hot, warm.
ha enfriado (el dio), » esta frió, it is cold.
se ha entristecido, » está triste, he is sad.
ha enviudado, » está muda (viudo), she (he) is a
widow(er).
And such others as flaco (thin), gord4} (fat),
mudo (dumb), pobre (poor), rico (rich), seco (dry),
sordo (deaf), sucio (dirty), turbio (stirred), húmeda
(damp), and libre (free), the corresponding participles
of which are enflaquecido, engordado, enmudecido, em-
pobrecido, enriquecido, ensordecido, ensuciado, enturbiado,
humedecido, and librado.
2. Some others susceptible of an active meaning
(see Lists pages 191, 362), and therefore used with ser,
may also be used trith estar when referring to a
pecuhar case, moment, or circumstance — i.e.:
Au/nque es timido, ha estado muy osado hoy.
Although timid, he has behaved very daringly to-day.
/ Qué presumida estaba porque todos la miraban en d
baile !
How haughtily she behaved, because all were looking at
her at the dance.
3. Ser and estar are never followed by their
own participles, which are used with haber; thus:
He sido acusado injustamente.
I am accused unjustly.
El niño no viene porque está castigado (or ha sido
castigado).
The child does not come, because he is being punished.
4. Verbs with two past participles have one of
them irregular, in a contracted form, with the force of
an adjective (sometimes with a meaning different to that
of the regular participle), and used with estar; such
are, among others:
Absorber, absorbido, absorbed; absorto, astonished.
bendecir, bendecido, blessed ; bendito, blessed, holy.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Past Participle.
365
completar,
completado,comp\etedí ;
completo, complete.
confundiVj
confundido, confound-
ed;
contentado, pleased;
confuso, confused.
contentar,
contento, happy.
desnudar,
desnudado, undressed;
desnudo, naked.
despertar,
despertado, awaken;
despierto, awake.
expedir.
expedido, sent; des-
expedito, free, cleared
patched ;
(of roads).
fijar,
fijado, fixed;
jftjo, fixed, immovable.
juntar,
juntado, joined;
junto(s), together.
limpiar,
limpiado, cleaned;
limpio, clean, neat.
llenar.
llenado, filled;
Ueno, full.
maldecir.
maldecido, cursed;
maldito, cursed.
matar,
matado, killed;
m>uerto, dead.
prender.
prendido, caught;
fastened;
preso, (put) in prison.
5. The contracted forms of the following — among
others —
are used as:
(a) Adjectives that do not join estar:
Abstraer,
abstraido, abstracted;
absorbed ;
abstrcicto, abstract.
concretar.
concretado, concreted
concreto, special (as
(not abstracted);
of a case).
expresar,
expresado, manifested;
eocpreso, express.
extender,
extendido, prolonged;
eoctenso, large.
(b) Substantives:
Extraer,
extraído, extracted;
un extracto, an ab-
stract.
favorecer.
favorecido, favoured;
el favorito, the fa-
vourite.
impeler,
impelido, impelled;
el impulso, the im-
pulse.
permitir.
permitido, permitted;
el permiso, the con-
sent.
(c) Participles, or in adverbial phrases:
Exceptuar,
exceptuado, excluded;
excepto hoy, but to-
day.
improvisar,
improvisado, impro-
de im,proviso, sud-
vised ;
denly.
salvar,
salvado, saved;
salvo mañana, but to-
morrow.
ver.
visto, seen;
por lo visto, un-
doubtedly.
Digitized
by Google
866 Lesson 24.
Tradnceión. 25.
1. Have you read the letter (which) my sister wrote
(has written) to me? No, I have not yet read it. The apples
which the (maid-) servant has bought are finer than those
which you have bought. Is the new church already conse-
crated? No, it will be consecrated next Sunday. At these
words he became (tr. quedar) very sad. The enemies were
pursued to the very ramparts of the fortress. Have you read
the book which I (have) sent you by the footman? No, I
have bought several new novels which I shall read before I
begin (if^.) reading your book. He has spoken much with
my father about the matter, but I do not know what he has
resolved. After supper was (part,) over, we all went home.
After the king had died (part,), his son ascended the throne.
When I ivas informed of this accident, I at once departed
for Paris. After (después de . , , ,) having satisfied his curio-
sity, he repented of what he had done.
2. The town having been conquered, the daring defenders
were put in prison. Though we are forsaken by all onr
fiiends, we shall nevertheless do our duty. Tormented by
remorse, the criminal at last confessed his guilt. It is diffi-
cult to reconcile people oflFended (hurt) in their vanity. Ill-
bred children are the hardest punishment of their parents.
After (the) peace had been re-established, the troops returned
to their homes. Scarcely had the word been spoken when
the whole assembly broke forth into an enormous uproar.
Have you spoken to the judge? I spoke (have spoken) to
him to-day, but he gave me little hope for the prisoner.
After having paid the bill, I told the waiter to send my trunk
to the station. After these preparations had been made, we
went to (meet) the company.
3. He has been very pleased, but she is not pleased. Is
it true that she has become a widow? Yes, she is a widow.
Come near the fire, the day has turned cooler. No, thanks;
I got warm walking, and I am warm now. How thin she
has becomel She is thin, because she does not eat. Do you
not think she is very timid? Timid? She has behaved very
daringly on many occasions. I have been told that they have
caught the murderer. Yes, he is in prison; but the man is
not dead. Oh! I thought he had killed him. I am speaking
of a special case, but undoubtedly (partic. used adverbially)
you do not understand me.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Past Participle. 36í7
Reading Exercise.
Cartas de mi Sobrino,
22 de Marzo.
Querido tío y venerado maestro: Hace cuatro días que
llegué con toda felicidad á este lugar de mi nacimiento, donde
he hallado bien de salud á mi padre, al sefíor vicario j á los
amigos j parientes. El contento de verlos y de hablar con
ellos, después de tantos afíos de ausencia, me ha embargado
el ánimo y me ha robado el tiempo, de suerte que hasta ahora
no he podido escribir á usted.
Usted me lo perdonará.
Como salí de aquí tan niño y he vuelto hecho un hombre,
es singular la impresión que me causan todos estos objetos
que guardaba en la memoria. Todo me parece más chico,
mucho más chico, pero también más bonito que el recuerdo
que tenia. La casa de mi padre, que en mi imaginación era
inmensa, es sin duda una gran casa de un rico labrador, pero
más pequeña que el Seminario. Lo que ahora comprendo y
estimo mejor es el campo de por aquí. Las huertas, sobre
todo, son deliciosas. ¡Qué sendas tan lindas hay entre ellas I
A un lado, y tal vez á ambos, corre el agua cristalina con
grato marmullo. Las orillas de las acequias están cubiertas
de hierbas olorosas y de flores de mil clases. En un instante
puede uno coger un ramo de violetas.
[J. Valera.— «Pcpiía Jimenez.:»]
Conversación.
¿Qué fecha tiene la carta?
¿Á quién la escribe?
¿Cuánto tiempo hace que llegó?
¿Qué le ha embargado el ánimo y le ha robado el
tiempo?
¿Cuál es la razón de sus singulares impresiones?
¿Qué le parece todo? Cítese un ejemplo.
¿Qué es lo que comprende y estima mejor?
¿Describase el campo?
Digitized by VjOOQIC
868
Poesías.
Oda moral.
¡Qué descansada vida
la del que huye el mundanal ruido,
j sigue la escondida
senda por donde han ido
los pocos sabios que en el mundo han sido!
Que no le enturbia el pecho
de los soberbios grandes el estado,
ni del dorado techo
se admira, fabricado
del sabio moro, en jaspes sustentado.
No cura si la fama
canta con voz su nombre pregonera,
ni cura si encarama
la lengua lisonjera
lo que condena la verdad sincera.
¿Qué presta á mi contento
si soy del vano dedo señalado?
si en busca de este viento
ando desalentado,
con ansias vivas, con mortal cuidado?
I Oh monte, oh fuente, oh río,
oh secreto seguro, deleitoso!
roto casi el navio,
á vuestro almo reposo
huyo de aqueste mar tempestuoso.
Un no rompido sueño,
un día puro, alegre, libre quiero;
no quiero ver el ceño
vanamente severo
de á quien la sangre ensalza ó el dinero.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Poesías. ^G9
Despiértenme las aves
<K>n su cantar sabroso no aprendido;
no los cuidados graves,
de que es siempre seguido
el que al ajeno arbitrio está atenido.
Vivir quiero conmigo,
gozar quiero del bien que debo al cielo,
á solas, sin testigo,
libre de amor, de ceJo,
de odio, de esperanzas, de recelo.
Del monte en la ladera
por mi mano plantado tengo un huerto,
que con la primavera
de bella flor cubierto,
ja muestra en esperanza el fruto cierto.
Y como codiciosa,
por ver y acrecentar su hermosura,
desde la cumbre airosa
una fontana pura
hasta llegar corriendo se apresura. '
Y luego, sosegada,
el paso entre los árboles torciendo,
el suelo de pasada
de verdura vistiendo,
j con diversas flores va esparciendo.
El aire el huerto orea,
j ofrece mil olores al sentido,
los árboles menea
eon un manso ruido,
que del oro y del cetro pone olvido.
Ténganse su tesoro
los que de un falso lefio se confían;
no es mío ver el lloro
de los que desconfían
<;uando el cierzo y el ábrego porfían.
La combatida antena
■cruje, y en ciega noche el claro día
se torna, al cielo suena
-confusa vocería,
y la mar enriquecen á porfía.
Á mí una pobrecilla
mesa, de amable paz bien abastada,
me basta, y la vajilla
Spanish Con v. -Grammar. 24
Digitized
by Google
870 Poesías.
de fino oro labrada
sea de quien la mar no teme airada.
Y mientras miserable-
mente se están los otros abrasando
con sed insaciable
del peligroso mando,
tendido yo á la sombra esté cantando.
k la sombra tendido,
de hiedra y lauro eterno coronado,
puesto el atento oído
al son dulce, acordado,
del plectro sabiamente meneado.
[Fr. Luis de León}
Epístola Moral.
Fabio, las esperanzas cortesanas
prisiones son do el ambicioso muere,
y donde al más astuto nacen canas;
y el que no las limare ó las rompiere,
ni el nombre de varón ha merecido,
ni subir al honor que pretendiere.
El ánimo plebeyo y abatido
elija en sus intentos temeroso,
primero estar suspenso que caído:
Que el corazón entero y generoso
al caso adverso inclinará la frente,
antes que la rodilla al poderoso.
Más triunfos, más coronas dio al prudente,,
que supo retirarse, la fortuna,
que al que esperó obstinada y locamente.
Esta invasión terrible é importuna
de contrarios sucesos nos espera
desde el primer sollozo de la cuna.
Dejémosla pasar, como á la fiera
corriente del gran Bétis, cuando airado
dilata hasta los montes su ribera.
Aquel entre los héroes es contado
que el premio mereció, no quien le alcanza^
por vanas consecuencias del Estado.
Peculio propio es ya de la privanza,
cuanto de Astrea fué, cuanto regía
con su temida espada y su balanza.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías. 371
El oro, la maldad, la tiranía
del inicuo procede, j pasa al bueno:
¿qué espera la virtud, ó en qué conña?
Vén y reposa en el materno seno
de la antigua Bomúlea, cuyo clima
t-e será más humano y más sereno.
Adonde por lo menos, cuando oprima
nuestro cuerpo la tierra, dirá algnno:
blanda le sea, al derramarla encima:
Donde no dejarás la mesa ayuno
cuando te falte en ella el pece raro,
ó cuando su pavón nos niegue Juno.
Busca, pues, el sosiego dulce y caro,
como en la oscura noche del Egeo
busca el piloto el eminente faro:
Que si acortas y ciñes tu deseo,
dirás, lo que desprecio he conseguido,
' que la opinión vulgar es devaneo.
Más precia el ruiseñor su pobre nido,
de pluma y leves pajas, más sus quejas
en el bosque repuesto y escondido.
Que agradar lisonjero las orejas
de algún príncipe insigne, aprisionado
en el metal de las doradas rejas.
¡Triste de aquel que vive destinado
á esa antigua colonia de los vicios,
augur de los semblantes del privado!
Cese el ansia y la sed de los oficios;
que acepta el don, y burla del intento
el ídolo á quien haces sacrificios.
Iguala con la vida el pensamiento,
y no le pasarás de hoy á mañana,
ni quizá de un momento á otro momento.
Casi no tienes ni una sombra vana
de nuestra antigua Itálica: ¿y esperas?
¡Oh error perpetuo de la suerte humanal
Las enseñas grecianas, las banderas
del senado, y romana monarquía
murieron, y pasaron sus carreras.
24*
Digitized by VjOOQIC
872 Poesías.
¿Qaé es nuestra vida más que un breve día
do apena sale el sol, cuando se pierde
en las tinieblas de la noche fría?
¿Qué es más que el heno, á la mañana verde,
seco á la tarde? ¡Oh ciego desvario!
¿será que de este sueño me recuerde?
¿Será que pueda ver que me desvío
de la vida viviendo, j que está unida
la cauta muerte al simple vivir mío?
Como los ríos en veloz corrida
se llevan á la mar, tal soy llevado
al último suspiro de mi vida.
De la pasada edad ¿qué me ha quedado?
¿O qué tengo yo, á dicha, en la que espero,
sin ninguna noticia de mi hado?
;0h si acabase, viendo como muero,
de aprender á morir, antes que llegue
aquel forzoso término postrero!
¡Antes que aquesta mies inútil siegue
de la severa muerte dura mano,
y á la común materia se la entregue!
Pasáronse las flores del verano,
el otoño pasó son sus racimos,
pasó el invierno con sus nieves cano:
Las hojas que en las altas selvas vimos,
cayeron: ¡y nosotros á porfía
en nuestro engaño inmóviles vivimos!
Temamos al Señor que nos en via
las espigas del año y la hartura,
y la temprana pluvia y la tardía.
No imitemos la tierra siempre dura
á las aguas del cielo y al arado,
ni la vid cuyo fruto no madura.
¿Piensas acaso tú que fué criado
el varón para el rayo de la guerra,
para sulcar el piélago salado,
para medir el orbe de la tierra,
y el cerco donde el sol siempre camina?
¡Oh, quien así lo entiende, cuánto yerra!
Esta nuestra porción, alta y divina,
á mayores acciones es llamada,
y en más nobles objetos se termina.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías. 373
Así aquella, que al hombre sólo es dada,
sacra razón y pura me despierta,
de esplendor y de rayos coronada;
y en la fría región dura y desierta
de aqueste pecho enciende nueva llama,
y la luz vuelve á arder que estaba muerta.
Quiero, Fabio, seguir á quien me llama,
y callado pasar entre la gente,
que no afecto los nombres ni la fama.
El soberbio tirano del Oriente,
que maciza las torres de cien codos
del candido metal, puro y luciente,
apenas puede ya comprar los modos
de pecar; la virtud es más barata,
ella consigo mesma ruega á todos.
Pobre de aquel que corre y se dilata
por cuantos son los climas y los mares,
perseguidor del oro y de la plata.
Un ángulo me basta entre mis lares,
un libro y un amigo, un sueño breve
que no perturben deudas ni pesares.
Esto tan solamente es cuanto debe
naturaleza al parco y al discreto
y algún manjar común, honesto y leve.
No, porque así te escribo, hagas conecto
que pongo la virtud en ejercicio:
que aun esto fué diñcil á Epíteto.
Basta, al que empieza, aborrecer el vicio,
y el ánimo enseñar á ser modesto,
después le será el cielo más propicio.
Despreciar el deleite no es supuesto
de sólida virtud, que aun el vicioso
en sí propio le nota de molesto.
Mas no podrás negarme cuan forzoso
este camino sea al alto asiento,
morada de la paz y del reposo.
No sazona la fruta en un momento
aquella inteligencia, que mensura
la duración de todo á su talento:
Flor la vimos primero hermosa y pura,
luego materia acerba y desabrida,
y perfecta después, dulce y madura.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
874 Poesías.
Tal la humana pmdenoia es bien que mida,
7 dispense j comparta las acciones
que han de ser compafieras de la vida.
No quiera Dios que imite estos varones
que moran nuestras plazas macilentos,
de la yirtud infames histriones:
Esos inmundos trágicos, atentos
al aplauso común, cuyas entrañas
son infaustos y oscuros monumentos.
I Cuan callada que pasa las montañas
el aura respirando mansamente!
¡Qué gárrula y sonante por las cañas!
I Qué muda la virtud por el prudente!
I Qué redundante y llena de ruido
por el vano, ambicioso y aparente!
Quiero imitar al pueblo en el vestido,
en las costumbres sólo á los mejores,
sin presumir de roto y mal ceñido.
No resplandezca el oro y los colores
en nuestro traje, ni tampoco sea
igual al de los dóricos cantores.
Una mediana vida yo posea,
un estilo común y moderado,
que no lo note nadie que lo vea.
En el plebeyo barro mal tostado
hubo ya quien bebió tan ambicioso
como en el vaso múrico preciado:
Y alguno tan ilustre y generoso
que usó, como si fuera plata neta,
del cristal trasparente y luminoso.
¿Sin la templanza viste tú perfeta
alguna cosa? ¡Oh muerte, vén callada
como sueles venir en la saeta!
No en la tonante máquina preñada
de fuego y de rumor; que no es mi puerta
de doblados metales fabricada.
Asi, Fabio, me muestra descubierta
su esencia la virtud, y mi albedrio
con ella se compone y se concierta.
No te burles de ver cuánto confío,
ni al arte de decir vana y pomposa
el ardor atribuyas de este brio.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Poesías. 875
¿Es por ventora menos poderosa
<[ue el vicio la virtud? ¿Es menos fuerte?
no la arguyas de flaca y temerosa.
La codicia en las manos de la suerte
«e arroja al mar: la ira á las espadas,
j la ambición se ríe de la muerte:
¿Y no serán siquiera tan osadas
las opuestas acciones, si las miro
<de más ilustres genios ayudadas?
Ya, dulce amigo, huyo y me retiro
<de cuanto simple amé: rompí los lazos:
vén y verás al alto fin que aspiro,
Antes que el tiempo muera en nuestros brazos.
[Francisco de Biqja.]
El Silencio.
(Armonia nocturna.)
El Llobregat corría
<5on movimiento blando
á mis piás murmurando;
yo no sé qué decía
desde su oscuro lecho,
sólo sé que su voz sonó en mi pecho
<K)n vaga y melancólica armonía.
Aun el beso fugaz siento del aura
que el ánimo restaura,
y el olor de los pinos solitarios
que coronan los montes,
limite de serenos horizontes;
oigo el débil quejido
del pájaro nocturno
en las breñas perdido,
y su sordo aleteo;
y el insecto que zumba;
y aun hoy la luna veo,
cual lámpara colgada ante la tumba
que un ser amado encierra,
bafiando las profundas soledades
del cielo y de la tierra.
Pero no, este silencio no es lo muerte
helada, inmóvil, muda,
la que el alma sin fé sueña y advierte:
Desde la dura piedra
Digitized by VjOOQIC
376 Poesías.
que el musgo cubre y la amorosa hiedra,
basta la pefia colosal desnuda;
la quietud de los campos, y la sombra;
el lucero; la nube
(gracioso y casto velo
tras el cual ceutellea);
el Monserrat, que sube
soberbio escalonándose hasta el cielo,
pilar robusto aquél, y éste corona
de la santa patrona
que al pueblo catalán tiende su manto,
forman todos el canto
sublime del silencio,
con palabras sin voz, de poder tanto
que el alma las entiende,
y, embriagado por ellas,
su movimiento el corazón suspende.
¡Oh noche! I Oh soledad! i Oh gran concierto
que oye sólo el espíritu despierto,
y no el torpe sentido!
á tu conjuro misterioso, vuelve
á ser, y se levanta lo que ha sido;
las dormidas memorias,
los dias y los años,
fantasmas de dolores y de glorias,
de placer, de esperanza y desengaños.
Aquí, el hogar paterno,
templo de la alegría
que iluminaba el sol de medio día,
ó el rayo de la luna;
y en un rincón la cuna,
ayer tranquila nave
que arrulló la niñez de un inocente,
á quien hoy arrebata la corriente
en los revueltos mares de la vida,
por furiosas tormentas combatida.
Allá, la verde alfombra
del valle solitario;
el árbol, fiel amigo
que fruta daba y sombra;
el viejo campanario,
que la oración cantaba
con acento monótono y profundo,
y el tránsito de un alma á mejor mundo,
ó bien desde la aurora
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías. 377
las fiestas celebraba
del pueblo, y de la patria vencedora.
Por aquí bulle inquieta
la alegre romería; y en los huecos
de la colina escueta
y el espacioso llano,
repiten, alejándose, cien ecos
del tamboril los rústicos sonidos
con cantares y danzas confundidos.
Y en faz dulce, halagüeña,
como niño que suena con las hadas,
ó con su madre y con el cielo sueña,
van pasando, en su féretro acostadas,
reinas de otros festines ¡ay! hermosas,
que vivieron la vida de las rosas;
y pasan allá lejos . . , allá lejos . . .,
donde la luna apenas da reflejos,
al triste suspirar del bosque umbrío
y el sollozo del río.
En el aire y el cielo
hay ojos que nos miran,
y bocas que suspiran,
y manos que nos llaman,
y genios invisibles que nos aman;
y de la selva oscura
por la intrincada y lóbrega espesura,
de su paso veloz sin dejar huellas,
fantásticas visiones cruzan bellas,
quizá recuerdos pálidos de amores,
formas, tal vez, de sueños seductores,
de nuestro corazón, tal vez, pedazos,
tendiéndonos los brazos,
y virginal sonrisa
mandándonos en alas de la brisa.
En tanto, por el piélago infinito
de esos mundos que en letras de luz tienen
de Dios el nombre escrito,
su alto vuelo el espíritu desplega;
ansioso de luz llega,
y, abismándose en él, ve más cercana
la majestad de Dios, y compadece
la pequenez de -la grandeza humana.
[Ventura Raíz Aguilera.]
Digitized by VjOOQIC
878 Poesías.
La Dada.
A mi querido amigo el distinguido Poeta
Don Antonio Hurtado,
Desde esta soledad en donde vivo,
y en la cual de los hombres olvidado
ni cartas ni periódicos recibo;
donde reposo en apacible calma,
lejos, lejos del mundo que ba gastado
con la del cuerpo la salud del alma;
antes de que el torrente desbordado
de la ambición con ímpetu violento
me arrebate otra vez; desde la orilla
donde yace encallada mi barquilla,
libre ya de las ondas y del viento,
como recuerdo de amistad te escribo.
¡Ay! Aunque salvo del peligro, siento
la inquietud angustiosa del cautivo,
que rompiendo su férrea ligadura,
traspasa fatigado á la ventura
montes, llanos y selvas, fugitivo.
El rumor apagado que levantan
las hojas secas que á su paso mueve,
las avecillas que en el árbol cantan,
el aire que en las ramas se cimbrea
con movimiento reposado y leve,
el río que entre guijas serpentea,
la luz del día, la callada sombra
de la serena noche, el eco, el ruido,
la misma soledad ¡todo le asombra!
Y cuando ya de caminar rendido
sobre la yerta piedra se reclina
y le sorprende el sueño y le domina,
oye en torno de si, medio dormido,
vago y siniestro son. Despierta, calla,
y fija su atención despavorido;
las tinieblas le ofuscan, se incorpora
y el rumor le persigue.— ¡Es el latido
de su azorado corazón que estalla! —
Y entonces ¡ay! desesperado llora.
Porque es la libertad don tan querido,
que en el humano espíritu batalla,
más que el placer de conseguirla, el miedo
de volverla á perder.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías. 879
Yo quQ no puedo
recordar sin espanto la agonía,
la dura y azarosa incertidumbre
en que mi triste corazón gemía
sometido á penosa servidumbre,
cuando, arista á merced del torbellino,
sin elección ni voluntad seguía
los secretos impulsos del destino,
y en ese pavoroso desconcierto
de la social contienda, consumía
la paz del alma ¡la esperanza mía!
boj que la tempestad arrojó al puerto
mi navecilla rota j quebrantada,
temo ¡infeliz de mí! que otra oleada
la vuelva al mar donde mi calma ba muerto.
Para vencer su furia desatada
¿qué soy yo? ¿qué es el hombre? Sombra leve,
partícula de polvo en el desierto.
Guando el simún de la pasión le mueve,
busca el átomo al átomo, y la arena
es nube, es huracán, es cataclismo.
Gigante mole los espacios llena,
bajo su peso el mundo se conmueve,
obscurece la luz, llega al abismo
y al sumo Dios que la formó se atreve.
Vértigo arroUador todo la arrasa;
pero después que el torbellino pasa
y se apacigua y duerme la tormenta,
¿qué queda? Polvo misero y liviano
que el ala frágil del insecto aventa,
que se pierde en la palma de la mano.
¡Oh grata soledad, yo te bendigo,
tú que al náufrago, al triste, al pobrQ grano
de desligada arena das abrigo!
Muchas veces, Antonio, devorado
por ese afán oculto que no sabe
la mente descifrar, me he preguntado,
—cuestión á un tiempo inoportuna y grave—
¿qué busco? ¿á dónde voy? ¿porqué he nacido
en esta Edad sin fe?— Yo soy un ave
que llegó sola y sin amor al nido.
A este nido social en que vegeta,
mayor de edad, la ciega muchedumbre,
al infortunio y al error sujeta
entre miseria y sangre y podredumbre.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías.
Comtémplala, si pnedes, tú que al cielo
con tos radiantes alas de poeta
tal vez quisiste remontar al vnelo,
7 si este el mnndo que soñaste ba sido
nunca el encanto de tn dicha acabe . . .
¡Ayl pero tú también eres un ave
que llegó sola y sin amor al nido.
Desde la altura de mi siglo, tiendo
alguna vez con ánimo atrevido,
mi vista á lo pasado, y removiendo
los deshechos escombros de la historia,
en el febril anhelo que me agita
sus ruinas vuelvo á alzar en mi memoria.
Y al través de las capas seculares
que el aluvión del tiempo deposita
sobre columnas, pórticos y 'altares;
del polvo inanimado con que cubre
la loca vanidad del polve vivo,
que arrebata á su paso fugitivo,
como el viento las hojas en Octubre;
mudo de admiración y de respeto
busco la antigüedad— roto esqueleto
que entre la densa lobreguez asoma—
y ofrecen á mi absorta fantasía
sus dioses Grecia, sus guerreros Roma,
sus mártires la fe cristiana y pía,
el patriotismo su grandeza austera,
sus monstruos la insaciable tiranía,
sus vengadores la virtud severa.
Y llevado en las alas del deseo
que anima mi ilusión, á veces creo
volver á aquella Edad. — En la espesura
del bosque, en el murmullo de la fuente,
en el claro lucero que fulgura,
en el escollo de la mar rujíente,
en la espuma, en el átomo, en la nada,
Apolo centellea, alza su frente
de luminoso lauro coronada.
Por él la luna que entre sombras gira,
la. luz que en rayos de color se parte,
la ola que bulle, el viento que suspira,
todo es Dios, todo es himno, todo es arte.
¡Ay! ¿No es verdad que en tus eternas horas
de desaliento y decepción, recuerdas
esa dorada Edad, y que te inspira
el coro de sus musas voladoras,
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías. '881
que murmuran y gimen en las cnerdas
de la ya rota y olvidada lira?
Aunque las llames, np vendrán; ¡han muerto!
la voz del interés grosera y ruda
anuncia que el Parnaso está desierto
y la naturaleza triste y muda.
Que en este siglo de sarcasmo y duda
sólo una musa vive. Musa ciega,
implacable, brutal. ¡Demonio acaso
que con los hombres y los dioses juega!
La Musa del análisis, que armada
del árido escalpelo, á cada paso
nos precipita en el obscuro abismo
ó nos asoma al borde de la nada.
¿No la ves? ¿No la sientes en tí mismo?
¿Quién no lleva esa víbora enroscada
dentro del corazón? ¡Ay! cuando llena
de noble ardor la juventud florida
quiere surcar la atmósfera serena,
quiere aspirar las auras de la vida,
esa Musa fatal y tentadora
en el libro, en la cátedra, en la escena
se apodera del alma y la devora.
¡Si á veces imagino que envenena
la leche maternal! En nuestros lares,
en el retiro, en el regazo tierno
del amor, hasta al pié de los altares
nos persigue ese aborto del infierno.
¡Cuántas noches de horror, conmigo á solas,
ha sacudido con su soplo ardiente
los tristes pensamientos de mi mente
como sacude el huracán las olas!
¡Cuántas, ay, revoleándome en el lecho
he golpeado con furor mi frente,
he desgarrado sin piedad mi pecho,
y entre visiones lúgubres y extrañas,
su diente de reptil, áspero y frío,
he sentido clavarse en mis entrañas!
¡Noches de soledad, noches de hastío
en que, lleno de angustia y sobresalto,
se agitaba mi ser en el vacío
de fe, de luz y de esperanza falto!
¿Y quién mantiene viva la esperanza
si donde quiera que la vista alcanza
ve escombros nada más? Por entre ruinas
la humanidad desorientada avanza;
Digitized by VjOOQIC
382 Poesías.
becbos, leyes, costumbres y doctrinas
como edificio envejecido y roto
desplomándose van; sordo y profundo
no sé qué irresistible terremoto
moral, conmueve en su cimiendo el mundo.
Ruedan los tronos, ruedan los altares:
reyes, naciones, genios y colosos
pasan como las ondas de los mares
empujadas por vientos borrascosos.
Todo tiembla en redor, todo vacila.
Hasta la misma religión sagrada
es moribunda lámpara que oscila
sobre el sepulcro de la edad pasada.
Y cual turbia corriente alborotada,
libre del ancho cauce que la encierra,
la duda audaz, la asoladora duda
como una inundación cubre la tierra.
—¡Es que el manto de Dios ya no la escuda I —
No la defiende el varonil denuedo
de la fe inexpugnable y de las leyes,
y el dios de los incrédulos, el miedo,
rige á su voluntad pueblos y reyes.
Él los rumores bélicos propala,
él organiza innúmeras legiones
que buscan la ocasión, no la justicia.
Mas ¿qué podrán hacer? No se apuntala
con lanzas, bayonetas ni cafiones,
el templo secular que se desquicia.
En medio de este caos, como un arcano
impenetrable, pavoroso, obscuro,
yérguese altivo el pensamiento humano
de su grandeza y majestad seguro.
Y semejante al árbol carcomido
por incansable y destructor gusano,
que cuando tiene el corazón roldo,
desenvuelve su copa más lozano,
al través del social desasosiego
cruza la tierra en su corcel de fuego,
hasta los cielos atrevido sube,
pone en la luz su vencedora mano,
el rayo arranca á la irritada nube
y horada con su acento el Océano.
¡Mas, ay, del árbol que frondoso crece
sostenido no más por su corteza!
Tal vez la brisa que las flores mece
derribará en el polvo su grandeza.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Poesías.
— I Tal vezl ¿Lo sabes tú? ¿ Quién el misterio
logra profundizar? Esta sombría
turbación, esta lóbrega tristeza
que invade sin cesar nuestro hemisferio,
¿es acaso el crepúsculo del día
que se extingue, ó la aurora del que empieza?
¿Es iayl renacimiento ó agonía?
Lo ignoras como yo. ¡Nadie lo sabe!
Solo só que la dulce poesía
va enmudeciendo, y cuando calla el ave
es que su obscuridad la noche envía.
Oigo el desacordado clamoreo
que alza doquier la muchedumbre inquieta
sin freno, sin antorcha que la guie;
ando entre iniínas, y espantado veo
cómo al sordo compás de la piqueta
la embrutecida indiferencia ríe.
— También en Roma, torpe y descreída,
la copa llena de espumoso y rico
licor, gozábase desprevenida,
hasta que de improviso por la herida
que abrió en su cuello el hacha de Alarico
escapósele el vino con la vida. —
Todo el cercano cajtaclismo advierte;
pero en esta ansiedad que nos devora
ninguno habrá que á descifrar acierte
la gran transformación que se elabora.
¿Y qué más da? Resurrección ó muerte,
vespertino crepúsculo ó aurora,
los que siguen llorando su camino
por medio de esta confusión horrenda,
con inseguro paso y rumbo incierto,
¿dónde levantarán su débil tienda
que no la arranque el raudo torbellino
ni la envuelva la arena del desierto?
En otro tiempo el ánimo doliente,
atormentado por la duda humana,
postrábase sumiso y penitente
en el regazo de la fe cristiana,
y allí bajo la bóveda sombría
del templo, el corazón desesperado
se humillaba en el polvo y renacía.
Cristo en la cruz del Gólgota clavado
extendía sus brazos, compasivo,
al dolor sublimado en la plegaria,
y para el pobre y triste fugitivo
Digitized by VaOOQlC
884 Poesías.
rdel mundo, era la celda solitaria
puerto de salvación, sepulcro vivo,
anulación del cuerpo voluntaria.
¡Ay! En aquella paz santa y profunda
todo era austero, reposado, grave.
La elevación de la gigante nave,
la luz entrecortada y moribunda,
la sencilla oración de un pueblo inmenso
uniéndose á los cánticos del coro,
la armonía del órgano sonoro,
las blancas nubes de quemado incienso,
el frío y duro pavimento, fosa
común, perpetuamente renovada,
de la cual cada tumba, cada losa
es doble puerta que limita y cierra
por debajo el silencio de la nada,
por encima el tumulto de la tierra;
aquella majestad, aquel olvido
del siglo, aquel recuerdo de la muerte,
parecian decir con infinita
dulzura al corazón desfallecido,
al espíritu ciego, al alma inerte:
Ego sum via, et veritas et vita.
Aquí en su pequenez el hombre es fuerte. —
Mas ¿dónde iremos ya? Torpes y obscuros
planes hallaron en el claustro abrigo,
y Dios airado desató el castigo
y con el rayo derribó sus muros.
¿Dónde posar la fatigada frente?
¿Dónde volver los afligidos ojos,
cuando ha dejado el corazón creyente
prendidos en los ásperos abrojos
su fe piadosa y su interés mundano?
¿Dónde?
¡En tí, soledad ! Yo te bendigo,
porque al náufrago, al triste, al pobre grano
de desligada arena das abrigo.
[Gaspar Nuilez de Arce.]
Consuelo celestial.
Dime, Padre común, pues eres justo,
¿por qué ha de permitir tu providencia,
que, arrastrando prisiones la inocencia,
suba la fraude á tribunal augusto?
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prosa. 385
¿Quién da fuerzas al brazo, que robusto
hace á tus leyes firme resistencia?
¿Y que el celo, que más las reverencia,
gima á los pies del vencedor injusto?
Vemos que vibran victoriosas palmas
manos inicuas; la virtud gimiendo
del triunfo en el injusto regocijo.
Esto decía yo, cuando riendo
celestial ninfa apareció, y me dijo:
¿Ciego, es la tierra el centro de las almas?
[Argensóla.]
Prosa.
Armas y Letras.
Quítenseme delante los que dijeren que las letras hacen
ventaja á las armas, que les diré, y sean quien se fueren,
que no saben lo que dicen: porque la razón que los tales
suelen decir, y á lo que ellos más se atienen, es que los tra-
bajos del espíritu exceden á los del cuerpo, y que las armas
sólo con el cuerpo se ejercitan; como si fuese su ejercicio
oficio de ganapanes, para el cual no es menester más de
buenas fuerzas; ó como si en esto, que llamamos armas los
que las profesamos, no se encerrasen los actos de la fortaleza,
los cuales piden para ejecutallos mucho entendimiento; ó como
sí no trabajase el ánimo del guerrero que tiene á su cargo
un ejército, ó la defensa de una ciudad sitiada, así con el
espíritu, como con el cuerpo. Si no, véase si se alcanza con
las fuerzas corporales á saber y conjeturar el intento del ene-
migo, los designios, las estratajemas, las dificultades, el pre-
venir los daños que se temen, que todas estas cosas son
acciones del entendimiento en quien no tiene parte alguna
el cuerpo. Siendo pues ansí, que las armas requieren espíritu
con las letras, veamos ahora cual de los dos espíritus, el del
letrado ó el del guerrero, trabaja más: y esto se vendrá á
conocer por el fin y paradero á que cada uno se encamina,
porque aquella intención se ha de estimar en más, que tiene
por objeto más noble fin. Es el fin y paradero de las letras
(y no hablo ahora de las divinas, que tienen por blanco llevar
y encaminar las almas al cielo, que á un fin tan sin fin como
este ninguno otro se le puede igualar), hablo de las letras
humanas, que es su fin poner en su punto la justicia distri-
Spaoish Conv.-Grammar. 2^ ^
Digitized by VaOOQlC
886 Prosa.
butiya, y dar á cada uno lo que es suyo, entender y hacer
que las buenas leyes se guarden: fin por cierto generoso y alto,
y digno de grande alabanza; pero no de tanta como merece
aquel á que las armas atienden, las cuales tienen por objeto
y fin la paz, que es el mayor bien que los hombres pueden
desear en vista vida: y asi las prinoieras buenas nuevas que
tuvo el mundo y tuvieron los hombres, fueron las que dieron
los ángeles la noche que fué nuestro día, cuando cantaron en
los aires : Gloria sea en las cUturaSy y paz en la tierra á los
hombres de buena voluntad: y la salutación que el mejor Maestro
de la tierra y del cielo enseñó á sus allegados y favorecidos,
fué decirles que cuando entrasen en alguna casa dijesen: Pae
sea en esta casa; y otras muchas veces les dijo: Mi paz os
doy y mi paz os dejo, paz sea con vosotros: bien como joya y
prenda dada y dejada de tal mano, joya que sin ella en la
tierra ni en el cielo puede haber bien alguno: Esta paz es
el verdadero fin de la guerra, que lo mismo es decir armas
que guerra. Prosupuesta pues esta verdad, que el fin de la
guerra es la paz, y que en esto hace ventaja al fin de Jas
letras, vengamos ahora á los trabajos del cuerpo del letrado,
y á los del profesor de las armas, y véase cuales son mayores.
De tal manera y por tan buenos términos iba prosiguiendo
en su plática Don Quiote, que obligó á que por entonces nin-
guno de los que escuchándole estaban le tuviesen por loco:
antes, como todos los más eran caballeros, á quien son anexas
las armas, le escuchaban de muy buena gana, y él prosiguió
diciendo: digo pues, que los trabajos del estudiante son estos:
principalmente pobreza, no porque todos sean pobres, sino
por poner este caso en todo el extremo que pueda ser; y en
haber dicho que padece pobreza, me parece que no había que
decir más de su mala ventura, porque quien es pobre no tiene
cosa buena: esta pobreza la padece por sus partes, ya en
hambre, ya en frío, ya en desnudez, ya en todo junto; pero
con todo eso no es tanta que no coma, aunque sea un poco
más tarde de lo que se usa, aunque sea de las sobras de los
ricos; que es la mayor miseria del estudiante esto que entre
ellos llaman andar á la sopa, y no les falta algún ageno brasero,
ó chimenea que si no calienta, á lo menos entibie su frío, y en
fin la noche duermen muy bien debajo de cubierta. No quiero
llegar á otras menudencias, conviene á saber, de la falta de
camisas y no sobra de zapatos, la raridad y poco pelo del
vestido, ni aquel ahitarse con tanto gusto cuando la buena
suerte les depara algún banquete. Por este camino que he
pintado, áspero y dificultoso, tropezando aquí, cayendo allí,
levantándose acullá, tornando á caer acá, llegan al grado que
desean; el cual alzando á muchos, hemos visto que habiendo
pasado por estas Sirtes, y por estas Scilas y Caribdis, como
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prosa. 387
llevados en vuelo de la favorable fortuna, digo que los hemos
visto mandar y gobernar el mundo desde una silla, trocada
su hambre en hartura, su frío en refrigerio, su desnudez en
galas, y su dormir en una estera en reposar en holandas
y damascos: premio justamente merecido de su virtud; pero
contrapuestos y comparados sus trabajos con los del milite
guerrero, se quedan muy atrás en todo Pues comenzamos en
el estudiante por la pobreza y sus partes, veamos si es más
rico el soldado, y veremos que no hay ninguno más pobre en
la misma pobreza, porque está atenido á la miseria de su
paga, que viene ó tarde ó nunca, ó á lo que garbeare por
sus manos con notable peligro de su vida y de su conciencia :
y á veces suele ser su desnudez tanta, que un coleto acu-
chillado le sirve de gala y de camisa, y en la mitad del in-
vierno se suele reparar de las inclemencias del cielo, estando
en la campaña rasa, con solo el aliento de su boca, que como
sale de lugar vacío, tengo por averiguado que debe de salir
frío contra toda naturaleza. Pues esperad que espere que
llegue la noche, para restaurarse de todas estas incomodidades
en la cama que le aguarda, la cual si no es por su culpa,
jamás pecará de estrecha, que bien puede medir en la tieiTa
los pies que quisiere, y revolverse en ella á su sabor sin
temor que se le encojan las sábanas. Llegúese pues á todo
esto el día y la hora de recibir el grado de su ejercicio: lle-
gúese un día de batalla, que allí le pondrán la borla en la
cabeza, hecha de hilas para curarle algún balazo que quizá
le habrá pasado la$ ^ienes, ó le dejará estropeado de brazo ó
pierna: y cuanda esto no suceda, sino que el cielo piadoso le
guarde y conserve sano y vivo, podrá ser que se quede en la
misma pobreza que antes estaba, y que sea menester que
suceda uno y otro reencuentro, una y otra batalla, y que de
todas salga vencedor para medrar en algo; pero estos milagros
vense raras veces. Pero decidme, señores, si habéis mirado
en ello: ¿cuan menos son los premiados por la guerra, que
los que han perecido en ella? Sin duda habéis de responder
que no tienen comparación, ni se pueden reducir á cuenta los
muertos, y que se podrán contar los premiados vivos con tres
letras de guarismo. Todo esto es al revés en los letrados,
porque de faldas, que no quiero decir de mangas, todos tienen
en que entretenerse: así que, aunque es mayor el trabajo del
soldado, es mucho menor el premio. Pero á esto se puede
responder que es más fácil premiar á dos mil letrados, que
á treinta mil soldados; porque aquellos se premian con darles
oficios que por fuerza se han de dar á los de su profesión,
y á estos no se pueden premiar sino con la misma hacienda
del señor á quien sirven, y esta imposibilidad fortifica más
la razón que tengo, Pero dejemos esto aparte, que es labe-
Digitized by VaOOQlC
888 Prosa.
rínto de muy dificultosa salida, sino volvamos á la preemi-
nencia de las armas contra las letras : materia que hasta ahora
está por averiguar según son las razones que cada una de
su parte alega. Y entre las que he dicho, dicen las letras que
sin ellas no se podrían sustentar las armas, porque la guerra
también tiene sus leyes y está sujeta á ellas, y que las leyes
caen debajo de lo que son letras y letrados. Á esto responden
las armas que las leyes no se podrán sustentar sin ellas, porque
con las armas se defienden las repúblicas, se conservan los
reinos, se guardan las ciudades, se aseguran los caminos, se
despojan los mares de corsarios; y finalmente, si por ellas no
fuese, las repúblicas, los reinos, las monarquías, las ciudades,
los caminos de mar y tierra estarían sujetos al rigor y á la
confusión que trae consigo la guerra el tiempo que dura, j
tiene licencia de usar de sus privilejios y de sus fuerzas: j
es razón averiguada que aquello que más cuesta, se estima
y debe de estimar en más. Alcanzar alguno á ser eminente
en letras, le cuesta tiempo, vijilias, hambre, desnudez, vaguido
de cabeza, indigestiones de estómago, y otras cosas á estas
adherentes, que en parte ya las tengo referidas; mas llegar
uno por sus términos á ser buen soldado, le cuesta todo lo
que á el estudiante, en tanto mayor grado, que no tienen
comparación, porque á cada paso está á pique de perder la
vida: ¿Y quó temor de necesidad y pobreza puede llegar ni
fatigar al estudiante, que llegue al que tiene un soldado que
hallándose cercado en alguna fuerza y estando de posta ó
guarda en algún rebellín, ó caballero, siente que los enemigos
están minando hacia la parte donde él está, y no puede apar-
tarse de allí por ningún caso, ni huir el peligro que de tan
cerca le amenaza? Sólo lo que puede hacer, es dar noticia
á su capitán de lo que pasa para que lo remedie con alguna
contramina, y él estarse quedo temiendo y esperando, cuando
improvisamente ha de subir á las nubes sin alas y bajar al
profundo sin su voluntad; y si este parece pequeño peligro,
veamos si se le iguala ó hace ventaja el de embestirse dos
galeras por las proas en mitad del mar espacioso, las cuales
enclavijadas y trabadas, no le queda al soldado más espacio
del que conceden dos pies de tabla del espolón; y con todo
esto, viendo que tiene delante de si tantos ministros de la
muerte que le amenaza, cuantos cañones de artillería se
asestan de la parte contraria, que no distan de su cuerpo
una lanza, y viendo que al primer descuido de los pies irla
á visitar los profundos senos de Neptuno, y con todo esto,
con intrépido corazón, llevado de la honra que le incita, se
pone á ser blanco de tanta arcabucería, y procura pasar por
tan estrecho paso al bajel contrario : y lo que más es de
admirar, que apenas uno ha caldo donde no se podrá levantar
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prosa. 389
hasta el fin del mundo, cuando otro ocupa su mismo lugar,
y si este también cae en el mar que como á enemigo le
aguarda, otro, y otro le sucede, sin dar tiempo al tiempo de
sus muertes: valentía y atrevimiento el mayor que se puede
hallar en todos los trances de la guerra, i Bien hayan aque-
llos benditos siglos que carecieron de la espantable furia de
aquestos endemoniados instrumentos de la artillería, á cuyo
inventor tengo para mí que en el infierno se le está dando
el premio de su diabólica invención, con la cual dio causa
que un infame y cobarde brazo quite la vida á un valeroso
caballero, y que sin saber como ó por donde, en la mitad del
coraje j brío que enciende y anima á los valientes pechos,
llega una desmandada bala, disparada de quien quizá huyó
y se espantó del resplandor que hizo el fuego al disparar la
maldita máquina, y corta y acaba en un instante los pensa-
mientos y vida de quien la merecía gozar luengos siglos!
[CervantesJ
El castellano yiejo.
Ya en mi edad pocas veces gusto de alterar el orden
que en mi manera de vivir tengo hace tiempo establecido; y
fundo esta repugnancia en que no he abandonado mis lares
ni un solo día para quebrantar mi sistema, sin que haya
sucedido el arrepentimiento más sincero al desvanecimiento
de mis engañadas esperanzas, ün resto, con todo eso, del
antiguo ceremonial que en su trato tenían adoptado nuestros
padres, me obliga á aceptar á veces ciertos convites á que
parecería el negarse grosería, ó por lo menos ridicula afecta-
ción de delicadeza.
Andábame días pasados por esas calles á buscar mate-
riales para mis artículos. Embebido en mis pensamientos, me
sorprendí varias veces á mí mismo riendo como un pobre
hombre de mis propias ideas y moviendo maquinalmente los
labios; algún tropezón me recordaba de cuando en cuando
que para andar por el empedrado de Madrid no es la mejor
circunstancia la de ser poeta ni filósofo; más de una sonrisa
maligna, más de un gesto de admiración de los que á mi lado
pasaban, me hacía reflexionar que los soliloquios no se deben
hacer en público; y no pocos encontrones que al volver las
esquinas di con quien tan distraída y rápidamente como yo
las doblaba, me hicieron conocer que los distraídos no entran
en el número de los cuerpos elásticos, y mucho menos de los
seres gloriosos é impasibles. En semejante situación de mi
espíritu, ¡qué sensación no debería producirme una horrible
palmada que una gran mano, pegada (á lo que por entonces
entendí) á un grandísimo brazo, vino á descargar sobre uno
Digitized by VaOOQlC
890 Prosa.
de mis hombros, que por desgracia no tienen punto algmio
de semejanza con los de Atlante!
No queriendo dar á entender que desconocía este enér-
gico modo de anunciarse, ni desairar el agasajo de quien
sin duda había creído hacérmele más que mediano dejándome
torcido para todo el día, traté sólo de volverme por conocer
quién fuese tan mi amigo para tratarme tan mal; pero mi
castellano viejo es hombre que, cuando está de gracias, no se
ha de dejar ninguna en el tintero. ¿Cómo dirá el lector que
siguió dándome pruebas de confianza y carifio? Echóme las
manos á los ojos, y sujetándome por detrás, ¿quién soj?
gritaba, alborozado con el buen éxito de su delicada travesura.
¿Qaién soy? — Un animal, iba á responderle; pero me acordé
de repente de quién podría ser, y sustituyendo cantidades
iguales : — Braulio eres, le dije. Al oirme, suelta sus manos,
ríe, se aprieta los ijares, alborota la calle, y pónenos á en-
trambos en escena. — ¡Bien, mi amigo! ¿Pues en qué me
has conocido? — ¿Quién pudiera sino tú . . .? — Has venido
ya de tu Vizcaya? — No, Braulio, no he venido. — Siempre
el mismo genio. — ¿Qué quieres? es la pregunta del español.
— ¡Cuánto me alegro de que estés aquí! ¿Sabes que mañana
son mis días? — Te los deseo muy felices. — Déjate de
cumplimientos entre nosotros; ya sabes que yo soy franco y
castellano viejo; el pan pan, y el vino vino; por consiguiente,
exijo de ti que no vayas á dármelos, pero estás convidado. —
¿Á qué? — Á comer conmigo. — No es posible. — No hay
remedio. — No puedo, insisto ya temblando. — ¿No puedes?
T- Gracias. — ¿Gracias? Vete á paseo; amigo, como no soy
el duque de F., ni el conde de P. — ¿Quién se resiste á una sor-
presa de esta especie? ¿Quién quiere parecer vano? — No
es eso, sino que ... — Pues si no es eso, me interrumpe, te
espero á las dos; en casa se come á la española; temprano.
Tengo mucha gente: tendremos al famoso X., que nos impro-
visará de lo lindo; T. nos cantará de sobremesa una rondefia
con su gracia natural; y por la noche, J. cantará y tocará
alguna cosilla. — Esto me consoló algún tanto, y fué preciso
ceder: un día malo, dije para mí, cualquiera lo pasa; en este
mundo para conservar amigos es preciso tener el valor de
aguantar sus obsequios. — No faltarás, si no quieres que
riñamos. — No faltaré, dije con voz exánime y ánimo decaído,
como el zorro que se revuelve inútilmente dentro de la trampa
donde se ha dejado coger. — Pues hasta mañana; y me dio
un torniscón por despedida. Víle marchar como el labrador
ve alejarse la nube de su sembrado, y quédeme discurriendo
cómo podían entenderse estas amistades tan hostiles y tan
funestas.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prosa. 391
Ya habrá conocido el lector, siendo tan perspicaz como
yo lo imagino, que mi amigo Braulio está muy lejos de per-
tenecer á lo que se llama gran mundo y sociedad de buen
tono; pero no es tampoco un hombre de la clase inferior,
puesto que es un empleado de los de segundo orden, que
reúne entre su sueldo y su hacienda cuarenta mil reales de
renta, que tiene una cintita atada al ojal y una crucecita á
la sombra de la solapa; que es persona, en fin, cuya clase,
familia y comodidades de ninguna manera se oponen á que
tuviese una educación más escogida y modales más suaves ó
insinuantes. Mas la vanidad le ha sorprendido por donde ha
sorprendido casi siempre á toda ó la mayor parte de nuestra
clase media, y á toda nuestra clase baja. Es tal su patrio-
tismo, que dará todas las lindezas del extranjero por un dedo
de su país. Esta ceguedad le hace adoptar todas las respon-
sabilidades de tan inconsiderado cariño: de paso que defiende
que no hay vinos como los españoles, en lo cual bien puede
tener razón, defiende que no hay educación como la española;
en lo cual bien pudiera no tenerla; á trueque de defender que
el cielo de Madrid es purísimo, defenderá que nuestras manólas
son las más encantadoras de todas las mujeres; es un hombre,
en fin, que vive de exclusivas, á quien le sucede poco más ó
menos lo que á una parienta mía, que se muere por las joro-
bas sólo porque tuvo un novio que llevaba una excrescencia
bastante visible sobre entrambos omoplatos.
No hay que hablarle, pues, de estos usos sociales, de
estos respetos mutuos, de estas reticencias urbanas, de esa
delicadeza de trato que establece entre los hombres una pre-
ciosa armonía, diciendo sólo lo que debe agradar y callando
siempre lo que puede ofender. Él se muere por plantarle una
fresca al lucero del alba, como suele decir, y cuando tiene un
resentimiento se le espeta á uno cara á cara: como tiene
trocados todos los frenos, dice de los cumplimientos que ya
sabe lo que quiere decir cumplo y miento; llama á la urba-
nidad hipocresí^i, y á la decencia monadas ; á toda cosa buena
le aplica un mal apodo; el lenguaje de la finura es para él
poco menos que griego : cree que toda la crianza está reducida
á decir Dios guarde á ustedes al entrar en una sala, y añadir
con permiso de usted cada vez que se mueve; á preguntar á
cada uno por toda su familia, y á despedirse de todo el
mundo; cosas todas que asi se guardará él de olvidarlas como
de tener pacto con franceses. En conclusión, hombre de estos
que no saben levantarse para despedirse, sino en corporación
con alguno ó algunos otros; que han de dejar humildemente
debajo de una mesa su sombrero, que llaman su cabeza, y
que cuando se hallan en sociedad, por desgracia, sin un so-
corrido bastón, darían cualquier cosa por no tener manos ni
Digitized by VjOOQIC
892 Prosa.
brazos, porque en realidad no saben en dónde ponerlos, ni qué
cosa se puede hacer con los brazos en ana sociedad.
Llegaron las dos, y como yo conocía ya á mi Braulio,
no me pareció conveniente acicalarme demasiado para ir á
comer: estoy seguro de que se hubiera picado: no quise, sin
embargo, excusar un frac de color y un pañuelo blanco, cosa
indispensable en un día de días en semejantes casas: vestime,
sobre todo, lo más despacio que me fué posible, como se re-
concilia al pió del suplicio el infeliz reo, que quisiera tener
cien pecados más cometidos que contar para ganar tiempo;
era citado á las dos, y entré en la sala á las dos y media.
No quiero hablar de las infinitas visitas ceremoniosas
que antes de la hora de comer entraron y salieron en aquella
casa, entre las cuales no eran de despreciar todos los emple-
ados de su oficina, con sus señoras y sus niños, y sus capas
y sos paraguas, y sus chanclos y sus perritos; dejóme en
blanco los necios cumplimientos que dijeron al señor de los
días ; no hablo del inmenso circulo con que guarnecía la sala
el concurso de tantas personas heterogéneas, que hablaron de
que el tiempo iba á mudar, y de que en invierno suele hacer
más frío que en verano. Vengamos al caso: dieron las cuatro,
y nos hallamos solos los convidados. Desgraciadamente para
mí, el señor de X., que debía divertimos tanto, gran cono-
cedor de esta clase de convites, había tenido la habilidad de
ponerse malo aquella mañana: el famoso T. se hallaba opor-
tunamente comprometido para otro convite; y la señorita que
también había de cantar y tocar, estaba ronca en tal dispo-
sición que se asombraba ella misma de que se la entendiese
una sola palabra, y tenía un panadizo en un dedo. ¡Cuántas
esperanzas desvanecidas !
Supuesto que estamos los que hemos de comer, exclamó
D. Braulio, vamos á la mesa, querida mía. — Espera un mo-
mento, le contestó su esposa casi al oído: con tanta visita yo
he faltado algunos momentos de allá dentro y ... — Bien,
pero mira que son las cuatro ... — Al instante comeremos.
— Las cinco eran cuando nos sentábamos á la mesa.
— Señores, dijo el anfitrión al vemos titubear en nues-
tras respectivas colocaciones: exijo la mayor franqueza: en mi
casa no se usan cumplimientos. ¡Ah Fígaro! quiero que estés
con toda comodidad: eres poeta, y además estos señores, que
saben nuestras íntimas relaciones, no se ofenderán si te pre-
fiero; quítate el frac, no sea que le manches. — ¿Qué tengo
de manchar? le respondí mordiéndome los labios. — No im-
porta, te daré una chaqueta mía: siento que no haya para
todos. — No hay necesidad. — I Oh, sí, sí, mi chaqueta!
Toma, mírala: un poco ancha te vendrá. — Pero, Braulio...
— No hay remedio; no te andes con etiquetas. — En esto
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Prosa. , 393
me quita él mismo el frac, velis nolis, y quedo sepultado en
una cumplida chaqueta rayada, por la cual sólo asomaba los
pies y la cabeza, y cuyas mangas no me permitirían comer
probablemente. Dile las gracias; al fin el hombre creía ha-
cerme un obsequio.
Los días en que mi amigo no tiene convidados se con-
tenta con una mesa baja, poco más que banqueta de zapatero,
porque él y su mujer, como dice, ¿para qué quieren más?
Desde la tal mesita, y como se sube el agua del pozo, hace
subir la comida hasta la boca, adonde llega goteando después
de una larga travesía; porque pensar que estas gentes han de
tener una mesa regular, y estar cómodos todos los días del
año, es pensar en lo excusado. Ya se concibe, pues, que la
instalación de una gran mesa de convite era un acontecimiento
en aquella casa; así que se había creído capaz de contener
catorce personas que éramos, una mesa donde apenas podrían
comer ocho cómodamente. Hubimos de sentarnos de medio
lado, como quien va á arrimar el hombro á la comida, y
entablaron los codos de los convidados íntimas relaciones entre
sí con la más fraternal inteligencia del mundo. Colocáronme
por mucha distinción entre un niño de cinco años, encaramado
en unas almohadas, que era preciso enderezar á cada momento,
porque las ladeaba la natural turbulencia de mi joven ad
latere, y entre uno de esos hombres que ocupan en el mundo
el espacio y sitio de tres, cuya corpulencia por todos lados
se salía de madre de la única silla en que se hallaba sentado,
digámoslo así, como en la punta de una aguja. Desdobláronse
silenciosamente las servilletas, nuevas á la verdad, porque
tampoco eran muebles en uso para todos, los días, y fueron
izadas por todos aquellos buenos señores á los ojales de sus
fraques, como cuerpos intermedios entre las salsas y las solapas.
— Ustedes harán penitencia, señores, exclamó el anfitrión
una vez sentado, pero hay que hacerse cargo de que no esta-
mos en Genieys; frase que creyó preciso decir. Necia afec-
tación es ésta, si es mentira, dije yo para mí; y si es verdad,
gran torpeza convidar á los amigos á hacer penitencia. Des-
graciadamente no tardé mucho en conocer que había en
aquella expresión más verdad de lo que mi buen Braulio se
figuraba. Interminables y de mal gusto fueron los cumpli-
mientos con que para dar y recibir cada plato nos aburrimos
unos á otros. — Sírvase usted. — Hágame usted el favor. —
De ninguna manera. — No lo recibiré. — Páselo usted á la
señora. — Está bien ahí. — Perdone usted. — Gracias. —
Sin etiqueta, señores, exclamó Braulio, y se echó el primero
con su propia cuchara. Sucedió á la sopa un cocido surtido
de todas las sabrosas impertinencias de este engorrosísimo,
Digitized by VaOOQlC
394 Prosa.
aunque buen plato: cruza por aquí la carne; por allá la ver-
dora; acá los garbanzos ; allá el jamón; la gallina por derecba;
por medio el tocino; por izquierda los embuchados de Extre-
madura: siguióle un plato de ternera mechada, que Dios mal-
diga, 7 á éste otro, j otros, j otros: mitad traídos de la
fonda, que esto basta para que excusemos hacer su elogio;
mitad hechos en casa por la criada de todos los días, por una
vizcaína auxiliar tomada al intento para aquella festividad, y
por el ama de la casa, que en semejantes ocasiones debe estar
en todo, j por consiguiente suele no estar en nada.
— Este plato hay que disimularle, decía ésta de unos
pichones; están un poco quemados. — Pero, mujer . . . —
Hombre, me aparté un momento, y ya sabes lo que son las
criadas. — i Qué lástima que este pavo no haya estado media
hora más al fuego! — Se puso algo tarde. — ¿No les parece
á ustedes que está algo ahumado este estofado? — ¿Qué
quieres? una no puede estar en todo. — I Oh, está excelente!
exclamábamos todos dejándonoslo en el plato, excelente! — Este
pescado está pasado. — Pues en el despacho de la diligencia
del fresco dijeron que acababa de llegar: ¡el criado es tan
bruto! — ¿De dónde se ha traído este vino? — En eso no
tienes razón, porque es ... — Es malísimo. — Estos diálogos
cortos iban exornados con una infinidad de miradas foi'tivas
del marido para advertirle continuamente á su mujer alguna
negligencia, queriendo darnos á entender entrambos á dos que
estaban muy al corriente de todas las fórmulas que en seme-
jantes casos se reputan finura, y que todas las torpezas eran
hijas de los criados, que nunca han de aprender á servir.
Pero estas negligencias se repetían tan á menudo, servían
tan pOjCO ya las miradas, que le fué preciso al marido recurrir
á los pellizcos y á los pisotones ; y ya la señora, que á duras
penas había podido hacerse superior hasta entonces á las per-
secuciones de su esposo, tenia la faz encendida y los ojos
llorosos. — Señora, no se incomode usted por eso, le dijo el
que á su lado tenía. — ¡Ah! Les aseguro á ustedes que no
vuelvo á hacer estas cosas en caso; Ustedes no saben
lo que es esto; otra vez, Braulio, iremos á la fonda y no
tendrás ... — Usted, señora mía, hará lo que . . . —
I Braulio! | Braulio! — Una tormenta espantosa estaba á punto
de estallar; empero todos los convidados á porfía probamos á
aplacar aquellas disputas, hijas del deseo de dar á entender
la mayor delicadeza, para lo cual no fué poca parte la manía
de Braulio y la expresión concluyente que dirigió de nuevo
á la concurrencia acerca de la inutilidad de los cumplimientos,
que asi llama él al estar bien servido y al saber comer. ¿Hay
nada más ridiculo que estas gentes que quieren pasar por
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Prosa. 395
fínas en medio de la más crasa ignorancia de los usos sociales?
¿que para obsequiarle le obligan á usted á comer y beber por
fuerza, y no le dejan medio de hacer su gusto? ¿Por qué
habrá gentes que sólo quieren comer con alguna más limpieza
los días de días?
A todo esto, el niño que á mi izquierda tenía, hacía
saltar las aceitunas á un plato de magras con tomate, j una
vino á parar á uno de mis ojos, que no volvió á ver claro
en todo el día; y el sefiior gordo de mi derecha había tenido
la precaución de ir dejando en el mantel, al lado de mi pan,
los huesos de las suyas, y los de las aves que habla roído;
el convidado de enfrente, que se preciaba de trinchador, se
habla encargado de hacer la autopsia de un capón, ó sea
gallo, que esto nunca se supo; fuese por la edad avanzada de
la víctima, fuese por los ningunos conocimientos anatómicos
del victimario, jamás parecieron las coyunturas. — ¡Este
capón no tiene coyunturas! exclamaba el infeliz sudando y
forcejeando, más como quien cava que como quien trincha.
¡Oosa más rara I En una de las embestidas resbaló el tenedor
sobre el animal como si tuviese escama, y el capón, violenta-
mante despedido, pareció querer tomar su vuelo como en sus
tiempos más felices, y se posó en el mantel tranquilamente
como pudiera en un palo de un gallinero.
El susto fué general, y la alarma llegó á su colmo
cuando un surtidor de caldo, impulsado por el animal furioso,
saltó á inundar mi limpísima camisa: levántase rápidamente
á este punto el trinchador con ánimo de cazar el ave prófuga,
y al precipitarse sobre ella, una botella que tiene á la derecha,
con la que tropieza su brazo, abandonando su posición per-
pendicular, derrama un abundante caño de Valdepeñas sobre
el capón y el mantel; corre el vino, auméntase la algazara,
llueve la sal sobre el vino para salvar el mantel, para salvar
la mesa se ingiere por debajo de él una servilleta, y una
eminencia se levanta sobre el teatro de tantas ruinas. Una
criada toda azorada retira el capón en el plato de su salsa;
al pasar sobre mi hace una pequeña inclinación, y una lluvia
maléfica de grasa desciende, como el rocío sobre los prados,
á dejar eternas huellas en mi pantalón color de perla: la
angustia y el aturdimiento de la criada no conocen término;
retírase atolondrada sin acertar con las excusas; al volverse
tropieza con el criado, que traía una docena de platos limpios
y una salvilla con las copas para los vinos generosos, y toda
aquella máquina viene al suelo con el más horroroso estruendo
y confusión. ¡Por San Pedro! exclama dando una voz Braulio,
difundida ya sobre sus facciones una palidez mortal, al paso
que brota fuego el rostro de su esposa. — Pero sigamos, se-
ñores, no ha sido nada, añade volviendo en sí.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
396 Prosa.
¡Oh honradas casas, donde un modesto cocido y un
principio final constituyen la felicidad diaria de nna familial
Huid del tumulto de un convite de días. Sólo la costumbre
de comer y servirse bien diariamente puede evitar semejantes
destrozos.
¿Hay más desgracias? ¡Santo cielo! ¡Sí las hay para
mi, infeliz! Dofía Juana, la de los dientes negros y amarillos,
me alarga de su plato y con su propio tenedor una fineza,
que es indispensable aceptar y tragar; el niño se divierte en
despedir á los ojos de los concurrentes los huesos disparados
de las cerezas; D. Leandro me hace probar el manzanilla ex-
quisito, que he rehusado, en su misma copa, que conserva
las indelebles sefiales de sus labios grasientos; mi gordo fama
ya sin cesar y me hace cafión de su chimenea; por fin ¡oh
última de las desgracias! crece el alboroto y la conversación;
roncas ya las voces piden versos y décimas, y no hay más
poeta que Fígaro. — Es preciso. — Tiene V. que decir algo,
claman todos. — Désele pió forzado; que diga una copla á
cada uno. — Yo le daré el pió: Á don Braulio en este dk.
— ¡Señores, por Dios! — No hay remedio. — En mi vida
he improvisado. — No se haga usted el chiquito. — Me mar-
charé. — Cerrad la puerta. — No se sale de aquí sin decir
algo. Y digo versos por fin; y vomito disparates; y los cele-
bran, y crece la bulla, y el humo, y el infierno.
Á Dios gracias logro escaparme de aquel nuevo Pande-
monio, Por fin, ya respiro el aire fresco y desembarazado de
la calle; ya no hay necios, ya no hay castellanos viejos á mi
alrededor.
¡Santo Dios! Yo te doy gracias, exclamo respirando,
como el ciervo que acaba de escaparse de una docena de
perros y que oye ya apenas sus ladridos; para de aquí en
adelante no te pido riquezas, no te pido empleos, ni honores;
líbrame de los convites caseros y de días de días; líbrame de
estas casas en que es un convite un acontecimiento; en qne
sólo se pone la mesa decente para los convidados; en que
creen hacer obsequios cuando dan mortificaciones; en que se
hacen finezas; en que se dicen versos; en que hay niños; en
que hay gordos ; en que reina, en fin, la brutal franqueza de los
castellanos viejos. Quiero que, si caigo de nuevo en tenta-
ciones semejantes, me falte un roast-heef, desaparezca del
mundo el heef-steah, se anonaden los timbales de macarrones,
no haya pavos en Perigueux, ni pasteles en Perigord, se se-
quen los viñedos de Burdeos, y beban, en fin, todos, menos
yo, la deliciosa espuma del Champagne.
Concluida mi deprecación mental, corro á mi habitación
á despojarme de mi camisa y mi pantalón, reflexionando en
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Prosa. 397
mi interior que no son unos todos los hombres, puesto que
los de un mismo país, acaso de un mismo entendimiento, no
tienen las mismas costumbres ni la misma delicadeza, cuando
ven las cosas de tan distinta manera. Vistome y vuelvo á
olvidar tan funesto dia entre el corto número de gentes que
piensan, que viven sujetas al provechoso yugo de una buena
educación libre y desembarazada, y que fingen acaso estimarse
y respetarse mutuamente para no incomodarse, al paso que
las otras hacen ostentación de incomodarse, y se ofenden y se
maltratan, queriéndose y estimándose tal vez verdaderamente.
[Mariano José de Larra,]
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Yerbs.
^.B.— The verbs printed in holder type are entirely irregular.
Excluded are the verbs with double participles, enumerated at the
end of Part I.
A.
AhasteceTy to supply with pro-
visions, to victual (a ship);
conjujjT. 159.
ahnegary to deny oneself 148.
abolir, to abolisAi 192.
ahorrecery to abhor 159.
abrir y to open 187.
absolver^ to absolve 153, 187.
abstenerse^ to abstain 35.
abstraer, to abstract 179, 188.
abuñolar, to puff out 153.
acaecer^ to happen 159, 192.
acertar, to guess 145
aclocar, to brood 153.
acollar, to earth up 153.
acontecer, to happen 159, 192.
acordar, to agree; — se, to re-
collect 153.
acornar, to gore 153.
acostar, to convey to bed; —se,
to go to bed 163.
acrecentar, to increase 148.
adestrar, to direct, to put to
rights 148.
adherir, to adhere 167.
adolecer, to fall ill 159.
adormecer, to lull to sleep 159.
adormecerse, to fall asleep 159.
adormir, to lull 176.
adquirir, to acquire 148.
aducir, to bring about 160.
advertir, to inform, to warn 167.
aferrar, to grapple 148.
aflaquecerse, to get thin 159.
afluir, to run into 168.
afollar, to blow against, to
breathe at 153.
aforar, to enfeoff, to rent 153.
agorar, to foretell 153.
agradecer, to be grateful 159.
aguerrir, to train in war 169.
alborecer, to dawn 125, 159.
alebrarse, to crouch 148.
alentar, to breathe 148.
aliquebrar, to break a wing 148.
almorzar, to breakfast 153.
amanecer, to dawn 125, 159.
amoblar, to furnish 153.
amolar, to grind, to sharpen 153.
amortecer, to benumb 159, 192*.
andar, to go, to walk 172.
aneblar, to get foggy 125, 148.
anochecer, to grow dark 125, 159.
antedecir, to foresay 178.
anteponer, to prefer, to place
before 178.
antojarse, to covet, to fancy 192.
apacentar, to graze, to pasture
148.
aparecer, to appear 159.
apetecer, to desire 159.
aporcar, to cover with earth 153.
aportar, to go ashore 153.
apostar, to bet 153.
apretar, to press together 148.
aprobar, to approve 153.
argüir, to argue 168.
arrecirse, to become numb 192*.
arrendar, to lease, to rent 148.
arrepentirse, to repent 167
ascender, to ascend 148.
asentar, to set 148.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
899
asentir J to consent 167.
aserrar, to saw 148.
asestar, to aim (hit) 148.
ے8ir, to seize 172.
asolar, to destroy, to desolate
153.
asoldar, to hire 158.
asonar f to accord, to chime in 158.
atañer, to appertain 164, 192.
atender, to wait 148.
atentar, to grope, to fumble 148.
aterecerse, to grow stiff with cold
159, 192*.
aterrar, to fling down 148.
atestar, to fill with 148.
atraer, to attract 179.
atravesar, to perforate, to bar,
to block 148.
atribuir, to attribute 168.
atronar, to make a great noise
153.
avenirse, to agree 180.
aventar, to fan, to kindle; —se,
to run away 148.
avergonzar, to shame 153.
azolar, to work with the axe 153.
B.
Bendecir, to bless 173, 174.
bienquerer, to esteem 178, 188.
blanquecer, to blanch coin 153.
bruñir, to polish 164.
bullir, to bustle 164.
C.
Caber, to be contained (there
is room for it in smthg.) 172.
ca>er, to fall 173.
calentar, to warm 148.
carecer, to want, to lack 159.
cegar, to blind, to dazzle 148.
ceñir, to gird 163, 164.
cerner, to bolt (meal) 148.
cerrar, to shut 148.
cimentar, to cement, to lay the
foundation 148. ^
circuir, to surround 168.
clarecer, to dawn 125, 159.
clocar, to cluck 153.
cocer, to cook 153, 156, 159*.
colar, to filter, to bestow 153.
colegir, to gather (infer) 163.
colgar, to hang, to suspend 153.
comedirse, to moderate oneself
163.
coinenzar, to begin 148.
compadecer, to pity 159.
comparecer, to appear 159.
competir, to emulate 163.
complacer, to please 159.
compl^ñir, to take pity 164.
componer, to compose 178, 187.
comprobar, to prove 153.
concebir, to conceive 163.
concernir, to concern 167, 192***.
concertar, to arrange; — ««, to
concert 148.
concluir, to finish 168.
concordar, to accord, to agree 153.
condescender, to condescend 148.
condoler, to condole, to pity 158.
conducir, to lead 160.
conferir, to confer 167.
confesar, to confess 148.
confluir, to meet (of rivers) 168.
conmover, to touch, to stir 153.
conocer, to know 159.
conseguir, to succeed 163.
consentir, to consent 167.
consolar, to console 153.
consonar, to accord 153.
constituir, to constitute 168.
constreñir, to constrain 163, 164.
construir, to build 168.
contar, to count, to tell 153.
contender, to fight 148.
contener, to contain 35.
contorcer, to distort 153.
contradecir, to contradict 173.
contraer, to contract, to incur
179.
confra/iacer, to counterfeit 177.
contraponer, to compare (op-
pose) 178.
contravenir, to transgress
(violate) 180.
contribuir, to contribute 168.
controvertir, to quarrel 167.
convalecer, to be convalescent
convenir, to agree 180. [159.
convertir, to convert 167.
corregir, to correct 163.
corroer, to corrode 193.
costar, to cost 153.
crecer, to grow 159.
cubrir, to cover 187.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
400
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
D.
Dar, to give 173.
decaer^ to decay 173.
decentar^ to cut 148.
decir, to tell 173.
decrecer^ to diminish 159.
deducir, to deduct 160.
defender, to defend 148.
deferir, to defer 167.
degollar, to behead 153.
demoler, to demolish, to destroy
153.
demostrar, to prove 153.
denegar, to deny 148.
denostar, to offend, to injure 153.
dentar, to indent, to cut teeth
148.
deponer, to depose 178, 187.
derrenegar, to detest 148.
derrengar, to lame 148.
derretir, to melt 163.
derrocar, to fling down, to render
downcast 153
derruir, to demolish 168.
desacertar, to cheat 148.
desacordar, to disagree, to put
out of tune 153.
desaforar, to deprive of a right
153.
desalentar, to discourage 148.
desamoblar, to unfurnish 153.
desandar, to go back the same
road 172.
desaparecer, to disappear 159.
desapretar, to loosen 148.
desaprobar, to disapprove 153.
desarrendar, to unbridle 148.
desasir, to let go 172.
desasosegar, to trouble 153.
desatender, to disregard 148.
desatentar, to disconcert 148.
desavenir (se), to disagree 180.
descabullirse, to sneak off 164.
descender, to descend 148.
desceñir, to ungird 163, 164.
descolgar, to take down 153.
descollar, to overtop 153.
descomedirse, to behave unman-
nerly 163.
desconcertar, to disconcert 153.
desconocer, not to know 159.
desconsolar, to render disconso-
late 153.
descontar, to discount 153.
desconvenir(se), to disagree
180.
descornar, to break off horns 153.
desdar, to untwist a rope 17S.
desdecir, to countermand 173.
desembravecer, to tame 159.
desembrutecer, to lose one's
roughness 159.
desempedrar, to unpave (a street^
etc.) 148.
desencerrar, to free, to set at
liberty 148.
desencordar, to unstring 153.
desengrosar, to diminish (thin) 153.
desenmohecer, to free from rust
159.
desentenderse, to feign ignorance
148.
desenterrar, to unbury, to dig
out 148.
desenvolver, to unroll 153, 187.
deservir, to be disobliging 163.
desfallecer, to faint 159.
desflocar, to unravel 153.
deshacer, to undo 177.
deshelar, to thaw 125^ 148.
desherrar, to unfetter, to take
off a horse-shoe 148.
desleír, to dissolve 163.
deslucir, to tarnish 159.
des^nembrar, to dismember 148.
desmentir, to give the lie, to
deny 167.
desmerecer, to demerit 159.
desnevar, to thaw 125, 148.
desobedecer, to disobey 159.
desobstruir, to clear away 168.
desoír, not to listen to (disobey)
173.
desolar, to desolate (devastate)
153.
desoldar, to unsolder 153.
desollar, to flay, to strip off 153.
desosar, to take the bone out
(of meat) 153.
desovar, to lay eggs, to spawn
153.
desparecer, to disappear 159.
despedir, to discharge (a servant)
163.
despedirse, to take leave, to say
goodbye 163.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
401
despernar^ to cut off a leg, to
lame a leg 148.
despertar, to awake 148, 189.
desplacer, to displease 159, 193.
desplegar J to unfold 148, 150^.
despoblar, to depopulate 153.
desteñir, to lose colour 163, 164.
desterrar, to banish 148.
destituir, to deprive, to dismiss
168.
destrocar, to break off a bargain
153.
destruir, to destroy 168.
desvanecer, to vanish 159.
desvergonzarse, to behave in a
shameless manner 153.
€let€ner, to stop 35.
^etmer, to detract 179.
devolver, to give back 153, 187.
dezmar^ to pay tithe 148.
diferir, to defer 167.
digerir, to digest 167.
diluir, to dissolve 168.
discerner, to discern 148.
discernir, to distinguish 167.
disconvenir y to disagree 180.
discordar y to be discordant 153.
disentir, to dissent 167.
disminuir^ to diminish 168.
disolver, to dissolve 153, 187.
disonar, to be dissonant 153.
dispertar, to awake 148, 189.
disponer, to dispose 178, 187.
distender, to distend 148.
distraer, to distract, to amuse
179.
distribuir, to distribute 168.
divertir, to divert, to amuse 167.
doler, to ache, to give pain 153.
dormir, to sleep 176.
E.
Elegir, to select 163.
embebecer, to astonish 159.
embellecer y to embellish 159.
embestir, to attack 163.
embravecer, to become furious 159.
enibrtctecer, to become brutal 159.
emendar (enmendar), to correct,
to mend 148.
emparentar, to be related by
marriage 148.
empedrar, to pave 148.
Spanish Cony.-Giammar.
empequeñecer, to lessen 159.
empezar, to begin 148.
empobrecer, to become poor 159.
emporcar, to soil 153.
enaltecer, to elevate, to praise 159.
enardecer, to inflame 159.
encalvecer, to grow bald 159. •
encandecer, to heat to a white
heat 159.
encanecer, to become grey 159.
encarecer, to render dear 159.
encender, to light, to set on fire
148.
encensar, to perfume 148.
encerrar, to imprison, to shut in
148.
enclocar, to fish; to cluck 153.
encoclar see enclocar,
encomendar, to recommend 148.
encontrar, to encounter, to meet
153.
encorar, to cover with leather 1 53.
encordar, to string, to chord 153.
encovar, to put in the cellar 153,
encruelecerse, to become cruel
159.
enctibertar, to cover 148.
endentar, to join with amortise
148.
endentecer, to cut the teeth 159.
endurecer, to harden 159.
enflaquecer, to get thin 159.
enfurecerse, to get enraged 159.
engrandecer, to enlarge 159.
engreir, to intrude 163.
engrosar, to become stout 153.
engullir, to gobble 164.
enhambrentar, to starve 148.
enhestar, to raise, to put upright
148.
enloquecer, to madden 159.
enmendar, to mend, to reform 148.
ennegrecer, to blacken 159.
ennoblecer, to make noble 159.
enorgullecer, to make proud 159.
enriquecer, to enrich 159.
enrodar, to break upon or under
the wheel 153.
enrojecer, to redden 159.
enronquecer, to become hoarse
159.
ensalmorar, to mingle with salt
153.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
402
Alphabetical List of the Irregular V^erba.
ensangrentar, to stain with blood
148.
ensoberbecer y to make proud 159.
ensoñar, to dream 153.
ensordecery to deafeu, to become
deaf 159.
entallecer, to sprout 159.
entender, to understand 148.
entenebrecerse, to grow dark 125,
enternecer, to soften 159. [159.
enterrar, to inter, to bury 148.
entontecer, to grow foolish 159.
entorpecer, to benumb, to stupefy,
to hinder 159.
entortar, to render tortuous 153.
entredecir, to interdict 173.
entregerir, to intermix 167.
entrelucir, to glimmer 159.
entremorir, to die away gra-
dually 177.
entreoir, to hear indistinctly
173.
entreparecerse, to be transparent
159.
entrepernar, to put one's legs
between someone^s as in sitting
148.
entreponer, to interpose 178.
entretener, to delay, amuse 35.
entrever, to have a glimpse 180.
entristecer, to sadden 159.
entumecerse, to inflame 159.
envanecer, to make vain 159.
envejecer, to get old 159.
enverdecer, to grow green 159.
envestir, (pbsol^ to invest 163.
envilecer, to degrade 159.
envolver, to wrap up, to envelop,
to involve 153, 187.
equivaler, to be equivalent 179.
erguir, to erect, to raise up
haughtily (pres. y ergo) 167.
errar, to be mistaken, to wander
(pres. yerro) 148.
escabullirse, to disappear 164.
escarmentar, to sharpen one's wit,
to take warning 148.
escarnecer, to scoff 159.
esclarecer, to lighten 125, 159.
escocer, to smart 153.
escribir, to write 187.
esforzar, to encourage 153.
establecer, to establish 159.
estar, to be 43.
estatuir, to establish (enact) 168.
estercar, to manure 148.
estregar, to rub 148.
estremecer, to shake 159.
estreñir, to obstruct, to constipate
163, 164.
excluir, to exclude 168.
expedir, to forward 163, 189.
exponer, to expose, to explain
178, 187.
extender, to stretch out 148, 189.
extraer, to extract 179.
extremecer, to tremble 159.
F.
Fallecer, to die 159.
favorecer, to favour 159.
florecer, to bloom, to flourish 159.
fluir, to flow 168.
foliar, to blow with the bellows
153.
fortalecer, to fortify 159.
forzar, to force, to compel 153.
fregar, to rub, to wash up 148.
freir, to fry 167, 189.
G.
Gañir, to howl 164.
gemir, to lament 163.
gobernar, to govern 148.
gruir, to crank 168.
gruñir, to grunt, to grumble 164.
guañir, to grunt 164.
guarecerse, to shelter 159.
guarnecer, to garnish, trim 159.
U.
Haber, to have 32.
ha^^r, to do 177.
heder, to stink 148.
helar, to freeze 125, 148.
henchir, to fill 163, 164.
hender, to split 148.
heñir, to knead 163, 164.
herir, to wound 167.
herrar, to shoe a horse 148.
hervir, to boil, to seethe 167.
holgar, to repose 153.
hollar, to tread upon, to trample
on 153.
huir, to flee 168.
humedecer, to moisten 159.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
403
Imbuir f to imbue 168.
impedir, to prevent 163.
imponer J to impose, to deposit
178, 187.
imprimir^ to print 187.
improbar, to disapprove 153.
incensarj to incense, to perfume
148.
incluir y to include, to enclose 168.
incoar, to begin 192.
indi^aner, to make ill dis-
posed 178, 187.
inducir, to induce 160.
inferir, to follow infer 167.
infernar, to vex, to make angry
148.
influir, to influence 168.
ingerir, to intrude, to inject, to
insert, to graft 167.
inquirir, to inquire 148.
inscribir, to inscribe 187.
inseguir, to follow 163.
instituir, to institute 168.
instruir, to instruct, to teach 168.
interdecir, to interdict 173.
interponer, to interpose 178,
187.
intervenir, to intervene, to
mediate 180.
introducir, to introduce 160.
invernar, to spend the winter 148.
invertir, to turn round 167.
investir, to invest 163.
ir, to go 177.
J»
Jimenzar, to ripple flax 148.
jugar, to play 148.
L.
Languidecer, to languish 159.
liquefacer, to liquefy 177.
loar, to praise 193.
lobreguecer, to grow or make
dark 125, 159.
lucir, to shine 159.
hiir, to free from taxes 168.
LI.
Llover, to rain 125, 153.
M.
Maldecir, to curse 173, 174.
malherir, to wound badly 167.
malquerer, to dislike, to hate
178.
malsonar, to offend (one's ears)
153.
maltraer, to treat ill 179.
mancornar^ to tie by the horns
153.
manifestar, to manifest 148.
mantener, to maintain, to keep
35.
medir, to measure 163.
melar, to make honey 148.
mentar, to mention 148.
mentir, to lie 167.
merecer, to merit, to deserve 159.
merendar, to take one's afternoon
collation 148.
moblar, to furnish 153.
mohecer, to mould 159.
moler, to grind 153.
morder, to bite 153.
morir, to die 177, 187.
mostrar, to show 153.
mover, to move 153.
muir, to milk 168.
mullir, to beat up, to soften 164.
muñir, to call to a meeting 164.
N.
Nacer, to be born 159.
negar, to deny 148.
negrecer, to blacken 159.
nevar, to snow 125, 148.
0.
Obedecer, to obey 159.
obscurecer, to darken, to grow
dark 125, 159.
obstruir, to obstruct 168.
obtener, to obtain, get 35.
ofrecer, to offer 159.
oir, to hear 173.
oler, to smell (pres. huelo etc.,
olemos etc.) 153.
oscurecer, to darken, to grow
dark 125, 153.
P.
Facer, to pasture 159, 193.
padecer, to suffer 159.
'palidecer, to become pale 159.
jparecer, to seem 159.
pedir, to ask for, to order 163.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
404
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
pensar, to think 148.
perder f to lose 148.
perecer, to perish 159.
permanecer, to remaio 169.
pemiqu^rarj to break (the) legs
148.
pergtttrtr, to search for 148.
perseguir, to persecute 163.
pertenecer^ to belong 159.
pervertir J to pervert 167.
pesar, to repent, to weigh 193.
pimpollecer, to bud 159.
placer, to please 159, 193.
plañir, to lament 164.
plastecer, to size 159.
plegar, to fold 148.
poblar, to populate 153.
poder, to be able, can 177.
podrir, to rot 178.
poner, to put, to place 178, 187.
posponer, to postpone 178, 187.
predecir, to predict 173.
predisponer, to predispose 178,
187.
preferir, to prefer 167.
premarir, to die before another
177, 187.
presentir, to forebode 167.
presuponer, to presuppose 178,
187.
prevaler, to prevail 179.
prevalecer, to prevail 159.
prevenir, to warn, to order 180.
prever, to foresee 180.
probar, to prove, to try 153.
producir, to produce 160.
proferir, to proffer 167.
promover, to promote 153.
proponer, to propose 178, 187.
proscribir, to proscribe 187.
proseguir, to continue 163.
prostituir, to prostitute 168.
pudrir, to rot 178.
Q.
Quebrar, to break 148.
qiierer, to like, want, will, wish
178.
B.
Baer, to scrape, to grate 193.
rarefacer, to rarify 177.
readvertir, to warn again 167.
reaparecer, to reappear 159.
reblandecer, to soften 159.
rebullir, to stir 164.
recasr, to fall back, to relapse
173.
recalentar, to warm again 148.
recentar, to leaven 148.
receñir, to gird tight 163, 164.
recluir, to seclade 168.
recocer, to boil again 153, 156.
recolar, to strain a second time
153.
recomendar, to recommend 148.
recomponer, to mend again 178,
187.
reconducir, to renew a lease
160.
reconocer, to recognise 159.
reconstituir, to re-establish 168.
reconstruir, to rebuild 168.
recontar, to count again 153.
reconvalecer, to be convalescent
159.
reconvenir, to recriminate 180.
recordar, to remind, to awake;
— «e, to recollect 153.
recostarse, to lie down on one
side 153.
recrudecer, to increase severely
(an illness, etc.) 159.
redargüir, to retort 168.
reducir, to reduce 160.
reelegir, to re-elect 163.
referir, to refer 167.
reflorecer, to blossom again 159.
refluir, to flow back 168.
reforzar, to reinforce 153.
refregar, to rub hard 148.
refreir, to fry well 163.
regañir, to howl again 164.
regar, to water 14§.
rcigftmcniar, to organise 148.
regir, to govern 163.
regoldar, to eruct 153.
regruñir, to grunt again 164.
rehcuier, to do anew 177.
rehenchir, to fill up again 163,
164.
reherir, to wound a second time
167.
reherrar, to shoe a second time
148.
rehervir, to boil again 167.
rehollar, to tread upon 153.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
405
rehuir, to withdraw 168.
rehumedecer, to moisten again 159.
reir, to laugh 163.
rejuvenecer, to grow young again
159.
relucir, to glitter 159.
remendar^ to mend 148.
remesar^ to pull out hair 148.
remolar, to load dice 153.
remoler, to grind 153.
remover, to remove 153.
remullir, to mollify 164.
renacer^ to be born again, to
regenerate 159.
rendir, to render 163.
renegar, to forswear 148.
renovar, to renew 153.
reñir, to fight, to scold 163, 164.
reoir, to hear again 173.
repacer, to graze up 159, 193.
repadecer, to suffer extremely 159.
repedir, to ask repeatedly 163.
repensar, to think over 148.
repetir, to repeat 163.
replegar, to fold often, to fall
back 148.
repoblar, to repeople 153.
repodrir, to rot excessively 178.
reponer, to answer 178, 187.
reprobar, to reprobate, to scold
153.
reproducir, to reproduce 160.
repudrir, to rot excessively 178.
requebrar, to break into little
pieces, to flirt 148.
requerer, to love intensely 178.
requerir, to request 167.
resaber, to know very well 179.
resdlir, to jut out 179.
rescontrar, to balance an (ac-
count), to compare 153.
resegar, to reap again 148.
resembrar, to resow 148.
resentirse, to resent 167.
resollar, to breathe, to fan 153.
resolver, to resolve 153, 187.
resonar, to resound 153.
resplandecer, to shine 159.
resquebrar, to begin to break 148.
restablecer, to re-establish 159.
restituir, to restore 168.
restregar, to rub, to scrub 148.
restriñir, to bind 164.
retallecer, to sprout again 159.
retener, to retain 35.
retemblar, to tremble again 148.
retentar, to threaten with a new
fit (of illness, etc.) 148.
reteñir, to dye again 163, 164.
retoñecer, to shoot again 159.
retorcer, to twist, etc. (pres.
retuerzo) 153.
retostar, to toast again, to toast
brown 153.
retraer, to retract 179.
retribuir, to reward 168.
retronar, to thunder again 153.
retrotraer, to bring back (past
facts, etc.) 179.
revejecer, to get prematurely old
159.
revenir, to come back 180.
reventar, to burst 148.
rever, to see again 180.
reverdecer, to grow green again,
to regain vigour 159.
reverter, to pour 148.
revestir, to clothe anew 163.
revolar, to fly, to flee again 153.
revolcarse, to welter, to roll, to
wallow 153.
revolver, to stir, to disarrange
153, 187.
robustecer, to invigorate 159.
rodar, to roll 153.
roer, to nibble 193.
rogar, to beg 153.
Saber, to know 179.
salir, to go out 179.
salpimentar, to season with salt
and pepper 148.
salpullir, to break out in pimples
164.
sarpullir^ see salpullir,
sarmentar, to gather cut-off
vine-shoots 148.
satisfacer, to satisfy 177.
seducir, to seduce 160.
segar, to cut, to mow 148.
seguir, to follow 163.
sembrar, to sow 148.
sementar, to sow 148.
sentar, to put ; — se, to sit down
148.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
406
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.
sentir, to feel 167.
ser, to be 40.
serrar, to saw 148.
servir, to serve 163.
sobrecrecer, to outgrow 159.
sobreentender, to understand
something not actually ex-
pressed 148.
sobreponer, to exalt 178, 187.
sobresembrar, to sow over again
148.
sobresolar, to pave anew 153.
sobresalir, to surpass, to
excel 179.
sobrevenir, to happen 180.
sobreventar, to gain the weather
gauge of another ship 148.
sobreverterse, to overflow 148.
sobrevestir, to put on 163.
sofreír, to fry slightly 163.
solar, to sole 153.
soldar, to solder 153.
soler, to use 153.
sollar, to blow (with bellows) 153.
soltar, to loosen 153, 187.
solver, to loosen 187.
somover, to remove (earth) 153.
sonar, to sound; — 5C, to blow
one's nose 153.
sonreír, to smile 163.
soñar, to dream 153.
sonrodarse, to stick in the mud
(a carriage) 153.
sorregar, to water in another
direction 148.
sosegar, to tranquilize 148.
sostener, to hold, maintain, keep
35.
soterrar, to bury 148.
subarrender, to sub-let 148.
subentender, to understand what
is tacitly meant 148.
subseguir, to immediately follow
163.
substituir (sustituir^tto substitute
168.
substraer, to substract, to steal
179.
subtender, to subtend 148.
subvenir, to provide 108.
subvertir, to subvert 167.
sugerir, to suggest 167.
superponer 178, 187.
supervenir 180.
suponer 178, 187.
sustituir see substituir 168.
sustraer see substraer 179.
T.
Tallecer, to shoot, sprout 159.
tañer, to play 164.
temblar, to tremble 148.
tender, to tend, to extend 148.
tener, to hold, to have 35.
tentar, to touch, to try 148.
teñir, to dye 163, 164.
torcer, to turn, to wring (pres.
tuerzo) 153, 191.
tostar, to toast 153.
traducir, to translate 160.
traer, to bring 179.
transcender, to transcend, to
transpire 148.
transferir, to transfer 167.
transfregar, to rub 148.
translucir, to be transparent, to
conjecture 159.
transponer, to transpose, to
set (of the sun) 178, 187.
trascender, to mount over, to pass
148.
trascolar, to strain 153.
trascordarse, to forget 153.
trasegar, to pour over, to trans-
fuse 148.
trasferir, to transfer 167.
trasfregar see transfregar 159.
traslucirse, to shine through 159.
trusoir, to misunderstand 173.
trasoñar, to form a visionary
scheme, to dream 153.
trasponer see transponer 178,
187.
trastrocar, to invert the order
of things 153.
trasverter, to overflow 148.
trasvolar, to fly across 153.
trocar, to exchange 153.
tronar, to thunder 153.
tropezar, to stumble 148.
tullir, to cripple 164.
tumefacerse, to swell 177, 192*.
T.
Valer, to be worth 179.
venir, to come 180.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, 407
ventar, to get wind of 148. Y.
ver, to see 180, 187. Yacer, to lie 193.
verdecer, to grow green 159. ytiactaponer, to put close by
verter f to shed 148. 178, 187.
vestir, to clothe 163.
volar, to fly 153. Z.
volcar, to upset (a carriage); Zabullir, to plunge 164.
—se, to wallow, to welter 153. zaherir, to scold 167.
volver, to turn back, to do once zambullir see zabullir 164.
more 153, 187.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
408
Vocabulary.
Spanish-English.
á, at, in; to, for.
— orinas, at the side (brink,
border, edge, etc.).
aborrecer f to abhor, to detest;
pag. 161. '
abrigo^ n?., coat.
abuelo, grandfather.
acabar, to finish, to terminate.
acasOy perhaps.
aceite, m., oil.
aceituna, f. olive.
aceptar, to accept.
acertar, to succeed in^ to guess ;
page 148.
acomodarse á, to conform one-
self to ... .
actor, tn.y actor.
acusar, to accuse.
adivinar, to guess.
admirable, admirable, wonder-
ful.
adornar, to adorn.
afable, kind, friendly.
afamado, -a, famous.
afligir, to afflict; page 92, 4.
agradar, to please.
agradecido, -a, thankful, grate-
ful.
ahora, now.
al, contr. for á el, to the.
— rededor, round, round about.
alabar, to praise.
alcanzar, to obtain, to get, page
92, 3.
aldea, f, village.
alegre, merry.
alentar, to encourage; page 149.
alfonso (d), the alphonse (a gold
coin) = 25 pesetas = 20 sh.
algo, something.
alma, (el), f, the soul.
almacén, m., shop (store).
almendra, f., almond.
alto, -a, high.
ama, (he, she) loves.
amable, amiable.
amado, loved.
aman, (they) love.
América, f, America,
amigo, m., friend.
amistad, f., friendship.
amo, master.
ancho, -a, broad, large.
andar, to walk, to have inter-
course with, to associate with;
page 172.
— con cuidado, to take care.
ánimo, m., courage.
anunciar, to announce, to im-
part.
año, m., year.
apartarse, to stand away, to
keep back.
apenas, scarcely.
apreciar, to appreciate, to es-
teem.
aprender, to learn.
apuesta, f., wager.
apuro, m., want, necessity.
aqui, here.
— está, here is.
— están, here are.
árbol, m., tree.
arquitectura, /"., architecture.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Spanish-English.
409
arrabal, iw., suburb.
arriesgar, to be at stake, to risk^
page 91, 2.
asegurar, to assure.
asesinar, to murder.
asuntOj m., object, matter.
atreverse, to dare.
ausencia, f,, absence.
Austria^ Austria.
aulor, author.
ave, (él)y f,, bird.
avergonzar(se), to be ashamed,
p¿. 92, 5; 154.
ayer, yesterday.
azúcar, m., sugar.
B.
laile, m., ball.
bajo, a, low.
balcón, m., balcony.
barato, -a, cheap.
barco, m., ship.
barquero, tn., boatman.
bebe, drinks.
bd>edero, m., the trough, bird's
trough.
bien, well, all right.
— (el), the good.
bienes (los), Üie fortune.
billete de banco, m., bank note.
bolsa, f., purse, the Exchange.
bolsillo, m., pocket, purse.
bondad, f,, the goodness.
borrasca, f., thunderstorm.
bota, f,, boot, cask.
buey, m., (pi. bueyes) ox.
Burdeos, Bordeaux.
buscar, to seek, to look for, to
search; page 91, 1,
C.
cabal juicio, él, the good sense.
caballero, gentleman, Mr., Sir.
caballo, m., horse.
cadena, f., chain.
café, «I., coffee, coffee-house.
cojdj /•, hox.
— de cerillas (de fósforos), f,,
box of matches.
— de cigarros, f., cigar-box.
cajetilla de cigarrillos, f, packet
of cigarettes.
calor, m,, heat.
collar, to be silent.
calle, /I, street.
camino, m., road, way.
— real, m., (or carretera, f,)
main-road.
campestre, rural.
campo, m., camp.
canción, f., song.
cansado, -a, tired.
cansar, to tire; cansarse, to get
tired.
capa, /"., the (Spanish) doak.
capaz, capable.
capital, f., the capital, metro-
polis.
capital, m., the capital (money),
fund.
capitán, captain.
carga, f., burden, weight.
carne, f., meat.
carnicero, m., butcher.
carpintero, joiner.
carretera, f,, main-road.
carta, f., letter.
cartas, pL, playing-cards.
ca^a, f., house.
Casa Ayuntamiento, the Town-
hall.
casado, -a, married.
casi, almost.
castillo, HI., castle.
Cataluña, Catalonia.
caudal, m., capital, fund.
causa, f., cause.
célebre, famous, renowned.
céntimo, m., centime.
cercanias(las) , the neighbour-
hood.
cerdo, m., pig.
cerilla, f., match.
cerveza, f., beer.
cetro, m., sceptre.
ciencia, f,, science.
cierto, -a, certain.
cigarro (coUoq. puro), m,, cigar.
cigarrillo (coUoq. un pitillo), m,,
a cigarette.
cinco, five.
circunstancia, f,, the circum-
stance.
ciudad, f., town.
cobre, m,, copper.
colmado, -a, filled.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
410
Vocabulary.
coloTy m., coloar.
comenzar, to begin; pp. 92, 3\
148.
corner^ to eat.
comerciante, m., merchant
comida, /*., dinner, food.
compañero, m., companion.
compañía, f., company.
comprado, bought.
comprar, to buy.
comprender, to understand.
como, as, as well as.
cómo, how.
¿cómo? y how?
con, with.
conceder, to allow, to concede.
concierto, m., concert.
conciudadano, m., citizen.
concluir, to conclude, to finish ;
page 168.
conoce V., you know; page 159.
conocer, to know; page 159.
conocido, m., acquaintance.
conozco, I know; page 159.
conquistar, to conquer.
consejo, m., advice.
conservar, to preserve.
constante, constant.
continuar, to continue.
contar, to count, to number,
to tell (a story, etc.) ; page 153.
contorno, m., outskirts; circum-
ference.
coronar, to crown.
corre, runs.
corregir, to correct, to mend,
pp. 92, 4; 163.
correo, m., post, mail.
corrompen, they corrupt, they
taint.
cosa, f,, thing.
costa, f., coast.
costumbre, /*., custom, habit, man-
ner.
creer, to believe, to think.
criado, m,, footman, servant.
Criador (él), Creator (the).
criatura, /*., creature.
crió (3rd s. def.), (he) created.
cruz, f., cross.
cuadro, m., picture.
cuantioso, -a, considerable.
cuarto, m., room.
cuatro, four.
cuchillo, m., knife.
cuenta, f., account.
cuerdo, -a, reasonable, prudent.
cuero, m., leather.
cuidar, to care.
cumplimiento, m., compliment^s).
chimenea, f., fireplace.
D.
dar, to give; page 173.
dado, given.
de, of, from; by.
— paso, for the time being, ac-
tually.
dehe, he (she) owes, must.
debemos, we must.
deber, to owe, must.
decir, to tell; pp. 173, 187.
dedicado, -a, dedicated.
defecto, m., fault.
degradar, to degrade.
delicioso, -a, delicious.
demás, other.
demasiado, too, too much.
déme V., give me; page 173.
derrotar, to put to flight, to rout
(an array).
descansar, to repose.
desconfiar, to distrust. [187.
descubierto, -a, discovered; page
descuido, m., negligence.
desdichado, {el) unhappy man
(the).
desear, to wish, to desire.
deseo, m., wish, desire.
desgracia, f., misfortune.
desordenado, -a, disorderly.
despacho, m., counting-house,
office.
destinado, -a, destined.
deudor, m., debtor.
di, tell (thou); pag. 173.
diario, m., newspaper.
dicha, f,, fortune.
dicho, said p.p.; pp. 173, 187.
dichoso, happy.
diente, m., tooth; pi. dientes.
diferencia, f., difíerence.
difunto (el), the dead (man), the
late . . .
digno, -a, worthy.
diligencia, f., diligence.
Digitized by vaOOQlC
Spanish-English.
411
diligente, diligent.
dinero^ w., money. [173.
dio (3rd sing, def.), gave; page
DÍ08, God.
dirigir, to direct; page 92, 4.
discípulo, m., pupil, scholar.
divertirse, to amuse oneself;
page 167.
doce, twelve.
dócily obedient.
Don, Mr.
Doña, Mrs., Miss.
dormir, to sleep; page 176.
dos, two.
dttdar, to hesitate.
dudar de, to doubt about.
dueño, master.
dulce, sweet.
duque, duke; f., duquesa,
duro, m., dollar (=5 pesetas
= 4 shillings).
E.
edad, /"., age.
edificio, m., building, edifice.
educación, /*., education.
el, m., the.
él, he.
elección, f., choice, election.
elevar, to elevate.
ella, she.
ellas, they, /".
ellos, they, w.
S, } '0»' *^«y »^«-
fZZos tienen, they have, iw.
eWas tienen, they have, /*.
embajador, m., ambassador.
embustero, m., liar, hypocrite,
cheat. [148.
empezar, to begin; pp. 92, 5;
en, in.
— casa de, in, at the house of.
— medio, in the middle, amidst.
encumbrar, to raise.
enfadado, -a, cross.
engañarse, to be mistaken.
enojarse, to become angry.
Enrique, Henry.
enseñar, to teach, to show.
entre, between, amongst.
entregar, to deliver, to give.
enviado, sent.
eres, thou art; page 40.
error, m., fault, mistake,
es, he (she, it) is; page 40.
— is; page 40.
— excusado, it is superflous.
— preciso, it is necessary, one
must; we (te, le) es preciso,
I (he, we, etc.) must
escoba, f., broom.
escoger, to choose; page 92, 4.
escribir, to write i ^„„^ 107
escrito, written / P^^^ ^^^-
escritorio, m., counting-house,
oflSice.
espacio m., space.
España, f,, Spain.
espejo, m., looking-glass.
esperar, to expect, to wait for.
está, is; page 43.
— , he (she, it) is; page 43.
estación, /*. , season; (railway)
station.
estado, m., state, condition.
estáis, you are; page 43
estamos, we are; page 43,
estampa, f , engraving.
están, are, they are; page 43.
estanco, m., tabacconist-shop.
estar, to be, page 43.
— enterado, to be acquainted.
estás, thou art; page 43.
estimada, -a, esteemed.
estoy, I am; page 43.
estrecho, -a, narrow.
estudia, studies.
estudiar, to study.
estudios (los); (the) studies.
Exposición (la), (the) Exhibition.
extranjero (el), \ ^^^ foreigner
extranjera (la), ( ^
extranjero (el), the foreign coun-
try; al extranjero, abroad.
F.
falta, f., fault.
falleció, he (she) died.
familia, /*., family.
famoso, -sa, famous.
farol^ m., (street) lamp ; lantern.
favor, m., favour, kindness, ser-
vice.
favorable, favourable.
fecha (la), the date.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
412
Vocabulary.
felieidcuí, f., happiness.
feo, -o, ugly.
feroz, ferodooB, wild.
firmar, to sign.
firmeza, f., the firmness.
flor, f, flower.
florero, m., flower-pot
floreciente, flourishing; page 159.
flotar, to float.
fluctúan, they fluctoate.
fortuna, /., fortnne.
fósforo, m,, match.
fruta, f,, fruit
fueron, were (3rd pers. plur.);
pp. 40, 177.
fuerza, f, force, strength.
fumar, to smoke.
fusil, n^., gun.
0.
gana fla), a mind (to do some-
thing); the appetite.
ganar, to earn, to gain, to win.
gastar, to spoil, to spend, to
waste.
género, m., the kind, species.
generoso, -a, generous.
gente, f., sing., (the) people.
girar, to turn round.
gloria, f,, glory.
glorioso, illustrious.
gozo, m., pleasure.
grande, great.
guante, m,, glove.
Guillermo, William.
H.
ha, he (she, it) has.
habéis, you have.
haber, to have (auxil.); page 32.
hábil, able, clever.
habla, he (she) speaks.
hablan, they speak.
hablo, I speak.
hace, makes, does; page 177.
hacer, to make, do; page 177.
—■frio (calor), to be cold (warm).
hacienda, f, fortune, estate.
hallado, found.
hallar, to find.
hambre (el), f, (the) hunger.
han, they have; page 32.
page
hay, there is, there are;
34, 5.
has, thou hast; page 32.
hazaña, f, heroic deed.
he, (I) have; page 82.
hecho, done, made; page 177.
hembra, female.
hemos, we have; page 32.
heredero, heir.
herido, -a, wounded; page 167.
hermano, brother.
hermoso, beautiful.
hierro, m., iron.
holgazán, m., idler.
honradez, f., honesty, decency.
honrado, -a, honoured; honest.
hora, f, hoar.
hoy, to-day.
huerto, m.. orchard.
huir, to flee, to fly; page 168.
I.
iglesia, f., church.
ignorancúi, f, ignorance.
ignorar, not to be aware.
ilusión, f, illusion.
impaciencia, f., impatience.
imperio, m., empire.
incomodar, to molest, incom-
mode.
incomodarse, to take pains, to
trouble oneself.
incuria, f., carelessness.
influencia, f., inflijo, m., in-
fluence.
Inglaterra, f,, England.
injuria, /"., offence.
inventor, in., inventor.
invierno, m., winter.
invitar, to invite.
ir, to go; page 177.
, (to come to see, to
- ^ ^^' / call, to visit
isla, /*., island, isle.
J.
jabón, m., soap.
jardín, m., garden.
jaula, f, cage.
jefe, m., chief.
joven, m,, young man, youth-
— adj., young.
juego, m., game (French jeu)^
Digitized by VjOOQIC
Spanish-English.
418
jueZy m,y judge.
jugar (á los naipes or á las
cartas) y to play (cards); page
153.
junto, -a, together.
Júpiter^ Jupiter.
jusio, -a, just.
K.
Jcüógramo, m,, kilogramme.
lacayo, footman.
ladrón, m., thief, robber.
lamentar, to lament.
lámina, f,, engraving, picture.
lana^ f,, wool.
lápiz, m., pencil.
lastimoso, -a, sorry, sad.
legua, /*., league.
lejos, far.
leña, f., (fire) wood.
levantarse, to get up.
libertad, f., liberty, freedom.
li^ra, f,, pound.
libro, m., book.
limón, m., lemon, citron.
Undo, lovely, sweet.
lino, m., flax, linen.
lisonjear, to flatter.
literato, literary man.
locamente, in a foolish way.
logrado, got, obtained.
lograr, to obtain, to earn, to
gain, to win.
luego, adv., soon.
— que, as soon as.
lugar, m., village.
lujo, m., luxury, magnificence.
luna, /"., moon.
LL
llama, calls.
llamado, called.
llegar, to arrive; page 91, <2.
llenar, to fill, to comply with
(a wish).
Ueva, wears (said of garments).
llevar, to carry, to wear.
M.
madera, /"., wood.
madre, mother.
maestro, master.
majestuoso, -a, majestic.
maltratar, to ill-treat.
manera, f., manner.
mantenimiento, m,, the mainte-
nance, livelihood.
mantiene, maintains; page 35.
mañana, to-morrow.
marcha, /"., march.
nujLS, but.
más, more.
matar, to kill, slaughter.
materia, f., matter.
me, me, to me.
— falta I want
médico, m., physician.
medio, -a, half.
mediodía, m., noon.
memoria, f., (a) report (the)
memoir, memory.
menos, less.
mercancía, f,, merchandise.
Mercurio, Mercury.
mes, m., month.
mesa, f., table.
meter, to put.
mi, my.
miedo, m., fear.
ministro, minister.
mirar, to look at.
mire V., look! (3rd sing. Imper.)
modestia, f., modesty.
morir, to die; page 177.
motivo, in., reason, motive.
muchacho, m,, boy.
mincho, -a, much.
— tiempo ha, it is a good while.
mudar, to change.
muerte, f., death.
muerto, died (p.p.), dead; page
177.
íwt*€síra, shows, proves; page 153.
mundo, w., world.
muy, very.
— de mañana, very early (early
in the morning).
N.
nación, f., nation.
naipes, m., cards (playing).
Ñapóles, Naples.
naranja, f., orange.
natural, native, born in.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
414
Vocabulary.
navegación, ^., navigation.
necesidad, f., necessity.
necesito, I want.
negociante, w., merchant.
negocio, m., business.
niño, m., child, boy.
no, no, not.
— tener ningún inconveniente,
to have no objection.
nombre, m., name.
nosotros, m., nosotras, /"., we.
nosotros (-as) somos, we are.
nosotros (-as) tenemos, we have.
noticia, f., news.
numeroso, -a, numerous.
0.
obispo, bishop.
obra, f., work.
obrar, to work.
obrero, m., workman.
ofender, to oflfend.
oficial, m., officer.
oler, to smell; page 156.
olor, w., the smell.
olvidar, to forget.
onza, f, ounce.
orador, m,, orator.
orden, m,, order (succession).
orden, f., order, command.
ordenar, to order.
orgidlo, m., pride.
otro, -a, another (see Less. 18).
P.
paciencia, f., patience.
padecer, to suffer; page 159.
padecido, suffered.
padre, father.
padres, m. pi, collect, parents.
pagado, paid.
pais, m., country, land.
pájaro, m., bird.
palacio, m., palace.
pan, m., bread; un —, a loaf.
paño, w., cloth.
pañuelo, m., handkerchief,
papel, m., paper.
parecer, to seem; page 159.
pariente, m., relation.
partir, to leave (for), to set out.
pasa, spends (time).
paseo, m., the public walk, pro
ménade.
paz, f.y peace.
pedir, to ask, to demand; page
168.
pegar, to beat; page 91, 2.
pensar, to think; page 148.
pérdida, f,, loss.
perdió, he (she) lost; page 148.
perdona, pardons.
perdonar, to pardon.
periódico (or diario), m., the news-
paper.
peinicioso, dangerous.
pequeño, little, small, short.
pero, but.
perro, m., dog.
perseguir, to persecute ; pp. 91,
^; 163.
pesado, -a, heavy.
peseta (una), = 4 reals or 9^8 d»
piadoso, -a, pious, charitable.
piedra, f., stone.
piensa, thinks; page 148.
pintor, m., painter.
plata, f., silver.
plaza, f., square.
pluma, f., pen.
pobreza, f,, poverty.
poco, -a, a little.
podemos, we can; page 177.
poder, to be able, can ; page 177.
poder, m., power, might.
poético, -a, poetical.
por, by, through.
— desgracia, unfortunately.
¿por qué . . .? why?
porque, because.
portero, m., porter.
potencia, f., power.
precio, m., price.
precioso, -a, precious.
preguntar por, to ask for.
preliminares {los), (the) preli-
minaries.
premiar, to reward.
presumir dc . . ., to overrate.
prima, f., cousin.
primavera, f., the Spring.
primo, m., cousin.
primorosamente, first-rate, very
well.
principe, m., prince.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
Spanish-English.
415
produce^ produces; page 160.
producir^ to produce, cause;
page 160.
promesa, f., promise.
prometer, to promise.
pronto, quick, swift, prompt.
propio -a, proper.
prosperidad^ f., happiness, pros-
perity.
protector, protector.
provincia, f., province.
próocima, -a, near, next.
prudencia, /*., prudence.
prudente, reasonable, prudent.
prudentemente, prudently.
pudor, m., shame.
pueblo, m,, the people.
puente, m., bridge.
puerta, f., door.
puesto, w., place, situation.
puro, m., cigar.
qtie, than; that; to.
¿ qué ? what?
quejarse, to complain.
querer, to wish, like, love; page
178.
quería, loved, wished; page 178.
quien, s., quienes, pi., who.
¿quién? s., ¿quiénes? pi., who?
quiere, he (she) likes; page 178.
quieren, (they) like; page 178.
quieres, thou wilt, page 178.
quiero, I want, I will ; page 178.
K.
raro, -a, rare, seldom.
rajíón, f., reason.
real, m., a real (= 25 cent. =
2^4 pence).
recibido, received. [148.
recomendar, to recommend ; page
recompensar, to reward.
región, f,, region, country.
reina, queen.
reino, m,, kingdom.
rejilla, /"., grating.
reloj, m., watch, clock.
reluce, shines; page 159.
remedio, m., remedy.
repasad, repeat (2nd plur. Im-
perat.).
retirar, to draw (or go) back,
retire.
revolución, /"., revolution.
rey, king.
rico, rich.
rio, m., river.
riqueza, f., (the) riches, wealth.
S.
saber, to know; page 179; 321, í 5.
sabido, learned.
sabiduria, f., wisdom.
sabroso, -a, savoury, delicious.
sabio, -bia, wise.
sacar, to take out, pull out;
pag. 91, 1.
Saturno, Saturne.
se, one, one'self, himself, her-
self, itself, yourself, them-
selves.
— juega, one plays, they play,
etc.
— llama, is named.
— lleva, is worn.
sed, f., thirst.
seda, f., silk.
seguridad, /"., safety, security.
semana, f., week.
sencillez, f., simplicity.
sentarse, to sit down ; page 148.
señas (las), the address.
Señor, gentleman, Mr., Sir.
Señora, lady, Mrs., Madam.
señora, f., (a) lady.
Señorita, Miss.
ser, to be; page 40.
— deudor, to be indebted, to
owe.
— muy solicitado , to be in
(great) demand.
serio, -a, serious.
severo, severe, strict.
si, if.
si, yes; indeed.
siempre, always.
siga, subj. pres. of seguir, to
follow; pp. 91, 2; 163.
siglo, m., century.
silla, f,, chair.
sincero, -a, sincere.
situación, f., situation.
soberbio, -a, proud.
sois, you (ye) are; page 40.
sombrero, m,, hat.
son, are; pp. 40.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
416
Vocabulary.
sonorOy -a, sonorous.
soportar, to bear.
sostener, to maintain, to sustain;
page 35.
soy» 1 am; page 40.
su, his, her, its, their.
su . . . de usted, your . . .
suave, soft, lovely.
subdito, HI., subject;
sucedió, succeeded, followed.
sueño, «n., the sleep, dream.
suerte, f., fate.
sufrido, suffered.
sujeto, adj,, subject.
sus, his, her, its, their.
tabaco, m,, tobacco.
tarde, late.
— (la), (the) afternoon, evening.
té, thee, to thee.
té, m,, tea.
tenter, to fear.
temor y m., fear.
tener, to have (hold), possess;
page 85.
— (or no tener) hambre, to be
(or not to be) hungry.
— (or no tener) inconveniente,
to have any (or to have no)
objection.
— (or no tener) razón, to be
{or not to be) right
— (or no tener) sed, to be (or
not to be) thirsty.
ternero, m., calf.
tia, aunt.
tienda, f., shop.
tiene, he (she, it) has; page 35.
tienes, thou hast; page 35.
tierra, f,, earth.
tinta, f., ink.
tintero, w., inkstand.
tio, uncle.
tocar, to touch; page 91, Í.
todavía, yet; no . . . todavía
(or todavía no), not yet.
íoáo, -a, all, whole,
íoáo cZ, toda la, the whole,
íoáos, -as, all (plural),
¿orno, wi., volume. [gent.
trabajador, -a, laborious, dili-
trabajar, to work.
trabajo, m., labour, work.
tratar, to treat.
— con, to deal with, to treat
ires, three.
trigo, m, corn.
Ü.
único, -a, sole, only.
u«¿cíí, you (polite form).
ustedes (pi.), you.
T.
valentía, f., valour, bravery.
valiente, brave, gallant.
valor, m., bravery, valour.
valle, m., valley.
vano, -a, vain.
vara, f., the (Spanish) yard.
varón, male.
vasallo, w., vassal.
€C, sees; page 180.
vecindad, f., neighbourhood.
vecino, m., neighbour; inhabi-
tant.
vela, f., sail.
velar, to watch.
vencedor, m., conqueror,
vencer, to conquer; page 92, B.
venir, to come; page 180.
— bien, to fit.
— á las manos, to come to
blows.
— á ver, to come to see, to call,
to visit.
ventana, f., window.
ventanillo, m., grating.
Venus, Venus.
ver (irr.), to see; page 180. *
verano, m., summer.
vergonzoso, -a, shameful.
vestido, m., dress.
vestir, to clothe, to dress; page
163.
viajar, to travel.
viaje, m., journey.
viajero, m., traveller.
vicio, m., vice.
vida, f., life. [man.
viejo, vieja, old ; un — , an old
Viena, Vienna.
viene, comes; page 180.
vienen, they come; page 180.
vienes, thou comest.
vino (el), (the) wine.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
English-Spanish .
417
vino, he (she, it) came (fr. venir).
virtud, /"., virtue.
visto, seen; pp. 180, 187.
viuda, widow.
viudo, widower.
vive, lives.
víveres, m. pi., victuals.
vivir, to live, to dwell.
vivo, lively.
volámen, m., volume, circum-
ference, extent.
voluntad, f., will, wish.
volver, to return, come back;
pp. 153, 187.
vosotros, -OS, you (pi., non polite
form).
vosotros (-as) tenéis, you have.
voy, I go; page 177.
vudve, returns, comes back;
pp. 153, 187.
vuelto, p. p. volver; pp. 153,
187.
Y.
y, and.
yo, I.
— tengo, I have.
Z.
zapatero, m., shoemaker.
zapato, m., shoe.
English-Spanish.
A.
abhor (to), aborrecer, page 161.
abhorred, aborrecido.
able, hábil.
abroad, al extranjero.
absence, la ausencia,
accept (to), aceptar.
account, la cuenta.
accuse (to), acusar,
acquaintance, el conocido.
actor, actor.
actually, de paso.
address (the), las señas.
admirable, admirable.
adorn (to), adornar.
advice, el consejo.
afflict (to), afligir, page 92, 4.
afternoon, la tarde.
age, la edad.
all, todo, toda; pi. todos, todas.
allow (to), conceder.
almond, la almendra.
almost, casi.
alphonse (the), el alfonso = 25
pesetas = 20 sh.
always, siempre.
ambassador, el embajador.
America, América.
amiable, amable.
amidst, en medio.
Spanish Conv.-Orammar.
amongst, entre.
amuse oneself (to), divertirse,
page 167.
and, y (sometimes é, see Con-
jnnctions).
announce (to), anunciar.
another, otro, otra.
appetite, el apetito, la gana.
appreciate (to), apreciar.
architecture, la arquitectura.
are; son; están; we—, somos,
estamos; you — , sois, estáis;
see pp. 40, 43.
army, el ejército.
arrive (to), llegar.
arrival Í ^^^ arribo)
arrival, ^ ^^ ¡Ugada.
art (thou), eres, page 40.
as, como.
— well as, como, asi como.
— soon as, luego que.
ask (to), pedir, page 163.
— for (to), preguntar por.
ass, el asno.
associate with (to), andar con,
page 172.
assure (to), asegurar.
at, á.
— the side (brink, border, edge),
á orillas.
attention, la atención.
27
Digitized by VaOOQlC
418
Vocabulary.
aunt, tía.
author, el autor.
B.
balcony, el halcón.
baU, el haile.
banknote, d biUete de banco.
be (to), ser, page 40.
— able (to), poder, page 177.
— acquainted (to), estar enterado.
— ashamed (to), avergongarse,
pp. 92, 3; 154.
— at stake (to), arriesgar, page
91, 2.
— aware (to), saber, pag. 179;
not to — aware, ignorar.
— cold (warm), to; hacer frío
(calor).
— (not to — ) hungry, or thirsty,
to; tener (or no tener) hambre
ó sed.
— in great demand, ser muj^ soli-
citado.
— indebted, ser deudor.
— mistaken, equivocarse, en-
gañarse.
— necessary, ser necesario.
— right (to), tener razón.
— silent (to), callar.
— wrong (to), no tener razón.
— (to), estar, page 43.
bear (to), soportar.
beat (to), pegar, page 91, ^.
beautiful, hermoso, -sa.
because, porque.
become angry (to), enojarse.
beef, la (carne de) vaca.
beer, la cerveza.
beggar, él mendigo.
begin (to), comenzar, empezar;
pp. 92, 3; 148.
behaviour, la conducta.
believe (to), creer.
bet, la apuesta.
between, entre.
bill of exchange, la letra de
cambio.
bird, el ave (f.), el pájaro.
— 's trough, él bebedero.
bishop, obispo.
blow, el golpe.
blunt, embotado, -da, or boto, -ta.
boatman, barquero.
book, el libro.
boot, la bota.
Bordeaux, Burdeos.
born in, natural de.
bought, comprado.
box, la caja, see cigar-box.
— of matches, la caja de ceri-
llas (or de fósforos).
boy, el ftttio, el muchacho.
brave, valiente.
bravery, la valentía, el wilor.
bread, el pan.
broad, ancho^ ancha.
bridge, el puente.
broom, la escoba.
brother, hermano.
building, el edificio.
burden, la carga.
business, el negocio.
but, pero, mas.
butcher, el carnicero.
buy (to), comprar.
by, de, por.
cage, la jaula.
calf, el ternero, la ternera.
cali (to), llamar.
— on (to), ir á ver, venir á ver.
came, vino {fromvenir, page 180).
camp, él campo.
can, poder, page 177.
capable, capaz.
capital, la capital (metropolis);
el capital (money),
capital (fund), el caudal.
captain, capitán.
cards (playing — ), los naipes,
las cartas.
care (to), cuidar.
carelessness, la incuria.
carry (to), llevar.
cask, la bota.
castle, el castillo.
Catalonia, Cataluña.
cause, la causa.
— (to), causar; producir, page
160.
centime, el céntimo.
century, el siglo.
certain, cierto, cierta.
chain, la cadena.
chair, la silla.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
English-Spanish.
419
change (to), mudar.
charitable, piadoso^ sa,
chase, la caza.
cheap, barato, barata.
cheat, el embustero.
chief, el jefe.
child, el niño,
choice, la elección.
choose (to), escoger, page 92, 4.
church, la iglesia.
cigar, el cigarro, (coll.) el puro.
— box, la caja de cigarros,
cigarette, el cigarrillo (colloq. el
pitillo).
circumference, el contorno, la
circunferencia.
circumstance, la circunstancia.
citizen, el conciudadano.
citron, el limón.
clever, hábil, listo, lista,
cloak (the Spanish — ), la capa,
clock, el reloj.
cloth, el paño.
clothe (to), vestir (se), page 163.
coast, la costa,
coat, the, el abrigo.
coffee, d café.
— house, el café,
colour, el color.
come (to), venir, page 180.
— back (to), volver, pp. 153,
187.
— to blows (to), venir á las
manos.
— to see (to), ir (or venir) á ver.
command, la orden.
— (to), mandar, ordenar,
companion, el compañero.
company, la compañía.
complain (to), quejarse.
compliments, los cumplimientos,
comply with (a wish) (to), llenar,
concede (to), conceder.
concert, el concierto.
conclude (to), concluir, page 168.
condition, la condición, el estado.
conform oneself to (to), aco-
modarse á,
conquer (to), conquistar; veneer,
page 92, 3.
conqueror, el vencedor.
considerable, considerable, cuan-
tioso.
constant, constante,
continue (to), continuar.
cook (f), la cocinera,
copper, el cobre.
corn, el trigo,
correct (to), corregir, pp. 92,
4; 163.
corrupt (to), corromper.
count (to), contar, page 153.
counting-house, el despacho, es-
critorio.
country, el pais,
courage, el ánimo.
cousin, primo (m.), prima (f.).
cow, la vaca,
create (to), crear, criar.
Creator (the), el Criador,
creature, la criatura,
cross, enfadado, -da.
cross, la cruz.
crown (to), coronar.
custom, la costumbre.
D.
dangerous, pernicioso, -sa.
dare (to), atreverse,
date, la fecha.
dead, p.p., muerto, page 187.
dead (man, woman), the, el
muerto, la muerta; el difunto,
la difunta.
deal with (to), tratar con.
death, la muerte.
debtor, el deudor,
decency, la decencia, honradez.
dedicate (to), dedicar,
dedicated, dedicado.
deed (heroic — ), la hazaña.
degrade (to), degradar.
delicious, delicioso, -sa; sabro-
so, -sa.
deliver (to), entregar, page 91, 2,
demand (to), pedir, page 163.
descend (to), bajar.
desire, el deseo.
•— (to), desear.
despicable, despreciable.
destined, destinado, -da.
detest (to), aborrecer, page 161.
detested, aborrecido.
die (to), morir, pp. 177, 187;
fallecer, pag. 159.
difference, la diferencia.
Digitized by ^
joogle
420
Vocabulary.
diligence, la diligencia.
diligent, diligente ^ trabajador,
trabajadora,
dine (to), comer.
dinner, la comida.
direct (to), dirigir, page 92, é.
discover (to), descubrir, page 187.
— ed, descubierto, -ta.
disorderly, desordenad, -da.
distribute (to), distribuir, page
168.
distrust (to), desconfiar.
do (to), hacer, page 177.
dog, el perro.
dollar, (un) duro [= 5 pesetas,
or 4 shillings],
done, hecho (see hacer).
donkey, el burro.
door, la puerta.
doubt (to), dudar.
— about (to), dudar de.
draw back (to), retirar(se),
dream, el sueño.
dress, el vestido.
— (to), vestir(se), page 163.
drink (to), beber.
duke, duque (/., duquesa).
dwell (to), vivir.
£.
ear, la oreja.
earn (to), ganar, lograr.
earth, la tierra.
eat (to), comer.
edifice, d edificio.
education, la educación.
election, la elección.
elevate (to), elevar.
empire, el imperio.
encourage (to), alentar, page 148.
England, Inglaterra.
engraving, \ la estampa,
(copperplate)/ la lámina.
escape (to), escapar.
estate, la hacienda.
esteem (to), apreciar, estimar.
«steemed, estimado, -da.
ovening, la tarde.
ewer, él cubo.
Exchange, the, la Bolsa.
Exhibition, la Exposición.
expect (to), esperar.
expense, el gasto, el desembolso.
extent, el volumen.
eye, el ojo.
family, la familia.
famous, famoso, -sa, afamado,
-áa; célebre.
far, lejos.
farrier, el herrador.
fate, la suerte, el hado.
father, padre.
fault, el error, la falta.
favour, el favor.
favourable, favorable.
fear, el temor, el miedo.
— (to), temer.
feeble, débil.
female, hembra.
ferocious, feroz.
fill (to), llenar.
filled, colmado, da; lleno, -na.
find (to), hallar.
finish (to), acabar.
fire-place, la chimenea.
firmness, la firmeza.
first rate, primorosamente.
fit (to), venir bien.
five, cinco.
flatter (to), lisonjear.
flax, el lino.
flee (to), huir, pag. 168.
float (to), flotar.
flourishing, floreciente.
flower, la flor.
— pot, el florero.
fluctuate (to), fluctuar.
fly (to), huir, page 168. [163.
follow (to), suceder; seguir, page
food, la comida, el alimento.
foot, el pié (pi. los pies).
footman, el criado, el lacayo.
for, por, para.
— the time being, de paso.
force, la fuerza.
foreign country (the), el extran-
jero.
foreigner, el extranjero, la ex-
tranjera.
forget (to), olvidar.
fortune, la dicha.^ la fortuna, la
hacienda, los bienes.
found, hallado.
four, cuatro.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
£nglish-Spanish.
421
freedom, la libertad.
friend, amigOy amiga.
friendly, amable, afable.
friendship, la amistad.
frivolity, la ligereza.
from, de.
fruit, la fruta.
fulfil (to), cumplir^ con.
fund, el caudal.
furious, enfurecido.
G.
gain (to), ganar, lograr.
gallant, valiente.
gallon, el galón, el cubo.
game, el juego.
garden, eljardin.
gave, dio, page 173.
generous, generoso.
gentleman, caballero, señor.
get (to), alcanzar, peg. 92, 3.
— tired (to), cansarse.
— up (to), levantarse.
give (to), dar, pag. 173; entregar.
given, dado.
glass, el vaso.
glory, la gloria.
glove, el guante.
go (to), ir, page 177.
— back (to), retirarfse).
God, Dios.
good, bueno, na.
good sense, el cabal juicio.
goodness, la bondad.
got, logrado.
grand-father, abuelo.
— -mother, abuela.
grateful, agradecido.
grating, la rejilla, el ventanillo.
great, grande.
guess (to), acertar, page 148;
adivinar.
gun, el fusil.
H.
habit, el hábito, la costumbre.
hair, el cabello, el pelo.
half, medio, -dia.
hand, la mano.
handkerchief, el pañuelo.
happiness, la felicidad, la di-
cha, la prosperidad.
happy, dichoso, -sa.
hat, el sombrero.
have (to), haber (auxil. p. 32);
tener, p. 35; poseer.
— intercourse with (to), andar
(con), page 172.
— no objection (to), no tener
ningún inconveniente.
head, la cabeza.
heavy, pesado, -da.
he, él.
— is, (él) es.
heat, el calor.
heir, heredero.
Henry, Enrique.
her, su, sus.
here, aquí.
— is, aqui está.
— are, aquí están.
herself, se.
hesitate (to), dudar.
high, alto, alta.
himself, se.
his, su, sus.
honest, honrado, -da.
honesty, la honradez, decencia.
honoured, honrado, -da.
horse, el caballo.
hour, la hora.
house, la casa.
how, como.
how?, ¿cómo?
hunger, el hambre (f.).
hungry [See to be — ].
hunting, la caza.
hypocrite, el embustero, el hipó-
crita.
I.
I, yo.
idler, el holgazán.
if, si.
ignorance, la ignorancia.
ill, adj., enfermo, -ma.
ill-treat (to), maltratar.
illusion, la ilusión.
illustrious, glorioso, -sa.
impart (to), anunciar.
impatience, la impaciencia.
in, en, á.
— a foolish way, locamente.
— the middle, en medio.
incommode (to), incomodar, mo-
lestar.
indeed, si; ciertamente.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
422
Vocabulary.
infamoas, infame,
inflaeDce, la influencia, el in-
flujo.
inhabitant, el vedno.
ink, la tinta.
— stand, el tintero.
intention, la intención.
inventor, el inventor.
invite (to), invitar, convidar.
iron, él hierro.
i8, e«, page 40.
— , estay page 43.
— mistaken, se engaña, se
equivoca.
— named, se Hama.
— worn, se lleva.
island, (una) isla.
isle, la isla (de).
it, 7o, la.
— is, es, lo es.
a good while, mucho tiem-
po há.
cold, hace frió.
necessary, es preciso.
its, su, sus.
itself, se.
J«
joiner, le carpintero.
journey, el viaje.
judge, el juez.
just, justo, 'ta.
K.
keep (to), guardar; cumplir con.
— back (to), apartarse.
kilogramme, el kilogramo.
kill (to), matar.
kind, el género.
kind, amable, afable.
kindness, el favor, la bondad.
king, rey.
kingdom, el reino,
knife, el cuchillo.
know (things) to, saber, page 179.
— (persons), to, conocer, page
159.
knowledge, d conocimiento.
L.
labour, el trabajo.
laborious, trabajador, -dora.
lament (to), lamentar.
ten, } «' f-rol.
land, eUpais, el terreno, la tierra.
large, ancho, ancha.
late, adv., tarde.
— (the), el difunto, la difunta.
league, la legua.
learn (to), aprender.
learned, sabido.
leather, el cuero.
leave for (to), partir (or salir)
para.
lemon, el limón,
less, menos.
letter, la carta.
levity, la ligereza,
liar, el embustero, el mentiroso,
liberty, la libertad.
lie, la mentira.
life, la vida.
like (to), querer, pp. 148, 178.
likewise, también, igualmente.
line, el lino.
literary man, el literato.
little, pequeño, -ña.
— (a), poco, poca.
live (to), vivir.
lively, vivo; lindo.
livelihood, el mantenimiento.
look at (to), mirar.
— for (to), buscar, page 91, 1.
looking-glass, el espejo.
loose (to), perder, page 148.
loss, la pérdida.
love (to), amar; querer, pp. 148,
178.
loved, amado.
low, bajo, baja,
luxury, el lujo,
M.
Madam, Señora.
made, hecho (see hacer).
magnificence, el lujo.
mail, el correo.
main-road, el camino real, la
carretera.
maintain (to), sostener, mantener,
pag. 85.
maintenance, el mantenimiento,
majestic, majestuoso, -sa.
male, varón.
manner, la costumbre, la manera^
Digitized by vaOOQlC
English-Spanish.
423
march, la marcha.
— carefully (to), andar con cui-
dado,
married, casado, -da.
master, el dtieño, el amo.
— (teacher), maestro.
match, la certUa, el fósforo,
matter, el asuntOy la materia.
me, to — ; me.
meat, la came.
memoir, \ ,
memorj^, / ^ ^^mona.
mend (to), corregir y pp. 92, 4;
163.
merchandise, la mercancía.
merchant, el comerciante, el ne-
gociante.
merry, alegre.
might, el poder.
mind (to do something), a, la
gana.
minister, el ministro.
misfortune, la desgracia.
Miss, señorita, doña.
mistake, la falta^ el error.
modesty, la modestia,
molest (to), incomodar, molestar.
money, el dinero.
month, el mes.
moon, la luna.
more, má^.
— than, más que^ (with nume-
rals and sentences) más de»
mother, madre.
motive, él motivo, la razón.
mouth, la boca.
movement, el ejercicio.
Mr., Señor, don.
Mrs., Señora, doña.
much, mucho; mucho, -cha.
murder (to), asesinar.
must, ser preciso, deber.
mutton, el carnero.
my, mi.
N.
name, el nombre.
narrow, estrecho, -cha.
nation, la nación.
native, natural.
navigation, la navegación.
near, próximo, -ma.
— , adv., cerca.
necessity, la necesidad, el apuro.
negligence, el descuido.
neighbour, el vecino.
— hood, las cercanías, la vecindad.
news, la noticia.
— paper, el diario, el periódico.
next, próximo, -ma.
no, no.
noise, el ruido.
noon, (el) mediodía.
nose, la nariz.
not, no.
— yet, no . . . todavía, or to-
davía no.
now, ahora.
noxious, dañoso, nocivo.
number (to), contar, page 153.
numerous, numeroso, -sa.
O.
obedient, obediente, dócil.
object, el asunto.
obtain (to)^ obtener, page 35;
lograr', alanzar, page 92, 3.
obtained, logrado, obtenido.
of, de.
oflfence, la injuria, la ofensa.
offend (to), ofender.
office, el despacho, la oficina,
el escritorio.
officer, el official.
oil, el aceite.
old, viejo, vieja.
olive, la aceituna.
one (impers.), se.
— must, es preciso.
oneself, se.
only, único, única.
— (adv.), únicamente.
opportunity, la ocasión.
or, ó (sometimes ú; see Coii-
Janctions).
orange, la naranja.
orator, el orador.
orchard, el huerto.
order, el orden (succession).
— , la orden (^command>.
— (to), mandar, ordenar.
other, otro, otra.
other(s), the, lo(s) demás.
ounce, la onza.
outskirts, el contomo.
overrate (to), presumir de.
Digitized by VaOOQlC
424
Vocabulary.
owe (to), deber, ser deudor, ser
preciso.
ox, el buey (pl. los bueyes).
packet of cigarettes, la cajetilla
de cigariUos.
paid, pagado.
pains, el trabajo,
painter, el pintor.
palace, el palacio.
paper, el papel.
pardon (to), perdonar.
parents, los padres.
patience, la paciencia.
pay (to), pagar, page 91, 2.
— a visit (to), ir á ver, venir
á ver.
payment, el pago, salario.
peace, la paz.
pen, la pluma.
pencil, el lápiz.
people^ la gente (eiug.\ el pueblo.
perhaps, acaso, taUvez, quizá.
persecute (to), perseguir, pp.
91, 2; 163.
peseta, la peseta = 100 cents,
or 9Vs d.
physician, él médico.
picture, él cuadro.
pig, el cerdo.
pious, piadoso, -sa.
pipe, la pipa.
pitiful, piadoso, 'Sa.
place, el lugar; el puesto.
play (to), jugar, page 91, ;^; 158.
— cards (to), jugar á las cartas
(or á los naipes).
please (to), agradar.
pleasure, el gozo placer.
pocket, él bolsillo.
poetical, poético, poética.
policeman, el municipal.
poor,. pobre.
porter, portero.
position, la posición.
post, él correo.
pound, la libra.
poverty, la pob eza.
power, el poder; la potencia.
praise (to), alabar.
precious, precioso, -sa.
preliminaries, los preliminares.
preserve (to), conservar.
price, el precio.
pride, él orgullo.
prince, él principe.
produce (to), producir ^ page 160.
projectile, él proyectil.
promenade, el paseo.
promise, la promesa.
— (to), prometer.
prompt, pronto.
proper, propio, -a.
property, la propiedad.
prosperity, la prosperidad.
protector, el protector.
proud, soberbio, -bia.
proof, la prueba.
— (to), mostrar, probar, page 153.
province, la provincia.
prudence, la prudencia.
prudent, prudente, cuerdo.
prudently, prudentemente.
pull out (to), sacar, page 91, 1.
punishment, él castigo.
pupil, el discípulo.
purse, la b(^a, el bolsillo.
put (to), meter: poner, pp. 178,
187.
— to flight (to), derrotar.
quarrel (to), reñir, page 163, 164
note; regañar.
queen, reina.
quickly, ligero, deprisa; pronto.
B.
raise (to), encumbrar.
rampart, la valla.
rare, raro, rara.
read (to), leer.
reason, la razón, él motive.
reasonable, razonable, cuerdo,
prudente.
receive (to), recibir.
received, recibido.
recommend (to), recomendar,
page 148.
region, la región.
relation (a), el pariente.
remedy, d remedio.
renowned, famoso, -sa; célebre.
repeat (to), repasar; repetir, page
153.
Digitized by VjOOQIC
English-Spanish.
425
report, la memoria.
repose (to), reposar, descansar.
respectable, respetable, honrado.
retire (to), retirar (se).
return (to), volver, pp. 153, 187.
revolution, la revoltmón.
reward (to), premiar, recom-
pensar.
rich, rico, rica.
riches, laCs) riquezafs).
risk (to), arriesgar, page 91, 2.
river, el rio.
road, el camino.
robber, el ladrón.
room, el cuarto.
-"ab¿ut, } «^ re^euor.
rout (an army) (to), derrotar.
run (to), correr.
rural, campestre, rural.
S.
sad, lastimoso, triste.
safety, la seguridad.
sage, sabio, sabia.
said, dicho, pp. 173, 187.
sail, la vela.
savoury, sabroso, -sa.
say (to), decir, page 173, 187.
scarcely, apenas.
sceptre, el cetro.
scholar, el discípulo.
science, la cienda.
scold (to), reñir, page 163, 164
note; regañar.
sea, el mar.
search (to), buscar, page 91, 1.
season, la estación.
security, la seguridad.
see (to), ver, page 180.
seem (to), parecer, page 159.
seen, visto (fr. ver), pp. 180, 187.
seldom, raro, raramente.
send (to), enviar.
sent, enviado.
serious, serio, seria.
servant, la criada; (man) — , el
criado.
service, el favor, el servicio.
set out (to), partir.
severe, severo, -ra.
shame, el pudor; la vergüenza.
shameful, vergonzoso, -sa.
she, ella.
— is, (ella) es.
shine (to), relucir, page 159.
ship, el barco, el buque.
shoe, el zapato.
shop, la tienda, (store) el al-
macén.
short, pequeño, -ña; corto, -ta.
show (to), mostrar, page 153.
sick, adj. enfermo, -ma.
sign (to), firmar.
silk, la seda.
silver, la plata.
simplicity, la sencillez.
sincere, sincero, -ra.
Sir, caballero.
sit down (to), sentarse, page 148.
situation, la situación, el puesto.
slaughter (to), matar.
sleep, el sueño.
— - (to), dormir, page 177.
slowly, lentamente, despacio.
small, pequeño, -ña.
smell, el olor.
— (to), oler, pag. 156.
smoke (to), fumar.
soap, el jabón.
soft, suave.
sole, único, única.
something, algo.
song, la canción.
sonorous, sonoro, -ra.
soon, luego.
sorry, lastimoso, triste.
soul, el alma (f.).
southern, meridional.
space, el espacio.
Spain, España.
speak (to), hablar.
species, el género, la especie.
spend (to), gastar.
— (time), (to), pasar el (tiempo).
spoil (to), gastar, echar (se) á
perder.
spring, la primavera.
square, la plaza.
stand away (to), apartarse.
state, el estado.
stomach, el estómago.
stone, la piedra.
store, el amacén,
straw, la paja.
street, la calle.
27**
Digitized by VaOOQlC
426
Vocabulary.
streetlamp, d farol.
streDgth, la fuerza,
strict, severo, -ra; estricto, -ta,
study, el estudio.
— (to), estudiar.
subject, el subdito; el sujeto.
suburb, el arrabal.
succeed (to), suceder.
— in (to), acertar, page 148.
suffer, sufrir, padecer, page 159.
— ed, padecido, sufrido.
sugar, el azúcar.
summer, el verano.
superfluous, excusado, supérfluo.
superior (tbe), el jefe.
sustain (to), sostener, mantener,
page 35.
sweet, dulce, (pretty) Undo.
swift, pronto.
sword, la espada.
T.
table, la mesa.
taint (to), corromper,
take (to), tomar.
— care (to), tener cuidado, cui-
dar (se).
— out (to), sacar, page 91, J.
— pains (to), incomodarse.
tea, el té.
terminate (to), terminar, acabar.
tell (to), decir, pp. 173, 187.
— me, dime, dígame V.
tell (a story, etc.), (to), contar,
page 153.
than, que, (with numerals and
sentences) de.
thankful, agradecido. *•
thanks, gracias.
that (conj.), que.
— (pron.), ese, esa, eso; aquel,
aquella, aquéllo.
the, el, la, los, las; — (m. sing.)
al.
— whole . . . todo el . . ., toda
la . . .
thee (to), te.
their, su, sus.
themselves, se.
there, allí.
— is, — are, hay.
— was, — were, había.
these, estos, estas.
they, ellos (m.), ellas (f.).
thief, el ladrón.
thing, (una) cosa.
think (to), pensar, page 148;
creer.
thirst, la sed.
thirsty [see to be—].
this, este, esta, esto.
those, esos, esas; aquellos,
aquelU^.
three, tres.
through, por; á través.
thunderbolt, el trueno.
thunderstorm, la tronada, la
borrasca, la tempestad.
tire (to), cansar.
tired, cansado.
to, ó, para; que.
tobacco, el tabaco.
tobacconist-shop, el estanco.
to-day, hoy.
together, junto, juntos.
tomorrow, mañana.
too, demasiado, además, también,
— much, demasiado.
tooth, el diente (pl. los dientes).
touch (to), tocar, page 91, 1.
town, la ciudad.
Town hall (the), la Casa Ayun-
tamiento.
traveller, el viajero.
treat (to), tratar.
tree, él árbol.
trouble oneself (to), incomodarse.
trough, el bebedero.
turn round (to), girar.
twelve, doce.
two, dos.
U.
ugly, feo, fea.
uncle, tío.
understand (to), comprender.
unfortunately, por desgracia.
unhappy man (the), el desdichado.
V.
vain, vano, vatia.
valley, el valle.
valour, la valentía, el valor.
vassal, el vasallo.
very, muy.
— early in the morning, mu¡/
de mañana.
Digitized
by Google
English-Spanish.
427
very well, primorosamente.
vice, el vicio.
victuals, los víveres,
village, la aldeas él lugar,
virtue, la virtud,
visit (to), visitar^ or ir (or venir)
á ver.
volume, el volumen^ el tomo.
W.
wager, la apuesta.
wait for (to), esperar (á),
walk, public — , él paseo,
— (to), andar y page 172.
want, el apuro, la necesidad,
— (to), f altar, necesitar] I want,
me falta, necesito,
— (to), querer, pp. 148, 178.
waste (to), gastar.
watch, el reloj,
— (to), velar.
way, el camino.
we, nosotros (m.), nosotras (f.).
wealth, la riqueza.
wear (to), llevar.
weddinff / ^^ hoda.
^' \ las nupcias,
week, la semana.
weight, la carga, el peso.
what?, ¿qué?
why?, ¿por qué?
who, quien (sing.), quienes (pl.).
who ?, ¿ quién ? (sing.), ¿ quiénes ?
(pl.)
whole, todo, toda (see the — ).
widow, -rer, viuda, viudo.
wild, feroz,
will (the), la voluntad,
—, querer, pp. 148, 178.
William, Guillermo.
willingly, con mucho gusto.
win (to), ganar, lograr,
wind, él viento.
window, la ventana,
wine, el vino.
winter, el invierno.
wisdom, la sabiduría,
wise, 8CLl)iOy 'hia.
wish, el deseo^ la voluntad.
— (to), desear, querer, pp. 148,
178.
with, con.
— pleasure, con mucho gusto.
wonderful, admirable,
„^^A i ^(^ leña,
^^^^> \ la madera.
wool, la lana,
word, la palabra,
work, el trabajo, la obra,
— (to), trabajar, obrar.
workman, el obrero, el trabajador,
world, él mundo,
worthy, digno, digna.
wounded, herido, page 167.
write (to), escribir, page 187.
written, escrito, page 187.
yard (Spanish — ), la vara.
year, el año,
yes, si,
yesterday, ayer.
you (polite form), usted; (pl.)
ustedes.
— (non-polite form.), tú; (pl.)
vosotros, -as,
young, joven.
— man, el joven,
your, su , , . de V.
yourself, \
yourselves, /
youth (young man), el joven.
-*^:§— Ce^O— §3-0-
Digitized by VjOOQIC
I
!
Digitized by VaOOQlC
.ami
«^..tp^ Educational Works and Glass-Books
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauek
FOR THE STUDY OF MODERN LANGUAGES.
PUBLISHBJD BT JULIUS GrOOS, HfilBELBERa.
«With each newly-learnt language one wins a new soul.» Charles V.
«At the end of the 19* century the world is ruled by the interest for
trade and traffic; it breaks through the barriers which separate
the peoples and ties up new relations between the nations.»
William II.
,yjuliu8 GfooBy Fuhlisher, has for the last fifty years been devoting his
special attention to educational tvorlcs on modern languages, and has published
a large number of class-booUs for the study of those modern languages most
generally spoken. In this particular department he is in our opinion unsur-
passed by any other German publisher. The series consists of_ 290 volumes
of different sizes which are all arranged on the same system, as is easily
seen by a glance at the grammars tvhich so closely resemble one another,
that an acquaintance with one greatly facilitates the study of the others.
This is no small advantage in these exacting times when the knowledge of
one language alone is hardly deemed sufficient.
The textbooks of the Gaspey - Otto "Sauer method have, within the
last ten years, acquired an universal reputation, increasing in pro-
portion as a knowledge of living languages has become a necessity of modern
life. The chief advantages, by which they compare favorably with thousands
of similar books, are Jmoness of price and good appearance, the happy union
of theory and practice, the clear scientific basis of the grammar proper com-
bined with practical conversational exercises, and the system, here
conceived for the first time and consistently carried out, by which the pupil is
really taught to speak and write the foreign language.
The grammars are all divided into two parts, commencing with a
systematic explanation of the rules for pronunciation, and are again sub-
divided into a number of Lessons* Each Part treats of the Parts of Speech
in succession, the first giving a rapid sketch of the fundamental rules, which
are explained more fully in the second.
The rules appear to us to be clearly given, they are explained by examples,
and the exercises are quite sufficient.
To this method is entirely due the enormous success unth which the
Gaspey-OttO'-Sauer textbooks have met; most other grammars either
content themselves toith giving the theoretical exposition of the grammatical
forms and trouble the pupil with a confused mass of the most far-fetched
irregularities and eacceptions withotit ever applying thetn, or go
to the other extreme, and simply teoA^h him to repeat in a parrot-
like manner a few colloquial phrases unthout letting him grasp the
real genius of the foreign language.
The system referred to is easily discoverable: 1. in the arrangement of
the grammar: 2. in the endeavour to enable the pupu to understand a
regular text as soon as possible, and above all to teach him to speak the
foreign hinguage; this latter point toas considered by the authors so particu-
larly characteristic of their toorks, that they have styled them — to distinguish
them from other tvorlts of a similar kind — Conversational €h*ammars»
digitized by VjOO^IC
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of Modern laogoages.
The first series comprises manuals for the use of Englishmen and
consists of 54 volumes.
Our admiration for this rich collection of worUiSy for the method dis-
played and the fertile genius of certain of the authors, is increorsed token we
examine the other serieSf which are intended for the use of foreigners.
In these works the chief difficulty under which several of the authors
have laboured, has been the necessity of teaching a language in a foreign
idiom; not to inention the peculiar difficulties which the German idiom offers
in writing school-hooks for the study of that language.
We must confess that for those persons ufho, from a pmcticaZ point
of view, wish to learn a foreign language sufficiently well to enable them to
twite and speak it with ease, the authors have set down the gram^natical
rules in «wcA a way, that it is equally easy to understand and to learn them.
Moreover, we cannot but commend the elegance and neatness of the type
and binding of the bodies. It is doubtless on this account too that these
volumes have been received mth so much favour and that several Imve rea^^ied
such a large circulation.
We willingly testify that the whole collection gives proof of much care
and industry, both with regard to the aims it has in view and the ivay. in
whdch these have been carried out, and, moreover, reflects great credit on the
editor, this collection being in reality quite an exceptional thing of its Mnd."
. . . . Í.
(Eoctract fronh the Literary Review.)
All books bound.
EpglishL Editions^
Elementary Modern Armenian Qrammar by Gnlian ...
Arabic Grammar by Thatcher . . . . j . .
Key to the Arabic Grammar by Thatcher
Arabic Chrestomathy by Harder
Danish CoDversation- Grammar by Thomas
Key to the Danish Gonversatiou- Grammar by Thomas
Dntelft Conversation-Grammar by Valette. 2. Ed
Key to the Dutch Convers.-Grammar by Valette
Dutch Reader by Valette. 2. Ed
JB^renelft Conversation-Grammar by Otto-Onions. 13. Ed. . . net
Key to the French Convers.-Grammar by Otto-Onions. 8. Ed
Elementary French Grammar by Wright. 4. Ed
French Reader by Onions
Materials for French Prose Composition by Otto-Onions. 5. Ed. . .
French Dialogues by Otto-Corkran
Cl^erntan Conversation-Grammar by Otto. 29. Ed net
Key to the Gkrman Convers.-Grammar by Otto. 21. Ed
Elementary German Grammar by Otto. 9. Ed
First German Book by Otto. 9. Ed
German Reader. I. 8. Ed.; H. 5. Ed.; III. 2. Ed. by Otto . . each
Materials for translating English into German by Otto- Wright. 7. Ed.
Key to the Mater, f. tr. Engl. 1. Germ, by Otto. 8. Ed.
German Dialogues by Otto. 5. Ed
Accidence of the German language by Otto-Wright. 2. Ed. . . .
Handbook of English and German Idioms by Lange
German Verbs with their appropriate prepositions etc. by Tebbitt .
Julius Oroos, London. Paris. Borne. St. Petersburgh. Heidelberg.
1 05
3 50
1
3 50,
2 \0\
70
75
60
li-
so
70
05
85
65
50
70
45
85
85
60
50
45
60
35
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the stady of modern laogaages.
English Editions^
The Haussa language (Die Haussasprache ; la langue haoussa) by Seidel
Hindustani Conversation -Grammar by Clair -Tisdall
Key to the Hindustani Convers.- Grammar by Clair -Tisdall
Italian Conversation-Grammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 9. Ed. net
Key to the Italian €k)nvers.-6rammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 8. Ed
Elementary Italian Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed
Italian Reader by Cattaneo. 2. Ed
Italian Dialogues by Motti
Japanese Conversation-Grammar by Plant
Key to the Japanese Oony.-Grammar by Plant
Modem Persian Conversation-Grammar by St. Clair-Tisdall
Key to the Mod. Persian Convers.-Grammar by St. Glair-TisdaU
Portns^nese Conversation-Grammar bj Eordgien and Eunow
Key to the Portuguese Clonvers.-Grainmar by Kordgien and Kanow . . .
Unssian Conversation-Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed
Key to the Bnssian Conyers.-Grammar by Motti. 8. Bd
Elementary Russian Grammar by Motti. 2. Ed
Key to the Klementary Bnssian Grammar by Motti. 2. £d
Russian Reader by Werkbaupt and Roller
ISpanish Conversation-Grammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 7. Ed. net
Key to the Spanish €k)nver8.-Grammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 6. £d. . . .
Elementary Spanish Grammar by Favia. 2. Ed
Spanish Reader by Arteaga
Spanish Dialogues by Sauer-Corkran
Elementary Swedish Grammar by Port. 2. Ed
Turkish Conversation -Grammar by Hagopian
Key to the Turkish Convers.-Grammar by Hagopian
Ara.'bic Edition*
Eleine deutsehe Sprachlehre for Araber von Hartmann ....
Ai*meiiia>n Edition*
Elementary ISnglish Grammar for Armenians by Gulian ....
Bulgarian Editions,
Eleine deutsehe Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky. 2. Aufl.
Eleine en^^lisehe Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky . .
Eleine firanzSsisehe Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky .
Qeirman Editions,
Arabisehe Eonversations-Grammatik v. Harder. 2. Aufl. . . .
Schlüssel daza v. Harder. 8. Anfl
Arabisehe Chrfestomathie v. Harder
JBuIs^arische Eonversations-Grammatik v. Gawriysky ....
Schlüssel dazu v. (Jawriysky
Chinesisehe Eonversations-Grammatik v. Seidel
Schlüssel daza v. Seidel ^
Eleine chinesische Sprachlehre v. Seidel
Schlüssel daza v. Seidel
Dftnische Eonversations-Grammatik v. Wied. 2. Aufl
Schlüssel daza v. Wied. 2. Aufl
Duala Sprachlehre und WSrterbuch v, Seidel . ojgtiz^dbyGop^lc.
Jalias Oroos, London. Paris. Borne. 8t Peteribargh. Heidelberg.
Method Gaspey-OttoSauer
for the stady of Modern langnages.
Grei*ina.ii £2clitions«
Aufl.
liiifflische Eonversationfi-Grammatik y. G^spey-Runge. 25.
Schlossel daza v. Range
Englisclies Eony^rsations-Lesebucli v. Gkwpey-Runge. 6. Aufl. . .
Kleine englische Sprachlehre v. Otto-Runge. 7. Aufl
Schlüssel dasa v. Bange
Englische Gespr&olie v. Runge. 2. Aun
Materialien z. Übersetzen ins Englische v. Otto-Runge. 4. Aufl. . .
Englische Chrestomathie v. Süpfle- Wright. 9. Aufl
Handbuch englischer und deutscher Idiome v. Lange
E^e SpracUehre und WOrterbach v. Seidel
Eleine finnisehe Sprachlehre y. Neuhaus
Franzdsisehe Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Otto-Runge. 28. Aufl.
8chlü886l dazu y. Range
Franz. Eony.-Lesebuch I. 10. Aufl., II. 5. Aufl. y. Otto-Runge. h . .
Franz. Eony.-Leseb. f. Madchsch. y. Otto-Runge I. 5. Aufl., IL 3. Aufl. k
Eleine franzdsische Sprachlehre y. Otto-Runge. 9. Aufl
Schlñssel daza v. Range
Materialien z. Übersetzen ins FranzOsische y. Runge
FranzOsische Ge8pr3,che y. Otto-Runge. 8. Aufl
Franzdsisches Lesebuch y. Süpfle. 11. Aufl
Italieniselie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Sauer. 12. Aufl. . .
Schlttssel daza v. Cattaneo
Italienisches Eonyersations-Lesebuch y. Sauer. 5. Aufl
Italienische Chrestomathie y. Cattaneo. 3. Aufl
Eleine italienische Sprachlehre y. Sauer. 10. Aufl
Sohlússel dazu v. Cattaneo. 2. Aufl
Italienische Gespnlche y. Sauer-Motti. 5. Aufl
Übungsstücke zum Übers. a. d. Déutschen i. Ital. y. Lardelli. 5. Aufl.
Japanische Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Plant
Schlüssel dazu v. Plant . ,
Marokkanische Sprachlehre y. Seidel
JVeiigriechische Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Fetraris ....
Schlüssel daza y. Fetraris ^
Lehrbuch der neugriechischen Volksspraohe v. Petraris
BiiederlM.ndisc]ie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Valette. 2. Aufl.
Schlüssel daza y. Valette
Niederlándisches Eony.-Lesebuch v. Valette. 2. Aufl
Eleine niederlándische Sprachlehre v. Valette. 3. Aufl
Polniscke Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl. .
Schlüssel daza y. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl
Portuffiesisclie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Ey
Schlüssel aazu v. Ey
Eleine portugiesische Sprachlehre y. Eordgien-Ey. 4. Aufl. . . .
Bnssische Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Fuchs. 5. Aufl
Schlüssel daza v. Fachs. 5. Aufl
Russisches Eonyersations-Lesebuch y. Werkhaupt
Eleine russische Sprachlehre y. Motti. 2. Aufl
Schlüssel daza v. Motti. 2. Aufl
ISckwedisdie Eonyersations-Grammatik v. Walter. 2. Aufl. .
Schlüssel dazu v. Walter. 2. Aufl
Eleine schwedische Spradilehre y. Fort. 2. Aufl. ....!! .
ISpanisdie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Sauer-Ruppert.r^^ Aufl.
Schlüssel daza v. Ruppert. 3. Aufl nigi^^ed.by V»00.
T
JoliuB GroOB. London. Paris. Rome. St. Petersbargh. Heidelberg.
Method Gaspey-Otto-Saner
for the stody of modern laAgaages.
Spanisches Lesebuch v. Arteaga . .
ETieine spanische Spracblehre v. Saner. 7. Aufl
Schliissel dasu v. Buuge. 2. Aufl
Spanisclie Ge8pr9.che v. Sauer. 3. Aufl
Spanische Rektionsliste v. Sauer-Kordgien
8aahili Eonversations-Qrammatik v. Seidel . . . .
Schlüssel daza v. Seidel
Suahili WOrterbuch v. Seidel
Tsdiechische Eonyersations-Grammatik v. Maschner.
Sohlñssel daza v. Maschner
Tfirkisehe Eonversations-Grammatik v. Jehlitsclika .
Schlüssel daza v. Jehlitschka
Eleine mis^ariselie Sprachlehre v. Nagy. 2. Aufl. .
Schlüssel daza v. Nagy
Ungarische Chrestomathie v. Eont
7. Éd.
each
Frencli Edltioiis,
Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicolas. 18. Éd. .
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicplas.
Petite grammaire allemande par Otto-Vcrrier. 10. Éd. . . .
Lectures allemandes par Otto. I. 7. Éd., II. 5. Éd., III. 2. Éd.
Erates deutsches Lesebuch von Verrier
Conversations allemandes par Otto-Verrier. 5. Éd
Grammaire an^^laise par Mauron- Verrier. 10. Éd
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire aoglaise par Maaron- Verrier. 6. Éd. . .
Petite grammaire anglaise par Mauron. 7. Éd
Lectures anglaises par Mauron. 3. Éd
Conversations anglaises par Corkran. 2. Éd
Grammaire árabe par Armez
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire árabe par Armez
Chrestomathie árabe par Harder
La langue cong^olaise par Seidel-Struyf
Grammaire ^recqiie par Capos
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire grecqae par Capos
Petite grammaire hongroine par Eont
Corrige des themes de la petite grammaire hongroise par Kont
Chrestomathie hongroise par Eont
Grammaire italienne par Sauer. 11. Éd
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire itaUenne par Sauer. 7.Éd
Petite grammaire italienne par Motti. 4. £d
Chrestomathie italienne par Cattoneo. 2. Éd
Conversations italiennes par Motti. 2. Éd
Grammaire Japonaise par Plaut
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire japouaise par Plaut
Grammaire néerlandaise par Valette. 2. Éd
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire néerlandaise par Valette
Lectures néerlandaises par Valette. 2. Éd
Grammaire portüs^aise par Armez
Corrige de la Grammaire portugaise par Armez
Grammaire russe par Puchs-Nicolas. 4. Éd
Corrige des themes de la Grammaire rasse par Fuchs-Kioolas. 4. Éd. . . .
Petite grammaire russe par Motti. 2. Éd
Corrige des themes de la petite grammaire ruase par Motti. 2. Édr^. . t .
Lectures russea par Werkhaupt et Roller . , . ^qtzed by v^pO^lC ,
30
70
30
65
60
75
60
85
75
60
80
05
70
30
30
30
60
70
70
85
-60
1 30
— «o
- 170
I —
60
50
50
3
1
3
1 40
2 10
- I 70
- i 70
- I 35
1 130
1 30
- 60
- 70
- 70
- i 65
2! 10
- ! 70
1 70
- 60
1 ~
1 ,60
_ ' tío
1 75
- 70
- 70
- 30
-170
Jalins Oróos, London. Paris. Rome. St. Fetersbnrsli Hoidolbersr.
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of moAttn langiages.
JFVench Kiditioii». — ^
Qrammaire espaJj^nole par 8auer-Serrano. 6. Éd ii I
Ck>iTi^ ám thémM de la gimmm. eipa^ pt^ Saner-Serrano. 5. Éd. . . . , —
Petite gprammaire espagnole par Tanty. 2. Ed —
Leotores espagnoles par Arteaga |' 1
Petite grammaire Sliédoise par Fort | —
Qreelg Editions,
Kleine deniselie Spraohlehre fOr Griechen yon Maltes . , .
Deutsche Oesprftclie mr Grieohen von Maltes
Kleine englisehe Sprachlelire für Griechen von Deffner . . .
Ita.lia>ii ISditioiiLS,
Grammatica firancese di Motti. 3. £d
Chiave d«Ua grammatica firancese di Motti. 2. Ed
Grammatica elementare francese di Sauer-Motti. 4. Ed. . . .
Letture francesi di Le Boucher
Grammatica del Greco volgare di Palumbo
Grammatica inglese di Pavia. 6. Ed.
Cbiave della grammatica inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed
Grammatica elementare inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed
Letture inglesi di Le Boucher
Grammatica elementare portog^hese di Palumbo
Grammatica mssa di Motti
Chiave della grammatica masa di Motti
Grammatica Bpag:niiola di Pavia. 3. Ed
Chiave della Grammatica spagnnola di Pavia. 2. Ed
Grammatica elementare spagnuola di Pavia. 3. Ed.
Grammatica elementare «védese di Pereira
Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 8. Ed
Chiave della Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 4. Ed
Grammatica elementare tedesca di Otto. 6. Ed
Letture tedesche di Otto. 5. Ed
Antología tedesca di Verdaro
Conversazioni tedesche di Motti. 2. Ed
Avviamento al trad, dal ted. in ital. di Lardelli. 5. Ed. . . .
JOntcli Editions,
Kleine fingelselie Spraakkunst door Coster
Kleine Fransche Spraakkunst door Welbergen
Kleine filoogdllitselie Grammatica door Schwippei-t. 2. Dr. .
Kleine ISpaanselie Spraakkunst door van Haaff
Sleutel bij de kleine Spaansche Spraakkunst door van Haaff
FoUshi Edition,
Kleine dentselie Sprachlehre für Polen von Paulus ....
Foytng-nese Editions.
1
70
05
85
75
70
I ,60
— 60
— 70
-'70
1,30
— 1 60
-70
-,70
105
Grammatica alienta por Otto-Prév6t. 3. Ed
Chave da Grammatica allemá por Otto-Prév6t. 2. Ed
Grammatica elementar allema por Prévót-Pereira. 3. Ed.
•bó^Ie
—
,65
160
'70
—
:70
—
'70
-
170
,30
—
|70
1
40
60
70
Julius Oróos. London. Paris. Rome. St. Petersburgli. Heidelberg.
Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the study of modern languages.
Portuguese Editiong»
Livro de leitura inglesa por Le Boucher
Grammatioa francesa por Tanty-Yasconcellos. 2. Ed. ...
Chave da OrammatiGa francesa por Tanty-Yasconoellos. 2. Ed
Livro de leitura francesa por Le Boucher
Grammatica elementar sueca por Pereira
R>oixiiia.ii Ed-itions,
Gramática irermana de Leist
Cheea gramancií germane de Leist
Elemente de gramaticS germana de Leist. 2. Ed
Gonversatíun! germane de Leist. 2. Ed
Gramática francesa de Leist
Cheea gramaticil francese de Leist
Elemente de gramática francesS. de Leist. 2. Ed
Gonversa^iiml francese de Leist. 3. Ed
Itiissia.li Editions*
£n^lish Grammar for Russians by Hauff
Key to the English Grammar for Russians hy Hauff
French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel
Key to the French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel
German Grammar for Russians by Hauff
Key to the German Grammar for Russians by Hauff
Italian Grammar for Russians by Mo2ejko
Key to the Italian Grammar for Russians by Mozejko
Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Issacovitch . . .
Key to the Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Issacovitch ....
Seyvia.li EkJitions^
Elementary English Grammar for Servians by Petrovitch . .
Petite grammaire firan^aise pour Serbes par Petrovitch . . .
Svredislr Edition,
Kleine dentsclie Sprachlehre fur Schweden von Walter . . .
Spaiiodsh. Editions,
Gramática alemana por Ruppert. 3. Ed
Clave de la Gram&tica alemana por Ruppert. 3. Ed
Gramática elemental alemana por Otto-Ruppert. 7. Ed
Gramática in|^lesa por Pavia. 2. Ed
Clave de la Gram&tica Inglesa por Pavia. 2. Ed
Gramática sucinta de la lengua inglesa por Pavia. 5. Ed. . . .
Libro de lectura inglesa por Le Boucher
Gramática francesa por Tanty-Arteaga. 2. Ed
Clave de la Gramática francesa por Tanty-Arteaga. 2. Ed
Gramática sucinta de la lengua francesa por Otto. 5. Ed. . . .
Libro de lectura francesa por Le Boucher
Gramática sucinta de la lengua italiana por Pavia. 4. Ed. .
Gramática sucinta de la lengua rusa por d'Arcais
OlaYe de la Gramática sucinta rusa por d' Arcáis
Tchecli Eclition,
Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre fílr Tschechen von*¿8étee9^^ .
Jnlius 8rooa, London. París. Koiue. 8t. Potorshnrch. Holdellwn-.
Method Oaspey-Otto-Sauer
for the stnij of nodera languages.
Tixrfeish EkJitions,
KleÍDe deutsehe Spraclilehre fur Türken yion Wely Bey-BoUand
Deutflches Lesebnoh fllr Türken von Wely Bey-Bolland
Conyersation-Books by Connor
in two languages:
English-German. 2. Ed.
English-French. 2. Ed.
English-Italian. 2. Ed.
English-Rnssian . . .
English-Spanish . . .
English-Swedish . . .
Deiitsch-D9,nÍ8ch . . .
Deutsch-PranzSsisch. 2. Ed. . —
Dentsch-Italienisch . .
Deut8ch-Niederl9,ndisch
Deutsch-Portugiesisch .
in three languages:
English-German-French. 14. Ed
in four languages:
English-German-French-Italian. 2. Ed. . .
—
6011
-1601,
60
1
05
—
60
—
70
70
—
70
¡~ 70
— 70
—
7011
Dentsoh-Eom&nisch
Dentsch-Rossisch .
Deutsch-Schwedisch
Dentsoh-Spanisch .
Deutsch-Türkisch .
Fran^ais-Italien .
Fran9aÍ8-E8pagnol
Fran9aÍ8-PortngaÍ8
Fran9ais-Ra8se .
Italiano-Spagnuolo
Oerman Language by Becker •
I§(paiii8h Commercial Correspondence by Arteaga y Pereira
D&nisclier Sprachführer von Forchhammer
Bichtige Aussprache d. Mosterdeutschen v. Dr. E. Dannheisser, br*
£iigli8Che Handelskorrespondenz v. Arendt. 2. Anfl •
Karze franzdsische Grammatik von H. Range
Franz. SprachL f. Handelssch. v. Dannheisser, Küffher u. Offenmüller
Italienische kaufm. Eorresp.-Gramm. v. Dannheisser u. Sauer. 2. Anfl.
Schlttssel dazu v. DanDheisser
II correttore italiano von Mayo-Gelati
Anleitun^ z. deutselieii, franz., eiia:!. u. ital. GeschEffcs-
bnefen von Oberholzer u. Osmond, br
IS^paniselie Handelskorrespondenz von Arteaga y Pereira . . .
Kleines spanisches Lesebuch f. Handelsschalen v. Ferrades-Langeheldt
Langue allemande par Becker
Le danois parlé par Forchhammer
Correspondance commerciale espaa^nole par Arteaga y Pereira .
Lengua alemana de Becker
The Publisher is untiringly engaged in extending the range of educa-
tional works issuing from his Press. A number of new books are now in
course of preparation.
The new editions are constantly improved and kept up to date.
Digitized by VjOO^IC
Julius ftrooi, London. Parlg. Borne. St. Peteraburgh. Heidellrarg.
I
THE BORROWER WILL BE CHARGED
AN OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS NOT
RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON OR
BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED
BELOW. NON-RECEIPT OF OVERDUE
NOTICES^ DOES NOT EXEMPT THE
BORROWER FROM OJ^DUE FEES.
^
1^
%'
'>'.*^^
<i,^>-
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11